Ford Escape 2013 El manual del propietario

Marca: Ford

Modelo: Escape 2013

Categoría: Carros

Tipo: El manual del propietario

Introduction

About This Manual...........................................7

Symbols Glossary.............................................7

Data Recording..................................................9

California Proposition 65.............................10

Perchlorate........................................................10

Ford Credit..........................................................11

Replacement Parts

Recommendation........................................11

Special Notices.................................................11

Mobile Communications

Equipment.....................................................12

Export Unique Options..................................13

Child Safety

General Information.......................................14

Child Seats.........................................................16

Child Seat Positioning...................................16

Booster Seats....................................................17

Installing Child Seats.....................................19

Child Safety Locks.........................................24

Safety Belts

Principle of Operation..................................26

Fastening the Safety Belts..........................27

Safety Belt Height Adjustment................30

Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator

Chime.............................................................30

Safety Belt Minder..........................................31

Child Restraint and Safety Belt

Maintenance................................................33

Personal Safety System™

Personal Safety System™..........................34

Supplementary Restraints

System

Principle of Operation..................................35

Driver and Passenger Airbags...................36

Knee Airbag.......................................................37

Front Passenger Sensing System.............37

Side Airbags.....................................................40

Safety Canopy®..............................................41

Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator........42

Airbag Disposal...............................................43

Keys and Remote Controls

Principle of Operation..................................44

General Information on Radio

Frequencies..................................................44

Remote Control..............................................44

Replacing a Lost Key or Remote

Control...........................................................48

MyKey®

Principle of Operation..................................49

Creating a MyKey...........................................49

Clearing All MyKeys.......................................50

Checking MyKey System Status..............50

Using MyKey With Remote Start

Systems.........................................................50

MyKey Troubleshooting................................51

Locks

Locking and Unlocking.................................54

Manual Liftgate...............................................57

Power Liftgate..................................................57

Keyless Entry...................................................60

Security

Passive Anti-Theft System.........................62

Anti-Theft Alarm............................................63

Steering Wheel

Adjusting the Steering Wheel...................64

Audio Control..................................................64

Voice Control...................................................66

Cruise Control.................................................66

Information Display Control......................66

Table of Contents

Wipers and Washers

Windshield Wipers.........................................67

Autowipers........................................................67

Windshield Washers.....................................68

Rear Window Wiper and Washers..........69

Lighting

Lighting Control..............................................70

Autolamps........................................................70

Instrument Lighting Dimmer.......................71

Headlamp Exit Delay......................................71

Daytime Running Lamps..............................71

Front Fog Lamps.............................................72

Direction Indicators........................................72

Interior Lamps..................................................72

Ambient Lighting............................................73

Windows and Mirrors

Power Windows..............................................74

Exterior Mirrors.................................................75

Interior Mirror....................................................76

Sun Visors..........................................................77

Moonroof............................................................77

Instrument Cluster

Gauges................................................................79

Warning Lamps and Indicators................80

Audible Warnings and Indicators.............83

Information Displays

General Information.....................................84

Trip Computer.................................................86

Information Messages..................................87

Audio System

General Information......................................97

Audio unit - Vehicles With:

AM/FM/CD...................................................98

Audio unit - Vehicles With:

AM/FM/CD/SYNC...................................100

Audio unit - Vehicles With:

AM/FM/CD/Satellite

Radio/SYNC...............................................102

Audio unit - Vehicles With: Premium

AM/FM/CD.................................................105

Audio unit - Vehicles With: Sony

AM/FM/CD.................................................106

Auxiliary Input Jack......................................109

USB Port...........................................................110

Media Hub........................................................110

Satellite Radio................................................110

Climate Control

Manual Climate Control..............................113

Automatic Climate Control........................114

Hints on Controlling the Interior

Climate..........................................................115

Heated Windows and Mirrors...................119

Cabin Air Filter................................................119

Remote Start..................................................119

Seats

Sitting in the Correct Position...................121

Head Restraints..............................................121

Manual Seats.................................................123

Power Seats....................................................124

Memory Function..........................................125

Rear Seats.......................................................126

Heated Seats..................................................127

Rear Seat Armrest........................................127

Universal Garage Door

Opener

Universal Garage Door Opener...............128

Auxiliary Power Points

Auxiliary Power Points................................132

Storage Compartments

Center Console..............................................134

Overhead Console........................................134

Table of Contents

Starting and Stopping the

Engine

General Information....................................135

Ignition Switch...............................................135

Keyless Starting.............................................135

Starting a Gasoline Engine........................137

Engine Block Heater....................................138

Fuel and Refueling

Safety Precautions......................................140

Fuel Quality......................................................141

Running Out of Fuel......................................141

Refueling..........................................................142

Emission Control System..........................143

Fuel Consumption........................................145

Transmission

Automatic Transmission............................147

Hill Start Assist..............................................149

Four-Wheel Drive

Using Four-Wheel Drive..............................151

Brakes

General Information....................................156

Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock

Brakes...........................................................156

Parking Brake..................................................157

Traction Control

Principle of Operation.................................158

Using Traction Control................................158

Stability Control

Principle of Operation.................................159

Using Stability Control...............................160

Parking Aids

Parking Aid.......................................................161

Active Park Assist.........................................163

Rear View Camera........................................167

Cruise Control

Principle of Operation.................................170

Using Cruise Control....................................170

Driving Aids

Blind Spot Monitor........................................171

Eco Mode.........................................................175

Steering............................................................176

Load Carrying

Rear Under Floor Storage...........................177

Luggage Covers..............................................177

Roof Racks and Load Carriers..................178

Load Limit........................................................179

Towing

Towing a Trailer.............................................188

Trailer Sway Control....................................188

Recommended Towing Weights............188

Essential Towing Checks..........................190

Towing Points.................................................191

Transporting the Vehicle............................192

Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels......192

Driving Hints

Breaking-In.....................................................194

Economical Driving......................................194

Driving Through Water...............................194

Floor Mats.......................................................195

Roadside Emergencies

Roadside Assistance...................................197

Hazard Warning Flashers..........................198

Fuel Cut-Off Switch....................................198

Jump-Starting the Vehicle........................198

Table of Contents

Customer Assistance

Getting the Services You Need...............201

In California (U.S. Only)............................202

The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto

Line Program (U.S. Only).....................203

Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration

Program (Canada Only).......................203

Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and

Canada.......................................................204

Ordering Additional Owner's

Literature....................................................205

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.

Only)............................................................205

Reporting Safety Defects (Canada

Only)............................................................206

Fuses

Changing a Fuse...........................................207

Fuse Specification Chart..........................208

Maintenance

General Information.....................................217

Opening and Closing the Hood................217

Under Hood Overview - 1.6L

EcoBoost®..................................................218

Under Hood Overview - 2.0L

EcoBoost®..................................................219

Under Hood Overview - 2.5L...................220

Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L

EcoBoost®..................................................221

Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.5L/2.0L

EcoBoost®..................................................221

Engine Oil Check...........................................221

Engine Coolant Check................................222

Automatic Transmission Fluid

Check............................................................225

Brake Fluid Check........................................225

Power Steering Fluid Check.....................225

Fuel Filter........................................................225

Washer Fluid Check....................................225

Changing the Vehicle Battery.................226

Checking the Wiper Blades......................227

Changing the Wiper Blades......................227

Changing the Engine Air Filter.................228

Adjusting the Headlamps.........................229

Removing a Headlamp...............................231

Changing a Bulb............................................231

Bulb Specification Chart...........................235

Vehicle Care

General Information...................................236

Cleaning Products.......................................236

Cleaning the Exterior..................................236

Repairing Minor Paint Damage...............237

Waxing..............................................................237

Cleaning the Engine....................................237

Cleaning the Windows and Wiper

Blades..........................................................238

Cleaning the Interior...................................238

Cleaning the Instrument Panel and

Instrument Cluster Lens.......................239

Cleaning Leather Seats.............................239

Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................240

Vehicle Storage............................................240

Wheels and Tires

General Information...................................243

Tire Care..........................................................245

Using Snow Chains.....................................256

Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........257

Changing a Road Wheel...........................260

Technical Specifications...........................265

Capacities and Specific-

ations

Engine Specifications.................................267

Motorcraft Parts...........................................267

Vehicle Identification Number...............269

Vehicle Certification Label.......................270

Transmission Code Designation............270

Technical Specifications............................271

Table of Contents

Accessories

Accessories....................................................274

Ford Extended Service Plan

(ESP)

Ford Extended Service Plan (ESP).......276

SYNC®

General Information...................................279

Using Voice Recognition............................281

Using SYNC® With Your Phone.............283

SYNC® Applications and Services.......295

Using SYNC® With Your Media

Player............................................................301

SYNC® Troubleshooting..........................308

MyFord Touch®

General Information....................................315

Menu.................................................................326

Entertainment...............................................332

Phone...............................................................352

Information....................................................358

Climate............................................................367

Navigation........................................................371

Appendices

End User License Agreement.................380

Scheduled Maintenance

Scheduled Maintenance..........................396

Table of Contents

The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of

continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time

without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a

retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.

Errors and omissions excepted.

Part Number: 20120308005357

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

Thank you for choosing Ford. We

recommend that you take some time to

get to know your vehicle by reading this

manual. The more that you know about it,

the greater the safety and pleasure you

will get from driving it.

WARNING

Always drive with due care and

attention when using and operating

the controls and features on your

vehicle.

Note: This manual describes product

features and options available throughout

the range, sometimes even before they are

generally available. It may describe options

not fitted to your vehicle.

Note: Some of the illustrations in this

manual may be used for different models,

so may appear different to your vehicle.

However, the essential information in the

illustrations is always correct.

Note: Always use and operate your vehicle

in line with all applicable laws and

regulations.

Note: Pass on this manual when selling

your vehicle. It is an integral part of the

vehicle.

Protecting the Environment

You must play your part in protecting the

environment. Correct vehicle usage and

the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning

and lubrication materials are significant

steps toward this aim.

SYMBOLS GLOSSARY

These are some of the symbols you may

see on your vehicle.

Safety alert

See Owner's Manual

Anti-lock braking system

Avoid smoking, flames or sparks

Battery

Battery acid

Brake fluid - non petroleum

based

Brake system

Cabin air filter

Check fuel cap

Child safety door lock or unlock

Child seat lower anchor

Child seat tether anchor

E71340

Cruise control

Introduction

Do not open when hot

Engine air filter

Engine coolant

Engine coolant temperature

Engine oil

Explosive gas

Fan warning

Fasten safety belt

Front airbag

Front fog lamps

Fuel pump reset

Fuse compartment

Hazard warning flashers

Heated rear window

E91392

Heated windshield

Interior luggage compartment

release

Jack

Lighting control

Low tire pressure warning

Maintain correct fluid level

Panic alarm

E139213

Parking aid

Parking brake

Power steering fluid

Power windows front/rear

Power window lockout

Service engine soon

Side airbag

Stability control

Introduction

Windshield wash and wipe

DATA RECORDING

Service Data Recording

Service data recorders in your vehicle are

capable of collecting and storing

diagnostic information about your vehicle.

This potentially includes information about

the performance or status of various

systems and modules in the vehicle, such

as engine, throttle, steering or brake

systems. In order to properly diagnose and

service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company,

Ford of Canada, and service and repair

facilities may access or share among them

vehicle diagnostic information received

through a direct connection to your vehicle

when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.

For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose

to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report,

you consent that certain diagnostic

information may also be accessed

electronically by Ford Motor Company and

Ford authorized service facilities, and that

the diagnostic information may be used

for any purpose. See SYNC® (page 279).

Event Data Recording

This vehicle is equipped with an event

data recorder. The main purpose of an

event data recorder is to record, in

certain crash or near crash-like

situations, such as an airbag

deployment or hitting a road obstacle;

this data will assist in understanding

how a vehicle’s systems performed.

The event data recorder is designed to

record data related to vehicle dynamics

and safety systems for a short period

of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The event data recorder in this vehicle

is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle

were operating;

• Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts were

buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was

depressing the accelerator and/or

the brake pedal; and

• How fast the vehicle was travelling;

and

• Where the driver was positioning

the steering wheel.

This data can help provide a better

understanding of the circumstances in

which crashes and injuries occur.

Note: Event data recorder data is

recorded by your vehicle only if a

non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data

is recorded by the event data recorder

under normal driving conditions and no

personal data or information (e.g., name,

gender, age, and crash location) is

recorded (see limitations regarding 911

Assist and Traffic, directions and

Information privacy below). However,

parties, such as law enforcement, could

combine the event data recorder data

with the type of personally identifying

data routinely acquired during a crash

investigation.

Introduction

To read data recorded by an event data

recorder, special equipment is required,

and access to the vehicle or the event

data recorder is needed. In addition to

the vehicle manufacturer, other

parties, such as law enforcement, that

have such special equipment, can read

the information if they have access to

the vehicle or the event data recorder.

Ford Motor Company and Ford of

Canada do not access event data

recorder information without obtaining

consent, unless pursuant to court order

or where required by law enforcement,

other government authorities or other

third parties acting with lawful

authority. Other parties may seek to

access the information independently

of Ford Motor Company and Ford of

Canada.

Note: Including to the extent that any

law pertaining to Event Data Recorders

applies to SYNC or its features, please

note the following: Once 911 Assist (if

equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist

may, through any paired and connected

cell phone, disclose to emergency

services that the vehicle has been in a

crash involving the deployment of an

airbag or, in certain vehicles, the

activation of the fuel pump shut-off.

Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist

may also be capable of being used to

electronically or verbally provide to 911

operators the vehicle location (such as

latitude and longitude), and/or other

details about the vehicle or crash or

personal information about the

occupants to assist 911 operators to

provide the most appropriate emergency

services. If you do not want to disclose

this information, do not activate the 911

Assist feature. See SYNC® (page 279).

Additionally, when you connect to

Traffic, Directions and Information (if

equipped, U.S. only), the service uses

GPS technology and advanced vehicle

sensors to collect the vehicle’ s current

location, travel direction, and speed

(“vehicle travel information”), only to

help provide you with the directions,

traffic reports, or business searches

that you request. If you do not want

Ford or its vendors to receive this

information, do not activate the

service. Ford Motor Company and the

vendors it uses to provide you with this

information do not store your vehicle

travel information. For more

information, see Traffic, Directions and

Information, Terms and Conditions.

See SYNC® (page 279).

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Some constituents of engine

exhaust, certain vehicle components,

certain fluids contained in vehicles

and certain products of component wear

contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive harm.

PERCHLORATE

Certain components in your vehicle such

as airbag modules, safety belt

pretensioners and remote control batteries

may contain perchlorate material. Special

handling may apply for service or vehicle

end of life disposal. See

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

for more information.

Introduction

FORD CREDIT

(U.S. Only)

Ford Credit offers a full range of financing

and lease plans to help you acquire your

vehicle. If you have financed or leased your

vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for

your business.

For your convenience we offer a number

of ways to contact us, as well as help

manage your account.

Phone: 1-800-727-7000

For more information regarding Ford Credit,

as well as access Account Manager, please

go to www.fordcredit.com.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

RECOMMENDATION

Your vehicle has been built to the highest

standards using quality parts. We

recommend that you demand the use of

genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts

whenever your vehicle requires scheduled

maintenance or repair. You can clearly

identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts

by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or

Motorcraft branding on the parts or their

packaging.

Scheduled Maintenance and

Mechanical Repairs

One of the best ways for you to make sure

that your vehicle provides years of service

is to have it maintained in line with our

recommendations using parts that

conform to the specifications detailed in

this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and

Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these

specifications.

Collision Repairs

We hope that you never experience a

collision but, accidents do happen. Genuine

Ford replacement collision parts meet our

stringent requirements for fit, finish,

structural integrity, corrosion protection

and dent resistance. During vehicle

development we validate these parts

deliver the intended level of protection as

a whole system. A great way to know for

sure you are getting this level of protection

is to use genuine Ford replacement

collision parts.

Warranty on Replacement Parts

Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement

parts are the only replacement parts that

benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage

caused to your vehicle as a result of the

failure of non-Ford parts may not be

covered by the Ford Warranty. For

additional information, refer to the terms

and conditions of the Ford Warranty.

SPECIAL NOTICES

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

For a detailed description of what is

covered and what is not covered by your

vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty,

refer to the Warranty Manual that is

provided to you along with your Owner’s

Manual.

Special Instructions

For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted

with sophisticated electronic controls.

WARNINGS

Failure to follow the specific

warnings and instructions could

result in personal injury. See

Supplementary Restraints System

(page 35).

Introduction

WARNINGS

Front seat mounted rear-facing child

or infant seats should NEVER be

placed in front of an active

passenger airbag.

Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks

and Utility Type Vehicles

WARNING

Utility vehicles have a significantly

higher rollover rate than other types

of vehicles.

Before you drive your vehicle, please read

this Owner’s Guide carefully. Your vehicle

is not a passenger car. As with other

vehicles of this type, failure to operate this

vehicle correctly may result in loss of

vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal

injury or death.

Using Your Vehicle With a

Snowplow

Do not use this vehicle for

snowplowing.

Your vehicle is not equipped with a

snowplowing package.

Using Your Vehicle as an

Ambulance

Do not use this vehicle as an

ambulance.

Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford

Ambulance Preparation Package.

MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS

EQUIPMENT

Using mobile communications equipment

is becoming increasingly important in the

conduct of business and personal affairs.

However, you must not compromise your

own or others’ safety when using such

equipment. Mobile communications can

enhance personal safety and security when

appropriately used, particularly in

emergency situations. Safety must be

paramount when using mobile

communications equipment to avoid

negating these benefits. Mobile

communication equipment includes, but

is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,

portable email devices, text messaging

devices and portable two-way radios.

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in

loss of vehicle control, accident and

injury. We strongly recommend that

you use extreme caution when using any

device or feature that may take your focus

off the road. Your primary responsibility is

the safe operation of your vehicle. We

recommend against the use of any

handheld device while driving and that you

comply with all applicable laws.

Introduction

EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS

For your particular global region, your

vehicle may be equipped with features and

options that are different from the features

and options that are described in this

Owner’s Manual. A market unique

supplement may be supplied that

complements this book. By referring to the

market unique supplement, if provided,

you can properly identify those features,

recommendations and specifications that

are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s

Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and

Canadian Markets. Features or equipment

listed as standard may be different on units

built for Export. Refer to this Owner’s

Manual for all other required

information and warnings.

Introduction

GENERAL INFORMATION

See the following sections for directions

on how to properly use safety restraints

for children.

WARNINGS

Always make sure your child is

secured properly in a device that is

appropriate for their height, age and

weight. Child safety restraints must be

purchased separately from the vehicle.

Failure to follow these instructions and

guidelines may result in an increased risk

of serious injury or death to your child.

All children are shaped differently.

The recommendations for safety

restraints are based on probable

child height, age and weight thresholds

from National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) and other safety

organizations, or are the minimum

WARNINGS

requirements of law. Ford recommends

checking with a NHTSA Certified Child

Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and

consult your pediatrician to make sure your

child seat is appropriate for your child, and

is compatible with and properly installed

in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting

station and CPST, contact the NHTSA toll

free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the internet

at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada,

check with your local St. John Ambulance

office for referral to a CPST or for further

information, contact your provincial

ministry of transportation, your local St.

John Ambulance office at

http://www.sfa.ca, or Transport Canada

at 1-800-333-0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca).

Failure to properly restrain children in

safety seats made especially for their

height, age, and weight may result in an

increased risk of serious injury or death to

your child.

Child Safety

Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children

Recommended restraint

type

Child size, height, weight, or ageChild

Use a child safety seat

(sometimes called an

infant carrier, convertible

seat, or toddler seat).

Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less

(generally age four or younger).

Infants or

toddlers

Use a belt-positioning

booster seat.

Children who have outgrown or no longer

properly fit in a child safety seat (gener-

ally children who are less than 4 feet 9

inches (1.45 meters) tall, are greater than

age four (4) and less than age twelve

(12), and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80

lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg)

if recommended by your child restraint

manufacturer).

Small children

Use a vehicle safety belt

having the lap belt snug

and low across the hips,

shoulder belt centered

across the shoulder and

chest, and seatback

upright.

Children who have outgrown or no longer

properly fit in a belt-positioning booster

seat (generally children who are at least

4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall or

greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45

kg) if recommended by child restraint

manufacturer).

Larger children

Child Safety

• You are required by law to properly use

safety seats for infants and toddlers in

the U.S. and Canada.

• Many states and provinces require that

small children use approved booster

seats until they reach age eight, a

height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)

tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).

Check your local and state or provincial

laws for specific requirements

regarding the safety of children in your

vehicle.

• When possible, always properly

restrain children twelve (12) years of

age and under in a rear seating position

of your vehicle. Accident statistics

suggest that children are safer when

properly restrained in the rear seating

positions than in a front seating

position.

CHILD SEATS

E142594

Use a child safety seat (sometimes called

an infant carrier, convertible seat, or

toddler seat) for Infants, toddlers or

children weighing 40 pounds (18

kilograms) or less (generally age four or

younger)

CHILD SEAT POSITIONING

WARNINGS

Airbags can kill or injure a child in a

child seat. NEVER place a rear-facing

child seat in front of an active airbag.

If you must use a forward-facing child seat

in the front seat, move the vehicle seat all

the way back. When possible, all children

age 12 and under should be properly

restrained in a rear seating position. If all

children cannot be seated and restrained

properly in a rear seating position, properly

restrain the largest child in the front seat.

Always carefully follow the

instructions and warnings provided

by the manufacturer of any child

restraint to determine if the restraint device

is appropriate for your child's size, height,

weight, or age. Follow the child restraint

manufacturer's instructions and warnings

provided for installation and use in

conjunction with the instructions and

warnings provided by the vehicle

manufacturer. A safety seat that is

improperly installed or utilized, is

inappropriate for your child's height, age,

or weight or does not properly fit the child

may increase the risk of serious injury or

death.

Never let a passenger hold a child on

his or her lap while the vehicle is

moving. The passenger cannot

protect the child from injury in a collision,

which may result in serious injury or death.

Never use pillows, books, or towels

to boost a child. They can slide

around and increase the likelihood

of injury or death in a collision.

Always restrain an unoccupied child

seat or booster seat. These objects

may become projectiles in a collision

or sudden stop, which may increase the

risk of serious injury.

Child Safety

WARNINGS

Never place, or allow a child to place,

the shoulder belt under a child's arm

or behind the back because it

reduces the protection for the upper part

of the body and may increase the risk of

WARNINGS

injury or death in a collision.

Do not leave children, unreliable

adults, or pets unattended in your

vehicle.

Use any attachment method as indicated below by XChild

Weight

Restraint

Type

Safety belt

only

Safety belt

and LATCH

(lower

anchors

and top

tether

anchor)

Safety belt

and top

tether

anchor

LATCH

(lower

anchors

only)

LATCH

(lower

anchors

and top

tether

anchor)

XXUp to 48 lb

(21 kg)

Rear facing

child seat

XXXUp to 48 lb

(21 kg)

Forward

facing

child seat

XXOver 48 lb

(21 kg)

Forward

facing

child seat

Note: The child seat must rest tightly

against the vehicle seat. It may be necessary

to lift or remove the head restraint. See the

Seats chapter for information on head

restraints.

BOOSTER SEATS

WARNING

Never place, or allow a child to place,

the shoulder belt under a child's arm

or behind the back because it

reduces the protection for the upper part

of the body and may increase the risk of

injury or death in a collision.

Use a belt-positioning booster seat for

children who have outgrown or no longer

properly fit in a child safety seat (generally

children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches

(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four

(4) and less than age twelve (12), and

between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and

80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to

100 pounds (45 kilograms) if

recommended by your child restraint

manufacturer). Many state and provincial

laws require that children use approved

booster seats until they reach age eight, a

height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall,

or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).

Booster seats should be used until you can

answer YES to ALL of these questions

when seated without a booster seat:

Child Safety

E142595

• Can the child sit all the way back

against the vehicle seat back with

knees bent comfortably at the edge of

the seat cushion?

• Can the child sit without slouching?

• Does the lap belt rest low across the

hips?

• Is the shoulder belt centered on the

shoulder and chest?

• Can the child stay seated like this for

the whole trip?

Always use booster seats in conjunction

with the vehicle lap and shoulder belt.

Types of Booster Seats

E68924

• Backless booster seats

If your backless booster seat has a

removable shield, remove the shield. If a

vehicle seating position has a low seat

back or no head restraint, a backless

booster seat may place your child's head

(as measured at the tops of the ears)

above the top of the seat. In this case,

move the backless booster to another

seating position with a higher seat back or

head restraint and lap and shoulder belts,

or consider using a high back booster seat.

E70710

• High back booster seats

If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot

find a seating position that adequately

supports your child's head, a high back

booster seat would be a better choice.

Children and booster seats vary in size and

shape. Choose a booster that keeps the

lap belt low and snug across the hips,

never up across the stomach, and lets you

adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest

and rest snugly near the center of the

shoulder. The following drawings compare

the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt

uncomfortably close to the neck and a

shoulder belt that could slip off the

shoulder. The drawings also show how the

lap belt should be low and snug across the

child's hips.

Child Safety

E142596

E142597

If the booster seat slides on the vehicle

seat, placing a rubberized mesh sold as

shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat

may improve this condition. Do not

introduce any item thicker than this under

the booster seat. Check with the booster

seat manufacturer's instructions.

INSTALLING CHILD SEATS

Using LAP AND SHOULDER BELTS

WARNINGS

Airbags can kill or injure a child in a

child seat. NEVER place a rear-facing

child seat in front of an active airbag.

If you must use a forward-facing child seat

in the front seat, move the seat all the way

back.

WARNINGS

Children 12 and under should be

properly restrained in the rear seat

whenever possible.

Depending on where you secure a

child restraint, and depending on the

child restraint design, you may block

access to certain safety belt buckle

assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,

rendering those features potentially

unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants

should only use seating positions where

they are able to be properly restrained.

Child Safety

When installing a child safety seat with

combination lap and shoulder belts:

• Use the correct safety belt buckle for

that seating position.

• Insert the belt tongue into the proper

buckle until you hear a snap and feel it

latch. Make sure the tongue is securely

fastened in the buckle.

• Keep the buckle release button

pointing up and away from the safety

seat, with the tongue between the child

seat and the release button, to prevent

accidental unbuckling.

• Place the vehicle seat back in the

upright position.

• Put the safety belt in the automatic

locking mode. Refer to Step 5. This

vehicle does not require the use of a

locking clip.

Perform the following steps when

installing the child seat with combination

lap and shoulder belts:

Note: Although the child seat illustrated is

a forward facing child seat, the steps are

the same for installing a rear facing child

seat.

E142528

1. Position the child safety seat in a seat

with a combination lap and shoulder

belt.

E142529

2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and

then grasp the shoulder belt and lap

belt together.

E142530

3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt

portions together, route the tongue

through the child seat according to the

child seat manufacturer's instructions.

Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted.

E142531

Child Safety

4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper

buckle (the buckle closest to the

direction the tongue is coming from)

for that seating position until you hear

a snap and feel the latch engage. Make

sure the tongue is latched securely by

pulling on it.

E142875

5. To put the retractor in the automatic

locking mode, grasp the shoulder

portion of the belt and pull downward

until all of the belt is pulled out.

Note: The automatic locking mode is

available on the front passenger and rear

seats. This vehicle does not require the use

of a locking clip.

6. Allow the belt to retract to remove

slack. The belt will click as it retracts

to indicate it is in the automatic locking

mode.

7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor

to make sure the retractor is in the

automatic locking mode (you should

not be able to pull more belt out). If the

retractor is not locked, unbuckle the

belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.

E142533

8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.

Force the seat down with extra weight,

e.g., by pressing down or kneeling on

the child restraint while pulling up on

the shoulder belt in order to force slack

from the belt. This is necessary to

remove the remaining slack that will

exist once the additional weight of the

child is added to the child restraint. It

also helps to achieve the proper

snugness of the child seat to the

vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean

towards the buckle will additionally

help to remove remaining slack from

the belt.

9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat

is equipped).

E142534

Child Safety

10. Before placing the child in the seat,

forcibly move the seat forward and

back to make sure the seat is securely

held in place. To check this, grab the

seat at the belt path and attempt to

move it side to side and forward and

back. There should be no more than

1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of movement

for proper installation.

Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA

Certified Child Passenger Safety

Technician to make certain the child

restraint is properly installed. In Canada,

check with your local St. John Ambulance

office for referral to a Certified Passenger

Seat Technician.

Using Lower Anchors AND Tethers

FOR CHildren (LATCH)

WARNINGS

Never attach two child safety seats

to the same anchor. In a crash, one

anchor may not be strong enough to

hold two child safety seat attachments

and may break, causing serious injury or

death.

Depending on where you secure a

child restraint, and depending on the

child restraint design, you may block

access to certain safety belt buckle

assemblies or LATCH lower anchors,

rendering those features potentially

unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants

should only use seating positions where

they are able to be properly restrained.

The LATCH system is composed of three

vehicle anchor points: two (2) lower

anchors located where the vehicle seat

back and seat cushion meet (called the

seat bight) and one (1) top tether anchor

located behind that seating position.

LATCH compatible child safety seats have

two rigid or webbing mounted

attachments that connect to the two lower

anchors at the LATCH equipped seating

positions in your vehicle. This type of

attachment method eliminates the need

to use safety belts to attach the child seat,

however the safety belt can still be used

to attach the child seat. For forward-facing

child seats, the top tether strap must also

be attached to the proper top tether

anchor, if a top tether strap has been

provided with your child seat.

E142535

Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for

child seat installation at the seating

positions marked with the child seat

symbol.

E144054

Child Safety

The LATCH anchors are located at the rear

section of the rear seat between the

cushion and seatback below the symbols

as shown. Follow the child seat

manufacturer's instructions to properly

install a child seat with LATCH

attachments. Follow the instructions on

attaching child safety seats with tether

straps.

Attach LATCH lower attachments of the

child seat only to the anchors shown.

Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the

Outboard Seating Positions (Center

Seating Use)

WARNING

The standardized spacing for LATCH

lower anchors is 11 inches (28

centimeters) center to center. Do not

use LATCH lower anchors for the center

seating position unless the child seat

manufacturer's instructions permit and

specify using anchors spaced at least as

far apart as those in this vehicle.

The lower anchors at the center of the

second row rear seat are spaced 18 inches

(46 centimeters) apart. A child seat with

rigid LATCH attachments cannot be

installed at the center seating position.

LATCH compatible child seats (with

attachments on belt webbing) can only be

used at this seating position provided that

the child seat manufacturer's instructions

permit use with the anchor spacing stated.

Do not attach a child seat to any lower

anchor if an adjacent child seat is attached

to that anchor.

Each time you use the safety seat, check

that the seat is properly attached to the

lower anchors and tether anchor, if

applicable. Tug the child seat from side to

side and forward and back where it is

secured to the vehicle. The seat should

move less than one inch when you do this

for a proper installation.

If the safety seat is not anchored properly,

the risk of a child being injured in a crash

greatly increases.

Combining Safety Belt and LATCH

Lower Anchors for Attaching Child

Safety Seats

When used in combination, either the

safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors

may be attached first, provided a proper

installation is achieved. Attach the tether

strap afterward, if included with the child

seat.

Using Tether Straps

Many forward-facing child safety

seats include a tether strap

which extends from the back of

the child safety seat and hooks to an

anchoring point called the top tether

anchor. Tether straps are available as an

accessory for many older safety seats.

Contact the manufacturer of your child

seat for information about ordering a

tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether

strap if the tether strap on your safety seat

does not reach the appropriate top tether

anchor in the vehicle.

Once the child safety seat has been

installed using either the safety belt, the

lower anchors of the LATCH system, or

both, you can attach the top tether strap.

The tether strap anchors in your vehicle

are in the following positions (shown from

top view):

Child Safety

E142537

Perform the following steps to install a

child safety seat with tether anchors:

Note: If you install a child seat with rigid

LATCH attachments, do not tighten the

tether strap enough to lift the child seat off

the vehicle seat cushion when the child is

seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug

without lifting the front of the child seat.

Keeping the child seat just touching the

vehicle seat gives the best protection in a

severe crash.

1. Route the child safety seat tether strap

over the back of the seat. For outboard

seating positions, route the tether strap

under the head restraint and between

the head restraint posts. For the center

seating positions, route the tether strap

over the top of the head restraint. If

needed, the head restraints can also

be removed.

E142538

2. Locate the correct anchor on the back

panel of the rear seat for the selected

seating position. The anchors are

labeled with the tether strap symbol

and are partially covered by the gap

panel. Pull the panel back to fully

expose the anchors.

E142539

3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as

shown.

4. Tighten the child safety seat tether

strap according to the manufacturer's

instructions. If your child restraint

system is equipped with a tether strap,

and the child restraint manufacturer

recommends its use, Ford also

recommends its use.

CHILD SAFETY LOCKS

When these locks are set, the rear doors

cannot be opened from the inside.

Child Safety

E112197

The childproof locks are located on the

rear edge of each rear door and must be

set separately for each door.

• Driver side: turn counterclockwise to

lock and clockwise to unlock.

• Passenger side: turn clockwise to lock

and counterclockwise to unlock.

Child Safety

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGS

Always drive and ride with your

seatback upright and the lap belt

snug and low across the hips.

To reduce the risk of injury, make

sure children sit where they can be

properly restrained.

Never let a passenger hold a child on

his or her lap while the vehicle is

moving. The passenger cannot

protect the child from injury in a collision.

All occupants of the vehicle,

including the driver, should always

properly wear their safety belts, even

when an airbag supplemental restraint

system is provided.

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a

cargo area, inside or outside of a

vehicle. In a collision, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriously

injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride

in any area of your vehicle that is not

equipped with seats and safety belts. Be

sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat

and using a safety belt properly.

In a rollover crash, an unbelted

person is significantly more likely to

die than a person wearing a safety

belt.

Each seating position in your vehicle

has a specific safety belt assembly

which is made up of one buckle and

one tongue that are designed to be used

as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the

outside shoulder only. Never wear the

shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never

swing the safety belt around your neck over

the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single

belt for more than one person.

When possible, all children 12 years

old and under should be properly

restrained in a rear seating position.

WARNINGS

Safety belts and seats can become

hot in a vehicle that has been closed

up in sunny weather; they could burn

a small child. Check seat covers and

buckles before you place a child anywhere

near them.

Front and rear seat occupants,

including pregnant women, should

wear safety belts for optimum

protection in an accident.

All seating positions in this vehicle have

lap and shoulder safety belts. All

occupants of the vehicle should always

properly wear their safety belts, even when

an airbag supplemental restraint system

is provided.

The safety belt system consists of:

• Lap and shoulder safety belts.

• Shoulder safety belt with automatic

locking mode, (except driver safety

belt).

• Height adjuster at the front outboard

seating positions.

• Retractor and anchor pretensioner at

the front outboard seating positions.

• Belt tension sensor at the front

outboard passenger seating position.

• Safety belt warning light and chime.

• Crash sensors and monitoring system

with readiness indicator.

Safety Belts

The safety belt pretensioners are designed

to activate in frontal, near-frontal and side

collisions, and in rollovers. The safety belt

pretensioners on the retractor and anchor

at the front seating positions are designed

to tighten the safety belts firmly against

the occupant's body when activated. This

helps increase the effectiveness of the

safety belts. In frontal collisions, the safety

belt pretensioners can be activated alone

or, if the collision is of sufficient severity,

together with the front airbags.

FASTENING THE SAFETY

BELTS

The front outboard and rear safety

restraints in the vehicle are combination

lap and shoulder belts.

E142587

1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper

buckle (the buckle closest to the

direction the tongue is coming from)

until you hear a snap and feel it latch.

Make sure the tongue is securely

fastened in the buckle.

E142588

2. To unfasten, press the release button

and remove the tongue from the

buckle.

E142589

When in use, the rear safety belts should

be placed in the belt guides on the

outboard seatbacks.

Restraint of Pregnant Women

WARNING

Always ride and drive with your

seatback upright and the safety belt

properly fastened. The lap portion of

the safety belt should fit snug and be

positioned low across the hips. The

shoulder portion of the safety belt should

be positioned across the chest. Pregnant

women should also follow this practice.

See the following figure.

Safety Belts

E142590

Pregnant women should always wear their

safety belt. The lap belt portion of a

combination lap and shoulder belt should

be positioned low across the hips below

the belly and worn as tight as comfort will

allow. The shoulder belt should be

positioned to cross the middle of the

shoulder and the center of the chest.

Safety Belt Locking Modes

WARNINGS

After any vehicle collision, the safety

belt system at all passenger seating

positions must be checked by an

authorized dealer to verify that the

automatic locking retractor feature for

child seats is still functioning properly. In

addition, all safety belts should be checked

for proper function.

BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY

MUST BE REPLACED if the safety

belt assembly automatic locking

retractor feature or any other safety belt

function is not operating properly when

checked by an authorized dealer. Failure

to replace the belt and retractor assembly

could increase the risk of injury in collisions.

All safety restraints in the vehicle are

combination lap and shoulder belts. The

driver safety belt has the first type of

locking mode, and the front outboard

passenger and rear seat safety belts have

both types of locking modes described as

follows:

Vehicle Sensitive Mode

This is the normal retractor mode, which

allows free shoulder belt length

adjustment to your movements and

locking in response to vehicle movement.

For example, if the driver brakes suddenly

or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle

receives an impact of approximately 5 mph

(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety

belts will lock to help reduce forward

movement of the driver and passengers.

In addition, the retractor is designed to lock

if the webbing is pulled out too quickly. If

this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and

pull webbing out again in a slow and

controlled manner.

Automatic Locking Mode

In this mode, the shoulder belt is

automatically pre-locked. The belt will still

retract to remove any slack in the shoulder

belt. The automatic locking mode is not

available on the driver safety belt.

When to Use the Automatic Locking

Mode

This mode should be used any time a child

safety seat, except a booster, is installed

in passenger front or rear seating positions.

Children 12 years old and under should be

properly restrained in a rear seating

position whenever possible. See Child

Safety (page 14).

Safety Belts

How to Use the Automatic Locking

Mode

E142591

1. Buckle the combination lap and

shoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull

downward until the entire belt is pulled

out.

Allow the belt to retract. As the belt

retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This

indicates the safety belt is now in the

automatic locking mode.

How to Disengage the Automatic

Locking Mode

Disconnect the combination lap and

shoulder belt and allow it to retract

completely to disengage the automatic

locking mode and activate the vehicle

sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

How to Extract Safety Belts in the

Rear Outboard Positions

Safety belts in the rear outboard positions

can lock if the seat back is returned firmly

to its upright position. The safety belts can

be unlocked using the following

procedures.

For vehicles where the rear seats recline:

1. Recline the seat to its full rear recline

position. See Safety Belts (page 26).

2. The safety belt should then unlock.

3. Return the seat back to its desired

upright position.

For vehicles with rear seats that do not

recline or are locked with the seat in its full

rear recline position:

1. Grasp the safety belt webbing at the

top of the seat back.

2. Pull the safety belt webbing forward,

firmly.

3. After pulling the safety belt forward,

allow the safety belt to feed back into

the safety belt retractor as much as

possible. If necessary, press the seat

back down to allow the safety belt

webbing to retract further.

4. The safety belt should then unlock.

5. If the safety belt does not unlock,

repeat steps 1-3.

Safety Belt Extension Assembly

WARNING

Position the safety belt height

adjusters so that the belt rests

across the middle of your shoulder.

Failure to adjust the safety belt properly

could reduce the effectiveness of the

safety belt and increase the risk of injury in

a collision.

If the safety belt is too short when fully

extended, a safety belt extension assembly

can be obtained from an authorized dealer.

Use only extensions manufactured by the

same supplier as the safety belt.

Manufacturer identification is located at

the end of the webbing on the label. Also,

use the safety belt extension only if the

safety belt is too short for you when fully

extended.

Safety Belts

SAFETY BELT HEIGHT

ADJUSTMENT

WARNING

Position the safety belt height

adjusters so that the belt rests

across the middle of your shoulder.

Failure to adjust the safety belt properly

could reduce the effectiveness of the

safety belt and increase the risk of injury in

a collision.

E87511

Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so

the belt rests across the middle of your

shoulder.

To adjust the shoulder belt height, squeeze

the button and slide the height adjuster up

or down. Release the button and pull down

on the height adjuster to make sure it is

locked in place.

SAFETY BELT WARNING LAMP

AND INDICATOR CHIME

This lamp illuminates and an

audible warning will sound if the

driver's safety belt has not been

fastened when the vehicle's ignition is

turned on.

Conditions of operation

Then...If...

The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-

2 minutes and the warning chime sounds

4-8 seconds.

The driver's safety belt is not buckled

before the ignition switch is turned to the

on position...

The safety belt warning light and warning

chime turn off.

The driver's safety belt is buckled while the

indicator light is illuminated and the

warning chime is sounding...

The safety belt warning light and indicator

chime remain off.

The driver's safety belt is buckled before

the ignition switch is turned to the on posi-

tion...

Safety Belts

SAFETY BELT MINDER

Belt-Minder®

This feature supplements the safety belt

warning function by providing additional

reminders by intermittently sounding a

chime and illuminating the safety belt

warning light when the driver's or front

passenger's seat is occupied and the

safety belt is unbuckled.

The system uses information from the

front passenger sensing system to

determine if a front seat passenger is

present and therefore potentially in need

of a warning. To avoid activating the

Belt-Minder feature for objects placed in

the front passenger seat, warnings will only

be given to large front seat occupants as

determined by the front passenger sensing

system.

If the Belt-Minder warnings have expired

(warnings for approximately five minutes)

for one occupant (driver or front

passenger), the other occupant can still

activate the Belt-Minder feature.

Then...If...

The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.The driver's and front passenger's safety

belts are buckled before the ignition switch

is turned to the on position or less than 1-2

minutes have elapsed since the ignition

switch has been turned to on...

The Belt-Minder feature is activated - the

safety belt warning light illuminates and

the warning chime sounds for six seconds

every 25 seconds, repeating for approxim-

ately five minutes or until the safety belts

are buckled.

The driver's or front passenger's safety belt

is not buckled when the vehicle has reached

at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1-2 minutes

have elapsed since the ignition switch has

been turned to on...

The Belt-Minder feature is activated - the

safety belt warning light illuminates and

the warning chime sounds for six seconds

every 25 seconds, repeating for approxim-

ately five minutes or until the safety belts

are buckled.

The driver's or front passenger's safety belt

becomes unbuckled for approximately one

minute while the vehicle is traveling at least

6 mph (9.7 km/h) and more than 1-2

minutes have elapsed since the ignition

switch has been turned to on...

Safety Belts

Deactivating and Activating the

Belt-Minder Feature

WARNING

While the system allows you to

deactivate it, this system is designed

to improve your chances of being

safely belted and surviving an accident.

We recommend you leave the system

activated for yourself and others who may

use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury,

do not deactivate or activate the system

while driving the vehicle.

Note: The driver and front passenger

warning are deactivated and activated

independently. When deactivating or

activating one seating position, do not

buckle the other position as this will

terminate the process.

Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before

proceeding with the deactivation or

activation programming procedure.

The system can be deactivated or

activated by performing the following

procedure:

Before following the procedure, make sure

that:

• The parking brake is set

• The gearshift is in position P

• The ignition is off

• The driver and front passenger safety

belts are unbuckled.

1. Turn the ignition on. DO NOT START

THE ENGINE.

2. Wait until the safety belt warning light

turns off (approximately one minute).

After Step 2, wait an additional five

seconds before proceeding with Step

3. Once Step 3 is started, the procedure

must be completed within 60 seconds.

3. For the seating position being disabled,

buckle then unbuckle the safety belt

four times at a moderate speed, ending

in the unbuckled state. After Step 3,

the safety belt warning light will turn

on.

4. While the safety belt warning light is

on, buckle and then unbuckle the

safety belt. After Step 4, the safety belt

warning light will flash three times for

confirmation.

• This will disable the feature for that

seating position if it is currently

enabled.

• This will enable the feature for that

seating position if it is currently

disabled.

Safety Belts

CHILD RESTRAINT AND

SAFETY BELT MAINTENANCE

Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child

safety seat systems periodically to make

sure they work properly and are not

damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child

seat safety belts to make sure there are no

nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary.

All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including

retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle

assemblies, buckle support assemblies

(slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt

height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder

belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child

safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and

attaching hardware, should be inspected

after a collision. Read the child restraint

manufacturer's instructions for additional

inspection and maintenance information

specific to the child restraint. Ford Motor

Company recommends that all safety belt

assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a

collision be replaced. However, if the

collision was minor and an authorized

dealer finds that the belts do not show

damage and continue to operate properly,

they do not need to be replaced. Safety

belt assemblies not in use during a collision

should also be inspected and replaced if

either damage or improper operation is

noted.

Properly care for safety belts. See Vehicle

Care (page 236).

Safety Belts

The Personal Safety System provides an

improved overall level of frontal crash

protection to front seat occupants and is

designed to help further reduce the risk of

airbag-related injuries. The system is able

to analyze different occupant conditions

and crash severity before activating the

appropriate safety devices to help better

protect a range of occupants in a variety

of frontal crash situations.

Your vehicle's Personal Safety System

consists of:

• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag

supplemental restraints.

• Front outboard safety belts with

pretensioners, energy management

retractors (first row only), and safety

belt usage sensors.

• Driver’s seat position sensor.

• Front passenger sensing system.

• Passenger airbag off and on indicator

lamp.

• Front crash severity sensors.

• Restraints Control Module with impact

and safing sensors.

• Restraint system warning light and

backup tone.

• The electrical wiring for the airbags,

crash sensor(s), safety belt

pretensioners, front safety belt usage

sensors, driver seat position sensor,

front passenger sensing system, and

indicator lights.

How Does the Personal Safety

System Work?

The Personal Safety System can adapt the

deployment strategy of your vehicle’s

safety devices according to crash severity

and occupant conditions. A collection of

crash and occupant sensors provides

information to the Restraints Control

Module. During a crash, the Restraints

Control Module may activate the safety

belt pretensioners and may activate either

one or both stages of the dual-stage airbag

supplemental restraints based on crash

severity and occupant conditions.

Personal Safety System™

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGS

Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly or

gently, and the risk of injury from a

deploying airbag is the greatest close

to the trim covering the airbag module.

All occupants of the vehicle,

including the driver, should always

properly wear their safety belts, even

when an airbag supplemental restraint

system is provided.

Always transport children 12 years

old and under in the back seat and

always properly use appropriate

child restraints.

Never place your arm over the airbag

module as a deploying airbag can

result in serious arm fractures or

other injuries.

Airbags can kill or injure a child in a

child seat. NEVER place a rear-facing

child seat in front of an active airbag.

If you must use a forward-facing child seat

in the front seat, move the seat all the way

back.

Do not attempt to service, repair, or

modify the airbag supplemental

restraint systems or its fuses.

Contact your authorized dealer as soon as

possible.

Several airbag system components

get hot after inflation. Do not touch

them after inflation.

If the airbag has deployed, the airbag

will not function again and must be

replaced immediately. If the airbag

is not replaced, the unrepaired area will

increase the risk of injury in a collision.

All occupants of the vehicle,

including the driver, should always

properly wear their safety belts, even

when an air bag supplemental restraint

system is provided.

The airbags are a supplemental restraint

system and are designed to work with the

safety belts to help protect the driver and

right front passenger from certain upper

body injuries. Airbags DO NOT inflate

slowly; there is a risk of injury from a

deploying airbag.

Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a

cloud of harmless powdery residue if an

airbag deploys. This is normal.

The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly

upon activation. After airbag deployment,

it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery

residue or smell the burnt propellant. This

may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder

(to lubricate the bag) or sodium

compounds (e.g., baking soda) that result

from the combustion process that inflates

the airbag. Small amounts of sodium

hydroxide may be present which may

irritate the skin and eyes, but none of the

residue is toxic. While the system is

designed to help reduce serious injuries,

contact with a deploying airbag may also

cause abrasions or swelling. Temporary

hearing loss is also a possibility as a result

of the noise associated with a deploying

airbag. Because airbags must inflate

rapidly and with considerable force, there

is the risk of death or serious injuries such

as fractures, facial and eye injuries or

internal injuries, particularly to occupants

who are not properly restrained or are

otherwise out of position at the time of

airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely

important that occupants be properly

restrained as far away from the airbag

module as possible while maintaining

vehicle control.

Routine maintenance of the airbags is not

required.

Supplementary Restraints System

SOS POST-CRASH ALERT

SYSTEM

The system flashes the turn signal lamps

and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the

event of a serious impact that deploys an

airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety

Canopy) or the safety belt pretensioners.

The horn and lamps will turn off when:

• the hazard control button is pressed

• the panic button is pressed on the

remote entry transmitter, or

• the vehicle runs out of power.

DRIVER AND PASSENGER

AIRBAGS

WARNINGS

Never place your arm or any objects

over an airbag module. Placing your

arm over a deploying airbag can

result in serious arm fractures or other

injuries. Objects placed on or over the

airbag inflation area may cause those

objects to be propelled by the airbag into

your face and torso causing serious injury.

Airbags can kill or injure a child in a

child seat. Never place a rear-facing

child seat in front of an active airbag.

If you must use a forward-facing child seat

in the front seat, move the seat all the way

back.

E74302

The driver and front passenger airbags will

deploy during significant frontal and near

frontal collisions.

The driver and passenger front airbag

system consists of:

• Driver and passenger airbag modules.

• Front passenger sensing system.

• Crash sensors and monitoring system

with readiness indicator. See Crash

Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page

42).

Proper Driver and Front Passenger

Seating Adjustment

WARNING

National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA)

recommends a minimum distance

of at least 10 in. (25 cm) between an

occupant’s chest and the driver airbag

module.

Supplementary Restraints System

To properly position yourself away from

the airbag:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you

can while still reaching the pedals

comfortably.

• Recline the seat slightly (one or two

degrees) from the upright position.

After all occupants have adjusted their

seats and put on safety belts, it’s very

important that they continue to sit

properly. A properly seated occupant sits

upright, leaning against the seat back, and

centered on the seat cushion, with their

feet comfortably extended on the floor.

Sitting improperly can increase the chance

of injury in a crash event. For example, if

an occupant slouches, lies down, turns

sideways, sits forward, leans forward or

sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the

chance of injury during a crash is greatly

increased.

Children and Airbags

WARNING

Airbags can kill or injure a child in a

child seat. NEVER place a rear-facing

child seat in front of an active airbag.

If you must use a forward-facing child seat

in the front seat, move the seat all the way

back.

E142846

Children must always be properly

restrained. Accident statistics suggest that

children are safer when properly restrained

in the rear seating positions than in the

front seating position. Failure to follow

these instructions may increase the risk of

injury in a collision.

KNEE AIRBAG

The driver's side knee airbag is located

under the instrument panel. The system

works along with the driver's front airbag

to help reduce injury to the legs. When the

driver's airbag activates in a collision, the

knee airbag deploys from under the

instrument panel. As with front and side

airbags, it is important to be properly

seated and restrained to reduce the risk of

death or serious injury.

Make sure the knee airbag is

operating properly. See Crash

Sensors and Airbag Indicator

(page 42).

FRONT PASSENGER SENSING

SYSTEM

WARNINGS

Even with Advanced Restraints

Systems, children 12 and under

should be properly restrained in a

rear seating position.

Sitting improperly out of position or

with the seat back reclined too far

can take off weight from the seat

cushion and affect the decision of the front

passenger sensing system, resulting in

serious injury or death in a crash

Always sit upright against your seat

back, with your feet on the floor.

Supplementary Restraints System

WARNINGS

Any alteration or modification to the

front passenger seat may affect the

performance of the front passenger

sensing system.

This system works with sensors that are

part of the front passenger’s seat and

safety belt to detect the presence of a

properly–seated occupant and determine

if the front passenger’s frontal airbag

should be enabled (may inflate) or not.

E145987

The front passenger sensing system uses

a passenger airbag off indicator which will

illuminate and stay lit to remind you that

the front passenger frontal airbag is

disabled. The indicator lamp is located in

the center stack of the instrument panel.

Note: The passenger airbag off light will

illuminate for a short period of time when

the ignition is first turned on to confirm it is

functional.

The front passenger sensing system is

designed to disable (will not inflate) the

front passenger’s frontal airbag when the

front passenger seat is unoccupied, or a

rear facing infant seat, a forward-facing

child restraint, or a booster seat is

detected.

• When the front passenger sensing

system disables (will not inflate) the

front passenger frontal airbag, the

passenger airbag status indicator will

illuminate and stay lit to remind you

that the front passenger frontal airbag

is disabled.

• If the child restraint has been installed

and the passenger airbag status

indicator illuminates, then turn the

vehicle off, remove the child restraint

from the vehicle and reinstall the

restraint following the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions.

The front passenger sensing system is

designed to enable (may inflate) the front

passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the

system senses that a person of adult size

is sitting properly in the front passenger

seat.

• When the front passenger sensing

system enables the front passenger

frontal airbag (may inflate), the

passenger airbag status indicator will

not illuminate.

If a person of adult size is sitting in the front

passenger's seat, but the passenger airbag

status indicator lamp is lit, it is possible

that the person isn't sitting properly in the

seat. If this happens:

• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person

to place the seat back in the full upright

position.

• Have the person sit upright in the seat,

centered on the seat cushion, with the

person's legs comfortably extended.

• Restart the vehicle and have the person

remain in this position for about two

minutes. This will allow the system to

detect that person and enable the

passenger’s frontal airbag.

• If the passenger airbag status indicator

lamp remains lit even after this, the

person should be advised to ride in the

rear seat.

Supplementary Restraints System

Passenger AirbagPassenger Airbag Status

Indicator

Occupant

DisabledUnlitEmpty

DisabledLitChild

EnabledUnlitAdult

Note: When the passenger airbag status

indicator lamp is illuminated, the passenger

side airbag (seat mounted) may be disabled

to avoid the risk of airbag deployment

injuries.

After all occupants have adjusted their

seats and put on safety belts, it’s very

important that they continue to sit

properly. A properly seated occupant sits

upright, leaning against the seat back, and

centered on the seat cushion, with their

feet comfortably extended on the floor.

Sitting improperly can increase the chance

of injury in a crash event. For example, if

an occupant slouches, lies down, turns

sideways, sits forward, leans forward or

sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the

chance of injury during a crash is greatly

increased.

If you think that the status of the passenger

airbag off indicator lamp is incorrect, check

for the following:

• Objects lodged underneath the seat

• Objects between the seat cushion and

the center console (if equipped)

• Objects hanging off the seat back

• Objects stowed in the seat back map

pocket (if equipped)

• Objects placed on the occupant's lap

• Cargo interference with the seat

• Other passengers pushing or pulling on

the seat

• Rear passenger feet and knees resting

or pushing on the seat

The conditions listed above may cause the

weight of a properly seated occupant to

be incorrectly interpreted by the passenger

sensing system. The person in the front

passenger seat may appear heavier or

lighter due to the conditions described in

the list above.

To know if the front passenger

sensing system is operating

properly, See Crash Sensors

and Airbag Indicator (page 42).

If the airbag readiness lamp is lit, do

the following:

The driver or adult passengers should

check for any objects that may be lodged

underneath the front passenger seat or

cargo interfering with the seat.

If objects are lodged or cargo is interfering

with the seat; please take the following

steps to remove the obstruction:

• Pull the vehicle over.

• Turn the vehicle off.

• Driver or adult passengers should

check for any objects lodged

underneath the front passenger seat

or cargo interfering with the seat.

• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).

• Restart the vehicle.

Supplementary Restraints System

• Wait at least two minutes and verify

that the airbag readiness lamp is no

longer illuminated.

• If the airbag readiness lamp remains

illuminated, this may or may not be a

problem due to the front passenger

sensing system.

DO NOT attempt to repair or service the

system; take your vehicle immediately to

an authorized dealer.

If it is necessary to modify an advanced

front airbag system to accommodate a

person with disabilities, contact your

authorized dealer.

SIDE AIRBAGS

WARNINGS

Do not place objects or mount

equipment on or near the airbag

cover, on the side of the seatbacks

(of the front seats), or in front seat areas

that may come into contact with a

deploying airbag. Failure to follow these

instructions may increase the risk of

personal injury in the event of a collision.

Do not use accessory seat covers.

The use of accessory seat covers

may prevent the deployment of the

side airbags and increase the risk of injury

in an accident.

Do not lean your head on the door.

The side airbag could injure you as it

deploys from the side of the

seatback.

Do not attempt to service, repair, or

modify the airbag, its fuses or the

seat cover on a seat containing an

airbag. Contact your authorized dealer as

soon as possible.

WARNINGS

If the side airbag has deployed, the

airbag will not function again. The

side airbag system (including the

seat) must be inspected and serviced by

an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not

replaced, the unrepaired area will increase

the risk of injury in a collision.

The side airbags are fitted on the outboard

side of the seatbacks of the front seats. In

certain lateral collisions, the airbag on the

side affected by the collision will be

inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate

between the door panel and occupant to

further enhance the protection provided

occupants in side impact collisions.

E142848

The system consists of the following:

• A label or embossed side panel

indicating that side airbags are fitted

to your vehicle.

• Side airbags located inside the

seatback of the driver and front

passenger seatbacks.

• Front passenger sensing system

Crash sensors and monitoring

system with readiness indicator.

See Crash Sensors and Airbag

Indicator (page 42).

Supplementary Restraints System

Note: The passenger sensing system will

deactivate the passenger seat-mounted

side airbag if it detects an empty, unbuckled

passenger seat.

The design and development of the side

airbag system included recommended

testing procedures that were developed

by a group of automotive safety experts

known as the Side Airbag Technical

Working Group. These recommended

testing procedures help reduce the risk of

injuries related to the deployment of side

airbags.

SAFETY CANOPY®

WARNINGS

Do not place objects or mount

equipment on or near the headliner

at the siderail that may come into

contact with a deploying curtain airbag.

Failure to follow these instructions may

increase the risk of personal injury in the

event of a collision.

Do not lean your head on the door.

The curtain airbag could injure you

as it deploys from the headliner.

Do not attempt to service, repair, or

modify the curtain airbags, its fuses,

the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the

headliner on a vehicle containing curtain

airbags. Contact your authorized dealer as

soon as possible.

All occupants of the vehicle including

the driver should always wear their

safety belts even when an airbag

supplemental restraint system and curtain

airbag is provided.

To reduce risk of injury, do not

obstruct or place objects in the

deployment path of the curtain

airbag.

WARNINGS

If the curtain airbags have deployed,

the curtain airbags will not function

again. The curtain airbags (including

the A, B and C pillar trim and headliner)

must be inspected and serviced by an

authorized dealer. If the curtain airbag is

not replaced, the unrepaired area will

increase the risk of injury in a collision.

The Safety Canopy will deploy during

significant side collisions or when a certain

likelihood of a rollover event is detected

by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy

is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet

metal, behind the headliner, above each

row of seats. In certain lateral collisions or

rollover events, the Safety Canopy will be

activated, regardless of which seats are

occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed

to inflate between the side window area

and occupants to further enhance

protection provided in side impact

collisions and rollover events.

E75004

The system consists of the following:

• Safety canopy curtain airbags fitted

above the trim panels over the front

and rear side windows identified by a

label or wording on the headliner or

roof-pillar trim.

• A flexible headliner which opens above

the side doors to allow air curtain

deployment

Supplementary Restraints System

• The crash sensors and monitoring

system have a readiness indicator. See

Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator

(page 42).

Children 12 years old and under should

always be properly restrained in the second

or third row seats. The Safety Canopy will

not interfere with children restrained using

a properly installed child or booster seat

because it is designed to inflate downward

from the headliner above the doors along

the side window opening.

The design and development of the Safety

Canopy included recommended testing

procedures that were developed by a

group of automotive safety experts known

as the Side Airbag Technical Working

Group. These recommended testing

procedures help reduce the risk of injuries

related to the deployment of side airbags

(including the Safety Canopy).

CRASH SENSORS AND

AIRBAG INDICATOR

WARNING

Modifying or adding equipment to

the front end of the vehicle (including

frame, bumper, front end body

structure and tow hooks) may affect the

performance of the airbag system,

increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify

the front end of the vehicle.

The vehicle has a collection of crash and

occupant sensors which provide

information to the Restraints Control

Module which deploys (activates) the front

safety belt pretensioners, driver airbag,

passenger airbag, seat mounted side

airbags, and the Safety Canopy. Based on

the type of accident (frontal impact, side

impact or rollover) the restraints control

module will deploy the appropriate safety

devices.

The restraints control module also

monitors the readiness of the above safety

devices plus the crash and occupant

sensors. The readiness of the safety

system is indicated by a warning indicator

light in the instrument cluster or by a

backup tone if the warning light is not

working. Routine maintenance of the

airbag is not required.

A difficulty with the system is indicated by

one or more of the following:

• The readiness light will not illuminate

immediately after the ignition is turned

on.

• The readiness light will either flash or

stay lit.

• A series of five beeps will be heard. The

tone pattern will repeat periodically

until the problem, the light or both are

repaired.

If any of these things happen, even

intermittently, have the supplemental

restraint system serviced at an authorized

dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the

system may not function properly in the

event of a collision.

Supplementary Restraints System

The safety belt pretensioners and the

airbag supplemental restraint system is

designed to activate when the vehicle

sustains longitudinal or lateral deceleration

sufficient to cause the restraints control

module to deploy a safety device or when

a certain likelihood of a rollover event is

detected by the rollover sensor.

The fact that the safety belt pretensioners

or airbags did not activate for both front

seat occupants in a collision does not

mean that something is wrong with the

system. Rather, it means the restraints

control module determined the accident

conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.)

were not appropriate to activate these

safety devices.

• Front airbags are designed to activate

only in frontal and near-frontal

collisions (not rollovers, side impacts

or rear impacts) unless the collision

causes sufficient longitudinal

deceleration.

• The safety belt pretensioners and rear

inflatable safety belts are designed to

activate in frontal, near-frontal and

side collisions, and in rollovers.

• Side airbags are designed to inflate in

side-impact collisions, not rollovers,

rear impacts, frontal or near-frontal

collisions, unless the collision causes

sufficient lateral deceleration.

• The Safety Canopy is designed to

inflate in certain side impact collisions

or rollover events, not in rear impact,

frontal or near-frontal collisions, unless

the collision causes sufficient lateral

deceleration or rollover likelihood.

AIRBAG DISPOSAL

Contact your authorized dealer as soon as

possible. Airbags MUST BE disposed of by

qualified personnel.

Supplementary Restraints System

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

The remote control allows you to:

• remotely lock or unlock the vehicle

doors

• unlock the doors without actively using

a key or remote control (intelligent

access only)

• remotely open the power liftgate (if

equipped)

• remotely start or stop the engine (if

equipped)

• arm and disarm the anti-theft system

• activate the panic alarm.

GENERAL INFORMATION ON

RADIO FREQUENCIES

The remote control complies with part 15

of the FCC rules and with RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions: (1) This

device may not cause harmful interference,

and (2) This device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party responsible

for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

The typical operating range for your

transmitter is approximately 33 feet (10

meters). Vehicles with the remote start

feature will have a greater range. A

decrease in operating range could be

caused by:

• weather conditions

• nearby radio towers

• structures around the vehicle

• other vehicles parked next to your

vehicle.

Intelligent Access (If Equipped)

The system uses a radio frequency signal

to communicate with your vehicle and

authorize your vehicle to unlock when

commanded (either by touching the inside

of the front exterior door handle, by

activating the exterior luggage

compartment button, or a button on the

transmitter itself). If excessive radio

frequency interface is present in the area,

or if the transmitter battery is low, it may

be necessary to mechanically unlock your

door. The mechanical key blade in your

intelligent access key can be used to open

the driver’s door in this situation. See

Remote Control (page 44).

REMOTE CONTROL

Integrated Keyhead Transmitters

(If Equipped)

E142585

Your vehicle may be equipped with two

integrated keyhead transmitters. The key

blade is used to start the vehicle and

unlock or lock the driver’s door from

outside the vehicle. The transmitter portion

functions as the remote control.

Keys and Remote Controls

E138615

Note: Your vehicle’s keys were issued with

a security label that provides important

vehicle key cut information. Keep the label

in a safe place for future reference.

Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped)

Note: A three-button remote control will

operate similarly.

E138616

Your vehicle may be equipped with two

intelligent access keys which operate the

power locks and the remote start system.

The key must be in the vehicle to activate

the push button start system.

E142431

The intelligent access key also contains a

removable mechanical key blade that can

be used to unlock the driver door. Slide the

release on the back of the transmitter to

release the key blade, then pull the blade

out.

E138618

Note: Your vehicle’s back-up keys were

issued with a security tag that provides

important vehicle key cut information. Keep

the tag in a safe place for future reference.

Replacing the Battery

Note: Refer to local regulations when

disposing of transmitter batteries.

Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the

battery terminals or on the back surface of

the circuit board.

Note: Replacing the battery will not delete

the transmitter from the vehicle. The

transmitter should operate normally.

The remote control uses one coin-type

three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or

equivalent.

Keys and Remote Controls

Integrated Keyhead Transmitter

E138619

1. Twist a thin coin in the slot of the

transmitter near the key ring to remove

the battery cover.

2. Remove the old battery.

E138620

3. Insert the new battery. Refer to the

instructions inside the transmitter for

the correct orientation of the battery.

Press the battery down to make sure

it is fully in the housing.

4. Snap the battery cover back onto the

transmitter.

Intelligent Access Transmitter

1. Remove the backup key from the

transmitter.

E142432

2. Twist a thin coin in the slot hidden

behind the backup key slot to remove

the battery cover.

E138622

3. Remove the old battery.

4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the

instruction inside the transmitter for

the correct orientation of the battery.

Press the battery down to make sure

it is fully in the housing.

5. Snap the battery cover back onto the

transmitter and install the backup key.

Car Finder

E138623

Press the button twice within

three seconds. The horn will

chirp and the turn signals will

flash. It is recommended that this method

be used to locate your vehicle, rather than

using the panic alarm.

Keys and Remote Controls

Note: If locking was not successful or any

door or the liftgate is not closed, or if the

hood is not closed on vehicles equipped

with a perimeter alarm or remote start, the

horn will chirp twice and the lamps will not

flash.

Sounding a Panic Alarm

Note: The panic alarm will only operate

when the ignition is off.

E138624

Press the button to activate the

alarm. Press the button again or

turn the ignition on to deactivate.

Remote Start (If Equipped)

WARNING

To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use

remote start if your vehicle is parked

indoors or areas that are not well

ventilated.

Note: Do not use remote start if your vehicle

is low on fuel.

E138625

Your vehicle has remote start if

the transmitter has this button.

The remote start feature allows you to

start the engine from outside the vehicle.

The transmitter has an extended operating

range.

Vehicles with automatic climate control

can be configured to operate when the

vehicle is remote started. See Automatic

Climate Control (page 114).

Many states and provinces have

restrictions for the use of remote start.

Check your local and state or provincial

laws for specific requirements regarding

remote start systems.

The remote start system will not work if:

• the ignition is on

• the alarm system is triggered

• the feature has been disabled

• the hood is not closed

• two remote vehicle starts have already

been attempted within the last hour

• the vehicle is not in P (Park)

• the vehicle battery voltage is too low

• the service engine soon indicator was

on the last time the vehicle was driven.

Remote Starting the Engine

Note: Each button press must be done

within three seconds of each other. The

vehicle will not remote start if this sequence

is not followed and the horn will not chirp.

E138626

The label on your transmitter details the

starting procedure. To remote start the

engine:

1. Press the lock button to lock all the

doors.

2. Press the remote start button twice.

The exterior lamps will flash twice.

The horn will chirp if the system fails to

start, unless quiet start is on. Quiet start

will run the blower fan at a slower speed

to reduce noise. It can be switched on or

off in the information display. See General

Information (page 84).

Keys and Remote Controls

Note: If the vehicle has been remote started

and is equipped with an integrated keyhead

transmitter, you must turn the ignition on

before driving the vehicle. If equipped with

an intelligent access transmitter, you must

press the START/STOP button on the

instrument panel once while applying the

brake pedal before driving the vehicle.

The power windows will be inhibited during

the remote start and the radio will not turn

on automatically.

The parking lamps will remain on and the

engine will run for 5, 10, or 15 minutes,

depending on the setting.

Extending the Engine Run Time

Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the engine still

running to extend the run time for another

remote start duration. If you programmed

the duration to last 10 minutes, the second

10 minutes will be added. For example, if

the vehicle had been running from the first

remote start for five minutes, the engine

will continue to run now for a total of 20

minutes. You can only extend the remote

start once.

Wait at least five seconds before remote

starting after an engine shutdown. Only

two remote starts are allowed.

The vehicle must be started without

remote start then switched off or allow

one hour to pass before using remote start

again if additional remote starts are

desired.

Turning the Engine Off After Remote

Starting

E138625

Press the button once. The

parking lamps will turn off.

You may have to be closer to the

vehicle than when starting due to ground

reflection and the added noise of the

running engine.

You can disable or enable the remote start

system through the information display.

See General Information (page 84).

REPLACING A LOST KEY OR

REMOTE CONTROL

Replacement or additional keys or remote

controls can be purchased from your

authorized dealer. Your dealer can program

the transmitters to your vehicle or you may

be able to program them yourself. See

Passive Anti-Theft System (page 62).

Keys and Remote Controls

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

MyKey allows you to program keys with

restricted driving modes to promote good

driving habits. All but one of the keys

programmed to the vehicle can be

activated with these restricted modes. Any

keys that have not been programmed are

referred to as an "administrator key" or

"admin key" which can be used to:

• create a restricted key

• program optional MyKey settings

• clear all MyKey features altogether.

Once a key has been programmed you can

access the following information using the

information display control:

• How many admin keys and MyKeys are

programmed to the vehicle.

• The total distance the vehicle has been

driven with a MyKey.

For vehicles equipped with intelligent

access key (push button start), when both

a MyKey and an admin intelligent access

key (fob) are present, the admin fob will

be recognized by the vehicle to start the

engine.

Standard Settings

These settings cannot be changed.

• Belt-Minder®. This cannot be disabled

and the five-minute timer does not

expire. The audio system is muted

when MyKey Belt-Minder® is activated.

• Early low fuel. Warnings are displayed

in the information display control

followed by an audible tone when the

fuel tank is at one-eighth tank or less.

• Driver assist features, if equipped on

your vehicle, are forced on: Parking aid,

blind spot information system (BLIS®)

with cross traffic alert and the collision

warning system.

Optional Settings

These settings can be configured right after

a MyKey is first created or changed

afterword with an Admin key.

• Vehicle speed limit of 80 mph (130

km/h). Visual warnings are displayed

followed by an audible tone when

vehicle speed has reached 80 mph

(130 km/h).

• Vehicle speed warning of 45, 55 or 65

mph (75, 90, or 105 km/h). Visual

warnings are displayed followed by an

audible tone when the preselected

vehicle speed is exceeded.

• Audio system maximum volume of

45%. A message in the audio system

is displayed when attempting to

exceed the limited volume.

• AdvanceTrac®. The system cannot be

turned off when Always-on has been

set.

CREATING A MYKEY

Use the information display control to

create a MyKey:

1. Insert the key you want to program into

the ignition or, if the vehicle is equipped

with push button start, put the

intelligent access key in the backup

slot. Backup slot information is located

in a different chapter. See Starting

and Stopping the Engine (page 135).

2. Turn the ignition on.

3. Access the main menu on the

information display controls and select

Settings, then MyKey by pressing OK

or the > button.

4. Press OK to select Create.

5. When prompted, hold the OK button

until you see a message informing you

to label this key as a MyKey. The key

will be restricted at the next start.

MyKey®

The key is successfully programmed. Make

sure you label it so you can distinguish it

from the admin keys.

You can program optional settings for the

key(s). Refer to Programming/Changing

optional settings.

Vehicles equipped with remote start need

to follow a separate procedure. See Using

MyKey With Remote Start Systems

(page 50).

Programming/Changing Optional

Settings

All programmed keys can be cleared within

the same key cycle in which a key was

programmed, otherwise an admin key is

required to clear the keys. See Clearing

All MyKeys (page 50).

You can access the optional settings

through the information display control.

1. Turn the ignition on using an admin key.

2. Access the main menu and select

Settings, then MyKey.

3. Use the arrow buttons to get to an

optional feature.

4. Press OK or > to scroll through settings.

5. Press OK or > to make a selection.

CLEARING ALL MYKEYS

All programmed MyKeys can be cleared

within the same key cycle in which a MyKey

was created, otherwise an admin key is

required to clear the keys.

To clear all MyKeys (which removes all

restrictions and returns them to admin key

status), use the information display control

to do the following:

1. Access the main menu and select

Settings, then MyKey.

2. Scroll to Clear All and press the OK

button.

3. Hold the OK button until ALL MYKEYS

CLEARED is displayed.

CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM

STATUS

The information display control displays

information about keys programmed to

the vehicle:

• MYKEY MILES: Tracks mileage when

a restricted key is used. If mileage does

not accumulate as expected, then the

key is not being used by the intended

user. The only way to reset this to zero

is by resetting the keys. If the mileage

is lower than the last time you checked,

then the key system has been recently

reset.

• #MYKEY(S): Indicates how many

restricted keys are programmed to the

vehicle. Can also be used to detect

deletion of a restricted key.

• #ADMIN KEY(S): Indicates how

many admin keys are programmed to

the vehicle. Can also be used to detect

if an additional key has been

programmed to the vehicle.

USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE

START SYSTEMS

MyKey is NOT compatible with

non-Ford-approved aftermarket remote

start systems. If you choose to install a

remote start system please see your Ford

authorized dealer for a Ford-approved

remote start system.

The following information MAY help

customers who choose to use a

non-Ford-approved remote start system.

The actions provided below do NOT make

MyKey compatible with

non-Ford-approved remote start system,

but it MAY help you to retain some MyKey

functions.

MyKey®

Vehicles Equipped with Traditional

Keys

When using a non-Ford-approved remote

start system, the default settings may

recognize the remote start system as an

additional admin key with its associated

privileges. This makes it NOT compatible

with MyKey. Restart the engine when you

insert a key into the ignition cylinder it may

help you to retain some MyKey functions.

In addition to the key that has been

programmed as a MyKey, owners of

vehicles equipped with traditional keys

have the option to program the

non-Ford-approved remote start system

as a MyKey if the remote start fob is used

by the MyKey driver.

To program a non-Ford-approved remote

start system as a MyKey, do the following:

• Enter the vehicle and close all doors.

• Remote start the vehicle using your

non-Ford-approved remote start fob.

• See Creating a MyKey (page 49).

Follow Steps 1-5.

Vehicles Equipped with Intelligent

Access Key (Push Button Start)

Note: It is not possible to program the

remote start system as a MyKey on vehicles

equipped with intelligent access key (push

button start). Therefore, you should treat

the remote start fob as you would any other

admin key. When the vehicle is started using

remote start, the system will stall the engine

when you either enter the vehicle or shift the

vehicle into gear. Prior to the engine stall,

the vehicle will have administrative

privileges. When you restart the engine, the

vehicle will identify the user as an admin or

MyKey driver depending on the settings of

the actual key used to start the vehicle.

Note: For all vehicles, the number of

MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED or ADMIN KEYS

PROGRAMMED that is displayed in the

MyKey system status menus, may include

the non-Ford-approved remote start system

as an additional key in the total count. See

Checking MyKey System Status (page

50).

For all vehicles with a non-Ford-approved

remote start installed, it is possible to

program all "real" keys as MyKeys, in which

case, you will need to use your remote start

system to clear all MyKeys (which removes

all restrictions and returns them to admin

key status) by doing the following:

• Enter the vehicle and close all doors.

• Remote start the vehicle using your

non-Ford-approved remote start fob.

• See Clearing All MyKeys (page 50).

Follow Steps 1-3.

MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING

Potential CausesCondition

The key in the ignition does not have admin

privileges.

I cannot program a key

MyKey®

Potential CausesCondition

The key in the ignition is the only admin key

(there always has to be at least one admin

key).

The intelligent access key is not in the backup

slot (vehicles with push button start).

SecuriLock® passive anti-theft system is

disabled or in unlimited mode.

The vehicle has been started using a remote

start system that is not programmed with

admin privileges. See Using MyKey With

Remote Start Systems (page 50).

The key in the ignition does not have admin

privileges.

I cannot program the optional settings

No keys are programmed to the vehicle. See

Creating a MyKey.

The vehicle has been started using a remote

start system that is not programmed with

admin privileges. See Using MyKey With

Remote Start Systems (page 50).

Key in the ignition does not have admin priv-

ileges.

I cannot clear the restricted keys

No restricted keys are programmed to the

vehicle. See Creating a MyKey.

The vehicle has been started using a remote

start system that is not programmed with

admin privileges. See Using MyKey With

Remote Start Systems (page 50).

Purchase a new key from your authorized

dealer.

I lost the only admin key

Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft

System (page 62).

I lost a key

The vehicle has a remote start system that is

recognized as an admin key. Restricted keys

can be reset using remote start. See Using

MyKey With Remote Start Systems (page

50).

I accidentally programmed all keys as

restricted keys

An admin key is present at engine start-up.No restricted key functions with intelli-

gent access key (push button start) No restricted keys are programmed to the

vehicle. See Creating a MyKey.

MyKey®

Potential CausesCondition

An unknown key has been programmed to the

vehicle as a restricted key.

Restricted key programmed total

includes one additional key

The vehicle is equipped with a remote start

system. See Using MyKey With Remote

Start Systems (page 50).

An unknown key has been programmed to the

vehicle as an admin key.

Admin keys programmed total includes

one additional key

The vehicle is equipped with a remote start

system. See Using MyKey With Remote

Start Systems (page 50).

The restricted key is not being used by the

intended user.

MyKey miles do not accumulate

The key system has been reset.

MyKey®

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING

You can use the power door lock control

or the remote control to lock and unlock

the vehicle.

Power Door Locks

E138628

UnlockA

LockB

Remote Control

The remote control can be used any time

the vehicle is not running.

Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage

Unlock)

E138629

Press the button to unlock the

driver’s door.

Press the button again within

three seconds to unlock all doors. The turn

signals will flash.

Press and hold both the lock and unlock

buttons on the remote control for four

seconds to disable or enable two-stage

unlocking. Disabling two-stage unlocking

allows all vehicle doors to unlock with one

press of the button. The turn signals will

flash twice to indicate the unlocking mode

was changed. The unlocking mode will be

applied to the remote control, keyless entry

keypad and intelligent access.

Intelligent access at the driver’s door will

unlock all doors when two-stage unlocking

is disabled.

Locking the Doors

E138623

Press the button to lock all the

doors. The turn signals will

illuminate.

Press the button again within three

seconds to confirm that all the doors are

closed. The doors will lock again, the horn

will chirp and the turn signals will

illuminate if all the doors and the luggage

compartment are closed.

Note: If locking was not successful or any

door or the liftgate is not closed, or if the

hood is not closed on vehicles equipped

with a perimeter alarm or remote start, the

horn will chirp twice and the lamps will not

flash.

Power Liftgate (if equipped)

WARNINGS

Make sure all persons are clear of the

liftgate area before using power

liftgate control.

Make sure the liftgate is closed to

prevent exhaust fumes from being

drawn into the vehicle. This will also

prevent passengers and cargo from falling

out. If you must drive with the liftgate open,

keep the vents open so outside air comes

into the vehicle.

Note: Be careful when opening or closing

the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed

area to avoid damaging the liftgate.

E138630

Press twice within three seconds

to open or close the liftgate, or

to reverse the movement. See

Power Liftgate (page 57).

Locks

Activating Intelligent Access (If

Equipped)

The intelligent access key must be within

3 feet (1 meter) of the vehicle.

At the Front Doors

Pull a front exterior door handle. The door

will unlock and can be opened.

E87384

Press and hold the door handle lock sensor

to lock the vehicle. To avoid unlocking the

door inadvertently, be sure to only touch

the lock sensor and not other areas of the

door handle.

At the Liftgate

Press the exterior liftgate release button

on the top of the liftgate pull-cup handle.

Smart Unlocks For Integrated

Keyhead Transmitter

This feature helps to prevent you from

locking yourself out of the vehicle if your

key is still in the ignition.

When you open one of the front doors and

lock the vehicle with the power door lock

control, all the doors will lock then unlock

if your key is still in the ignition.

The vehicle can still be locked with the key

in the ignition by using the keyless entry

keypad with the driver door closed, or by

pressing the lock button on the transmitter

even if the doors are not closed.

If both front doors are closed, the vehicle

can be locked by any method, regardless

of whether the key is in the ignition or not.

Smart Unlocks For Intelligent

Access Keys (If Equipped)

This feature helps to prevent you from

unintentionally locking your intelligent

access key inside your vehicle’s passenger

compartment or rear cargo area.

When you lock your vehicle using the driver

or passenger power door lock control (with

the door open, vehicle in park and ignition

off), after you close the door the vehicle

will search for an intelligent access key in

the passenger compartment. If an

intelligent access key is found inside the

vehicle, all of the doors will immediately

unlock and the horn will chirp, indicating

that the intelligent access key is inside.

In order to override the smart unlock

feature and intentionally lock the

intelligent access key inside the vehicle,

you can lock your vehicle after all doors

are closed by using the keyless entry

keypad, pressing the lock button on

another intelligent access key or touching

the locking area on the handle with another

intelligent access key in your hand.

When you open one of the front doors and

lock the vehicle using the power door lock

control, all doors will lock then unlock if:

• the ignition is on, or

• the ignition is off and the vehicle is not

in P (Park).

Locks

Autolock and Autounlock (If Equipped)

The autolock feature will lock all the doors

when:

• all doors are closed

• the ignition is on

• you shift into any gear putting the

vehicle in motion, and

• the vehicle attains a speed greater than

4 mph (7 km/h).

When autounlock is enabled, all doors will

unlock when the driver door is opened.

Enabling or Disabling Autolock and

Autounlock

Note: Your authorized dealer can perform

this procedure, or you can do the procedure

yourself.

To enable or disable these features, do the

following:

Note: You will have 30 seconds to

complete the procedure.

1. Switch the ignition on.

2. Press the power door lock button three

times.

3. Switch the ignition off.

4. Press the power door lock button three

times.

5. Switch the ignition on. The horn will

chirp indicating the programming mode

has been entered.

Autolock: Once in programming mode,

each subsequent short press (less than 1

second) of the power door lock button will

toggle autolock between on and off.

Autounlock: Each subsequent long press

(more than 2 seconds) of the power door

lock button will toggle autounlock between

on and off.

Note: The autounlock feature can be

enabled or disabled independently of the

autolock feature.

Illuminated Entry

The interior lamps and select exterior

lamps will illuminate when the remote

entry system is used to unlock the door(s).

The illuminated entry system will turn off

the lights if:

• the ignition is on

• the remote transmitter lock control is

pressed, or

• after 25 seconds of illumination.

The lights will not turn off if:

• they have been turned on with the

dimmer control, or

• any door is open.

Illuminated Exit

The interior lamps and select exterior

lamps will illuminate when all doors are

closed, the ignition is turned off and the

key is removed from the ignition

(integrated keyhead transmitter only).

The lamps will turn off if all the doors

remain closed and:

• 25 seconds elapse

• the key is inserted in the ignition

(integrated keyhead transmitter only)

• the START/STOP button is pressed

(intelligent access key only).

Battery Saver

If the courtesy lamps, dome lamps or

headlamps are left on, the battery saver

will shut them off 10 minutes after the

ignition has been turned off.

Accessory Mode Battery Saver for

Intelligent Access Keys (If Equipped)

If you shut off the engine and leave the

ignition in the on or accessory mode, the

ignition will shut off after 30 minutes.

Locks

MANUAL LIFTGATE

WARNINGS

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a

cargo area, inside or outside of a

vehicle. In a collision, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriously

injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride

in any area of your vehicle that is not

equipped with seats and safety belts. Be

sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat

and using a safety belt properly.

Make sure that the liftgate is closed

to prevent exhaust fumes from being

drawn into the vehicle. This will also

prevent passengers and cargo from falling

out. If you must drive with the liftgate door

open, keep the vehicle well ventilated so

outside air comes into the vehicle.

Note: Be careful when opening or closing

the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed

area to avoid damaging the liftgate.

Note: Do not hang anything (bike rack, etc.)

from the spoiler, glass or liftgate. This could

damage the liftgate and its components.

Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while

driving. This could damage the liftgate and

its components.

E138632

To open the liftgate: Press the button

located in the top of the liftgate pull cup

handle to unlatch the liftgate, then pull on

the outside handle.

POWER LIFTGATE (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNINGS

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a

cargo area, inside or outside of a

vehicle. In a collision, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriously

injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride

in any area of your vehicle that is not

equipped with seats and safety belts. Be

sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat

and using a safety belt properly.

Make sure that the liftgate is closed

to prevent exhaust fumes from being

drawn into the vehicle. This will also

prevent passengers and cargo from falling

out. If you must drive with the liftgate door

open, keep the vehicle well ventilated so

outside air comes into the vehicle.

Keep keys out of reach of children.

Do not allow children to play near an

open or moving power liftgate.

Note: Cycling the ignition while the liftgate

is power closing and is near the latch may

cause the liftgate to reverse to full open

position. Make sure that the liftgate is closed

before operating or moving the vehicle,

especially in an enclosure, like a garage or

a parking structure. The liftgate or its

components could be damaged.

Note: Do not hang anything (bike rack, etc.)

from the spoiler, glass or liftgate. This could

damage the liftgate and its components.

The liftgate will only operate with the

vehicle in P (Park).

Locks

Three warning chimes will sound once as

the liftgate begins to power close. Five

short chimes indicate a problem with the

open or close request, caused by:

• the ignition is on and the transmission

is not in P (Park);

• or the battery voltage is below the

minimum operating voltage;

• or the vehicle speed is at or above 3

mph (5 km/h).

If the liftgate falls to the closed direction

after the liftgate has stopped in the open

position, four short warning chimes

indicate excessive weight on the gate or a

possible gas strut failure. See your

authorized dealer if you still have the issue

after the load is removed.

Opening and Closing the Liftgate

WARNING

Make sure all persons are clear of the

power liftgate area before using the

power liftgate control.

Note: Be careful when opening or closing

the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed

area to avoid damaging the liftgate.

Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while

driving. This could damage the liftgate and

its components.

E138633

To open or close from the

instrument panel: Press the

instrument panel button.

E138630

To open or close with the

remote control: Press the

remote control button twice

within three seconds.

To open or close using the hands-free

liftgate feature (if equipped):

1. Make sure you have an intelligent

access transmitter within 3 feet (1

meter) of the liftgate.

E142731

2. Raise and lower your leg, moving your

foot toward and under, then away

from, the rear bumper (similar to a

kicking motion).The liftgate will power

open or close.

Note: Allow the power system to open the

liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the

liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle

detection feature and stops the power

operation.

Note: Splashing water may cause the

hands-free liftgate to open. Keep the

intelligent access transmitter away from the

rear bumper detection area while washing

your car.

To open with the outside liftgate

control button:

1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote

control or power door unlock control.

If the intelligent access transmitter (if

equipped) is within 3 feet (1 meter) of

the liftgate, the liftgate will unlock

when you press the liftgate release

button.

Locks

E138632

2. Press the control button located in the

top of the liftgate pull-cup handle.

Note: Allow the power system to open the

liftgate after pressing the control. Manually

pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate

the system’ s obstacle detection feature and

stops the power operation.

E138636

To close with the control on the

liftgate: Press and release the button.

WARNING

Keep clear of the liftgate when

activating the rear switch.

Setting the Liftgate Open Height

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Manually move the liftgate to the

desired height.

3. Press and hold the control button on

the liftgate until a chime is heard,

indicating the new height has been

programmed.

Note: The height cannot be programmed

if the liftgate position is too low.

The new open liftgate height will now be

recalled when the power liftgate is opened.

To change the programmed height, repeat

the above procedure. Once the power

liftgate is opened it can be manually

moved to a different height.

When operating the power liftgate after a

lower height than full-open has been

programmed, the liftgate can be fully

opened by manually pushing it upward to

the maximum open position.

Obstacle Detection

When closing: The system will stop when

it detects an obstacle and two short

chimes will sound. Once the obstacle is

removed the liftgate can be closed under

power.

Note: Entering the vehicle while the liftgate

is closing can cause the vehicle to bounce

and activate obstacle detection. To prevent

this, allow the power liftgate to fully close

before entering the vehicle. Before driving

off, check the instrument cluster for a

liftgate or door ajar message or warning

indicator. Driving off without first checking

for the liftgate or door ajar message or

warning indicator could result in the liftgate

being left open, unintentionally, while you

are driving.

When opening: The system will stop and

two short chimes will sound when it

detects an obstacle. Remove the obstacle

to operate the liftgate.

Locks

KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)

SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY

KEYPAD

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

9 0

E138637

You can use the keypad to:

• lock or unlock the doors

• recall memory seat and mirror

positions (if equipped)

• program and erase user codes

• arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.

The keypad can be operated with the

factory set 5-digit entry code. The code is

located on the owner’s wallet card in the

glove box and is available from your

authorized dealer. You can also create up

to five of your own 5-digit personal entry

codes.

Programming a Personal Entry Code

To create your own personal entry code:

1. Enter the factory set code.

2. Press the 1·2 on the keypad within five

seconds.

3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. Each

number must be entered within five

seconds of each other.

4. For memory recall feature, enter the

sixth digit 1·2 to store driver 1 settings

or 3·4 to store driver 2 settings.

Note: Pressing 5·6, 7·8, or 9·0 keypad

numbers as a sixth digit will not recall a

driver memory setting.

Note: The factory-set code cannot be

associated with a memory setting.

5. The doors will lock then unlock to

confirm that your personal entry code

has been programmed.

You may also program a personal entry

code through the MyFord Touch® system

(if equipped). See General Information

(page 326).

Tips:

• Do not set a code that uses five of the

same number.

• Do not use five numbers in sequential

order.

• The factory set code will work even if

you have set your own personal code.

Erasing a Personal Code

1. Enter the factory set 5-digit code.

2. Press and release the 1·2 on the keypad

within five seconds.

3. Press and hold the 1·2 for two seconds.

This must be done within five seconds

of completing Step 2.

All personal codes are now erased and only

the factory set 5–digit code will work.

Anti-Scan Feature

The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode

if the wrong code has been entered seven

times (35 consecutive button presses).

This mode disables the keypad for one

minute and the keypad lamp will flash.

Locks

The anti-scan feature will turn off after:

• one minute of keypad inactivity

• pressing the unlock button on the

remote control

• the ignition is turned on

• unlocking the vehicle using intelligent

access (if equipped)

Unlocking and Locking the Doors

To Unlock the Driver’s Door

Enter the factory set 5-digit code or your

personal code. Each number must be

pressed within five seconds of each other.

The interior lamps will illuminate.

Note: All doors will unlock if the two-stage

unlocking feature is disabled. See Locking

and Unlocking (page 54).

To Unlock All Doors

Enter the factory set code or your personal

code, then press the 3·4 control within five

seconds.

To Lock All Doors

Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same

time (with the driver’s door closed). You

do not need to enter the keypad code first.

Locks

PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT

SYSTEM

Note: The system is not compatible with

non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.

Use of these systems may result in vehicle

starting problems and a loss of security

protection.

Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices

or a second coded key on the same key

chain may cause vehicle starting problems

if they are too close to the key when starting

the engine. Prevent these objects from

touching the coded key while starting the

engine. Switch the ignition off, move all

objects on the key chain away from the

coded key and restart the engine if a

problem occurs.

Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key

in the vehicle. Always take your keys and

lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.

SecuriLock®

The system is an engine immobilization

system. It is designed to help prevent the

engine from being started unless a coded

key programmed to your vehicle is used.

Using the wrong key may prevent the

engine from starting. A message may

appear in the information display.

If you are unable to start the engine with a

correctly coded key, a malfunction has

happened and a message may appear in

the information display.

Automatic Arming

The vehicle is armed immediately after

switching the ignition off.

Automatic Disarming

Switching the ignition on with a coded key

disarms the vehicle.

Replacement Keys

Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with

two integrated keyhead transmitters or two

intelligent access keys.

The integrated keyhead transmitter

functions as a programmed ignition key

that operates all the locks and starts the

vehicle, as well as a remote control.

The intelligent access key functions as a

programmed key that operates the driver's

door lock and activates the intelligent

access with push button start systems, as

well as a remote control.

If your programmed transmitters or

standard SecuriLock coded keys

(integrated keyhead transmitters only) are

lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra

coded key, you will need to have your

vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. The

key codes need to be erased from your

vehicle and new coded keys will need to

be programmed.

Store an extra programmed key away from

the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent

any inconveniences. See your authorized

dealer to purchase additional spare or

replacement keys.

Programming a Spare Integrated

Keyhead Transmitter

Note: A maximum of eight coded keys can

be programmed to your vehicle. All eight

can be integrated keyhead transmitters.

You can program your own integrated

keyhead transmitter or standard

SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. This

procedure will program both the engine

immobilizer keycode and the remote entry

portion of the remote control to your

vehicle

Only use integrated keyhead transmitters

or standard SecuriLock keys.

Security

You must have two previously

programmed coded keys and the new

unprogrammed key readily accessible. See

your authorized dealer to have the spare

key programmed if two previously

programmed coded keys are not available.

Read and understand the entire procedure

before you begin.

1. Insert the first previously programmed

coded key into the ignition.

2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep

the ignition on for at least three

seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.

3. Switch the ignition off and remove the

first coded key from the ignition.

4. After three seconds but within 10

seconds of switching the ignition off,

insert the second previously coded key

into the ignition.

5. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep

the ignition on for at least three

seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.

6. Switch the ignition off and remove the

second previously programmed coded

key from the ignition.

7. After three seconds but within 10

seconds of switching the ignition off

and removing the previously

programmed coded key, insert the new

unprogrammed key into the ignition.

8. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep

the ignition on for at least six seconds.

9. Remove the newly programmed coded

key from the ignition.

If the key has been successfully

programmed it will start the engine and

operate the remote entry system (if the

new key is an integrated keyhead

transmitter).

If it was not programmed successfully,

wait 10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through

8. If you are still unsuccessful, take your

vehicle to your authorized dealer.

Programming a Spare Intelligent

Access Key

See your authorized dealer to have

additional keys programmed to your

vehicle.

ANTI-THEFT ALARM (IF EQUIPPED)

The system will warn you of an

unauthorized entry to your vehicle. It will

be triggered if any door, the luggage

compartment or the hood is opened

without using the key or the remote

control.

The park and turn lamps will flash and the

horn will sound if unauthorized entry is

attempted while the alarm is armed.

Take all remote controls to an authorized

dealer if there is any potential alarm

problem with your vehicle.

Arming the Alarm

The alarm is ready to arm when there is

not a key in the ignition. Lock the vehicle

to arm the alarm.

Disarming the Alarm

Disarm the alarm by any of the following

actions:

• Unlock the doors or luggage

compartment with the remote control

or keyless entry keypad.

• Switch the ignition on or start the

vehicle.

• Use a key in the driver’s door to unlock

the vehicle, then switch the ignition on

within 12 seconds.

Security

ADJUSTING THE STEERING

WHEEL

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel

when your vehicle is moving.

Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the

correct position. See Sitting in the Correct

Position (page 121).

E95178

1. Unlock the steering column.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired

position.

E95179

3. Lock the steering column.

AUDIO CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

Select the required source on the audio

unit.

You can operate the following functions

with the control:

Type 1

E145434

Use the arrows on the steering wheel to

navigate through the menus. Press OK to

make a selection.

Steering Wheel

Type 2

E129462

Volume upA

Seek up or nextB

Volume downC

Seek down or previousD

ModeE

Press M to select the audio source.

Type 3

E129463

Volume upA

Seek up or nextB

Volume downC

Seek down or previousD

Seek, Next or Previous

Press the seek button to:

• tune the radio to the next or previous

stored preset

• play the next or the previous track.

Press and hold the seek button to:

• tune the radio to the next station up or

down the frequency band

• seek through a track.

Steering Wheel

VOICE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

E129464

Pull the control to select or deselect voice

control. See SYNC® (page 279). See

MyFord Touch® (page 315).

MyFord Touch® Controls (If Equipped)

Your steering wheel controls may also

have these additional features.

E142613

Press to go to the home screen.

E142608

Press to go to the information

screen.

See MyFord Touch® (page 315).

CRUISE CONTROL

E142437

See Cruise Control (page 170).

INFORMATION DISPLAY

CONTROL

E130248

See Information Displays (page 84).

Steering Wheel

WINDSHIELD WIPERS

Note: Fully defrost the windshield before

switching on the windshield wipers.

Note: Make sure the windshield wipers are

switched off before entering a car wash.

Note: Clean the windshield and wiper

blades if they begin to leave streaks or

smears. If that doesn't resolve the issue,

install new wiper blades.

Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry

windshield. This may scratch the glass,

damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper

motor to burn out. Always use the

windshield washers before wiping a dry

windshield.

E128444

Single wipeA

Intermittent wipeB

Normal wipeC

High speed wipeD

Intermittent Wipe

E128445

Short wipe intervalA

Intermittent wipeB

Long wipe intervalC

Use the rotary control to adjust the

intermittent wipe interval.

Speed Dependent Wipers

When your vehicle speed increases, the

interval between wipes will decrease.

AUTOWIPERS (IF EQUIPPED)

Note: Fully defrost the windshield before

switching on the windshield wipers.

Note: Make sure the windshield wipers are

switched off before entering a car wash.

Note: Clean the windshield and wiper

blades if they begin to leave streaks or

smears. If that doesn't resolve the issue,

install new wiper blades.

Note: If you switch autolamps on in

conjunction with autowipers, your low beam

headlamps will illuminate automatically

when the rain sensor activates the

windshield wipers continuously.

Note: Wet road conditions can cause

unexpected wiping or smearing.

Wipers and Washers

To reduce smearing we recommend the

following:

• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers.

• Switch to normal or high speed wipe.

• Switch the autowipers off.

E128445

High sensitivityA

OnB

Low sensitivityC

The wipers will function when moisture is

detected on the windshield. The rain

sensor will continue to monitor the amount

of moisture on the windshield and adjust

the speed of the wipers automatically.

Use the rotary control to adjust the

sensitivity of the rain sensor. With low

sensitivity, the wipers will operate when

the sensor detects a large amount of

moisture on the windshield. With high

sensitivity, the wipers will operate when

the sensor detects a small amount of

moisture on the windshield.

Keep the outside of the windshield clean.

Sensor performance will be affected if the

area around the interior mirror is dirty. The

rain sensor is very sensitive and the wipers

may operate if dirt, mist or flies hit the

windshield.

WINDSHIELD WASHERS

Note: Do not operate the washers when

the washer reservoir is empty. This may

cause the washer pump to overheat.

E129188

The washers will spray for as long as you

pull the lever toward you. When you

release the lever, the wipers will operate

for a short time.

A wipe will occur a few seconds after

washing to clear any remaining washer

fluid.

Wipers and Washers

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND

WASHERS

Rear Window Wiper

E129193

Intermittent wipeA

Low speed wipeB

Press the button at the end of the lever to

change between off, intermittent and low

speed.

When you shift into R (Reverse), the rear

wiper will switch on to intermittent if the

front wipers are activated.

Rear Window Washer

E129194

The washer will spray for as long as you

push the lever away from you. When you

release the lever, the wiper will operate for

a short time.

Wipers and Washers

LIGHTING CONTROL

E142449

OffA

Parking lamps, instrument panel

lamps, license plate lamps and

tail lamps

HeadlampsC

High Beams

E130140

Push the lever forward to switch the high

beams on.

Push the lever forward again or pull the

lever toward you to switch the high beams

off.

Headlamp Flasher

E142450

Pull the lever toward you slightly and

release it to flash the headlamps.

AUTOLAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)

Note: It may be necessary to switch your

headlamps on manually in severe weather

conditions.

E142451

The headlamps will switch on and off

automatically in low light situations or

during inclement weather.

The headlamps will remain on for a period

of time after you switch the ignition off.

You can adjust the time delay using the

information display controls. See

Information Displays (page 84).

Lighting

Note: If you switch autolamps on in

conjunction with autowipers, low beam

headlamps will illuminate automatically

when the rain sensor activates the

windshield wipers continuously.

INSTRUMENT LIGHTING

DIMMER

Note: If you disconnect the battery or it

becomes discharged, the illuminated

components will switch to the maximum

setting.

Vehicles With Front Fog Lamps

E132712

Press repeatedly or press and hold until

the desired level is reached.

Vehicles Without Front Fog Lamps

E142452

Press repeatedly or press and

hold to dim.

Press repeatedly or press and

hold to brighten.

HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY

After you switch the ignition off, you can

switch the headlamps on by pulling the

direction indicator lever toward you. You

will hear a short tone. The headlamps will

switch off automatically after three

minutes with any door open or 30 seconds

after the last door has been closed. You

can cancel this feature by pulling the

direction indicator toward you again or

switching the ignition on.

DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (IF

EQUIPPED)

WARNING

Always remember to switch your

headlamps on in low light situations

or during inclement weather. The

system does not activate the tail lamps

and may not provide adequate lighting

during these conditions. Failure to activate

your headlamps under these conditions

may result in a collision.

Lighting

If equipped with halogen headlamps, the

system switches the low beam headlamps

on at a reduced intensity in day light

conditions.

If equipped with high intensity discharge

(HID) headlamps, the system switches the

fog lamps on in day light conditions.

To switch the system on, switch the

ignition on, and switch the lighting control

to the off, autolamp, or parking lamp

position.

FRONT FOG LAMPS

E142453

Press the control to switch the fog lamps

on or off.

You can switch the fog lamps on when the

lighting control is in any position except off

and the high beams are not on.

DIRECTION INDICATORS

E130141

Push the lever up or down to use the

direction indicators.

Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the

direction indicators flash three times to

indicate a lane change.

INTERIOR LAMPS

The lamps will switch on when one of the

following conditions have been met:

• You open any door.

• You press a remote control button.

• You press switch B on the front interior

lamp.

Front Interior Lamp

Note: Press A to switch them off when you

open a door. The indicator lamp will

illuminate yellow. Press A again to switch

them back on. The indicator lamp will

illuminate blue.

Lighting

E142454

Door function switch.A

All lamps on and off switch.B

Individual lamp on and off

switch.

Rear Interior Lamp (If Equipped)

E142455

You can switch individual map lamps on

independently by pressing switch A.

AMBIENT LIGHTING (IF EQUIPPED)

The ambient lighting system illuminates

the interior with a choice of several colors.

The ambient lighting control is located in

the overhead console.

E142456

Color paletteA

Control knobB

Search modeC

Rotate B past the first detent to switch on

and adjust to the desired brightness.

Press A to cycle through the color choices.

Press C to switch on all interior lamps and

the ambient lighting. Press C again to

switch off the interior lamps and return the

ambient lighting to the previously selected

color.

The ambient lighting will switch on when

the following conditions have been met:

• you switch the ignition on

• you switch the headlamps on

• the outside ambient light level is low.

The ambient lighting will remain on until

you switch the ignition off and one of the

following conditions have been met:

• you lock your vehicle

• the accessory delay timer expires.

Lighting

POWER WINDOWS

WARNINGS

Do not leave children unattended in

the vehicle and do not let them play

with the power windows. They may

seriously injure themselves.

When closing the power windows,

you should verify they are free of

obstructions and make sure that

children and pets are not in the proximity

of the window openings.

E70848

Note: You may hear a rumbling noise when

just one of the windows are open. Lower the

opposite window slightly to reduce this

noise.

Press the switch to open the window.

Lift the switch to close the window.

One-Touch Down (If Equipped)

Press the switch fully and release it. Press

or lift it again to stop the window.

One-Touch Up (If Equipped)

Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or

lift it again to stop the window.

Window Lock

E70850

Press the control to lock or unlock the rear

window controls. It will illuminate when

the rear window controls are locked.

Bounce-Back (If Equipped)

The window will stop automatically while

closing. It will reverse some distance if

there is an obstacle in the way.

Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature

Proceed as follows to override this

protection feature when there is a

resistance, e.g. in winter:

1. Close the window twice until it reaches

the point of resistance and let it

reverse.

2. Close the window a third time to the

point of resistance. The bounce-back

feature is now disabled and you can

close the window manually. The

window will go past the point of

resistance and you can close it fully.

Contact your authorized dealer as soon as

possible if the window does not close after

the third attempt.

Windows and Mirrors

Resetting the Bounce-Back Feature

WARNING

The bounce-back function remains

deactivated until you have reset the

memory.

If you have disconnected the battery, you

must reset the bounce-back memory

separately for each window.

1. Lift and hold the switch until the

window is fully closed.

2. Release the switch.

3. Lift the switch again for one more

second.

4. Press and hold the switch until the

window is fully open.

5. Release the switch.

6. Lift and hold the switch until the

window is fully closed.

7. Open the window and then try to close

it automatically.

8. Reset and repeat the procedure if the

window does not close automatically.

Accessory Delay (If Equipped)

You can use the window switches for

several minutes after you have switched

the ignition off or until either front door is

opened.

EXTERIOR MIRRORS

Power Exterior Mirrors

WARNING

Do not adjust the mirrors when your

vehicle is moving.

E70846

Left-hand mirrorA

OffB

Right-hand mirrorC

E70847

Press the arrows to adjust the mirror.

Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors

Push the mirror toward the door window

glass. Make sure that you fully engage the

mirror in its support when returning it to its

original position.

Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)

See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page

119).

Memory Mirrors (If Equipped)

You can save and recall the mirror

positions through the memory function.

See Memory Function (page 125).

Windows and Mirrors

Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors (If

Equipped)

WARNING

Objects in the blind spot mirror are

closer than they appear.

Blind spot mirrors have an integrated

convex mirror built into the upper outboard

corner of the exterior mirrors. They are

designed to increase your visibility along

the side of your vehicle.

Check the main mirror first before a lane

change, then check the blind spot mirror.

If no vehicles are present in the blind spot

mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane

is at a safe distance, signal that you intend

to change lanes. Glance over your shoulder

to verify traffic is clear and carefully

change lanes.

E138665

The image of the approaching vehicle is

small and near the inboard edge of the

main mirror when it is at a distance. The

image becomes larger and begins to move

outboard across the main mirror as the

vehicle approaches (A). The image will

transition from the main mirror and begin

to appear in the blind spot mirror as the

vehicle approaches (B). The vehicle will

transition to your peripheral field of view

as it leaves the blind spot mirror (C).

Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)

See Blind Spot Monitor (page 171).

INTERIOR MIRROR

WARNING

Do not adjust the mirror when your

vehicle is moving.

Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of

any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other

petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning

products.

You can adjust the interior mirror to your

preference. Some mirrors also have a

second pivot point. This lets you move the

mirror head up or down and from side to

side.

Pull the tab below the mirror toward you

to reduce glare at night.

Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)

Note: Do not block the sensors on the front

and back of the mirror. Mirror performance

may be affected. A rear center passenger or

raised rear center head restraint may also

block light from reaching the sensor.

Windows and Mirrors

The mirror will dim automatically to reduce

glare when bright lights are detected from

behind your vehicle. It will automatically

return to normal reflection when you select

reverse gear to make sure you have a clear

view when backing up.

SUN VISORS

E138666

Rotate the sun visor toward the side

window and extend it rearward for extra

shade.

Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If Equipped)

E138667

Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.

MOONROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNINGS

Do not let children play with the

moonroof or leave them unattended

in the vehicle. They may seriously

hurt themselves.

WARNINGS

When closing the moonroof, you

should verify that it is free of

obstructions and make sure that

children and pets are not in the proximity

of the roof opening.

The moonroof and sunscreen controls are

located on the overhead console.

The moonroof and sunscreen have a

one-touch open and close feature. To stop

them during one-touch operation, press

the control a second time.

Opening and Closing the

Sunscreen

E138668

Press and release the rear of the control

to open the sunscreen.

Press and release the front of the control

to close the sunscreen. If it is open, the

moonroof will automatically close before

the sunscreen closes.

Opening and Closing the Moonroof

E138669

Windows and Mirrors

Press and release the rear of the control

to open the moonroof. If it is closed, the

sunscreen will automatically open before

the moonroof opens. The moonroof will

stop short of the fully opened position.

Note: This position helps to reduce wind

noise or rumbling which may happen with

the moonroof fully open. Press and hold the

control again to fully open the moonroof.

Press and release the front of the control

to close the moonroof.

Bounce-Back

The moonroof will stop automatically

while closing. It will reverse some distance

if there is an obstacle in the way.

Press and hold the front of the control

within two seconds of a bounce-back

event to override this function. While

bounce-back is active, the closing force

increases for each of the next three times

that you close the moonroof.

Venting the Moonroof

Press and release the front of the control

to vent the moonroof. Press and release

the rear of the control to close the

moonroof.

Windows and Mirrors

GAUGES

E145825

Information displayA

SpeedometerB

Engine coolant temperature gaugeC

Fuel gaugeD

TachometerE

Information Display

Compass (If Equipped)

Displays the vehicle’s heading direction.

To calibrate and set the compass zone use

the information display menu. See

Information Displays (page 84).

Use the diagram to determine your

magnetic zone.

Instrument Cluster

123

6 7 8 91011

E142800

Odometer

Located in the bottom of the information

display Registers the accumulated

distance your vehicle has traveled.

Outside Air Temperature

Shows the outside air temperature.

Trip Computer

See Trip Computer (page 86).

Vehicle Settings and Personalization

See General Information (page 84).

Engine Coolant Temperature

Gauge

WARNING

Never remove the coolant reservoir

cap while the engine is running or hot.

At normal operating temperature, the

needle will remain in the center section.

Note: Do not restart the engine until the

cause of overheating has been resolved.

If the needle enters the red section, the

engine is overheating. Stop the engine,

switch the ignition off and determine the

cause once the engine has cooled down.

See Engine Coolant Check (page 222).

Fuel Gauge

Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will

indicate approximately how much fuel is

left in the fuel tank. The fuel gauge may

vary slightly when your vehicle is moving

or on a gradient. The arrow adjacent to the

fuel pump symbol indicates on which side

of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located.

WARNING LAMPS AND

INDICATORS

The following warning lamps and

indicators will alert you to a vehicle

condition that may become serious. Some

lamps will illuminate when you start your

vehicle to make sure they work. If any

lamps remain on after starting your vehicle,

refer to the respective system warning

lamp for further information.

Note: Some warning indicators appear in

the information display and function the

same as a warning lamp but do not display

when you start your vehicle.

Airbag - Front

If it fails to illuminate when you

start your vehicle, continues to

flash or remains on, it indicates

a malfunction. Have the system checked

by your authorized dealer.

Anti-Lock Braking System

If it illuminates when you are

driving, this indicates a

malfunction. You will continue

to have the normal braking system

(without ABS) unless the brake system

warning lamp is also illuminated. Have the

system checked by your authorized dealer.

Instrument Cluster

Battery

If it illuminates while driving, it

indicates a malfunction. Switch

off all unnecessary electrical

equipment and have the system checked

by your authorized dealer immediately.

Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)

E124823

It will illuminate when you switch

this feature off or in conjunction

with a message. See Blind Spot

Monitor (page 171). See Information

Messages (page 87).

Brake System

E138644

It will illuminate when you

engage the parking brake with

the ignition on.

If it illuminates when you are driving, check

that the parking brake is not engaged. If

the parking brake is not engaged, this

indicates low brake fluid level or a brake

system malfunction. Have the system

checked immediately by your authorized

dealer.

WARNING

Driving your vehicle with the warning

lamp on is dangerous. A significant

decrease in braking performance

may occur. It will take you longer to stop

your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked by

your authorized dealer immediately. Driving

extended distances with the parking brake

engaged can cause brake failure and the

risk of personal injury.

Cruise Control (If Equipped)

E71340

It will illuminate when you switch

this feature on. See Using

Cruise Control (page 170).

Direction Indicator

Illuminates when the left or right

turn signal or the hazard warning

flasher is turned on. If the

indicators stay on or flash faster, check for

a burned out bulb. See Changing a Bulb

(page 231).

Engine Oil

If it illuminates with the engine

running or when you are driving,

this indicates a malfunction.

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to

do so and switch the engine off. Check the

engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check

(page 221).

Note: Do not resume your journey if it

illuminates despite the level being correct.

Have the system checked by your authorized

dealer immediately.

Fasten Safety Belt

It will illuminate and a chime will

sound to remind you to fasten

your safety belt. See Safety

Belt Minder (page 31).

Fog Lamps - Front (If Equipped)

It will illuminate when you switch

the front fog lamps on.

High Beam

It will illuminate when you switch

the high beam headlamps on. It

will flash when you use the

headlamp flasher.

Instrument Cluster

Information (If Equipped)

It will illuminate when a new

message is stored in the

information display. It will be red

or amber in color depending on the severity

of the message and will remain on until the

cause of the message has been rectified.

See Information Messages (page 87).

Low Fuel Level

It will illuminate when the fuel

level is low or the fuel tank is

nearly empty. Refuel as soon as

possible.

Low Tire Pressure Warning

It will illuminate when your tire

pressure is low. If the lamp

remains on with the engine

running or when driving, check

your tire pressure as soon as possible.

It will also illuminate momentarily when

you switch the ignition on to confirm the

lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate

when you switch the ignition on, or begins

to flash at any time, have the system

checked by your authorized dealer.

Parking Lamps

It will illuminate when you switch

the parking lamps on.

Service Engine Soon

If the service engine soon

indicator light stays illuminated

after the engine is started, it

indicates that the On Board Diagnostics

system (OBD) has detected a malfunction

of the vehicle emissions control system.

Refer to On board diagnostics (OBD) in

the Fuel and Refueling chapter for more

information about having your vehicle

serviced. See Emission Control System

(page 143).

If the light is blinking, engine misfire is

occurring which could damage your

catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate

fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and

deceleration) and have your vehicle

serviced immediately.

Note: Under engine misfire conditions,

excessive exhaust temperatures could

damage the catalytic converter or other

vehicle components.

The service engine soon indicator light

illuminates when the ignition is first turned

on prior to engine start to check the bulb

and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready

for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing.

Normally, the service engine soon light will

stay on until the engine is cranked, then

turn itself off if no malfunctions are

present. However, if after 15 seconds the

service engine soon light blinks eight times,

it means that the vehicle is not ready for

I/M testing. See Emission Control

System (page 143).

Instrument Cluster

Stability Control

It will flash when the system is

active. If it remains illuminated

or does not illuminate when you

switch the ignition on, this indicates a

malfunction. During a malfunction the

system will switch off. Have the system

checked by your authorized dealer

immediately.

Stability Control Off

It will illuminate when you switch

the system off. It will go out

when you switch the system

back on or when you switch the ignition

off.

AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND

INDICATORS

Key in Ignition Warning Chime

Sounds when you open the driver's door

and you have left the key in the ignition

with it in the off or accessory position.

Headlamps On Warning Chime

Sounds when you remove the key from the

ignition and open the driver's door and you

have left the headlamps or parking lamps

on.

Parking Brake On Warning Chime

Sounds when you have left the parking

brake on and drive your vehicle. If the

warning chime remains on after you have

released the parking brake, have the

system checked by your authorized dealer

immediately.

Instrument Cluster

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in

loss of vehicle control, accident and

injury. Ford strongly recommends

that drivers use extreme caution when

using any device or feature that may take

their focus off the road. Your primary

responsibility is the safe operation of the

vehicle. We recommend against the use

of any handheld device while driving and

that you comply with all applicable laws.

Various systems on your vehicle can be

controlled using the information display

controls on the steering wheel.

Corresponding information is displayed in

the information display.

Information Display Controls

E138659

• Press the up and down arrow buttons

to scroll through and highlight the

options within a menu.

• Press the right arrow button to enter a

sub-menu.

• Press the left arrow button to exit a

menu.

• Press and hold the left arrow button at

any time to return to the main menu

display (escape button).

• Press the OK button to choose and

confirm settings or messages.

Menu Structure - Information

Display

All Vehicles

You can access the menu using the

information display control.

Note: Some options may appear slightly

different or not at all if the items are

optional.

Trip 1 and 2

Distance to E

Trip 1 or 2

Trip timer

AnticipationFord EcoModeAverage fuel

Information Displays

Trip 1 and 2

Speed

Ford EcoMode

See Trip Computer (page 86).

See Eco Mode (page 175).

Information

Intelligent 4WD

MyKey Dist.

MyKey Info

Settings

On or OffTraction CtrlDriver Assist

On or OffBlind spot

On or OffCross traffic alert

On or OffHill Start Assist

On or OffRear Park Aid

On or OffRain LightLighting

Auto or ManualDimming

Off or xx SecondsAutolamp delay

Always off, On guidance or Always onNavigation infoDisplay

Choose your applicable settingLanguage

Choose your applicable settingDistance

Choose your applicable settingTemperature

Park Slot Information WarningChimes

On or OffDisplayCompass

(non–navigation

systems only)

Convenience

Zone (1–15)Set Zone

Information Displays

Settings

Hold OK to CalibrateCalibrate

Heater – A/C / Auto or

Last Settings

Climate ControlRemote Start

Front Defrost / Automatic

or Off

Rear Defrost / Automatic

or Off

(5, 10 or 15 minutes)Duration

On/OffQuiet Start

Restore Default

Enable or DisableSystem

Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate MyKeyMyKey

Always On or User SelectableTraction Ctrl

80 MPH (130 km/h) or OffMax Speed

45 mph (75 km/h), 55 mph (90 km/h), 65 mph

(105 km/h) or Off

Speed Warning

On or OffVolume Limiter

Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClear MyKeys

Hold OK to Reset System to Factory DefaultSystem Reset

System Check

All active warnings will display first if

applicable. The system check menu may

appear different based upon equipment

options and current vehicle status. Use the

up/down arrow buttons to scroll through

the list.

TRIP COMPUTER

Resetting the Trip Computer

Press and hold OK on the current screen

to reset the respective trip, distance, time

and average fuel information.

Trip Odometer

Registers the distance traveled of

individual journeys.

Trip Timer

Registers the time of individual journeys.

Information Displays

Fuel Used

Indicates the approximate distance the

vehicle will travel on the fuel remaining in

the tank. Changes in driving pattern may

cause the value to vary.

Average Fuel

Indicates the average fuel consumption

since the function was last reset.

All Value

Indicates all the respective trip, distance,

time and average fuel information.

INFORMATION MESSAGES

Note: Depending on the vehicle options

equipped with your vehicle, not all of the

messages will display or be available.

Certain messages may be abbreviated or

shortened depending upon which cluster

type you have.

E130248

Press the OK button to acknowledge and

remove some messages from the

information display. Other messages will

be removed automatically after a short

time.

Certain messages need to be confirmed

before you can access the menus.

Message indicator (If Equipped)

The message indicator

illuminates to supplement some

messages. It will be red or amber

depending on the severity of the message

and will remain on until the cause of the

message has been rectified.

Some messages will be supplemented by

a system specific symbol with a message

indicator.

Airbag

ActionMessage

Indicator

Message

Displays when the system requires service due

to a malfunction. Contact your authorized

dealer.

AmberAirbag fault Service now

Information Displays

Alarm

ActionMessage

Indicator

Message

Displays when the alarm has been triggered

due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft

Alarm (page 63).

AmberAlarm activated Check

Vehicle

Displays when the system requires service due

to a malfunction. Contact your authorized

dealer.

-Alarm fault Service

required

Battery and Charging System

ActionMessage

Indicator

Message

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so

and switch off the ignition. Contact your

authorized dealer.

RedElectrical system over-

voltage Stop safely

Displays to warn of a low battery condition.

Turn off all unneeded electrical accessories.

Contact your authorized dealer.

AmberBattery low See manual

Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System

ActionMessage

Indicator

Message

Displayed when the blind spot information

system and cross traffic alert system sensors

are blocked. See Blind Spot Monitor (page

171).

AmberBLIS Low visibility See

manual

Displayed when a fault with the system has

occurred. Contact your authorized dealer as

soon as possible.

AmberBLIS: X sensor fault

Service required

Displayed when the system is not available due

to trailer use. See Blind Spot Monitor (page

171).

AmberBLIS not available Trailer

attached

Displayed when the system detects a vehicle.

See Blind Spot Monitor (page 171).

AmberCross Traffic Vehicle

coming from X

Information Displays

ActionMessage

Indicator

Message

Displayed when the blind spot information

system and cross traffic alert system sensors

are blocked. See Blind Spot Monitor (page

171).

AmberCross Traffic Sensor

blocked See manual

Displays when the system requires service due

to a malfunction. Contact your authorized

dealer.

AmberCross Traffic fault

Service required

Displayed when the system is not available due

to trailer use. See Blind Spot Monitor (page

171).

-Cross Traffic disabled

Trailer attached

Doors

ActionMessage

Indicator

Message

Displays when the door(s) listed is not

completely closed and the vehicle is moving.

RedX door open

Displays when the door(s) listed is not

completely closed.

Displays when the luggage compartment is not

completely closed and the vehicle is moving.

Redtrunk ajar

Displays when the luggage compartment is not

completely closed.

Displays when the hood is not completely

closed and the vehicle is moving.

RedHood open

Displays when the hood is not completely

closed.

Information Displays

Engine

ActionMessage

Indicator

Message

Engine service is required. Contact your

authorized dealer.

AmberEngine fault Service now

Displays when the engine temperature is too

high. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and allow

to engine to cool. If the problem persists,

contact your authorized dealer. See Engine

Coolant Check (page 222).

RedHigh engine temperature

Stop safely

Hill Start Assist

ActionMessage

Indicator

Message

Displays when hill start assist is not available.

Contact your authorized dealer. See Hill Start

Assist (page 149).

AmberHill start assist not avail-

able

Keyless Vehicle

ActionMessage

Indicator

Message

Displays to remind you that the key is in the

trunk. See Keyless Starting (page 135).

AmberFord KeyFree Key inside

vehicle

Displayed if the key is not detected by the

system. See Keyless Starting (page 135).

-Ford KeyFree No key

detected

Displayed as a reminder to turn off the vehicle.

See Keyless Starting (page 135).

RedSwitch ign. off Press

ENGINE Start/Stop

button

Information Displays

ActionMessage

Indicator

Message

Displayed as a reminder to press the brake

while starting the vehicle.

-Press brake to start

Displayed when a valid key is not detected

within the vehicle. See Keyless Starting (page

135).

RedFord KeyFree Key not

inside car

Displays when the key battery is low. Change

the battery as soon as possible. See Remote

Control (page 44).

-Key Battery low Replace

soon

Lighting

ActionMessage

Indicator

Message

Displays when the brake lamp bulb has burned

out. Contact your authorized dealer.

-Brake lamp Bulb fault

Displays when the low beam headlamp bulb

has burned out. Contact your authorized dealer.

-Low beam Bulb fault

Displays when an electrical system problem

occurs with the headlamp system. Contact your

authorized dealer.

AmberHeadlamp fault Service

required

Information Displays

Maintenance

ActionMessage

Indicator

Message

Displays when the engine oil life is depleted and

requires a change. See Engine Oil Check (page

221).

-Engine oil change due

Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the

brake system should be inspected immediately.

See Brake Fluid Check (page 225).

RedBrake fluid level low

Service now

Displays when the washer fluid is low and needs

to be refilled. See Washer Fluid Check (page

225).

-Washer fluid level low

Displays when the fuel fill inlet was not properly

closed. See Refueling (page 142).

-Check fuel fill inlet

MyKey

ActionMessage

Indicator

Message

Displays when MyKey is active.-MyKey active Drive

Safely

Displays when starting the vehicle and MyKey

is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on.

-MyKey Speed Limited to

XX MPH/km/h

Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey

speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is

approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).

AmberMyKey Vehicle Near Top

Speed

Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey

speed limit is reached.

AmberMyKey Vehicle at Top

Speed

Displays when MyKey is active.-MyKey Check Speed

Drive Safely

Displays when a MyKey is in use and Belt-

Minder is activated.

-MyKey Buckle Up to

Unmute Audio

Displays when a MyKey is in use and park aid is

activated.

-MyKey Park aid cannot

be deactivated

Information Displays

ActionMessage

Indicator

Message

Displays when trying to create a MyKey with a

key already designated as a MyKey.

-Key is Already a MyKey

Displays when programming a MyKey.-Hold key next to symbol

on steering column

Displays when programming a MyKey.-MyKey ESC cannot be

deactivated

Park Aid

ActionMessage

Indicator

Message

Displays when the system has detected a

condition that requires service. Contact your

authorized dealer. See Parking Aid (page 161).

AmberParking aid malfunction

Service required

Park Brake

ActionMessage

Indicator

Message

Displays when the parking brake is set, the

engine is running and the vehicle is driven more

than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays on

after the parking brake is released, contact your

authorized dealer.

RedPark brake applied

Information Displays

Power Steering

ActionMessage

Indicator

Message

The power steering system is not working. Stop

the vehicle a safe place. Contact your author-

ized dealer.

RedSteering loss Stop safely

The power steering system is not working. Stop

the vehicle a safe place. Contact your author-

ized dealer.

AmberSteering assist fault

Service required

The power steering system has detected a

condition within the power steering system or

passive entry or passive start system requires

service. Contact your authorized dealer.

AmberSteering fault Service

now

Starting System

ActionMessage

Indicator

Message

Displays when starting the vehicle as a reminder

to apply the brake.

-Press brake to start

Displays when the vehicle fails to start.-Cranking time exceeded

Transmission and Four-Wheel Drive

ActionMessage

Indicator

Message

See your authorized dealer.-Transmission fault

Service now

The transmission is overheating and needs to

cool. Stop in a safe place as soon as it’s

possible.

AmberTransmission overtem-

perature Stop safely

See your authorized dealer.AmberTransmission Service

required

Transmission is getting hot. Stop to let it cool

or speed up.

-Transmission Hot Stop

or Speed Up

Information Displays

ActionMessage

Indicator

Message

Transmission is hot. Wait as needed to let it

cool.

-Transmission Hot Wait

...

The system is not functioning correctly and

defaulted to front-wheel drive. See your

authorized dealer. See Using Four-Wheel

Drive (page 151).

Amber4WD fault Service

required

Displays when the system disables automatic-

ally and enters front-wheel drive only mode to

protect driveline components. See Using Four-

Wheel Drive (page 151).

Amber4WD Off

The system has overheated and defaulted to

front-wheel drive. See Using Four-Wheel

Drive (page 151).

Amber4WD temporarily

disabled

Displays when system operation has been

restored. See Using Four-Wheel Drive (page

151).

-4WD restored

Displays as a reminder to shift into park.-Transmission not in Park

Select P

Displays to request the operator to apply the

brake as needed by the transmission.

-Press brake to unlock

gearshift lever

Displays when the transmission shift lever is

unlocked and free to select gears.

-Gearshift lever unlocked

Information Displays

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

ActionMessage

Indicator

Message

Displays when one or more tires on your vehicle

have low tire pressure. See Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (page 257).

AmberLow Tire Pressure

Displays when the tire pressure monitoring

system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays

on or continues to come on, contact your

authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monit-

oring System (page 257).

AmberTire Pressure Monitor

Fault

Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is

malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For

more information on how the system operates

under these conditions, see See Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (page 257). If the warning

stays on or continues to come on, contact your

authorized dealer as soon as possible.

AmberTire Pressure Sensor

Fault

Traction Control

ActionMessage

Indicator

Message

Displays when the traction control system has

been switched off. See Using Traction

Control (page 158).

-Traction control off

Information Displays

GENERAL INFORMATION

Radio Frequencies and Reception

Factors

AM and FM frequencies are established by

the Federal Communications Commission

(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and

Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).

Those frequencies are:

• AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz

• FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz

Radio Reception Factors

The further you travel from an FM station, the weaker the

signal and the weaker the reception.

Distance/Strength

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway

overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and

thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

Terrain

When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating

tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and

result the audio system muting.

Station overload

CD and CD Player Information

Note: CD units are designed to play

commercially-pressed 4.75 inch (12

centimeter) audio compact discs only. Due

to technical incompatibility, certain

recordable and re-recordable compact discs

may not function correctly when used in

Ford CD players.

Note: CDs with homemade paper

(adhesive) labels should not be inserted

into the CD player as the label may peel and

cause the CD to become jammed. It is

recommended that homemade CDs be

identified with permanent felt tip marker

rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens

may damage CDs. Please contact your

authorized dealer for further information.

Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped

discs or discs with a scratch protection film

attached.

Always handle discs by their edges only.

Clean the disc with an approved CD

cleaner only, wiping from the center of the

disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a

circular motion.

Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or

heat sources for extended periods of time.

MP3 Track and Folder Structure

Audio systems capable of recognizing and

playing MP3 individual tracks and folder

structures work as follows:

• There are two different modes for MP3

disc playback: MP3 track mode

(system default) and MP3 folder

mode.

• MP3 track mode ignores any folder

structure on the MP3 disc. The player

numbers each MP3 track on the disc

(noted by the .mp3 file extension) from

T001 to a maximum of T255. The

maximum number of playable MP3

files may be less depending on the

structure of the CD and exact model

of radio present.

Audio System

• MP3 folder mode represents a folder

structure consisting of one level of

folders. The CD player numbers all MP3

tracks on the disc (noted by the .mp3

file extension) and all folders

containing MP3 files, from F001

(folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.

• Creating discs with only one level of

folders helps with navigation through

the disc files.

If you are burning your own MP3 discs, it is

important to understand how the system

reads the structures you create. While

various files may be present, (files with

extensions other than mp3), only files with

the .mp3 extension are played; other files

are ignored by the system. This enables

you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety

of tasks on your work computer, home

computer and your in-vehicle system.

In track mode, the system displays and

plays the structure as if it were only one

level deep (all .mp3 files are played,

regardless of being in a specific folder). In

folder mode, the system only plays the

.mp3 files in the current folder.

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:

AM/FM/CD

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in

loss of vehicle control, accident and

injury. Ford strongly recommends

that you use extreme caution when using

any device or feature that may take your

focus off the road. Your primary

responsibility is the safe operation of the

vehicle. We recommend against the use

of any handheld device while driving,

encourage the use of voice-operated

systems when possible and that you

become aware of applicable state and

local laws that may affect use of electronic

devices while driving.

Audio System

E142600

Eject: Press to eject a CD.A

Cursor arrows: Press to scroll through on-screen choices.B

CD slot: Insert a CD.C

OK: Press to confirm on-screen selections.D

Clock: Press to set the time. Use the H and M buttons outside the audio display

to adjust the hours and minutes. Press OK to finish. (The clock can also be set

by pressing MENU, then scrolling to the clock settings menu.)

INFO: Press to access radio or CD information.F

Number block: Press a button to store your favorite radio stations. When tuned

to a station, press and hold the button until sound returns.

Seek: Press to go to the next station up the radio frequency band or the next

track on a CD.

ON/OFF: Press to switch the audio system on or off by pressing the button.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Seek: Press to go to the next station down the radio frequency band or the

previous track on a CD.

Audio System

MENU: Press to access different audio system features. See Menu Structure

later in this chapter.

SOUND: Press to adjust the sound settings for Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade.L

AUX: Press to access the media features of the SYNC® system by pressing

MENU, then AUX. See SYNC® (page 279).

RADIO: Press to access different radio features by pressing RADIO, then MENU.

See Menu Structure later in this chapter.

CD: Press to access different CD features by pressing CD, then MENU. See

Menu Structure later in this chapter.

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:

AM/FM/CD/SYNC

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in

loss of vehicle control, accident and

injury. Ford strongly recommends

that you use extreme caution when using

any device or feature that may take your

focus off the road. Your primary

responsibility is the safe operation of the

vehicle. We recommend against the use

of any handheld device while driving,

encourage the use of voice-operated

systems when possible and that you

become aware of applicable state and

local laws that may affect use of electronic

devices while driving.

100

Audio System

E142601

Eject: Press to eject a CD.A

Cursor arrows: Press to scroll through on-screen choices.B

CD slot: Insert a CD.C

OK: Press to confirms on-screen selections.D

Clock: Press to set the time. Use the H and M buttons outside the audio display

to adjust the hours and minutes. Press OK to finish. (The clock can also be set

by pressing MENU, then scrolling to the clock settings menu.)

INFO: Press to access radio or CD information.F

SOUND: Press to adjust the sound settings for Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade.G

Number block: Press to store your favorite radio stations, when in radio mode.

When tuned to a station, press and hold a button until sound returns. When in

CD mode, press a button to select a track. In phone mode, use the buttons to

dial a phone number.

Function button 4: Press to select different functions of the audio system

depending on which mode (i.e. radio or CD) you are in.

Function button 3: Press to select different functions of the audio system

depending on which mode (i.e. radio or CD) you are in.

101

Audio System

Seek: Press to go to the next station up the radio frequency band or the next

track on a CD.

ON/OFF: Press to switch the audio system on or off by pressing the button.

Turn the dial to adjust the volume.

Seek: Press to go to the next station down the radio frequency band or the

previous track on a CD.

Function button 2: Press to select different functions of the audio system

depending on which mode (i.e. radio or CD) you are in.

Function button 1: Press to select different functions of the audio system

depending on which mode (i.e. radio or CD) you are in.

MENU: Press to access different audio system features. See Menu Structure

later in this chapter.

PHONE: Press to access the phone features of the SYNC® system by pressing

MENU, then PHONE. See SYNC® (page 279).

AUX: Press to access the media features of the SYNC® system by pressing

MENU, then AUX. See SYNC® (page 279).

RADIO: Press to access different radio features by pressing RADIO, then MENU.

See Menu Structure later in this chapter.

CD: Press to access different CD features by pressing CD, then MENU. See

Menu Structure later in this chapter.

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:

AM/FM/CD/SATELLITE

RADIO/SYNC

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in

loss of vehicle control, accident and

injury. Ford strongly recommends

that you use extreme caution when using

any device or feature that may take your

focus off the road. Your primary

responsibility is the safe operation of the

vehicle. We recommend against the use

of any handheld device while driving,

encourage the use of voice-operated

systems when possible and that you

become aware of applicable state and

local laws that may affect use of electronic

devices while driving.

Note: Your audio system can operate for

up to one hour after the ignition is turned

off. Press the ON/OFF control to operate

the system with the ignition turned off. The

system automatically turns off after one

hour.

Note: Some features such as SIRIUS

satellite radio may not be available in your

location. Check with your authorized dealer.

102

Audio System

E142602

Eject Press to eject a CD.A

Cursor arrows: Press to scroll through on-screen choices.B

CD slot: Insert a CD.C

OK: Press to confirm on-screen selections.D

INFO: Press to access radio or CD information.E

MENU: Press to access different audio system features. See Menu Structure

later in this chapter.

SOUND: Press to adjust the sound settings for Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade.G

Number block: Press a button to store your favorite radio stations, when in

radio mode. When tuned to a station, press and hold the button until sound

returns. When in CD mode, press a button to select a track. In phone mode, use

the buttons to dial a phone number. In clock mode, use the H and M buttons

outside the audio display to adjust the hours and minutes. Press OK to finish.

(The clock can also be set by pressing MENU, then scrolling to the clock settings

menu.)

Function button 4: Press to select different functions of the audio system

depending on which mode (i.e. radio or CD) you are in.

103

Audio System

Function button 3: Press to select different functions of the audio system

depending on which mode (i.e. radio or CD) you are in.

Seek: Press to go to the next station up the radio frequency band or the next

track on a CD.

ON/OFF: Press to switch the audio system on or off by pressing the button.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Seek: Press to go to the next station down the radio frequency band or the

previous track on a CD.

Function button 2: Press to select different functions of the audio system

depending on which mode (i.e. radio or CD) you are in.

Function button 1: Press to select different functions of the audio system

depending on which mode (i.e. radio or CD) you are in.

PHONE: Press to access the phone features of the SYNC® system by pressing

MENU, then PHONE. See SYNC® (page 279).

AUX: Press to access the media features of the SYNC® system by pressing

MENU, then AUX. See SYNC® (page 279).

SIRIUS: Press to access different satellite radio features by pressing SIRIUS,

then MENU. See Menu Structure later in this chapter.

RADIO: Press to access different radio features by pressing RADIO, then MENU.

See Menu Structure later in this chapter.

CD: Press to access different CD features by pressing CD, then MENU. See

Menu Structure later in this chapter.

104

Audio System

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:

PREMIUM AM/FM/CD

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in

loss of vehicle control, accident and

injury. Ford strongly recommends

that you use extreme caution when using

any device or feature that may take your

focus off the road. Your primary

responsibility is the safe operation of the

vehicle. We recommend against the use

of any handheld device while driving,

encourage the use of voice-operated

systems when possible and that you

become aware of applicable state and

local laws that may affect use of electronic

devices while driving.

Note: The CD slot is directly above the

touchscreen.

Note: Most of the audio features are

controlled through the MyFord Touch®

system. See MyFord Touch® (page 315).

E143843

- TUNE +: Press to search the frequency band in individual increments.A

ON/OFF and Volume: Press to switch the audio system on and off. Turn the

dial to adjust the volume.

Eject: Eject a CD.C

SEEK: Press to go to the next station up or down the radio frequency band or

the next or previous track on a CD.

105

Audio System

SOUND: Press to adjust the sound settings for Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade.E

SOURCE: Press to access different audio modes such as AM, FM and A/V Input.F

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:

SONY AM/FM/CD

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in

loss of vehicle control, accident and

injury. Ford strongly recommends

that you use extreme caution when using

any device or feature that may take your

focus off the road. Your primary

responsibility is the safe operation of the

vehicle. We recommend against the use

of any handheld device while driving,

encourage the use of voice-operated

systems when possible and that you

become aware of applicable state and

local laws that may affect use of electronic

devices while driving.

Note: The CD slot is directly above the

touchscreen.

Note: Most of the audio features are

controlled through the MyFord Touch®

system. See MyFord Touch® (page 315).

E143844

On/Off: Press to switch the audio system on and off.A

SOURCE: Press to access different audio modes such as AM, FM and A/V Input.B

106

Audio System

Seek: Press to go to the next station up or down the radio frequency band or

the next or previous track on a CD.

- TUNE +: Press to search the frequency band in individual increments.D

Volume: Turn the dial to adjust the volume.E

SOUND: Press to adjust the sound settings for Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade.F

Eject: Press to eject a CD.G

Menu Structure

Note: Depending on your system, some

options may appear slightly different, not

at all or on-screen and able to be selected

using the function buttons.

Press MENU.

Press the up and down arrow buttons to

scroll through the options (if active).

Press the right arrow to enter a menu.

Press the left arrow to exit a menu.

Radio

Use the left and right arrows to go up or down the

frequency band.

Manual tune

Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.Scan

Select to store the six strongest local stations on the AM

and FM frequency bands.

Autostore

Select to have the system search by certain music

categories (rock, pop, country, etc).

PTY/Set category

Select to view additional broadcast data, if available. This

feature defaults to off. RBDS/RDS must be on for you to

set a category.

RBDS/RDS

SIRIUS

Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.Scan

Select to view your satellite radio electronic serial number

(ESN). You will need this number when communicating

with SIRIUS® to activate, modify or track your account.

Show ESN

Select to view available satellite radio channels. Press OK

to select Tune Channel, Skip Channel or Lock Channel.

Once a channel is skipped or locked, you can only access

it by pressing Direct and entering the channel number.

Locking or unlocking a channel requires your PIN.

Channel guide

107

Audio System

SIRIUS

Select to view channel categories (pop, rock, news, etc).

If you select a category, seek and scan functions will only

stop on channels in that category.

Set category

Select to enable/disable an alert for a song, artist or team.

The system alerts you when the selection is playing on

another channel. Save up to 20 alerts.

Alerts

Use your PIN to unlock previously locked stations.Unlock all stations

Use to restore any channels you previously skipped.Skip no stations

Select to create a PIN which allows you to lock or unlock

channels. Your initial PIN is 1234.

Parental lock (PIN)

Audio Settings

Automatically adjusts the volume to compensate for

speed and wind noise. You can set the system between

off and + 7.

SCV level

Allows you to adjust sound settings such as treble, bass,

middle, fade and balance.

Sound

Optimizes sound quality for the chosen seating position.Occupancy mode

Select to view channel categories (pop, rock, news, etc).

If you select a category, seek and scan functions will only

stop on channels in that category.

Set category

Select to view additional broadcast data, if available. This

feature defaults to off. RBDS/RDS must be on for you to

set a category.

RBDS/RDS

Select to scan all disc selections.Scan all

Select to scan all music in the current MP3 folder.Scan folder

Select to bring soft and loud passages together for a more

consistent listening level.

CD compression

108

Audio System

Display Settings

Select to change display brightness.Dimming

Select to display the language in English, French or

Spanish.

Language

Select to display the outside temperature in Fahrenheit

or Celsius.

Temp setting

Clock Settings

Select to set the time.Set time

Select to set the calendar date.Set date

Select to view clock time in a 12-hour mode or 24-hour

mode.

12/24 hour

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

WARNINGS

Driving while distracted can result in

loss of vehicle control, accident and

injury. Ford strongly recommends

that you use extreme caution when using

any device or feature that may take your

focus off the road. Your primary

responsibility is the safe operation of the

vehicle. We recommend against the use

of any handheld device while driving,

encourage the use of voice-operated

systems when possible and that you

become aware of applicable state and

local laws that may affect use of electronic

devices while driving.

For safety reasons, do not connect

or adjust the settings on your

portable music player while the

vehicle is moving.

WARNINGS

Store the portable music player in a

secure location, such as the center

console or the glove box, when the

vehicle is in motion. Hard objects may

become projectiles in a collision or sudden

stop, which may increase the risk of serious

injury. The audio extension cable must be

long enough to allow the portable music

player to be safely stored while the vehicle

is in motion.

E142603

109

Audio System

The auxiliary input jack (AIJ) allows you to

connect and play music from your portable

music player through the vehicle speakers.

You can use any portable music player

designed for use with headphones. Your

audio extension cable must have male

one-eighth inch (three and one-half

millimeter) connectors at each end.

1. Make sure the vehicle, radio and

portable music player are turned off

and the transmission is in position P.

2. Plug the extension cable from the

portable music player into the AIJ.

3. Turn on the radio. Select either a tuned

FM station or a CD.

4. Adjust the volume as desired.

5. Turn on your portable music player and

adjust its volume to half its maximum

level.

6. Press AUX until LINE or LINE IN

appears in the display. You should hear

music from your device even if it is low.

7. Adjust the volume on your portable

music player until it reaches the volume

level of the FM station or CD. Do this

by switching back and forth between

the AUX and FM or CD controls.

USB PORT (IF EQUIPPED)

E142604

The USB port allows you to plug in media

playing devices, memory sticks and charge

devices (if supported). See SYNC® (page

279).

MEDIA HUB (IF EQUIPPED)

The media hub is located in the center

console and has the following features:

E142605

A/V inputsA

SD card slotB

USB portsC

See MyFord Touch® (page 315).

SATELLITE RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)

SIRIUS® broadcasts a variety of music,

news, sports, weather, traffic and

entertainment satellite radio channels. For

more information and a complete list of

SIRIUS satellite radio channels, visit

www.siriusxm.com in the United States,

www.siriuscanada.ca in Canada, or call

SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474.

110

Audio System

Satellite Radio Reception Factors

Potential Satellite Radio Reception Issues

For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna

clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other

material as far away from the antenna as possible.

Antenna obstructions

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway

overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and

thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

Terrain

When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating

tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and

the audio system may mute.

Station overload

Your display may show ACQUIRING...to indicate the

interference and the audio system may mute.

Satellite radio signal interfer-

ence

SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service

Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right

to change, rearrange, add or delete

programming including canceling, moving

or adding particular channels, and its prices,

at any time, with or without notice to you.

Ford Motor Company shall not be

responsible for any such programming

changes.

E142593

SIRIUS satellite radio is a

subscription-based satellite radio service

that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,

news, weather, traffic and entertainment

programming. Your factory-installed

SIRIUS satellite radio system includes

hardware and a limited subscription term

which begins on the date of sale or lease

of the vehicle. Refer to your authorized

dealer for availability.

For more information on extended

subscription terms (a service fee is

required), the online media player and a

complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio

channels, and other features, please visit

www.siriusxm.com in the United States,

www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at

1-888-539-7474.

Satellite Radio Electronic Serial

Number (ESN)

You need your ESN to activate, modify or

track your satellite radio account. When in

satellite radio mode, you can view this

number by pressing SIRIUS and memory

preset 1 at the same time.

111

Audio System

Troubleshooting

Possible ActionConditionRadio Display

No action required. This

message should disappear

shortly.

Radio requires more than

two seconds to produce

audio for the selected

channel.

Acquiring

If this message does not

clear shortly, or with an igni-

tion key cycle, your receiver

may have a fault. See your

authorized dealer for service.

Internal module or system

failure present.

Sat Fault/SIRIUS system

failure

Tune to another channel or

choose another preset.

Channel is no longer avail-

able.

Invalid Channel

Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-

539-7474 to subscribe to

the channel, or tune to

another channel.

Subscription not available

for this channel.

Unsubscribed Channel

The signal is currently being

blocked. When you move

into an open area, the signal

should return.

Loss of signal from the

SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS

tower to the vehicle

antenna.

No Signal

No action required. The

process may take up to

three minutes.

Update of channel

programming in progress.

Updating

Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-

539-7474 to reactivate or

resolve subscription issues.

Satellite service has been

deactivated by SIRIUS

Satellite Radio.

Call SIRIUS 1-888-539-7474

Using the channel guide,

unlock or unskip the chan-

nels.

All the channels in the

selected category are

skipped or locked.

No Channels Available

No action required.SIRIUS has updated the

channels available for your

vehicle.

Subscription Updated

112

Audio System

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL

E141421

Fan speed control: Controls the volume of air circulated in your vehicle. Adjust

to select the desired fan speed or switch off. If you switch the fan off, the

windshield may fog up.

Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and

recirculated air. When you select recirculated air, the button illuminates and

the air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This can reduce

the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering

your vehicle.

Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated in your

vehicle. Adjust to select the desired temperature. If you select MAX A/C, the

system distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel air vents. This

mode is more economical and efficient than normal air conditioning. When the

temperature control is in the MAX A/C position, neither the air conditioning or

recirculated air can be turned off.

Air conditioning: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air

conditioning cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve air conditioning

when starting your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly open for two to three

minutes.

Air distribution control: Adjust to select the desired air distribution.E

Select to distribute air through

the instrument panel air vents.

Select to distribute air through

the instrument panel and

footwell air vents.

Select to distribute air through

the footwell air vents.

Select to distribute air through

the windshield and footwell air

vents.

113

Climate Control

Select to distribute air through

the windshield air vents. You can

also use this setting to defog and

clear the windshield of a thin covering of

ice. You can also increase the temperature

and fan speed to improve clearing.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

E141422

AUTO: Press the button to select automatic operation. The system

automatically controls the temperature, amount and distribution of the airflow

to reach and maintain your previously selected temperature.

Fan speed: Controls the volume of air circulated in your vehicle. Press the

buttons to select the desired fan speed. The setting is shown in the display.

On and off button: Press the button to switch the system on and off.C

MAX Defrost: Press the button to distribute outside air through the windshield

air vents. Air conditioning is automatically selected. The fan is set to the highest

speed and the temperature to HI. When the air distribution is set in this position,

you are unable to select recirculated air or manually adjust the fan speed and

temperature control. Press the AUTO button to return to auto mode.

MAX A/C: Press the button to distribute maximum air conditioning through

the instrument panel air vents. This mode is more economical and efficient

than normal air conditioning.

Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and

recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates.

This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors

from entering your vehicle.

114

Climate Control

Defrost: Press the button to distribute air through the windshield air vents. You

can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of

ice.

Instrument panel: Press the button to distribute air through the instrument

panel air vents.

Footwell: Press the button to distribute air through the footwell air vents.I

Air conditioning: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air

conditioning cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve air conditioning

when starting your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly open for two to three

minutes.

Temperature Control

E133115

You can set the temperature between

60°F (15.5°C) and 85°F (29.5°C) in steps

of 1°F (0.5°C). In position LO, 59°F (15°C),

the system switches to permanent cooling.

In position HI, 86°F (30°C), the system

switches to permanent heating.

Note: If you select either position LO or HI,

the system does not regulate a stable

temperature.

Mono Mode

In this mode, the temperature settings for

both the driver's side and passenger's side

are linked. If you adjust the setting using

the rotary control on the driver’s side, the

system adjusts the temperature to the

same setting on the passenger’s side.

Switching Mono Mode Off

Select a temperature for the passenger’s

side using the rotary control on the

passenger’s side. Mono mode

automatically switches off. The

temperature on the driver’s side remains

unchanged. You can now adjust the

driver's side and passenger's side

temperatures independently. The

temperature settings for each side are

shown in the display.

Switching Mono Mode Back On

Press and hold the AUTO button. The

passenger’s side temperature is adjusted

to the driver’s side temperature setting.

HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE

INTERIOR CLIMATE

General Hints

Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may

cause the windows to fog up.

Note: A small amount of air may be felt

from the footwell air vents regardless of the

air distribution setting.

Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside

your vehicle, do not drive with the system

switched off or with recirculated air always

switched on.

115

Climate Control

Note: Do not place objects under the front

seats as this may interfere with the airflow

to the rear seats.

Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from

the air intake area at the base of the

windshield.

Manual Climate Control

Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield

during humid weather, adjust the air

distribution control to the windshield air

vents position. Increase the temperature

and fan speed to improve clearing, if

required.

Automatic Climate Control

Note: Do not adjust the settings when your

vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold. The

system automatically adjusts to the

previously stored settings. For the system

to function efficiently, the instrument panel

and side air vents should be fully open.

Note: At low ambient temperatures with

AUTO selected, the air stream is directed

toward the windshield and side windows

for as long as the engine remains cold.

Note: When the system is switched off,

outside air is prevented from entering your

vehicle.

Note: When the system is in AUTO mode,

and the interior and exterior temperatures

are high, the system automatically selects

recirculated air to maximize cooling of the

interior. When the selected air temperature

is reached, the system automatically selects

outside air.

Note: When you select windshield

defrosting and defogging, the instrument

panel and footwell level functions

automatically switch off and air conditioning

switches on. Outside air flows into your

vehicle.

Heating the Interior Quickly

Vehicle With Automatic Climate ControlVehicle With Manual Climate Control

Press the high fan speed button control.Adjust the fan speed to the highest

speed setting.

Adjust the temperature control to the

highest setting.

Adjust the temperature control to the

highest setting.

Press the footwell button to distribute

air to the footwell air vents.

Adjust the air distribution control to the

footwell air vents position.

116

Climate Control

Recommended Settings for Heating

Vehicle With Automatic Climate ControlVehicle With Manual Climate Control

Press the slow fan speed button.Adjust the fan speed to the second

speed setting.

Adjust the temperature control to the

midway point of the hot settings.

Adjust the temperature control to the

midway point of the hot settings.

Press the footwell and windshield air

distribution buttons.

Adjust the air distribution control to the

footwell and windshield air vents posi-

tion.

Close the instrument panel air vents.

Open the side air vents and direct them

toward the side windows.

Cooling the Interior Quickly

Vehicle With Automatic Climate ControlVehicle With Manual Climate Control

Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to the highest

speed setting.

Adjust the temperature control to the

desired setting.

Adjust the temperature control to the

MAX A/C position.

Adjust the air distribution control to the

instrument panel air vents position.

Recommended Settings for Cooling

Vehicle With Automatic Climate ControlVehicle With Manual Climate Control

Press the slow fan speed button.Adjust the fan speed to the second

speed setting.

Adjust the temperature control to the

midway point of the cold settings.

Adjust the temperature control to the

midway point of the cold settings.

Press the instrument panel vent button

to distribute air to the instrument panel

air vents.

Adjust the air distribution control to the

instrument panel air vents position.

117

Climate Control

Vehicle Stationary for Extended Periods During Extreme High Ambient

Temperatures

Vehicle With Automatic Climate ControlVehicle With Manual Climate Control

Apply the parking brake.Apply the parking brake.1

Move the transmission selector lever to

position P.

Move the transmission selector lever to

position P.

Press the MAX A/C button.Adjust the temperature control to the

MAX A/C position.

Adjust the fan speed to the lowest speed

setting.

Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather

Vehicle With Automatic Climate ControlVehicle With Manual Climate Control

Press the windshield defrosting and

defogging button.

Adjust the air distribution control to the

instrument panel and footwell air vents

positions.

Adjust the temperature control to the

desired setting.

Press the A/C button.2

Adjust the temperature control to the

desired setting.

Adjust the fan speed to the highest

setting.

Direct the instrument panel side air vents

toward the side windows.

Close the instrument panel vents.6

118

Climate Control

Maximum Cooling Performance in

Instrument Panel or Instrument

Panel and Footwell Positions

1. Adjust the temperature control to the

lowest setting.

2. Press the A/C and recirculated air

buttons.

3. Adjust the fan speed to the highest

setting initially and then adjust it to suit

the desired comfort level.

HEATED WINDOWS AND

MIRRORS

Heated Rear Window

Note: The ignition must be switched on to

use this feature.

Press the button to clear the rear window

of thin ice and fog. Press the button again

within 10 minutes to switch it off. It

switches off automatically after 10

minutes, or when you switch the ignition

off.

Do not use razor blades or other sharp

objects to clean the inside of the rear

window or to remove decals from the

inside of the rear window. This may

cause damage to the heated grid lines

and will not be covered by your

warranty.

Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped)

Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors

with a scraper or attempt to readjust the

mirror glass if it is frozen in place. These

actions could cause damage to the glass

and mirrors.

Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of

any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other

petroleum-based cleaning products.

Both mirrors are heated to remove ice, mist

and fog when the heated rear window is

switched on.

CABIN AIR FILTER

Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air

filter. It is located just in front of the

windshield under the cowl panel grille on

the passenger's side of your vehicle.

The particulate filtration system is

designed to reduce the concentration of

airborne particles such as dust, spores and

pollen in the air being supplied to the

interior of your vehicle.

Note: A cabin air filter must be installed at

all times to prevent foreign objects from

entering the system. Running the system

without a filter in place could result in

degradation or damage to the system.

The particulate filtration system gives you

and your passengers the following

benefits:

• It improves your driving comfort by

reducing particle concentration.

• It improves the interior compartment

cleanliness.

• It protects the climate control

components from particle deposits.

The filter should be replaced at regular

intervals. See the Scheduled

Maintenance chapter.

For additional cabin air filter information,

or to replace the filter, see an authorized

dealer.

REMOTE START (IF EQUIPPED)

The climate control system adjusts the

cabin temperature during remote start.

119

Climate Control

You cannot adjust the system during

remote start operation. Turn the ignition

on to return the system to its previous

settings. You can now make adjustments.

You will need to turn certain

vehicle-dependent features back on, such

as:

• heated seats

• cooled seats

• heated steering wheel

• heated mirrors

• heated rear window.

You can adjust the settings using the

information display controls. See

Information Displays (page 84).

Automatic Settings

You can set the climate control to operate

in AUTO mode through the information

display setting: Remote Start > Climate

Control > Heater-A/C > Auto. The climate

control system automatically sets the

interior temperature to 72°F (22°C).

In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F

(22°C). Cooled seats are set to high (if

available, and selected to AUTO in the

information display).

In moderate weather, the system either

heats or cools (based on previous

settings). The rear defroster, heated

mirrors and heated/cooled seats are not

automatically turned on.

In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F

(22°C). The heated seats and heated

steering wheel are set to high (if available,

and selected to AUTO in the information

display). The rear defroster and heated

mirrors are automatically turned on.

Last Settings

You can set the climate control to operate

using the last climate control settings

through the information display setting:

Remote Start > Climate Control >

Heater–A/C > Last Settings. The climate

control system automatically uses the

settings last selected before the vehicle

was turned off.

Heated and Cooled Devices

The climate control system controls other

heated and cooled devices inside the

vehicle. These devices (if available, and

selected to AUTO in the information

displays) may also be switched on during

remote start. Heated devices are typically

switched on during cold weather, and

cooled devices during hot weather.

120

Climate Control

SITTING IN THE CORRECT

POSITION

WARNINGS

Sitting improperly, out of position or

with the seatback reclined too far

can take weight off the seat cushion

and affect the decision of the passenger

sensing system, resulting in serious injury

or death in the event of a collision. Always

sit upright against your seatback, with your

feet on the floor.

Do not recline the seatback as this

can cause the occupant to slide

under the safety belt, resulting in

serious injury in the event of a collision.

Do not place objects higher than the

seatback to reduce the risk of serious

injury in the event of a collision or

during heavy braking.

E68595

When you use them properly, the seat,

head restraint, safety belt and air bags will

provide optimum protection in the event

of a collision.

We recommend that you follow these

guidelines:

• Sit in an upright position with the base

of your spine as far back as possible.

• Do not recline the seatback more than

30 degrees.

• Adjust the head restraint so that the

top of it is level with the top of your

head and as far forward as possible.

Make sure that you remain

comfortable.

• Keep sufficient distance between

yourself and the steering wheel. We

recommend a minimum of 10 inches

(25 centimeters) between your

breastbone and the air bag cover.

• Hold the steering wheel with your arms

slightly bent.

• Bend your legs slightly so that you can

press the pedals fully.

• Position the shoulder strap of the

safety belt over the center of your

shoulder and position the lap strap

tightly across your hips.

Make sure that your driving position is

comfortable and that you can maintain full

control of your vehicle.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

WARNINGS

Fully adjust the head restraint before

you sit in or operate your vehicle. This

will help minimize the risk of neck

injury in the event of a collision. Do not

adjust the head restraint when your vehicle

is moving.

The head restraint is a safety device.

Whenever possible it should be

installed and properly adjusted when

the seat is occupied.

121

Seats

WARNINGS

Install the head restraint properly to

help minimize the risk of neck injury

in the event of a collision.

Front seat head restraint

E138642

Rear seat outboard head restraints

E138643

Rear center head restraint

E138645

The head restraints consist of:

An energy absorbing head

restraint

Two steel stemsB

Guide sleeve adjust and unlock

button

Guide sleeve unlock and remove

button

Fold buttonE

Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright

driving position before adjusting the head

restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that

the top of it is level with the top of your head

and as far forward as possible. Make sure

that you remain comfortable. If you are

extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to

its highest position.

Adjusting the Head Restraint

Raising the Head Restraint

Pull the head restraint up.

Lowering the Head Restraint

1. Press and hold button C.

2. Push the head restraint down.

Removing the Head Restraint

1. Pull the head restraint up until it

reaches its highest position.

2. Press and hold buttons C and D.

3. Pull the head restraint up.

Installing the Head Restraint

Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves

and push the head restraint down until in

locks.

Folding the Head Restraint

1. Press and hold button E.

2. Pull it back up to reset.

122

Seats

Tilting Head Restraints (If Equipped)

The front head restraints may have a tilting

feature for extra comfort. To tilt the head

restraint, do the following:

E144727

1. Adjust the seatback to an upright

driving or riding position.

2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward

your head to the desired position.

After the head restraint reaches the

forward-most tilt position, pivoting it

forward again will then release it to the

rearward, un-tilted position.

MANUAL SEATS

WARNING

Do not adjust the driver's seat or

seatback when your vehicle is

moving.

Moving the Seat Backward and

Forward

E130249

WARNING

Rock the seat backward and forward

after releasing the lever to make sure

that it is fully engaged.

Adjusting the Height of the

Driver's Seat

E70730

123

Seats

Recline Adjustment

E138646

WARNING

Do not place cargo or any objects

behind the seatback before returning

it to the original position. Pull on the

seatback to make sure that it has fully

latched after returning the seatback to its

original position. An unlatched seat may

become dangerous if you stop suddenly or

have a collision.

POWER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNINGS

Do not adjust the driver's seat or

seatback when your vehicle is

moving.

Do not place cargo or any objects

behind the seatback before returning

it to the original position.

124

Seats

E138647

Power Lumbar (If Equipped)

E138648

MEMORY FUNCTION (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNINGS

Before activating the seat memory,

make sure that the area immediately

surrounding the seat is clear of

obstructions and that all occupants are

clear of moving parts.

Do not use the memory function

when your vehicle is moving.

This feature will automatically recall the

position of the driver's seat and power

mirrors. The memory control is located on

the driver’s door.

125

Seats

E142554

Saving a Pre-Set Position

1. Switch the ignition on.

2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to

your desired position.

3. Press and hold the desired pre-set

button until you hear a single chime.

Recalling a Pre-Set Position

Press the pre-set button associated with

your desired driving position. The seat and

mirrors will move to the position stored for

that pre-set.

Saving a Passive Setting

The vehicle stores the seating and mirror

positions for up to three remote controls

or passive keys. Next time the vehicle is

unlocked, the position of the seat and

mirrors will adjust to the last used position.

Each time you turn the ignition off, the

current seat and mirror settings are stored

on the remote control or passive key used.

Recalling a Stored Seat Position

Note: Press any driver seat adjustment

control, any of the memory buttons or any

mirror control switch, to stop seat

movement during a recall. Seat movement

will also stop if you move the vehicle.

Passive Recall

Note: If more than one passive key is in

range, the memory function will move to the

settings of the first key stored.

When you unlock the vehicle with the

remote control or pull the driver door

handle with a passive key in range, the seat

and mirrors will move to the position stored

on that remote control or passive key.

REAR SEATS

E138650

Recline Adjustment (If Equipped)

With the seat occupied, pull the lever up

to recline the seatback.

Folding the Seatback

With the seat empty, pull the lever up to

fold the seatback forward. You may need

to fold the outboard head restraints and

lower the center head restraint first.

Unfolding the Seatback

Pull the lever up and pull the seatback

upward.

126

Seats

HEATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING

People who are unable to feel pain

to their skin because of advanced

age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal

cord injury, medication, alcohol use,

exhaustion or other physical conditions,

must exercise care when using the heated

seat. The heated seat may cause burns

even at low temperatures, especially if

used for long periods of time. Do not place

anything on the seat that insulates against

heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This

may cause the heated seat to overheat.

Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles

or other pointed objects. This may damage

the heating element which may cause the

heated seat to overheat. An overheated

seat may cause serious personal injury.

Do not do the following:

• Place heavy objects on the seat.

• Operate the heated seat if water or any

other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow

the seat to dry thoroughly.

• Operate the heated seats unless the

engine is running. Doing so could drain

your vehicle battery.

E138653

Adjust the control to the desired heat

setting.

REAR SEAT ARMREST (IF

EQUIPPED)

E138656

Fold the armrest down to use the armrest

and cupholder.

127

Seats

Homelink® Wireless Control

System (If Equipped)

WARNINGS

Make sure that the garage door and

security device are free from

obstruction when you are

programming. Do not program the system

with the vehicle in the garage.

Do not use the system with any

garage door opener that does not

have the safety stop and reverse

feature as required by U.S. Federal Safety

Standards (this includes any garage door

opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).

Note: Make sure you keep the original

remote control transmitter for use in other

vehicles as well as for future system

programming.

Note: We recommend that upon the sale

or lease termination of your vehicle, you

erase the programmed function buttons for

security reasons. See Erasing the function

button codes later in this section.

Note: You can program a maximum of

three devices. To change or replace any of

the three devices after it has been initially

programmed, you must first erase the

current settings. See Erasing the function

button codes later in this section.

E142657

The universal garage door opener replaces

the common hand-held garage door

opener with a three-button transmitter

that is integrated into the driver’ s sun visor.

The system includes two primary features,

a garage door opener and a platform for

remote activation of devices within the

home. As well as being programmed for

garage doors, the system transmitter can

be programmed to operate entry gate

operators, security systems, entry door

locks and home or office lighting.

Additional system information can be

found online at www.homelink.com or by

calling the toll-free help line on

1-800-355-3515.

Programming

Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held

transmitter. This will ensure quicker training

and accurate transmission of the

radio-frequency signal.

Note: During programming, the hand-held

transmitter may stop transmitting. If this

occurs press and hold the function button

on the visor while you press and release the

hand-held transmitter every two seconds.

The indicator light will flash slowly and then

rapidly once the radio frequency signal is

accepted.

E142658

1. Switch the ignition on.

2. Hold the garage door hand-held

transmitter 1–3 inches (2–8

centemeter) away from the button you

want to program.

128

Universal Garage Door Opener

3. Press and hold both the button on the

visor you want to program and the

hand-held transmitter button until the

indicator light on the visor changes

from flashing slowly to rapidly, then

release.

4. Press and hold the function button you

programmed for 5 seconds, then

release. You may need to do this twice

to activate the door. If your garage door

does not operate, observe the indicator

light.

If the indicator light stays on, programming

is complete. Press and release the

programmed button to activate the door.

If the indicator light on the visor flashes

rapidly for two seconds then turns to a

constant light, follow the steps below.

Note: You may need a ladder to reach the

unit and you may need to remove the cover

or lamp lens.

E142659

1. Press the learn button on the garage

door opener motor.

Note: You will have 30 seconds to

complete the next step.

2. Return to your vehicle.

E142658

3. Press and hold the function button you

want to program on the visor for 2

seconds, then release. Repeat this step.

Depending on the brand of garage door

opener you may need to repeat this

sequence a third time.

To program additional buttons repeat

steps one through four.

For questions or comments, please contact

HomeLink at www.homelink.com or

1-800-355-3515.

Erasing the Function Button Codes

Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.

E142660

1. Press and hold the outer two function

buttons simultaneously for

approximately 20 seconds until the

indicator lights above the buttons flash

rapidly.

2. When the indicator lights flash, release

the buttons. The codes for all buttons

are erased.

Reprogramming a Single Button

To program a device to a previously trained

button, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired button. Do

NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash

after 20 seconds. Without releasing the

button, follow Step 1 in the

Programming section.

129

Universal Garage Door Opener

For questions or comments, contact

HomeLink at www.homelink.com or

1-800-355-3515.

Programming to a Genie Intellicode®

2 Garage Door Opener

Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter

must already be programmed to operate

with the garage door opener.

Note: To program HomeLink to the

transmitter you must first put the

transmitter into programming mode.

E142661

Red indicator lightA.

Green indicator lightB.

1. Press and hold one of the buttons on

the hand-held transmitter for 10

seconds. The indicator light will change

from green to red and green.

2. Press the same button twice to confirm

the change to programming mode. If

done properly the indicator light will

appear red.

3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches

(2–8 centemeter) of the button on the

visor you want to program.

4. Press and hold both the programmed

Genie button on the hand-held

transmitter and the button you want

to program. The indicator light on the

visor will flash rapidly when the

programming is successful.

Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit

for up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does not

program within 30 seconds the Genie

transmitter will need to be pressed again. If

the Genie transmitter indicator light displays

green and red, release the button until the

indicator light turns off before pressing the

button again.

Once HomeLink has been programmed

successfully, the Genie transmitter must

be changed out of program mode. To do

this:

1. Press and hold the previously

programmed Genie button on the

hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds.

The indicator light will change from red

to red and green.

2. Press the same button twice to confirm

the change. If done correctly the

indicator light will turn green.

Programming HomeLink to the Genie

Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor

Note: You may need a ladder to access the

garage door opener motor.

E142662

1. Press and hold the program button on

the Garage door opener motor until

both blue indicator lights turn on.

2. Release the program button. Only the

smaller round indicator light should be

on.

130

Universal Garage Door Opener

3. Press and release the program button.

The larger purple indicator light will

flash.

Note: The next two steps must be

completed in 30 seconds.

4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode

2 hand-held transmitter’s previously

programmed button. Both indicator

lights on the garage door opener motor

unit should now flash purple.

5. Press and hold the previously

programmed button on the visor for 2

seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times

until the garage door moves.

Programming is now complete.

Clearing a HomeLink Device

To erase programming from the three

HomeLink buttons press and hold the two

outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator

light begins to flash. The indicator light will

begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which

time both buttons should be released.

Programming has now been erased, and

the indicator light should blink slowly to

indicate the device is in train mode when

any of the three HomeLink buttons are

pressed.

FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada

Compliance

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry

Canada. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) this device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

Changes or modifications to your device

not expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance can void the

user’ s authority to operate the equipment.

131

Universal Garage Door Opener

WARNING

Do not plug optional electrical

accessories into the cigar lighter

socket (if equipped). Improper use

of the lighter can cause damage not

covered by your warranty, and can result

in fire or serious injury.

Note: Do not insert objects other than an

accessory plug into the power point. This

will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.

Note: Do not hang any type of accessory or

accessory bracket from the plug.

Note: Do not use the power point over the

vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or

a fuse may blow.

Note: Do not use the power point for

operating a cigar lighter element.

Note: Improper use of the power point can

cause damage not covered by your

warranty.

Note: Always keep the power point caps

closed when not in use.

Run the engine for full capacity use of the

power point. To prevent the battery from

being discharged:

• Do not use the power point longer than

necessary when the engine is not

running.

• Do not leave devices plugged in

overnight or when the vehicle is parked

for extended periods.

Locations

Power points may be found:

• on the center console

• inside the center console storage bin

• on the rear of the center console.

110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)

WARNING

Do not keep electrical devices

plugged in the power point whenever

the device is not in use. Do not use

any extension cord with the 110 volt AC

power point, since it will defeat the safety

protection design provided by the cap and

twist tab. Doing so my cause the power

point to overload due to powering multiple

devices that can reach beyond the 150

watt load limit and could result in fire or

serious injury.

Note: The power point will turn off after 13

minutes if the ignition is on without the

engine running. Keep the engine running or

cycle the ignition to keep the power point

on.

E143941

The power point is used for powering

electrical devices that require up to 150

watts. It is located on the rear of the center

console.

When the green indicator light, located on

the power point, is:

• on — power point is ready to supply

power.

• off — power point power supply is off;

ignition is not on.

• blinking — power point is in fault mode.

132

Auxiliary Power Points

The power point temporarily turns off

power if the 150 watt limit is exceeded. It

can also switch to a fault mode when it is

overloaded, overheated, or shorted. Unplug

your device and turn the ignition off then

on for overloading and shorting conditions.

Let the system cool off, then turn the

ignition off then on for an overheating

condition.

The power point is not designed for electric

devices such as:

• Cathode ray tube type televisions

• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,

electric saws and other electric power

tools, compressor-driven refrigerators,

etc.

• Measuring devices, which process

precise data, such as medical

equipment, measuring equipment, etc.

• Other appliances requiring an

extremely stable power supply:

microcomputer-controlled electric

blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.

133

Auxiliary Power Points

CENTER CONSOLE

WARNING

Use only soft cups in the cupholder.

Hard objects can injure you in a

collision.

Your vehicle may be equipped with a

variety of features.

E142433

CupholderA

Storage compartment with

auxiliary power point, auxiliary

input jack, USB port and media

hub

Auxiliary power pointC

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

E75193

Press near the rear edge of the door to

open it.

134

Storage Compartments

GENERAL INFORMATION

If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle

may exhibit some unusual driving

characteristics for approximately 5 miles

(8 kilometers) after you reconnect it. This

is because the engine management system

must realign itself with the engine. You can

disregard any unusual driving

characteristics during this period.

WARNINGS

Extended idling at high engine

speeds can produce very high

temperatures in the engine and

exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or

other damage.

Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle

on dry grass or other dry ground

cover. The emission system heats up

the engine compartment and exhaust

system, creating the risk of fire.

Do not start the engine in a closed

garage or in other enclosed areas.

Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always

open the garage door before you start the

engine.

If you smell exhaust fumes inside

your vehicle, have your vehicle

checked by your authorized dealer

immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if

you smell exhaust fumes.

This system meets all Canadian

interference-causing equipment standard

requirements regulating the impulse

electrical field or radio noise.

When you start the engine, avoid pressing

the accelerator pedal before and during

operation. Only use the accelerator pedal

when you have difficulty starting the

engine.

IGNITION SWITCH

E72128

0 (off) - The ignition is off.

Note: When you switch the ignition off and

leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in

the ignition. This could discharge your

vehicle battery.

Note: To switch the engine off when your

vehicle is moving, move the transmission

selector lever to position N. Use the brakes

to bring the vehicle to a safe stop. After your

vehicle has stopped, switch the engine off

and move the transmission selector lever to

position P. Turn the key to position 0 or I.

I (accessory) - Allows the electrical

accessories such as the radio to operate

while the engine is not running.

Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this

position for too long to avoid discharging

the battery.

II (on) - All electrical circuits operational.

Warning lamps and indicators are

illuminated.

III (start) - cranks the engine. Release the

key as soon as the engine starts.

KEYLESS STARTING (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNINGS

The keyless starting system may not

function if the key is close to metal

objects or electronic devices such as

mobile phones.

135

Starting and Stopping the Engine

WARNINGS

Always check that the steering wheel

lock is deactivated before

attempting to move your vehicle.

Note: A valid key must be located inside

your vehicle to switch the ignition on and

start the engine.

Switching the Ignition On (Accessory

Mode)

E142555

Press the START button once without your

foot on the brake pedal. The button is

located on the instrument panel near the

steering wheel. All electrical circuits and

accessories are operational and the

warning lamps and indicators illuminate.

Press the START button again without your

foot on the brake pedal to turn the vehicle

off completely.

Starting Your Vehicle

Carry out the following steps to start your

vehicle:

1. Move the transmission selector lever

to position P.

2. Fully press the brake pedal.

3. Press the START button.

The system does not function if:

• The key frequencies are jammed.

• The key battery has no charge.

If you are unable to start your vehicle, do

the following.

5-button remote

E142874

3-button remote

E145988

1. Hold the key next to the symbol on the

steering column.

2. With the key in this position, you can

use the start button to switch the

ignition on and start your vehicle.

Stopping the Engine When Your

Vehicle is Stationary

1. Move the transmission selector lever

to position P.

2. Press the START button.

Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits

warning lamps and indicators will be

switched off.

136

Starting and Stopping the Engine

Stopping the Engine When Your

Vehicle is Moving

1. Press and hold the START button for

a moment, or press it three times within

two seconds.

2. Move the transmission selector lever

to position N and use the brakes to

bring your vehicle to a safe stop.

3. When your vehicle has stopped, move

the transmission selector lever to

position P and switch the ignition off.

WARNING

Switching off the engine when the

vehicle is still moving will result in a

loss of brake and steering assistance.

The steering will not lock, but higher effort

will be required. When the ignition is

switched off, some electrical circuits,

warning lamps and indicators may also be

off.

Fast Restart

The fast restart feature allows you to

restart your vehicle within 20 seconds of

switching it off, even if a valid key is not

present.

Within 20 seconds of switching your

vehicle off, press the brake pedal and press

the start button. After 20 seconds have

expired, you can no longer start your

vehicle without the key present inside the

vehicle.

Once your vehicle has started, it remains

running until you press the start button,

even if a valid key has not been detected.

If you open and close a door while your

vehicle is running, the system searches for

a valid key. You cannot start your vehicle

if a valid key is not detected within 20

seconds.

STARTING A GASOLINE

ENGINE

When you start the engine the idle speed

will be increased to warm up the engine. If

the engine idle speed does not slow down

automatically, have your vehicle checked

by your authorized dealer.

Before starting the engine check the

following:

• Make sure all occupants have fastened

their safety belts.

• Make sure the headlamps and

electrical accessories are off.

• Make sure the parking brake is on.

• Move the transmission selector lever

to position P.

• Turn the ignition key to position II.

Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.

1. Move the transmission selector lever

to position P or N.

2. Fully press the brake pedal.

3. Start the engine. The engine may

continue cranking for up to 15 seconds

or until it starts.

Note: If you cannot start the engine on the

first try, wait for a short period of time and

try again.

If you have difficulty starting the engine

when the temperature is below -13°F

(-25°C), press the accelerator pedal

slightly and try again.

If you cannot start the engine after three

attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this

procedure.

1. Move the transmission selector lever

to position P.

2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and

hold it there.

3. Fully press the brake pedal.

4. Start the engine.

137

Starting and Stopping the Engine

Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes

WARNING

If you smell exhaust fumes inside

your vehicle, have your vehicle

checked by your authorized dealer

immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if

you smell exhaust fumes. Carbon

monoxide is present in exhaust fumes.

Take precautions to avoid its dangerous

effects.

Important Ventilating Information

If you stop your vehicle and the leave the

engine idling for long periods of time, we

recommend that you do one of the

following:

• Open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5

centimeters)

• Set your climate control to outside air.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF

EQUIPPED)

WARNINGS

Failure to follow engine block heater

instructions could result in property

damage or serious personal injury.

Do not use your heater with

ungrounded electrical systems or

two-pronged adapters. There is a risk

of electrical shock.

Note: The heater is most effective when

outdoor temperatures are below 0°F

(-18°C).

The heater acts as a starting aid by

warming the engine coolant. This allows

the climate control system to respond

quickly. The equipment includes a heater

element (installed in the engine block) and

a wire harness. You can connect the

system to a grounded 120 volt AC electrical

source.

We recommend that you do the following

for a safe and correct operation:

• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord

that is product certified by

Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or

Canadian Standards Association

(CSA). This extension cord must be

able to be used outdoors, in cold

temperatures, and be clearly marked

Suitable for Use with Outdoor

Appliances. Do not use an indoor

extension cord outdoors. This could

result in an electric shock or become a

fire hazard.

• Use as short an extension cord as

possible.

• Do not use multiple extension cords.

• Make sure that when in operation, the

extension cord plug and heater cord

plug connections are free and clear of

water. This could cause an electric

shock or fire.

• Make sure the vehicle is parked in a

clean area, clear of combustibles.

• Make sure the heater, heater cord and

extension cord are firmly connected.

• Check for heat anywhere in the

electrical hookup once the system has

been operating for approximately 30

minutes.

138

Starting and Stopping the Engine

• Make sure the system is unplugged and

properly stowed before driving your

vehicle. Make sure the protective cover

seals the prongs of the block heater

cord plug when not in use.

• Make sure the heater system is

checked for proper operation before

winter.

Using the Engine Block Heater

Make sure the receptacle terminals are

clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with

a dry cloth if necessary.

The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours

of energy per hour of use. The system does

not have a thermostat. It will achieve

maximum temperature after

approximately three hours of operation. If

you use the heater longer than three hours,

this will not improve system performance

and will use unnecessary electricity.

139

Starting and Stopping the Engine

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNINGS

Do not overfill the fuel tank. The

pressure in an overfilled tank may

cause leakage and lead to fuel spray

and fire.

The fuel system may be under

pressure. If you hear a hissing sound

near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel no

cap fuel system), do not refuel until the

sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray

out, which could cause serious personal

injury.

Automotive fuels can cause serious

injury or death if misused or

mishandled.

The flow of fuel through a fuel pump

nozzle can produce static electricity,

which can cause a fire if fuel is

pumped into an ungrounded fuel container.

Fuel ethanol and gasoline may

contain benzene, which is a

cancer-causing agent.

When refueling always shut the

engine off and never allow sparks or

open flames near the filler neck.

Never smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is

extremely hazardous under certain

conditions. Care should be taken to avoid

inhaling excess fumes.

Observe the following guidelines when

handling automotive fuel:

• Extinguish all smoking materials and

any open flames before refueling your

vehicle.

• Always turn off the vehicle before

refueling.

• Automotive fuels can be harmful or

fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as

gasoline is highly toxic and if

swallowed can cause death or

permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,

call a physician immediately, even if no

symptoms are immediately apparent.

The toxic effects of fuel may not be

visible for hours.

• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too

much fuel vapor of any kind can lead

to eye and respiratory tract irritation.

In severe cases, excessive or prolonged

breathing of fuel vapor can cause

serious illness and permanent injury.

• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If

fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove

contact lenses (if worn), flush with

water for 15 minutes and seek medical

attention. Failure to seek proper

medical attention could lead to

permanent injury.

• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed

through the skin. If fuel is splashed on

the skin, clothing or both, promptly

remove contaminated clothing and

wash skin thoroughly with soap and

water. Repeated or prolonged skin

contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes

skin irritation.

• Be particularly careful if you are taking

“ Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram

for the treatment of alcoholism.

Breathing gasoline vapors, or skin

contact could cause an adverse

reaction. In sensitive individuals, serious

personal injury or sickness may result.

If fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly

wash skin thoroughly with soap and

water. Consult a physician immediately

if you experience an adverse reaction.

140

Fuel and Refueling

FUEL QUALITY

Note: We recommend that you use only

high quality fuel without additives or other

engine treatments.

Do not use leaded gasoline or gasoline with

additives containing other metallic

compounds (e.g. manganese-based). They

could damage the emission system.

Choosing the Right Fuel

Note: Use of any fuel other than those

recommended may cause powertrain

damage, a loss of vehicle performance and

repairs may not be covered under warranty.

If your vehicle is not a flexible fuel vehicle,

then only use unleaded fuel or unleaded

fuel blended with a maximum of 15%

ethanol. Do not use fuel ethanol (E85),

diesel fuel, fuel methanol, leaded fuel or

any other fuel because it could damage or

impair the emission control system.

The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law.

Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel

or fuel additives with metallic compounds,

including manganese-based additives.

Octane Recommendations

Regular unleaded gasoline with a pump

(R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 is

recommended. Some fuel stations offer

fuels posted as regular with an octane

rating below 87, particularly in high altitude

areas. Fuels with octane levels below 87

are not recommended.

Note: Premium fuel will provide improved

performance for vehicles with EcoBoost®

engines and is recommended for severe duty

use such as trailer tow.

Do not be concerned if your engine

sometimes knocks lightly. However, if it

knocks heavily while you are using fuel with

the recommended octane rating, see your

authorized dealer to prevent any engine

damage.

RUNNING OUT OF FUEL

Avoid running out of fuel because this

situation may have an adverse effect on

powertrain components.

If you have run out of fuel:

• You may need to cycle the ignition from

off to on several times after refueling

to allow the fuel system to pump the

fuel from the tank to the engine. On

restarting, cranking time will take a few

seconds longer than normal. With

keyless ignition, just start the engine.

Crank time will be longer than usual.

• Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8 liters) of

fuel is enough to restart the engine. If

the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep

grade, more than 1 gallon (3.8 liters)

may be required.

• The service engine soon indicator may

come on. For more information on the

service engine soon indicator, See

Warning Lamps and Indicators

(page 80).

Refilling With a Portable Fuel

Container

WARNINGS

Do not insert the nozzle of portable

fuel containers or aftermarket

funnels into the capless fuel system.

This could damage the fuel system and its

seal, and may cause fuel to run onto the

ground instead of filling the tank, which

could result in serious personal injury.

141

Fuel and Refueling

WARNINGS

Do not try to pry open or push open

the capless fuel system with foreign

objects. This could damage the fuel

system and its seal and cause injury to you

or others.

Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels; they

will not work with the capless fuel system

and can damage it. The included funnel has

been specially designed to work safely with

your vehicle.

When filling the vehicle’s fuel tank from a

portable fuel container, use the funnel

included with the vehicle.

E142668

1. Locate the white plastic funnel in the

spare tire compartment.

2. Slowly insert the funnel into the

capless fuel system.

3. Fill the vehicle with fuel from the

portable fuel container.

4. When done, clean the funnel or

properly dispose of it. Extra funnels can

be purchased from your authorized

dealer if you choose to dispose of the

funnel.

REFUELING

WARNINGS

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel

fire can cause severe injuries.

Read and follow all the instructions

on the pump island.

Turn off your engine when you are

refueling.

Do not smoke if you are near fuel or

refueling your vehicle.

Keep sparks, flames and smoking

materials away from fuel.

Stay outside your vehicle and do not

leave the fuel pump unattended

when refueling your vehicle. This is

against the law in some places.

Keep children away from the fuel

pump; never let children pump fuel.

Do not use personal electronic

devices while refueling.

Use the following guidelines to avoid

electrostatic charge build-up when filling

an ungrounded fuel container:

• Place approved fuel container on the

ground.

• Do not fill a fuel container while it is in

the vehicle (including the cargo area).

• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact

with the fuel container while filling.

• Do not use a device that would hold

the fuel pump handle in the fill position.

142

Fuel and Refueling

Easy Fuel® No Cap Fuel System

WARNING

The fuel system may be under

pressure. If you hear a hissing sound

near the fuel filler door, do not refuel

until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may

spray out, which could cause serious

personal injury.

When fueling your vehicle:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the fuel filler door.

3. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully

into the fuel system, and leave the

nozzle fully inserted until you are done

pumping.

4. After you are done pumping fuel, slowly

remove the fuel filler nozzle. Allow

about ten seconds after pumping fuel

before removing the fuel filler nozzle.

This allows residual fuel to drain back

into the fuel tank and not spill onto the

vehicle.

Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if

overfilling the fuel tank. Do not overfill the

tank to the point that the fuel is able to

bypass the fuel filler nozzle. The overfilled

fuel may run down the drain located below

and in front of the fuel filler door.

If the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed,

a Check fuel fill inlet message may appear

on the instrument cluster. See Warning

Lamps and Indicators (page 80).

At the next opportunity, do the following:

1. Safely pull off the road.

2. Turn off the engine.

3. Open the fuel filler door and remove

any visible debris from the fuel fill

opening.

4. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the

fuel fill funnel provided with the vehicle

several times to dislodge any debris

and allow the inlet to close properly.

If this action corrects the problem, the

message may not reset immediately. It

may take several driving cycles for the

message to turn off. A driving cycle

consists of an engine start-up (after four

or more hours with the engine off) followed

by city or highway driving. Continuing to

drive with the message on may cause the

service engine soon lamp to turn on as

well.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARNINGS

Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle

in dry grass or other dry ground cover.

The emission system heats up the

engine compartment and exhaust system,

which can start a fire.

Exhaust leaks may result in entry of

harmful and potentially lethal fumes

into the passenger compartment. If

you smell exhaust fumes inside your

vehicle, have your dealer inspect your

vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you

smell exhaust fumes.

Your vehicle is equipped with various

emission control components and a

catalytic converter which will enable your

vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust

emission standards. To make sure that the

catalytic converter and other emission

control components continue to work

properly:

To make sure that the catalytic converter

and other emission control components

continue to work properly:

• Use only the specified fuel listed.

• Avoid running out of fuel.

143

Fuel and Refueling

• Do not turn off the ignition while your

vehicle is moving, especially at high

speeds.

• Have the items listed in scheduled

maintenance information performed

according to the specified schedule.

The scheduled maintenance items listed

in scheduled maintenance information are

essential to the life and performance of

your vehicle and to its emissions system

If other than Ford, Motorcraft or

Ford-authorized parts are used for

maintenance replacements or for service

of components affecting emission control,

such non-Ford parts should be equivalent

to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in

performance and durability.

Illumination of the service engine soon

indicator, charging system warning light or

the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,

strange odors, smoke or loss of engine

power could indicate that the emission

control system is not working properly.

An improperly operating or damaged

exhaust system may allow exhaust to

enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or

improperly operating exhaust system

inspected and repaired immediately.

Do not make any unauthorized changes to

your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle

owners and anyone who manufactures,

repairs, services, sells, leases, trades

vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles

are not permitted to intentionally remove

an emission control device or prevent it

from working. Information about your

vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle

Emission Control Information Decal

located on or near the engine. This decal

also lists engine displacement

Please consult your Warranty Guide for

complete emission warranty information

On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)

Your vehicle is equipped with a computer

that monitors the engine’ s emission control

system. This system is commonly known

as the on-board diagnostics system

(OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the

environment by ensuring that your vehicle

continues to meet government emission

standards. The OBD-II system also assists

your authorized dealer in properly servicing

your vehicle.

When the service engine soon

indicator illuminates, the OBD-II

system has detected a

malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may

cause the service engine soon indicator to

illuminate. Examples are:

1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the

engine may misfire or run poorly.

2. Poor fuel quality or water in the

fuel—the engine may misfire or run

poorly.

3. The fuel fill inlet may not have been

properly closed. See Refueling (page

142).

4. Driving through deep water—the

electrical system may be wet.

These temporary malfunctions can be

corrected by filling the fuel tank with good

quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill

inlet or letting the electrical system dry out.

After three driving cycles without these or

any other temporary malfunctions present,

the service engine soon indicator should

stay off the next time the engine is started.

A driving cycle consists of a cold engine

startup followed by mixed city/highway

driving. No additional vehicle service is

required.

144

Fuel and Refueling

If the service engine soon indicator remains

on, have your vehicle serviced at the first

available opportunity. Although some

malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may

not have symptoms that are apparent,

continued driving with the service engine

soon indicator on can result in increased

emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced

engine and transmission smoothness, and

lead to more costly repairs.

Readiness for

Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)

Testing

Some state/provincial and local

governments may have

Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs

to inspect the emission control equipment

on your vehicle. Failure to pass this

inspection could prevent you from getting

a vehicle registration.

If the service engine soon

indicator is on or the bulb does

not work, the vehicle may need

to be serviced. See On-Board Diagnostics.

Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if

the service engine soon indicator is on or

not working properly (bulb is burned out),

or if the OBD-II system has determined

that some of the emission control systems

have not been properly checked. In this

case, the vehicle is considered not ready

for I/M testing.

If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has

just been serviced, or the battery has

recently run down or been replaced, the

OBD-II system may indicate that the

vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To

determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M

testing, turn the ignition key to the on

position for 15 seconds without cranking

the engine. If the service engine soon

indicator blinks eight times, it means that

the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if

the service engine soon indicator stays on

solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for

I/M testing.

The OBD-II system is designed to check

the emission control system during normal

driving. A complete check may take several

days. If the vehicle is not ready for I/M

testing, the following driving cycle

consisting of mixed city and highway

driving may be performed:

15 minutes of steady driving on an

expressway/highway followed by 20

minutes of stop-and-go driving with at

least four 30-second idle periods

Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight

hours without starting the engine. Then,

start the engine and complete the above

driving cycle. The engine must warm up to

its normal operating temperature. Once

started, do not turn off the engine until the

above driving cycle is complete. If the

vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the

above driving cycle will have to be

repeated.

FUEL CONSUMPTION

Note: The amount of usable fuel in the

empty reserve varies and should not be

relied upon to increase driving range. When

refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge

indicates empty, you might not be able to

refuel the full amount of the advertised

capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty

reserve still present in the tank.

145

Fuel and Refueling

The advertised capacity is the indicated

capacity and the empty reserve combined.

Indicated capacity is the difference in the

amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank

when the fuel gauge indicates empty.

Empty reserve is the amount of fuel in the

tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.

Filling the Tank

For consistent results when filling the fuel

tank:

• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an

inaccurate reading results if the engine

is left running.

• Use the same fill rate

(low-medium-high) each time the tank

is filled.

• Allow no more than two automatic

click-offs when filling.

Results are most accurate when the filling

method is consistent.

Calculating Fuel Economy

Do not measure fuel economy during the

first 1000 miles (1600 km) of driving (this

is your engine’s break-in period); a more

accurate measurement is obtained after

2000 miles - 3000 miles (3200 km - 4800

km). Also, fuel expense, frequency of fill

ups or fuel gauge readings are not accurate

ways to measure fuel economy.

1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record

the initial odometer reading.

2. Each time you fill the tank, record the

amount of fuel added.

3. After at least three to five tank fill ups,

fill the fuel tank and record the current

odometer reading.

4. Subtract your initial odometer reading

from the current odometer reading.

5. Calculate fuel economy by dividing

miles traveled by gallons used (For

Metric: Multiply liters used by 100, then

divide by kilometers traveled).

Keep a record for at least one month and

record the type of driving (city or highway).

This provides an accurate estimate of the

vehicle’s fuel economy under current

driving conditions. Additionally, keeping

records during summer and winter show

how temperature impacts fuel economy.

In general, lower temperatures mean lower

fuel economy.

146

Fuel and Refueling

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNINGS

Always set the parking brake fully

and make sure the gearshift is

latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition

to the off position and remove the key

whenever you leave your vehicle.

Do not apply the brake pedal and

accelerator pedal simultaneously.

Applying both pedals simultaneously

for more than three seconds will limit

engine rpm, which may result in difficulty

maintaining speed in traffic and could lead

to serious injury.

Understanding the Positions of

Your Automatic Transmission

Putting your vehicle in gear:

1. Fully press down the brake pedal.

2. Press and hold the button on the front

of the gearshift lever.

3. Move the gearshift lever into the

desired gear.

4. Release the button and your

transmission will remain in the selected

gear.

E133124

P (Park)

This position locks the transmission and

prevents the front wheels from turning.

Come to a complete stop before putting

your vehicle into and out of P (Park)

R (Reverse)

With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the

vehicle will move backward. Always come

to a complete stop before shifting into and

out of R (Reverse).

N (Neutral)

With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the

vehicle can be started and is free to roll.

Hold the brake pedal down while in this

position.

D (Drive)

The normal driving position for the best

fuel economy. Transmission operates in

gears one through six.

S (Sport)

Moving the gearshift lever to S (Sport):

• Provides additional grade (engine)

braking and extends lower gear

operation to enhance performance for

uphill climbs, hilly terrain or

mountainous areas. This will increase

engine RPM during engine braking.

• Provides additional lower gear

operation through the automatic

transmission shift strategy.

• Gears are selected more quickly and

at higher engine speeds.

147

Transmission

SelectShift Automatic®

Transmission (If Equipped)

Your SelectShift automatic transmission

gives you the ability to manually change

gears if you'd like. To use SelectShift, move

the gearshift lever into S (Sport). Now you

can use the +/- buttons on the side of your

gearshift lever to select gears.

When using the toggle for manual shifting:

• Press the (+) button to upshift.

• Press the (-) button to downshift.

Note: After you have assumed manual

control with SelectShift your vehicle will

remain in this mode until you return the

gearshift lever from (S) Sport, back to (D)

Drive.

Upshift to the recommended shift speeds

according to the following chart:

Upshifts when accelerating (recom-

mended for best fuel economy)

Shift from:

15 mph (24 km/h)1 - 2

25 mph (40 km/h)2 - 3

40 mph (64 km/h)3 - 4

45 mph (72 km/h)4 - 5

50 mph (80 km/h)5 - 6

The instrument cluster will display the

selected gear that you are currently in.

SelectShift will automatically make some

shifts for you in the event that your engine

speed is running at too high, or to low an

RPM.

Note: Engine damage may occur if

excessive engine revving is held without

shifting.

Brake-Shift Interlock

WARNINGS

Do not drive your vehicle until you

verify that the brake lamps are

working.

When doing this procedure, you will

be taking the vehicle out of park

which means the vehicle can roll

freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle

movement, always fully set the parking

brake prior to doing this procedure. Use

wheel chocks if appropriate.

If the parking brake is fully released,

but the brake warning lamp remains

illuminated, the brakes may not be

working properly. See your authorized

dealer.

Use the brake shift interlock lever to move

the gearshift lever from the park position

in the event of an electrical malfunction or

if your vehicle has a dead battery.

Apply the parking brake and turn the

ignition off before performing this

procedure.

1. Insert a screwdriver (or similar tool)

between the shifter bezel and the top

finish panel.

2. Use the tool to unsnap the shifter bezel

from the finish panel.

E142627

148

Transmission

3. Locate the white lever located on the

left side of the shifter.

4. Using the tool move the white lever

towards the rear of the shifter.

5. While holding the white lever in the rear

position, move the shifter from the park

position.

6. Press the shifter bezel back into the top

finish panel until it snaps back into

position.

7. Apply the brake pedal, start the vehicle

and release the parking brake.

Note: See your authorized dealer as soon

as possible if this procedure is used.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud

or Snow

Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine

is not at normal operating temperature or

damage to the transmission may occur.

Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than

a minute or damage to the transmission and

tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.

If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,

it may be rocked out by shifting between

forward and reverse gears, stopping

between shifts in a steady pattern. Press

lightly on the accelerator in each gear.

HILL START ASSIST

WARNINGS

The hill start assist feature does not

replace the parking brake. When you

leave the vehicle, always apply the

parking brake and shift the transmission

into P (Park).

You must remain in the vehicle once

you have activated the hill start

assist feature.

WARNINGS

During all times, you are responsible

for controlling the vehicle,

supervising the hill start assist

system and intervening, if required.

If the engine is revved excessively, or

if a malfunction is detected when the

hill start assist feature is active, the

hill start assist feature will be deactivated.

This feature makes it easier to pull away

when the vehicle is on a slope without the

need to use the parking brake.

When this feature is active, the vehicle will

remain stationary on the slope for two to

three seconds after you release the brake

pedal. This allows you time to move your

foot from the brake to the accelerator

pedal. The brakes are released

automatically once the engine has

developed sufficient drive to prevent the

vehicle from rolling down the slope. This

is an advantage when pulling away on a

slope, (for example from a car park ramp,

traffic lights or when reversing uphill into

a parking space).

This feature is activated automatically on

any slope that can result in significant

vehicle rollback. This feature will not

operate if the parking brake is activated.

Using Hill Start Assist

1. Press the brake pedal to bring the

vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep

the brake pedal pressed.

2. If the sensors detect that the vehicle is

on a slope, the hill start assist feature

will be activated automatically.

3. When you remove your foot from the

brake pedal, the vehicle will remain on

the slope without rolling away for

approximately two or three seconds.

This hold time will automatically be

extended if you are in the process of

driving off.

149

Transmission

4. Drive off in the normal manner. The

brakes will be released automatically.

150

Transmission

USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE

Note: The 4WD temporarily disabled

message will be displayed if the 4WD

system has overheated and defaulted to

front-wheel drive. This condition may occur

if the vehicle is operated in extreme high

load conditions or with excessive wheel slip,

such as deep sand. To resume normal 4WD

function as soon as possible, stop the

vehicle in a safe location and turn off the

engine. The 4WD restored message will be

displayed for approximately five seconds

after the system cools and normal 4WD

function returns.

Note: The Intelligent 4WD system gives

your vehicle some limited off-road

capabilities. Operating your vehicle in

conditions other than moderate sand, snow,

mud or rough roads could subject it to

excessive stress which might result in

damage. This damage is not covered under

your warranty.

Note: When a 4WD system fault is present,

the warning 4WD malfunction Service

required will display in the information

display. The 4WD system is not functioning

correctly and defaulted to front-wheel drive.

When this warning is displayed, have your

vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.

E142669

You will be able to see the power

distribution between the front and rear

wheels represented by an icon in your

information display. More power to either

front or rear wheels will be displayed by

more area filled in.

Your vehicle may be equipped with a

full-time four-wheel drive (4WD) system.

The 4WD system is a proactive system,

meaning it not only responds to wheel slip

between the front and rear wheels but also

has the ability to anticipate wheel slip and

transfer torque to the rear wheels before

slip occurs. Even when no wheel slip is

present, the Intelligent 4WD system is

continuously making adjustments to the

torque distribution, in an attempt to

improve the vehicle’s straight line and

cornering behavior, both on and off road.

The system is active all the time and

requires no input from the operator.

All components of the Intelligent 4WD

system are sealed for life and require no

maintenance.

If your vehicle is equipped with Intelligent

4WD, a spare tire of a different size other

than the tire provided should never be

used. If the spare tire is installed, the 4WD

system may disable automatically and

enter front-wheel drive only mode to

protect driveline components. This

condition may be indicated by a 4WD Off

message in the Information displays

chapter. See Information displays in the

Instrument Cluster chapter for more

information. If there is a 4WD Off message

in the information display from using the

spare tire, this indicator should turn off

after reinstalling the repaired or replaced

normal road tire and driving a short

distance. It is recommended to reinstall

the repaired or replaced road tire as soon

as possible. Major dissimilar tire sizes

between the front and rear axles could

cause the 4WD system to stop functioning

and default to front-wheel drive or damage

the 4WD system.

151

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

Driving in Special Conditions With

Four-Wheel Drive

4WD vehicles are equipped for driving on

sand, snow, mud and rough roads and have

operating characteristics that are

somewhat different from conventional

vehicles, both on and off the highway.

When driving at slow speeds off-highway

under high outside temperatures, use a low

gear when possible. Low gear operation

will maximize the engine and transmission

cooling capability.

Under severe operating conditions, the A/C

may cycle on and off to protect

overheating of the engine.

Basic operating principles

• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which

can affect the normal steering

characteristics of your vehicle.

• Be extremely careful when driving on

pavement made slippery by loose sand,

water, gravel, snow or ice.

If your vehicle goes off the edge of the

pavement

• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the

pavement, slow down, but avoid severe

brake application, ease the vehicle

back onto the pavement only after

reducing your speed. Do not turn the

steering wheel too sharply while

returning to the road surface.

• It may be safer to stay on the apron or

shoulder of the road and slow down

gradually before returning to the

pavement. You may lose control if you

do not slow down or if you turn the

steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.

• It often may be less risky to strike small

objects, such as highway reflectors,

with minor damage to your vehicle

rather than attempt a sudden return to

the pavement which could cause the

vehicle to slide sideways out of control

or rollover. Remember, your safety and

the safety of others should be your

primary concern.

Emergency maneuvers

• In an unavoidable emergency situation

where a sudden sharp turn must be

made, remember to avoid

“over-driving” your vehicle (for

example; turn the steering wheel only

as rapidly and as far as required to

avoid the emergency). Excessive

steering will result in less vehicle

control, not more. Additionally, smooth

variations of the accelerator and/or

brake pedal pressure should be utilized

if changes in vehicle speed are called

152

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration

or braking which could result in an

increased risk of loss of vehicle control,

vehicle rollover and/or personal injury.

Use all available road surface to return

the vehicle to a safe direction of travel.

• In the event of an emergency stop,

avoid skidding the tires and do not

attempt any sharp steering wheel

movements.

• If the vehicle goes from one type of

surface to another (i.e., from concrete

to gravel) there will be a change in the

way the vehicle responds to a

maneuver (steering, acceleration or

braking). Again, avoid these abrupt

inputs.

Sand

When driving over sand, try to keep all four

wheels on the most solid area of the trail.

Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift

to a lower gear and drive steadily through

the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly

and avoid spinning the wheels.

Do not drive your 4WD vehicle in deep sand

for an extended period of time. This will

cause the 4WD system to overheat. The

instrument cluster will display the message

4WD temporarily disabled. To resume

normal 4WD operation, turn off the vehicle

and allow the 4WD system to cool down

for a minimum of 15 minutes. After the

system has cooled down, normal 4WD

function will return and the instrument

cluster will briefly display 4WD restored.

When driving at slow speeds in deep sand

under high outside temperatures, use a low

gear when possible. Low gear operation

will maximize the engine and transmission

cooling capability.

Avoid excessive speed because vehicle

momentum can work against you and

cause the vehicle to become stuck to the

point that assistance may be required from

another vehicle. Remember, you may be

able to back out the way you came if you

proceed with caution.

Mud and water

If you must drive through high water, drive

slowly. Traction or brake capability may

be limited.

When driving through water, determine the

depth; avoid water higher than the bottom

of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom

of the hubs (for trucks) (if possible) and

proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets

wet, the vehicle may stall.

E142667

Once through water, always try the brakes.

Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as

effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be

improved by moving your vehicle slowly

while applying light pressure on the brake

pedal.

Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle

speed or direction when you are driving in

mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction

in slick mud. If the vehicle does slide, steer

in the direction of the slide until you regain

control of the vehicle.

153

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

After driving through mud, clean off residue

stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.

Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating

driveshafts causes an imbalance that

could damage drive components.

Note: Driving through deep water may

damage the transmission. If the front or rear

axle is submerged in water, the axle

lubricant and power transfer unit lubricant

should be checked and changed if

necessary.

E143950

“Tread Lightly” is an educational program

designed to increase public awareness of

land-use regulations and responsibilities

in our nations wilderness areas. Ford Motor

Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and

the Bureau of Land Management in

encouraging you to help preserve our

national forest and other public and private

lands by “treading lightly”.

Driving on hilly or sloping terrain

Although natural obstacles may make it

necessary to travel diagonally up or down

a hill or steep incline, you should always

try to drive straight up or straight down.

Note: Note: Avoid driving crosswise or

turning on steep slopes or hills. A danger lies

in losing traction, slipping sideways and

possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a

hill, determine beforehand the route you will

use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill

without seeing what conditions are on the

other side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill

without the aid of an observer.

When climbing a steep slope or hill, start

in a lower gear rather than downshifting to

a lower gear from a higher gear once the

ascent has started. This reduces strain on

the engine and the possibility of stalling.

If you do stall out, do not try to turnaround

because you might roll over. It is better to

back down to a safe location.

Apply just enough power to the wheels to

climb the hill. Too much power will cause

the tires to slip, spin or lose traction,

resulting in loss of vehicle control.

E143949

Descend a hill in the same gear you would

use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive

brake application and brake overheating.

Do not descend in neutral; instead,

disengage overdrive or manually shift to a

lower gear. When descending a steep hill,

avoid sudden hard braking as you could

lose control. The front wheels have to be

turning in order to steer the vehicle.

Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore

apply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump”

the brakes.

Driving on snow and ice

WARNING

If you are driving in slippery

conditions that require tire chains or

cables, then it is critical that you drive

cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for

longer stopping distances and avoid

aggressive steering to reduce the chances

of a loss of vehicle control which can lead

to serious injury or death. If the rear end of

the vehicle slides while cornering, steer in

the direction of the slide until you regain

control of the vehicle.

154

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause

transmission damage.

4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD

vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like

any other vehicle. Should you start to slide

while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn

the steering wheel in the direction of the

slide until you regain control.

Avoid sudden applications of power and

quick changes of direction on snow and

ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and

steadily when starting from a full stop.

Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an

4WD vehicle may accelerate better than

a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice,

it won't stop any faster, because as in other

vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels.

Do not become overconfident as to road

conditions.

Make sure you allow sufficient distance

between you and other vehicles for

stopping. Drive slower than usual and

consider using one of the lower gears. In

emergency stopping situations, apply the

brake steadily. Since your vehicle is

equipped with a four wheel anti-lock brake

system (ABS), do not “pump” the brakes.

Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter

for additional information on the operation

of the anti-lock brake system.

Maintenance and modifications

The suspension and steering systems on

your vehicle have been designed and

tested to provide predictable performance

whether loaded or empty and durable load

carrying capability. For this reason, Ford

Motor Company strongly recommends that

you do not make modifications such as

adding or removing parts (such as lift kits

or stabilizer bars) or by using replacement

parts not equivalent to the original factory

equipment.

Any modifications to a vehicle that raise

the center of gravity can make it more likely

the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss

of control. Ford Motor Company

recommends that caution be used with

any vehicle equipped with a high load or

device (such as ladder or luggage racks).

Failure to maintain your vehicle properly

may void the warranty, increase your repair

cost, reduce vehicle performance and

operational capabilities and adversely

affect driver and passenger safety.

Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis

components is recommended if the vehicle

is subjected to off-highway usage.

155

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

GENERAL INFORMATION

Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If

a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or

continuous squeal sound is present, the

brake linings may be worn-out and should

be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the

vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder

in the steering wheel while braking, the

vehicle should be inspected by an

authorized dealer.

Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the

wheels, even under normal driving

conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the

brakes wear and does not contribute to

brake noise. See Cleaning the Alloy

Wheels (page 240).

E138644

See Warning Lamps and

Indicators (page 80).

Wet brakes result in reduced braking

efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a

few times when driving from a car wash or

standing water to dry the brakes.

Brake Over Accelerator

In the event the accelerator pedal

becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady

and firm pressure to the brake pedal to

slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.

If you experience this condition, apply the

brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe

stop. Turn the engine off, shift to position

P and apply the parking brake, and then

inspect the accelerator pedal for any

interferences. If none are found and the

condition persists, have your vehicle towed

to the nearest authorized dealer.

Emergency Brake Assist

Emergency brake assist detects when you

brake heavily by measuring the rate at

which you press the brake pedal. It

provides maximum braking efficiency as

long as you press the pedal. Emergency

brake assist can reduce stopping distances

in critical situations.

Anti-lock Brake System

This system helps you maintain steering

control during emergency stops by keeping

the brakes from locking.

This lamp momentarily

illuminates when the ignition is

turned on. If the light does not

illuminate during start up, remains on or

flashes, the anti-lock braking system may

be disabled and may need to be serviced.

E138644

If the system is disabled, normal

braking is still effective. If the

brake warning lamp illuminates

with the parking brake released, have your

brake system serviced immediately.

HINTS ON DRIVING WITH

ANTI-LOCK BRAKES

Note: When the system is operating, the

brake pedal will pulse and may travel

further. Maintain pressure on the brake

pedal. You may also hear a noise from the

system. This is normal.

The ABS will not eliminate the risks when:

• you drive too closely to the vehicle in

front of you

• your vehicle is hydroplaning

• you take corners too fast

• the road surface is poor.

156

Brakes

PARKING BRAKE

WARNING

Always set the parking brake fully

and leave your vehicle with the

transmission selector lever in

position P.

Note: Do not press the release button while

pulling the lever up.

To apply the parking brake:

1. Press the foot brake pedal firmly.

2. Pull the parking brake lever up to its

fullest extent.

Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and

facing uphill, move the transmission selector

lever to position P and turn the steering

wheel away from the curb.

Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and

facing downhill, move the transmission

selector lever to P and turn the steering

wheel toward the curb.

To release the parking brake:

1. Press the brake pedal firmly.

2. Pull the lever up slightly.

3. Press the release button and push the

lever down.

157

Brakes

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

The traction control system helps avoid

drive wheel spin and loss of traction.

If your vehicle begins to slide, the system

applies the brakes to individual wheels

and, when needed, reduces engine power

at the same time. If the wheels spin when

accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,

the system reduces engine power in order

to increase traction.

USING TRACTION CONTROL

In certain situations (e.g. stuck in snow or

mud), turning the traction control off may

be beneficial as this allows the wheels to

spin with full engine power. Turn off the

traction control system using the

information display control. See General

Information (page 84).

System Indicator Lights and

Messages

WARNING

If a failure has been detected within

the AdvanceTrac system, the

stability control light will illuminate

steadily. Verify that the AdvanceTrac

system was not manually disabled using

the information display control. If the

stability control light still illuminates

steadily, have the system serviced by an

authorized dealer immediately. Operating

your vehicle with AdvanceTrac disabled

could lead to an increased risk of loss of

vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal

injury and death.

E138639

The stability control light

temporarily illuminates on

engine start-up and flashes

when a driving condition activates the

stability system.

The stability control off light

temporarily illuminates on

engine start-up and stays on

when the traction control system is turned

off.

When the traction control system is turned

off or on, a message appears in the

information display showing system status.

158

Traction Control

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGS

Vehicle modifications involving

braking system, aftermarket roof

racks, suspension, steering system,

tire construction and wheel and tire size

may change the handling characteristics

of the vehicle and may adversely affect

the performance of the AdvanceTrac

system. In addition, installing any stereo

loudspeakers may interfere with and

adversely affect the AdvanceTrac system.

Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker

as far as possible from the front center

console, the tunnel, and the front seats in

order to minimize the risk of interfering with

the AdvanceTrac sensors. Reducing the

effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac system

could lead to an increased risk of loss of

vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal

injury and death.

Remember that even advanced

technology cannot defy the laws of

physics. It’s always possible to lose

control of a vehicle due to inappropriate

driver input for the conditions. Aggressive

driving on any road condition can cause

you to lose control of your vehicle

increasing the risk of personal injury or

property damage. Activation of the

AdvanceTrac system is an indication that

at least some of the tires have exceeded

their ability to grip the road; this could

reduce the operator’s ability to control the

vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of

vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal

injury and death. If your AdvanceTrac

system activates, SLOW DOWN.

The AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability

Control system helps you keep control of

your vehicle when on a slippery surface.

The electronic stability control portion of

the system helps avoid skids and lateral

slides and roll stability control helps avoid

a vehicle rollover. The traction control

system helps avoid drive wheel spin and

loss of traction. See Using Traction

Control (page 158).

E72903

Vehicle without AdvanceTrac

with RSC skidding off its

intended route.

Vehicle with AdvanceTrac with

RSC maintaining control on a

slippery surface.

159

Stability Control

USING STABILITY CONTROL

AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability

Control™ (RSC®)

The system automatically activates when

you start your engine. The AdvanceTrac

with RSC system cannot be completely

turned off, but the ESC and RSC portions

of the system are disabled when the

transmission is in R (Reverse). The traction

control portion of the system can be turned

off independently. See Using Traction

Control (page 158).

160

Stability Control

PARKING AID (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNINGS

To help avoid personal injury, please

read and understand the limitations

of the system as contained in this

section. Sensing is only an aid for some

(generally large and fixed) objects when

moving in reverse on a flat surface at

parking speeds. Traffic control systems,

inclement weather, air brakes, and external

motors and fans may also affect the

function of the sensing system; this may

include reduced performance or a false

activation.

To help avoid personal injury, always

use caution when in R (Reverse) and

when using the sensing system.

This system is not designed to

prevent contact with small or moving

objects. The system is designed to

provide a warning to assist the driver in

detecting large stationary objects to avoid

damaging the vehicle. The system may not

detect smaller objects, particularly those

close to the ground.

Certain add-on devices such as large

trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks

and any device that may block the

normal detection zone of the system, may

create false beeps.

Note: Keep the sensors, located on the

bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and

large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors

are covered, the system’s accuracy can be

affected. Do not clean the sensors with

sharp objects.

Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to

the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned

or bent, the sensing zone may be altered

causing inaccurate measurement of

obstacles or false alarms.

Note: If your vehicle is equipped with

MyKey®, it is possible to prevent turning the

sensing system off. See MyKey® (page 49).

The sensing system warns the driver of

obstacles within a certain range of the

bumper area. The system turns on

automatically whenever the ignition is

switched on.

When receiving a detection warning, the

radio volume is reduced to a

predetermined level. After the warning

goes away, the radio volume returns to the

previous level.

Rear Sensing System

The rear sensors are only active when the

transmission is in R (Reverse). As the

vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the

rate of the audible warning increases.

When the obstacle is fewer than 10 inches

(25 centimeters) away, the warning

sounds continuously. If a stationary or

receding object is detected farther than 10

inches (25 centimeters) from the side of

the vehicle, the tone sounds for only three

seconds. Once the system detects an

object approaching, the warning sounds

again.

E130178

Coverage area of up to 6 feet (2

meters) from the rear bumper.

There is decreased coverage

area at the outer corners of the

bumper.

161

Parking Aids

The system detects certain objects while

the transmission is in R (Reverse):

• and moving toward a stationary object

at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less

• but not moving, and a moving object is

approaching the rear of the vehicle at

a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less

• and moving at a speed of less than 3

mph (5 km/h) and a moving object is

approaching the rear of the vehicle at

a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h).

The system can be turned off using the

information display control. See General

Information (page 84). If a fault is

present in the system, a warning message

appears in the information display and

does not allow the driver to switch the

faulted system on.

Front Sensing System

The front sensors are active when the

gearshift is in any position other than P

(Park) or N (Neutral) and the vehicle speed

is below 6 mph (10 km/h).

E130382

Coverage area of up to 27 inches

(70 centimeters) from the front

of the vehicle and about 6–14

inches (15–35 centimeters) to

the side of the front end of the

vehicle. Refer to the reverse

sensing section for details on

coverage area.

The system sounds an audible warning

when obstacles are near either bumper in

the following manner:

• Objects detected by the front sensors

are indicated by a high-pitched tone

from the front radio speakers.

• Objects detected by the rear sensors

are indicated by a lower pitched tone

from the rear radio speakers.

• The sensing system reports the

obstacle which is closest to the front

or rear of the vehicle. For example, if

an obstacle is 24 inches (60

centimeters) from the front of the

vehicle and, at the same time, an

obstacle is only 16 inches (40

centimeters) from the rear of the

vehicle, the lower pitched tone sounds.

• An alternating warning sounds from

the front and rear if there are objects

at both bumpers that are closer than

10 inches (25 centimeters).

162

Parking Aids

For specific information on the reverse

sensing portion of the system, refer to that

section.

E142434

Press the button to switch the system off.

It will remain off for the entire ignition

cycle.

ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (IF

EQUIPPED)

WARNING

This system is designed to be a

supplementary park aid. It may not

work in all conditions and is not

intended to replace the driver’s attention

and judgment. The driver is responsible for

avoiding hazards and maintaining a safe

distance and speed, even when the system

is in use.

Note: The driver is always responsible for

controlling the vehicle, supervising the

system and intervening if required.

The system detects an available parallel

parking space and automatically steers

the vehicle into the space (hands-free)

while you control the accelerator, gearshift

and brakes. The system visually and

audibly instructs you to park the vehicle.

The system may not function correctly if

something passes between the front

bumper and the parking space (i.e. a

pedestrian or cyclist) or if the edge of the

neighboring parked vehicle is high from the

ground (i.e. a bus, tow truck or flatbed

truck).

Note: The sensors may not detect objects

in heavy rain or other conditions that cause

disruptive reflections.

Note: The sensors may not detect objects

with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves.

The system should not be used if:

• a foreign object (i.e. bike rack or trailer)

is attached to the front or rear of the

vehicle or at another location close to

the sensors.

• an overhanging object (i.e. surfboard)

is attached to the roof.

• the front bumper or side sensors are

damaged (i.e. in a collision) or

obstructed by a foreign object (i.e. front

bumper cover).

• a mini-spare tire is in use.

Using Active Park Assist

E142733

Press the button. The touch screen

displays a message and a corresponding

graphic to indicate it's searching for a

parking space. Use the turn signal to

indicate which side of the vehicle you want

the system to search on.

163

Parking Aids

Note: If the turn signal is not on, the system

automatically searches on the vehicle's

passenger side.

E130107

When a suitable space is found, the touch

screen displays a message and a chime

sounds. Slow down and stop at

approximately position (A), then follow

the instructions on the touch screen.

Note: You must observe that the selected

space remains clear of obstructions at all

times in the maneuver.

Note: Vehicles with overhanging loads (e.g.

a bus or a truck), street furniture and other

items may not be detected by active park

assist. You must make sure the selected

space is suitable for parking.

Note: The vehicle should be driven as

parallel to other vehicles as possible while

passing a parking space.

Note: The system always offers the last

detected parking space (i.e. if the vehicle

detects multiple spaces while you are

driving, it offers the last one).

Note: If driven above approximately 20

mph (35 km/h), the touch screen shows a

message to alert you to reduce vehicle

speed.

Automatic Steering into Parking

Space

Note: If vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10

km/h), the system switches off and you

need to take full control of the vehicle.

Note: If a maneuver is interrupted before

completion, the system switches off. The

steering wheel position will not indicate the

actual position of the steering and you have

to full take control of the vehicle.

With your hands off the wheel (and

nothing obstructing its movement) and

the transmission in R (Reverse), the vehicle

steers itself as instructions to safely move

the vehicle back and forward in the space

are displayed in the touch screen. While

reversing, the touch screen displays a

message instructing you to check your

surroundings (for safety reasons) and to

back-up slowly, accompanied by a

corresponding graphic.

164

Parking Aids

E130108

When you think the vehicle has enough

space in front and behind it, or you hear a

solid tone from the parking aid, bring the

vehicle to a complete stop.

E130109

When automatic steering is finished, the

touch screen displays a message indicating

that the active park assist process is done.

The driver is responsible for checking the

parking job and making any necessary

corrections before putting the transmission

in P (Park).

Deactivating the Park Assist

Feature

The system can be deactivated manually

by:

• pressing the active park assist button

• grabbing the steering wheel

• driving above approximately 20 mph

(35 km/h) for 30 seconds during an

active park search

• driving above 6 mph (10 km/h) during

automatic steering

• turning off the traction control system.

Certain vehicle conditions can also

deactivate the system, such as:

• Traction control has activated on a

slippery or loose surface.

• There is an anti-lock brake system

activation or failure.

165

Parking Aids

• Any door (except the driver’s) opens.

• Something touches the steering wheel.

If a problem occurs with the system, a

warning message is displayed, followed

by a chime. Occasional system messages

may occur in normal operation. For

recurring or frequent system faults, contact

an authorized dealer to have your vehicle

serviced.

Troubleshooting the System

The system does not look for a space

The traction control system may be off

Any door (except the driver’s) may not be completely closed

The system does not offer a particular space

Something may be contacting the front bumper or side sensors

There is not enough room on both sides of the vehicle in order to park

There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking

space

The vehicle is farther than 5 ft (1.5 m) from the parking space

The vehicle is closer than 16 in. (40 cm) from neighboring parked vehicles

The transmission is in R (Reverse); the vehicle must be moving forward to detect a

parking space

The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space

The vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission (i.e. rolling forward

when R [Reverse] is selected)

The transmission is in R (Reverse); the vehicle must be moving forward to detect a

parking space

An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning the vehicle

properly

Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly

The vehicle was pulled too far past the parking space. The system performs best when

you drive the same distance past the parking space

166

Parking Aids

The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space

The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly (i.e. not inflated correctly, improper

size, or of different sizes)

A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities

A parked vehicle has a high attachment (i.e. salt sprayer, snowplow, moving truck bed,

etc.)

The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed

The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly (i.e. driving from a heated garage

into the cold, or after leaving a car wash)

REAR VIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNINGS

The rear view camera system is a

reverse aid supplement device that

still requires the driver to use it in

conjunction with the interior and exterior

mirrors for maximum coverage.

Objects that are close to either

corner of the bumper or under the

bumper, might not be seen on the

screen due to the limited coverage of the

camera system.

Back up as slow as possible since

higher speeds might limit your

reaction time to stop the vehicle.

Use caution when using the rear

video camera and the liftgate is ajar.

If the liftgate is ajar, the camera will

be out of position and the video image may

be incorrect. All guidelines (if enabled)

have been removed when the liftgate is

ajar.

Use caution when turning camera

features on or off while in R

(Reverse). Make sure the vehicle is

not moving.

The rear view camera system provides a

video image of the area behind the vehicle.

During operation, lines appear in the

display which represent your vehicle’ s path

and proximity to objects behind the vehicle.

E142435

The camera is located on the liftgate.

Using the Rear View Camera

System

The rear view camera system displays

what is behind your vehicle when you place

the transmission in R (Reverse).

167

Parking Aids

The system uses three types of guides to

help you see what is behind your vehicle:

• Active guidelines: Show the intended

path of your vehicle when reversing.

• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path

your vehicle is moving in while reversing

in a straight line. This can be helpful

when backing into a parking space or

aligning your vehicle with another

object behind you.

• Centerline: Helps align the center of

your vehicle with an object (i.e. a

trailer).

Note: If the transmission is in R (Reverse)

and the luggage compartment is ajar, no

rear view camera features are displayed.

Note: If the image comes on while the

transmission is not in R (Reverse), have the

system inspected by your authorized dealer.

Note: When towing, the camera only sees

what is being towed behind your vehicle.

This might not provide adequate coverage

as it usually provides in normal operation

and some objects might not be seen. In

some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear

once the trailer tow connector is engaged.

Note: The camera may not operate

correctly under the following conditions:

• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both

reverse lamps are not operating.

• The camera's view is obstructed by

mud, water or debris. Clean the lens

with a soft, lint-free cloth and

non-abrasive cleaner.

• The rear of the vehicle is hit or

damaged, causing the camera to

become misaligned.

To access any of the rear view camera

system settings, make the following

selections in the touch screen when the

transmission is not in R (Reverse):

• Menu > Vehicle > Rear View Camera

After changing a system setting, the touch

screen shows a preview of the selected

features.

Guidelines and the Centerline

Note: Active guidelines and fixed guidelines

are only available when the transmission is

in R (Reverse).

Note: The centerline is only available if

Active or Fixed guidelines are on.

E142436

Active guidelinesA

CenterlineB

Fixed guideline: Green zoneC

Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneD

Fixed guideline: Red zoneE

Rear bumperF

168

Parking Aids

Active guidelines are only shown with fixed

guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn

the steering wheel to point the guidelines

toward an intended path. If the steering

wheel position is changed while reversing,

the vehicle might deviate from the original

intended path.

The fixed and active guidelines fade in and

out depending on the steering wheel

position. The active guidelines are not

shown when the steering wheel position

is straight.

Always use caution while reversing.

Objects in the red zone are closest to your

vehicle and objects in the green zone are

farther away. Objects are getting closer to

your vehicle as they move from the green

zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the

side view mirrors and rear view mirror to

get better coverage on both sides and rear

of the vehicle.

Selectable settings for this feature are

ACTIVE + FIXED, FIXED and OFF.

Visual Park Aid Alert

Note: Visual park alert is only available

when the transmission is in R (Reverse).

Note: The reverse sensing system is not

effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h)

and may not detect certain angular or

moving objects.

The system uses red, yellow and green

highlights which appear on top of the video

image when an object is detected by the

reverse sensing system. The alert highlights

the closest object detected. The reverse

sensing alert can be disabled and if visual

park aid alert is enabled, highlighted areas

are still displayed.

Selectable settings for this feature are ON

and OFF.

Manual Zoom

WARNING

When manual zoom is on, the full

area behind the vehicle is not shown.

Be aware of your surroundings when

using the manual zoom feature.

Note: Manual zoom is only available when

the transmission is in R (Reverse).

Note: When manual zoom is enabled, only

the centerline is shown.

This allows you to get a closer view of an

object behind the vehicle. The zoomed

image keeps the bumper in the image to

provide a reference. The zoom is only

active while the transmission is in R

(Reverse). When the transmission is

shifted out of R (Reverse), the feature

automatically turns off and must be reset

when it is used again.

Selectable settings for this feature are OFF,

Level 1, Level 2 or Level 3. Press the up and

down arrows to change the view. The

selection level appears between the

buttons (i.e. Level 1). The default setting

for the manual zoom is OFF.

Rear Camera Delay

When shifting the transmission out of R

(Reverse) and into any gear other than P

(Park), the camera image remains in the

display until the vehicle speed reaches 5

mph (8 km/h). This occurs when the rear

camera delay feature is on, or until a radio

button is selected.

Selectable settings for this feature are ON

and OFF. The default setting for the rear

camera delay is OFF.

169

Parking Aids

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

Cruise control lets you maintain a set

speed without keeping your foot on the

accelerator pedal.

USING CRUISE CONTROL

WARNING

Do not use cruise control in heavy

traffic or on roads that are winding,

slippery or unpaved.

Note: Vehicle speed may vary momentarily

when driving up or down a steep hill. Apply

the brakes if the vehicle speed increases

above the set speed while driving downhill.

Note: Cruise control will disengage if the

vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph

(16 km/h) below your set speed while

driving uphill.

Switching On Cruise Control

E142437

Press and release ON.

Setting a Speed

Press and release SET+.

E71340

The indicator will display in the

instrument cluster.

Changing the Set Speed

E142438

AccelerateA

DecelerateB

• Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release

the control when you reach the desired

speed.

• Press and release SET+ or SET-. The

set speed will change in approximately

1 mph (2 km/h) increments.

• Press the accelerator or brake pedal

until you reach the desired speed. Press

and release SET+.

Canceling a Set Speed

Pull CAN toward you and release, or tap

the brake pedal. The set speed will not be

erased.

Resuming a Set Speed

Pull RES toward you and release.

Switching Off Cruise Control

Note: The set speed is erased when you

switch off cruise control.

Press and release OFF or switch off the

ignition.

170

Cruise Control

BLIND SPOT MONITOR

Blind Spot Information System

(BLIS®) with Cross Traffic Alert (If

Equipped)

WARNING

To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the

BLIS as a replacement for using the

interior and exterior mirrors and

looking over your shoulder before changing

lanes. BLIS is not a replacement for careful

driving and only an assist.

E124788

BLIS aids you in detecting vehicles that

may have entered the blind spot zone (A).

The detection area is on both sides of the

vehicle, extending rearward from the

exterior mirrors to approximately 10 feet

(3 meters) beyond the bumper. The

system alerts you if certain vehicles enter

the blind spot zone while driving.

Cross traffic alert warns you of vehicles

approaching from the sides when the

transmission is in R (Reverse).

Note: BLIS is not designed to prevent

contact with other vehicles or objects; or to

detect parked vehicles, people, animals or

infrastructure (fences, guardrails, trees,

etc.). It is designed to alert the driver to

vehicles in the blind zones.

Note: When a vehicle passes quickly

through the blind zone, typically fewer than

two seconds, the system does not trigger.

Using the Systems

BLIS turns on when the engine is started

and the vehicle is driven forward above 3

mph (5 km/h); it remains on while the

transmission is in D (Drive) and N

(Neutral). If shifted out of D (Drive) or N

(Neutral), the system enters cross traffic

alert mode. Once shifted back into D

(Drive), BLIS turns back on when the

vehicle is driven above 3 mph (5 km/h).

Note: BLIS does not function in R (Reverse)

or P (Park) or provide any additional

warning when a turn signal is on.

Cross traffic alert detects approaching

vehicles from up to 45 feet (14 meters)

away though coverage decreases when the

sensors are blocked. Reversing slowly helps

increase the coverage area and

effectiveness.

WARNING

To help avoid personal injury, NEVER

use the cross traffic alert system as

a replacement for using the interior

and exterior mirrors and looking over your

shoulder before backing out of a parking

space. Cross traffic alert is not a

replacement for careful driving and only

an assist.

171

Driving Aids

E142440

In this first example, the left sensor is only

partially obstructed; zone coverage is

nearly maximized.

E142441

Zone coverage also decreases when

parking at shallow angles. Here, the left

sensor is mostly obstructed; zone coverage

on that side is severely limited.

172

Driving Aids

System Lights and Messages

E142442

The BLIS and cross traffic alert systems

illuminate a yellow alert indicator in the

outside mirror on the side of the vehicle

the approaching vehicle is coming from.

Note: The alert indicator dims when

nighttime darkness is detected.

Cross traffic alert also sounds a series of

tones and a message appears in the

information display indicating a vehicle is

coming from the right or left. Cross traffic

alert works with the reverse sensing

system which sounds its own series of

tones. See Parking Aid (page 161).

System Sensors

WARNING

Just prior to the system recognizing

a blocked condition and alerting the

driver, the number of missed objects

will increase. To help avoid injuries, NEVER

use the BLIS as a replacement for using

the side and rear view mirrors and looking

over your shoulder before changing lanes.

BLIS is not a replacement for careful

driving and only an assist.

Note: It is possible to get a blockage

warning with no blockage present; this is

rare and known as a false blockage warning.

A false blocked condition either

self-corrects or clears after a key cycle.

E142443

The system uses radar sensors which are

located behind the bumper fascia on each

side of your vehicle. Do not allow these

areas to become obstructed by mud, snow

or bumper stickers, as this can cause

degraded system performance.

If the system detects a degraded

performance condition, a message warning

of a blocked sensor or a message warning

of low visibility will appear in the

information display and the alert indicator

illuminates in the appropriate mirror(s).

The information display warning can be

cleared but the alert indicator remains

illuminated.

When the blockage is removed, the system

can be reset in two ways:

• when at least two objects are detected

while driving, or

• turn the ignition from on to off, then

back on.

If the blockage is still present after the key

cycle, the system senses again that it is

blocked after driving in traffic.

173

Driving Aids

Reasons for messages being displayed

Clean the fascia area in

front of the radar or remove

the obstruction.

The radar

surface is

dirty or

obstructed

Drive normally in traffic for

a few minutes to allow the

radar to detect passing

vehicles so it can clear the

blocked state.

The radar

surface is

not dirty or

obstructed

No action required. The

system automatically

resets to an unblocked

state once the rainfall or

snowfall rate decreases or

stops. Do not use BLIS or

cross traffic alert in these

conditions.

Heavy rain-

fall/snow-

fall inter-

feres with

the radar

signals

System Limitations

The BLIS and cross traffic alert systems

do have their limitations; situations such

as severe weather conditions or debris

build-up on the sensor area may limit

vehicle detection.

The following are other situations that may

limit the BLIS:

• Certain maneuvering of vehicles

entering and exiting the blind zone.

• Vehicles passing through the blind zone

at very fast rates.

• When several vehicles forming a

convoy pass through the blind zone.

The following are other situations that may

limit the cross traffic alert system:

• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects

obstructing the sensors.

• Approaching vehicles passing at

speeds greater than 15 mph (24 km/h).

• Driving in reverse faster than 3 mph (5

km/h).

• Backing out of an angled parking spot.

False Alerts

Note: If the vehicle has a factory equipped

tow bar, and it is towing a trailer, the sensors

will detect the trailer and turn the BLIS off

to avoid false alerts. For non-factory

equipped tow bars you may want to turn

the BLIS off manually.

There may be certain instances when

either the BLIS or cross traffic alert

systems illuminate the alert indicator with

no vehicle in the coverage zone; this is

known as a false alert. Some amount of

false alerts are normal; they are temporary

and self-correct.

System Errors

If either system senses a problem with the

left or right sensor, the BLIS telltale

illuminates and remains on and the

following will appear in the information

display:

• BLIS: X sensor fault Service req’d or

• Cross Traffic malfunction Service req’d

When problems that may cause the left or

right indicator not to illuminate, only the

information display faults appear.

Switching the Systems Off and On

One or both systems can be switched off

temporarily by using the information

display control. See General Information

(page 84). When the BLIS is switched off,

you will not receive alerts and a telltale

illuminates in the information display. The

system switches back on whenever the

ignition is switched on.

174

Driving Aids

One or both systems can also be switched

off permanently at your authorized dealer.

Once switched off, switching it back on

must also be done at your authorized

dealer.

ECO MODE

This system assists you in driving more

efficiently by constantly monitoring

characteristics of gear changing,

anticipation of traffic conditions and

speeds while driving.

The value of these characteristics is

represented by petals shown in the display,

with five petals being the most efficient.

The more efficiently you drive, the better

the rating, and the better your overall fuel

economy

Note: These efficiency values do not result

in a defined fuel consumption figure. It might

vary as it is not only related to these driving

habits, but also influenced by many other

factors such as short trips and cold starts.

Note: Frequent short trips, where the engine

does not fully warm up, will also increase

fuel consumption

The system is accessed using the

information display control. See General

Information (page 84).

Type 1

E142444

AnticipationA

Efficient speedB

Anticipation

Adjust your vehicle speed and the distance

to other vehicles to avoid the need for

heavy braking or acceleration to improve

fuel economy.

Efficient speed

Reduce your cruising speed on open roads

to improve economy. Higher speeds use

more fuel.

Type 2 and 3

The relevant information is shown in the

display.

Resetting Eco Mode

Reset the average fuel consumption by

using the information display control.

Note: New values may take a short time to

calculate

175

Driving Aids

STEERING

Electric Power Steering

WARNINGS

The electric power steering system

has diagnostic checks that

continuously monitor the system to

ensure proper operation. When a system

error is detected a steering message will

appear in the information display.

The electric power steering system

has diagnostic checks that

continuously monitor the system to

ensure proper operation of the electronic

system. When an electronic error is

detected, a message will be displayed in

the information display. If this happens,

stop the vehicle in a safe place, and turn

off the engine. After at least 10 seconds,

reset the system by restarting the engine,

and watch the information display for a

steering message. If a steering message

returns, or returns while driving, take the

vehicle to your dealer to have it checked.

Obtain immediate service if a system

error is detected. You may not notice

any difference in the feel of your

steering, but a serious condition may exist.

Failure to do so may result in loss of

steering control.

Your vehicle is equipped with an electric

power-assisted steering system. There is

no fluid reservoir to check or fill.

If your vehicle loses electrical power while

you are driving (or if the ignition is turned

off), you can steer the vehicle manually,

but it takes more effort. Extreme

continuous steering may increase the effort

it takes for you to steer. This occurs to

prevent internal overheating and

permanent damage to your steering

system. If this should occur, you will neither

lose the ability to steer the vehicle

manually nor will it cause permanent

damage. Typical steering and driving

maneuvers will allow the system to cool

and steering assist will return to normal.

Steering Tips

If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:

• an improperly inflated tire

• uneven tire wear

• loose or worn suspension components

• loose or worn steering components

• improper vehicle alignment

A high crown in the road or high crosswinds

may also make the steering seem to

wander or pull.

176

Driving Aids

REAR UNDER FLOOR

STORAGE

Passenger Compartment Floor

E78097

The under floor storage compartment is

located behind the front passenger seat.

Cargo Management System (If

Equipped)

E142445

The system is located in the floor of the

cargo area. Lift the handle to open.

Adjustable Load Floor (If Equipped)

E142446

Vehicles with the standard size spare tire

can adjust the load floor to two positions.

The front of the load floor can be placed

either on (for high position) or below (for

low position) the ledges behind the rear

seats. The rear of the load floor always sits

on the two small shelves located on the

liftgate trim.

LUGGAGE COVERS

WARNINGS

Make sure that the posts are properly

latched in mounting features. The

cover may cause injury in a sudden

stop or accident if it is not securely

installed.

Do not place any objects on the

cargo area shade. They may obstruct

your vision or strike occupants of

vehicle in the case of a sudden stop or

collision.

Use the shade to cover items in the cargo

area of your vehicle.

177

Load Carrying

E142447

Insert the ends of the cargo shade into the

mounting features located behind the rear

seat on the rear trim panels to install the

shade.

To operate the shade:

1. Pull the rear edge of the cargo shade

rearward.

2. Secure both ends of the support rod

into the retention slots located on the

rear quarter trim panels.

ROOF RACKS AND LOAD

CARRIERS

WARNING

When loading the roof rail crossbars,

it is recommended to evenly

distribute the load, as well as

maintain a low center of gravity. Loaded

vehicles, with higher centers of gravity, may

handle differently than unloaded vehicles.

Extra precautions, such as slower speeds

and increased stopping distance, should

be taken when driving a heavily loaded

vehicle.

The maximum recommended load, evenly

distributed on the crossbars, is:

• 100 pounds (45 kilograms) for vehicles

without a moonroof

• 45 pounds (20 kilograms) for vehicles

with a moonroof.

Note: Loads should never be placed directly

on the roof panel. The roof panel is not

designed to directly carry a load.

For proper function of the roof rack system,

loads must be placed directly on crossbars

affixed to the roof rack side rails. Your

vehicle may be equipped with

factory-installed crossbars. Ford Genuine

Accessory crossbars, designed specifically

for your vehicle, are also recommended for

use with your roof rack system.

Make sure that the load is securely

fastened. Check the tightness of the load

before driving and at each fuel stop.

Adjusting the Crossbar (If Equipped)

Note: Wind noise can be minimized by

either removing or repositioning the crossbar

when not is use. Position the front crossbar

in the rearward position to minimize wind

noise. The front crossbar can be adjusted

or removed using the steps below. The rear

crossbar fasteners can be removed by

unscrewing the assembly.

E142448

178

Load Carrying

1. Remove the crossbar thumbwheels at

both sides of the front crossbar by

turning them counterclockwise.

Note: A small screwdriver or similar tool

can be used to loosen the thumbwheel.

Apply to the fastener head on the top of the

thumbwheel or insert the shaft between the

two paddles of the thumbwheel and rotate

it loose.

2. Remove the crossbar by sliding the

ends off of the shoulder bolts in the

side rails.

3. Move the crossbar to the new side rail

position and slide the crossbar onto

the shoulder bolt at that position.

4. Replace and tighten the thumbwheels

at both sides of the crossbar by turning

them clockwise until tight. A small

screwdriver or similar tool can be used

to tighten if necessary.

Make sure to check that the thumbwheels

are tight each time load is added or

removed from the roof rack, and

periodically while traveling. Make sure that

the load is secure before traveling.

LOAD LIMIT

Vehicle loading - with and without

a trailer

This section will guide you in the proper

loading of your vehicle, trailer or both, to

keep your loaded vehicle weight within its

design rating capability, with or without a

trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will

provide maximum return of vehicle design

performance. Before loading your vehicle,

familiarize yourself with the following

terms for determining your vehicle’ s weight

ratings, with or without a trailer, from the

vehicle’s Tire Label or Safety Compliance

Certification Label:

Base Curb Weight - is the weight of the

vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all

standard equipment. It does not include

passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.

Vehicle Curb Weight - is the weight of

your new vehicle when you picked it up

from your authorized dealer plus any

aftermarket equipment.

E142513

179

Load Carrying

Payload - is the combined weight of cargo

and passengers that the vehicle is carrying.

The maximum payload for your vehicle can

be found on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar

or the edge of the driver’s door (vehicles

exported outside the US and Canada may

not have a Tire Label). Look for “THE

COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS

AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED

XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for maximum

payload. The payload listed on the Tire

Label is the maximum payload for the

vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If

any aftermarket or authorized-dealer

installed equipment has been installed on

the vehicle, the weight of the equipment

must be subtracted from the payload

listed on the Tire Label in order to

determine the new payload.

WARNING

The appropriate loading capacity of

your vehicle can be limited either by

volume capacity (how much space

is available) or by payload capacity (how

much weight the vehicle should carry).

Once you have reached the maximum

payload of your vehicle, do not add more

cargo, even if there is space available.

Overloading or improperly loading your

vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle

control and vehicle rollover.

Example only:

E142516

180

Load Carrying

E142517

E142518

Cargo Weight – includes all weight added

to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo

and optional equipment. When towing,

trailer tongue load or king pin weight is also

part of cargo weight.

GAW (Gross Axle Weight) - is the total

weight placed on each axle (front and rear)

– including vehicle curb weight and all

payload.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - is

the maximum allowable weight that can

be carried by a single axle (front or rear).

These numbers are shown on the

Safety Compliance Certification Label.

The label shall be affixed to either the

door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or

the door edge that meets the

door-latch post, next to the driver's

seating position. The total load on each

axle must never exceed its GAWR.

Note: For trailer towing information refer

to the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided

by your authorized dealer.

181

Load Carrying

E142521

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - is the

Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo + passengers.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

- is the maximum allowable weight of the

fully loaded vehicle (including all options,

equipment, passengers and cargo). The

GVWR is shown on the Safety

Compliance Certification Label. The

label shall be affixed to either the door

hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the

door edge that meets the door-latch

post, next to the driver's seating

position.

182

Load Carrying

Example only:

E142523

E142524

183

Load Carrying

WARNING

Exceeding the Safety Compliance

Certification Label vehicle weight

rating limits could result in

substandard vehicle handling or

performance, engine, transmission and/or

structural damage, serious damage to the

vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.

E142526

GCW (Gross Combined Weight) - is the

weight of the loaded vehicle (GVW) plus

the weight of the fully loaded trailer

GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

Rating) -is the maximum allowable

weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer

-including all cargo and passengers - that

the vehicle can handle without risking

damage. (Important: The towing vehicle’s

braking system is rated for operation at

GVWR, not at GCWR.) Separate functional

brakes should be used for safe control of

towed vehicles and for trailers where the

GCW of the towing vehicle plus the trailer

exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle.

The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.

Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight - is the

highest possible weight of a fully loaded

trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a

vehicle with only mandatory options, no

cargo (internal or external), a tongue load

of 10–15% (conventional trailer) or king

pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel trailer),

and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult

your authorized dealer (or the RV and

Trailer Towing Guide provided by your

authorized dealer) for more detailed

information.

Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin

Weight - refers to the amount of the

weight that a trailer pushes down on a

trailer hitch.

Examples: For a 5000 lb. (2268 kg)

conventional trailer, multiply 5000 by 0.10

and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load

range of 500 to 750 lb. (227 to 340 kg).

For an 11500 lb. (5216 kg) fifth wheel

trailer, multiply by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain

a proper king pin load range of 1725 to 2875

lb. (782 to 1304 kg).

WARNINGS

Do not exceed the GVWR or the

GAWR specified on the Safety

Compliance Certification Label.

Do not use replacement tires with

lower load carrying capacities than

the original tires because they may

lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR

limitations. Replacement tires with a higher

limit than the original tires do not increase

the GVWR and GAWR limitations.

Exceeding any vehicle weight rating

limitation could result in serious

damage to the vehicle and/or

personal injury.

184

Load Carrying

Steps for determining the correct load

limit:

1. Locate the statement "The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb." on

your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the

driver and passengers that will be riding

in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX kg or

XXX lb.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and luggage

load capacity. For example, if the “XXX”

amount equals 1,400 lb. and there will

be five 150 lb. passengers in your

vehicle, the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacity is 650 lb.

(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.). In

metric units (635-340 (5 x 68) = 295

kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on the

vehicle. That weight may not safely

exceed the available cargo and luggage

load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,

load from your trailer will be transferred

to your vehicle. Consult this manual to

determine how this reduces the

available cargo and luggage load

capacity of your vehicle.

185

Load Carrying

The following gives you a few examples

on how to calculate the available amount

of cargo and luggage load capacity:

• Another example for your vehicle with

1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and luggage

capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is

there enough load capacity to carry

you, 4 of your friends and all the golf

bags? You and four friends average

220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags

weigh approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg)

each. The calculation would be: 1400

- (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 -

150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have enough load

capacity in your vehicle to transport

four friends and your golf bags. In

metric units, the calculation would be:

635 kg - (5 x 99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) =

635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.

• A final example for your vehicle with

1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and luggage

capacity. You and one of your friends

decide to pick up cement from the local

home improvement store to finish that

patio you have been planning for the

past 2 years. Measuring the inside of

the vehicle with the rear seat folded

down, you have room for 12-100 lb. (45

kg) bags of cement. Do you have

enough load capacity to transport the

cement to your home? If you and your

friend each weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the

calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220)

- (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240

lb. No, you do not have enough cargo

capacity to carry that much weight. In

metric units, the calculation would be:

635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635

- 198 - 540 = -103 kg. You will need to

reduce the load weight by at least 240

lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45

kg) cement bags, then the load

calculation would be:1400 - (2 x 220)

- (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb.

Now you have the load capacity to

transport the cement and your friend

home. In metric units, the calculation

would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (9 x 45

kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.

The above calculations also assume that

the loads are positioned in your vehicle in

a manner that does not overload the Front

or the Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating

specified for your vehicle on the Safety

Compliance Certification Label. The label

shall be affixed to either the door hinge

pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge

that meets the door-latch post, next to the

driver's seating position.

186

Load Carrying

Special Loading Instructions for

Owners of Pick-up Trucks and

Utility-type Vehicles

WARNING

Loaded vehicles may handle

differently than unloaded vehicles.

Extra precautions, such as slower

speeds and increased stopping distance,

should be taken when driving a heavily

loaded vehicle.

Your vehicle can haul more cargo and

people than most passenger cars.

Depending upon the type and placement

of the load, hauling cargo and people may

raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.

187

Load Carrying

TOWING A TRAILER

WARNINGS

Do not exceed the GVWR or the

GAWR specified on the certification

label.

Towing trailers beyond the maximum

recommended gross trailer weight

exceeds the limit of the vehicle and

could result in engine damage,

transmission damage, structural damage,

loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and

personal injury.

Your vehicle's load capacity is designated

by weight, not by volume, so you cannot

necessarily use all available space when

loading a vehicle.

Towing a trailer places an additional load

on your vehicle's engine, transmission, axle,

brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these

components periodically during, and after,

any towing operation.

TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (IF

EQUIPPED)

Note: This feature does not prevent trailer

sway, but reduces it once it begins.

Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers

from swaying.

Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too

high, the system may activate multiple

times, gradually reducing vehicle speed.

This feature applies the vehicle brakes at

individual wheels and, if necessary, reduces

engine power. If the trailer begins to sway,

the stability control light flashes. The first

thing to do is slow the vehicle down, then

pull safely to the side of the road and

check for proper tongue load and trailer

load distribution. See Load Carrying

(page 177).

RECOMMENDED TOWING

WEIGHTS

Note: For high altitude operation, reduce

the gross combined weight by 2% per 1000

feet (300 meters) elevation.

Note: Certain states require electric trailer

brakes for trailers over a specified weight.

Be sure to check state regulations for this

specified weight. The maximum trailer

weights listed may be limited to this

specified weight, as the vehicle's electrical

system does not include the wiring

connector needed to activate electric trailer

brakes.

Maximum Trailer

Frontal Area - ft

)

Maximum Trailer

Weight - lb (kg)

Maximum GCWR - lb

(kg)

Powertrain

20 (1.86)2000 (907)5866 (2661)2WD 1.6L

20 (1.86)2000 (907)6035 (2737)4WD 1.6L

20 (1.86)2000 (907)5977 (2711)

2WD 2.0L

30 (2.78)3500 (1588)7477 (3391)

2WD 2.0L

20 (1.86)2000 (907)6126 (2779)

4WD 2.0L

188

Towing

Maximum Trailer

Frontal Area - ft

)

Maximum Trailer

Weight - lb (kg)

Maximum GCWR - lb

(kg)

Powertrain

30 (2.78)3500 (1588)7626 (3459)

4WD 2.0L

20 (1.86)2000 (907)5417 (2457)2WD 2.5L

Without trailer tow package.

With trailer tow package.

189

Towing

ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS

Follow these guidelines to ensure safe

towing:

• Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle

has been driven at least 1000 miles

(1600 kilometers).

• Consult your local motor vehicle laws

for towing a trailer.

• Refer to the instructions included with

towing accessories for the proper

installation and adjustment

specifications.

• Service your vehicle more frequently if

you tow a trailer. Refer to your

scheduled maintenance information.

Load specification terms are found on the

tire label and Safety Compliance

Certification Label. Instructions on

calculating your vehicle's load can be

found earlier in this manual. See Load

Limit (page 179). Remember to account

for the trailer tongue weight as part of the

vehicle load when calculating the total

vehicle weight.

Hitches

Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto

the bumper or attaches to the axle.

Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the

total trailer weight is on the tongue.

Safety Chains

Note: Never attach safety chains to the

bumper.

Always connect the safety chains to the

vehicle's hook retainers. To connect the

safety chains, cross them under the trailer

tongue and allow slack for turning corners.

If you use a rental trailer, follow the rental

agency's instructions.

Trailer Brakes

WARNING

Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic

brake system directly to your

vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle

may not have enough braking power and

your chances of having a collision greatly

increase.

Electric brakes and manual, automatic or

surge-type trailer brakes are safe if

installed properly and adjusted to the

manufacturer's specifications. The trailer

brakes must meet local and Federal

regulations.

The braking system of the tow vehicle is

rated for operation at the GVWR not

GCWR.

Trailer Lamps

Trailer lamps are required on most towed

vehicles. Ensure all running lights, brake

lights, turn signals and hazard lights are

working. Contact your authorized dealer

or trailer rental agency for proper

instructions and equipment for hooking up

the lamps.

Before Towing a Trailer

Practice turning, stopping and backing-up

to get the feel of the vehicle-trailer

combination before starting on a trip.

When turning, make wider turns so the

trailer wheels will clear curbs and other

obstacles.

190

Towing

When Towing a Trailer

• Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113

km/h) during the first 500 miles (800

kilometers) and do not make

full-throttle starts.

• Check your hitch, electrical connections

and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly

after you have traveled 50 miles (80

km).

• Place the gearshift lever in position P

to aid in engine and transmission

cooling and A/C efficiency during hot

weather while stopped in traffic.

• Turn off the speed control. The speed

control may turn off automatically

when you are towing on long, steep

grades.

• Shift to a lower gear when driving down

a long or steep hill. Do not apply the

brakes continuously, as they may

overheat and become less effective.

• If your transmission is equipped with

the grade assist feature, use this

feature when towing. This provides

engine braking and helps eliminate

excessive transmission shifting for

optimum fuel economy and

transmission cooling.

• Allow more distance for stopping with

a trailer attached; anticipate stops and

brake gradually.

• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if

you must park on a grade, place wheel

chocks under the trailer's wheels.

TOWING POINTS (IF EQUIPPED)

Towing Eye Location

The screw-in towing eye is located in the

spare wheel well.

The towing eye must always be carried in

the vehicle.

Installing the Towing Eye

The screw-in towing eye has a left-hand

thread. Turn it counterclockwise to install

it. Make sure that the towing eye is fully

tightened.

E146284

Insert a suitable object to pry open the

cover (1). Use recessed/notched portion

of the cover. Screw in the towing eye (2).

Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels

Switch the ignition to the on position.

Failure to do so results in steering lock and

non-function of indicator and brake lamps.

Braking and steering efforts are high if the

engine is not running. Maintain increased

stopping distances.

191

Towing

TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE

E143886

If you need to have your vehicle towed,

contact a professional towing service or,

if you are a member of a roadside

assistance program, your roadside

assistance service provider.

It is recommended that your vehicle be

towed with a wheel lift and dollies or

flatbed equipment. Do not tow with a

slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not

approved a slingbelt towing procedure.

Ford Motor Company produces a towing

manual for all authorized tow truck

operators. Have your tow truck operator

refer to this manual for proper hook-up

and towing procedures for your vehicle.

Front-wheel drive (FWD) vehicles can be

towed from the front if proper wheel lift

equipment is used to raise the front wheels

off the ground. The rear wheels can be left

on the ground when towed in this fashion.

FWD vehicles can also be towed from the

rear using wheel lift equipment; however,

it is required that the front wheels be

placed on a dolly to prevent damage to

the transmission.

Four-wheel drive (4WD) vehicles must be

towed with a wheel lift and dollies or

flatbed equipment, with all the wheels off

the ground, to prevent damage to the

transmission, 4WD system or vehicle. If the

vehicle is towed by other means or

incorrectly, vehicle damage may occur.

TOWING THE VEHICLE ON

FOUR WHEELS

Emergency Towing

In the event your vehicle becomes disabled

(without access to wheel dollies,

car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport

vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all wheels

on the ground, regardless of the

powertrain/transmission configuration)

under the following conditions:

• The vehicle is facing forward so that it

is towed in a forward direction.

• The transmission gear shift lever is

placed in position N. If The

transmission is gear shift lever cannot

be moved to position N, it may need to

be overridden. See Transmission

(page 147).

• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).

• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80

kilometers).

192

Towing

Recreational Towing

Follow these guidelines if you have a need

for recreational (RV) towing. An example

of recreational towing would be towing

your vehicle behind a motorhome. These

guidelines are designed to ensure that your

transmission is not damaged.

Front-wheel drive (FWD) vehicles can be

towed with the front wheels off the ground

by using a tow dolly. If you are using a tow

dolly follow the instructions specified by

the equipment provider.

Four-wheel drive (4WD) vehicles cannot

be towed with any wheels on the ground,

as vehicle or transmission damage may

occur. It is recommended to tow your

vehicle with all four (4) wheels off the

ground such as when using a car-hauling

trailer. Otherwise, no recreational towing

is permitted.

193

Towing

BREAKING-IN

You need to break in new tires for

approximately 300 miles (480

kilometers). During this time, your vehicle

may exhibit some unusual driving

characteristics.

Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000

miles (1600 kilometers). Vary your speed

frequently and change up through the

gears early. Do not labor the engine.

Do not tow during the first 1000 miles

(1600 kilometers).

ECONOMICAL DRIVING

Fuel economy is affected by several things

such as how you drive, the conditions you

drive under and how you maintain your

vehicle.

There are some things to keep in mind that

may improve your fuel economy:

• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,

moderate fashion.

• Drive at steady speeds without

stopping.

• Anticipate stops; slowing down may

eliminate the need to stop.

• Combine errands and minimize

stop-and-go driving.

• Close the windows for high-speed

driving.

• Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling

at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15% less

fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105

km/h]).

• Keep the tires properly inflated and use

only the recommended size.

• Use the recommended engine oil.

• Perform all regularly scheduled

maintenance.

There are also some things you may not

want to do because they may reduce your

fuel economy:

• Sudden accelerations or hard

accelerations.

• Rev the engine before turning it off.

• Idle for periods longer than one minute.

• Warm up your vehicle on cold

mornings.

• Use the air conditioner or front

defroster.

• Use the speed control in hilly terrain.

• Rest your foot on the brake pedal while

driving.

• Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a

trailer.

• Carry unnecessary weight

(approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is

lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight

carried).

• Add particular accessories to your

vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors,

rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski

racks).

• Drive with the wheels out of alignment.

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

Note: Driving through deep water above

the recommended levels can cause vehicle

damage.

Note: Once through the water, always dry

the brakes by moving your vehicle slowly

while applying light pressure on the brake

pedal. Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle

as quickly as dry brakes.

194

Driving Hints

E142667

If driving through deep or standing water

is unavoidable, proceed very slowly. Never

drive through water that is higher than the

bottom of the wheel rims (for cars) or the

bottom of the hubs (for trucks).

When driving through water, traction or

brake capability may be limited. Also,

water may enter your engine’s air intake

and severely damage your engine or your

vehicle may stall.

FLOOR MATS

E142666

WARNINGS

Always use floor mats that are

designed to fit the foot well of your

vehicle. Only use floor mats that

leave the pedal area unobstructed. Only

use floor mats that are firmly secured to

retention posts so that they cannot slip out

of position and interfere with the pedals

or impair safe operation of your vehicle in

other ways.

Pedals that cannot move freely can

cause loss of vehicle control and

increase the risk of serious personal

injury.

Always make sure that the floor

mats are properly attached to the

retention posts in the carpet that are

supplied with your vehicle. Floor mats must

be properly secured to both retention posts

to ensure mats do not shift out of position.

Never place floor mats or any other

covering in the vehicle foot well that

cannot be properly secured to

prevent them from moving and interfering

with the pedals or the ability to control the

vehicle.

Never place floor mats or any other

covering on top of already installed

floor mats. Floor mats should always

rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface and

not another floor mat or other covering.

Additional floor mats or any other covering

will reduce the pedal clearance and

potentially interfere with pedal operation.

Check attachment of floor mats on

a regular basis. Always properly

reinstall and secure floor mats that

have been removed for cleaning or

replacement.

Always make sure that objects

cannot fall into the driver foot well

while the vehicle is moving. Objects

that are loose can become trapped under

the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.

195

Driving Hints

WARNINGS

Failure to properly follow floor mat

installation or attachment

instructions can potentially cause

interference with pedal operation causing

loss of control of vehicle.

To install floor mats, position the

floor mat so that the eyelet is over

the retention post and press down

to lock in.

To remove the floor mat, reverse the

installation procedure.

196

Driving Hints

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE

Vehicles Sold In The U.S.: Getting

Roadside Assistance

To fully assist you should you have a

vehicle concern Ford Motor Company

offers a complimentary roadside

assistance program. This program is

separate from the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty. The service is available:

• 24-hours, seven days a week.

• for the coverage period listed on the

Roadside Assistance Card included in

your Owner's Manual portfolio.

Roadside assistance will cover:

• a flat tire change with a good spare

(except vehicles that have been

supplied with a tire inflation kit).

• battery jump start.

• lock-out assistance (key replacement

cost is the customer's responsibility).

• fuel delivery — Independent Service

Contractors, if not prohibited by state,

local or municipal law shall deliver up

to 2.0 gallons (7.5L) of gasoline or 5.0

gallons (18.9L) of diesel fuel to a

disabled vehicle. Fuel delivery service

is limited to two no-charge occurrences

within a 12-month period.

• winch out — available within 100 feet

(30.5 meters) of a paved or county

maintained road, no recoveries.

• towing — Ford and Lincoln eligible

vehicles towed to an authorized dealer

within 35 miles (56 km) of the

disablement location or to the nearest

authorized dealer. If a member

requests to be towed to an authorized

dealer more than 35 miles (56 km)

from the disablement location, the

member shall be responsible for any

mileage costs in excess of 35 miles (56

km).

Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the

disabled eligible vehicle requires service at

the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer

is disabled, but the towing vehicle is

operational, the trailer does not qualify for

any roadside services.

Vehicles Sold In The U.S. : Using

Roadside Assistance

Complete the roadside assistance

identification card and place it in your

wallet for quick reference. This card is

found in the owner's information portfolio

in the glove compartment.

U.S. Ford vehicle customers who require

Roadside Assistance, call 1-800-241-3673.

If you need to arrange roadside assistance

for yourself, Ford Motor Company will

reimburse a reasonable amount for towing

to the nearest dealership within 35 miles

(56 km). To obtain reimbursement

information, U.S. Ford vehicle customers

call 1-800-241-3673. Customers will be

asked to submit their original receipts.

Vehicles Sold In Canada : Getting

Roadside Assistance

Canadian customers who require roadside

assistance, call 1-800-665-2006.

Vehicles Sold In Canada : Using

Roadside Assistance

Complete the roadside assistance

identification card and place it in your

wallet for quick reference. In Canada, the

card is found in the Warranty Guide in the

glove box.

Canadian Roadside coverage and benefits

may differ from the U.S. coverage. Please

refer to your Warranty Guide or visit our

website at www.ford.ca for information on

Canadian services and benefits.

197

Roadside Emergencies

Canadian customers who need to obtain

roadside information, call

1-800-665-2006 or visit our website at

www.ford.ca.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

Note: With extended use, the flashers may

run down your battery.

The hazard flasher control is

located on the instrument panel

by the radio. Use it when your

vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety

hazard for other motorists.

• Press the flasher control and all front

and rear direction signals will flash.

• Press the flasher control again to turn

them off.

FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH

WARNING

Failure to inspect and if necessary

repair fuel leaks after a collision may

increase the risk of fire and serious

injury. Ford Motor Company recommends

that the fuel system be inspected by an

authorized dealer after any collision.

In the event of a moderate to severe

collision, this vehicle is equipped with a

fuel pump shut-off feature that stops the

flow of fuel to the engine. Not every impact

will cause a shut-off.

Should your vehicle shut off after a

collision, you may restart your vehicle by

doing the following:

1. Turn the ignition off.

2. Turn the ignition on.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to re-enable fuel

pump.

Note: If your vehicle has the push button

start system, press the stop/start button

twice to reactivate the fuel system.

JUMP-STARTING THE VEHICLE

WARNINGS

The gases around the battery can

explode if exposed to flames, sparks,

or lit cigarettes. An explosion could

result in injury or vehicle damage.

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which

can burn skin, eyes and clothing, if

contacted.

Do not attempt to push-start your

automatic transmission vehicle. Automatic

transmissions do not have push-start

capability. Attempting to push-start a

vehicle with an automatic transmission

may cause transmission damage.

Preparing Your Vehicle

Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your

vehicle.

Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the

disabled vehicle as this could damage the

vehicle's electrical system.

1. Park the booster vehicle close to the

hood of the disabled vehicle making

sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set

the parking brake on both vehicles and

stay clear of the engine cooling fan and

other moving parts.

2. Check all battery terminals and remove

any excessive corrosion before you

attach the battery cables. Ensure that

vent caps are tight and level.

3. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles

to protect from any electrical surges.

Turn all other accessories off.

198

Roadside Emergencies

Connecting the Jumper Cables

Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the

bottom is used to designate the assisting

(boosting) battery.

E142664

1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable

to the positive (+) terminal of the

discharged battery.

2. Connect the other end of the positive

(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal

of the assisting battery.

3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the

negative (-) terminal of the assisting

battery.

4. Make the final connection of the

negative (-) cable to an exposed metal

part of the stalled vehicle's engine,

away from the battery and the

carburetor or fuel injection system.

Note: Do not attach the negative (-) cable

to fuel lines, engine rocker covers, the intake

manifold or electrical components as

grounding points.

WARNING

Do not connect the end of the

second cable to the negative (-)

terminal of the battery to be jumped.

A spark may cause an explosion of the

gases that surround the battery.

Ensure that the cables are clear of fan

blades, belts, moving parts of both engines,

or any fuel delivery system parts.

Jump Starting

1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle

and run the engine at moderately

increased speed.

2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.

3. Once the disabled vehicle has been

started, run both engines for an

additional three minutes before

disconnecting the jumper cables.

Removing the Jumper Cables

Remove the jumper cables in the reverse

order that they were connected.

Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the

bottom is used to designate the assisting

(boosting) battery.

199

Roadside Emergencies

E142665

1. Remove the jumper cable from the

ground metal surface.

2. Remove the jumper cable on the

negative (-) terminal of the booster

vehicle's battery.

3. Remove the jumper cable from the

positive (+) terminal of the booster

vehicle's battery.

4. Remove the jumper cable from the

positive (+) terminal of the disabled

vehicle's battery.

After the disabled vehicle has been started

and the jumper cables removed, allow it

to idle for several minutes so the engine

computer can relearn its idle conditions.

200

Roadside Emergencies

GETTING THE SERVICES YOU

NEED

Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be

performed by an authorized dealer. While

any authorized dealer handling your vehicle

line will provide warranty service, we

recommend you return to your selling

authorized dealer who wants to ensure

your continued satisfaction.

Please note that certain warranty repairs

require special training and equipment, so

not all authorized dealers are authorized

to perform all warranty repairs. This means

that, depending on the warranty repair

needed, you may have to take your vehicle

to another authorized dealer.

A reasonable time must be allowed to

perform a repair after taking your vehicle

to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be

made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or

remanufactured or other parts that are

authorized by Ford.

Away From Home

If you are away from home when your

vehicle needs service, contact the Ford

Customer Relationship Center or use the

online resources listed below to find the

nearest authorized dealer.

In the United States:

Mailing address

Ford Motor Company

Customer Relationship Center

P.O. Box 6248

Dearborn, MI 48121

Telephone

1-800-392-3673 (FORD)

(TDD for the hearing impaired:

1-800-232-5952)

Online

Additional information and resources are

available online at www.fordowner.com

These are some of the items that can be

found online:

• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,

City/State, or Zip Code

• Owner Manuals

• Maintenance Schedules

• Recalls

• Ford Extended Service Plans

• Ford Genuine Accessories

• Service specials and promotions.

In Canada:

Mailing address

Customer Relationship Centre

Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited

P.O. Box 2000

Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4

Telephone

1-800-565-3673 (FORD)

Online

www.ford.ca

Additional Assistance

If you have questions or concerns, or are

unsatisfied with the service you are

receiving, follow these steps:

1. Contact your Sales Representative or

Service Advisor at your selling/servicing

authorized dealer.

2. If your inquiry or concern remains

unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,

Service Manager or Customer Relations

Manager.

3. If you require assistance or clarification

on Ford Motor Company policies,

please contact the Ford Customer

Relationship Center.

201

Customer Assistance

In order to help you serve you better,

please have the following information

available when contacting a Customer

Relationship Center:

• Vehicle Identification Number.

• Your telephone number (home and

business).

• The name of the authorized dealer and

city where located.

• The vehicle’ s current odometer reading.

In some states, you must directly notify

Ford in writing before pursuing remedies

under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is

also allowed a final repair attempt in some

states.

In the United States, a warranty dispute

must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE

before taking action under the

Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to the

extent allowed by state law, before

pursuing replacement or repurchase

remedies provided by certain state laws.

This dispute handling procedure is not

required prior to enforcing state created

rights or other rights which are independent

of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or

state replacement or repurchase laws.

IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)

California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)

requires that, if a manufacturer or its

representative is unable to repair a motor

vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s

applicable express warranty after a

reasonable number of attempts, the

manufacturer shall be required to either

replace the vehicle with one substantially

identical or repurchase the vehicle and

reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to

the actual price paid or payable by the

consumer (less a reasonable allowance

for consumer use). The consumer has the

right to choose whether to receive a refund

or replacement vehicle.

California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)

presumes that the manufacturer has had

a reasonable number of attempts to

conform the vehicle to its applicable

express warranties if, within the first 18

months of ownership of a new vehicle or

the first 18000 miles (29 000 km),

whichever occurs first:

1. Two or more repair attempts are made

on the same non-conformity likely to

cause death or serious bodily injury OR

2. Four or more repair attempts are made

on the same nonconformity (a defect

or condition that substantially impairs

the use, value or safety of the vehicle)

3. The vehicle is out of service for repair

of nonconformities for a total of more

than 30 calendar days (not necessarily

all at one time).

In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer

must also notify the manufacturer of the

need for the repair of the nonconformity

at the following address:

Ford Motor Company

16800 Executive Plaza Drive

Mail Drop 3NE-B

Dearborn, MI 48126

You are required to submit your warranty

dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting

in court any rights or remedies conferred

by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b).

You are also required to use BBB AUTO

LINE before exercising rights or seeking

remedies created by the Federal

Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C.

sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek

redress by pursuing rights and remedies

not created by California Civil Code Section

1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss

Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is

not required by those statutes.

202

Customer Assistance

THE BETTER BUSINESS

BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE

PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)

Your satisfaction is important to Ford

Motor Company and to your dealer. If a

warranty concern has not been resolved

using the three-step procedure outlined

earlier in this chapter in the Getting the

Services you need section, you may be

eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO

LINE program.

The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of

two parts – mediation and arbitration.

During mediation, a representative of the

BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor

Company to explore options for settlement

of the claim. If an agreement is not reached

during mediation or you do not want to

participate in mediation, and if your claim

is eligible, you may participate in the

arbitration process. An arbitration hearing

will be scheduled so that you can present

your case in an informal setting before an

impartial person. The arbitrator will

consider the testimony provided and make

a decision after the hearing.

Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE

program are usually decided within forty

days after you file your claim with the BBB.

You are not bound by the decision, and

may reject the decision and proceed to

court where all findings of the BBB Auto

Line dispute, and decision, are admissible

in the court action. Should you choose to

accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford

is then bound by the decision, and must

comply with the decision within 30 days

of receipt of your acceptance letter.

BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the

information provided below, please call or

write to request a program application.

You will be asked for your name and

address, general information about your

new vehicle, information about your

warranty concerns, and any steps you have

already taken to try to resolve them. A

Customer Claim Form will be mailed that

will need to be completed, signed and

returned to the BBB along with proof of

ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will

review the claim for eligibility under the

Program Summary Guidelines.

You can get more information by

calling BBB AUTO LINE at

1-800-955-5100, or writing to:

BBB AUTO LINE

4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800

Arlington, Virginia 22203-1833

BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be

requested by calling the Ford Motor

Company Customer Relationship Center

at 1-800-392-3673.

Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the

right to change eligibility limitations, modify

procedures, or to discontinue this process

at any time without notice and without

obligation.

UTILIZING THE

MEDIATION/ARBITRATION

PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)

For vehicles delivered to authorized

Canadian dealers. In those cases where

you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford

of Canada and the authorized dealer to

resolve a factory-related vehicle service

concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of

Canada participates in an impartial third

party mediation/arbitration program

administered by the Canadian Motor

Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

203

Customer Assistance

The CAMVAP program is a straight forward

and relatively speedy alternative to resolve

a disagreement when all other efforts to

produce a settlement have failed. This

procedure is without cost to you and is

designed to eliminate the need for lengthy

and expensive legal proceedings.

In the CAMVAP program, impartial

third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at

mutually convenient times and places in

an informal environment. These impartial

arbitrators review the positions of the

parties, make decisions and, when

appropriate, render awards to resolve

disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,

and final as the arbitrator’s award is

binding on both you and Ford of Canada.

CAMVAP services are available in all

Canadian territories and provinces. For

more information, without charge or

obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial

Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685

or visit www.camvap.ca.

GETTING ASSISTANCE

OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND

CANADA

Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign

country, contact the appropriate foreign

embassy or consulate. These officials can

inform you of local vehicle registration

regulations and where to find unleaded

fuel.

If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only

get fuel with an anti-knock index lower

than is recommended for your vehicle,

contact a regional office or owner

relations/customer relationship office.

The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle

without proper conversion may damage

the effectiveness of your emission control

system and may cause engine knocking or

serious engine damage. Ford Motor

Company/Ford of Canada is not

responsible for any damage caused by use

of improper fuel. Using leaded fuel may

also result in difficulty importing your

vehicle back into the U.S.

If your vehicle must be serviced while you

are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,

Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,

Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel,

contact the nearest authorized dealer. If

the authorized dealer cannot help you,

contact:

FORD MOTOR COMPANY

FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS & GLOBAL

INITIATIVES

1555 Fairlane Drive

Fairlane Business Park #3

Allen Park, Michigan 48101

U.S.A.

Telephone: (313) 594-4857

For customers in Guam, the

Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana

Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the

U.S. Virgin Islands, please feel free to call

our Toll-Free Number: (800) 841-FORD

(3673).

FAX: (313) 390-0804

Email: expcac@ford.com

If your vehicle must be serviced while you

are traveling or living in Puerto Rico,

contact the nearest authorized dealer. If

the authorized dealer cannot help you,

contact:

204

Customer Assistance

Ford International Business Development

Inc.

Customer Relationship Center

P.O. Box 11957

Caparra Heights Station

San Juan, Puerto Rico 00922-1957

Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)

FAX: (313) 390-0804

Email: prcac@ford.com

www.ford.com.pr

If your vehicle must be serviced while you

are traveling or living in the Middle East,

contact the nearest authorized dealer. If

the authorized dealer cannot help you,

contact:

Ford Middle East

Customer Relationship Center

P.O. Box 21470

Dubai, United Arab Emirates

Telephone: +971 4 3326084

Toll-Free Number for the Kingdom of Saudi

Arabia: 800 8971409

Local Telephone Number for Kuwait:

24810575

FAX: +971 4 3327299

Email: menacac@ford.com

www.me.ford.com

If you buy your vehicle in North America

and then relocate to any of the above

locations, register your vehicle

identification number (VIN) and new

address with Ford Motor Company Export

Operations & Global Growth Initiatives by

emailing expcac@ford.com.

If you are in another foreign country,

contact the nearest authorized dealer. If

the authorized dealer employees cannot

help you, they can direct you to the nearest

Ford affiliate office.

Customers in the U.S. should call

1-800-392-3673.

ORDERING ADDITIONAL

OWNER'S LITERATURE

To order the publications in this portfolio,

contact Helm, Incorporated at:

HELM, INCORPORATED

47911 Halyard Drive

Plymouth, Michigan 48170

Attention: Customer Service

Or to order a free publication catalog, call

toll free: 1-800-782-4356

Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST

Helm, Incorporated can also be reached

by their website:

www.helminc.com

(Items in this catalog may be purchased

by credit card, check or money order.)

Obtaining a French Owner’s

Manual

French Owner’s Manual can be obtained

from your authorized dealer or by

contacting Helm, Incorporated using the

contact information listed previously in this

section.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

(U.S. ONLY)

E142557

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect

which could cause a crash or could cause

injury or death, you should immediately

inform the National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition to

notifying Ford Motor Company.

205

Customer Assistance

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it

may open an investigation, and if it finds

that a safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot

become involved in individual problems

between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor

Company.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at

1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);

go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator

1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast

Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information

about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

(CANADA ONLY)

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect

which could cause a crash or could cause

injury or death, you should immediately

inform Transport Canada, using their

toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510, or

online at:

https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.

206

Customer Assistance

CHANGING A FUSE

Fuses

E142430

If electrical components in the vehicle are

not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown

fuses are identified by a broken wire within

the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses

before replacing any electrical

components.

Note: Always replace a fuse with one that

has the specified amperage rating. Using a

fuse with a higher amperage rating can

cause severe wire damage and could start

a fire.

Standard Fuse Amperage Rating and Color

Color

Fuse Link

Cartridge

Maxi Fuses

Maxi FusesStandard

Fuses

Mini FusesFuse Rating

---GreyGrey2A

---VioletViolet3A

---PinkPink4A

---TanTan5A

---BrownBrown7.5A

---RedRed10A

---BlueBlue15A

BlueBlueYellowYellowYellow20A

NaturalNatural-NaturalNatural25A

PinkPinkGreenGreenGreen30A

GreenGreenOrange--40A

RedRedRed--50A

YellowYellowBlue--60A

Brown-Tan--70A

BlackBlackNatural--80A

207

Fuses

FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART

Pre-Fuse Box

Your vehicle is equipped with a pre-fuse

box located in the engine compartment

attached to the positive battery post. This

box contains several high current fuses. If

replacement of these high current fuses is

required, see your authorized dealer.

Power Distribution Box

WARNINGS

Always disconnect the battery before

servicing high current fuses.

WARNINGS

To reduce risk of electrical shock,

always replace the cover to the

power distribution box before

reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid

reservoirs.

The power distribution box is located in

the engine compartment. It has

high-current fuses that protect your

vehicle's main electrical systems from

overloads.

If the battery has been disconnected and

reconnected, some features will need to

be reset. See Changing the Vehicle

Battery (page 226).

E129925

Lift the release lever at the rear of the cover

to remove it.

The high-current fuses are coded as

follows:

208

Fuses

Protected ComponentsFuse Amp RatingFuse/Relay Number

Not used-F1

Not used-F2

Not used-F3

Not used-F4

Not used-F5

Not used-F6

Anti-lock brake system / Electronic stability

program pump

40A**F7

Electronic stability program valve30A**F8

Not used-F9

Heater blower motor40A**F10

Not used-F11

Powertrain control module relay fuse30A**F12

Starter relay30A**F13

Rear power window (without door control

unit)

25A**F14

Front cigar lighter / Power outlet20A**F15

Front power window (without door control

unit)

25A**F16

Rear power outlet20A**F17

Center power outlet20A**F18

Anti-lock brake system / Electronic stability

program 15 feed

5A*F19

Horn15A*F20

Stop light switch5A*F21

Battery monitor system15A*F22

Relay coils5A*F23

Light switch module5A*F24

209

Fuses

Protected ComponentsFuse Amp RatingFuse/Relay Number

Power exterior mirror (without door control

unit)

10A*F25

Keep-alive power5A*F26

A/C clutch15A*F27

Vehicle power - fuel injector10A*F28

Rear window defroster25A*F29

Not used-F30

Power transfer unit oil cooling fan (Middle

East specification)

5A*F31

Vehicle power15A*F32

Vehicle power 210A*F33

Vehicle power 310A*F34

Vehicle power 415A*F35

Active grill shutters5A*F36

Occupant classification sensor / Passenger

airbag deactivation indicator feed

10A*F37

Engine control module / Transmission

control module ignition feed

5A*F38

Daytime running lamps / Headlamp control

module ignition feed

5A*F39

Electronic power assist steering 15 feed5A*F40

Body control module 15 feed20A*F41

Rear wiper15A*F42

Headlamp control module supply15A*F43

Front fog daytime running lamps15A*F44

Not used-F45

Smart wiper motor modules50A**F46

Not used-F47

Keypad5A*F48

210

Fuses

Protected ComponentsFuse Amp RatingFuse/Relay Number

Not used-R1

HornMicro relayR2

Power transfer unit oil cooling fan (Middle

East specification)

-R3

Front fog daytime running lamps-R4

Not used-R5

Not used-R6

Not used-R7

Delayed accessory relayMini relayR8

Not used-R9

Starter relayMini relayR10

A/C clutchMicro relayR11

Cooling fanPower relayR12

Heater blowerMini relayR13

Engine control relayMini relayR14

Heated rear windowPower relayR15

Ignition 15Power relayR16

*Mini fuses **Cartridge fuses

Passenger Compartment Fuse

Panel

The fuse panel is located on the right side

below the glove box.

211

Fuses

E129926

The fuses are coded as follows:

212

Fuses

Protected ComponentsFuse Amp RatingFuse/Relay Number

Fuel pump supply, Air mass meter20A56

Not used-57

Not used-58

Passive anti-theft transceiver5A59

Interior light, Driver door switch pack, Glove

box illumination, Overhead console switch

bank

10A60

Cigar lighter, Power point20A61

Rain sensor module, Auto-dimming mirror5A62

Not used-63

Not used-64

Liftgate release10A65

Driver door unlock supply, Double lock20A66

SYNC®, Multifunction display, Global

positioning system module

7.5A67

Not used-68

Instrument cluster5A69

Central lock and unlock supply20A70

Heating control head (manual A/C), Duel

electronic automatic temperature control

10A71

Steering wheel module7.5A72

Data link connector5A73

High beam headlamp supply15A74

Fog lamp supply15A75

Reversing lamp supply10A76

Windshield washer supply20A77

Ignition switch, Start button5A78

213

Fuses

Protected ComponentsFuse Amp RatingFuse/Relay Number

Radio, Navigation DVD player, Touch

screen, Hazard light switch, Door lock

switch

15A79

Moonroof supply20A80

Radio frequency receiver5A81

Windshield washer relay20A82

Central locking20A83

Drive door unlock supply, Double lock20A84

Electronic 15 feed7.5A85

Air bag module, Occupant classification

system, Passenger air bag deactivation

indicator

10A86

Not used-87

Not used-88

Not used-89

Luggage Compartment Fuse Panel

The fuse panel is located in the luggage

compartment behind the passenger's side

wheel well. Remove the fuse panel cover

to gain access to the fuses.

E129927

The fuses are coded as follows:

214

Fuses

Protected ComponentsFuse Amp RatingFuse/Relay Number

Hands-free liftgate entry module5AF1

Keyless vehicle module10AF2

Keyless vehicle door handles5AF3

Door control unit front left25AF4

Door control unit front right25AF5

Door control unit rear left25AF6

Door control unit rear right25AF7

Not used-F8

Driver seat motor25AF9

Driver seat memory module logic feed5AF10

Rear ignition coil feed5AF11

Not used-F12

Not used-F13

Not used-F14

Not used-F15

Not used-F16

Not used-F17

Not used-F18

Not used-F19

Not used-F20

Not used-F21

Not used-F22

Audio amplifier25AF23

DC/AC power converter30AF24

Power liftgate25AF25

Accessories / Trailer tow module 30 feed

40AF26

215

Fuses

Protected ComponentsFuse Amp RatingFuse/Relay Number

Not used-F27

Not used-F28

Blind spot detection system, Rear view

camera with park assist

5AF29

Parking aid module5AF30

Not used-F31

DC/AC power converter5AF32

Not used-F33

Driver seat heater20AF34

Passenger seat heater20AF35

Not used-F36

Moonroof5AF37

Not used-F38

Not used-F39

Not used-F40

Not used-F41

Not used-F42

Not used-F43

Not used-F44

Not used-F45

Not used-F46

Rear 15 relayPower relayR1

Not used-R2

Not used-R3

Not used-R4

Not used-R5

Not used-R6

216

Fuses

GENERAL INFORMATION

Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help

maintain its roadworthiness and resale

value. There is a large network of Ford

authorized dealers that are there to help

you with their professional servicing

expertise. We believe that their specially

trained technicians are best qualified to

service your vehicle properly and expertly.

They are supported by a wide range of

highly specialized tools developed

specifically for servicing your vehicle.

To help you service your vehicle, we

provide scheduled maintenance

information which makes tracking routine

service easy. See Scheduled

Maintenance (page 396).

If your vehicle requires professional service,

your authorized dealer can provide the

necessary parts and service. Check your

Warranty Guide to find out which parts and

services are covered.

Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,

fluids and service parts conforming to

specifications. Motorcraft® parts are

designed and built to provide the best

performance in your vehicle.

Precautions

• Do not work on a hot engine.

• Make sure that nothing gets caught in

moving parts.

• Do not work on a vehicle with the

engine running in an enclosed space,

unless you are sure you have enough

ventilation.

• Keep all open flames and other burning

material (such as cigarettes) away

from the battery and all fuel related

parts.

Working with the Engine Off

1. Set the parking brake and shift to P

(Park).

2. Turn off the engine and remove the key

(if equipped).

3. Block the wheels.

Working with the Engine On

WARNING

To reduce the risk of vehicle damage

and/or personal burn injuries, do not

start your engine with the air cleaner

removed and do not remove it while the

engine is running.

1. Set the parking brake and shift to P

(Park).

2. Block the wheels

OPENING AND CLOSING THE

HOOD

E142457

1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release

handle located under the instrument

panel.

217

Maintenance

E142458

2. Go to the front of the vehicle and

locate the auxiliary latch located under

the front of the hood (left of center)

and then release it by pushing the

auxiliary latch to the right.

3. Open the hood and support it with the

prop rod.

To close the hood, lower the hood and

allow it to drop from under its own weight

for the last 8-11 inches (20-30

centimeters).

Note: Make sure that the hood is closed

properly.

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 1.6L ECOBOOST®

A B C D E

E142459

Engine coolant reservoirA

Engine oil filler capB

218

Maintenance

Brake fluid reservoirC

BatteryD

Power distribution boxE

Air filter assemblyF

Engine oil dipstickG

Windshield washer fluid reservoirH

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.0L ECOBOOST®

E146022

Engine coolant reservoirA

Engine oil dipstickB

Brake fluid reservoirC

BatteryD

Power distribution boxE

Air filter assemblyF

219

Maintenance

Engine oil filler capG

Windshield washer fluid reservoirH

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.5L

E146023

Windshield washer fluid reservoirA

Engine coolant reservoirB

Engine oil filler capC

Engine oil dipstickD

Brake fluid reservoirE

BatteryF

Power distribution boxG

Air filter assemblyH

220

Maintenance

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.6L

ECOBOOST®

E146020

MINA

MAXB

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK -

2.5L/2.0L ECOBOOST®

E142462

MINA

MAXB

ENGINE OIL CHECK

Note: Check the level before starting the

engine.

Note: Make sure that the level is between

the MIN and the MAX marks.

1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level

ground.

2. Turn the engine off and wait 10 minutes

for the oil to drain into the oil pan.

3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with

a clean, lint-free cloth. Replace the

dipstick and remove it again to check

the oil level.

If the level is at the MIN mark, add oil

immediately.

Adding Engine Oil

Note: Do not remove the filler cap when

the engine is running.

Note: Do not add oil further than the MAX

mark. Oil levels above the MAX mark may

cause engine damage.

E142732

Only use oils certified for gasoline engines

by the American Petroleum Institute (API).

An oil with this trademark symbol

conforms to the current engine and

emission system protection standards and

fuel economy requirements of the

International Lubricants Specification

Advisory Council (ILSAC), comprised of

U.S. and Japanese automobile

manufacturers.

221

Maintenance

1. Remove the filler cap.

2. Add engine oil that meets the Ford

specifications. See Capacities and

Specifications (page 267).

3. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you

feel a strong resistance.

Resetting the Oil Life Monitoring

System

Note: Reset the oil life monitoring only after

an oil change.

1. Turn the ignition key to the on position.

Do not start the engine. For vehicles

with push-button start, press and hold

the start button for two seconds

without pressing the brake pedal. Do

not attempt to start the engine.

2. Press both the accelerator and brake

pedals at the same time.

3. Keep both pedals fully pressed.

4. After three seconds, the Service: Oil

reset in prog. message will be

displayed.

5. After 25 seconds, the Service: Oil reset

complete message will be displayed.

6. Release both the accelerator and brake

pedals.

7. The Service: Oil reset complete

message will no longer be displayed.

8. Rotate the key to the off position. For

vehicles with push-button start, press

the start button to turn the vehicle off

completely.

ENGINE COOLANT CHECK

Checking the Engine Coolant

When the engine is cold, check the

concentration and level of the engine

coolant at the intervals listed in the

scheduled maintenance information. See

Scheduled Maintenance (page 396).

Note: Make sure that the level is between

the MIN and MAX marks on the coolant

reservoir.

Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The

level may extend beyond the MAX mark

Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below

the MIN mark, or empty, add coolant

immediately. See Adding Engine Coolant

in this chapter.

The coolant concentration should be

maintained at 50%.

Note: For best results, coolant

concentration should be tested with a

refractometer such as Rotunda tool

ROB75240 available from your dealer. Ford

does not recommend the use of

hydrometers or coolant test strips for

measuring coolant concentrations.

Note: Automotive fluids are not

interchangeable. Do not use engine coolant

or antifreeze or windshield washer fluid

outside of its specified function and vehicle

location.

Adding Engine Coolant

WARNINGS

Do not add engine coolant when the

engine is hot. Steam and scalding

liquids released from a hot cooling

system can burn you badly. Also, you can

be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine

parts.

Do not put engine coolant in the

windshield washer fluid container. If

sprayed on the windshield, engine

coolant could make it difficult to see

through the windshield.

To reduce the risk of personal injury,

make sure the engine is cool before

unscrewing the coolant pressure

relief cap. The cooling system is under

pressure; steam and hot liquid can come

out forcefully when the cap is loosened

slightly.

222

Maintenance

WARNINGS

Do not add coolant further than the

MAX mark.

Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling

system sealants, or additives as they can

cause damage to the engine cooling or

heating systems. This damage would not

be covered under your vehicle’s warranty.

Note: During normal vehicle operation, the

engine coolant may change color from

orange to pink or light red. As long as the

engine coolant is clear and uncontaminated,

this color change does not indicate the

engine coolant has degraded nor does it

require the engine coolant to be drained, the

system to be flushed, or the engine coolant

to be replaced.

• Do not mix different colors or types of

coolant in your vehicle. Make sure the

correct coolant is used. Mixing of

engine coolants may harm your

engine’s cooling system. The use of an

improper coolant may harm engine and

cooling system components and may

void the warranty. Use prediluted

engine coolant meeting the Ford

specification. See Capacities and

Specifications (page 267).

• In case of emergency, a large amount

of water without engine coolant may

be added in order to reach a vehicle

service location. In this instance, the

cooling system must be drained,

chemically cleaned with Motorcraft®

Premium Cooling System Flush, and

refilled with prediluted engine coolant

as soon as possible. Water alone

(without engine coolant) can cause

engine damage from corrosion,

overheating or freezing.

• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or

any engine coolants mixed with alcohol

or methanol antifreeze (coolant).

Alcohol and other liquids can cause

engine damage from overheating or

freezing.

• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives

to the coolant. These can be harmful

and compromise the corrosion

protection of the engine coolant.

Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure will

escape as you unscrew the cap.

Add prediluted engine coolant meeting the

Ford specification. See Capacities and

Specifications (page 267).

Whenever coolant has been added, the

coolant level in the coolant reservoir

should be checked the next few times you

drive the vehicle. If necessary, add enough

prediluted engine coolant to bring the

coolant level to the proper level.

Recycled Engine Coolant

Ford Motor Company does not recommend

the use of recycled engine coolant since a

Ford-approved recycling process is not yet

available.

Always dispose of used automotive fluids

in a responsible manner. Follow your

community’s regulations and standards

for recycling and disposing of automotive

fluids.

223

Maintenance

Severe Climates

If you drive in extremely cold climates:

• It may be necessary to have a Ford

authorized dealer increase the coolant

concentration above 50%.

• A coolant concentration of 60% will

provide improved freeze point

protection. Engine coolant

concentrations above 60% will

decrease the overheat protection

characteristics of the engine coolant

and may cause engine damage

If you drive in extremely hot climates:

• It may be necessary to have a Ford

authorized dealer decrease the coolant

concentration to 40%.

• A coolant concentration of 40% will

provide improved overheat protection.

Engine coolant concentrations below

40% will decrease the corrosion/freeze

protection characteristics of the engine

coolant and may cause engine

damage.

Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme

climates should use prediluted engine

coolant for optimum cooling system and

engine protection.

What you Should Know About Fail-

Safe Cooling

If the engine coolant supply is depleted,

this feature allows the vehicle to be driven

temporarily before incremental component

damage is incurred. The “fail-safe”

distance depends on ambient

temperatures, vehicle load and terrain.

How Fail-Safe Cooling Works

If the engine begins to overheat, the engine

coolant temperature gauge will move to

the red (hot) area and:

The coolant temperature

warning light will illuminate.

The service engine soon

indicator will illuminate.

If the engine reaches a preset

over-temperature condition, the engine

will automatically switch to alternating

cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder

acts as an air pump and cools the engine.

When this occurs the vehicle will still

operate. However:

• The engine power will be limited.

• The air conditioning system will be

disabled.

Continued operation will increase the

engine temperature and the engine will

completely shut down, causing steering

and braking effort to increase.

Once the engine temperature cools, the

engine can be re-started. Take your vehicle

to an authorized dealer as soon as possible

to minimize engine damage.

When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated

WARNINGS

Fail-safe mode is for use during

emergencies only. Operate the

vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long

as necessary to bring the vehicle to rest in

a safe location and seek immediate repairs.

When in fail-safe mode, the vehicle will

have limited power, will not be able to

maintain high-speed operation, and may

completely shut down without warning,

potentially losing engine power, power

steering assist, and power brake assist,

which may increase the possibility of a

crash resulting in serious injury.

Never remove the coolant reservoir

cap while the engine is running or hot.

224

Maintenance

You have limited engine power when in the

fail-safe mode, so drive the vehicle with

caution. The vehicle will not be able to

maintain high-speed operation and the

engine will run rough. Remember that the

engine is capable of completely shutting

down automatically to prevent engine

damage, therefore:

1. Pull off the road as soon as safely

possible and turn off the engine.

2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to

an authorized dealer.

3. If this is not possible, wait a short

period for the engine to cool.

4. Check the coolant level and replenish

if low.

5. Re-start the engine and take your

vehicle to an authorized dealer.

Note: Driving the vehicle without repairing

the engine problem increases the chance of

engine damage. Take your vehicle to an

authorized dealer as soon as possible.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

FLUID CHECK

Note: Transmission fluid should be checked

by an authorized dealer. If required, fluid

should be added by an authorized dealer.

The automatic transmission does not have

a transmission fluid dipstick.

Have an authorized dealer check and

change the transmission fluid and filter at

the correct service interval. See

Scheduled Maintenance (page 396). Your

transmission does not consume fluid.

However, the fluid level should be checked

if the transmission is not working properly,

(i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts

slowly) or if you notice some sign of fluid

leakage.

Do not use supplemental transmission

fluid additives, treatments or cleaning

agents. The use of these materials may

affect transmission operation and result

in damage to internal transmission

components.

BRAKE FLUID CHECK

Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX

lines are within the normal operating range;

there is no need to add fluid. If the fluid

levels are outside of the normal operating

range, the performance of the system

could be compromised; seek service from

your authorized dealer immediately.

POWER STEERING FLUID

CHECK

Your vehicle is equipped with an electric

power steering (EPS) system. There is no

fluid reservoir to check or fill.

FUEL FILTER

Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime

fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel

tank. Regular maintenance or replacement

is not needed.

WASHER FLUID CHECK

WARNING

If you operate your vehicle in

temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use

washer fluid with antifreeze

protection. Failure to use washer fluid with

antifreeze protection in cold weather could

result in impaired windshield vision and

increase the risk of injury or accident.

Note: The front and rear washer systems

are supplied from the same reservoir.

225

Maintenance

Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is

low. Only use a washer fluid that meets

Ford specifications. See Capacities and

Specifications (page 267).

State or local regulations on volatile

organic compounds may restrict the use

of methanol, a common windshield washer

antifreeze additive. Washer fluids

containing non-methanol antifreeze

agents should be used only if they provide

cold weather protection without damaging

the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or

washer system.

CHANGING THE VEHICLE

BATTERY

WARNINGS

Batteries normally produce explosive

gases which can cause personal

injury. Therefore, do not allow

flames, sparks or lighted substances to

come near the battery. When working near

the battery, always shield your face and

protect your eyes. Always provide proper

ventilation.

When lifting a plastic-cased battery,

excessive pressure on the end walls

could cause acid to flow through the

vent caps, resulting in personal injury

and/or damage to the vehicle or battery.

Lift the battery with a battery carrier or

with your hands on opposite corners.

Keep batteries out of reach of

children. Batteries contain sulfuric

acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or

clothing. Shield your eyes when working

near the battery to protect against possible

splashing of acid solution. In case of acid

contact with skin or eyes, flush

immediately with water for a minimum of

15 minutes and get prompt medical

attention. If acid is swallowed, call a

physician immediately.

WARNINGS

Battery posts, terminals and related

accessories contain lead and lead

compounds. Wash hands after

handling.

Your vehicle is equipped with a

Motorcraft® maintenance-free battery

which normally does not require additional

water during its life of service.

Note: If your battery has a cover/shield,

make sure it is reinstalled after the battery

has been cleaned or replaced.

For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the

top of the battery clean and dry. Also,

make certain the battery cables are always

tightly fastened to the battery terminals.

If you see any corrosion on the battery or

terminals, remove the cables from the

terminals and clean with a wire brush. You

can neutralize the acid with a solution of

baking soda and water.

It is recommended that the negative

battery cable terminal be disconnected

from the battery if you plan to store your

vehicle for an extended period of time.

To ensure proper operation of the battery

management system (BMS), any electrical

devices that are added to the vehicle

should not have their ground connection

made directly at the negative battery post.

A connection at the negative battery post

can cause inaccurate measurements of

the battery condition and potential

incorrect system operation.

Note: Electrical or electronic accessories

or components added to the vehicle by the

dealer or the owner may adversely affect

battery performance and durability and may

also affect the performance of other

electrical systems in the vehicle.

226

Maintenance

When a battery replacement is required,

the battery should only be replaced with

a Ford recommended replacement battery

that matches the electrical requirements

of the vehicle.

When the battery is disconnected or a new

battery installed, the automatic

transmission must relearn its adaptive

strategy. As a result of this, the

transmission may shift firmly when first

driven. This operation is considered normal

and will fully update transmission

operation to its optimum shift feel.

If the battery has been disconnected or a

new battery has been installed, the clock

and the preset radio stations must be reset

once the battery is reconnected.

Note: Always dispose of automotive

batteries in a responsible manner. Follow

your local authorized standards for disposal.

Call your local authorized recycling center

to find out more about recycling automotive

batteries.

CHECKING THE WIPER

BLADES

E142463

Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of

the blade to check for roughness.

Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid

or water applied with a soft sponge or

cloth.

CHANGING THE WIPER

BLADES

The wiper arms can be manually moved

when the ignition is off. This allows for ease

of blade replacement and cleaning under

the blades.

E129990

1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away

from the glass.

2. Press the locking buttons together.

3. Rotate and remove the wiper blade.

4. Install in the reverse order.

Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks

into place. Lower the wiper arm and blade

back to the windshield. The wiper arms will

automatically return to their normal position

when the ignition is turned on.

To change the rear blades, do the

following:

227

Maintenance

E130060

1. Lift the wiper arm.

2. Slightly rotate the wiper blade from the

wiper arm.

3. Disengage the wiper blade from the

wiper arm.

4. Remove the wiper blade.

5. Install in the reverse order.

Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks

into place.

Replace wiper blades at least once per

year for optimum performance.

Poor wiper quality can be improved by

cleaning the wiper blades and the

windshield.

CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR

FILTER

WARNING

To reduce the risk of vehicle damage

and/or personal burn injuries do not

start your engine with the air cleaner

removed and do not remove it while the

engine is running.

When changing the air filter element, use

only the air filter element listed. See

Capacities and Specifications (page

267).

For EcoBoost® equipped vehicles: When

servicing the air cleaner, it is important that

no foreign material enter the air induction

system. The engine and turbocharger are

susceptible to damage from even small

particles.

Change the air filter element at the proper

interval. See Scheduled Maintenance

(page 396).

Note: Failure to use the correct air filter

element may result in severe engine

damage. The customer warranty may be

void for any damage to the engine if the

correct air filter element is not used.

1.6L and 2.0L EcoBoost® Engines

E142710

228

Maintenance

2.5L Engine

E142711

1. Loosen the screws on the air tube

clamp that fasten it to the air filter

assembly tray.

2. Separate the clean air tube from the

air cleaner.

3. Remove the air cleaner from the

vehicle.

4. Loosen the screws that secure the air

filter housing cover.

5. Carefully separate the two halves of

the air filter housing.

6. Remove the air filter element from the

air filter housing.

7. Wipe the air filter housing and cover

clean to remove any dirt or debris and

to ensure good sealing.

8. Slide the open end of the air filter

element in first, below the tab. Then

push the closed end cap into the

bottom of the tray. The closed end cap

should fit inside the groove in the tray.

The tab at the end of the closed end

cap should be oriented down and fit

between the forks on the tray.

9. Replace the air filter housing cover and

secure the screws.

10. Reinstall the air cleaner assembly into

the vehicle.

11. Reinstall the clean air tube assembly

into the air cleaner assembly.

12. Tighten the air tube fastening screws.

ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS

Vertical Aim Adjustment

The headlamps on your vehicle are

properly aimed at the assembly plant. If

your vehicle has been in an accident, the

alignment of your headlamps should be

checked by your authorized dealer.

E142592

8 feet (2.4 meters)A

Center height of lamp to groundB

25 feet (7.6 meters)C

Horizontal reference lineD

Vehicles With Halogen Headlamps

1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a

wall or screen on a level surface,

approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters)

away.

2. Measure the height of the headlamp

bulb center from the ground and mark

an 8 foot (2.4 meter) horizontal

reference line on the vertical wall or

screen at this height.

229

Maintenance

Note: To see a clearer light pattern for

adjusting, you may want to block the light

from one headlamp while adjusting the

other.

3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to

illuminate the wall or screen and open

the hood.

E142465

4. On the wall or screen you will observe

a flat zone of high intensity light

located at the top of the right hand

portion of the beam pattern. If the top

edge of the high intensity light zone is

not at the horizontal reference line, the

headlamp will need to be adjusted.

E142467

5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each

headlamp. Using a Phillips #2

screwdriver, turn the adjuster either

clockwise or counterclockwise in order

to aim the headlamp. The horizontal

edge of the brighter light should touch

the horizontal reference line.

6. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.

Vehicles With High Intensity Discharge

Headlamps

1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a

wall or screen on a level surface,

approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters)

away.

2. Measure the height of the headlamp

bulb center from the ground and mark

an 8 foot (2.4 meter) horizontal

reference line on the vertical wall or

screen at this height.

Note: To see a clearer light pattern for

adjusting, you may want to block the light

from one headlamp while adjusting the

other.

3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to

illuminate the wall or screen and open

the hood.

E142466

4. There is a distinct cut-off (change from

light to dark) in the left portion of the

beam pattern. The top edge of this

cut-off should be positioned two

inches (5 centimeters) below the

horizontal reference line.

230

Maintenance

E142467

5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each

headlamp. Using a Phillips #2

screwdriver, turn the adjuster either

clockwise or counterclockwise in order

to aim the headlamp.

6. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.

Horizontal Aim Adjustment

Horizontal aim is not required for this

vehicle and is non-adjustable.

REMOVING A HEADLAMP

E142468

1. Make sure the headlamp control is in

the off position and open the hood.

2. Remove the two screws from the

headlamp assembly.

3. Carefully pull the headlamp assembly

as far as possible towards the front of

the vehicle to disengage it from the

lower fixing point.

4. Carefully lift the outer side of the

headlamp and remove it.

5. Disconnect the electrical connector.

CHANGING A BULB

Lamp Assembly Condensation

Exterior lamps are vented to

accommodate normal changes in pressure.

Condensation can be a natural by-product

of this design. When moist air enters the

lamp assembly through the vents, there is

a possibility that condensation can occur

when the temperature is cold. When

normal condensation occurs, a thin film of

mist can form on the interior of the lens.

The thin mist eventually clears and exits

through the vents during normal operation.

Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours

under dry weather conditions.

Examples of acceptable condensation are:

• Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip

marks or droplets).

• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the

lens.

Examples of unacceptable moisture

(usually caused by a lamp water leak) are:

• Water puddle inside the lamp.

• Large water droplets, drip marks or

streaks present on the interior of the

lens.

Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if

any of the above conditions of

unacceptable moisture are present.

231

Maintenance

Replacing Headlamp Bulbs

WARNING

Handle a halogen headlamp bulb

carefully and keep out of children’s

reach. Grasp the bulb by only its

plastic base and do not touch the glass.

The oil from your hand could cause the

bulb to break the next time the headlamps

are operated.

Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it

should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol

before being used.

Headlamp:

E142469

Side markerA

Low beam headlampB

High beam headlampC

High beam headlamp:

E142470

1. Remove the headlamp.

2. Remove service cap.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector.

4. Remove bulb from the headlamp

assembly by turning it

counterclockwise, then pull it straight

out.

Low beam headlamp:

E142471

1. Remove the headlamp.

2. Remove service cap.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector.

4. Remove bulb from the headlamp

assembly by turning it

counterclockwise, then pull it straight

out.

Install the new bulbs in reverse order from

the steps above. Be sure that the spring

clip is not damaged or detached from the

headlamp assembly during the

replacement procedure.

Replacing HID Headlamp Bulbs (If

Equipped)

The low beam headlamps on your vehicle

use a high intensity discharge source.

These lamps operate at a high voltage.

When the bulb is burned out, the bulb and

starter capsule assembly must be replaced

by your authorized dealer.

232

Maintenance

Replacing Side Marker Bulbs

E142472

1. Remove the bulb socket from the

headlamp assembly by turning it

counterclockwise.

2. Remove the bulb by gently pull the

bulb straight out of the socket.

Install the new bulb in reverse order.

Replacing Fog, Park and Turn

Signal Bulbs

E142797

Fog LampA

Park LampB

Turn Signal lampC

E142798

1. Remove the screws from the splash

shield at the wheel well to gain access

to the lamp assembly.

E142799

2. Remove the bulb holder from the lamp

assembly by turning it

counterclockwise.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector.

4. Remove the bulb from the bulb holder

by pulling it straight out.

Install the new bulbs in reverse order from

the steps above.

233

Maintenance

Replacing Tail, Brake and Turn

Signal Bulbs

E142473

1. Make sure the headlamp control is in

the off position and open the liftgate.

2. Remove the two bolt covers using a

standard flat tip screwdriver.

3. Remove the two bolts from the lamp

assembly.

4. Gently pull the lamp assembly away

from the vehicle.

E142475

5. Disconnect the electrical connector.

6. Remove the turn signal bulb or the tail

and brake bulb by turning the bulb

socket counterclockwise. Gently pull

the bulb straight out of the socket.

Install the new bulb in reverse order.

Replacing Reverse Lamp Assembly

For bulb replacement, see your authorized

dealer.

Replacing License Plate Lamp Bulb

E72789

1. Carefully release the spring clip.

2. Remove the lamp.

3. Remove the bulb.

Reverse steps to reinstall bulb.

Replacing High-Mount Brake Lamp

Bulb

Your vehicle is equipped with an LED

center high-mount stop lamp located in

the spoiler. It is designed to last the life of

the vehicle. If replacement is required, see

your authorized dealer.

234

Maintenance

BULB SPECIFICATION CHART

Replacement bulbs are specified in the

chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be

marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for

North America to ensure lamp

performance, light brightness and pattern

and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will

not damage the lamp assembly or void the

lamp assembly warranty and will provide

quality bulb burn time.

Trade numberFunction

9005LLHeadlamps high beam (Halogen)

H1* Headlamps high beam (HID)

H11LLHeadlamp low beam (Halogen)

D3S* Headlamp low beam (HID)

168Sidemarker - front

WY5WPark lamp - front (HI Series)

194Park lamp - front (Low Series)

WY21WTurn lamp - front (HI Series)

W21WTurn lamp - front (Low Series)

H10 (9145)Fog lamps

3157KTail/brake lamp

T20Turn lamp - rear

921Backup lamp

W5WLicense plate lamp

LED* High-mount brake lamp

LED* Interior lamps

* To replace these lamps - see your authorized dealer.

To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer

235

Maintenance

GENERAL INFORMATION

Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has

many quality products available to clean

your vehicle and protect its finishes.

CLEANING PRODUCTS

For best results, use the following products

or products of equivalent quality:

Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover

(ZC-42)

Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner

(ZC-15)

Motorcraft® Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)

Motorcraft® Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)

Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and

Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)

Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo (Canada

only) (CXC-66-A)

Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner

(Canada only) (CXC-101)

Motorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner

(Canada only) (CXC-100)

Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield

Washer Fluid (Canada only) [CXC-37-(A,

B, D or F)]

Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Washer

Concentrate (U.S. only) (ZC-32-A)

Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet

& Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)

Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover (U.S.

only) (ZC-14)

Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass

Cleaner (ZC-23)

Motorcraft® Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only)

(CXC-93)

Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner

(ZC-37-A)

CLEANING THE EXTERIOR

Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or

lukewarm water and a neutral pH

shampoo, such as Motorcraft® Detail

Wash.

• Never use strong household detergents

or soap, such as dish washing or

laundry liquid. These products can

discolor and spot painted surfaces.

• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the

touch” or during exposure to strong,

direct sunlight.

• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft

terry cloth towel in order to eliminate

water spotting.

• Immediately remove items such as

gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings and

insect deposits because they can cause

damage to the vehicle’s paintwork and

trim over time. Use Motorcraft® Bug

and Tar Remover.

• Remove any exterior accessories, such

as antennas, before entering a car

wash.

Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents

can damage any painted surface; if these

substances come in contact with your

vehicle, wash off as soon as possible.

Exterior Chrome

Note: Never use abrasive materials such as

steel wool or plastic pads as they can

scratch the chrome surface.

Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal

cleaner or polish on wheels and wheel

covers

236

Vehicle Care

• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or

lukewarm water and a neutral pH

shampoo, such as Motorcraft® Detail

Wash.

• Use Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal

Cleaner. Apply the product as you

would a wax to clean bumpers and

other chrome parts; allow the cleaner

to dry for a few minutes, then wipe off

the haze with a clean, dry rag.

• Do not apply cleaning product to hot

surfaces and do not leave cleaning

product on chrome surfaces for a

period of time exceeding that which is

recommended.

• Using other non-recommended

cleaners can result in severe and

permanent cosmetic damage.

Underbody

Flush the complete underside of your

vehicle frequently. Keep body and door

drain holes free from packed dirt.

Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts

Use only approved products to clean

plastic parts

• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft®

Detail Wash.

• If tar or grease spots are present, use

Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover.

REPAIRING MINOR PAINT

DAMAGE

Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint

to match your vehicle’s color. Take your

color code (printed on a sticker in the

driver’s door jamb) to your authorized

dealer to ensure you get the correct color.

• Remove particles such as bird

droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar

spots, road salt and industrial fallout

before repairing paint chips.

• Always read the instructions before

using the products.

WAXING

• Wash the vehicle first.

• Use a quality wax that does not contain

abrasives.

• Do not allow paint sealant to come in

contact with any non-body (low-gloss

black) colored trim, such as grained

door handles, roof racks, bumpers, side

moldings, mirror housings or the

windshield cowl area. The paint sealant

will “gray” or stain the parts over time.

CLEANING THE ENGINE

Engines are more efficient when they are

clean because grease and dirt buildup keep

the engine warmer than normal.

When washing:

• Take care when using a power washer

to clean the engine. The high-pressure

fluid could penetrate the sealed parts

and cause damage.

• Do not spray a hot engine with cold

water to avoid cracking the engine

block or other engine components.

• Spray Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo

and Degreaser on all parts that require

cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In

Canada, use Motorcraft® Engine

Shampoo.

• Never wash or rinse the engine while it

is hot or running; water in the running

engine may cause internal damage.

237

Vehicle Care

• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,

spark plug wire or spark plug well, or

the area in and around these locations.

• Cover the battery, power distribution

box, and air filter assembly to prevent

water damage when cleaning the

engine.

CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND

WIPER BLADES

The windows and wiper blades should be

cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe

properly, substances on the vehicle’ s glass

or the wiper blades may cause squeaking

or chatter noise from the blades, and

streaking and smearing of the windshield.

To clean these items, follow these tips:

• The windows may be cleaned with a

non-abrasive cleaner such as

Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass

Cleaner.

• The wiper blades can be cleaned with

isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or

Motorcraft® Premium Windshield

Washer Concentrate in the U.S., or

Premium Quality Windshield Washer

Fluid in Canada. Be sure to replace

wiper blades when they appear worn

or do not function properly.

• Do not use abrasives, as they may

cause scratches

• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint

thinner to clean any parts.

If you cannot remove those streaks after

cleaning with the glass cleaner or if the

wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion,

clean the outer surface of the windshield

and the wiper blades using a sponge or

soft cloth with a neutral detergent or

mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After

cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper

blades with clean water. The windshield

is clean if beads do not form when you

rinse the windshield with water.

Note: Do not use sharp objects, such as a

razor blade, to clean the inside of the rear

window or to remove decals, as it may cause

damage to the rear window defroster’s

heated grid lines.

CLEANING THE INTERIOR

WARNINGS

Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach

or dye on the vehicle’s safety belts,

as these actions may weaken the

belt webbing.

On vehicles equipped with

seat-mounted airbags, do not use

chemical solvents or strong

detergents. Such products could

contaminate the side airbag system and

affect performance of the side airbag in a

collision.

For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts

and seats equipped with side airbags:

• Remove dust and loose dirt with a

vacuum cleaner.

• Remove light stains and soil with

Motorcraft® Professional Strength

Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.

238

Vehicle Care

• If grease or tar is present on the

material, spot-clean the area first with

Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover.

In Canada, use Motorcraftt

Multi-Purpose Cleaner.

• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot

cleaning, clean the entire area

immediately (but do not oversaturate)

or the ring will set.

• Do not use household cleaning

products or glass cleaners, which can

stain and discolor the fabric and affect

the flame retardant abilities of the seat

materials.

CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT

PANEL AND INSTRUMENT

CLUSTER LENS

WARNING

Do not use chemical solvents or

strong detergents when cleaning the

steering wheel or instrument panel

to avoid contamination of the airbag

system.

Clean the instrument panel and cluster

lens with a clean, damp, white cotton

cloth, then use a clean and dry white

cotton cloth to dry these areas.

• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase

the gloss of the upper portion of the

instrument panel. The dull finish in this

area helps protect the driver from

undesirable windshield reflection.

• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands

clean if you have been in contact with

certain products such as insect

repellent and suntan lotion in order to

avoid possible damage to the interior

painted surfaces.

• Do not use household or glass cleaners

as these may damage the finish of the

instrument panel, interior trim and

cluster lens.

• Do not allow air fresheners and hand

sanitizers to spill on interior surfaces.

If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.

Damage may not be covered by your

warranty.

If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has

been spilled on the instrument panel or on

interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:

1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,

white, cotton cloth.

2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean,

white cotton cloth. For more thorough

cleaning, use a mild soap and water

solution. If the spot cannot be

completely cleaned by this method,

the area may be cleaned using a

commercially available cleaning

product designed for automotive

interiors.

3. If necessary, apply more soap and

water solution or cleaning product to

a clean, white, cotton cloth and press

the cloth onto the soiled area–allow

this to set at room temperature for 30

minutes.

4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is

not soiled badly, use this cloth to clean

the area by using a rubbing motion for

60 seconds.

5. Following this, wipe area dry with a

clean, white, cotton cloth.

CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (IF

EQUIPPED)

• Remove dust and loose dirt with a

vacuum cleaner.

• Clean spills and stains as quickly as

possible.

239

Vehicle Care

• For routine cleaning, wipe the surface

with a soft, damp cloth. For more

thorough cleaning, wipe the surface

with a mild soap and water solution. In

Canada, use Motorcraft® Vinyl Cleaner.

Dry the area with a soft cloth.

• If the leather cannot be completely

cleaned using a mild soap and water

solution, the leather may be cleaned

using a commercially available leather

cleaning product designed for

automotive interiors.

• To check for compatibility, first test any

cleaner or stain remover on an

inconspicuous part of the leather.

• Do not use household cleaning

products, alcohol solutions, solvents

or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl

and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based

leather conditioners. These products

may cause premature wearing or

damage to the leather.

CLEANING THE ALLOY

WHEELS (IF EQUIPPED)

Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal

cleaner or polish on wheels and wheel

covers.

Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are

coated with a clear coat paint finish. In

order to maintain their shine:

• Clean weekly with Motorcraft® Wheel

and Tire Cleaner. Heavy dirt and brake

dust accumulation may require

agitation with a sponge. Rinse

thoroughly with a strong stream of

water.

• Never apply any cleaning chemical to

hot or warm wheel rims or covers.

• Some automatic car washes may

cause damage to the finish on your

wheel rims or covers.

Industrial-strength (heavy-duty)

cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, in

combination with brush agitation to

remove brake dust and dirt, could wear

away the clear coat finish over time.

• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or

high caustic-based wheel cleaners,

steel wool, fuels or strong household

detergent.

• To remove tar and grease, use

Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover.

VEHICLE STORAGE

If you plan on storing your vehicle for an

extended period of time (30 days or more),

read the following maintenance

recommendations to make sure your

vehicle stays in good operating condition.

All motor vehicles and their components

were engineered and tested for reliable,

regular driving. Long term storage under

various conditions may lead to component

degradation or failure unless specific

precautions are taken to preserve the

components.

General

• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated

place.

• Protect from sunlight, if possible.

• If vehicles are stored outside, they

require regular maintenance to protect

against rust and damage.

240

Vehicle Care

Body

• Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove

dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior

surfaces, rear-wheel housing and

underside of front fenders.

• Periodically wash vehicles stored in

exposed locations.

• Touch-up raw or primed metal to

prevent rust

• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts

with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent

discoloration. Re-wax as necessary

when the vehicle is washed.

• Lubricate all hood, door and trunk lid

hinges, and latches with a light grade

oil.

• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.

• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and

solvents.

Engine

• The engine oil and filter should be

changed prior to storage, as used

engine oil contain contaminates that

may cause engine damage.

• Start the engine every 15 days. Run at

fast idle until it reaches normal

operating temperature

• With your foot on the brake, shift

through all the gears while the engine

is running.

Fuel system

• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel

until the first automatic shutoff of the

fuel pump nozzle.

Note: During extended periods of vehicle

storage (30 days or more), fuel may

deteriorate due to oxidation. Add a quality

gas stabilizer product to the vehicle fuel

system whenever actual or expected

storage periods exceed 30 days. Follow the

instructions on the additive label. The

vehicle should then be operated at idle

speed to circulate the additive throughout

the fuel system.

Cooling system

• Protect against freezing temperatures.

• When removing vehicle from storage,

check coolant fluid level. Confirm there

are no cooling system leaks, and fluid

is at the recommended level.

Battery

• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep

connections clean.

• If storing your vehicle for more than 30

days without recharging the battery, it

may be advisable to disconnect the

battery cables to ensure battery charge

is maintained for quick starting.

Note: If battery cables are disconnected, it

will be necessary to reset memory features.

Brakes

• Make sure brakes and parking brake

are fully released.

Tires

• Maintain recommended air pressure.

Miscellaneous

• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers

and pins under vehicle are covered with

grease to prevent rust.

• Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8

meters) every 15 days to lubricate

working parts and prevent corrosion.

241

Vehicle Care

Removing Vehicle From Storage

When your vehicle is ready to come out of

storage, do the following:

• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt

or grease film build-up on window

surfaces.

• Check windshield wipers for any

deterioration.

• Check under the hood for any foreign

material that may have collected

during storage (mice/squirrel nests).

• Check the exhaust for any foreign

material that may have collected

during storage.

• Check tire pressures and set tire

inflation per the Tire Label.

• Check brake pedal operation. Drive the

vehicle 15 feet (4.5 meters) back and

forth to remove rust build-up.

• Check fluid levels (including coolant,

oil and gas) to make sure there are no

leaks, and fluids are at recommended

levels.

• If the battery was removed, clean the

battery cable ends and inspect.

Contact your authorized dealer if you have

any concerns or issues.

242

Vehicle Care

GENERAL INFORMATION

Notice to utility vehicle and truck

owners

WARNINGS

Utility vehicles have a significantly

higher rollover rate than other types

of vehicles. To reduce the risk of

serious injury or death from a rollover or

other crash you must avoid sharp turns and

abrupt maneuvers, drive at safe speeds for

the conditions, keep tires properly inflated,

never overload or improperly load your

vehicle, and make sure every passenger is

properly restrained.

In a rollover crash, an unbelted

person is significantly more likely to

die than a person wearing a seat belt.

All occupants must wear seat belts and

children/infants must use appropriate

restraints to minimize the risk of injury or

ejection.

Do not become overconfident in the

ability of four-wheel drive vehicles.

Although a four-wheel drive vehicle

may accelerate better than a two-wheel

drive vehicle in low traction situations, it

won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive

vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.

E145298

Utility vehicles and trucks handle

differently than passenger cars in the

various driving conditions that are

encountered on streets, highways and

off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not

designed for cornering at speeds as high

as passenger cars any more than low-slung

sports cars are designed to perform

satisfactorily under off-road conditions.

Study your owner's manual and any

supplements for specific information about

equipment features, instructions for safe

driving and additional precautions to

reduce the risk of an accident or serious

injury.

Four-wheel drive system (if

equipped)

WARNING

Do not become overconfident in the

ability of four-wheel drive vehicles.

Although a four-wheel drive vehicle

may accelerate better than a two-wheel

drive vehicle in low traction situations, it

won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive

vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.

A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive

(when selected) has the ability to use all

four wheels to power itself. This increases

traction which may enable you to safely

drive over terrain and road conditions that

a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle

cannot.

For four-wheel drive vehicles, a spare tire

of a different size other than the tire

provided should never be used. A dissimilar

spare tire size (other than the spare tire

provided) or major dissimilar tire sized

between the front and rear axles could

cause the four-wheel drive system to stop

functioning and default to front-wheel

drive.

243

Wheels and Tires

How your vehicle differs from

other vehicles

Sport utility vehicles s and trucks can differ

from some other vehicles in a few

noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:

E145299

• Higher - to allow higher load carrying

capacity and to allow it to travel over

rough terrain without getting hung up

or damaging underbody components.

• Shorter - to give it the capability to

approach inclines and drive over the

crest of a hill without getting hung up

or damaging underbody components.

All other things held equal, a shorter

wheelbase may make your vehicle

quicker to respond to steering inputs

than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.

• Narrower - to provide greater

maneuverability in tight spaces,

particularly in off-road use.

E145300

As a result of the above dimensional

differences, Sport utility vehicles and

trucks often will have a higher center of

gravity and a greater difference in center

of gravity between the loaded and

unloaded condition. These differences that

make your vehicle so versatile also make

it handle differently than an ordinary

passenger car.

244

Wheels and Tires

TIRE CARE

Information About Uniform Tire

Quality Grading

E142542

Tire Quality Grades apply to new

pneumatic passenger car tires. The Quality

grades can be found where applicable on

the tire sidewall between tread shoulder

and maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA

Temperature A.

These Tire Quality Grades are determined

by standards that the United States

Department of Transportation has set.

Tire Quality Grades apply to new

pneumatic passenger car tires. They do

not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow

tires, space-saver or temporary use spare

tires, light truck or LT type tires, tires with

nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches

or limited production tires as defined in

Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part

575.104 (c)(2).

U.S. Department of Transportation Tire

quality grades: The U.S. Department of

Transportation requires Ford Motor

Company to give you the following

information about tire grades exactly as

the government has written it.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative

rating based on the wear rate of the tire

when tested under controlled conditions

on a specified government test course. For

example, a tire graded 150 would wear one

and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the

government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends

upon the actual conditions of their use,

however, and may depart significantly from

the norm due to variations in driving habits,

service practices, and differences in road

characteristics and climate.

Traction AA A B C

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this

tire is based on straight-ahead

braking traction tests, and does not

include acceleration, cornering,

hydroplaning or peak traction

characteristics.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest

are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent

the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement

as measured under controlled conditions

on specified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may

have poor traction performance.

Temperature A B C

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire

is established for a tire that is

properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, underinflation, or

excessive loading, either separately or in

combination, can cause heat buildup and

possible tire failure.

245

Wheels and Tires

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B and C, representing the tire’s

resistance to the generation of heat and

its ability to dissipate heat when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified

indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained

high temperature can cause the material

of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire

life, and excessive temperature can lead

to sudden tire failure. The grade C

corresponds to a level of performance

which all passenger car tires must meet

under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard No. 139. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of performance on

the laboratory test wheel than the

minimum required by law.

Glossary of Tire Terminology

• Tire label: A label showing the OE

(Original Equipment) tire sizes,

recommended inflation pressure and

the maximum weight the vehicle can

carry.

• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A

number on the sidewall of each tire

providing information about the tire

brand and manufacturing plant, tire

size and date of manufacture. Also

referred to as DOT code.

• Inflation pressure: A measure of the

amount of air in a tire.

• Standard load: A class of P-metric or

Metric tires designed to carry a

maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5

bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing the

inflation pressure beyond this pressure

will not increase the tire’ s load carrying

capability.

• Extra load: A class of P-metric or

Metric tires designed to carry a heavier

maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9

bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing the

inflation pressure beyond this pressure

will not increase the tire’ s load carrying

capability.

• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air

pressure.

• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a

standard unit of air pressure.

• Cold inflation pressure: The tire

pressure when the vehicle has been

stationary and out of direct sunlight for

an hour or more and prior to the vehicle

being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).

• Recommended inflation pressure:

The cold inflation pressure found on

the Safety Compliance Certification

Label (affixed to either the door hinge

pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge

that meets the door-latch post, next

to the driver's seating position), or Tire

Label located on the B-Pillar or the

edge of the driver’s door.

• B-pillar: The structural member at the

side of the vehicle behind the front

door

• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire

next to the rim.

• Sidewall of the tire: Area between

the bead area and the tread.

• Tread area of the tire: Area of the

perimeter of the tire that contacts the

road when mounted on the vehicle.

• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a

tire or a tire and tube assembly upon

which the tire beads are seated.

Information Contained on the Tire

Sidewall

Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations

require tire manufacturers to place

standardized information on the sidewall

of all tires. This information identifies and

describes the fundamental characteristics

of the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT

Tire Identification Number for safety

standard certification and in case of a

recall.

246

Wheels and Tires

Information on P Type Tires

E142543

P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire

size, load index and speed rating. The

definitions of these items are listed below.

(Note that the tire size, load index and

speed rating for your vehicle may be

different from this example.)

A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire

and Rim Association (T&RA), that may be

used for service on cars, SUVs, minivans

and light trucks. Note: If your tire size does

not begin with a letter this may mean it is

designated by either ETRTO (European

Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or

JATMA (Japan Tire Manufacturing

Association).

B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the

tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to

sidewall edge. In general, the larger the

number, the wider the tire.

C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which

gives the tire's ratio of height to width.

D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.

E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter

in inches. If you change your wheel size,

you will have to purchase new tires to

match the new wheel diameter.

F. 95: Indicates the tire's load index. It is

an index that relates to how much weight

a tire can carry. You may find this

information in your owner’ s manual. If not,

contact a local tire dealer.

Note: You may not find this information on

all tires because it is not required by federal

law.

G. H: Indicates the tire's speed rating. The

speed rating denotes the speed at which

a tire is designed to be driven for extended

periods of time under a standard condition

of load and inflation pressure. The tires on

your vehicle may operate at different

conditions for load and inflation pressure.

These speed ratings may need to be

adjusted for the difference in conditions.

The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h)

to 186 mph (299 km/h). These ratings are

listed in the following chart.

Note: You may not find this information on

all tires because it is not required by federal

law.

Speed rating - mph (km/

Letter rating

81 mph (130 km/h)M

87 mph (140 km/h)N

99 mph (159 km/h)Q

106 mph (171 km/h)R

112 mph (180 km/h)S

118 mph (190 km/h)T

124 mph (200 km/h)U

130 mph (210 km/h)H

149 mph (240 km/h)V

247

Wheels and Tires

Speed rating - mph (km/

Letter rating

168 mph (270 km/h)W

186 mph (299 km/h)Y

Note: For tires with a maximum speed

capability over 149 mph (240 km/h), tire

manufacturers sometimes use the letters

ZR. For those with a maximum speed

capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire

manufacturers always use the letters ZR.

H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number

(TIN): This begins with the letters DOT

and indicates that the tire meets all federal

standards. The next two numbers or letters

are the plant code designating where it

was manufactured, the next two are the

tire size code and the last four numbers

represent the week and year the tire was

built. For example, the numbers 317 mean

the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the

numbers go to four digits. For example,

2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The

numbers in between are identification

codes used for traceability. This

information is used to contact customers

if a tire defect requires a recall.

I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or

AT: All Terrain, or

AS: All Season.

J. Tire Ply Composition and Material

Used: Indicates the number of plies or the

number of layers of rubber-coated fabric

in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire

manufacturers also must indicate the ply

materials in the tire and the sidewall, which

include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

K. Maximum Load: Indicates the

maximum load in kilograms and pounds

that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the

Safety Compliance Certification Label

(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,

door-latch post, or the door edge that

meets the door-latch post, next to the

driver's seating position), for the correct

tire pressure for your vehicle.

L. Treadwear, Traction and

Temperature Grades:

• Treadwear The treadwear grade is a

comparative rating based on the wear

rate of the tire when tested under

controlled conditions on a specified

government test course. For example,

a tire graded 150 would wear one and

one-half times as well on the

government course as a tire graded

100.

• Traction: The traction grades, from

highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C.

The grades represent the tire's ability

to stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on

specified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C

may have poor traction performance.

• Temperature: The temperature

grades are A (the highest), B and C,

representing the tire's resistance to the

generation of heat and its ability to

dissipate heat when tested under

controlled conditions on a specified

indoor laboratory test wheel.

248

Wheels and Tires

M. Maximum Permissible Inflation

Pressure: Indicates the tire

manufacturers' maximum permissible

pressure or the pressure at which the

maximum load can be carried by the tire.

This pressure is normally higher than the

manufacturer's recommended cold

inflation pressure which can be found on

the Safety Compliance Certification Label

(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,

door-latch post, or the door edge that

meets the door-latch post, next to the

driver's seating position), or Tire Label

which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge

of the driver’s door. The cold inflation

pressure should never be set lower than

the recommended pressure on the vehicle

label.

The tire suppliers may have additional

markings, notes or warnings such as

standard load, radial tubeless, etc.

Additional Information Contained on

the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires

Note: Tire Quality Grades do not apply to

this type of tire.

E142544

LT type tires have some additional

information beyond those of P type tires;

these differences are described below.

A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by the

Tire and Rim Association (T&RA), that is

intended for service on light trucks.

B. Load Range and Load Inflation

Limits: Indicates the tire's load-carrying

capabilities and its inflation limits.

C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi

(kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load

and tire pressure when the tire is used as

a dual; defined as four tires on the rear axle

(a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).

D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi

(kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load

and tire pressure when the tire is used as

a single; defined as two tires (total) on the

rear axle.

Information on T Type Tires

T145/80D16 is an example of a tire size.

Note: The temporary tire size for your

vehicle may be different from this example.

Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type

of tire.

249

Wheels and Tires

E142545

T type tires have some additional

information beyond those of P type tires;

these differences are described below:

A. T: Indicates a type of tire, designated by

the Tire and Rim Association (T&RA), that

is intended for temporary service on cars,

SUVs, minivans and light trucks.

B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of the

tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to

sidewall edge. In general, the larger the

number, the wider the tire.

C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which

gives the tire's ratio of height to width.

Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short

sidewall.

D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.

R: Indicates a radial type tire.

E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter

in inches. If you change your wheel size,

you will have to purchase new tires to

match the new wheel diameter.

Location of the Tire Label

You will find a Tire Label containing tire

inflation pressure by tire size and other

important information located on the

B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.

Inflating Your Tires

Safe operation of your vehicle requires that

your tires are properly inflated. Remember

that a tire can lose up to half of its air

pressure without appearing flat.

Every day before you drive, check your tires.

If one looks lower than the others, use a

tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and

adjust if required.

At least once a month and before long

trips, inspect each tire and check the tire

pressure with a tire gauge (including spare,

if equipped). Inflate all tires to the inflation

pressure recommended by Ford Motor

Company.

You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire

pressure gauge, as automatic service

station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford

recommends the use of a digital or

dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a

stick-type tire pressure gauge.

Use the recommended cold inflation

pressure for optimum tire performance and

wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may

cause uneven treadwear patterns

250

Wheels and Tires

WARNING

Under-inflation is the most common

cause of tire failures and may result

in severe tire cracking, tread

separation or blowout, with unexpected

loss of vehicle control and increased risk

of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall

flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in

heat buildup and internal damage to the

tire. It also may result in unnecessary tire

stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle

control and accidents. A tire can lose up

to half of its air pressure and not appear

to be flat!

Always inflate your tires to the Ford

recommended inflation pressure even if it

is less than the maximum inflation

pressure information found on the tire. The

Ford recommended tire inflation pressure

is found on the Safety Compliance

Certification Label (affixed to either the

door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the

door edge that meets the door-latch post,

next to the driver's seating position), or Tire

Label which is located on the B-Pillar or

the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to

follow the tire pressure recommendations

can cause uneven treadwear patterns and

adversely affect the way your vehicle

handles

Maximum Permissible Inflation

Pressure is the tire manufacturer's

maximum permissible pressure and the

pressure at which the maximum load can

be carried by the tire. This pressure is

normally higher than the manufacturer’s

recommended cold inflation pressure

which can be found on the Safety

Compliance Certification Label (affixed to

either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post,

or the door edge that meets the door-latch

post, next to the driver's seating position),

or Tire Label which is located on the

B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The

cold inflation pressure should never be set

lower than the recommended pressure on

the Safety Compliance Certification Label

or Tire Label.

When weather temperature changes

occur, tire inflation pressures also change.

A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause

a corresponding drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in

inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures

frequently and adjust them to the proper

pressure which can be found on the Safety

Compliance Certification Label or Tire

Label.

To check the pressure in your tire(s):

1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning

they are not hot from driving even a

mile.

Note: If you are checking tire pressure when

the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more than 1 mile

[1.6 km]), never bleed or reduce air pressure.

The tires are hot from driving and it is normal

for pressures to increase above

recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at

or below recommended cold inflation

pressure could be significantly

under-inflated.

Note: If you have to drive a distance to get

air for your tire(s), check and record the tire

pressure first and add the appropriate air

pressure when you get to the pump. It is

normal for tires to heat up and the air

pressure inside to go up as you drive.

251

Wheels and Tires

2. Remove the cap from the valve on one

tire, then firmly press the tire gauge

onto the valve and measure the

pressure.

3. Add enough air to reach the

recommended air pressure.

Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by

pressing on the metal stem in the center of

the valve. Then recheck the pressure with

your tire gauge.

4. Replace the valve cap.

5. Repeat this procedure for each tire,

including the spare.

Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher

inflation pressure than the other tires. For T

type mini-spare tires (refer to the Dissimilar

spare wheel and tire assembly information

for a description): Store and maintain at 60

psi (4.15 bar). For full-size and dissimilar

spare tires (refer to the Dissimilar spare

wheel and tire assembly information for a

description): Store and maintain at the

higher of the front and rear inflation pressure

as shown on the Tire Label.

6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure

there are no nails or other objects

embedded that could poke a hole in

the tire and cause an air leak.

7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there

are no gouges, cuts or bulges.

Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve

Stems

Periodically inspect the tire treads for

uneven or excessive wear and remove

objects such as stones, nails or glass that

may be wedged in the tread grooves.

Check the tire and valve stems for holes,

cracks, or cuts that may permit air leakage

and repair or replace the tire and replace

the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls

for cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs

of damage or excessive wear. If internal

damage to the tire is suspected, have the

tire demounted and inspected in case it

needs to be repaired or replaced. For your

safety, tires that are damaged or show

signs of excessive wear should not be used

because they are more likely to blow out

or fail.

Improper or inadequate vehicle

maintenance can cause tires to wear

abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including

the spare, frequently, and replace them if

one or more of the following conditions

exist:

Tire Wear

E142546

252

Wheels and Tires

When the tread is worn down to one

sixteenth of an inch (2 mm), tires must be

replaced to help prevent your vehicle from

skidding and hydroplaning. Built-in

treadwear indicators, or wear bars, which

look like narrow strips of smooth rubber

across the tread will appear on the tire

when the tread is worn down to one

sixteenth of an inch (2 mm)

When the tire tread wears down to the

same height as these wear bars, the tire is

worn out and must be replaced.

Damage

Periodically inspect the tire treads and

sidewalls for damage (such as bulges in

the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread

groove and separation in the tread or

sidewall). If damage is observed or

suspected have the tire inspected by a tire

professional. Tires can be damaged during

off-road use, so inspection after off-road

use is also recommended.

Age

WARNING

Tires degrade over time depending

on many factors such as weather,

storage conditions, and conditions

of use (load, speed, inflation pressure, etc.)

the tires experience throughout their lives.

In general, tires should be replaced after

six years regardless of tread wear.

However, heat caused by hot climates or

frequent high loading conditions can

accelerate the aging process and may

require tires to be replaced more

frequently.

You should replace your spare tire when

you replace the road tires or after six years

due to aging even if it has not been used.

U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number

(TIN)

Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations

require tire manufacturers to place

standardized information on the sidewall

of all tires. This information identifies and

describes the fundamental characteristics

of the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT

Tire Identification Number for safety

standard certification and in case of a

recall.

This begins with the letters DOT and

indicates that the tire meets all federal

standards. The next two numbers or letters

are the plant code designating where it

was manufactured, the next two are the

tire size code and the last four numbers

represent the week and year the tire was

built. For example, the numbers 317 mean

the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the

numbers go to four digits. For example,

2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The

numbers in between are identification

codes used for traceability. This

information is used to contact customers

if a tire defect requires a recall.

Tire Replacement Requirements

Your vehicle is equipped with tires

designed to provide a safe ride and

handling capability.

WARNINGS

Only use replacement tires and

wheels that are the same size, load

index, speed rating and type (such

as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season

versus all-terrain) as those originally

provided by Ford. The recommended tire

and wheel size may be found on either the

Safety Compliance Certification Label

(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,

door-latch post, or the door edge that

meets the door-latch post, next to the

driver's seating position), or the Tire Label

which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of

the driver’s door. If this information is not

253

Wheels and Tires

WARNINGS

found on these labels then you should

contact your authorized dealer as soon as

possible. Use of any tire or wheel not

recommended by Ford can affect the

safety and performance of your vehicle,

which could result in an increased risk of

loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,

personal injury and death. Additionally the

use of non-recommended tires and wheels

could cause steering, suspension, axle,

transfer case or power transfer unit failure.

If you have questions regarding tire

replacement, contact your authorized

dealer as soon as possible.

When mounting replacement tires

and wheels, you should not exceed

the maximum pressure indicated on

the sidewall of the tire to set the beads

without additional precautions listed

below. If the beads do not seat at the

maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate

and try again

When inflating the tire for mounting

pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater

than the maximum pressure on the tire

sidewall, the following precautions must

be taken to protect the person mounting

the tire:

1. Make sure that you have the correct tire

and wheel size.

2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead

seat area again.

3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m)

away from the wheel and tire assembly.

4. Use both eye and ear protection.

For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi

(1.38 bar) greater than the maximum

pressure, a Ford dealer or other tire service

professional should do the mounting.

WARNINGS

Always inflate steel carcass tires with a

remote air fill with the person inflating

standing at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m)

away from the wheel and tire assembly

Important: Remember to replace the

wheel valve stems when the road tires are

replaced on your vehicle

It is recommended that the two front tires

or two rear tires generally be replaced as

a pair.

The tire pressure sensors mounted in the

wheels (originally installed on your vehicle)

are not designed to be used in aftermarket

wheels.

The use of wheels or tires not

recommended by Ford Motor Company

may affect the operation of your tire

pressure monitoring system.

If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your

TPMS is malfunctioning. Your replacement

tire might be incompatible with your TPMS,

or some component of the TPMS may be

damaged.

Safety Practices

WARNINGS

If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud,

sand, etc., do not rapidly spin the

tires; spinning the tires can tear the

tire and cause an explosion. A tire can

explode in as little as three to five seconds.

Do not spin the wheels at over 35

mph (56 km/h). The tires may fail

and injure a passenger or bystander.

Driving habits have a great deal to do with

your tire mileage and safety.

• Observe posted speed limits

• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns

254

Wheels and Tires

• Avoid potholes and objects on the road

• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire

against a curb when parking

Highway Hazards

No matter how carefully you drive there’s

always the possibility that you may

eventually have a flat tire on the highway.

Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of

traffic. This may further damage the flat

tire, but your safety is more important.

If you feel a sudden vibration or ride

disturbance while driving, or you suspect

your tire or vehicle has been damaged,

immediately reduce your speed. Drive with

caution until you can safely pull off the

road. Stop and inspect the tires for

damage. If a tire is under-inflated or

damaged, deflate it, remove wheel and

replace it with your spare tire and wheel.

If you cannot detect a cause, have the

vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility

or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.

Tire and Wheel Alignment

A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole

can cause the front end of your vehicle to

become misaligned or cause damage to

your tires. If your vehicle seems to pull to

one side when you’re driving, the wheels

may be out of alignment. Have an

authorized dealer check the wheel

alignment periodically.

Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear

can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of

your tires and should be corrected by an

authorized dealer. Front-wheel drive

vehicles and those with an independent

rear suspension (if equipped) may require

alignment of all four wheels.

The tires should also be balanced

periodically. An unbalanced tire and wheel

assembly may result in irregular tire wear.

Tire Rotation

Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask

an authorized dealer to check for and correct

any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or

mechanical problem involved before tire

rotation.

Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with

a dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly.

A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly

is defined as a spare wheel and tire

assembly that is different in brand, size or

appearance from the road tires and wheels.

If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire

assembly it is intended for temporary use

only and should not be used in a tire

rotation.

Note: After having your tires rotated,

inflation pressure must be checked and

adjusted to the vehicle requirements.

Rotating your tires at the recommended

interval (as indicated in the Scheduled

Maintenance chapter) will help your tires

wear more evenly, providing better tire

performance and longer tire life.

Front-wheel drive vehicles (front tires on

the left side of the diagram)

E142547

Four-wheel drive vehicles (front tires on

the left side of the diagram)

255

Wheels and Tires

E142548

Sometimes irregular tire wear can be

corrected by rotating the tires.

USING SNOW CHAINS

WARNING

Snow tires must be the same size,

load index, speed rating as those

originally provided by Ford. Use of

any tire or wheel not recommended by

Ford can affect the safety and

performance of your vehicle, which could

result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle

control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and

death. Additionally, the use of

non-recommended tires and wheels could

cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer

case or power transfer unit failure.

The tires on your vehicle have all-weather

treads to provide traction in rain and snow.

However, in some climates, you may need

to use snow tires and cables. If you need

to use cables, it is recommended that steel

wheels (of the same size and

specifications) be used, as cables may chip

aluminum wheels.

Follow these guidelines when using snow

tires and traction devices

• If possible, avoid fully loading your

vehicle

• Purchase chains or cables from a

manufacturer that clearly labels body

to tire dimension restrictions.

• Use 10 mm cables or chains ONLY on

front axle with 235/55R17 tires.

• Not all S-class snow chains or cables

meet these restrictions. Chains of this

size restriction will include a tensioning

device.

• The snow chains or cables must be

mounted in pairs on the front axle.

• Do not use chains or cables on

235/50R18 and 235/45R19 tires.

• Install cables securely, verifying that

the cables do not touch any wiring,

brake lines or fuel lines.

• When driving with tire cables do not

exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) or the

maximum speed recommended by the

chain manufacturer, whichever is less.

• Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables

rub or bang against the vehicle, stop

and retighten them. If this does not

work, remove the cables to prevent

vehicle damage.

• Remove the cables when they are no

longer needed. Do not use cables on

dry roads.

If you have any questions regarding snow

chains or cables, please contact your

authorized dealer.

256

Wheels and Tires

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM

WARNING

The tire pressure monitoring system

is NOT a substitute for manually

checking tire pressure. The tire

pressure should be checked periodically

(at least monthly) using a tire gauge, see

Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure

to properly maintain your tire pressure

could increase the risk of tire failure, loss

of control, vehicle rollover and personal

injury.

Each tire, including the spare (if

provided), should be checked

monthly when cold and inflated

to the inflation pressure

recommended by the vehicle manufacturer

on the vehicle placard or tire inflation

pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of

a different size than the size indicated on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure

label, you should determine the proper tire

inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) that

illuminates a low tire pressure telltale

when one or more of your tires is

significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,

when the low tire pressure telltale

illuminates, you should stop and check

your tires as soon as possible, and inflate

them to the proper pressure. Driving on a

significantly under-inflated tire causes the

tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency

and tire tread life, and may affect the

vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a

substitute for proper tire maintenance, and

it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain

correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation

has not reached the level to trigger

illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure

telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with

a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate

when the system is not operating properly.

The malfunction indicator is combined

with the low tire pressure telltale. When

the system detects a malfunction, the

telltale will flash for approximately one

minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue

upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long

as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is

illuminated, the system may not be able

to detect or signal low tire pressure as

intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur

for a variety of reasons, including the

installation of replacement or alternate

tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent

the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more tires or

wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels

allow the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

The tire pressure monitoring system

complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and

with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) This device

must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause

undesired operation.

257

Wheels and Tires

Changing Tires with a Tire

Pressure Monitoring System

E142549

Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire

pressure sensor located inside the wheel

and tire assembly cavity. The pressure

sensor is attached to the valve stem. The

pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is

not visible unless the tire is removed. Care

must be taken when changing the tire to

avoid damaging the sensor

It is recommended that you always have

your tires serviced by an authorized dealer.

The tire pressure should be checked

periodically (at least monthly) using an

accurate tire gauge, refer to Inflating your

tires in this chapter.

Understanding Your Tire Pressure

Monitoring System

The tire pressure monitoring system

measures pressure in your four road tires

and sends the tire pressure readings to

your vehicle. The low tire pressure warning

light will turn on if the tire pressure is

significantly low. Once the light is

illuminated, your tires are under-inflated

and need to be inflated to the

manufacturer’s recommended tire

pressure. Even if the light turns on and a

short time later turns off, your tire pressure

still needs to be checked. Visit

www.checkmytires.org for additional

information.

When your Temporary Spare Tire is

Installed

When one of your road tires needs to be

replaced with the temporary spare, the tire

pressure monitoring system will continue

to identify an issue to remind you that the

damaged road wheel and tire assembly

needs to be repaired and put back on your

vehicle.

To restore the full functionality of the tire

pressure monitoring system, have the

damaged road wheel and tire assembly

repaired and remounted on your vehicle.

When you Believe your System is not

Operating Properly

The main function of the tire pressure

monitoring system is to warn you when

your tires need air. It can also warn you in

the event the system is no longer capable

of functioning as intended. Please refer to

the following chart for information

concerning your tire pressure monitoring

system:

258

Wheels and Tires

Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure

warning light

1. Make sure tires are at the proper pres-

sure. See Inflating your tires in this

chapter. 2. After inflating your tires to the

manufacturer’s recommended pressure

as shown on the Tire Label (located on

the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar),

the vehicle must be driven for at least

two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)

before the light turns off.

Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning light

Repair the damaged road wheel and tire

assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle

to restore system functionality. For a

description on how the system functions,

refer to When your temporary spare tire

is installed in this section.

Spare tire in use

If the tires are properly inflated and the

spare tire is not in use but the light

remains on, contact your authorized

dealer as soon as possible.

TPMS malfunction

Repair the damaged road wheel and tire

assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle

to restore system functionality. For a

description on how the system functions,

refer to When your temporary spare tire

is installed in this section.

Spare tire in useFlashing warning

light

If the tires are properly inflated and the

spare tire is not in use but the light

remains on, contact your authorized

dealer as soon as possible.

TPMS malfunction

When Inflating your Tires

When putting air into your tires (such as at

a gas station or in your garage), the tire

pressure monitoring system may not

respond immediately to the air added to

your tires.

It may take up to two minutes of driving

over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn

off after you have filled your tires to the

recommended inflation pressure

259

Wheels and Tires

How Temperature Affects your Tire

Pressure

The tire pressure monitoring system

monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic

tire. While driving in a normal manner, a

typical passenger tire inflation pressure

may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi (14

to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If

the vehicle is stationary overnight with the

outside temperature significantly lower

than the daytime temperature, the tire

pressure may decrease approximately 3

psi (21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in

ambient temperature. This lower pressure

value may be detected by the TPMS as

being significantly lower than the

recommended inflation pressure and

activate the TPMS warning light for low

tire pressure. If the low tire pressure

warning light is on, visually check each tire

to verify that no tire is flat. (If one or more

tires are flat, repair as necessary.) Check

air pressure in the road tires. If any tire is

under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle

to the nearest location where air can be

added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to

the recommended inflation pressure.

CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL

WARNINGS

The use of tire sealants may damage

your tire pressure monitoring system

and should not be used. However, if

you must use a sealant, the tire pressure

monitoring system sensor and valve stem

on the wheel must be replaced by an

authorized Ford dealer.

See Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (page 257). for important

information. If the tire pressure

monitor sensor becomes damaged, it will

no longer function.

Note: The tire pressure monitoring system

indicator light will illuminate when the spare

tire is in use. To restore the full functionality

of the monitoring system, all road wheels

equipped with tire pressure monitoring

sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.

If you get a flat tire while driving, do not

apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually

decrease your speed. Hold the steering

wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe

place on the side of the road.

Have a flat serviced by an authorized

dealer in order to prevent damage to the

tire pressure monitoring system sensors.

See Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(page 257). Replace the spare tire with a

road tire as soon as possible. During

repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have

the authorized dealer inspect the tire

pressure monitoring system sensor for

damage.

Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire

Assembly Information

WARNING

Failure to follow these guidelines

could result in an increased risk of

loss of vehicle control, injury or death.

If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and

tire, then it is intended for temporary use

only. This means that if you need to use it,

you should replace it as soon as possible

with a road wheel and tire assembly that

is the same size and type as the road tires

and wheels that were originally provided

by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel

is damaged, it should be replaced rather

than repaired.

A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly

is defined as a spare wheel and tire

assembly that is different in brand, size or

appearance from the road tires and wheels

and can be one of three types:

260

Wheels and Tires

1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire

begins with the letter T for tire size and

may have Temporary Use Only molded in

the sidewall.

2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label

on wheel: This spare tire has a label on

the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND

TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE

ONLY.

When driving with one of the dissimilar

spare tires listed above, do not:

• Exceed 50 miles per hour (80

kilometers per hour)

• Load the vehicle beyond maximum

vehicle load rating listed on the Safety

Compliance Label.

• Tow a trailer.

• Use snow chains on the end of the

vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.

• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire

at a time.

• Use commercial car washing

equipment.

• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.

Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires

listed above at any one wheel location can

lead to impairment of the following:

• Handling, stability and braking

performance.

• Comfort and noise.

• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.

• Winter weather driving capability.

• Wet weather driving capability.

• All-wheel driving capability (if

applicable).

3. Full-size dissimilar spare without

label on wheel

When driving with the full-size dissimilar

spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:

• Exceed 70 miles per hour (113

kilometers per hour).

• Use more than one dissimilar spare

wheel and tire assembly at a time.

• Use commercial car washing

equipment.

• Use snow chains on the end of the

vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel

and tire assembly.

The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare

wheel and tire assembly can lead to

impairment of the following:

• Handling, stability and braking

performance.

• Comfort and noise.

• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.

• Winter weather driving capability.

• Wet weather driving capability.

• All-wheel driving capability (if

applicable).

• Load leveling adjustment (if

applicable).

When driving with the full-size dissimilar

spare wheel and tire assembly additional

caution should be given to:

• Towing a trailer.

• Driving vehicles equipped with a

camper body.

• Driving vehicles with a load on the

cargo rack.

Drive cautiously when using a full-size

dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly

and seek service as soon as possible.

261

Wheels and Tires

Tire Change Procedure

WARNINGS

When one of the front wheels is off

the ground, the transmission alone

will not prevent the vehicle from

moving or slipping off the jack, even if the

vehicle is in position P.

To help prevent the vehicle from

moving when you change a tire, be

sure the parking brake is set, then

block (in both directions) the wheel that

is diagonally opposite (other side and end

of the vehicle) to the tire being changed.

If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or

someone else could be seriously

injured.

Do not attempt to change a tire on

the side of the vehicle close to

moving traffic. Pull far enough off the

road to avoid the danger of being hit when

operating the jack or changing the wheel.

To lessen the risk of personal injury,

do not put any part of your body

under the vehicle while changing a

tire. Do not start the engine when your

vehicle is on the jack. The jack is only

meant for changing the tire.

Note: Passengers should not remain in the

vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.

1. Park on a level surface, set the parking

brake and activate the hazard flashers.

2. Place the gearshift lever in position P

and turn the engine off.

3. Remove the carpeted wheel cover.

E142550

4. Remove the lug wrench and jack from

the foam holder. Then, remove the flat

tire retainer strap from the jack base.

E142551

5. Block the diagonally opposite wheel.

6. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half

turn counterclockwise but do not

remove them until the wheel is raised

off the ground.

7. The vehicle jacking points are shown

here, and are depicted on the yellow

warning label on the jack. Jack at the

specified locations to avoid

damage to the vehicle.

262

Wheels and Tires

E142552

8. Small arrow-shaped marks on the sills

show the location of the jacking points.

E142553

9. Remove the lug nuts with the lug

wrench.

Note: If equipped with full wheel covers

with exposed wheel nuts, the wheel nuts

must be removed prior to removing the

wheel cover or damage to the wheel cover

may occur.

10. Replace the flat tire with the spare

tire, making sure the valve stem is

facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts

until the wheel is snug against the

hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts

until the wheel has been lowered.

11. Lower the wheel by turning the jack

handle counterclockwise.

E75442

12. Remove the jack and fully tighten the

lug nuts in the order shown. See

Technical Specifications (page

265).

Stowing the flat tire

1. Put the jack and lug wrench away.

Make sure the jack is fastened so it

does not rattle when you drive.

2. Unblock the wheels.

263

Wheels and Tires

3. Stow the flat tire on the floor in the

cargo area. Secure with the flat tire

retainer strap by following the next

steps:

E142906

4. Locate the cargo tie-down near the

seatback. Push the loop of the retainer

strap through the tie-down. Thread the

non-loop end through the loop.

E142985

5. Weave the retainer strap through the

wheel openings.

6. Locate the front cargo tie-down at the

opposite corner of the cargo area to

the tie-down used in Step 4. Thread

the retainer strap through the tie-down

and pull tight.

7. Secure by tying a 2-half hitch knot.

264

Wheels and Tires

E143746

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications

WARNING

When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials

present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub,

brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that

attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces

of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel

mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while

the vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control.

Ib-ft (Nm)

Bolt size

100 (135)M12 x 1.5

Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford

recommended replacement fasteners.

Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 km) after any wheel

disturbance (tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).

265

Wheels and Tires

E145950

Wheel pilot boreA

Inspect the wheel pilot bore and

mounting surface prior to installation.

Remove any visible corrosion or loose

particles.

266

Wheels and Tires

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS

2.5L engine2.0L EcoBoost engine1.6L EcoBoost engineEngine

15212298Cubic inches

Minimum 87 octaneMinimum 87 octaneMinimum 87 octaneRequired fuel

9.7:19.3:110.0:1Compression

ratio

0.049-0.053 in.

(1.25-1.35 mm)

0.027-0.031 in.

(0.70-0.80 mm)

0.027-0.031 in. (0.70-

0.80 mm)

Spark plug gap

Drivebelt Routing

1.6L engine

E142479

2.0L and 2.5L engines

E142480

Long drivebelt is on first pulley

groove closest to engine

Short drivebelt is on second

pulley groove farthest from

engine

MOTORCRAFT PARTS

2.5L engine2.0L EcoBoost® engine1.6L EcoBoost®

engine

Component

FA-1908Air filter

element

FL-910-S

Oil filter

BXT-96R-500Battery

BXT-96R-590

267

Capacities and Specifications

2.5L engine2.0L EcoBoost® engine1.6L EcoBoost®

engine

Component

AYFS-32-YR

Spark plugs

FP70Cabin air filter

WW-2750 (driver side)Windshield

wiper blade WW-2705-WA (passenger side)

Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage. The

customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter

element is not used.

Only use the specified replacement oil filter. The use of a non-specified oil filter can

result in engine damage.

For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the

appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 396).

Note: Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and design specifications

for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft® or equivalent replacement parts. The customer

warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not used.

268

Capacities and Specifications

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

NUMBER

The vehicle identification number is

located on the driver side instrument panel.

E142476

Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is

representative of your vehicle identification

number.

The Vehicle Identification Number contains

the following information:

E142477

World manufacturer identifierA

Brake system, Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating, Restraint Devices

and their locations

Make, vehicle line, series, body

type

Engine typeD

Check digitE

Model yearF

Assembly plantG

Production sequence numberH

269

Capacities and Specifications

VEHICLE CERTIFICATION

LABEL

E142478

The National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration Regulations require that a

Safety Compliance Certification Label be

affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where

the Safety Compliance Certification Label

may be located. The Safety Compliance

Certification Label shall be affixed to either

the door hinge pillar, the door latch post,

or the edge of the door near the door latch,

next to the driver's seating position.

TRANSMISSION CODE

DESIGNATION

E142806

You can find a transmission code on the

Safety Compliance Certification Label. The

following table tells you which

transmission each code represents.

CodeDescription

6Six-speed automatic

transmission (6F35)

270

Capacities and Specifications

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Ford Part Number /

Ford Specification

Ford Part Name or

Equivalent

CapacityItem

PM-1-C / WSS-

M6C65-A2

Motorcraft® High

Performance DOT 4

Motor Vehicle Brake

Fluid

Between MIN

and MAX on

reservoir

Brake fluid

XG-4 or XL-5 or equi-

valent / ESB-M1C93-

Multi-Purpose

Grease (Lithium

grease)

Not applicableDoor latch, hood latch,

auxiliary hood latch,

trunk latch, seat tracks.

XL-1 / NoneMotorcraft® Penet-

rating and Lock

Lubricant

Not applicableLock cylinder

XT-10-QLV

MERCON® LV

Motorcraft®

MERCON® LV ATF

9.0 qt (8.5L)Automatic transmission

fluid

2, 3

XY-80W90-QL /

WSP-M2C197-A

Motorcraft® SAE

80W-90 Premium

Rear Axle Lubricant

2.4 pt (1.15L)Rear differential (AWD)

fluid

XY-75W140-QL /

WSL-M2C192-A

Motorcraft® SAE

75W-140 Synthetic

Rear Axle Lubricant

12 oz (0.35L)Power Transfer Unit

(PTU) fluid (AWD)

- XO-5W30-QSP

(U.S.)

- Motorcraft® SAE

5W-30 Premium

Synthetic Blend

Motor Oil (U.S.)

5.7 qt (5.4L)2.0L EcoBoost® engine

oil

5, 6

- XO-5W30-QFS

(U.S.)

- Motorcraft® SAE

5W-30 Full

Synthetic Motor Oil

(U.S.)

- CXO-5W30-LSP12

(Canada)

- CXO-5W30-LFS12

(Canada)

- Motorcraft® SAE

5W-30 Super

Premium Motor Oil

(Canada)

/ WSS-M2C946-A

with API Certification

Mark

- Motorcraft® SAE

5W-30 Synthetic

Motor Oil (Canada)

- XO-5W20-QSP

(U.S.)

- Motorcraft® SAE

5W-20 Premium

Synthetic Blend

Motor Oil (U.S.)

4.3 qt (4.1L)1.6L EcoBoost engine oil

5, 6

- XO-5W20-QFS

(U.S.)

271

Capacities and Specifications

Ford Part Number /

Ford Specification

Ford Part Name or

Equivalent

CapacityItem

5.7 qt (5.4L)

2.5L engine oil

5, 6

- CXO-5W20-LSP12

(Canada)

- Motorcraft® SAE

5W-20 Full

Synthetic Motor Oil

(U.S.)

- CXO-5W20-LFS12

(Canada)

- Motorcraft® SAE

5W-20 Super

Premium Motor Oil

(Canada)

/ WSS-M2C945-A

and API Certification

Mark

- Motorcraft® SAE

5W-20 Synthetic

Motor Oil (Canada)

- VC-3DIL-B (U.S.)Motorcraft® Orange

Antifreeze / Coolant

Prediluted

9.7 qt (9.2L)2.0L EcoBoost engine

coolant

- CVC-3DIL-B

(Canada)

8.5 qt (8L)1.6L EcoBoost engine

coolant

/ WSS-M97B44-D2

9.2 qt (8.7L)

2.5L engine coolant

- ZC-32-A (U.S.)- Motorcraft®

Premium Windshield

Washer Concentrate

(U.S.)

Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid

- CXC-37-(A, B, D,

and F) (Canada)

272

Capacities and Specifications

Ford Part Number /

Ford Specification

Ford Part Name or

Equivalent

CapacityItem

/ WSB-M8B16-A2/--Premium Quality

Windshield Washer

Fluid (Canada)

Not applicableNot applicable15.1 gal (57L)Fuel tank

Use only Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting

WSS-M6C65-A2 and ISO 4925 Class 6. Use of any fluid other than the recommended

fluid may cause brake system damage.

Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.

Automatic transmissions that require Motorcraft® MERCON® LV transmission fluid

should only use Motorcraft® MERCON® LV transmission fluid.

Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.

Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter at the correct service interval. See

Scheduled Maintenance (page 396).

See your authorized dealer for fluid level checking or filling.

Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet

the requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C946-A, SAE 5W-30 (2.0L engine) or

WSS-M2C945-A, SAE 5W-20 (1.6L and 2.5L engines) and display the API Certification

Mark.

Your engine has been designed to be used with Ford engine oil, which gives a fuel economy

benefit while maintaining the durability of your engine.

Using oils other than the one specified can result in longer engine cranking periods, reduced

engine performance, reduced fuel economy and increased emission levels.

Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.

273

Capacities and Specifications

For a complete listing of the accessories

that are available for your vehicle, please

contact your dealer or visit our online store

at: Accessories.Ford.com (U.S. only).

Ford Custom Accessories are available for

your vehicle through your local Ford or Ford

of Canada dealer. Ford Motor Company

will repair or replace any properly

dealer-installed Ford Custom Accessories

found to be defective in factory-supplied

materials or workmanship during the

warranty period, as well as any component

damaged by the defective accessories. The

accessories will be warranted for

whichever provides you the greatest

benefit:

• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000

km) (whichever occurs first), or

• the remainder of your new vehicle

limited warranty.

Contact your dealer for details and a copy

of the warranty.

Exterior style

• Asterisk hood deflectors

• Side window deflectors

• Splash guards

• Custom graphics*

Interior style

• Floor mats

Lifestyle

• Ash cup / smoker's packages

• Soft cargo organizers

• Cargo net*

• Roof racks and carriers*

Peace of mind

• Keyless entry keypad

• Remote start

• Vehicle security systems

• Wheel locks

• Bumper mounted parking assist

system*

*Ford Licensed Accessories (FLA) are

warranted by the accessory

manufacturer's warranty. Ford Licensed

Accessories are fully designed and

developed by the accessory manufacturer

and have not been designed or tested to

Ford Motor Company engineering

requirements. Contact your Ford dealer for

details regarding the manufacturer's

limited warranty and a copy of the FLA

product limited warranty offered by the

accessory manufacturer.

For maximum vehicle performance, keep

the following information in mind when

adding accessories or equipment to your

vehicle:

• When adding accessories, equipment,

passengers and luggage to your

vehicle, do not exceed the total weight

capacity of the vehicle or of the front

or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as

indicated on the Safety Compliance

Certification label). Consult your

authorized dealer for specific weight

information.

• The Federal Communications

Commission (FCC) and Canadian

Radio Telecommunications

Commission (CRTC) regulate the use

of mobile communications systems —

such as two-way radios, telephones

and theft alarms - that are equipped

with radio transmitters. Any such

equipment installed in your vehicle

should comply with FCC or CRTC

regulations and should be installed

only by a qualified service technician.

• Mobile communications systems may

harm the operation of your vehicle,

particularly if they are not properly

designed for automotive use.

274

Accessories

• To avoid interference with other vehicle

functions, such as anti-lock braking

systems, amateur radio users who

install radios and antennas onto their

vehicle should not locate the amateur

radio antennas in the area of the

driver's side hood.

• Any non-Ford custom electrical or

electronic accessories or components

that are added to the vehicle by the

authorized dealer or the owner, may

adversely affect battery performance

and durability, and may also adversely

affect the performance of other

electrical systems in the vehicle.

275

Accessories

SERVICE PLANS (U.S. only)

More than 32 million Ford and Lincoln

owners have discovered the powerful

protection of Ford Extended Service Plan.

It is the only extended service plan backed

by Ford Motor Company, and provides

peace of mind protection beyond the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.

Up to 500+ Covered Vehicle

Components

There are four, new-vehicle Extended

Service Plans with different levels of

coverage. Ask your dealer for details.

1. PremiumCare - Our most

comprehensive coverage. With over

500 covered components, this plan is

so complete that we generally only

discuss what’s not covered!

2. ExtraCare - Covers 113 components,

and includes many high-tech items.

3. BaseCare - Covers 84 components.

4. PowertrainCare - Covers 29 critical

components.

Ford Extended Service Plan is honored by

all Ford and Lincoln Dealers in the U.S. and

Canada. It is the only extended service plan

authorized and backed by Ford Motor

Company. That means you get:

• Reliable, quality service anywhere you

go.

• Factory-trained technicians.

• Ford Authorized Parts used with every

covered repair.

Rental Car Reimbursement

If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered

repairs, you are eligible for rental car

coverage, including Bumper-to-Bumper

warranty repairs, or manufacturer’s recalls.

Transferable Coverage

If you sell your vehicle before your Ford

Extended Service Plan coverage expires,

you can transfer any remaining coverage

to the new owner. Whenever you’re ready

to sell your car, prospective buyers may

feel better about taking a risk on your used

vehicle. Ford Extended Service Plan may

add resale value!

Plus, exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,

including:

• Towing, flat-tire change and battery

jump starts.

• Out-of-fuel and lock-out assistance.

• Travel expense reimbursement for

lodging, meals and rental car.

• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle,

rental car coverage and emergency

transportation.

Ford Extended Service Plan Can

Quickly Pay for Itself

One service bill – the cost of parts and

labor – can easily exceed the price of your

Ford Extended Service Plan Service

Contract. With a Ford Extend Service Plan,

you minimize your risk for unexpected

repair bills and rising repair costs.

Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly

Maintaining Your Vehicle!

Ford Extended Service Plan also offers a

Premium Maintenance Plan that covers

items that routinely wear out.

The coverage is prepaid, so you never have

to worry about affording your vehicle

maintenance. It covers regular checkups,

routine inspections, preventive care and

replacement of items that require periodic

attention for normal wear:

• Wiper blades

• Spark plugs (except California)

• Clutch disc

276

Ford Extended Service Plan (ESP)

• Brake pads and linings

• Shock absorbers

• Belts and hoses

Contact your selling Ford or Lincoln

dealership today so they can customize a

Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your

driving lifestyle and budget.

Interest Free Finance Options

Available

Take advantage of our installment

payment plan, just a 10% down payment

will provide you with an affordable no

interest, no-fee payment opportunity.

For More Information

PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING

COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD

EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.

To learn more, call our Ford ESP specialists

at 800-367-3377, and don't forget to ask

about our interest free payment program,

allowing you all the security and benefits

Ford ESP has to offer while paying over

time. your pre-approved with no credit

checks, no hassles!

Or, complete the information below and

mail to:

Ford ESP

P.O. Box 8072

Royal Oak, MI 48068-0039

Name (PLEASE PRINT)

APT.#ADDRESS

ZIPSTATECITY

E-MAIL

SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)

You can get more protection for your

vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extended

Service Plan. Ford Extended Service Plan

is the only service contract backed by Ford

Motor Company of Canada, Limited.

Depending on the plan you purchase, Ford

Extended Service Plan provides benefits

such as:

• Rental reimbursement

• Coverage for certain maintenance and

wear items

• Protection against repair costs after

your New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Coverage expires

• Roadside Assistance benefits

There are several Ford Extended Service

Plans available in various time, distance

and deductible combinations. Each plan

is tailored to fit your own driving needs,

including reimbursement for towing and

rental.

277

Ford Extended Service Plan (ESP)

When you purchase Ford Extended Service

Plan, you receive added peace-of-mind

protection throughout Canada and the

United States, provided by a network of

participating Ford Motor Company dealers.

The Lincoln Maintenance Protection Plan

is honored at authorized Lincoln dealers.

Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada

and the United States are not eligible for

Ford Extended Service Plan coverage.

This information is subject to change.

For more information, visit your local Ford

of Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find

the Ford Extended Service Plan that is right

for you.

278

Ford Extended Service Plan (ESP)

GENERAL INFORMATION

E142598

SYNC is an in-vehicle communications

system that works with your

Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone and

portable media player. This allows you to:

• make and receive calls

• access and play music from your

portable music player

• use 911 Assist™, Vehicle Health Report

and SYNC Services (Traffic, Directions

& Information) (if equipped)

• access phonebook contacts and music

using voice commands

• stream music from your connected

phone

• text message

• use the advanced voice recognition

system

• charge your USB device (if your device

supports this).

Make sure that you review your device's

user guide before using it with SYNC.

Support

The SYNC support team is available to

help you with any questions you cannot

answer on your own.

Monday-Saturday, 8:30 am-8:00 pm EST.

In the United States, call: 1-888-270-1055.

In Canada, call: 1-800-565-3673.

Times are subject to change due to

holidays.

279

SYNC®

Driving Restrictions

For your safety, certain features are

speed-dependent and restricted when your

vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).

Safety Information

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in

loss of vehicle control, accident and

injury. Ford strongly recommends

that drivers use extreme caution when

using any device that may take their focus

off the road. Your primary responsibility is

the safe operation of the vehicle. We

recommend against the use of any

handheld device while driving, encourage

the use of voice-operated systems when

possible and that you become aware of

applicable state and local laws that may

affect use of electronic devices while

driving.

When using SYNC:

• Do not operate playing devices if the

power cords or cables are broken, split

or damaged. Carefully place cords and

cables where they cannot be stepped

on or interfere with the operation of

pedals, seats, compartments or safe

driving abilities.

• Do not leave playing devices in the

vehicle during extreme conditions as it

could cause them damage. Refer to

your device's user guide for further

information.

• Do not attempt to service or repair the

system. See your authorized dealer.

Privacy Information

When a mobile phone is connected to

SYNC, the system creates a profile within

your vehicle that is linked to that mobile

phone. This profile is created in order to

offer you more mobile features and to

operate more efficiently. Among other

things, this profile may contain data about

your mobile phone book, text messages

(read and unread), and call history,

including history of calls when your mobile

phone was not connected to the system.

In addition, if you connect a media device,

the system creates and retains an index of

supported media content. The system also

records a short development log of

approximately 10 minutes of all recent

system activity. The log profile and other

system data may be used to improve the

system and help diagnose any problems

that may occur.

The mobile profile, media device index, and

development log will remain in the vehicle

unless you delete it and are generally

accessible only in the vehicle when the

mobile phone or media player is

connected. If you no longer plan to use the

system or the vehicle, we recommend you

perform a Master Reset to erase all stored

information.

280

SYNC®

System data cannot be accessed without

special equipment and access to the

vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor

Company and Ford of Canada will not

access the system data for any purpose

other than as described absent consent, a

court order, or where required by law

enforcement, other government

authorities, or other third parties acting

with lawful authority. Other parties may

seek to access the information

independently of Ford Motor Company and

Ford of Canada. For further privacy

information, see the sections on 911 Assist

(if equipped), Vehicle Health Report (if

equipped), and Traffic, Directions and

Information (if equipped).

USING VOICE RECOGNITION

This system helps you control many

features using voice commands. This

allows you to keep your hands on the

wheel and focus on what is in front of you.

Helpful Hints

Make sure the interior of the vehicle is as

quiet as possible. Wind noise from open

windows and road vibrations may prevent

the system from correctly recognizing

spoken commands.

After pressing the voice icon, wait until

after the tone sounds and "Listening"

appears before saying a command. Any

command spoken prior to this does not

Speak naturally, without long pauses

between words.

At any time you can interrupt the system

while it is speaking by pressing the voice

icon.

Initiating a Voice Session

E142599

Push the voice icon; a tone

sounds and "Listening" appears

in the display. Say any of the

following:

If You Want ToSay

Stream audio from your phone."Bluetooth audio"

Cancel the requested action."Cancel"

Access the device connected to the auxiliary input jack."Line in"

Access mobile applications.

"Mobile apps"

Make calls."Phone"

Access the SYNC Services portal.

"Services"

Return to the main menu."SYNC"

Access the device connected to your USB port."USB"

Run a vehicle health report.

"Vehicle health report"

281

SYNC®

If You Want ToSay

Adjust the level of voice interaction and feedback."Voice settings"

Hear a list of voice commands available in the current

mode.

"Help"

If equipped, U.S. only

System Interaction and Feedback

The system provides feedback through

audible tones, prompts, questions and

spoken confirmations depending on the

situation and the chosen level of

interaction (voice settings). You can

customize the voice recognition system to

provide more or less instruction and

feedback.

The default setting is to a higher level of

interaction in order to help you learn to use

the system. You can change these settings

at any time.

Adjusting the Interaction Level

E142599

Push the voice icon. Say "Voice

settings" when prompted, then

any of the following:

The SystemWhen You Say

Provides less audible interaction and more

tone prompts.

"Interaction mode advanced"

Provides more detailed interaction and

guidance.

"Interaction mode standard"

The system defaults to the standard interaction mode.

Confirmation prompts are short questions

the system asks when it is not sure of your

request or when there are multiple possible

responses to your request. For example,

the system may ask "Phone, is that

correct?".

The SystemWhen You Say

Makes a best guess from the command;

you may still occasionally be asked to

confirm settings.

"Confirmation prompts off"

Clarifies your voice command with a short

question.

"Confirmation prompts on"

282

SYNC®

The system creates candidate lists when

it has the same confidence level of several

options based on your voice command.

When turned on, you may be prompted

with as many as four possibilities for

clarification.

For example, say "Say 1 after the tone to

call John Doe at home. Say 2 after the tone

to call Johnny Doe on mobile. Say 3 after

the tone to call Jane Doe at home." You

could also say "Say 1 after the tone to play

John Doe, Say 2 after the tone to play

Johnny Doe."

The SystemWhen You Say

Makes a best guess from the media

candidate list; you may still occasionally be

asked questions.

"Media candidate lists off"

Clarifies your voice command for media

candidates.

"Media candidate lists on"

Makes a best guess from the phone

candidate list; you may still occasionally be

asked questions.

"Phone candidate lists off"

Clarifies your voice command for phone

candidates

"Phone candidate lists on"

USING SYNC® WITH YOUR

PHONE

Hands-free calling is one of the main

features of SYNC. While the system

supports a variety of features, many are

dependent on your mobile phone's

functionality. At a minimum, most mobile

phones with Bluetooth wireless technology

support the following functions:

• Answering an incoming call

• Ending a call

• Using privacy mode

• Dialing a number

• Redialing

• Call waiting notification

• Caller ID

Other features such as text messaging

using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook

download are phone-dependent features.

To check your phone's compatibility, refer

to your phone's user manual and visit

www.SYNCMyRide.com or

www.syncmaroute.ca.

Pairing a Phone for the First Time

Note: SYNC can support downloading up

to approximately 2000 entries per

Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone.

Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition and

radio are turned on and the transmission is

in position P.

Note: To scroll through the menus, press

the up and down arrows on your audio

system.

Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC

allows you to make and receive hands-free

calls.

283

SYNC®

1. Press the phone button; when the

display indicates no phone is paired,

press OK.

2. When Add Bluetooth Device appears,

press OK.

3. When Find SYNC appears in the

display, press OK.

4. Put your phone into Bluetooth

discovery mode. Refer to your phone's

user guide if necessary.

5. When prompted on your phone's

display, enter the six-digit PIN provided

by SYNC in the radio display. The

display indicates when the pairing is

successful

Depending on your phone's capability and

your market, the system may prompt you

with questions such as setting the current

phone as the primary phone (the phone

SYNC automatically tries to connect with

first upon vehicle start-up), downloading

your phone book, etc.

Pairing Subsequent Phones

Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition and

radio are turned on and the transmission is

in position P.

Note: To scroll through the menus, press

the up and down arrows on your audio

system.

1. Press the phone button and scroll until

System Settings is selected.

2. Press OK and scroll until Bluetooth

Devices is selected, then press OK.

3. Scroll until Add Bluetooth Device is

selected, then press OK.

4. When Find SYNC appears in the

display, press OK.

5. Put your phone into Bluetooth

discovery mode. Refer to your phone's

user guide if necessary.

6. When prompted on your phone's

display, enter the six-digit PIN provided

by SYNC in the radio display. The

display indicates when the pairing is

successful.

The system then prompts with questions

such as if you would like to set the current

phone as the primary phone (the phone

SYNC automatically tries to connect with

first upon vehicle start-up), download your

phone book, etc.

Phone Voice Commands

"PHONE"

"Go to privacy"

"Call <name>"

"Hold"

"Call <name> at home"

"Join"

"Call <name> at work"

"Menu"

2,4

"Call <name> in office"

"Phone book <name>"

"Call <name> on mobile OR cell"

"Phone book <name> at home"

"Call <name> on other"

284

SYNC®

"PHONE"

"Phone book <name> at office"

"Call history incoming"

"Phone book <name> at work"

"Call history missed"

"Phone book <name> on mobile OR cell"

"Call history outgoing"

"Phone book <name> on other"

"Connections"

"Dial"

1,3

These commands do not require you to say "Phone" first.

These commands are not available until phone information is completely downloaded

using Bluetooth.

See Dial table below.

See Menu table below.

Phone book commands: When you ask

SYNC to access a phone book name,

number, etc., the requested information

appears in the display to view. Press the

phone button and say "Call" to call the

contact.

"DIAL"

"411 (four-one-one)", "911" (nine-one-one), etc.

"700" (seven hundred)

"800" (eight hundred)

"900" (nine hundred)

"Pound", "Slash" (#,/)

"Number <0-9>"

"Asterisk" (*)

"Clear" (deletes all entered digits)

"Delete" (deletes one digit)

"Plus"

"Star"

285

SYNC®

Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the

phone button or press Menu to go to the

Phone menu.

"MENU"

"(Phone) connections"

"(Phone) settings (message) notification off"

"(Phone) settings (message) notification on"

"(Phone) settings (set) phone ringer"

"(Phone) settings (set) ringer 1"

"(Phone) settings (set) ringer 2"

"(Phone) settings (set) ringer 3"

"(Phone) settings (set) ringer off"

"Battery"

"Phone name"

"Signal"

"Text message inbox"

Words in ( ) are optional and do not have to be spoken for the system to understand

the command.

Making Calls

Press the voice icon and when prompted

say:

1. Say "Call <name>" or "Dial", then the

desired number.

2. When the system confirms the number,

say "Dial" again to initiate the call.

To erase the last spoken digit, say "Delete"

or press the left arrow button. To erase all

spoken digits, say "Clear" or press and hold

the left arrow button.

To end the call, press and hold the phone

button.

Receiving Calls

When receiving a call, you can:

• Answer the call by pressing the phone

button.

• Reject the call by pressing and holding

the phone button.

• Ignore the call by doing nothing.

Phone Options during an Active

Call

During an active call, you have additional

menu features which become available

such as putting a call on hold, joining calls,

etc. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through

the menu options.

286

SYNC®

To access:

• Press Menu during an active call.

• When Active Call Menu is selected,

press OK.

• Scroll to cycle through the following

options:

You CanWhen You Select

Mute the call.Mute Call?

Switch a call from an active hands-free environment to

your mobile phone for a more private conversation.

Privacy

Press OK when Privacy on/off appears. (The display

indicates In Privacy and the system transfers your call.)

Put an active call on hold.Call Hold

Press OK when Hold on/off appears. To answer another

call at this time, press the phone button.

Enter "tones" such as numbers for passwords.Enter Tones

Scroll until the desired number appears in the display, then

press OK; a tone sounds as confirmation. Repeat as

necessary.

Join two separate calls. (SYNC supports a maximum of

three callers on a multi-party/conference call.)

Join Calls

1. Press the phone button.

2. Access the desired contact through SYNC or use voice

commands to place the second call. Once actively in the

second call, press Menu.

3. Scroll until Join Calls appears and press OK. Press OK

again when Join Calls? appears.

Access your phonebook contacts.Phonebook

1. Press OK to select, then scroll through your phonebook

contacts.

2. Press OK again when the desired selection appears in

the display.

3. Press the phone button.

Access your call history log.Call History

1. Press OK to select, then scroll through your call history

options (incoming, outgoing or missed).

2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the

display.

3. Press the phone button to call the selection.

Exit the current menu.Return

287

SYNC®

Accessing Features through the

Phone Menu

The phone menu allows you to redial a

number, access your call history and phone

book and send text messages as well as

access phone and system settings. You

can also access advanced features such

as 911 Assist™, Vehicle Health Report and

SYNC Services.

1. Press the phone button to enter the

Phone menu.

2. Scroll to cycle through:

You CanWhen You Select

Redial the last number called (if available). Press OK to

select, then press OK again to confirm.

Phone Redial

Allows you to access any previously dialed, received or

missed calls while your phone has been connected to the

system.

Call History

1. Press OK to select.

2. Scroll to select from Call History Incoming, Call

History Outgoing or Call History Missed. Press OK

make your selection.

3. Press OK or the phone button to call the desired selec-

tion.

The system attempts to automatically re-download your

phone book and call history each time your phone

connects to SYNC (if the auto download feature is on and

your Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone supports this

feature).

Allows you to access your downloaded phonebook.

Phonebook

1,2

1. Press OK to confirm and enter. If your phonebook has

fewer than 255 listings, they appear alphabetically in flat

file mode. If there are more, they are organized into

alphabetical categories.

2. Scroll until the desired contact appears, then press OK.

3. Press OK or the phone button.

Enables you to send, download and delete text messages.

Text Message

Allows you to view your phone's status, set ring tones,

select your message notification, change phone book

entries and automatically download your mobile phone

among other features.

Phone Settings

Access the SYNC Services portal where you can request

various types of information, traffic reports and directions.

SYNC Services

288

SYNC®

You CanWhen You Select

Place an emergency call to a 911 operator for you after an

accident (if the feature is used properly).

911 Assist

Create and receive a diagnostic report card on your vehicle.

Vehicle Health Report

Interact with SYNC-capable mobile applications on your

smartphone.

Mobile Apps

Access Bluetooth Devices menu listings (add, connect,

set as primary, on/off, delete) as well as Advanced menu

listings (prompts, languages, defaults, master reset, install

application and system information).

System Settings

Exit the phone menu by pressing OK.Exit Phone Menu

This is a phone-dependent feature.

This is a phone-dependent and speed-dependent feature.

If equipped, U.S. only.

If equipped, U.S. and Canada only.

Text Messaging

Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.

SYNC allows you to receive, send,

download and delete text messages. The

system can also read incoming text

messages to you so that you do not have

to take your eyes off the road.

Receiving a Text Message

Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.

Your phone must support downloading text

messages using Bluetooth to receive

incoming text messages.

Note: Forwarding a text message is a

speed-dependent feature and can only be

done when the vehicle is traveling at 3 mph

(5 km/h) or less.

Note: Only one recipient is allowed per text

message.

289

SYNC®

When a new message arrives, an audible

tone sounds and the display indicates you

have a new message. You have these

options:

• Press the voice button, wait for the

prompt and say "Read message" to

have SYNC read the message to you.

• Press OK to receive and open the text

message or do nothing and the

message goes into your text message

inbox. Press OK again and SYNC reads

your message aloud as you are not able

to view the message. You can then also

choose whether you'd like to reply or

forward the message.

• Press OK and scroll to choose

between:

• Reply to Text Message: Press OK

to access and then scroll through

the list of pre-defined messages to

send.

• Forward Text Message: Press OK

to forward the message to anyone

in your Phonebook or Call

History. You can also choose Enter

Number.

Sending, Downloading and Deleting

Your Text Messages

Text messaging is a phone-dependent

feature. If your phone is compatible, SYNC

allows you to receive, send, download and

delete text messages.

1. Press the phone button.

2. Scroll until Text Message appears,

then press OK.

Scroll to select from the following options:

• Send Text Message? enables you to

send a new text message based on a

pre-defined set of 15 messages.

• Download Unread Msgs allows you

to download your unread messages

(only) to SYNC. To download the

messages, press OK to select. The

display indicates your messages are

being downloaded. When complete,

SYNC takes you to your inbox.

• Delete All Messages? allows you to

delete current text messages from

SYNC (not your phone). To delete the

messages, press OK to select. The

display indicates when all your text

messages have been deleted and

SYNC returns you to the text message

• Return exits the current menu when

you press OK.

When you select Send Text Message?

(and your phone supports this feature),

you have the following choices of

pre-defined messages:

• Be there in 10 minutes

• Be there in 20 minutes

• Call me

• Call U later

• Can't talk right now

• Can't wait to see you

• I love you

• I need more directions

• I'm stuck in traffic

• No

• Thanks

• Too funny

• Where R you?

• Why?

• Yes

To send the message:

290

SYNC®

1. Press OK when the desired selection is

in the display. The system now needs

to know who to send the message to.

2. Scroll to cycle through Phonebook or

Call History entries. You can also

select Enter Number to audibly enter

the desired number.

3. Press OK to enter the desired menu

and scroll to select the specific

contact.

4. Press OK when the contact appears

and press OK again to confirm when

the system asks if you would like to

send the message. Each text message

is sent with the following signature:

"This message was sent from my

<Ford or Lincoln>".

Accessing Your Phone Settings

These are phone-dependent features. Your

phone settings allow you to access and

adjust features such as your ring tone, text

message notification, modify your phone

book and also set up automatic download.

1. Press the phone button.

2. Scroll until Phone Settings appears,

then press OK.

3. Scroll to select from the following

options:

You CanWhen You Select

See the provider, name, signal power, battery power and

roaming status of your connected phone.

Phone Status

Press OK to select and scroll to view the information. When

done, press OK again to return to the phone status menu.

Select which ring tone sounds during an incoming call (one

of the system's or your phone's).

Set Ringer

1. Press OK to select and scroll to hear Ringer 1, Ringer

2, Ringer 3 and Phone Ringer.

2. Press OK to select.

If your phone supports in-band ringing, your phone's ringer

sounds when Phone Ringer is chosen.

Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you

when a text message arrives.

Message Notification

1. Press OK to select and scroll between Message Noti-

fication On or Message Notification Off.

2. Press OK to select.

Modify the contents of your phone book (i.e. add, delete,

download). Press OK to select and scroll between:

Modify Phonebook

Add Contacts: Press OK to add more contacts from your

phone book. "Push" the desired contact(s) on your phone.

Refer to your phone's user guide on how to "push"

contacts.

291

SYNC®

You CanWhen You Select

Delete Phonebook: Press OK to delete the current phone

book and call history. When Delete Phonebook appears,

press OK to confirm. SYNC takes you back to the Phone

Settings menu.

Download Phonebook: Press OK to select and press OK

again when Confirm Download? appears.

Automatically download your phone book each time your

phone connects to SYNC. (Downloading times are phone-

dependent and quantity-dependent.)

Auto Download

Press OK to select. When Auto Download On? appears,

press OK to have your phonebook automatically down-

loaded each time. (When auto download is on, any

changes, additions or deletions saved since your last

download are deleted.)

Select Off to NOT download your phonebook every time

your phone connects to SYNC. Your phonebook, call

history and text messages can only be accessed when

your specific phone is connected to SYNC.

Exit the current menu.Return

System Settings

This menu provides access to your

Bluetooth Devices and Advanced menu

features. Use the arrow buttons to scroll

through the menu options.

The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you

to add, connect and delete devices, set a

phone as "primary" as well as turn your

Bluetooth feature on and off.

The Advanced menu allows you to access

and set prompts, languages, defaults,

perform a master reset, install an

application and view system information.

Bluetooth Devices Menu Options

1. Press the phone button to enter the

Phone menu

2. Scroll until System Settings appears,

then press OK.

3. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices

appears, then select OK.

4. Scroll to select from the following

options:

You CanIf You Select

Pair additional phones to the system.

Add Bluetooth Device

1. Press OK to select, then again when Find SYNC appears

in the display.

292

SYNC®

You CanIf You Select

2. Follow the directions in your phone's user guide to put

your phone into discovery mode. A six-digit PIN appears

in the display.

3. When prompted on your phone's display, enter the six-

digit PIN provided by SYNC.

4. When Set as Primary Phone? appears, press OK. Scroll

to toggle between Yes and No, then press OK.

5. Depending on the functionality of your phone, you may

be asked additional questions (i.e. if you would like to

download your phonebook). Scroll and use OK to select

your responses.

Connect a previously paired Bluetooth-enabled phone.

(Only one device can be connected at a time. When

another phone is connected, the previous one is discon-

nected.)

Connect Bluetooth Device

1. Press OK to select and view a list of previously paired

phones.

2. Scroll until the desired device is chosen, then press OK

to connect the phone.

Set a previously paired phone as your primary phone.Set as Primary Phone?

Press OK to select and scroll to select the desired phone.

Press OK to confirm.

SYNC attempts to connect with the primary phone at every

ignition cycle. When a phone is selected as primary, it

appears first in the list and is marked with an

Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.Set Bluetooth On/Off

Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and Off. When

the desired selection is chosen, press OK. (Turning

Bluetooth off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and

deactivates all Bluetooth features. )

Delete a paired phone.Delete Device

Press OK and scroll to select the device. Press OK to

confirm.

Delete all previously paired phones (and all information

originally saved with those phones).

Delete All Devices

Press OK to select.

Exit the current menu.Return

This is a speed-dependent feature.

293

SYNC®

Advanced Menu Options

1. Press the phone button to enter the

Phone menu

2. Scroll until System Settings appears,

then press OK.

3. Scroll until Advanced appears, then

select OK.

4. Scroll to select from the following

options:

You CanIf You Select

Get help from SYNC by using questions, helpful hints or

asking you for a specific action. To turn these prompts on

or off:

Prompts

1. Press OK to select and scroll to select between on or

off.

2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the

display. SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu.

Choose between English, Français and Español. Once

selected, all of the radio displays and prompts are in the

selected language.

Languages

1. Press OK to select and then scroll through the languages.

2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the

display. If you change the language setting, the display

indicates that the system is updating. When complete,

SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu.

Return to the factory default settings. This selection does

not erase your indexed information (phonebook, call

history, text messages and paired devices).

Factory Defaults

1. Press OK to select and then press OK again when

Restore Defaults? appears in the display.

2. Press OK to confirm.

Completely erase all information stored on SYNC

(phonebook, call history, text messages and paired

devices) and return to the factory default settings.

Master Reset

Press OK to select. The display indicates when complete

and SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu.

Install applications you have downloaded.Install Application?

Press OK and scroll to select. Press OK to confirm.

Delete all previously paired phones (and all information

originally saved with those phones).

Delete All Devices

Press OK to select.

Access the Auto Version number as well as the FDN

number.

System Info

294

SYNC®

You CanIf You Select

Press OK to select.

This is a Bluetooth component which can further help your

phone with the exchange of text messages.

MAP Profile

Exit the current menu.Return

SYNC® APPLICATIONS AND

SERVICES

In order for the following features to work,

your mobile phone must be compatible

with SYNC. To check your phone's

compatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com

or www.syncmaroute.ca.

• SYNC Services (if equipped, U.S. only):

Provides access to traffic, directions

and information such as travel,

horoscopes, stock prices and more.

• 911 Assist™: Can alert 911 in the event

of an emergency.

• Vehicle Health Report (if equipped,

U.S. only): Provides a diagnostic and

maintenance report card of your

vehicle.

911 Assist

WARNINGS

Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on

prior to a crash, the system will not

dial for help which could delay

response time, potentially increasing the

risk of serious injury or death after a crash.

Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an

emergency call if you can do it

yourself. Dial emergency services

immediately to avoid delayed response

time which could increase the risk of

serious injury or death after a crash. If you

do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds

of the crash, the system or phone may be

damaged or non-functional.

WARNINGS

Always place your phone in a secure

location in the vehicle so it does not

become a projectile or get damaged

in a collision. Failure to do so may cause

serious injury to someone or damage the

phone which could prevent 911 Assist from

working properly.

Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be

set on prior to the incident.

Note: Before setting this feature on, ensure

that you read the 911 Assist privacy notice

later in this section for important

information.

Note: If 911 Assist is turned on or off by any

user, that setting applies for all paired

phones. If 911 Assist is turned off, either a

voice message plays or a display

message/icon comes on (or both) when the

vehicle is started after a previously paired

phone connects.

Note: Every phone operates differently.

While SYNC 911 Assist works with most

mobile phones, some may have trouble

using this feature.

If a crash deploys an airbag or activates

the fuel pump shut-off, your

SYNC-equipped vehicle may be able to

contact emergency services by dialing 911

through a paired and connected

Bluetooth-enabled phone. For more

information about 911 Assist visit

www.SYNCMyRide.com or

www.syncmaroute.ca.

295

SYNC®

See Supplementary Restraints System

(page 35). Important information

regarding airbag deployment is in this

chapter.

See Roadside Emergencies (page 197).

Important information regarding the fuel

pump shut-off is in this chapter.

Setting 911 Assist On

1. Press the phone button to enter the

Phone menu.

2. Scroll until 911 Assist is selected.

3. Press OK to confirm and enter the 911

Assist menu.

4. Scroll to choose between the On and

Off selections.

5. Press OK when the desired option

appears in the radio display. Set On or

Set Off appears in the display as

confirmation.

Off selections include: Off with reminder

and Off without reminder. Off with

reminder provides a display and voice

reminder at phone connection at vehicle

start. Off without reminder provides a

display reminder only without a voice

reminder at phone connection.

To make sure that 911 Assist works

properly:

• SYNC must be powered and working

properly at the time of the incident and

throughout feature activation and use.

• The 911 Assist feature must be set on

prior to the incident.

• A Bluetooth-enabled and compatible

phone has to be paired and connected

to SYNC.

• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone

must have the ability to make and

maintain an outgoing call at the time

of the incident.

• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone

must have adequate network coverage,

battery power and signal strength.

• The vehicle must have battery power

and be located in the U.S., Canada or

in a territory in which 911 is the

emergency number.

In the Event of a Crash

Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate

the fuel pump shut-off (which would

activate 911 Assist); however, if 911 Assist

is triggered, SYNC tries to contact

emergency services. If a connected phone

is damaged or loses connection to SYNC,

SYNC searches for, and tries to connect

to, any available previously paired phone

and tries to make the call to 911.

Before making the call:

• SYNC provides a short window of time

(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.

Failure to cancel the call results in

SYNC attempting to dial 911.

• SYNC says the following, or a similar

message: "SYNC will attempt to call

911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on

your screen or press and hold the

phone button on your steering wheel."

If the call is not cancelled and a successful

call is made, a pre-recorded message is

played for the 911 operator, then the

occupant(s) in the vehicle is able to talk

with the operator. Be prepared to provide

your name, phone number and location

immediately, because not all 911 systems

are capable of receiving this information

electronically.

296

SYNC®

911 Assist May Not Work If

• Your mobile phone or 911 Assist

hardware was damaged in a crash.

• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC

system has no power.

• The phone(s) paired and connected to

the system was thrown from the

vehicle.

911 Assist Privacy Notice

Once 911 Assist is set on, it may disclose to

emergency services that the vehicle has

been in a crash involving the deployment

of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump

shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911

Assist may also be capable of

electronically or verbally disclosing to 911

operators the vehicle location or other

details about the vehicle or crash to assist

911 operators to provide the most

appropriate emergency services. If you do

not want to disclose this information, do

not turn the feature on.

Vehicle Health Report

WARNING

Always follow scheduled

maintenance instructions, regularly

inspect your vehicle, and seek repair

for any damage or problem you suspect.

Vehicle Health Report supplements, but

cannot replace normal maintenance and

vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health Report

only monitors certain systems that are

electronically monitored by the vehicle and

will not monitor or report the status of any

other system, (i.e., brake lining wear).

Failure to perform scheduled maintenance

and regularly inspect your vehicle may

result in vehicle damage and serious injury.

Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature

requires activation prior to use. Visit

www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There

is no fee or subscription associated with

Vehicle Health Report, but you must register

to use this feature.

Note: This feature may not function

properly if you have enabled caller ID

blocking on your mobile phone. Before

running a report, review Vehicle Health

Report privacy notice.

Note: In order to allow a break-in period for

your vehicle, you may not be able to create

a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle

odometer has reached 200 miles.

your report preferences at

www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering

you can request a Vehicle Health Report

(inside your vehicle). Return to your

account at www.SYNCMyRide.com to view

your report. You can also choose for SYNC

to automatically remind you to run reports

at specific mileage intervals. Mobile phone

airtime usage may apply when reporting.

The system allows you to check your

vehicle's overall health in the form of

diagnostic report card. The vehicle health

report contains valuable information such

as:

• Vehicle diagnostic information

• Scheduled maintenance

• Open Recalls and Field Service Actions

• Unserviced items from vehicle

inspections by your authorized dealer

To run a report (after the vehicle has been

running a minimum of 60 seconds):

1. Press the phone button to enter the

Phone menu.

2. Scroll until Vehicle Health is selected

and press OK.

3. Scroll to select from User

Preferences or Run Report.

297

SYNC®

Vehicle Health Report Options

Automatic Reports: Press OK and select on or off. Select

"On" to have SYNC automatically prompt you to run a

health report at certain mileage intervals. You must first

turn this feature on before you can select the mileage

intervals at which you would like to be prompted.

User Preferences: Press

OK to select and enter the

menu. Scroll to select from:

Mileage Intervals: Press OK. Scroll to select between

5000, 7500 or 10000 mile intervals and press OK to make

your selection.

Return: Press OK to exit the menu.

Press OK for SYNC to run a health report of your vehicle's

diagnostic systems and send the results to Ford where it

is combined with scheduled maintenance information,

open recalls and other field service actions and un-serviced

vehicle inspection items from your authorized dealer.

Run Report

Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice

When you run a Vehicle Health Report,

Ford Motor Company may collect your

mobile phone number (to process your

report request) and diagnostic information

about your vehicle. Certain versions or

updates to Vehicle Health Report may also

collect additional vehicle information. Ford

may use the vehicle information it collects

for any purpose. If you do not want to

disclose your mobile phone number or

vehicle information, do not run the feature

or set up your Vehicle Health Report profile

at www.SYNCMyRide.com. Refer to

Vehicle Health Report Terms and

Conditions, and Privacy Statement at

www.SYNCMyRide.com for more

information.

SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions

& Information (TDI)

Note: SYNC Services requires activation

prior to use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com

to register and check your eligibility for

complimentary services. Standard phone

and message rates may apply. Subscription

may be required. You must also have the

active SYNC Services Bluetooth-enabled

mobile phone paired and connected to the

system in order to connect to, and use,

SYNC Services. See Using SYNC® With

Your Phone (page 283).

Note: This feature does not function

properly if you have enabled caller ID

blocking on your mobile phone. Make sure

your mobile phone is not blocking caller ID

before using SYNC Services.

298

SYNC®

Note: The driver is ultimately responsible

for the safe operation of the vehicle, and

therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe

to follow the suggested directions. Any

navigation features are provided only as an

aid. Make your driving decisions based on

your observations of local conditions and

existing traffic regulations. Do not follow

the route suggestions if doing so would

result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you

would be placed in an unsafe situation, or

if you would be directed into an area that

you consider unsafe. Maps used by this

system may be inaccurate because of errors,

changes in roads, traffic conditions or driving

conditions.

Note: When you connect, the service uses

GPS technology and advanced vehicle

sensors to collect the vehicle's current

location, travel direction and speed to help

provide you with the directions, traffic

reports, or business searches you request.

Further, to provide the services you request

and for continuous improvement, the service

may collect and record call details and voice

communications. For more information, see

SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at

www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not want

Ford or its service providers to collect the

vehicle travel information or other

information identified in the Terms and

Conditions, do not activate or use the

service.

SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle

sensors, integrated GPS technology and

comprehensive map and traffic data, to

give you personalized traffic reports,

precise turn-by-turn directions, business

search, news, sports, weather and more.

For a complete list of services, or to learn

more, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.

Connecting to SYNC Services Using

Voice Commands

1. Press the voice button.

2. When prompted, say "Services". This

initiates an outgoing call to SYNC

Services using your paired and

connected Bluetooth-enabled mobile

phone.

3. Once you're connected to the service,

follow the voice prompts to request

the desired service such as traffic or

directions. You can also say "What are

my choices?" to receive a complete list

of available services from which to

choose.

4. Say "Services" to return to the services

main menu or for help, say "Help".

Connecting to SYNC Services Using

the Phone Menu

1. Press the phone button to enter the

Phone menu.

2. Scroll until Services appears in the

display.

3. Press OK to confirm and enter the

Services menu. The display indicates

the system is connecting.

4. Press OK. SYNC initiates the call to the

services portal.

5. Once you're connected to the service,

follow the voice prompts to request

the desired service such as traffic or

directions. You can also say "What are

my choices?" to receive a complete list

of available services from which to

choose.

6. Say "Services" to return to the services

main menu or for help, say "Help".

Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions

1. When connected to SYNC Services,

say "Directions" or "Business search".

To find the closest business or type of

business to your current location just

say "Business search" and then

"Search near me". If you need further

assistance in finding a location you can

299

SYNC®

say "Operator" at any time within a

directions or business search to speak

with a live operator. You may also be

prompted to speak with an operator.

The live operator can assist you by

searching for businesses by name or

by category, residential addresses by

street address or by name or specific

street intersections. Operator Assist is

a feature of your SYNC Services

subscription. For more information on

Operator Assist visit

www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.

2. Follow the voice prompts to select your

destination. Once your destination is

selected, your current vehicle location

is uploaded and a route based on

current traffic conditions is calculated

and sent back to your vehicle. After the

route download is complete, the phone

call is automatically ended. You then

receive audible and visual driving

instructions as you travel towards you

destination.

3. While on an active route, you can select

or say "Route summary" or "Route

status" to view the Route Summary

turn list or the Route Status ETA. You

can also turn voice guidance on or off,

cancel the route or update the route.

If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks

if you want the route updated. Just say

"Yes" when prompted and a new route is

delivered to your vehicle.

Disconnecting from SYNC Services

1. Press and hold the phone button on

the steering wheel.

2. Say "Goodbye" from the SYNC

Services main menu.

SYNC Services Quick Tips

You can personalize your services feature to provide

quicker access to your most used or favorite information.

You can save address points such as work or home. You

can also save favorite information like sports teams or a

news category. To learn more, log onto

www.SYNCMyRide.com.

Personalizing

Press the voice button at any time (while you are

connected to SYNC TDI Services) to interrupt a voice

prompt or an audio clip (such as a sports report), wait for

the listening tone, then say your voice command.

Push to interrupt

Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth-

enabled mobile phone number, not your VIN (Vehicle

Identification Number). You can pair and connect your

phone to any vehicle equipped with Traffic, Directions and

Information and continue enjoying your personalized

services.

Portable

300

SYNC®

SYNC Services Quick Tips

You can even access your account outside the vehicle.

Just use the number on your phone's call history. Traffic

and Directions features do not function properly but

information services and the 411 connect and text message

features are available.

USING SYNC® WITH YOUR

MEDIA PLAYER

You can access and play music from your

digital music player over the vehicle's

speaker system using the system's media

menu or voice commands. You can also

sort and play your music by specific

categories such as artists, albums, etc.

SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any

digital media player including: iPod®,

Zune™, "Plays from device" players, and

most USB drives. SYNC also supports

audio formats such as MP3, WMA, WAV

and ACC.

Connecting Your Digital Media

Player to the USB Port

Note: If your digital media player has a

power switch, ensure that the device is

turned on.

To Connect Using Voice Commands

1. Plug the device into the vehicle's USB

port.

2. Press the voice icon and when

prompted, say "USB".

3. You can now play music by saying any

of the appropriate voice commands.

Refer to the media voice commands.

To Connect Using the System Menu

1. Plug the device into the vehicle's USB

port.

2. Press AUX and then MENU to enter

the Media menu.

3. Scroll until Select Source appears,

then press OK.

4. Scroll to select USB and press OK.

5. Depending on how many digital media

files are on your connected device,

Indexing may appear in the radio

display. When indexing is complete, the

screen returns to the Play menu.

Press OK and scroll through selections of:

• Play All

• Albums

• Genres

• Playlists

• Tracks

• Explore USB

• Similar Music

• Return

What's Playing?

At any time when a track is playing, you

can press the voice icon and ask the

system "What's playing?". The system

reads the metadata tags (if populated) of

the playing track to you.

Media Voice Commands

E142599

Press the voice icon and, when

prompted, say "USB", then any

of the following:

301

SYNC®

"USB"

"Refine album <name>"

1,2

"Autoplay off"

"Refine artist <name>"

1,2

"Autoplay on"

"Refine song <name>"

"Connections"

"Refine track <name>"

1,2

"Pause"

"Repeat off""Play"

"Repeat on"

"Play album <name>"

1,2

"Search album <name>"

1,2

"Play all"

"Search artist <name>"

1,2

"Play artist <name>"

1,2

"Search genre <name>"

"Play genre <name>"

1,2

"Search song <name>"

"Play next folder"

"Search track <name>"

1,2

"Play next track"

"Shuffle off"

"Play playlist <name>"

1,2

"Shuffle on"

"Play previous folder"

"Similar music""Play previous track"

"What's playing?"

"Play song <name>"

"Play track <name>"

1,2

<name> is a dynamic listing, meaning that it could be the name of any desired group,

artist, song, etc.

Voice commands which are not available until indexing is complete.

Voice commands which are only available in folder mode.

Voice Command Guide

· Turn on to listen to music which has already been

randomly indexed during the indexing process.

"Autoplay"

302

SYNC®

Voice Command Guide

· Turn off and the system does not begin to play any of

your music until all media has all been indexed. Indexing

times can vary from device to device and also with regard

to the number of songs being indexed.

The system searches all the data from your indexed music

and, if available, begins to play the chosen type of music.

You can only play genres of music which are present in

the GENRE metadata tags that you have on your digital

media player.

"Search genre" or "Play

genre"

The system compiles a playlist and then plays similar

music to what is currently playing from the USB port using

indexed metadata information.

"Similar music"

The system searches for a specific artist, track or album

from the music indexed through the USB port.

"Search", "Play", "Artist",

"Track, "Album"

This allows you to make your previous command more

specific. For example, if you asked to search and play all

music by a certain artist, you could then say "Refine album"

and choose a specific album from the list to view. If you

then select Play, the system only plays music from that

specific album.

"Refine"

Press the voice icon and when prompted

say "Bluetooth audio", then any of the

following:

"BLUETOOTH AUDIO"

"Connections"

"Pause"

"Play"

"Play next track"

"Play previous track"

Media Menu Features

The media menu allows you to select your

media source, how to play your music (by

artist, genre, shuffle, repeat, etc.), and also

to add, connect or delete devices.

1. Press AUX and then MENU to enter

the Media menu.

2. Scroll to cycle through:

303

SYNC®

You CanWhen You Select

Play your music by artist, album, genre, playlists, tracks,

similar music or to simply, play all. You can also choose

to Explore USB to view the supported digital music files

on your playing device.

Play Menu

· Select and play music from your USB port, auxiliary input

jack (line in) or stream music from your Bluetooth-enabled

phone.

Select Source

· Press OK to select, then scroll to choose from USB,

Bluetooth Audio, and Line In.

· When you select USB, and Autoplay is on, you can

access media files randomly as they are indexed. If turned

off, indexed media is not available until the indexing

process is complete. SYNC is capable of indexing thou-

sands of average size media and notifies you if the

maximum indexing file size is reached.

· Users who have Bluetooth phones that are capable of

streaming audio can press SEEK to play the previous or

next track.

· When you have already connected a device to the USB

port, you cannot access the line in feature. Some digital

media players require both USB and line in ports to stream

data and music separately.

· Choose to shuffle or repeat your music and select your

Autoplay settings. Once these selections are turned on,

they remain on until turned off.

Media Settings

· Some digital media players require both USB and line in

ports to stream data and music separately. Press OK to

select and then scroll to choose from Shuffle, Repeat or

Autoplay.

Interact with SYNC-capable mobile applications on your

smartphone.

Mobile Apps

Access Bluetooth Device menu listings (add, connect,

set as primary, on/off, delete) as well as Advanced menu

listings (prompts, languages, defaults, master reset, install

application and system information).

System Settings

Press OK to exit the media menu.Exit Media Menu

304

SYNC®

Accessing Your Play Menu

This menu allows you to select and play

your media by artist, album, genre, playlist,

track, similar music or even to explore what

is on your USB device.

1. Make sure that your device is plugged

into the USB port and is turned on.

2. Press AUX and then MENU to enter

the Media menu.

3. Scroll to select the Play menu, then

press OK.

If there are no media files to access, the

display indicates there is no media. If there

are media files, you have the following

options to scroll through and select from:

You CanWhen You Select

· Play all indexed media (tracks) from your playing device

in flat file mode, one at a time in numerical order.

Play All

· Press OK to select. The first track title appears in the

display.

Sort all indexed media by artist. Once selected, the system

lists and then play all artists and tracks alphabetically. If

there are fewer than 255 indexed artist, they are listed

alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more, they are

categorized in alphabetical categories.

Artists

1. Press OK to select. You can select to play All Artists or

any indexed artist.

2. Scroll until the desired artist is chosen and press OK.

Sort all indexed media by albums. If there are fewer than

255 indexed albums, they are listed alphabetically in flat-

file mode. If there are more, they are organized into

alphabetical categories.

Albums

1. Press OK to enter the album menu and select from

playing all albums or from any individual indexed album.

2. Scroll until the desired album is chosen, then press OK.

· Sort indexed music by genre (category) type. SYNC lists

the genres alphabetically in flat-file mode. If there are

more than 255, SYNC automatically organizes them into

alphabetical categories.

Genres

· Press OK to select. Scroll to select the desired genre, then

press OK.

· Access your playlists (from formats such as .ASX, .M3U,

.WPL or .MTP). The system lists your playlists alphabetic-

ally in flat-file mode. If there are more than 255, they are

organized into alphabetical categories.

Playlists

· Press OK to select. Scroll to select the desired playlist,

then press OK.

305

SYNC®

You CanWhen You Select

· Search for and play a specific track which has been

indexed. SYNC lists your tracks alphabetically in flat-file

mode. If there are more than 255, SYNC automatically

organizes them into alphabetical categories.

Tracks

· Press OK to select. Scroll to select the desired track, then

press OK.

· Explore all supported digital media on your media device

connected to the USB port. You can only view media

content which is compatible with SYNC; other files saved

are not visible.

Explore USB

· Press OK to select. Scroll to explore indexed media on

your flash drive.

· Play music similar to what is currently playing from the

USB port. The system uses the metadata information of

each song to compile a playlist for you.

Similar Music

· Press OK to select. The system creates a new list of

similar songs and begin playing. The metadata tags must

be populated for this feature to include each track.

· With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags are

not populated, the tracks won't be available in voice

recognition, play menu or similar music. However, if you

place these tracks onto your playing device in Mass

Storage Device Mode they are available in voice recogni-

tion, Play menu browsing and Similar Music. Unknowns

are placed into any unpopulated metadata tag.

Exit the current menu.Return

System Settings

System settings provide access to your

Bluetooth Devices and Advanced menu

features.

The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you

to add, connect and delete a device as turn

the Bluetooth feature on and off.

The Advanced menu allows you to access

and set prompts, languages, defaults and

perform a master reset.

Bluetooth Devices Menu Options

1. Press AUX and then MENU to enter

the Media menu.

2. Scroll until System Settings appears

and select OK, then press OK.

3. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices

appears.

4. Press OK and then scroll to select from:

306

SYNC®

You CanWhen You Select

Allows you to pair additional devices to the system.

Add Bluetooth Device

1. Press OK to select and press OK again when Find SYNC

appears in the display.

2. Follow the directions in your phone's user guide to put

your phone into discovery mode. A six-digit PIN appears

in the display.

3. When prompted on your phone's six-digit display, enter

the PIN.

Connect a previously paired Bluetooth-enabled phone.Connect Bluetooth Device

1. Press OK to select and view a list of devices.

2. Scroll until the desired device is chosen and press OK

to connect the device.

· Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.Set Bluetooth On/Off

· Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and Off. When

the desired selection is chosen, press OK. Turning

Bluetooth off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and

deactivates Bluetooth features.

· Delete a paired media device.Delete Device

· Press OK and scroll to select the device. Press OK to

confirm.

· Delete all previously paired devices.Delete All Devices

· Press OK to select.

Exit the current menu.Return

This is a speed-dependent feature.

Advanced Menu Options

1. Press AUX and then MENU to enter

the Media menu.

2. Scroll until System Settings appears

and select OK, then press OK.

3. Scroll until Advanced appears.

4. Press OK and then scroll to select from:

You CanWhen You Select

Have SYNC guide you by asking questions, helpful hints

or ask you for a specific action.

Prompts

1. Press OK to select and scroll to select between on or

off.

307

SYNC®

You CanWhen You Select

2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the

display. SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu.

Choose from English, Français or Español. The displays

and prompts are in the selected language.

Languages

1. Press OK to select and then scroll through the languages.

2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the

display.

3. If you change the language setting, the display indicates

that the system is updating. When complete, SYNC takes

you back to the Advanced menu.

Return to the factory default settings. This selection does

not erase your indexed information (phonebook, call

history, text messages and paired devices).

Factory Defaults

1. Press OK to select and then press OK again when

Restore Defaults? appears in the display.

2. Press OK to confirm.

Completely erase all information stored on SYNC (all

phonebook, call history, text messages and all paired

devices) and return to the factory default settings.

Master Reset

Download new software applications (if available) and

then load the desired applications through your USB port.

Refer to the web site for more information.

Application

Exit the current menu.Return

SYNC® TROUBLESHOOTING

Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,

should questions arise, please refer to the

tables below.

Use the website at any time to check your

phone's compatibility, register your

account and set preferences as well as

access a customer representative via an

on-line chat (during certain hours). Visit

www.SYNCMyRide.com or

www.syncmaroute.ca for more

information.

308

SYNC®

Phone Issues

Possible Solution(s)Possible Cause(s)Issue

Review your phone's user

guide regarding audio

adjustments.

The audio control settings

on your phone may be

affecting SYNC perform-

ance.

A lot of background noise

during a phone call.

Try turning off the device,

resetting the device,

removing the device's

battery, then trying again.

Possible phone malfunction.During a call, I can hear the

other person but they

cannot hear me.

· Go to the website to review

your phone's compatibility.

· This is a phone-dependent

feature.

SYNC is not able to down-

load my phonebook.

· Try turning off the device,

resetting the device or

removing the device's, then

trying again.

· Possible phone malfunc-

tion.

· Try "pushing" your phone-

book contacts to SYNC by

using the Add Contacts

feature.

· Use the "SYNCmyphone"

feature available on the

website.

· Try "pushing" your phone-

book contacts to SYNC by

using the Add Contacts

feature.

Limitations on your phone's

capability.

The system says "Phone-

book downloaded" but my

phonebook in SYNC is

empty or is missing

contacts. · If the missing contacts are

stored on your SIM card, try

moving them to the device

memory.

· Remove any pictures or

special ring tones associ-

ated with the missing

contact.

· Go to the website to review

your phone's compatibility.

· This is a phone-dependent

feature.

I'm having trouble

connecting my phone to

SYNC. · Try turning off the device,

resetting the device or

removing the device's, then

trying again.

· Possible phone malfunc-

tion.

309

SYNC®

Phone Issues

Possible Solution(s)Possible Cause(s)Issue

· Try deleting your device

from SYNC, deleting SYNC

from your device and trying

again.

· Check the security and

"auto accept/prompt

always" settings relative to

the SYNC Bluetooth

connection on your phone.

· Update your device's firm-

ware.

· Turn off the Auto phone-

book download setting.

· Go to the website to review

your phone's compatibility.

· This is a phone-dependent

feature.

Text messaging is not

working on SYNC.

· Try turning off the device,

resetting the device or

removing the device's, then

trying again.

· Possible phone malfunc-

tion.

USB/Media Issues

Possible Solution(s)Possible Cause(s)Issue

· Try turning off the device,

resetting the device,

removing the device's

battery, then trying again.

Possible device malfunction.I'm having trouble

connecting my device.

· Make sure you are using the

manufacturer's cable.

· Make sure the USB cable is

properly inserted into the

device and the vehicle's USB

port.

310

SYNC®

USB/Media Issues

Possible Solution(s)Possible Cause(s)Issue

· Make sure that the device

does not have an auto-

install program or active

security settings.

Make sure you are not

leaving the device in your

vehicle during very hot or

cold temperatures.

This is a device limitation.SYNC does not recognize

my device when I turn on the

car.

Make sure the device is

connected to SYNC and that

you have pressed play on

your device.

This is a phone-dependent

feature.

The device is not connected.

Bluetooth audio does not

stream.

· Make sure that all song

details are populated.

· Your music files may not

contain the proper artist,

song title, album or genre

information.

SYNC does not recognize

music that is on my device.

· Some devices require you

to change the USB settings

from mass storage to MTP

class.

· The file may be corrupted.

· The song may have copy-

right protection which does

not allow it to play.

Vehicle Health Report/Services (Traffic, Directions and Information) Issues

Possible Solution(s)Possible Cause(s)Issue

· This is a free feature, but

you must first register online

to use it.

· Your account may not be

activated on the website.

· You may have the wrong

VIN (vehicle identification

number) listed.

I received a text that the

Vehicle Health Report is not

activated.

311

SYNC®

Vehicle Health Report/Services (Traffic, Directions and Information) Issues

Possible Solution(s)Possible Cause(s)Issue

· Make sure that your VIN is

correctly listed in your

account.

When you register your

account, you must list a

preferred dealer. If one is

already listed, try selecting

another dealer and logging

out. Log back in and change

it back to your preferred

dealer and retrieve the

report.

The preferred dealer

information did not load

correctly.

I'm unable to retrieve the

report on the website, or I

receive a system error.

· Update your mobile

number in your account on

the website.

· This could be due to your

phone's compatibility.

· Bad signal strength.

I'm unable to submit a

report.

· Make sure you have full

signal strength and that your

Bluetooth volume level has

been turned up.

· Your phone may not be

activated on the website.

· Try deleting your phone

and performing a clean

pairing.

· This is a free feature, but

you must first register online

to use it.

· The phone in use is not

activated.

· Your phone has ID blocker

active.

I heard a commercial when

I tried to use Traffic, Direc-

tions and Information.

· Turn off ID blocker on your

phone as the system recog-

nizes you by your phone

number.

· Make sure the currently

connected phone is the

same one that is registered

on your SyncMyRide

account.

312

SYNC®

Voice Command Issues

Possible Solution(s)Possible Cause(s)Issue

· Review the phone voice

commands and the media

voice commands at the

beginning of their respective

sections.

· You may be using the

wrong voice commands.

· You may be speaking too

soon or at the wrong time.

SYNC does not understand

what I am saying.

· Be aware that SYNC's

microphone is either in your

rear view mirror or in the

headliner just above the

windshield.

· Review the media voice

commands at the beginning

of the media section.

· You may be using the

wrong voice commands.

· You may not be saying the

name exactly as it is saved.

SYNC does not understand

the name of a song or artist.

· Say the song or artist

exactly as they are listed. If

you say "Play Artist Prince"

the system does not play

music by Prince and the

Revolution or Prince and the

New Power Generation.

· The system may not be

"reading" the name the

same way you are saying it.

· Make sure you are saying

the complete title such as

"California remix featuring

Jennifer Nettles".

· If the songs are saved in all

CAPS, you have to spell

them. LOLA requires you to

say "L-O-L-A".

· Do not use special charac-

ters in the title as the system

does not recognize them.

· Review the phone voice

commands at the beginning

of the phone section.

· You may be using the

wrong voice commands.

· You may not be saying the

name exactly as it is saved.

SYNC does not understand

or is calling the wrong

contact when I want to

make a call. · Make sure you are saying

the contacts exactly as they

are listed. For example, if a

contact is saved as Joe

Wilson, say "Call Joe

Wilson".

· Contacts in your phone-

book may be very short and

similar, or they may contain

special characters.

· Your phonebook contacts

may be saved in CAPS.

313

SYNC®

Voice Command Issues

Possible Solution(s)Possible Cause(s)Issue

· The system works better if

you list full names such as

"Joe Wilson" rather than

"Joe".

· Do not use special charac-

ters such as 123 or ICE as the

system does not recognize

them.

· If contacts are saved in

CAPS, you have to spell

them. JAKE requires you to

say "Call J-A-K-E".

314

SYNC®

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in

loss of vehicle control, accident and

injury. Ford strongly recommends

that drivers use extreme caution when

using any device or feature that may take

their focus off the road. Your primary

responsibility is the safe operation of the

vehicle. We recommend against the use

of any handheld device while driving,

encourage the use of voice-operated

systems when possible and that you

become aware of applicable state and

local laws that may affect use of electronic

devices while driving.

Note: Some features are not available while

the vehicle is moving.

Note: You can also directly access the

Home screen and Information screen by

pressing the Home ("house" icon) and

Information ("i" icon) buttons on your

steering wheel controls.

This system uses a four-corner strategy to

provide quick access to vehicle features

and settings. The comprehensive

touchscreen provides easy interaction with

your mobile phone, multimedia, climate

control and navigation system. The corners

display any active modes within those

menus, such as your phone being

connected or the climate temperature.

E142607

Press to select any of the following:

• Clock

• Sound

• Settings

• Display

• Vehicle

• Help

INFORMATION

Press to select any of the following:

• SYNC® Services

• Notifications

• SYNC Apps

• SIRIUS® Travel Link™

• Calendar

PHONE

Press to select any of the following:

• Quick Dial

• Call History

• Settings

• Phonebook

• Text Messaging

• Making and Receiving Calls

NAVIGATION

Press to select any of the following:

• My Home

• Previous Destinations

• Emergency

• Intersection

• Map

• Favorites

• Point of Interest

• Street Address

• City Center

ENTERTAINMENT

Press to select any of the following:

• AM or FM

• CD

• BT Stereo

• SD Card

• SIRIUS

315

MyFord Touch®

• USB

• AV In

CLIMATE

Press to select any of the following:

• Driver Settings

• Recirculated Air

• Auto

• Dual

• Passenger Settings

• A/C

• Defrost

Using the Touch-Sensitive

Controls on Your System

Your vehicle's centerstack has

touch-sensitive switches for your

infotainment and climate control systems.

To turn a feature on and off, just touch the

graphic with your finger. To get the best

performance from the touch-sensitive

controls:

• Make sure your hands are clean and

dry.

• Since the touchscreen operates based

on the touch of a finger, you may have

trouble using it if you are wearing

gloves.

• Use your bare finger to touch the center

of a touch-control graphic. Touching

off-center of the graphic may cause a

nearby control to turn on or off.

• Do not press hard on the controls. They

are sensitive to light touch.

• Metal and other conductive material

should be kept away from the surface

of the touchscreen as this may cause

electronic interference (i.e. control

activation).

Depending on your vehicle and option

package, you may also have these controls

on your bezel:

• Power: Turn the media (or climate

features) on or off.

• VOL: Increase or decrease the volume.

• Fan: Increase or decrease the fan

speed.

• Seek and Tune buttons: Use as you

normally would in media modes.

• Eject: Eject a CD.

• SOURCE: Touch the word repeatedly

to see all available media modes. The

screen does not change, but you see

the media changes in the lower left

status bar.

• SOUND: Touch the word to access the

Sound menu where you can make

adjustments to settings such as: Bass,

Treble, Midrange, Balance and Fade,

THX Deep Note Demo (if equipped),

DSP (if equipped), Occupancy Mode

(if equipped), and Speed

Compensated Volume settings.

• Hazard flasher: Press the button to turn

the hazard flashers on or off.

Cleaning the Touchscreen Display

Clean the display with a clean, soft cloth

such as one used for cleaning glasses. If

dirt or finger prints are still visible, apply a

small amount of alcohol to the cloth. Do

not pour or spray alcohol onto the display.

Do not use detergent or any type of solvent

to clean the display.

Support

The SYNC support team is available to

help you with any questions you aren't able

to answer on your own.

Monday-Saturday, 8:30 am-8:00 pm.

In the United States, call: 1-888-270-1055

In Canada, call: 1-800-565-3673

316

MyFord Touch®

Times are subject to change due to

holidays.

Safety Information

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in

loss of vehicle control, accident and

injury. Ford strongly recommends

that drivers use extreme caution when

using any device or feature that may take

their focus off the road. Your primary

responsibility is the safe operation of the

vehicle. We recommend against the use

of any handheld device while driving,

encourage the use of voice-operated

systems when possible and that you

become aware of applicable state and

local laws that may affect use of electronic

devices while driving.

When using SYNC:

• Do not operate playing devices if the

power cords or cables are broken, split

or damaged. Carefully place cords and

cables where they cannot be stepped

on or interfere with the operation of

pedals, seats, compartments or safe

driving abilities.

• Do not leave playing devices in the

vehicle during extreme conditions as it

could cause them damage. Refer to

your device's user guide for further

information.

• Do not attempt to service or repair the

system. See your authorized dealer.

• For your safety, some SYNC functions

are speed-dependent and cannot be

performed when the vehicle is traveling

at speeds greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).

Make sure that you review your device's

user guide before using it with SYNC.

Speed-Restricted Features

Some features of this system may be too

difficult to use while the vehicle is in

motion so they're restricted from being

modified unless the vehicle is not moving.

Some examples of these are listed below:

• Screens that are too crowded with

information, such as Point of Interest

(POI) reviews and ratings, SIRIUS

Travel Link sports scores, movie times,

ski conditions, etc.

• Any action that requires using a

keyboard, such as entering a navigation

destination or editing information

• All lists are limited so the user can view

fewer entries (e.g. phone contacts,

recent phone call entries)

Listed below are more specific features

that can only be modified while the vehicle

is not moving:

Restricted Features

Pairing a Bluetooth phoneMobile Phone

Adding phonebook contacts or uploading phonebook

contacts (from a USB)

Lists entries are limited for phone contacts and recent

phone call entries

Editing the keypad codeSystem Functionality

317

MyFord Touch®

Restricted Features

Enabling Valet Mode

Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park

assist are active

Editing wireless settingsWi-Fi or Wireless

Editing the list of wireless networks

Playing videoVideos, photos or graphics

Editing the screen's wallpaper or adding new wallpaper

Composing text messagesText Messages

Viewing received text messages

Editing preset text messages

Using the keyboard to enter a destinationNavigation

Demo navigation route

Adding or editing Address Book entries or Avoid Areas

Privacy Information

When a mobile phone is connected to

SYNC, SYNC creates a profile within your

vehicle that is linked to that mobile phone.

This profile is created in order to offer you

more mobile features and to operate more

efficiently. Among other things, this profile

may contain data about your mobile phone

book, text messages (read and unread),

and call history, including history of calls

when your mobile phone was not

connected to SYNC. In addition, if you

connect a media device, SYNC creates and

retains an index of media content

supported by SYNC. SYNC also records a

short development log of approximately

10 minutes of all recent SYNC activity. The

log profile and other SYNC data may be

used to improve SYNC and help diagnose

any problems that may occur.

The mobile profile, media device index, and

development log will remain in the vehicle

unless you delete it and are generally

accessible only in the vehicle when the

mobile phone or media player is

connected. If you no longer plan to use

SYNC, or the vehicle, we recommend you

perform a Master Reset to erase all

information stored in SYNC.

318

MyFord Touch®

SYNC data cannot be accessed without

special equipment and access to the

vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor

Company and Ford of Canada will not

access SYNC data for any purpose other

than as described absent consent, a court

order, or where required by law

enforcement, other government

authorities, or other third parties acting

with lawful authority. Other parties may

seek to access the information

independently of Ford Motor Company and

Ford of Canada. For further privacy

information, see the sections on 911

Assist™(if equipped), Vehicle Health

Report (if equipped), and Traffic,

Directions and Information (if equipped).

Accessing Your Home Screen

E142613

Press the house icon to access

the home screen.

319

MyFord Touch®

Using Your Voice Recognition

System

This system helps you control many

features using voice commands. This

allows you to keep your hands on the

wheel and focus on what is in front of you.

The system provides feedback through

audible tones, prompts, questions and

spoken confirmations depending on the

situation and the chosen level of

interaction (voice settings).

The system also asks short questions

(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure

of your request or when there are multiple

possible responses to your request.

When using voice commands, words and

icons may also appear in the lower left

status bar indicating the status of the voice

session (i.e., listening, success, failed,

paused or try again).

How to Use Voice Commands with Your

System

E142599

Press the voice icon; after the

tone, speak your command

clearly.

What Can I Say?

To access the available voice commands

for the current session, do one of the

following:

• During a voice session, press the lower

left status bar of the screen

• Say "What can I say?" for an on-screen

listing of the possible voice commands

associated with your current voice

session

• Press the voice icon; after the tone, say

"Help" for an audible list of possible

voice commands.

320

MyFord Touch®

Helpful Hints

• Make sure the interior of the vehicle is

as quiet as possible. Wind noise from

open windows and road vibrations may

prevent the system from correctly

recognizing spoken commands.

• After pressing the voice icon, wait until

after the tone sounds and "Listening"

appears before saying a command. Any

command spoken before this does not

• Speak naturally, without long pauses

between words.

• At any time you can interrupt the

system while it is speaking by pressing

the voice icon.

Basic commands

If You Want ToSay

Make calls."Phone"

Access the device connected to your USB port."USB"

Stream audio from your phone."Bluetooth audio"

Access the device connected to the auxiliary input jack."Line in"

Cancel the requested action."Cancel"

Return to the main menu."SYNC"

Adjust the level of voice interaction and feedback."Voice settings"

Run a vehicle health report.

"Vehicle health report"

Access the SYNC Services portal.

"Services"

Access mobile applications.

"Mobile apps"

Hear a list of voice commands available in the current

mode.

"Help"

If equipped, U.S. only

These commands can be said at any time during a voice session

"Main menu"

"List of commands"

"What can I say?"

"Next page"

321

MyFord Touch®

These commands can be said at any time during a voice session

"Previous page"

"Go back"

"Cancel"

"Exit"

"Help"

Accessing a List of Available Commands

1. Using the touchscreen, press the Menu

icon, Help, then Voice Command List.

2. Using the steering wheel control, press

the voice icon. After the tone, speak

your command clearly.

Available Voice Commands

"Radio list of commands""Audio list of commands"

"SD card list of commands""Bluetooth audio list of commands"

"Sirius satellite list of commands"

"Browse list of commands"

"Travel link list of commands"

"CD list of commands"

"USB list of commands""Climate control list of commands"

"Voice instructions list of commands""List of commands"

"Voice settings list of commands"

"Navigation list of commands"

"Help""Phone list of commands"

If equipped

Voice Settings

Voice settings allow you to customize the

level of system interaction, help and

feedback. The system defaults to standard

interaction which uses candidate lists and

confirmation prompts as these provide the

highest level of guidance and feedback.

322

MyFord Touch®

• Interaction Mode: Novice mode

provides more detailed interaction and

guidance while the advanced mode

has less audible interaction and more

tone prompts.

• Confirmation Prompts: These are

short questions the system asks when

it is not sure of your request or when

there are multiple possible responses

to your request. If turned off, the

system simply makes a best guess as

to what you requested and you may

still occasionally be asked to confirm

settings.

• Phone and Media Candidate Lists:

These are lists of possible results from

your voice commands. The system

creates these lists when it has the

same confidence level of several

options based on your voice command.

To access these settings using the

touchscreen:

1. Press the Menu icon, Settings, then

Voice Control.

2. Select from the following:

• Interaction Mode

• Confirmation Prompts

• Media Candidate Lists

• Phone Candidate Lists

• Voice Control Volume

To access these settings using voice

commands:

1. Press the voice icon; after the tone

sounds, the system says "Please say a

command". Another tone sounds to let

you know the system is listening.

2. Say any of the following commands:

Voice Settings Using Voice Commands

"Interaction mode novice"

"Interaction mode advanced"

"Confirmation prompts on"

"Confirmation prompts off"

"Phone candidate lists on"

"Phone candidate lists off"

"Media candidate lists on"

"Media candidate lists off"

"Help"

Using Voice Commands with the

Touchscreen Options

Your voice system has a dual mode feature

which allows you to switch between using

voice commands and making on-screen

selections. This is most often available

when using navigation.

323

MyFord Touch®

On-screen buttons are outlined in blue to

indicate the selections that are part of the

dual mode feature. For example, if while

you are in a voice session rather than

saying the command "Enter street name"

to change the field, you can press Street

and the voice session does not end.

Instead, the voice system changes to the

Street field and asks you to say the street

name. The buttons not outlined in blue

cannot be used as voice commands; if they

are touched during a voice session, the

voice session is canceled.

For example, you can choose from the

following on the Navigation home screen:

• My Home

• Favorites

• Previous Destinations

• Point of Interest (POI)

• Emergency

• Street Address

• Intersection

• Cancel Route

Some of the voice commands that are

available while viewing this screen are:

Destination

"Destination my home"

"Destination street address"

"Destination favorites"

"Destination previous destinations"

"Destination POI"

"Destination intersection"

"Destination emergency"

If you choose Street Address from the

navigation screen, you can choose from

the following:

• Number

• City

• Street Name

• State/Prov

Some of the voice commands that are

available while viewing this screen are:

Street Address

"Enter house number"

"Change house number"

"Enter street name"

"Change street name"

"Enter city"

324

MyFord Touch®

Street Address

"Change city"

"Enter state"

"Change state"

If you choose Points of Interest from the

navigation screen, you can choose from

the following:

• Search Area

• Search By Name

• Fuel Station

• ATM

• All Restaurants

• Accommodations

• Parking

Some of the voice commands that are

available while viewing this screen are:

Points of Interest or POI

"Destination <POI category name>"

"Search by name"

"Search by category"

"Change search area"

"Change state"

Note: These are just a sample of the voice

commands available within the Points of

Interest section; the categories themselves

are also technically voice commands.

If you choose Intersection from the

navigation screen, you can choose from

the following:

• 1st Street

• 2nd Street

• City

• State/Prov

Some of the voice commands that are

available while viewing this screen are:

Intersection

"Enter first street name"

"Change first street name"

"Enter second street name"

"Change second street name"

325

MyFord Touch®

Intersection

"Enter city"

"Change city"

"Enter state"

"Change state"

The dual mode feature is also available

when the voice system displays a list of

items to pick from during a voice session,

where you would be able to touch the line

item or say "Line 2". If a command is not

understood or there are multiple options,

the system returns a list for you to choose

from.

Under the menu setting, you can set your

clock, access and make adjustments to

the display, sound and vehicle settings as

well as access settings for specific modes

or the help feature.

Setting the Clock

Note: The date is set by your vehicle's GPS;

you cannot manually set the date.

Note: If the battery has been disconnected,

the vehicle needs to acquire a GPS signal

to update the clock. Once your vehicle

acquires the signal, it may take a few

minutes for the update to display the correct

time.

1. Press Menu, then Clock.

2. Press + and - to adjust the time.

From this screen, you can also make other

adjustments such as 12-hour or 24-hour

mode, activate GPS time synchronization

and have the system automatically update

new time zones.

Once you update any settings they are

automatically saved.

Display Settings

To access and make adjustments to the

touchscreen display using the touchscreen,

press Menu, then Display. Select any of the

following:

• Brightness

• Auto Dim On/Off

• Mode: Auto, Day or Night

• Edit Wallpaper

E142599

To access and make

adjustments to the touchscreen

display using voice commands,

press the voice button on your steering

wheel controls and, when prompted, say

"Display Settings".

Uploading Photos for Your Home

Screen Wallpaper

Note: You cannot load photos directly from

your camera. You must access the photos

from either your USB mass storage device

or from an SD card.

Your system allows you to upload and view

up to 32 photos. To upload photos, press

Menu, Display, then Edit Wallpaper. Follow

the system prompts to upload your

photographs.

Photo Display Limitations

Note: Photographs with extremely large

dimensions (i.e. 2048 x 1536) may not be

compatible and appear as a blank (black)

image on the display.

326

MyFord Touch®

Only the photograph(s) which meet the

following conditions are displayed:

• Compatible file formats are as follows:

.jpg, .gif, .png, .bmp

• Each file must be 1.5 MB or less.

• Recommended dimensions: 800 x 384

Sound

Press Menu, then Sound to access settings

for:

Sound Settings

THX Deep Note Demo

Bass

DSP

Treble

Occupancy Mode

Midrange

Speed Compensated VolumeBalance and fade

If equipped.

Rear View Camera (If Equipped)

This menu allows you to access settings

for your rear view camera.

Press Menu, Vehicle, then Reverse Camera.

Select from the following settings:

• Rear Camera Delay

• Guideline

• Visual Park Aid Alert

Valet Mode

Note: If you are locked out and need to

reset the PIN, you can enter 3681 and the

system unlocks.

Valet mode allows you to lock the system

so that none of your information on the

system can be accessed until it is unlocked

with the correct PIN.

1. Press Menu, Vehicle, then Valet Mode.

2. Select Enable Valet Mode.

3. When prompted, enter a four-digit PIN.

After you press Continue the system is

locked until the correct PIN is entered

again.

Changing Your Door Keypad Code

(If Equipped)

To change the keypad code for your

keyless entry keypad system:

1. Press Menu, Vehicle, then Edit Door

Keypad Code.

2. Enter your current factory code, then,

when prompted, enter your new code.

Active Park Assist (If Equipped)

When activated, your system displays

directions for you regarding the active park

assist process. See Active Park Assist

(page 163).

Settings

Access and adjust system settings, voice

features, as well as phone, navigation and

wireless settings. Some of these settings

can also be accessed with regard to their

specific modes (i.e., phone and media).

System Settings

Press Menu, Settings, System. Select from

the following:

327

MyFord Touch®

System Settings

Distance UnitsLanguage

System Prompt VolumeTemperature Units

Keyboard LayoutTouchscreen Beeps

Master ResetInstall Applications

Voice Settings

Customize the level of system interaction,

help and feedback.

Press Menu, Settings, then Voice.

Voice Settings

· Standard interaction mode provides more detailed

interaction and guidance.

Interaction Mode

· Advanced mode has less audible interaction and more

tone prompts.

Short questions asked by the system when the system

has not clearly heard or understood your request. (Even

with confirmation prompts turned off, you may be asked

to confirm settings occasionally.)

Confirmation Prompts

Candidate lists are possible results from your voice

commands. If these are turned off, the system simply

makes a best guess at your request.

Media Candidate Lists

Phone Candidate Lists

Allows you to adjust the voice volume level.Voice Control Volume

Media Player Settings

To access settings for your media player,

press Menu, Settings, then Media Player.

Select from the following:

• Autoplay On/Off

• Bluetooth Devices

• Index Bluetooth On/Off

• Database Info

• Media Management On/Off

Note: With Autoplay and Index Bluetooth

turned on, you can listen to music which has

already been indexed. With these features

turned off, SYNC does not play any of your

music until all the media (on your USB

thumb drive, flash drive, portable music

player, etc.) has been indexed.

Navigation Settings

To access settings for your media player,

press Menu, Settings, then Navigation.

328

MyFord Touch®

Select from the following:

• Map Preferences

• Route Preferences

• Navigation Preferences

• Traffic Preferences

• Avoid Areas

Phone Settings

To access settings for your media player,

press Menu, Settings, then Phone (or

Phone, then Settings).

Phone Settings

Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as

save it as a favorite.

Bluetooth Devices

Turn Bluetooth on or off.Bluetooth On/Off

Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not ring in

the vehicle cabin. With this feature turned on, text message

notifications are also suppressed and do not ring inside

the cabin.

Do Not Disturb

Turn 911 Assist™ on or off. See Information (page 358).911 Assist

Select how you would like to be notified when you receive

a text message, if supported by your phone. Choose from

possible system alert tones, text-to-speech or silent.

Text Message Notification

Use this screen to make adjustments to your internet data

connection. Select to make your connection profile with

the PAN (personal area network) or to turn off your

connection. You can also choose to make adjustments to

your settings or have the system always connect, never

connect when roaming or query on connect. Press ? for

additional information.

Internet Data Connection

Access features such as automatic phonebook download,

re-download your phonebook, add contacts from your

phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook.

Manage Phonebook

Display call history.Display Call History

If compatible.

Wireless and Internet

To access, press Menu, Settings, then

Wireless and Internet.

Select from the following:

• Wi-Fi settings

• Bluetooth settings

• USB mobile broadband

• Prioritize connection methods

329

MyFord Touch®

Wi-Fi

Your system has a Wi-Fi feature which

creates a wireless network within your

vehicle, thereby allowing other devices (i.e.

personal computers or phones) in your

vehicle to speak to each other, share files,

play games, etc.

Using this feature, everyone in your vehicle

can also gain access the internet if:

• You have a USB mobile broadband

connection inside the vehicle

• Your phone supports PAN (personal

area networking)

• You are parked outside of a wireless

hotspot

To access, press Menu, Settings, Wireless

and Internet, then Wi-Fi settings. Select

from the following options:

You CanIf You Select

Turn the Wi-Fi feature on or off in your vehicle. Make sure

that On is selected for connectivity purposes.

Wi-Fi Network (Client)

Mode On/Off

Use a previously stored wireless network. You can

categorize by alphabetical listing, Priority and Signal

Strength. You can also choose to search for a network,

connect to a network, disconnect from a network, receive

more information, prioritize a network or delete a network.

Choose a Wireless Network

View a list of wireless networks.Search for Wireless

Networks

Make SYNC an access point for a phone or a computer by

turning this feature on. This forms the local area network

within the vehicle for things such as game playing, file

transfer, internet browsing, etc.

Gateway Access Point Mode

(On/Off)

View who has connected to your Wi-Fi connection recently.Gateway Access Point

Device List

Press the ? button (if available) for

additional information.

E142626

The

Wi-Fi

CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of

the Wi-Fi Alliance.

USB Mobile Broadband

Note: You must activate your mobile

broadband device on your PC prior to

connecting it to the system.

Note: USB mobile broadband settings may

not be displayed if the device is already

activated.

330

MyFord Touch®

Instead of using Wi-Fi, your system can

also use a USB mobile broadband

connection to access the internet. This

screen allows you to set up what is your

typical area for your USB mobile

broadband connection.

You can select the following:

• Country

• Carrier

• Phone Number

• User Name

• Password

Prioritize Connection Methods

This screen allows you to choose your

connection methods and change them as

needed. You can select to Change Order

and have the system either always attempt

to connecting using a USB mobile

broadband or using Wi-Fi.

Bluetooth Settings

This screen shows you what device is

currently paired with the system as well as

giving you your typical Bluetooth options

to connect, disconnect, set as favorite,

delete and add device.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the

Bluetooth SIG.

Help

Your touchscreen system has a help

feature which you can access at any time.

To access, press Menu, then Help. Select

from the following options:

You CanIf You Select

View the vehicle's current location, if your vehicle is

equipped with navigation. If your vehicle is not equipped

with navigation, nothing is displayed.

Where Am I?

Access the 911 Assist settings, vehicle restart instructions

and emergency quick dial contacts.

911 Assist

· In Case of Emergency (ICE) Quick Dial: This feature

allows you to save up to two numbers as ICE contacts for

quick access in the event of an emergency. Select Edit to

access your phonebook and then select the desired

contacts. The numbers then appear as options on this

screen for the ICE 1 and ICE 2 buttons. The ICE contacts

you select are presented to you at the completion of the

911 Assist call process for quick access.

View possible voice commands.Voice Command List

From this screen, you can also access

System information, Software Licenses

and Driving Restrictions.

To access Help using the voice commands,

press the voice button, then, after the tone,

say "Help". The system provides voice

commands that can be used in the current

mode.

331

MyFord Touch®

ENTERTAINMENT

Your system offers many media options.

You can access these options using the

touchscreen or voice commands.

Browsing Device Content

When listening to any type of audio, you

can browse through other devices without

having to change sources. For example, if

you are currently listening to the radio, you

can browse all the artists that are stored

on your USB device.

E142599

Press the voice icon on the

steering wheel. When prompted,

you can say:

"BROWSE" within Devices

"Browse"

"Browse <league> games"

"Browse <Sirius category> channels"

"Browse CD track list"

"Browse SD card"

"Browse SIRIUS channel guide"

"Browse USB"

"Help"

If you only say "Browse", you can then say any commands in the following chart.

If equipped with SIRIUS® satellite radio.

"BROWSE"

"<League> Games"

"<Sirius category> channels"

"CD Track List"

"SD card"

"SIRIUS Channel Guide"

332

MyFord Touch®

"BROWSE"

"USB"

"Help"

If equipped with SIRIUS® satellite radio.

For more commands in SD card or USB mode, see the "SD Card and USB Port" section

of this chapter.

AM/FM Radio

E142611

Press the lower left corner of the

touchscreen and then select the

AM or FM tab.

To change between AM and FM presets,

just touch the AM or FM tab.

You CanWhen You Select

Save a station by pressing and holding one of the memory

preset areas. There is a brief mute while the station is being

saved, then sound returns when it's done.

Preset

Enter the desired station number when prompted. Press

Enter.

Direct Tune

Allows you to receive radio broadcasts digitally (where

available), providing free, crystal clear sound.

HD Radio

Go to the next strong AM or FM radio station.Scan

Adjust more audio system settings:Options

· Sound Settings adjusts Bass, Treble, Midrange, Balance

and Fade, THX Deep Note Demo (if equipped), DSP (if

equipped), Occupancy Mode (if equipped), and Speed

Compensated Volume settings.

· Set PTY for Seek/Scan allows you to select a category

of music you would like to search for and then choose to

either seek or scan for the stations.

· RDS Text Display allows you to always view the

information broadcast by FM stations by selecting On.

· Auto Presets (AST) allows you to have the system

automatically store the six strongest stations in your

current location.

333

MyFord Touch®

You CanWhen You Select

· TAG (if available) allows you to tag a song to download

later. When you select On, TAG appears on-screen when

HD radio is active. You can press TAG to save the inform-

ation of the song that is playing. When you plug in your

portable music player, the information is transferred (if

supported by your device). When you are connected to

iTunes®, the tags appear to remind you of the songs you’ d

like to download.

HD Radio™ Information (If Available)

Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not

available in all markets.

HD Radio technology is the digital

evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your

system has a special receiver which allows

it to receive digital broadcasts (where

available) in addition to the analog

broadcasts it already receives. Digital

broadcasts provide a better sound quality

than analog broadcasts with free, crystal

clear audio and no static or distortion. For

more information, and a guide to available

stations and programming, please visit

www.hdradio.com.

When this feature is enabled and you are

tuned to a station broadcasting HD Radio

technology, you may notice the following

indicators on your screen:

E142616

The HD Radio logo blinks when a digital

station is being acquired and is solid when

digital audio is playing. When this logo is

available, you may also see Title and Artist

fields on-screen .

The multicast indicator appears in FM

mode (only) if the current station is

broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.

The numbers that are highlighted signify

available digital channels where new or

different content is available. HD1 signifies

the main programming status and is

available in analog and digital broadcasts.

Any additional multicast stations (HD2

through HD7) are only broadcast digitally.

TAG allows you to save a song to

download later. When you are on an

acquired HD Radio station, the TAG button

is available (provided the feature has been

turned on). To use the tag feature:

1. Press AM or FM, Options, then TAG On

2. When you hear a song you like, touch

TAG.

3. The system automatically saves the

song's information and transfers it to

your portable music player (if

supported) when it is connected to the

system. If your music player is

connected at the time, the system

automatically transfers the tag to your

player and a pop-up confirms the

transfer.

334

MyFord Touch®

4. When you access iTunes® with your

portable music player, the tags appear

to you to be reminded of the song. The

system allows you to tag up to

approximately 100 songs. For a list of

devices that support tagging, refer to

www.SYNCMyRide.com or

www.syncmaroute.ca.

When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you

can access the following functions:

You CanWhen You Select

Hear a brief sampling of all available stations.Scan

This feature still works when HD Radio reception is activ-

ated, although it does not scan for HD2-HD7 channels.

You may see the HD logo appear if the station has a digital

broadcast.

Hear the next strong radio station.Seek

If the current station has multiple digital broadcasts, the

multicast indicator appears. Press Seek repeatedly to

advance through all available broadcasts. If you are on

the last multicast channel, press Seek to advance to the

next strong station.

Go up and down the frequency in individual increments.Tune

If the current station has multiple digital broadcasts, the

multicast indicator appears. Press Tune repeatedly to

advance through all available broadcasts. If you are on

the last broadcast channel, turn to advance to the next

frequency on the band.

When the channel is active on-screen, press and hold a

memory preset slot until the sound returns. There is a brief

mute, then the sound returns signifying it was saved. When

recalling a HD2 or HD3 memory preset, there is a mute

before the digital audio is played as the system must once

again acquire the digital signal. As with any saved radio

station, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle

is outside the station's reception area.

To save a multicast station

as a preset

335

MyFord Touch®

HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting

Potential Reception Issues

If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on

the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due

to weak signal strength.

If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to

the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available

again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible

HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stay

muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal

again.

Reception area

When a station is first received (aside from HD2-HD7

multicast stations), the system first plays the station in

the analog version and then, if receiver verifies the station

is an HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version.

Depending on the station quality, you may hear a slight

sound change when the station changes from analog to

digital. This shift from analog to digital sound or digital

back to analog, is known as "blending".

Station blending

In order to provide the best possible

experience, a contact form has been

developed to report any station issues

found while listening to a station

broadcasting with HD Radio technology.

Every station is independently owned and

operated. These stations are responsible

for ensuring all audio streams and data

fields are accurate.

336

MyFord Touch®

Potential Station Issues

ActionCauseIssues

None. Broadcast issue.Poor time-alignment by the

radio broadcaster.

Echo, stutter, skip or repeat

in audio. Increase or

decrease in audio volume.

None. Reception issue that

may clear up as you

continue to drive.

The radio is shifting between

analog and digital audio.

Sound fading or blending in

and out.

None. This is normal beha-

vior. Wait until the audio is

available.

The digital multicast is not

available until the HD Radio

broadcast is decoded. Once

decoded, the audio is avail-

able.

Audio mute delay when

selecting HD2/HD3,

multicast preset or Direct

Tune.

None. The station is not

available in your current

location.

The previously stored

multicast preset or direct

tune is not available in your

current reception area.

Cannot access HD2/HD3

multicast channel when

recalling a preset or from a

direct tune.

Fill out the station issue

form at website listed

below.

Data service issue by the

radio broadcaster.

Text information does not

match currently playing

audio.

Fill out the station issue

form at website listed

below.

Data service issue by the

radio broadcaster.

No text information shown

for currently selected

frequency.

None. This is normal beha-

vior.

Pressing Scan disables HD2-

HD7 channel search.

HD2-HD7 stations not found

when Scan is pressed.

http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences

HD Radio Technology manufactured under

license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and

foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and

HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks

of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor

Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not

responsible for the content sent using HD

Radio technology. Content may be

changed, added or deleted at any time at

the station owner's discretion.

Radio Voice Commands

E142599

If you are listening to the radio,

press the voice button on the

steering wheel controls. When

prompted, say any of the following

commands.

If you are not listening to the radio, press

the voice button and, after the tone, say

"Radio", then any of the following

commands.

337

MyFord Touch®

"RADIO"

"FM autoset preset <#>""<87.9-107.9>"

"FM preset <#>"

"<87.9-107.9> HD"

"FM 1""<530-1710>"

"FM 1 preset <#>""AM"

"FM 2""AM <530-1710>"

"FM 2 preset <#>""AM autoset"

"HD <#>"

"AM autoset preset <#>"

"Preset <#>""AM preset <#>"

"Radio off"

"Browse"

"Radio on""FM"

"Set PTY""FM <87.9-107.9>"

"Tune"

"FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>"

"Help""FM autoset"

If available

If you have said "Browse", refer to the "Browse" chart later in this section.

If you have said "Tune", refer to the following "Tune" chart.

"TUNE"

"FM autoset""<530-1710>"

"FM autoset preset <#>"

"<87.9-107.9> HD <#>"

"FM preset <#>""AM"

"FM1""AM <530-1710>"

"FM1 preset <#>""AM preset <#>"

"FM2""AM autoset"

"FM2 preset <#>""AM autoset preset <#>"

338

MyFord Touch®

"TUNE"

"HD <#>"

"<87.9-107.9>"

"Preset <#>""FM"

"Help""FM <87.9-107.9>"

"FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>"

If available

SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If

Activated)

E142611

Press the lower left corner of the

touchscreen, then select the

SIRIUS tab.

You CanWhen You Select

Save a station by pressing and holding one of the memory

preset areas. There is a brief mute while the station is being

saved, then sound returns when it's done.

A memory preset area (on

the right side of the screen)

Enter the desired satellite channel number using the on-

screen keypad.

Direct Tune

Press repeatedly to change SIRIUS modes (SIRIUS 1, 2 or

3).

SIRIUS

Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The

system alerts you when it plays again on any SIRIUS

channel.

ALERT

View a list of all available stations. Scroll and select the

desired station.

Browse

You can also lock or skip unwanted channels or view the

song/artist on other stations.

Hear a brief sampling of channels.Scan

Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay

approximately 45 minutes of audio as long as you have

remained tuned to the current station. If you change

stations, the previous audio is erased.

Replay

· Press and release the seek buttons to hear the previous

or next song.

339

MyFord Touch®

You CanWhen You Select

· Press and hold the seek buttons to advance to reverse

or fast forward in the current track.

· Press play or pause to play or pause the audio.

· Press Replay again to return to live audio if you had been

using the replay feature to replay audio.

Adjust more audio system settings:Options

· Sound Settings adjusts Bass, Treble, Midrange, Balance

and Fade, THX Deep Note Demo (if equipped), DSP (if

equipped), Occupancy Mode (if equipped), and Speed

Compensated Volume settings.

· Set Category for Seek/Scan allows you to select a

category of music you would like to search for and then

choose to either seek or scan for the stations.

· Parental Lockout allows you to lock and unlock chan-

nels, change or reset your PIN or unlock all channels. To

use this feature you need your initial PIN which is 1234.

· Artist/Title Alerts

allows you to select Artists and

Titles that you would like the system to alert you to when

they are playing on other channels. Press Edit Alerts to

delete or turn off alerts. You can also set all alerts to on

or off. When an alert appears on the screen, you can

choose to Tune to the channel, to Cancel the alert or to

Disable Alerts. If you are listening to a sporting event,

you can save your favorite teams so that the system can

alert you when they are playing on a satellite radio channel.

This is required when communicating with SIRIUS about

your account.

Electronic Serial Number

(ESN)

SIRIUS does not support the Alert feature on all channels. Ford Motor Company shall

not be responsible for Alert feature variation.

SIRIUS Satellite Radio Information

Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right

to change, rearrange, add or delete

programming including canceling, moving

or adding particular channels, and its prices,

at any time, with or without notice to you.

Ford Motor Company shall not be

responsible for any such programming

changes.

340

MyFord Touch®

E142593

SIRIUS satellite radio is a

subscription-based satellite radio service

that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,

news, weather, traffic and entertainment

programming. Your factory-installed

SIRIUS satellite radio system includes

hardware and a limited subscription term

which begins on the date of sale or lease

of the vehicle. Refer to your authorized

dealer for availability.

For more information on extended

subscription terms (a service fee is

required), the online media player and a

complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio

channels, and other features, please visit

www.siriusxm.com in the United States,

www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at

1-888-539-7474.

Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number

(ESN)

You need your ESN to activate, modify or

track your satellite radio account. The ESN

is found on the System Information Screen

(SR ESN:XXXXXXXXXXXX). To access

your ESN, touch the bottom left corner of

the touchscreen. Touch SIRIUS, Options,

then ESN.

SIRIUS Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting

Potential Reception Issues

For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna

clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other

material as far away from the antenna as possible.

Antenna obstructions

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway

overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and

thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

Terrain

When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating

tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and

the audio system may mute.

Station overload

Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the

interference and the audio system may mute.

Satellite radio signal interfer-

ence

341

MyFord Touch®

Troubleshooting Tips

ActionCauseRadio Display

None. This message should

disappear shortly.

Radio requires more than

two seconds to produce

audio for the selected

channel.

ACQUIRING...

If this message does not

clear shortly, or with an igni-

tion key cycle, your receiver

may have a fault. See your

authorized dealer for service.

Internal module or system

failure present.

Sat Fault/SIRIUS System

Failure

Tune to another channel or

choose another preset.

Channel no longer available.Invalid Channel

Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-

539-7474 to subscribe to

the channel, or tune to

another channel.

Subscription not available

for this channel.

Unsubscribed Channel

The signal is currently being

blocked. When you move

into an open area, the signal

should return.

Loss of signal from the

SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS

tower to the vehicle

antenna.

No Signal

None. The process may take

up to three minutes.

Update of channel

programming in progress.

Updating

Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-

539-7474 to reactivate or

resolve subscription issues.

Satellite service has been

deactivated by SIRIUS

satellite radio.

Call SIRIUS

1-888-539-7474

Using the channel guide,

unlock or unskip the chan-

nels.

All the channels in the

selected category are

skipped or locked.

No Channels Available

None.SIRIUS has updated the

channels available for your

vehicle.

Subscription Updated

342

MyFord Touch®

SIRIUS Satellite Radio Voice

Commands

E142599

If you are listening to SIRIUS

satellite radio, press the voice

button on the steering wheel

controls. When prompted, say any of the

following commands.

If you are not listening to SIRIUS satellite

radio, press the voice button and, after the

tone, say "SIRIUS", then any of the

following commands.

"SIRIUS"

"SAT 2 preset <#>""<0-223>"

"SAT 3""<Channel name>"

"SAT 3 preset <#>""Preset <#>"

"SIRIUS off""SAT"

"SIRIUS on""SAT preset <#>"

"Sports game"

"SAT 1"

"Tune"

"SAT 1 Preset <#>"

"Help""SAT 2"

Late availability. If you have said "Sports game", refer to the following "Sports game"

chart.

If you have said "Tune", refer to the following "Tune" chart.

"SPORTS GAME"

"Tune to the <college name> game"

"Tune to the <team city> game"

"Tune to the <team city> <team name> game"

"Tune to the <team name> game"

"Help"

343

MyFord Touch®

"TUNE"

"<0-223>"

"<Channel Name>"

"Preset <#>"

"SAT"

"SAT 1"

"SAT 1 preset <#>"

"SAT 2"

"SAT 2 preset <#>"

"SAT 3"

"SAT 3 preset <#>"

"Help"

E142611

Press the lower left corner of the

touchscreen, then select the CD

tab.

You CanWhen You Select

Repeat the currently playing track.Repeat

Play the tracks in random order.Shuffle

Hear a brief sampling of all available tracks.Scan

See disc information.More Info

Look through all available audio sources.Browse

· Sound Adjust Bass, Treble, Midrange, Balance and Fade,

THX Deep Note Demo (if equipped), DSP (if equipped),

Occupancy Mode (if equipped), and Speed Compensated

Volume settings.

Options

· Compression Access compression settings.

344

MyFord Touch®

You can also advance and reverse the

current track or current folder (if

applicable).

CD Voice Commands

E142599

If you are listening to a CD, press

the voice button on the steering

wheel controls. When prompted,

say any of the following commands.

If you are not listening to a CD, press the

voice button and, after the tone, say "CD",

then any of the following commands.

"CD"

"Pause"

"Play"

"Play next track"

"Play previous track"

"Play track <1-512>"

"Repeat"

"Repeat folder"

"Repeat off"

"Repeat track"

"Shuffle"

"Shuffle CD"

"Shuffle folder"

"Shuffle off"

"Help"

WMA or MP3 only

345

MyFord Touch®

SD Card Slot and USB Port

SD Card

Note: Your SD card slot is spring-loaded.

To remove the SD card, press the card in

and the system ejects it. Do not attempt to

pull the card to remove it as this could cause

damage.

The card slot can also be used for your

navigation system (if equipped). See

Navigation (page 371).

E142619

The SD card slot is located either in the

center console or behind a small access

door in the instrument panel. To access

and play music from your device, press the

lower left corner of the touchscreen.

E142620

SD logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

USB Port

E142621

The USB ports are located either in the

center console or behind a small access

door in the instrument panel. To access

and play music from your device, press the

lower left corner of the touchscreen.

This feature allows you to plug in media

playing devices, memory sticks, flash drives

or thumb drives, and also charge devices

if they support this feature.

Playing Music from Your Device

E142611

Insert your device and select the

USB or SD Card tab once the

system recognizes it. You can

choose from the following options:

346

MyFord Touch®

You CanWhen You Select

Repeat the currently playing song or album.Repeat

Play music on the selected album or folder in random

order.

Shuffle

Browse the contents of the device. It also allows you to

search and play by genre, artist, album, etc.

Browse

Choose music similar to that which is currently playing.Similar Music

Select more settings:Options

· Sound Settings allows you to adjust Bass, Treble,

Midrange, Balance and Fade, THX Deep note demo (if

equipped), DSP (if equipped), Occupancy mode (if

equipped), and speed compensated volume.

· Media Player Settings allows you to select more

settings.

· Device Information displays software and firmware

information about the currently-connected media device.

· Update Media Index indexes the device each time it is

connected to make sure you have the latest voice

commands available for all media on the device.

Media Player settings include:

· Autoplay: When on, the system automatically switches

to the media source when first connected so you can listen

to music that has been indexed. When off, the system

does not automatically switch to the media source.

· Bluetooth Devices: Connect, disconnect, add or delete

a device. Also set a device as your favorite so the system

automatically tries to connect to it at every ignition cycle.

· Gracenote Database Info: View the version level of the

Gracenote Database.

· Gracenote Media Management: When on, this feature

gets metadata information from the Gracenote Database

for your music files. This overrides information from your

device. The feature default is off.

· Cover Art Priority: This feature retrieves cover art for

your music files from either your device or the Gracenote

Database. The feature default is Device.

Displays information about the device, if connected and

available.

Media Device Information

Allows you to choose how you would like the information

to display on-screen.

Text Display

347

MyFord Touch®

To view song information such as Title,

Artist, File, Folder, Album, and Genre, touch

the on-screen album art. You can also

press What's Playing? to hear how the

system pronounces the current band and

song. This can be helpful when using voice

commands to make sure the system

correctly plays your request.

USB and SD Card Voice Commands

E142599

If you are listening to a USB

device or an SD card, press the

voice button on the steering

wheel controls. When prompted, say any

of the following commands.

If you are not listening to a USB device or

an SD card, press the voice button and,

after the tone, say "USB" or "SD card",

then any of the following commands.

"USB" or "SD CARD"

"Play podcast episode <name>"

"Browse"

"Play similar music""Next"

"Play song <name>""Pause"

"Play TV show episode <name>"

"Play"

"Play video <name>"

"Play album <name>"

"Play video podcast episode <name>"

"Play all"

"Play video playlist <name>"

"Play artist <name>"

"Previous""Play audiobook <name>"

"Repeat all""Play author <name>"

"Repeat off""Play composer <name>"

"Repeat one""Play folder <name>"

"Shuffle""Play genre <name>"

"Shuffle off"

"Play movie <name>"

"What's this?""Play playlist <name>"

"Help""Play podcast <name>"

If you have said you would like to browse your USB or SD card, the system prompts you

to specify what you would like to browse. When prompted, refer to the following "Browse"

chart.

These commands are only available in USB mode and are device-dependent.

348

MyFord Touch®

"BROWSE"

"All video podcasts"

"Album <name>"

"All videos"

"All albums"

"Artist <name>""All artists"

"Audiobook <name>""All audiobooks"

"Author <name>""All authors"

"Composer <name>""All composers"

"Folder <name>""All folders"

"Genre <name>""All genres"

"Playlist <name>"

"All movies"

"Podcast <name>"

"All music videos"

"TV show <name>"

"All playlists"

"Video <name>"

"All podcasts"

"Video playlist <name>"

"All songs"

"Video podcast <name>"

"All TV shows"

"Help"

"All video playlists"

These commands are only available in USB mode and are device-dependent.

Supported Media Players, Formats

and Metadata Information

SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any

digital media player, including iPod®,

Zune™, "plays from device" players, and

most USB drives. Supported audio formats

include MP3, WMA, WAV and AAC.

It is also able to organize your indexed

media from your playing device by

metadata tags. Metadata tags are

descriptive software identifiers embedded

in the media files which provide

information about the file.

If your indexed media files contain no

information embedded in these metadata

tags, SYNC may classify the empty

metadata tags as Unknown.

349

MyFord Touch®

In order to playback video from your iPod®

or iPhone®, (if compatible), you MUST

have a special combination USB/RCA

composite video cable (available for

purchase from Apple® ). When the cable

is connected to your iPod® or iPhone®,

plug the other end into both the RCA jacks

and the USB port.

Bluetooth Audio

Your system allows you to stream audio

over your vehicle's speakers from your

connected, Bluetooth-enabled mobile

phone.

E142611

To access, press the lower left

corner on the touchscreen, then

select the BT tab.

Bluetooth Audio Voice Commands

Note: If your Bluetooth device supports

streaming metadata, all the commands

below are available. If your device does not,

only "Next song", "Pause", "Play" and

"Previous song" are available.

E142599

If you are listening to a Bluetooth

audio device, press the voice

button on the steering wheel

controls. When prompted, say any of the

commands in the following chart.

If you are not listening to a Bluetooth audio

device, press the voice button and, after

the tone, say “Bluetooth Audio”, then any

of the commands in the following chart.

"BLUETOOTH AUDIO"

"Play genre <name>""Browse composer

<name>"

"Browse album <name>"

"Play playlist <name>""Browse folder <name>""Browse all albums"

"Play podcast episode

<name>"

"Browse genre <name>""Browse all artists"

"Play similar music""Browse playlist <name>""Browse all audiobooks"

"Play song <name>""Browse podcast <name>""Browse all authors"

"Previous""Next""Browse all composers"

"Repeat all""Pause""Browse all folders"

"Repeat off""Play""Browse all genres"

"Repeat one""Play album <name>""Browse all playlists"

"Shuffle""Play artist <name>""Browse all podcasts"

"Shuffle album""Play audiobook <name>""Browse all songs"

"Shuffle off""Play author <name>""Browse artist <name>"

"What’s this?""Play composer <name>""Browse audiobook

<name>"

"Help""Play folder <name>""Browse author <name>"

350

MyFord Touch®

A/V Inputs

Note: For safety reasons, connecting or

adjusting the settings on your portable

music player should not be attempted while

the vehicle is moving. Also, the portable

music player should be stored in a secure

location, such as the center console or the

glove box, when the vehicle is in motion. The

audio extension cable must be long enough

to allow the portable music player to be

safely stored while the vehicle is in motion.

E142622

Your A/V inputs allow you to connect an

auxiliary audio/video source (e.g. game

systems or personal camcorders) by

connecting RCA cords (not included) to

these input jacks. The jacks are yellow, red

and white and are located either in the

center console or behind a small access

door in the instrument panel.

You can also use the A/V inputs as an

auxiliary input jack (AIJ) to play music from

your portable music player over your

vehicle's speakers. Plug in your one-eighth

inch (3.5 millimeter) RCA adapter into the

two left A/V input jacks (red and white).

Press the lower left corner of the

touchscreen, then select the A/V Inputs

tab.

To use the auxiliary input jack feature,

make sure that your portable music player

is designed to be used with headphones

and that it is fully charged. You also need

an audio extension cable with stereo male

one-eighth inch (3.5 millimeter)

connectors at one end and a RCA jack at

the other.

1. Begin with the vehicle parked and the

radio and portable device are turned

off.

2. Attach one end of the audio extension

cable to the headphone output of your

player and the other end into the

adaptor in one of the two left A/V input

jacks (white or red) inside the center

console.

3. Press the lower left corner on the

touchscreen. Select either a tuned

station from the FM tab or the CD tab

(if there is a CD already loaded into the

system.) Adjust the volume to a

comfortable listening level.

4. Turn the portable music player on and

adjust the volume to one-half.

5. Press the lower left corner on the

touchscreen. Select the A/V Input tab.

(You should hear audio from your

portable music player although it may

be low.)

6. Adjust the sound on your portable

music player until it reaches the level

of the FM station or CD by switching

back and forth between the controls.

In order to playback video from your iPod®

or iPhone®, (if compatible), you MUST

have a special combination USB/RCA

composite video cable (available for

purchase from Apple® ). When the cable

is connected to your iPod® or iPhone®,

plug the other end into both the RCA jacks

and the USB port.

351

MyFord Touch®

Note: Do not connect the audio input jack

to a line level output. The AIJ only works

correctly with devices that have a

headphone output with a volume control.

Note: Do not set the portable music

player's volume level higher than is

necessary to match the volume of the CD

or FM radio as this causes distortion and

reduces sound quality.

Note: If the music sounds distorted at lower

listening levels, turn the portable music

player volume down. If the problems

persists, replace or recharge the batteries

in the portable music player.

Note: The portable music player must be

controlled in the same manner when it is

used with headphones as the AIJ does not

provide control (play, pause, etc.) over the

attached portable music player.

PHONE

Hand's-free calling is one of the main

features of SYNC. Once your phone is

paired, you can access many options using

the touchscreen or voice commands. While

the system supports a variety of features,

many are dependent on your mobile

phone's functionality.

At a minimum, most mobile phones with

Bluetooth wireless technology support the

following functions:

• Answering an incoming call

• Ending a call

• Using privacy mode

• Dialing a number

• Redial

• Call waiting notification

• Caller ID

Other features such as text messaging

using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook

download are phone-dependent features.

To check your phone's compatibility, refer

to your phone's user manual and visit

www.SYNCMyRide.com or

www.syncmaroute.ca.

Pairing Your Phone for the First

Time

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in

loss of vehicle control, accident and

injury. Ford strongly recommends

that drivers use extreme caution when

using any device that may take their focus

off the road. Your primary responsibility is

the safe operation of the vehicle. We

recommend against the use of any

handheld device while driving, encourage

the use of voice-operated systems when

possible and that you become aware of

applicable state and local laws that may

affect use of electronic devices while

driving.

The first thing you must do to use SYNC's

phone features is to pair your

Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone with

SYNC. This allows you to use your phone

in a hands-free manner.

Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition and

radio are turned on and that the

transmission is in position P.

1. Touch Add Phone in the upper left

corner of the touchscreen.

2. When prompted, select Add.

3. Select Add Device.

4. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On

and that your mobile phone is in the

proper mode. Refer to your phone's

user guide if necessary.

352

MyFord Touch®

5. When prompted on your phone's

display, enter the six-digit PIN provided

by SYNC in the radio display. The

display indicates when the pairing is

successful and asks you if you want to

download your phone book.

Depending on your phone's capability, you

may be prompted with additional options.

For more information on your phone's

capability, refer to your phone's user guide

and visit the website.

Pairing Subsequent Phones

Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition and

radio are turned on and that the

transmission is in position P.

1. Press the phone corner of the

touchscreen, Settings, BT Devices,

then Add Device.

2. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On

and that your mobile phone is in the

proper mode. Refer to your phone's

user guide if necessary.

3. When prompted on your phone's

display, enter the six-digit PIN provided

by SYNC on the screen. The display

indicates when the pairing is

successful. The system asks you if you

want to download your phone book.

Depending on your phone's capability, you

may be prompted with additional options.

For more information on your phone's

capability, refer to your phone's user guide

and visit the website.

Making Calls

E142599

Press the voice button. When

prompted, say "Call <name>" or

say "Dial", the desired number.

E142632

To end the call or exit phone

mode, press and hold the phone

button.

Receiving Calls

During an incoming call, an audible tone

sounds. Call information appears in the

display if it's available.

Accept the call by pressing

Accept on the touchscreen or

by pressing this phone button on

your steering wheel controls.

E142632

Reject the call by pressing

Reject on the touchscreen or by

pressing and holding this phone

button on your steering wheel controls.

Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC logs

it as a missed call.

Phone Menu Options

Press the top left corner on your

touchscreen to select from the following

options:

You CanWhen You Select

Access the on-screen numerical pad to enter a number

and place a call.

Phone

353

MyFord Touch®

You CanWhen You Select

· During an active call, you can also choose to mute the

call, put it on hold, activate privacy (returns the call to your

mobile phone), join two calls or end the call.

Select and call contacts stored in your phone book

contacts and call history folder.

Quick Dial

Access and call any contacts in your previously down-

loaded phone book. The system places the entries in

alphabetical categories summarized at the top of the

screen.

Phone Book

· To turn on contact picture settings (if your device

supports this feature), press Phone, Settings, Manage

Phone Book, Download Photos from Phone Book,

then select On.

· Certain smartphones may support transferring street

addresses when listed with phone book contact informa-

tion. If this feature is supported, you can select and use

these addresses as destinations and also save them as

favorites.

Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls

while your Bluetooth-enabled phone was connected to

SYNC. You can also choose to save these to Favorites or

Quick Dial.

Call History

· This is a phone-dependent feature. If your phone does

not support downloading call history using Bluetooth,

SYNC keeps track of calls made with the SYNC system.

Send text messages using your touchscreen. See the Text

Messaging section for more information.

Messaging

Access various phone settings such as turning your

Bluetooth on and off and managing your phone book. See

the Phone Settings section for more information.

Settings

Text Messaging

Note: Downloading and sending text

messages using Bluetooth are

phone-dependent features.

Note: Certain features in text messaging

are speed-dependent and cannot be

completed when the vehicle is traveling at

speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h).

Note: SYNC does not download read text

messages from your phone.

You can send and receive text messages

using Bluetooth, read them aloud and

translate text messaging acronyms such

as "LOL".

1. Touch the top left corner of the display

to access the Phone menu.

2. Select Messaging.

354

MyFord Touch®

3. Choose from the following:

• Listen

• Dial

• Send Text

• View

• Delete

Composing a Text Message

Note: Downloading and sending text

messages using Bluetooth are

phone-dependent features.

Note: This is a speed-dependent and

cannot be completed when the vehicle is

traveling at speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h).

1. Touch the top left corner of the display

to access the Phone menu.

2. Select Messaging, then Send Text.

3. You can select Edit Text and use the

system keyboard to create a text

message or select from the following

options:

Text Message Options

Call me later

Can you give me a call?

I just left, I'll be there soon

I'll call you back in a few minutes

I'll call you when I get there

I'm ahead of schedule, so I'll be there early

I'm on my way

I'm outside

I'm running a few minutes late

LOL

Stuck in traffic

Thanks

Yes

355

MyFord Touch®

Receiving a Text Message

Note: If you select View and your vehicle is

traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h), the system

offers to read the message to you instead

of allowing you to view it while driving.

When a new message arrives, an audible

tone sounds and the screen displays a

pop-up with the caller name and ID, if

supported by your phone. You can press:

• View to view the text message.

• Listen for SYNC to read the message

to you.

• Dial to call the contact.

• Ignore to exit the screen.

Phone Settings

Press Phone, then Settings or Menu,

Settings, then Phone to select from the

following settings:

You CanWhen You Select

Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as

save it as a favorite.

Bluetooth Devices

Turn Bluetooth on or off.Bluetooth On/Off

Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not ring in

the vehicle cabin. With this feature turned on, text message

notifications are also suppressed and do not ring inside

the cabin.

Do not disturb

Turn 911 Assist™ on or off. See Information (page 358).911 Assist

Select what ring tone you would like to hear when you

receive a call. Choose from possible system ring tones,

your currently paired phone's ring tone, a beep, text-to-

speech or if you would like the notification to be silent.

Phone ringer

Select how you would like to be notified when you receive

a text message, if supported by your phone. Choose from

possible system alert tones, text-to-speech or silent.

Text message notification

Use this screen to make adjustments to your internet data

connection. Select to make your connection profile with

the PAN (personal area network) or to turn off your

connection. You can also choose to make adjustments to

your settings or have the system always connect, never

connect when roaming or query on connect. Press ? for

more information.

Internet Data Connection

356

MyFord Touch®

You CanWhen You Select

Access features such as automatic phonebook download,

re-download your phonebook, add contacts from your

phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook.

Manage Phonebook

Display call history.Display call history

If compatible.

Phone Voice Commands

E142599

Press the voice button on the

steering wheel controls. When

prompted, say any of the

following commands:

"PHONE"

"Hold call off"

"Bluetooth off"

"Hold on"

"Bluetooth on"

"Join calls"

"Call"

"Listen to text messages""Call <name>"

"Messages"

"Call <name> at home"

"Mute call"

"Call <name> at work"

"Pair phone""Call <name> on cell"

"Privacy on"

"Call <name> on other"

"Reply to text messages""Call voicemail"

"Turn ringer off""Dial"

"Turn ringer on""Do not disturb off"

"Unmute call""Do not disturb on"

357

MyFord Touch®

"PHONE"

"Help""Forward text messages"

"Go to hands free"

These commands are only available during an active call.

If you say "Messages", see the following "Messages" chart for additional commands.

"MESSAGES"

"Call"

"Forward text messages"

"Listen to text message <#>"

"Listen to text messages"

"Reply to text messages"

"Help"

INFORMATION

Under the Information menu, you can

access features such as SYNC® Services,

SIRIUS® Travel Link™ and SYNC Apps or

view your calendar and system

notifications.

If your vehicle is equipped with the

navigation system, press the Information

button to access these features. If your

vehicle is not equipped with the navigation

system, press the corner of the

touchscreen with the green tab.

SYNC Services (If Equipped, U.S.

Only)

Note: SYNC Services requires activation

prior to use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com

to register and check your eligibility for

complimentary services. Standard phone

and message rates may apply. Subscription

may be required. You must also have the

active SYNC Services Bluetooth-enabled

mobile phone paired and connected to the

system in order to connect to, and use,

SYNC Services. See Phone (page 352).

Note: This feature does not function

properly if you have enabled caller ID

blocking on your mobile phone. Make sure

your mobile phone is not blocking caller ID

before using SYNC Services.

358

MyFord Touch®

Note: The driver is ultimately responsible

for the safe operation of the vehicle, and

therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe

to follow the suggested directions. Any

navigation features are provided only as an

aid. Make your driving decisions based on

your observations of local conditions and

existing traffic regulations. Do not follow

the route suggestions if doing so would

result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you

would be placed in an unsafe situation, or

if you would be directed into an area that

you consider unsafe. Maps used by this

system may be inaccurate because of errors,

changes in roads, traffic conditions or driving

conditions.

Note: When you connect, the service uses

GPS technology and advanced vehicle

sensors to collect the vehicle's current

location, travel direction and speed to help

provide you with the directions, traffic

reports, or business searches you request.

Further, to provide the services you request

and for continuous improvement, the service

may collect and record call details and voice

communications. For more information, see

SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at

www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not want

Ford or its service providers to collect the

vehicle travel information or other

information identified in the Terms and

Conditions, do not activate or use the

service.

SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle

sensors, integrated GPS technology and

comprehensive map and traffic data, to

give you personalized traffic reports,

precise turn-by-turn directions, business

search, news, sports, weather and more.

For a complete list of services, or to learn

more, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.

Connecting to SYNC Services Using

Voice Commands

1. Press the voice button.

2. When prompted, say "Services". This

initiates an outgoing call to SYNC

Services using your paired and

connected Bluetooth-enabled mobile

phone.

3. Once you're connected to the service,

follow the voice prompts to request

the desired service such as traffic or

directions. You can also say "What are

my choices?" to receive a complete list

of available services from which to

choose.

4. Say "Services" to return to the services

main menu or for help, say "Help".

Connecting to SYNC Services Using

the Touchscreen

If your vehicle is equipped with the

navigation system, press the Information

button.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the

navigation system, press the green tab on

your touchscreen.

1. Select Connect to Services to initiate

an outgoing call to SYNC Services

using your phone.

2. Once connected, follow the voice

prompts to request your desired service

such as traffic or directions. You can

also say "What are my choices?" to

receive a complete list of available

services from which to choose.

3. Say "Services" to return to the services

main menu or for help, say "Help".

Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions

1. When connected to SYNC Services,

say "Directions" or "Business search".

To find the closest business or type of

business to your current location just

say "Business search", then "Search

near me". If you need further assistance

in finding a location you can say

"Operator" at any time within a

Directions or Business search to speak

359

MyFord Touch®

with a live operator. You may also be

prompted to speak with an operator.

The live operator can assist you by

searching for businesses by name or

by category, residential addresses by

street address or by name or specific

street intersections. Operator Assist is

a feature of your SYNC Services

subscription. For more information on

Operator Assist visit

www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.

2. Follow the voice prompts to select your

destination. After the route download

is complete, the phone call is

automatically ended.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the

navigation feature:

• Turn-by-turn directions appear in the

infotainment display, in the status bar

of your touchscreen system and also

on the SYNC Services screen. You also

receive driving instructions from

audible prompts.

• When on an active route, you can

select Route Summary or Route

Status using the touchscreen controls

or voice commands to view the Route

Summary Turn List or the Route

Status ETA. You can also turn voice

guidance on or off, cancel the route or

update the route.

If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks

if you want the route updated. When

prompted, say "yes" and a new route is

delivered to your vehicle.

If your vehicle is equipped with the

navigation feature, SYNC Services

downloads your requested destination to

the navigation system. The navigation

system then calculates the route and

provides driving instructions. See

Navigation (page 371).

Disconnecting from SYNC Services

1. Press and hold the hang-up phone

button on the steering wheel.

2. Say "Good-bye" from the SYNC

Services main menu.

360

MyFord Touch®

Traffic, Directions and Information options

You can personalize your services feature to provide

quicker access to your most used or favorite information.

You can save address points such as, work or home. You

can also save favorite information like sports teams, such

as Detroit Lions, or a news category. To learn more, log

onto www.SYNCMyRide.com.

Personalizing

Press the voice button at any time (while you are

connected to SYNC TDI Services) to interrupt a voice

prompt or an audio clip (such as a sports report) and say

your voice command.

Push to interrupt

Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth-

enabled mobile phone number, not your VIN (Vehicle

Identification Number). You can pair and connect your

phone to any vehicle equipped with Traffic, Directions and

Information and continue enjoying your personalized

services.

Portable

SYNC Services Voice Commands

E142599

When a route has been

downloaded (non-navigation

systems), press the voice button

on the steering wheel controls. When

prompted, say any of the following

commands:

"SERVICES"

"Cancel route"

"Navigation voice off"

"Navigation voice on"

"Next turn"

"Route status"

"Route summary"

"Services"

"Update route"

"Help"

361

MyFord Touch®

SIRIUS Travel Link (If Equipped)

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in

loss of vehicle control, accident and

injury. Ford strongly recommends

that drivers use extreme caution when

using any device or feature that may take

their focus off the road. Your primary

responsibility is the safe operation of the

vehicle. We recommend against the use

of any handheld device while driving,

encourage the use of voice-operated

systems when possible and that you

become aware of applicable state and

local laws that may affect use of electronic

devices while driving.

Note: In order to use SIRIUS Travel Link,

your vehicle must be equipped with

navigation and your navigation SD card

must be in the SD card slot.

Note: A paid subscription is required to

access and use these features. Go to

www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more

information.

Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic# and

click on Coverage map and details for a

complete listing of all traffic areas covered

by SIRIUS Travel Link.

Note: Neither SIRIUS nor Ford is responsible

for any errors or inaccuracies in the SIRIUS

Travel Link services or its use in vehicles.

SIRIUS Travel Link (if activated) can help

you locate the best gas prices, find movie

listings, get current traffic alerts, access

the current weather map, get accurate ski

conditions and scores to current sports

games.

Press the Information button, select Sirius

Travel Link, then choose from any of the

following services:

You CanWhen You Select

Identify traffic incidents on your route, nearby your vehicle's

current location or near any of your favorite places (if

programmed).

Traffic On Route

Traffic Nearby

View fuel prices at stations close to your vehicle's location

or on an active navigation route.

Fuel Prices

View the nearby weather, current weather, or the 5-day

forecast for the chosen area. Select Map to see the

weather map which can show storms, radar information,

charts and winds. Select Area to select from a listing of

weather locations.

Weather

View scores and schedules from a variety of sports. You

can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier access.

The score automatically refreshes when a game is in

progress.

Sports Info.

View nearby movie theaters and their show times (if

available).

Movie Listings

View ski conditions for a specific area.Ski Conditions

362

MyFord Touch®

SIRIUS Travel Link Voice Commands

E142599

Press the voice button on the

steering wheel controls. When

prompted, say any of the

following commands:

"SIRIUS TRAVEL LINK"

"5-day weather forecast"

"Fuel prices"

"Movie listings"

"Sports headlines"

"Sports schedules"

"Sports scores"

"Traffic"

"Weather"

"Weather map"

"Help"

If you say "Sports headlines", "Sports schedules" or "Sports scores", you can then say

any of the commands in the following chart.

Sports-related Commands

"Baseball"

"College basketball"

"College football"

"Golf"

"MLS"

"My teams"

"NBA"

"NFL"

"NHL"

363

MyFord Touch®

Sports-related Commands

"WNBA"

"Help"

If you want to hear headlines, schedules or scores from a particular sport, or your

favorite team(s), say the sport (or team), then "headlines", "schedules" or "scores".

Additional Sports-related Voice Commands

"NBA scores""MLS headlines""Baseball headlines"

"NFL headlines""MLS schedule""Baseball schedule"

"NFL schedule""MLS scores""Baseball scores"

"NFL scores""Motor sports headlines""College basketball

schedule"

"NHL headlines""Motor sports order""College basketball scores"

"NHL schedule""Motor sports schedule""College football headlines"

"NHL scores""My team headlines""College football schedule"

"WNBA headlines""My teams schedule""College football scores"

"WNBA schedule""My teams scores""Golf headlines"

"WNBA scores""NBA headlines""Golf leaderboard"

"Help""NBA schedule""Golf schedule"

Notifications

Press the information button, then select

Notifications.

You can select a message and choose to:

• View the complete message

• Delete the message

• Delete All messages

This screen displays any system messages

(i.e. SD card fault).

Note: The system alerts you to any

messages by turning the information icon

yellow. When the messages are read or

deleted, the icon returns to white.

Calendar

Press the information button, then select

Calendar.

364

MyFord Touch®

911 Assist® (If Equipped)

WARNINGS

Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on

prior to a crash, the system will not

dial for help which could delay

response time, potentially increasing the

risk of serious injury or death after a crash.

Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an

emergency call if you can do it

yourself. Dial emergency services

immediately to avoid delayed response

time which could increase the risk of

serious injury or death after a crash. If you

do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds

of the crash, the system or phone may be

damaged or non-functional.

Always place your phone in a secure

location in the vehicle so it does not

become a projectile or get damaged

in a collision. Failure to do so may cause

serious injury to someone or damage the

phone which could prevent 911 Assist from

working properly.

Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be

set on prior to the incident.

Note: Before setting this feature on, ensure

that you read the 911 Assist privacy notice

later in this section for important

information.

Note: If 911 Assist is turned on or off by any

user, that setting applies for all paired

phones. If 911 Assist is turned off, either a

voice message plays or a display

message/icon comes on (or both) when the

vehicle is started after a previously paired

phone connects.

Note: Every phone operates differently.

While SYNC 911 Assist works with most

mobile phones, some may have trouble

using this feature.

If a crash deploys an airbag or activates

the fuel pump shut-off, your

SYNC-equipped vehicle may be able to

contact emergency services by dialing 911

through a paired and connected

Bluetooth-enabled phone. For more

information about 911 Assist, visit

www.SYNCMyRide.com or

www.syncmaroute.ca.

See Supplementary Restraints System

(page 35). Important information

regarding airbag deployment is in this

chapter.

See Roadside Emergencies (page 197).

Important information regarding the fuel

pump shut-off is in this chapter.

Setting 911 Assist On

Press the Information button, Apps, 911

Assist, then On.

You can also access 911 Assist by:

• Pressing the Menu icon, Settings,

Phone, then 911 Assist

• Pressing the Menu icon, Help, 911 Assist

To make sure that 911 Assist works

properly:

• SYNC must be powered and working

properly at the time of the incident and

throughout feature activation and use.

• The 911 Assist feature must be set on

prior to the incident.

• A Bluetooth-enabled and compatible

phone has to be paired and connected

to SYNC.

• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone

must have the ability to make and

maintain an outgoing call at the time

of the incident.

365

MyFord Touch®

• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone

must have adequate network coverage,

battery power and signal strength.

• The vehicle must have battery power

and be located in the U.S., Canada or

in a territory in which 911 is the

emergency number.

In the Event of a Crash

Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate

the fuel pump shut-off (which would

activate 911 Assist); however, if 911 Assist

is triggered, SYNC tries to contact

emergency services. If a connected phone

is damaged or loses connection to SYNC,

SYNC searches for, and tries to connect

to, any available previously paired phone

and tries to make the call to 911.

Before making the call:

• SYNC provides a short window of time

(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.

Failure to cancel the call results in

SYNC attempting to dial 911.

• SYNC says the following, or a similar

message: "SYNC will attempt to call

911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on

your screen or press and hold the

phone button on your steering wheel."

If the call is not cancelled and a successful

call is made, a pre-recorded message is

played for the 911 operator, then the

occupant(s) in the vehicle is able to talk

with the operator. Be prepared to provide

your name, phone number and location

immediately, because not all 911 systems

are capable of receiving this information

electronically.

911 Assist May Not Work If

• Your mobile phone or 911 Assist

hardware was damaged in a crash.

• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC

system has no power.

• The phone(s) paired and connected to

the system was thrown from the

vehicle.

911 Assist Privacy Notice

Once 911 Assist is set on, it may disclose to

emergency services that the vehicle has

been in a crash involving the deployment

of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump

shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911

Assist may also be capable of

electronically or verbally disclosing to 911

operators the vehicle location or other

details about the vehicle or crash to assist

911 operators to provide the most

appropriate emergency services. If you do

not want to disclose this information, do

not turn the feature on.

Vehicle Health Report (If Equipped)

WARNING

Always follow scheduled

maintenance instructions, regularly

inspect your vehicle, and seek repair

for any damage or problem you suspect.

Vehicle Health Report supplements, but

cannot replace, normal maintenance and

vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health Report

only monitors certain systems that are

electronically monitored by the vehicle and

will not monitor or report the status of any

other system, (i.e., brake lining wear).

Failure to perform scheduled maintenance

and regularly inspect your vehicle may

result in vehicle damage and serious injury.

Note: This feature is only available in the

United States.

366

MyFord Touch®

Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature

requires activation prior to use. Visit

www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There

is no fee or subscription associated with

Vehicle Health Report, but you must register

to use this feature

Note: This feature may not function

properly if you have enabled caller ID

blocking on your mobile phone. Before

running a report, review the Vehicle Health

Report Privacy Notice.

Note: In order to allow a break-in period for

your vehicle, you may not be able to create

a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle

odometer has reached 200 miles.

Note: Mobile phone and SMS charges may

apply when making a report.

your report preferences at

www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering

you can request a Vehicle Health Report

(inside your vehicle). Return to your

account at www.SYNCMyRide.com to view

your report. You can also choose for SYNC

to automatically remind you to run reports

at specific mileage intervals. Mobile phone

airtime usage may apply when reporting.

The system allows you to check your

vehicle's overall health in the form of

diagnostic report card. The Vehicle Health

Report contains valuable information such

as:

• Vehicle diagnostic information

• Scheduled maintenance

• Open recalls and Field Service Actions

• Unserviced items from vehicle

inspections by your authorized dealer

Making a Report

To run a report by touchscreen, touch the

Information button, Apps, then Vehicle

Health Report.

E142599

To run a report by voice

command, press the voice

button on the steering wheel

and, when prompted, say "Vehicle health

report".

Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice

When you run a Vehicle Health Report,

Ford Motor Company may collect your

mobile phone number (to process your

report request) and diagnostic information

about your vehicle. Certain versions or

updates to Vehicle Health Report may also

collect additional vehicle information. Ford

may use the vehicle information it collects

for any purpose. If you do not want to

disclose your mobile phone number or

vehicle information, do not run the feature

or set up your Vehicle Health Report profile

at www.SYNCMyRide.com. Refer to

www.SYNCMyRide.com (Vehicle Health

Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy

Statement) for more information.

CLIMATE

E142612

Press the lower right corner on

the touchscreen to access your

climate control features.

Depending on your vehicle line and option

package, your climate screen may look

different than what is shown here.

367

MyFord Touch®

E146988

Power: Touch to turn the system on and off. Outside air cannot enter the vehicle

when the system is off.

Passenger settings: Touch + or – to adjust the temperature.B

Fan speed: Touch + or - to adjust fan speed.C

DUAL: Touch to turn on the passenger side temperature control.D

Recirculated air: ouch to turn the recirculated air on or off which may reduce

the amount of time needed to cool down the interior and help reduce odors

from reaching the interior. Recirculated air also engages automatically when

MAX A/C or MAX defrost is selected and may be engaged manually in any

airflow mode except defrost. It may also turn off in all airflow modes except

MAX A/C and MAX defrost to reduce fog potential.

MAX A/C: Touch to cool the vehicle with recirculated air. Touch again for

normal A/C operation. MAX A/C distributes air through instrument panel vents

and may help reduce odors from entering the vehicle. MAX A/C is more

economical and efficient than normal A/C mode.

A/C: Touch to turn the air conditioning on or off. Use A/C with recirculated air

to improve cooling performance and efficiency. A/C engages automatically in

MAX A/C, defrost and footwell/defrost.

AUTO: Touch to engage automatic operation, then set the temperature using

the temperature control. The system automatically controls fan speed, airflow

distribution, A/C on or off and the use of fresh or recirculated air.

368

MyFord Touch®

Manual airflow distribution controls:Footwell/Defrost: Distributes air

through the windshield defroster vents, demister vents, footwell vents and rear

seat floor vents, and provides outside air to reduce window fogging. Panel:

Distributes air through the instrument panel vents. Panel/Floor: Distributes

air through the instrument panel vents, demister vents, floor vents and rear seat

floor vents. Floor: Distributes air through the demister vents, floor vents and

rear seat floor vents. Defrost: Touch to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice.

Touch again to return to the previous airflow selection. When on, defrost provides

outside air to reduce window fogging and distributes air through the windshield

defroster vents and demister vents. MAX Defrost: Distributes outside air

through the windshield air vents. Air conditioning is automatically selected. The

fan is set to the highest speed and the temperature to HI. When the air

distribution is set in this position, you are unable to select recirculated air or

manually adjust the fan speed and temperature control.

Driver settings: Touch + or – adjust the temperature.J

Climate Control Voice Commands

E142599

Press the voice button on the

steering wheel controls. When

prompted, say any of the

following commands:

Climate Control Commands

"Climate automatic"

"Climate my temperature"

"Climate off"

"Climate on"

"Climate temperature <15.5-29.5> degrees"

"Climate temperature <60-85> degrees"

"Help"

There are additional climate control

commands but in order to access them,

you have to say "Climate" first. When the

system is ready to listen, you may say any

of the following commands:

369

MyFord Touch®

"CLIMATE"

"Panel on""A/C off"

"Rear defrost on""A/C on"

"Rear defrost off""Automatic"

"Recirc off""Defrost off"

"Recirc on""Defrost on"

"Temperature"

"Dual off"

"Temperature <15.5-29.5> degrees""Floor on"

"Temperature <60-85> degrees""Fan decrease"

"Temperature decrease""Fan increase"

"Temperature high""MAX A/C off"

"Temperature increase""MAX A/C on"

"Temperature low""My temp"

"Windshield floor on""Off"

"Help""On"

"Panel floor on"

If you say "Temperature", you can then say any of the commands in the following chart.

"TEMPERATURE"

"<15.5-29.5> degrees"

"<60-85> degrees"

"High"

"Low"

"Help"

370

MyFord Touch®

NAVIGATION

Note: The navigation SD card must be in

the SD card slot to operate the navigation

system. If you need a replacement SD card,

see your authorized dealer.

Note: The SD card slot is spring-loaded. To

remove the SD card, just push the card in

and release it. Do not attempt to pull the

card out to remove it; this could cause

damage.

Your navigation system is comprised of

two main features, destination mode and

map mode.

To set a destination, press the green corner

of your touchscreen, then the Dest button

when it appears. Refer to Setting a

destination later in this chapter.

To view the navigation map and the

vehicle's current location, touch the green

bar in the upper right hand corner of the

touchscreen, or, press Dest, then Map. refer

to Map mode later in this chapter.

Setting a Destination

Press the green corner of your touchscreen,

then the Dest button when it appears.

Choose any of the following:

Destination

Street AddressMy Home

IntersectionFavorites

City CenterPrevious Destinations

MapPoint of Interest (POI)

Previous Starting PointEmergency

Latitude/LongitudeFreeway Entrance/Exit

1. Enter the necessary information into

the highlighted text fields (in any

order). For address destination entry,

the Go! button appears once all the

necessary information has been

entered. Pressing the Go! button makes

the address location to appear on the

map. If you choose Previous

Destination, the last 20 destinations

you have selected appear.

2. Select Set as Dest to make this your

destination. You can also choose to set

this as a waypoint (have the system

route to this point on the way to your

current destination) or save it as a

favorite. Any Avoid Areas selections are

also considered in route calculation.

3. Choose from up to three different types

of routes, then select Start Route.

• Fastest: Uses the fastest moving roads

possible.

• Shortest: Uses the shortest distance

possible.

• Eco (EcoRoute): Uses the most fuel

efficient route.

371

MyFord Touch®

You can cancel the route or have the

system demo the route for you. Select

Route Prefs to set route preferences like

avoiding freeways, toll roads, ferries and

car trains as well as to use or not use HOV

lanes. (HOV lanes are High Occupancy

Vehicle Lanes also known as carpool or

diamond lanes. These lanes are reserved

for people who ride in buses, vanpools or

carpools.)

Note: If Start Route button is not pressed

and the vehicle is driven on a recognized

road, the system defaults to the fastest

route option and begins guidance.

During route guidance, the "talking bubble"

icon that appears in the upper right

navigation corner (green bar) can be

pressed if the user wants the system to

repeat a route guidance instruction.

Instructions decrease with each press.

Point of Interest (POI) Categories

Your system offers a variety if POI (Points

of Interest) categories.

Main Categories

AutomotiveFood/Drink & Dining

ShoppingTravel & Transportation

Entertainment & ArtsFinancial

Recreation & SportsEmergency

GovernmentCommunity

Domestic ServicesHealth & Medicine

Subcategories

Restaurant

Golf

Parking

Home & Garden

Personal Care Services

Auto Dealership

Govt Office

Public Transit

Education

372

MyFord Touch®

To expand these listings, press the + in

front of the POI listing.

The system also allows you to sort the

POIs alphabetically, by distance or by

cityseekr listings (if available).

cityseekr

Note: cityseekr point of interest (POI)

information is limited to approximately 154

cities (132 in the U.S., 13 in Canada and 9 in

Mexico).

E142634

cityseekr, when available, is a service which

provides additional information about

certain POIs such as restaurants, hotels

and attractions.

When you have selected a POI, the

location and information appear, such as

address and phone number. If the POI is

listed with cityseekr, you also see

information such as a brief description,

check-in and check-out times, when the

restaurant is open, etc.

Press More Information for a longer review,

a list of services and facilities, the average

room or meal price as well as the website.

This screen displays the POI icon such as:

E143884

Hotel

E142636

Coffeehouse

E142637

Food & Drink

E142638

Nightlife

E142639

Attraction

E142640

This icon appears when your

selection exists in multiple

categories within the system.

When you are viewing additional

information for hotels, cityseekr will also

tell you if the hotel has certain services and

facilities using icons.

For restaurants, cityseekr can provide

information such as star rating, average

cost, review, handicap access, hours of

operation, and website address.

For hotels, cityseekr can provide

information such as star rating, price

category, review, check in/out times, hotel

service icons and website address.

Setting Your Navigation

Preferences

Select settings for the system to take into

account when planning your route.

E142607

Press the icon at the bottom of

the Home screen, then select

Settings, then Navigation.

373

MyFord Touch®

You CanWhen You Select

· Turn breadcrumbs on and off.Map Preferences

· Choose how you want to view the turn list (top-to-bottom

or bottom-to-top).

· Set the automatic parking POI notification. (When parking

POI notification is on, parking POI icons display on the map

when you get close to your destination. This may not be

very useful in dense areas, and may clutter the map if other

POIs are also set for display.)

· Avoid freeways, toll roads, ferries and car trains when

planning your route.

Route Preferences

· Use HOV lanes (if available), and have the system always

select the shortest distance, fastest time or most

economical route.

· Choose prompts to be either voice or tone only.Navigation Preferences

· Have the system automatically fill in the state and

province based on the information already entered into

the system.

Choose how you want the system to handle traffic prob-

lems along your route.

Traffic Preferences

· Automatic: Have the system reroute you to avoid traffic

incidents that develop and impact the current route (no

notification is provided).

· Manual: Have the system always provide a traffic alert

notification for traffic incidents along the planned route.

You have a choice to accept or ignore the notification

before the route deviation is made.

Choose areas which you want the system to avoid when

calculating a route for you. Press Add to select a category.

Avoid Areas

Once you make a selection, the system tries to avoid the

area(s) if possible for all routes. To delete a selection,

choose the listing on the screen; when the screen changes

to Avoid Areas Edit, press Delete at the bottom right of

the screen.

Map Mode

Press the green bar in the upper right area

of the touchscreen to view map mode. Map

mode shows advanced viewing comprised

of both 2D city maps as well as 3D

landmarks (when available).

2D city maps show detailed outlines of

buildings, visible land use and land

elements and detailed railway

infrastructure for the most essential cities

around the globe. These maps also contain

features such as town blocks, building

footprints, and railways.

374

MyFord Touch®

3D landmarks appear as clear, visible

objects which are typically recognizable

and have a certain tourist value. The 3D

landmarks appear in 3D map mode only.

E142641

Change the appearance of the map display

by repeatedly pressing the arrow button in

the upper left corner of the screen. It

toggles between three different map

modes: Heading up, North up, and 3D.

E142642

Heading up (2D map) always

shows the direction of forward

travel to be upward on the screen.

This view is available for map

scales up to 2.5 mi (4 km). For larger map

scales, this setting is remembered, but the

map is shown in North up only. If the scale

returns below this level, then Heading up

is restored.

E142643

North up (2D map) always shows

the northern direction to be

upward on the screen.

E142644

3D map mode provides an

elevated perspective of the map.

This viewing angle can be adjusted

and the map can be rotated 180

degrees by dragging your finger along the

shaded bar with arrows at the bottom of

the map.

E146188

Re-centering the map can be

done by pressing this icon

whenever you scroll the map

away from your vehicle's current location.

Map Icons

E142646

Vehicle mark shows current

location of the vehicle. It stays in

the center of the map display,

except when in scroll mode.

E142647

Scroll cursor allows you to scroll

the map; the icon is fixed in the

center of the screen. The map

position closest to the cursor is in

a window on the top center part of the

screen.

E142648

Address book entry default

icon(s) indicate the location on

the map of an address book entry.

This is the default symbol shown

after the entry has been stored to the

Address Book by any method other than

the map. A different icon can be selected

from the 22 icons available; each icon can

be used more than once.

E142649

Home indicates the location on

the map currently stored as the

home position. Only one entry from

the Address Book can be saved as

Home. This icon cannot be changed.

E142650

POI (Point Of Interest) icons

can be displayed on the map and

can be turned on or off. There are

about 56 subcategories of POIs

that can be selected to be displayed on

the map one at a time.

E142651

Starting point indicates the

starting point of a planned route.

E142652

Waypoint indicates the location

of a waypoint on the map. The

number inside the circle is different

for each waypoint and represents

the position of the waypoint in the route

list.

375

MyFord Touch®

E142653

Destination symbol indicates the

ending point of a planned route.

E142654

Next maneuver point indicates

the location of the next turn on the

planned route.

E142655

No GPS symbol indicates that

insufficient GPS satellite signals

are available for accurate map

positioning. This icon may be

intermittently displayed under normal

operation in an area with poor GPS access.

Quick-touch Buttons

When in map mode, touch anywhere on

the map display to access the following

options:

You CanWhen You Select

Select a scrolled location on the map as your destination.

(You may scroll the map by pressing your index finger on

the map display. When you reach the desired location,

simply let go and then press Set as Dest.)

Set as Dest

Set the current location as a waypoint.Set as Waypoint

Save the current location to your favorites.Save to Favorites

Select POI icons to be displayed on the map. Up to three

icons can be selected for display on the map at the same

time.

POI Icons On/Off

Cancel the active route.Cancel Route

Access these features when a route is active:View/Edit Route

· View route

· Edit destination/waypoints

· Edit turn list

· Detour

· Edit route preferences

· Edit traffic preferences

· Cancel route

376

MyFord Touch®

E142656

Rotate the map view by swiping your finger

across the shaded bar with the arrows.

Navteq is the digital map provider for the

navigation application. If you find map data

errors, you may report them directly to

Navteq by going to

http://mapreporter.navteq.com. Navteq

evaluates all reported map errors and

responds with the result of their

investigation by e-mail.

Navigation Map Updates

Annual navigation map updates are

available for purchase through your

dealership, by calling 1-800-NAVMAPS (in

Mexico, call 01-800-557-5539) or going

to www.navigation.com/ford. You need to

specify the make and model of your vehicle

to determine if there is an update available.

Navigation Voice Commands

E142599

When in navigation mode, press

the voice button on the steering

wheel controls. After the tone,

say any of the following commands:

Navigation System Voice Commands

"Navigation"

"Cancel next waypoint"

"Repeat instruction"

"Cancel route"

"Show 3D"

"Destination"

"Show heading up""Destination <nametag>"

"Show map""Destination <POI category>"

"Show north up""Destination favorites"

"Show route"

"Destination home"

"Show turn list"

"Destination intersection"

"Voice off""Destination nearest <POI category>"

"Voice on""Destination nearest POI"

"Voice volume decrease""Destination play nametags"

"Voice volume increase""Destination POI"

377

MyFord Touch®

Navigation System Voice Commands

"Where am I?""Destination POI category"

"Zoom in""Destination previous destination"

"Zoom out""Destination street address"

"Help""Detour"

These commands are only available when a navigation route is active.

If you say "Destination", you can then say any command in the following "Destination"

chart.

If you say "Navigation", you can then say any command in the following "Navigation"

chart.

"DESTINATION"

"<nametag>"

"<POI category>"

"Favorites"

"Home"

"Intersection"

"Nearest <POI category>"

"Nearest POI"

"Play nametags"

"POI category"

"Previous destination"

"Street address"

"Help"

378

MyFord Touch®

"NAVIGATION"

"Destination"

"Zoom city"

"Zoom country"

"Zoom minimum"

"Zoom maximum"

"Zoom province"

"Zoom state"

"Zoom street"

"Zoom to <distance>"

"Help"

If you say "Destination", you can then say any command in the "Destination" chart.

If your vehicle is equipped with the SD card

navigation feature, you have the ability to

enter in a street address using a feature

called One-Shot Destination Street

Address. When you say either "Navigation

destination street address" or "Destination

street address", the system asks you to say

the full address. The system displays an

example on-screen. You can then speak

the address naturally, such as "One two

three four Main Street, Anytown".

379

MyFord Touch®

END USER LICENSE

AGREEMENT

SYNC® End User License

Agreement (EULA)

• You have acquired a device ("DEVICE")

that includes software licensed by

FORD MOTOR COMPANY from an

affiliate of Microsoft Corporation

("MS") . Those installed software

products of MS origin, as well as

associated media, printed materials,

and "online" or electronic

documentation ("MS SOFTWARE")

are protected by international

intellectual property laws and treaties.

The MS SOFTWARE is licensed, not

• The MS SOFTWARE may interface with

and/or communicate with, or may be

later upgraded to interface with and/or

communicate with additional software

and/or systems provided by FORD

MOTOR COMPANY. The additional

software and systems of FORD

MOTOR COMPANY origin, as well as

associated media, printed materials,

and "online" or electronic

documentation ("FORD SOFTWARE")

are protected by international

intellectual property laws and treaties.

The FORD SOFTWARE is licensed, not

• The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD

SOFTWARE may interface with and/or

communicate with, or may be later

upgraded to interface with and/or

communicate with additional software

and/or systems provided by third party

software and service suppliers. The

additional software and services of

third party origin, as well as associated

media, printed materials, and "online"

or electronic documentation ("THIRD

PARTY SOFTWARE") are protected by

international intellectual property laws

and treaties. The THIRD PARTY

SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All

rights reserved.

• The MS SOFTWARE, FORD

SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY

SOFTWARE hereinafter collectively

and individually will be referred to as

"SOFTWARE".

IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END

USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")

DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY

THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE

SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT

LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL

CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO

THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY

PREVIOUS CONSENT).

GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This

EULA grants you the following license:

• You may use the SOFTWARE as

installed on the DEVICE and as

otherwise interfacing with systems

and/or services provide by or through

FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third

party software and service providers.

380

Appendices

Description of Other Rights and

Limitations

• Speech Recognition: If the

SOFTWARE includes speech

recognition component(s), you should

understand that speech recognition is

an inherently statistical process and

that recognition errors are inherent in

the process. Neither FORD MOTOR

COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be

liable for any damages arising out of

errors in the speech recognition

process.

• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,

Decompilation and Disassembly:

You may not reverse engineer,

decompile, or disassemble nor permit

others to reverse engineer, decompile

or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except

and only to the extent that such activity

is expressly permitted by applicable

law notwithstanding this limitation.

• Limitations on Distributing,

Copying, Modifying and Creating

Derivative Works: You may not

distribute, copy, make modifications

to or create derivative works based on

the SOFTWARE, except and only to the

extent that such activity is expressly

permitted by applicable law

notwithstanding this limitation.

• Single EULA: The end user

documentation for the DEVICE and

related systems and services may

contain multiple EULAs, such as

multiple translations and/or multiple

media versions (e.g., in the user

documentation and in the software).

Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you

are licensed to use only one (1) copy of

the SOFTWARE.

• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may

permanently transfer your rights under

this EULA only as part of a sale or

transfer of the DEVICE, provided you

retain no copies, you transfer all of the

SOFTWARE (including all component

parts, the media and printed materials,

any upgrades, and, if applicable, the

Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the

recipient agrees to the terms of this

EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,

any transfer must include all prior

versions of the SOFTWARE.

• Termination: Without prejudice to any

other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY

or MS may terminate this EULA if you

fail to comply with the terms and

conditions of this EULA.

• Security Updates/Digital Rights

Management: Content owners use

the WMDRM technology included in

your DEVICE to protect their

intellectual property, included

copyrighted content. Portions of the

SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use

WMDRM software to access

WMDRM-protected content. If the

WMDRM software fails to protect the

content, content owners may ask

Microsoft to revoke the SOFTWARE's

ability to use WMDRM to play or copy

protected content. This action does

not affect unprotected content. When

your DEVICE downloads licenses for

protected content, you agree that

Microsoft may include a revocation list

with the licenses. Content owners may

require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE

on your DEVICE to access their content.

If you decline an upgrade, you will not

be able to access content that requires

the upgrade.

381

Appendices

• Consent to Use of Data: You agree

that MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD

MOTOR COMPANY, third party

software and systems suppliers, their

affiliates and/or their designated agent

may collect and use technical

information gathered in any manner as

part of product support services related

to the SOFTWARE or related services.

MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD

MOTOR COMPANY, third party

software and services suppliers, their

affiliates and/or their designated agent

may use this information solely to

improve their products or to provide

customized services or technologies to

you. MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD

MOTOR COMPANY, third party

software and systems suppliers, their

affiliates and/or their designated agent

may disclose this information to others,

but not in a form that personally

identifies you.

• Internet-Based Services

Components: The SOFTWARE may

contain components that enable and

facilitate the use of certain

Internet-based services. You

acknowledge and agree that MS,

Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR

COMPANY, third party software and

service suppliers, their affiliates and/or

their designated agent may

automatically check the version of the

SOFTWARE and/or its components

that you are utilizing and may provide

upgrades or supplements to the

SOFTWARE that may be automatically

downloaded to your DEVICE.

• Additional Software/Services: The

SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR

COMPANY, third party software and

service suppliers, MS, Microsoft

Corporation, their affiliates and/or their

designated agent to provide or make

available to you SOFTWARE updates,

supplements, add-on components, or

Internet-based services components

of the SOFTWARE after the date you

obtain your initial copy of the

SOFTWARE ("Supplemental

Components").

If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party

software and services suppliers provide or

make available to you Supplemental

Components and no other EULA terms are

provided along with the Supplemental

Components, then the terms of this EULA

shall apply.

If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates

and/or their designated agent make

available Supplemental Components, and

no other EULA terms are provided, then

the terms of this EULA shall apply, except

that the MS, Microsoft Corporation or

affiliate entity providing the Supplemental

Component(s) shall be the licensor of the

Supplemental Component(s).

FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft

Corporation, their affiliates and/or their

designated agent reserve the right to

discontinue without liability any

Internet-based services provided to you or

made available to you through the use of

the SOFTWARE.

382

Appendices

• Links to Third Party Sites: The MS

SOFTWARE may provide you with the

ability to link to third party sites through

the use of the SOFTWARE. The third

party sites are not under the control of

MS, Microsoft Corporation, their

affiliates and/or their designated

agent. Neither MS nor Microsoft

Corporation nor their affiliates nor their

designated agent are responsible for

(i) the contents of any third party sites,

any links contained in third party sites,

or any changes or updates to third

party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any

other form of transmission received

from any third party sites. If the

SOFTWARE provides links to third

party sites, those links are provided to

you only as a convenience, and the

inclusion of any link does not imply an

endorsement of the third party site by

MS, Microsoft Corporation, their

affiliates and/or their designated

agent.

• Obligation to Drive Responsibly:

You recognize your obligation to drive

responsibly and keep attention on the

road. You will read and abide with the

DEVICE operating instructions

particularly as they pertain to safety

and assumes any risk associated with

the use of the DEVICE.

UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:

If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD

MOTOR COMPANY separate from the

DEVICE on media such as a ROM chip, CD

ROM disk(s) or via web download or other

means, and is labeled "For Upgrade

Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes

Only" you may install one (1) copy of such

SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE as a

replacement copy for the existing

SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with

this EULA, including any additional EULA

terms accompanying the upgrade

SOFTWARE.

INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:

All title and intellectual property rights in

and to the SOFTWARE (including but not

limited to any images, photographs,

animations, video, audio, music, text and

"applets" incorporated into the

SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed

materials, and any copies of the

SOFTWARE, are owned by MS, Microsoft

Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or

their affiliates or suppliers. The

SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may

not copy the printed materials

accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title

and intellectual property rights in and to

the content which may be accessed

through use of the SOFTWARE is the

property of the respective content owner

and may be protected by applicable

laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no

rights to use such content. All rights not

specifically granted under this EULA are

reserved by MS, Microsoft Corporation,

FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party

software and service providers, their

affiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-line

services which may be accessed through

the SOFTWARE may be governed by the

respective terms of use relating to such

services. If this SOFTWARE contains

documentation that is provided only in

electronic form, you may print one copy of

such electronic documentation.

EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You

acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is

subject to U.S. and European Union export

jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all

applicable international and national laws

that apply to the SOFTWARE, including

the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,

as well as end-user, end-use and

destination restrictions issued by U.S. and

other governments. For additional

information, see

http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.

383

Appendices

TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant

you any rights in connection with any

trademarks or service marks of FORD

MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft

Corporation, third party software or service

providers, their affiliates or suppliers.

PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support

for the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS,

its parent corporation Microsoft

Corporation, or their affiliates or

subsidiaries. For product support, please

refer to FORD MOTOR COMPANY

instructions provided in the documentation

for the DEVICE. Should you have any

questions concerning this EULA, or if you

desire to contact FORD MOTOR

COMPANY for any other reason, please

refer to the address provided in the

documentation for the DEVICE.

No Liability for Certain Damages:

EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD

MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THRID PARTY

SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,

MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND

THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO

LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,

CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL

DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN

CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR

PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS

LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY

REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL

PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS,

MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR

THEIR AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY

AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO

HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.

$250.00).

• THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER

THAN THOSE THAT MAY EXPRESSLY

BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW

VEHICLE.

End User Notice

Microsoft® Windows® Mobile for

Automotive Important Safety

Information

This system Ford SYNC™ contains

software that is licensed to Manufacturer

FORD MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate

of Microsoft Corporation pursuant to a

license agreement. Any removal,

reproduction, reverse engineering or other

unauthorized use of the software from this

system in violation of the license

agreement is strictly prohibited and may

subject you to legal action.

Read and follow instructions: Before

using your Windows Automotive- based

system, read and follow all instructions

and safety information provided in this end

user manual ("User's Guide"). Not

following precautions found in this User's

Guide can lead to an accident or other

serious consequences.

Keep User's Guide in vehicle: When kept

in the vehicle, the User's Guide will be a

ready reference for you and other users

unfamiliar with the Windows

Automotive-based system. Please make

certain that before using the system for

the first time, all persons have access to

the User's Guide and read its instructions

and safety information carefully.

384

Appendices

WARNING

Operating certain parts of this

system while driving can distract

your attention away from the road,

and possibly cause an accident or other

serious consequences. Do not change

system settings or enter data non-verbally

(using your hands) while driving. Stop the

vehicle in a safe and legal manner before

attempting these operations. This is

important since while setting up or

changing some functions you might be

required to distract your attention away

from the road and remove your hands from

the wheel.

General Operation

Voice Command Control: Functions

within the Windows Automotive-based

system may be accomplished using only

voice commands. Using voice commands

while driving allows you to operate the

system without removing your hands from

the wheel.

Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not

access any function requiring a prolonged

view of the screen while you are driving.

Pull over in a safe and legal manner before

attempting to access a function of the

system requiring prolonged attention. Even

occasional short scans to the screen may

be hazardous if your attention has been

diverted away from your driving task at a

critical time.

Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume

excessively. Keep the volume at a level

where you can still hear outside traffic and

emergency signals while driving. Driving

while unable to hear these sounds could

cause an accident.

Use of Speech Recognition Functions:

Speech recognition software is inherently

a statistical process which is subject to

errors. It is your responsibility to monitor

any speech recognition functions included

in the system and address any errors.

Navigation Features: Any navigation

features included in the system are

intended to provide turn by turn

instructions to get you to a desired

destination. Please make certain all

persons using this system carefully read

and follow instructions and safety

information fully.

Distraction Hazard: Any navigation

features may require manual (non-verbal)

setup. Attempting to perform such set-up

or insert data while driving can seriously

distract your attention and could cause an

accident or other serious consequences.

Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner

before attempting these operations.

Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any

navigation features are provided only as

an aid. Make your driving decisions based

on your observations of local conditions

and existing traffic regulations. Any such

feature is not a substitute for your personal

judgment. Any route suggestions made by

this system should never replace any local

traffic regulations or your personal

judgment or knowledge of safe driving

practices.

Route Safety: Do not follow the route

suggestions if doing so would result in an

unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be

placed in an unsafe situation, or if you

would be directed into an area that you

consider unsafe. The driver is ultimately

responsible for the safe operation of the

vehicle and therefore, must evaluate

whether it is safe to follow the suggested

directions.

385

Appendices

Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used

by this system may be inaccurate because

of changes in roads, traffic controls or

driving conditions. Always use good

judgment and common sense when

following the suggested routes.

Emergency Services: Do not rely on any

navigation features included in the system

to route you to emergency services. Ask

local authorities or an emergency services

operator for these locations. Not all

emergency services such as police, fire

stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to

be contained in the map database for such

navigation features.

TeleNav Software End User License

Agreement

Please read these terms and conditions

carefully before you use the TeleNav

Software. Your use of the TeleNav

Software indicates that you accept these

terms and conditions. If you do not accept

these terms and conditions, do not break

the seal of the package, launch, or

otherwise use the TeleNav Software.

TeleNav may revise this Agreement and

the privacy policy at any time, with or

without notice to you. You agree to visit

http://www.telenav.com from time to time

to review the then current version of this

Agreement and of the privacy policy.

1. Safe and Lawful Use

You acknowledge that devoting attention

to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk

of injury or death to you and others in

situations that otherwise require your

undivided attention, and you therefore

agree to comply with the following when

using the TeleNav Software: (a) observe

all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely;

(b) use your own personal judgment while

driving. If you feel that a route suggested

by the TeleNav Software instructs you to

perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,

places you in an unsafe situation, or directs

you into an area that you consider to be

unsafe, do not follow such instructions; (c)

do not input destinations, or otherwise

manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless

your vehicle is stationary and parked; (d)

do not use the TeleNav Software for any

illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,

hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any

manner inconsistent with this Agreement;

(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices

and cables necessary for use of the

TeleNav Software in a secure manner in

your vehicle so that they will not interfere

with your driving and will not prevent the

operation of any safety device (such as an

airbag).

You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav

harmless against all claims resulting from

any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate

use of the TeleNav Software in any moving

vehicle, including as a result of your failure

to comply with the directions above.

2. Account Information

You agree: (a) when registering the

TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with

true, accurate, current, and complete

information about yourself, and (b) to

inform TeleNav promptly of any changes

to such information, and to keep it true,

accurate, current and complete.

386

Appendices

3. Software License

Subject to your compliance with the terms

of this Agreement, TeleNav hereby grants

to you a personal, non-exclusive,

non-transferable license (except as

expressly permitted below in connection

with your permanent transfer of the

TeleNav Software license), without the

right to sublicense, to use the TeleNav

Software (in object code form only) in

order to access and use the TeleNav

Software. This license shall terminate upon

any termination or expiration of this

Agreement. You agree that you will use the

TeleNav Software only for your personal

business or leisure purposes, and not to

provide commercial navigation services to

other parties.

3.1 License Limitations

You agree not to do any of the following:

(a) reverse engineer, decompile,

disassemble, translate, modify, alter or

otherwise change the TeleNav Software

or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive

the source code, audio library or structure

of the TeleNav Software without the prior

express written consent of TeleNav; (c)

remove from the TeleNav Software, or

alter, any of TeleNav's or its suppliers'

trademarks, trade names, logos, patent or

markings; (d) distribute, sublicense or

otherwise transfer the TeleNav Software

to others, except as part of your permanent

transfer of the TeleNav Software; or (e)

use the TeleNav Software in any manner

that (i) infringes the intellectual property

or proprietary rights, rights of publicity or

privacy or other rights of any party, (ii)

violates any law, statute, ordinance or

regulation, including but not limited to laws

and regulations related to spamming,

privacy, consumer and child protection,

obscenity or defamation, or (iii) is harmful,

threatening, abusive, harassing, tortuous,

defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, or

otherwise objectionable; and (f) lease, rent

out, or otherwise permit unauthorized

access by third parties to the TeleNav

Software without advanced written

permission of TeleNav.

387

Appendices

4. Disclaimers

To the fullest extent permissible pursuant

to applicable law, in no event will TeleNav,

its licensors and suppliers, or agents or

employees of any of the foregoing, be

liable for any decision made or action

taken by you or anyone else in reliance on

the information provided by the TeleNav

Software. TeleNav also does not warrant

the accuracy of the map or other data used

for the TeleNav Software. Such data may

not always reflect reality due to, among

other things, road closures, construction,

weather, new roads and other changing

conditions. You are responsible for the

entire risk arising out of your use of the

TeleNav Software. For example but

without limitation, you agree not to rely on

the TeleNav Software for critical

navigation in areas where the well-being

or survival of you or others is dependent

on the accuracy of navigation, as the maps

or functionality of the TeleNav Software

are not intended to support such high risk

applications, especially in more remote

geographical areas.

TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND

EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN

CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV

SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL

WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM

COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR

TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES

OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND

NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY

RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV

SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not

permit the disclaimer of certain warranties,

so this limitation may not apply to you.

5. Limitation of Liability

TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER

APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO

CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR

ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE

LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY

FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,

CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR

EXEMPLARY DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN

EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE

THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA,

LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS,

LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS

INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING

OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO

USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF

TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES

THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY

REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,

WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES

REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT

OR 09/22/09 - 10 of 19 - Confidential

GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT, TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR

OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF

TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV'S

SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE

AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR

THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME

STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT

ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION

OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS

OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO

YOU.

388

Appendices

6. Arbitration and Governing Law

You agree that any dispute, claim or

controversy arising out of or relating to this

Agreement or the TeleNav Software shall

be settled by independent arbitration

involving a neutral arbitrator and

administered by the American Arbitration

Association in the County of Santa Clara,

California. The arbitrator shall apply the

Commercial Arbitration Rules of the

American Arbitration Association, and the

judgment upon the award rendered by the

arbitrator may be entered by any court

having jurisdiction. Note that there is no

judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding

and the decision of the arbitrator shall be

binding upon both parties. You expressly

agree to waive your right to a jury trial.

This Agreement and performance

hereunder will be governed by and

construed in accordance with the laws of

the State of California, without giving

effect to its conflict of laws provisions. To

the extent judicial action is necessary in

connection with the binding arbitration,

both TeleNav and you agree to submit to

the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of

the County of Santa Clara, California. The

United Nations Convention on Contracts

for the International Sale of Goods shall

not apply.

7. Assignment

You may not resell, assign, or transfer this

Agreement or any of your rights or

obligations, except in totality, in connection

with your permanent transfer of the

TeleNav Software, and expressly

conditioned upon the new user of the

TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound

by the terms and conditions of this

Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or

transfer that is not expressly permitted

under this paragraph will result in

immediate termination of this Agreement,

without liability to TeleNav, in which case

you and all other parties shall immediately

cease all use of the TeleNav Software.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, TeleNav

may assign this Agreement to any other

party at any time without notice, provided

the assignee remains bound by this

Agreement.

8. Miscellaneous

8.1

This Agreement constitutes the entire

agreement between TeleNav and you with

respect to the subject matter hereof.

8.2

Except for the limited licenses expressly

granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains

all right, title and interest in and to the

TeleNav Software, including without

limitation all related intellectual property

rights. No licenses or other rights which are

not expressly granted in this Agreement

are intended to, or shall be, granted or

conferred by implication, statute,

inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and

TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors

hereby reserve all of their respective rights

other than the licenses explicitly granted

in this Agreement

389

Appendices

8.3

By using the TeleNav Software, you

consent to receive from TeleNav all

communications, including notices,

agreements, legally required disclosures

or other information in connection with the

TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices")

electronically. TeleNav may provide such

Notices by posting them on TeleNav's

Website or by downloading such Notices

to your wireless device. If you desire to

withdraw your consent to receive Notices

electronically, you must discontinue your

use of the TeleNav Software.

8.4

TeleNav's or your failure to require

performance of any provision shall not

affect that party's right to require

performance at any time thereafter, nor

shall a waiver of any breach or default of

this Agreement constitute a waiver of any

subsequent breach or default or a waiver

of the provision itself.

8.5

If any provision herein is held

unenforceable, then such provision will be

modified to reflect the intention of the

parties, and the remaining provisions of

this Agreement will remain in full force and

effect

8.6

The headings in this Agreement are for

convenience of reference only, will not be

deemed to be a part of this Agreement,

and will not be referred to in connection

with the construction or interpretation of

this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,

the words "include" and "including" and

variations thereof, will not be deemed to

be terms of limitation, but rather will be

deemed to be followed by the words

"without limitation".

9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions

The TeleNav Software utilizes map and

other data licensed to TeleNav by third

party vendors for the benefit of you and

other end users. This Agreement includes

end-user terms applicable to these

companies (included at the end of this

Agreement), and thus your use of the

TeleNav Software is also subject to such

terms. You agree to comply with the

following additional terms and conditions,

which are applicable to TeleNav's third

party vendor licensors:

NavTeq End User License Agreement

END USER TERMS

The content provided ("Data") is licensed,

not sold. By opening this package, or

installing, copying, or otherwise using the

Data, you agree to be bound by the terms

of this agreement. If you do not agree to

the terms of this agreement, you are not

permitted to install, copy, use, resell or

transfer the Data. If you wish to reject the

terms of this agreement, and have not

installed, copied, or used the Data, you

must contact your retailer or NAVTEQ

North America, LLC ("NT") within thirty

(30) days of purchase for a refund of your

purchase price. To contact NT, please visit

www.navteq.com.

The Data is provided for your personal,

internal use only and may not be resold. It

is protected by copyright, and is subject to

the following terms (this "End User License

Agreement") and conditions which are

agreed to by you, on the one hand, and

NAVTEQ North America, LLC ("NT") and

its licensors (including their licensors and

suppliers) on the other hand.

The Data for areas of Canada includes

information taken with permission from

Canadian authorities, including: © Her

Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©

Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post

Corporation, GeoBase®.

390

Appendices

NT holds a nonexclusive license from the

United States Postal Service ® to publish

and sell ZIP+4 ® information.

Prices are not established, controlled or

approved by the United States Postal

Service ® The following trademarks and

registrations are owned by the USPS:

United States Postal Service, USPS, and

ZIP+4.

The Data for Mexico includes certain Data

from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y

Geografía.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS

License Limitations on Use: You agree

that your license to use this Data is limited

to and conditioned on use for solely

personal, noncommercial purposes, and

not for service bureau, timesharing or other

similar purposes. Except as otherwise set

forth herein, you agree not to otherwise

reproduce, copy, modify, decompile,

disassemble or reverse engineer any

portion of this Data, and may not transfer

or distribute it in any form, for any purpose,

except to the extent permitted by

mandatory laws.

License Limitations on Transfer: Your

limited license does not allow transfer or

resale of the Data, except on the condition

that you may transfer the Data and all

accompanying materials on a permanent

basis if: (a) you retain no copies of the

Data; (b) the recipient agrees to the terms

of this End User License Agreement; and

form as you purchased it by physically

transferring the original media (e.g., the

CD-ROM or DVD you purchased), all

original packaging, all Manuals and other

documentation. Specifically, Multi-disc

sets may only be transferred or sold as a

complete set as provided to you and not

as a subset thereof.

Additional License Limitations: Except

where you have been specifically licensed

to do so by NT in a separate written

agreement, and without limiting the

preceding paragraph, your license is

conditioned on use of the Data as

prescribed in this agreement, and you may

not (a) use this Data with any products,

systems, or applications installed or

otherwise connected to or in

communication with vehicles capable of

vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,

real time route guidance, fleet

management or similar applications; or (b)

with, or in communication with, including

without limitation, cellular phones,

palmtop and handheld computers, pagers,

and personal digital assistants or PDAs.

WARNING

This Data may contain inaccurate or

incomplete information due to the

passage of time, changing

circumstances, sources used and the

nature of collecting comprehensive

geographic Data, any of which may lead

to incorrect results.

No Warranty: This Data is provided to you

"as is" , and you agree to use it at your own

risk. NT and its licensors (and their

licensors and suppliers) make no

guarantees, representations or warranties

of any kind, express or implied, arising by

law or otherwise, including but not limited

to, content, quality, accuracy,

completeness, effectiveness, reliability,

fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness,

use or results to be obtained from this

Data, or that the Data or server will be

uninterrupted or error free.

391

Appendices

Disclaimer of Warranty: NT AND ITS

LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR

LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM

ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR

NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,

Territories and Countries do not allow

certain warranty exclusions, so to that

extent the above exclusion may not apply

to you.

Disclaimer of Liability: NT AND ITS

LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR

LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT

BE LIABLE TO YOU IN RESPECT OF ANY

CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,

IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE

CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR

ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR

DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH

MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR

POSSESSION OF THIS DATA; OR FOR ANY

LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS

OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,

INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING

OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO

USE THIS DATA, ANY DEFECT IN THIS

DATA, OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS

OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN

ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR

BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF NT OR

ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF

THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

Some States, Territories and Countries do

not allow certain liability exclusions or

damages limitations, so to that extent the

above may not apply to you.

Export Control: You agree not to export

from anywhere any part of the Data or any

direct product thereof except in

compliance with, and with all licenses and

approvals required under, applicable

export laws, rules and regulations,

including but not limited to the laws, rules

and regulations administered by the Office

of Foreign Assets Control of the U.S.

Department of Commerce and the Bureau

of Industry and Security of the U.S.

Department of Commerce. To the extent

that any such export laws, rules or

regulations prohibit NT from complying

with any of its obligations hereunder to

deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall

be excused and shall not constitute a

breach of this Agreement.

Entire Agreement: These terms and

conditions constitute the entire agreement

between NT (and its licensors, including

their licensors and suppliers) and you

pertaining to the subject matter hereof,

and supersedes in their entirety any and

all written or oral agreements previously

existing between us with respect to such

subject matter.

Severability: You and NT agree that if any

portion of this agreement is found illegal

or unenforceable, that portion shall be

severed and the remainder of the

Agreement shall be given full force and

effect.

Governing Law: The above terms and

conditions shall be governed by the laws

of the State of Illinois, without giving effect

to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii)

the United Nations Convention for

Contracts for the International Sale of

Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You

agree to submit to the personal jurisdiction

of the State of Illinois for any and all

disputes, claims and actions arising from

or in connection with the Data provided to

you hereunder.

392

Appendices

Government End Users: If the Data is

being acquired by or on behalf of the

United States government or any other

entity seeking or applying rights similar to

those customarily claimed by the United

States government, this Data is a

"commercial term" as that term is defined

at 48 C.F.R. ("FAR") 2.101, is licensed in

accordance with this End User License

Agreement, and each copy of Data

delivered or otherwise furnished shall be

marked and embedded as appropriate

with the following "Notice of Use", and be

treated in accordance with such Notice:

NOTICE OF USE

CONTRACTOR

(MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER)

NAME:

NAVTEQ

CONTRACTOR

(MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER)

ADDRESS:

425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, IL

60606.

This Data is a commercial item as defined

in FAR 2.101

and is subject to the End User License

Agreement under

which this Data was provided.

If the Contracting Officer, federal

government agency, or any federal official

refuses to use the legend provided herein,

the Contracting Officer, federal

government agency, or any federal official

must notify NAVTEQ prior to seeking

additional or alternative rights in the Data.

Wi-Fi hotspot data provided by JiWire, ©

2013 JiWire.

Gracenote® Copyright

CD and music-related data from

Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright

service may practice one or more of the

following U.S. Patents #5,987,525,

#6,061,680, #6,154,773, #6,161,132,

#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6.240,459,

#6,330,593 and other patents issued or

pending. Some services supplied under

license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.

Patent: #6,304,523.

Gracenote and CDDB are registered

trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote

logo and logotype, and the "Powered by

Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of

Gracenote.

Gracenote® End User License Agreement

(EULA)

This device contains software from

Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street

Emeryville, California 94608

("Gracenote").

The software from Gracenote (the

"Gracenote Software") enables this device

to do disc and music file identification and

obtain music-related information, including

name, artist, track, and title information

("Gracenote Data") from online servers

("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform

other functions. You may use Gracenote

Data only by means of the intended End

User functions of this device.

This device may contain content belonging

to Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the

restrictions set forth herein with respect to

Gracenote Data shall also apply to such

content and such content providers shall

be entitled to all of the benefits and

protections set forth herein that are

available to Gracenote.

393

Appendices

You agree that you will use the content

from Gracenote ("Gracenote Content") ,

Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,

and Gracenote Servers for your own

personal, non-commercial use only. You

agree not to assign, copy, transfer or

transmit the Gracenote Content,

Gracenote Software or any Gracenote

Data (except in a Tag associated with a

music file) to any third party. YOU AGREE

NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE

CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE

GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR

GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS

EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusive licenses

to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote

Data, the Gracenote Software, and

Gracenote Servers will terminate if you

violate these restrictions. If your licenses

terminate, you agree to cease any and all

use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote

Data, the Gracenote Software, and

Gracenote Servers. Gracenote,

respectively, reserve all rights in Gracenote

Data, the Gracenote Software, and the

Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content,

including all ownership rights. Under no

circumstances will either Gracenote

become liable for any payment to you for

any information that you provide, including

any copyrighted material or music file

information. You agree that Gracenote

may enforce its respective rights,

collectively or separately, under this

agreement against you, directly in each

company's own name.

Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track

queries for statistical purposes. The

purpose of a randomly assigned numeric

identifier is to allow Gracenote to count

queries without knowing anything about

who you are. For more information, see the

web page at www.gracenote.com for the

Gracenote Privacy Policy.

THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM

OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE

GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED

TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE

MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR

WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY

GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE

GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE

CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY

AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT

TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT

FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE

SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF

GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA

CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT

GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO

WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER

GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE

GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR

GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE

OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE

GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR

GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE

UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT

OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY

ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES

THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO

PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE

TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES

AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL

WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND

NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER

GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS

THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE

OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY

GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL

GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY

CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL

DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS

OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON

WHATSOEVER.

394

Appendices

FCC ID: KMHSYNCG2

IC: 1422A-SYNCG2

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry

Canada. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

WARNING

Changes or modifications not

expressively approved by the party

responsible for compliance could

void the user's authority to operate the

equipment. The term "IC" before the radio

certification number only signifies that

Industry Canada technical specifications

were met.

The antenna used for this transmitter must

not be co-located or operating in

conjunction with any other antenna or

transmitter.

395

Appendices

General Maintenance Information

Why Maintain Your Vehicle?

Carefully following the maintenance

schedule helps protect against major repair

expenses resulting from neglect or

inadequate maintenance and may also

help to increase the value of your vehicle

when you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts

for completed maintenance with your

vehicle.

Regular maintenance intervals for your

vehicle have been established based upon

rigorous testing. It is important that you

have your vehicle serviced at the proper

times. These intervals serve two purposes;

one is to maintain the reliability of your

vehicle and the second is keep your cost

of owning the vehicle down.

It is your responsibility to see that all

scheduled maintenance is performed and

that the materials used meet the

specifications identified in this Owner's

Manual. See Capacities and

Specifications (page 267).

Failure to perform scheduled maintenance

invalidates warranty coverage on parts

affected by the lack of maintenance.

Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your

Dealership?

Factory-Trained Technicians

Service technicians participate in extensive

factory-sponsored certification training to

help them become experts on the

operation of your vehicle. Ask your

dealership about the training and

certification their technicians, have

received.

Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built

with multiple complex performance

systems. Every manufacturer develops

these systems using different

specifications and performance features.

That is why it is important to rely upon your

dealership to properly diagnose and repair

your vehicle.

Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®

Replacement Parts

Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and

Ford-authorized branded remanufactured

replacement parts. These parts meet or

exceed our specifications. Parts installed

at your dealership carry a nationwide 12

month or 12000 mile (20000 kilometer)

parts and labor limited warranty.

If you do not use Ford authorized parts they

may not meet our specifications and

depending on the part it could affect

emissions compliance.

Convenience

Many dealerships have extended evening

and Saturday hours to make your service

visit more convenient and they offer one

stop shopping. They can perform any

services that are required on your vehicle,

from general maintenance to collision

repairs.

Note: Not all dealers have extended hours

or body shops. Please contact your dealer

for details.

Protecting Your Investment

Maintenance is an investment that pays

dividends in the form of improved

reliability, durability and resale value. To

ensure the proper performance of your

vehicle and its emission control systems,

it is imperative that scheduled

maintenance be completed at the

designated intervals.

396

Scheduled Maintenance

Your vehicle is equipped with the

Intelligent Oil Life Monitor® system which

displays a message in the message center

at the proper oil change service interval.

This interval may be up to one year or

10000 miles (16000 kilometers).

When ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL

CHANGE REQUIRED appears in the

message center display, it is time for an oil

change. The oil change must be done

within two weeks or 500 miles (800

kilometers) of the ENGINE OIL CHANGE

DUE or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message

appearing. The Intelligent Oil Life Monitor®

must be reset after each oil change. See

Engine Oil Check (page 221).

If your message center is prematurely reset

or becomes inoperative, you should

perform the oil change interval at six

months or 5000 miles (8000 km) from

your last oil change. Never exceed one year

or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers)

between oil change intervals.

Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built

with multiple complex performance

systems. Every manufacturer develops

these systems using different

specifications and performance features.

That is why it is important to rely upon your

dealership to properly diagnose and repair

your vehicle.

We recommend maintenance intervals for

various parts and component systems

based upon engineering testing. We rely

upon this testing to determine the most

appropriate mileage for replacement of

oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at

the lowest overall cost to you and

recommend against maintenance

schedules that deviate from the scheduled

maintenance information.

We strongly recommend the using only

genuine Ford, Motorcraft or

Ford-authorized re-manufactured

replacement for parts because they are

engineered for your vehicle.

Additives and Chemicals

Recommended additives and chemicals

are listed in this Owner's Manual and in the

Workshop Manual. Additional chemicals

or additives not approved by Ford Motor

Company are not recommended as part

of normal maintenance. Please consult

your Warranty Manual for complete

warranty information.

Oils, Fluids and Flushing

In many cases, fluid discoloration is a

normal operating characteristic and, by

itself, does not necessarily indicate a

concern or that the fluid needs to be

changed. However, discolored fluids that

also show signs of overheating or foreign

material contamination should be

inspected immediately by a qualified

expert such as the factory-trained

technicians at your dealership.

Your vehicle’s oils and fluids should be

changed at the specified intervals or in

conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a

viable way to change fluid for many vehicle

sub-systems during scheduled

maintenance. It is critical that systems are

flushed only with new fluid that is the same

as that required to fill and operate the

system or using a Ford-approved flushing

chemical.

Owner Checks and Services

Certain basic maintenance checks and

inspections should be performed every

month or at six months intervals.

Check Every Month

• Engine oil level.

• Function of all interior and exterior

lights.

• Tires for wear and proper pressure,

including the spare tire.

• Windshield washer fluid level.

397

Scheduled Maintenance

Check Every Six Months

• Battery connections. Clean if

necessary.

• Body and door drain holes for

obstructions. Clean if necessary.

• Cooling system fluid level and coolant

strength.

• Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate

if necessary.

• Hinges, latches and outside locks for

proper operation. Lubricate if

necessary.

• Parking brake for proper operation.

• Safety belts and seat latches for wear

and function.

• Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS,

airbag and safety belt) for operation.

• Washer spray and wiper operation.

Clean or replace blades as necessary.

Multi-Point Inspection

In order to keep your vehicle running right,

it is important to have the systems on your

vehicle checked regularly. This can help

identify potential issues and prevent major

problems. We recommend the following

multi-point inspection be performed at

every scheduled maintenance interval to

help ensure your vehicle keeps running

great.

Multi-Point Inspection

Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)

Horn operationBattery performance

Radiator, cooler, heater and A/C hosesEngine air filter

Suspension components for leaks or

damage

Exhaust system

Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation

Tires (including spare) for wear and proper

pressure

Fluid levels

; fill if necessary

Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks

Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots

Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer

398

Scheduled Maintenance

Be sure to ask your dealership service

advisor or technician about the multi-point

vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive

way to perform a thorough inspection of

your vehicle. It is your checklist that gives

you immediate feedback on the overall

condition of your vehicle. You know what

has been checked, what is okay as well as

those things that may require future or

immediate attention. The multi-point

vehicle inspection is one more way to keep

your vehicle running great.

Normal Scheduled Maintenance

Intelligent Oil Life Monitor®

Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent

Oil Life Monitor that determines when the

engine oil should be changed based on

how your vehicle is used. By using several

important factors in its calculations, the

monitor helps reduce the cost of owning

your vehicle and reduce environmental

waste at the same time.

This means you won’t have to remember

to change the oil on a mileage-based

schedule; the vehicle lets you know when

an oil change is due by displaying ENGINE

OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE

REQUIRED in the message center.

The following table is intended to provide

examples of vehicle use and its impact on

engine oil change intervals. It is provided

as a guideline only. Actual engine oil

change intervals depends on several

factors and generally decreases with

severity of use.

When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message

Vehicle use and exampleMiles (kilometers)

Normal

7500-10000

(12000-16000)

Normal commuting with highway driving

No or moderate load or towing

Flat to moderately hilly roads

No extended idling

Severe

5000-7499

(8000-11999)

Moderate to heavy load or towing

Mountainous or off-road conditions

Extended idling

Extended hot or cold operation

Extreme

3000-4999

(4000-7999)

Maximum load or towing

Extreme hot or cold operation

399

Scheduled Maintenance

At every oil change interval as indicated by the message center

Change engine oil and filter.

Rotate the tires.

Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).

Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for requirements.

Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and parking brake.

Inspect the cabin air filter.

Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.

Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.

Inspect the rear axle and U-joints. Lubricate any areas with grease fittings (4WD

vehicles).

Inspect the half-shaft boots.

Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and U-

joints. Lubricate any areas with grease fittings (4WD vehicles).

Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.

Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or

drag.

Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 km) between service intervals.

Reset the Intelligent Oil Life Monitor® after each engine oil and filter change. See Engine

Oil Check (page 221).

Additional Maintenance Items

Replace cabin air filter.Every 20000 miles (32000

km)

Replace engine air filter.Every 30000 miles (48000

km)

Change engine coolant.

At 100000 miles (160000

km)

Replace spark plugs.Every 100000 miles

(160000 km)

400

Scheduled Maintenance

Additional Maintenance Items

Inspect accessory drive belt(s).

Change automatic transmission fluid.

Every 150000 miles

(240000 km)

Replace accessory drive belt(s).

Additional maintenance items can be performed within 3000 miles (4800 km) of the

last engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.

Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 km), then every three years

or 50000 miles (80000 km).

Perform a follow-up inspection at 120000 miles (192000 km).

If not replaced within the last 100000 miles (160000 km).

Maintenance Schedule Log

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

401

Scheduled Maintenance

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

402

Scheduled Maintenance

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

403

Scheduled Maintenance

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

404

Scheduled Maintenance

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

Special Operating Conditions

If you operate your vehicle primarily in any

of the following conditions, you need to

perform additional maintenance as

indicated. If you operate your vehicle

occasionally under any of these

conditions, it is not necessary to perform

the additional maintenance. For specific

recommendations, see your dealership

service advisor or technician.

405

Scheduled Maintenance

Perform the services shown in the

following tables when specified or within

3000 miles (4800 km) of the OIL CHANGE

REQUIRED message appearing in the

message center.

• Example 1: The OIL CHANGE

REQUIRED message comes on at 28751

miles (46270 km); perform the 30000

mile (48000 km) automatic

transmission fluid replacement.

• Example 2: The OIL CHANGE

REQUIRED message has not come on

but the odometer reads 30000 miles

(48000 km); perform the engine air

filter replacement. (i.e., Intelligent Oil

Life Monitor® was reset at 25000

miles [40000 km].)

Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier

Change engine oil and filter as indicated by message center

and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled

Maintenance chart.

As required

· Inspect and lubricate U-joints.Inspect frequently, service

as required · See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.

Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000

km)

Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use

(i.e. Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or Livery)

Change engine oil and filter as indicated by message center

and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled

Maintenance chart.

As required

· Replace cabin air filter (if equipped).Inspect frequently, service

as required · Replace engine air filter.

Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000

km)

Replace spark plugs.Every 60000 miles (96000

km)

Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads

· Replace cabin air filter (if equipped).Inspect frequently, service

as required · Replace engine air filter.

· Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal

noise, wear, looseness or drag.

Every 5000 miles (8000

km)

406

Scheduled Maintenance

Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads

· Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread

depth.

· Change engine oil and filter.Every 5000 miles (8000

km) or six months · Perform multi-point inspection.

Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000

km)

Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor® after each engine oil and filter change. See Engine

Oil Check (page 221).

Exclusive Use of E85 (Flex Fuel Vehicles only)

If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular

unleaded fuel.

Every oil change

Special Operating Condition Log

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

407

Scheduled Maintenance

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

408

Scheduled Maintenance

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

Exceptions

There are several exceptions to the Normal

Schedule:

409

Scheduled Maintenance

Normal vehicle axle maintenance: Rear

axles and power take-off (PTO) units with

synthetic fluid and light-duty trucks

equipped with Ford-design axles are

lubricated for life; do not check or change

fluid unless a leak is suspected, service is

required or the assembly has been

submerged in water. During long periods

of trailer towing with outside temperatures

above 70°F (21°C) and at wide-open

throttle for long periods above 45 mph (72

km/h), non-synthetic rear axle fluids

should be changed every 3000 miles

(4800 km) or three months, whichever

comes first. This interval can be waived if

the axle is filled with 75W140 synthetic

gear fluid meeting Ford specification

WSL-M2C192-A, part number

F1TZ-19580-B, or equivalent. Add friction

modifier XL-3 (EST-M2C118-A) or

equivalent for complete refill of

Traction-Lok rear axles. See Technical

Specifications (page 271).

Police/Taxi/Livery vehicle axle

maintenance: Change rear axle fluid every

100000 miles (160000 km). Rear axle

fluid change may be waived if the axle was

filled with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid

meeting Ford specification

WSL-M2C192-A, part number

F1TZ-19580-B, or equivalent. Add four

ounces (118 mL) of additive friction

modifier XL-3 (EST-M2C118-A) or

equivalent for complete refill of

Traction-Lok rear axles. The axle fluid

should be changed anytime the axle has

been submerged in water.

California fuel filter replacement: If the

vehicle is registered in California, the

California Air Resources Board has

determined that the failure to perform this

maintenance item will not nullify the

emission warranty or limit recall liability

prior to the completion of the vehicle's

useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,

urges you to have all recommended

maintenance services performed at the

specified intervals and to record all vehicle

service.

Hot climate oil change intervals:

Vehicles operating in the Middle East,

North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or

locations with similar climates using an

American Petroleum Institute (API)

Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification

mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal

oil change interval is 5000 miles (8000

km). If the available API "SM" or "SN" oils

are not available, then the oil change

service interval is 3000 mile (4800 km).

Engine air filter and cabin air filter

replacement: Engine air filter and cabin

air filter life is dependent on exposure to

dusty and dirty conditions. Vehicles

operated in these conditions will require

frequent inspection and replacement of

the engine air filter and cabin air filter.

Engine Coolant Change Record

Initial change: Six years or 100000 miles

(160000 km) (whichever comes first).

After initial change: Every three years or

50000 miles (80000 km).

410

Scheduled Maintenance

Engine Coolant Change Log

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

411

Scheduled Maintenance

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

412

Scheduled Maintenance

4WD

See: Four-Wheel Drive.......................................151

A/C

See: Climate Control..........................................113

About This Manual...........................................7

Protecting the Environment................................7

ABS

See: Brakes...........................................................156

ABS driving hints

See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock

Brakes................................................................156

Accessories.....................................................274

Exterior style.........................................................274

Interior style..........................................................274

Lifestyle..................................................................274

Peace of mind......................................................274

Accessories

See: Replacement Parts

Recommendation.............................................11

Active Park Assist.........................................163

Automatic Steering into Parking

Space.................................................................164

Deactivating the Park Assist Feature..........165

Troubleshooting the System.........................166

Using Active Park Assist...................................163

Adjusting the Headlamps.........................229

Horizontal Aim Adjustment............................231

Vertical Aim Adjustment.................................229

Adjusting the Steering Wheel...................64

Airbag Disposal...............................................43

Air Conditioning

See: Climate Control..........................................113

Alarm

See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................63

Ambient Lighting............................................73

Anti-Theft Alarm............................................63

Arming the Alarm.................................................63

Disarming the Alarm...........................................63

Appendices...................................................380

Audible Warnings and Indicators.............83

Headlamps On Warning Chime......................83

Key in Ignition Warning Chime........................83

Parking Brake On Warning Chime..................83

Audio Control..................................................64

Type 1........................................................................64

Type 2.......................................................................65

Type 3.......................................................................65

Audio System...................................................97

General Information............................................97

Audio unit - Vehicles With:

AM/FM/CD/Satellite

Radio/SYNC................................................102

Audio unit - Vehicles With:

AM/FM/CD/SYNC....................................100

Audio unit - Vehicles With:

AM/FM/CD....................................................98

Audio unit - Vehicles With: Premium

AM/FM/CD..................................................105

Audio unit - Vehicles With: Sony

AM/FM/CD..................................................106

Menu Structure....................................................107

Autolamps........................................................70

Automatic Climate Control........................114

Mono Mode............................................................115

Switching Mono Mode Back On.....................115

Switching Mono Mode Off...............................115

Temperature Control..........................................115

Automatic Transmission............................147

Brake-Shift Interlock.........................................148

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or

Snow..................................................................149

SelectShift Automatic®

Transmission...................................................148

Understanding the Positions of Your

Automatic Transmission.............................147

Automatic Transmission Fluid

Check.............................................................225

Autowipers........................................................67

Auxiliary Input Jack......................................109

Auxiliary Power Points................................132

110 Volt AC Power Point....................................132

Locations................................................................132

Blind Spot Monitor.........................................171

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS®)

with Cross Traffic Alert..................................171

Booster Seats....................................................17

Types of Booster Seats.......................................18

Brake Fluid Check........................................225

413

Index

Brakes...............................................................156

General Information..........................................156

Breaking-In.....................................................194

Bulb Specification Chart...........................235

Cabin Air Filter................................................119

California Proposition 65.............................10

Capacities and Specifications................267

Technical Specifications...................................271

Car Wash

See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................236

Center Console..............................................134

Changing a Bulb............................................231

Lamp Assembly Condensation.....................231

Replacing Fog, Park and Turn Signal

Bulbs..................................................................233

Replacing Headlamp Bulbs...........................232

Replacing HID Headlamp Bulbs...................232

Replacing High-Mount Brake Lamp

Bulb....................................................................234

Replacing License Plate Lamp Bulb...........234

Replacing Reverse Lamp Assembly...........234

Replacing Side Marker Bulbs.........................233

Replacing Tail, Brake and Turn Signal

Bulbs..................................................................234

Changing a Fuse...........................................207

Fuses.......................................................................207

Changing a Road Wheel...........................260

Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly

Information.....................................................260

Tire Change Procedure....................................262

Changing the Engine Air Filter.................228

..................................................................................229

1.6L and 2.0L EcoBoost® Engines...............228

2.5L Engine...........................................................229

Changing the Vehicle Battery.................226

Changing the Wiper Blades......................227

Checking MyKey System Status..............50

Checking the Wiper Blades......................227

Child Restraint and Safety Belt

Maintenance.................................................33

Child Safety.......................................................14

General Information.............................................14

Child Safety Locks..........................................24

Child Seat Positioning...................................16

Child Seats.........................................................16

Cleaning Leather Seats.............................239

Cleaning Products.......................................236

Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................240

Cleaning the Engine....................................237

Cleaning the Exterior..................................236

Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts......................237

Exterior Chrome.................................................236

Underbody............................................................237

Cleaning the Instrument Panel and

Instrument Cluster Lens.........................239

Cleaning the Interior...................................238

Cleaning the Windows and Wiper

Blades...........................................................238

Clearing All MyKeys.......................................50

Climate.............................................................367

Climate Control Voice Commands.............369

Climate Control..............................................113

Coolant Check

See: Engine Coolant Check............................222

Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator........42

Creating a MyKey...........................................49

Programming/Changing Optional

Settings...............................................................50

Cruise Control.................................................66

Principle of Operation.......................................170

Cruise Control

See: Using Cruise Control................................170

Customer Assistance..................................201

Data Recording..................................................9

Event Data Recording...........................................9

Service Data Recording........................................9

Daytime Running Lamps..............................71

Direction Indicators........................................72

Driver and Passenger Airbags...................36

Children and Airbags...........................................37

Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating

Adjustment........................................................36

Driving Aids.......................................................171

Driving Hints...................................................194

Driving Through Water...............................194

DRL

See: Daytime Running Lamps..........................71

414

Index

Eco Mode.........................................................175

Resetting Eco Mode...........................................175

Type 1.......................................................................175

Type 2 and 3..........................................................175

Economical Driving......................................194

Emission Control System..........................143

On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)...................144

Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance

(I/M) Testing...................................................145

End User License Agreement.................380

SYNC® End User License Agreement

(EULA).............................................................380

Engine Block Heater....................................138

Using the Engine Block Heater......................139

Engine Coolant Check................................222

Adding Engine Coolant....................................222

Checking the Engine Coolant........................222

Recycled Engine Coolant................................223

Severe Climates.................................................224

What you Should Know About Fail-Safe

Cooling..............................................................224

Engine Immobilizer

See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................62

Engine Oil Check...........................................221

Adding Engine Oil................................................221

Resetting the Oil Life Monitoring

System..............................................................222

Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L

EcoBoost®...................................................221

Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.5L/2.0L

EcoBoost®...................................................221

Engine Specifications.................................267

Drivebelt Routing................................................267

Entertainment...............................................332

A/V Inputs.............................................................351

AM/FM Radio......................................................333

Bluetooth Audio.................................................350

Browsing Device Content................................332

CD............................................................................344

SD Card Slot and USB Port...........................346

SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If

Activated)........................................................339

Supported Media Players, Formats and

Metadata Information................................349

Essential Towing Checks..........................190

Before Towing a Trailer....................................190

Hitches...................................................................190

Safety Chains......................................................190

Trailer Brakes.......................................................190

Trailer Lamps.......................................................190

When Towing a Trailer.......................................191

Event Data Recording

See: Data Recording..............................................9

Export Unique Options..................................13

Exterior Mirrors.................................................75

Blind Spot Monitor...............................................76

Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors................................75

Heated Exterior Mirrors.......................................75

Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors...........................76

Memory Mirrors.....................................................75

Power Exterior Mirrors.........................................75

Fastening the Safety Belts..........................27

How to Extract Safety Belts in the Rear

Outboard Positions........................................29

Restraint of Pregnant Women.........................27

Safety Belt Extension Assembly....................29

Safety Belt Locking Modes...............................28

Floor Mats.......................................................195

Fog Lamps - Front

See: Front Fog Lamps.........................................72

Ford Credit..........................................................11

(U.S. Only).................................................................11

Ford Extended Service Plan (ESP).......276

SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY).............277

SERVICE PLANS (U.S. only)..........................276

Four-Wheel Drive...........................................151

Front Fog Lamps.............................................72

Front Passenger Sensing System.............37

Fuel and Refueling.......................................140

Fuel Consumption........................................145

Calculating Fuel Economy..............................146

Filling the Tank....................................................146

Fuel Cut-Off Switch....................................198

Fuel Filter........................................................225

Fuel Quality......................................................141

Choosing the Right Fuel....................................141

Octane Recommendations.............................141

Fuses................................................................207

415

Index

Fuse Specification Chart..........................208

Luggage Compartment Fuse Panel............214

Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel..........211

Power Distribution Box...................................208

Pre-Fuse Box.......................................................208

Gauges................................................................79

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge............80

Fuel Gauge.............................................................80

Information Display.............................................79

Gearbox

See: Transmission...............................................147

General Information on Radio

Frequencies...................................................44

Intelligent Access.................................................44

Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and

Canada.........................................................204

Getting the Services You Need...............201

Away From Home...............................................201

Hazard Warning Flashers..........................198

Headlamp Exit Delay......................................71

Head Restraints..............................................121

Adjusting the Head Restraint.........................122

Heated Seats..................................................127

Heated Windows and Mirrors...................119

Heated Exterior Mirror........................................119

Heated Rear Window.........................................119

Heating

See: Climate Control..........................................113

Hill Start Assist..............................................149

Using Hill Start Assist.......................................149

Hints on Controlling the Interior

Climate...........................................................115

Cooling the Interior Quickly..............................117

General Hints.........................................................115

Heating the Interior Quickly.............................116

Maximum Cooling Performance in

Instrument Panel or Instrument Panel

and Footwell Positions.................................119

Recommended Settings for Cooling............117

Recommended Settings for Heating............117

Side Window Defogging in Cold

Weather..............................................................118

Vehicle Stationary for Extended Periods

During Extreme High Ambient

Temperatures...................................................118

Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock

Brakes............................................................156

Hood Lock

See: Opening and Closing the Hood............217

Ignition Switch...............................................135

In California (U.S. Only)............................202

Information Display Control......................66

Information Displays....................................84

General Information...........................................84

Information....................................................358

911 Assist®...........................................................365

Calendar...............................................................364

Notifications........................................................364

SIRIUS Travel Link.............................................362

SYNC Services (If Equipped, U.S.

Only)..................................................................358

Vehicle Health Report.....................................366

416

Index

Information Messages..................................87

Airbag........................................................................87

Alarm........................................................................88

Battery and Charging System.........................88

Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic

Alert System.....................................................88

Doors........................................................................89

Engine......................................................................90

Hill Start Assist.....................................................90

Keyless Vehicle.....................................................90

Lighting.....................................................................91

Maintenance..........................................................92

Message indicator................................................87

MyKey.......................................................................92

Park Aid....................................................................93

Park Brake...............................................................93

Power Steering......................................................94

Starting System ...................................................94

Tire Pressure Monitoring System...................96

Traction Control...................................................96

Transmission and Four-Wheel Drive............94

Installing Child Seats.....................................19

Using LAP AND SHOULDER BELTS...............19

Using Lower Anchors AND Tethers FOR

CHildren (LATCH)............................................22

Using Tether Straps.............................................23

Instrument Cluster.........................................79

Instrument Lighting Dimmer.......................71

Vehicles With Front Fog Lamps.......................71

Vehicles Without Front Fog Lamps................71

Interior Lamps..................................................72

Front Interior Lamp..............................................72

Rear Interior Lamp................................................73

Interior Mirror....................................................76

Auto-Dimming Mirror..........................................76

Introduction.........................................................7

Jump-Starting the Vehicle........................198

Connecting the Jumper Cables.....................199

Jump Starting......................................................199

Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................198

Removing the Jumper Cables........................199

Keyless Entry...................................................60

SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY

KEYPAD..............................................................60

Keyless Starting.............................................135

Fast Restart...........................................................137

Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is

Moving................................................................137

Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is

Stationary.........................................................136

Keys and Remote Controls.........................44

Principle of Operation........................................44

Knee Airbag.......................................................37

Lighting Control..............................................70

Headlamp Flasher...............................................70

High Beams............................................................70

Lighting..............................................................70

Load Carriers

See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers..............178

Load Carrying..................................................177

Load Limit........................................................179

Vehicle loading - with and without a

trailer...................................................................179

Locking and Unlocking.................................54

Activating Intelligent Access ...........................55

Autolock and Autounlock ................................56

Battery Saver.........................................................56

Illuminated Entry..................................................56

Illuminated Exit.....................................................56

Power Door Locks................................................54

Remote Control....................................................54

Smart Unlocks For Integrated Keyhead

Transmitter........................................................55

Smart Unlocks For Intelligent Access Keys

................................................................................55

Locks...................................................................54

Luggage Covers..............................................177

Maintenance...................................................217

General Information...........................................217

Manual Climate Control..............................113

Manual Liftgate...............................................57

417

Index

Manual Seats.................................................123

Adjusting the Height of the Driver's

Seat.....................................................................123

Moving the Seat Backward and

Forward..............................................................123

Recline Adjustment...........................................124

Media Hub........................................................110

Memory Function..........................................125

Recalling a Stored Seat Position..................126

Saving a Passive Setting..................................126

Saving a Pre-Set Position................................126

Menu.................................................................326

Active Park Assist...............................................327

Changing Your Door Keypad Code..............327

Display Settings.................................................326

Rear View Camera.............................................327

Settings..................................................................327

Setting the Clock...............................................326

Sound.....................................................................327

Valet Mode............................................................327

Message Center

See: Information Displays.................................84

Mirrors

See: Heated Windows and Mirrors...............119

See: Windows and Mirrors................................74

Mobile Communications Equipment.......12

Moonroof............................................................77

Bounce-Back.........................................................78

Opening and Closing the Moonroof...............77

Opening and Closing the Sunscreen.............77

Venting the Moonroof.........................................78

Motorcraft Parts...........................................267

MyFord Touch®.............................................315

General Information..........................................315

MyKey®..............................................................49

Principle of Operation........................................49

MyKey Troubleshooting................................51

Navigation........................................................371

cityseekr.................................................................373

Map Mode.............................................................374

Navigation Map Updates.................................377

Navigation Voice Commands........................377

Point of Interest (POI) Categories...............372

Quick-touch Buttons........................................376

Setting a Destination.........................................371

Setting Your Navigation Preferences..........373

Oil Check

See: Engine Oil Check........................................221

Opening and Closing the Hood................217

Ordering Additional Owner's

Literature.....................................................205

Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual.........205

Overhead Console........................................134

Parking Aid.......................................................161

Front Sensing System.......................................162

Rear Sensing System.........................................161

Parking Aids.....................................................161

Parking brake

See: Parking Brake..............................................157

Parking Brake..................................................157

Passive Anti-Theft System.........................62

SecuriLock®...........................................................62

PATS

See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................62

Perchlorate........................................................10

Personal Safety System™..........................34

How Does the Personal Safety System

Work?..................................................................34

Phone...............................................................352

Making Calls........................................................353

Pairing Subsequent Phones..........................353

Pairing Your Phone for the First Time........352

Phone Menu Options.......................................353

Phone Settings...................................................356

Receiving Calls....................................................353

Text Messaging...................................................354

418

Index

Power Door Locks

See: Locking and Unlocking.............................54

Power Liftgate..................................................57

Obstacle Detection.............................................59

Opening and Closing the Liftgate..................58

Setting the Liftgate Open Height...................59

Power Seats....................................................124

Power Lumbar......................................................125

Power Steering Fluid Check.....................225

Power Windows..............................................74

Accessory Delay....................................................75

Bounce-Back..........................................................74

One-Touch Down.................................................74

One-Touch Up.......................................................74

Window Lock..........................................................74

Rear Seat Armrest.........................................127

Rear Seats.......................................................126

Folding the Seatback........................................126

Recline Adjustment...........................................126

Unfolding the Seatback...................................126

Rear Under Floor Storage...........................177

Adjustable Load Floor........................................177

Cargo Management System...........................177

Passenger Compartment Floor......................177

Rear View Camera........................................167

Using the Rear View Camera System.........167

Rear View Camera

See: Rear View Camera....................................167

Rear Window Wiper and Washers..........69

Rear Window Washer.........................................69

Rear Window Wiper............................................69

Recommended Towing Weights............188

Refueling..........................................................142

Easy Fuel® No Cap Fuel System..................143

Remote Control..............................................44

Car Finder................................................................46

Integrated Keyhead Transmitters .................44

Intelligent Access Key.........................................45

Remote Start .........................................................47

Replacing the Battery.........................................45

Sounding a Panic Alarm....................................47

Remote Start...................................................119

Automatic Settings............................................120

Heated and Cooled Devices...........................120

Last Settings........................................................120

Removing a Headlamp...............................231

Repairing Minor Paint Damage...............237

Replacement Parts

Recommendation.........................................11

Collision Repairs.....................................................11

Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical

Repairs...................................................................11

Warranty on Replacement Parts......................11

Replacing a Lost Key or Remote

Control............................................................48

Reporting Safety Defects (Canada

Only).............................................................206

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.

Only)..............................................................205

Roadside Assistance...................................197

Vehicles Sold In Canada : Getting Roadside

Assistance........................................................197

Vehicles Sold In Canada : Using Roadside

Assistance........................................................197

Vehicles Sold In The U.S.: Getting Roadside

Assistance........................................................197

Vehicles Sold In The U.S. : Using Roadside

Assistance........................................................197

Roadside Emergencies...............................197

Roof Racks and Load Carriers..................178

Adjusting the Crossbar.....................................178

Running Out of Fuel......................................141

Refilling With a Portable Fuel

Container...........................................................141

Safety Belt Height Adjustment................30

Safety Belt Minder..........................................31

Belt-Minder®..........................................................31

Safety Belts......................................................26

Principle of Operation........................................26

Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator

Chime..............................................................30

Conditions of operation.....................................30

Safety Canopy®..............................................41

Safety Precautions......................................140

Satellite Radio................................................110

Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number

(ESN)....................................................................111

Satellite Radio Reception Factors..................111

SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service.....................111

Troubleshooting...................................................112

419

Index

Scheduled Maintenance..........................396

Engine Coolant Change Record....................410

Exceptions...........................................................409

General Maintenance Information.............396

Normal Scheduled Maintenance................399

Special Operating Conditions......................405

Seats...................................................................121

Security..............................................................62

Side Airbags.....................................................40

Sitting in the Correct Position...................121

Snow Chains

See: Using Snow Chains.................................256

Special Notices.................................................11

New Vehicle Limited Warranty..........................11

Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks and

Utility Type Vehicles........................................12

Special Instructions...............................................11

Using Your Vehicle as an Ambulance............12

Using Your Vehicle With a Snowplow............12

Speed Control

See: Cruise Control.............................................170

Stability Control............................................159

Principle of Operation.......................................159

Starter Switch

See: Ignition Switch...........................................135

Starting a Gasoline Engine........................137

Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes................138

Important Ventilating Information...............138

Starting and Stopping the Engine..........135

General Information..........................................135

Steering............................................................176

Electric Power Steering.....................................176

Steering Wheel...............................................64

Storage Compartments.............................134

Sun Visors..........................................................77

Illuminated Vanity Mirror....................................77

Supplementary Restraints System.........35

Principle of Operation.........................................35

Symbols Glossary.............................................7

SYNC® Applications and Services.......295

911 Assist...............................................................295

SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions &

Information (TDI).........................................298

Vehicle Health Report......................................297

SYNC®.............................................................279

General Information..........................................279

SYNC® Troubleshooting..........................308

Technical Specifications

See: Capacities and Specifications.............267

The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto

Line Program (U.S. Only).......................203

Tire Care..........................................................245

Glossary of Tire Terminology........................246

Information About Uniform Tire Quality

Grading.............................................................245

Information Contained on the Tire

Sidewall...........................................................246

Temperature A B C............................................245

Traction AA A B C...............................................245

Treadwear.............................................................245

Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........257

Changing Tires with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System.......................................258

Understanding Your Tire Pressure

Monitoring System ......................................258

Tire Pressures

See: Technical Specifications.......................265

Tires

See: Wheels and Tires.....................................243

Towing a Trailer.............................................188

Towing Points.................................................191

Installing the Towing Eye..................................191

Towing Eye Location...........................................191

Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels.............191

Towing the Vehicle on Four

Wheels...........................................................192

Emergency Towing.............................................192

Recreational Towing..........................................193

Towing..............................................................188

Traction Control............................................158

Principle of Operation.......................................158

Trailer Sway Control....................................188

Transmission Code Designation............270

Transmission...................................................147

Transporting the Vehicle............................192

Trip Computer.................................................86

All Value...................................................................87

Average Fuel...........................................................87

Fuel Used.................................................................87

Resetting the Trip Computer...........................86

Trip Odometer.......................................................86

Trip Timer................................................................86

420

Index

Under Hood Overview - 1.6L

EcoBoost®...................................................218

Under Hood Overview - 2.0L

EcoBoost®...................................................219

Under Hood Overview - 2.5L...................220

Universal Garage Door Opener...............128

Homelink® Wireless Control System.........128

USB Port...........................................................110

Using Cruise Control....................................170

Switching Off Cruise Control..........................170

Switching On Cruise Control..........................170

Using Four-Wheel Drive..............................151

Driving in Special Conditions With

Four-Wheel Drive...........................................152

Using MyKey With Remote Start

Systems..........................................................50

Vehicles Equipped with Intelligent Access

Key (Push Button Start)................................51

Vehicles Equipped with Traditional

Keys.......................................................................51

Using Snow Chains.....................................256

Using Stability Control...............................160

AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™

(RSC®).............................................................160

Using SYNC® With Your Media

Player.............................................................301

Accessing Your Play Menu.............................305

Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the

USB Port...........................................................301

Media Menu Features......................................303

Media Voice Commands.................................301

System Settings................................................306

What's Playing?..................................................301

Using SYNC® With Your Phone.............283

Accessing Features through the Phone

Menu.................................................................288

Accessing Your Phone Settings.....................291

Making Calls........................................................286

Pairing a Phone for the First Time...............283

Pairing Subsequent Phones..........................284

Phone Options during an Active Call.........286

Phone Voice Commands................................284

Receiving Calls...................................................286

System Settings.................................................292

Text Messaging..................................................289

Using Traction Control................................158

System Indicator Lights and

Messages..........................................................158

Using Voice Recognition............................281

Helpful Hints........................................................281

Initiating a Voice Session.................................281

System Interaction and Feedback..............282

Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration

Program (Canada Only)........................203

Vehicle Care...................................................236

General Information.........................................236

Vehicle Certification Label.......................270

Vehicle Identification Number................269

Vehicle Storage............................................240

Battery....................................................................241

Body.........................................................................241

Brakes......................................................................241

Cooling system....................................................241

Engine......................................................................241

Fuel system...........................................................241

General..................................................................240

Miscellaneous......................................................241

Removing Vehicle From Storage..................242

Tires.........................................................................241

Ventilation

See: Climate Control..........................................113

VIN

See: Vehicle Identification Number............269

Voice Control...................................................66

MyFord Touch® Controls..................................66

421

Index

Warning Lamps and Indicators................80

Airbag - Front........................................................80

Anti-Lock Braking System................................80

Battery.......................................................................81

Blind Spot Monitor...............................................81

Brake System..........................................................81

Cruise Control.........................................................81

Direction Indicator................................................81

Engine Oil.................................................................81

Fasten Safety Belt................................................81

Fog Lamps - Front................................................81

High Beam...............................................................81

Information.............................................................82

Low Fuel Level.......................................................82

Low Tire Pressure Warning...............................82

Parking Lamps......................................................82

Service Engine Soon...........................................82

Stability Control....................................................83

Stability Control Off............................................83

Washer Fluid Check....................................225

Washers

See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................236

See: Wipers and Washers..................................67

Waxing..............................................................237

Wheels and Tires.........................................243

General Information.........................................243

Technical Specifications.................................265

Windows and Mirrors....................................74

Windshield Washers.....................................68

Windshield Wipers.........................................67

Intermittent Wipe.................................................67

Speed Dependent Wipers.................................67

Wipers and Washers.....................................67

422

Index

La informacion contenida en esta publicacion es correcta al momento de ser enviada a impresión. En

interes del desarrollo continuo, nos reservamos el derecho a cambiar las especificaciones, el diseño o el

equipo en cualquier momento, sin previo aviso y sin ninguna obligacion. Ninguna parte de esta publicacion

puede ser reproducida, trasmitida, almacenada en cualquier sistema de recuperacion de informacion o

traducida en cualquier idioma, forma o medio, sin un autorizacion por escrito. Se exceptúan errores y

omisiones.

Número de parte: 20120327133508

Introducción

Acerca de este Manual....................................7

Glosario de Símbolos......................................7

Retención de Datos.........................................9

Proposición 65 de California........................11

Perclorato............................................................11

Ford Credit..........................................................11

Recomendación de partes de repuesto

............................................................................12

Notas Especiales.............................................12

Equipo Móvil de Comunicaciones.............13

Opciónes Únicas de Exportación..............14

Seguridad de los Niños

Información general.......................................15

Asientos para Niños........................................17

Colocación de los Asientos para

Niños................................................................17

Asientos Elevados..........................................19

Instalación de asientos para niños ..........21

Seguros a Prueba de Niños.........................27

Cinturones de Seguridad

Funcionamiento.............................................28

Sujecion de los Cinturones de

Seguridad......................................................29

Ajuste de altura de los cinturones de

seguridad.......................................................32

Luz de advertencia del cinturón de

seguridad y repique indicador ..............33

Recordatorio de Cinturones de

Seguridad......................................................33

Mantenimiento del sistema de sujeción

para niños y de los cinturones de

seguridad......................................................35

Personal Safety System™

Personal Safety System™..........................37

Sistema de Seguridad

Complementaria

Funcionamiento.............................................38

Bolsas de aire del conductor y del

pasajero ........................................................39

Bolsa de Aire para Rodillas..........................41

Sistema de detección del pasajero

delantero........................................................41

Bolsas de Aire Laterales..............................44

Safety Canopy®.............................................45

Sensores de choque e indicador de

bolsas de aire .............................................46

Disposición de una Bolsa de Aire.............47

Llaves y Controles Remotos

Funcionamiento.............................................48

Información General sobre las

Frecuencias de Radio...............................48

Transmisor Remoto......................................48

Reemplazo de una Llave Extraviada o

un Transmisor Remoto............................53

MyKey®

Funcionamiento.............................................54

Creación de MyKey........................................55

Borrado de toda la información de

MyKeys ..........................................................55

Comprobación del estado del sistema

MyKey ............................................................56

Uso de MyKey con un Sistema de

Arranque Remoto......................................56

Detección de Problemas de MyKey.........57

Seguros

Asegurar y Desasegurar..............................60

Compuerta levadiza manual ....................63

Compuerta Levadiza Eléctrica..................64

Entrada sin Llave............................................67

Seguridad

Sistema Pasivo Anti-Robo.........................69

Índice

Alarma Anti-Robo..........................................70

Volante de Dirección

Ajuste del Volante de Dirección................72

Control de Audio.............................................72

Control de Voz.................................................74

Control de Crucero.........................................74

Control de la Pantalla de

Información..................................................74

Limpiadores y Lavadores

Limpia Parabrisas...........................................75

Limpiadores Automáticos...........................75

Lava Parabrisas...............................................76

Limpiador y Lavador de Medallón............77

Iluminación

Control de Iluminación.................................78

Encendido Automático de Faros

Principales....................................................78

Atenuador de Iluminación de Tablerol

de Instrumentos.........................................79

Retardo de Apagado de Faros

Principales....................................................79

Faros de Operación Diurna........................80

Faros de Niebla Delanteros.......................80

Indicadores de Luces Direccionales.......80

Iluminación Interior.......................................80

Luz Ambiental..................................................81

Ventanas y espejos

retrovisores

Ventanas eléctricas.......................................83

Espejos retrovisores exteriores.................84

Espejo retrovisor interior.............................86

Viseras................................................................86

Techo solar.......................................................86

Tablero de instrumentos

Indicadores.......................................................88

Indicadores y luces de advertencia.........89

Advertencias e Indicadores

Audibles.........................................................92

Pantallas de información

Información general......................................93

Computadora de viaje.................................96

Mensajes de información...........................96

Sistema de audio

Información general....................................106

Unidad de audio - Vehículos con:

AM/FM/CD..................................................107

Unidad de audio - Vehículos con:

AM/FM/CD/SYNC...................................109

Unidad de audio - Vehículos con:

AM/FM/CD/Radio

satelital/SYNC............................................112

Unidad de audio - Vehículos con:

AM/FM/CD Premium...............................114

Unidad de audio - Vehículos con: Sony

AM/FM/CD..................................................116

Toma de entrada auxiliar..........................120

Puerto USB.......................................................121

Concentrador de medios............................121

Radio satelital.................................................121

Control de clima

Control de clima manual...........................125

Control Automático de Clima..................126

Consejos para el control del clima

interior ..........................................................128

Ventanas y espejos retrovisores

calentados...................................................131

Filtro de aire para la cabina ......................132

Arranque a control remoto........................132

Asientos

Modo correcto de sentarse.......................134

Cabeceras........................................................134

Asientos manuales......................................136

Asientos eléctricos.......................................137

Índice

Función de memoria...................................138

Asientos traseros..........................................139

Asientos calentados...................................140

Descansabrazos del asiento trasero.....140

Abridor Universal de

Cochera

Abridor Universal de Cochera...................141

Tomas de energía auxiliares

Tomas Auxiliares de Corriente................146

Compartimientos para

Almacenaje

Consola central.............................................148

Consola del toldo.........................................148

Arranque y Paro del Motor

Información general....................................149

Interruptor de encendido..........................149

Arranque sin llave.........................................150

Arranque de un motor de gasolina ........151

Calentador del Bloque del Motor...........152

Combustible y llenado

Precauciones de seguridad......................154

Calidad del combustible...........................155

Funcionamiento sin combustible...........155

Llenado ...........................................................156

Sistema de control de emisiones .........158

Consumo de combustible..........................161

Transmisión

Transmisión Automática...........................163

Asistencia de arranque en

pendientes..................................................165

Doble Tracción

Uso de la tracción en las cuatro ruedas

.........................................................................167

Frenos

Información general.....................................173

Consejos para Conducir con Frenos

Antibloqueo................................................173

Freno de estacionamiento........................174

Control de tracción

Funcionamiento............................................175

Uso del control de tracción.......................175

Control de estabilidad

Funcionamiento............................................176

Uso del control de estabilidad.................177

Ayudas de Estacionamiento

Asistencia de estacionamiento ..............178

Asistencia Activa para Estacionarse.....180

Cámara de vista trasera ............................185

Control de Crucero

Funcionamiento...........................................188

Uso del control de crucero.......................188

Ayudas de Conducción

Monitor de Punto Ciego.............................190

Modo de Economico...................................194

Dirección .........................................................195

Transporte de carga

Almacenamiento de la parte inferior

trasera del piso.........................................196

Cubiertas del compartimiento de

equipajes.....................................................196

Parrillas para equipaje y portadores de

carga..............................................................197

Límite de Carga.............................................198

Remolque

Conducción con remolque.......................207

Índice

Control de Bamboleo del

Remolque...................................................207

Pesos de remolque recomendados......207

Comprobaciones esenciales de

remolque....................................................209

Puntos de remolque....................................210

Transporte del vehículo...............................211

Remolque del vehículo sobre las cuatro

ruedas...........................................................212

Indicaciones de conducción

Rodaje...............................................................213

Conducción económica..............................213

Conducción por el agua.............................213

Tapetes del piso............................................214

Emergencias en el Camino

Asistencia en carretera...............................216

Luces de emergencia...................................217

Interruptor de corte de combustible......217

Arranque en frío del vehículo...................218

Asistencia al cliente

Cómo obtener los servicios necesarios

........................................................................220

En California (únicamente en EE. UU.)

.........................................................................221

Programa Auto Line de Better Business

Bureau (BBB) (únicamente en EE. UU.)

........................................................................222

Utilización del programa de

mediación/arbitraje (únicamente en

Canadá) .....................................................223

Cómo obtener asistencia fuera de EE.

UU. y Canadá ............................................223

Cómo ordenar otro Manual del

propietario .................................................225

Denuncia de defectos de seguridad

(únicamente en EE. UU.) .....................225

Denuncia de defectos de seguridad

(únicamente en Canadá) ....................225

Fusibles

Cambio de fusibles.....................................226

Tabla de especificaciones de

fusibles.........................................................227

Mantenimiento

Información general...................................238

Apertura y cierre del cofre........................239

Revisión el Compartimiento del Motor -

1.6L EcoBoost®........................................240

Revisión el Compartimiento del Motor -

2.0L EcoBoost®........................................241

Revisión el Compartimiento del Motor -

2.5L................................................................242

Varilla indicadora de nivel de aceite del

motor - 1.6L EcoBoost®........................243

Varilla indicadora de nivel de aceite del

motor - 2.5L/2.0L EcoBoost®............243

Comprobación del aceite de motor......243

Comprobación del refrigerante de

motor...........................................................244

Verificación del Fluído de la Transmisión

Automática................................................248

Verificación del Fluído de Frenos..........248

Comprobación del fluido de la dirección

hidráulica....................................................248

Filtro de combustible ................................248

Comprobación del fluido del

lavador........................................................248

Cambio de la batería del vehículo........249

Comprobación de las hojas del

limpiador....................................................250

Cambio de las hojas del limpiador.......250

Cambio del filtro de aire del motor .......251

Ajuste de los Faros Principales...............252

Desmontaje de faros..................................254

Cambio de focos..........................................254

Tabla de Especificaciones de los

Focos............................................................258

Cuidado del vehículo

Información general...................................260

Índice

Productos de limpieza..............................260

Limpieza del exterior.................................260

Reparación de daños menores en la

pintura..........................................................261

Encerado..........................................................261

Limpieza del Motor......................................261

Limpieza de las Ventanas y las Hojas de

los Limpiadores........................................262

Limpieza del interior...................................263

Limpieza del Panel de Instrumentos y

Cristal del Tablero...................................263

Limpieza de Asientos de Piel..................264

Limpieza de las ruedas de aleación......264

Almacenamiento del Vehículo...............265

Ruedas y llantas

Información general...................................268

Cuidado de las llantas...............................270

Uso de cadenas para nieve.....................284

Sistema de monitoreo de presión de las

llantas..........................................................285

Cambio de una rueda................................289

Especificaciones técnicas........................295

Capacidades y Especifica-

ciones

Especificaciones del motor.....................296

Repuestos de Motorcraft .........................297

Número de identificación del

vehículo.......................................................298

Etiqueta de certificación del

vehículo.......................................................298

Código de la Transmisión.........................299

Especificaciones técnicas........................299

Accesorios

Accesorios .....................................................302

Ford Protect

Ford Protect..................................................304

SYNC®

Información general...................................307

Uso del reconocimiento de voz ............309

Uso de SYNC® con el teléfono ...............312

Aplicaciones y servicios SYNC® ...........325

Uso de SYNC® con el reproductor

multimedia ................................................332

Diagnóstico de fallas SYNC® .................341

MyFord Touch®

Información general...................................348

Menú................................................................359

Entretenimiento...........................................365

Teléfono..........................................................388

Información...................................................394

Climatización................................................405

Navegación...................................................408

Apéndices

Acuerdo de Licencia del Usuario............418

Reparación del vehículo

Reparación del vehículo ...........................437

Índice

ACERCA DE ESTE MANUAL

Gracias por escoger un Ford. Le

recomendamos que invierta un poco de su

tiempo para conocer su vehículo leyendo

este manual. Mientras más lo conozca,

obtendrá mayor seguridad y placer al

conducirlo.

ALERTA

Siempre que conduzca con cuidado

y atencion durante el uso y

funcionamiento de controles y

caracteristicas de su vehiculo.

Nota: Este manual describe las

características y opciones disponibles del

producto en todo el rango, algunas veces

incluso antes de que estén disponibles en

forma general. Puede describir opciones que

no están equipadas en su vehículo.

Nota: Algunas ilustraciones de este manual

pueden ser usadas por diferentes modelos,

por lo que pueden aparecer en vehiculos

diferentes a su vehiculo. Sin embargo la

informacion escencial de las ilustraciones

siempre es correcta.

Nota: Siempre utilice y opere su vehículo

de acuerdo a las leyes y regulaciones

aplicables.

Nota: Deje este manual en el vehículo

cuando lo venda. Forma parte del vehículo.

Protección del medio ambiente

Usted debe colaborar en la protección del

medio ambiente. El uso correcto del

vehículo y el desecho autorizado de

materiales de lubricación y limpieza son

pasos importantes para lograr este

objetivo.

GLOSARIO DE SÍMBOLOS

Estos son algunos de los símbolos que

puede ver en su vehículo.

Alerta de seguridad

Consulte el Manual del

propietario

Sistema de frenos antibloqueo

Evitar fumar, producir llamas o

chispas

Batería

Ácido de batería

Líquido de frenos, no derivado

del petróleo

Sistema de frenos

Filtro de aire de la cabina

Revisar tapón de combustible

Cierre y apertura de las puertas

de seguridad para niños

Anclaje inferior del asiento para

niños

Anclaje para las correas de

sujeción del asiento para niños

E71340

Control de crucero

Introducción

No abrir cuando esté caliente

Filtro de aire del motor

Refrigerante del motor

Temperatura del refrigerante del

motor

Aceite para motor

Gas explosivo

Advertencia del ventilador

Abrochar cinturón de seguridad

Bolsa de aire delantera

Faros para niebla delanteros

Restablecimiento de la bomba

de combustible

Compartimiento de fusibles

Luces intermitentes de

emergencia

Ventana trasera calentada.

E91392

Parabrisas desempañado

Manija de apertura interior de la

cajuela

Gato

Control de iluminación

Advertencia de presión de llanta

desinflada

Mantener el nivel de líquido

correcto

Alarma de pánico

E139213

Asistencia de estacionamiento

Freno de estacionamiento

Fluido de dirección hidráulica

Ventanas eléctricas delanteras

y traseras

Bloqueo de las ventanas

eléctricas

Servicio del motor a la brevedad

Bolsa de aire lateral

Control de estabilidad

Introducción

Limpiaparabrisas y

lavaparabrisas

RETENCIÓN DE DATOS

Grabación de datos de servicio

Las grabadoras de datos de servicio de su

vehículo son capaces de recopilar y

almacenar información de diagnóstico

sobre su vehículo. Esto incluye información

sobre el rendimiento o el estado de los

diversos sistemas y módulos del vehículo,

como el motor, acelerador, sistemas de

frenos o dirección. Para diagnosticar y

reparar su vehículo en forma adecuada,

Ford Motor Company, Ford of Canada y los

talleres de servicio y reparación pueden

acceder o compartir entre ellos

información de diagnóstico del vehículo

recibida a través de una conexión directa

a su vehículo cuando se le realiza un

diagnóstico o servicio. Para los EE.UU.

solamente (si está equipado), si decide

usar el Informe de mantenimiento del

vehículo de SYNC, usted acepta que Ford

Motor Company y los establecimientos de

servicio autorizados de Ford también

podrán obtener acceso electrónico a cierta

información de diagnóstico, y que dicha

información podrá usarse con cualquier

tipo de propósito. Ver SYNC® (página 307).

Grabación de datos de eventos

Este vehículo está equipado con una

grabadora de datos de eventos. El

propósito principal de una grabadora

de datos de eventos (EDR) es grabar

datos en ciertas situaciones de choque

o casi choque, como cuando se

despliega una bolsa de aire o se golpea

un obstáculo en el camino. Estos datos

permiten saber cómo estaban

funcionando los sistemas del vehículo.

La EDR está diseñada para grabar

datos relacionados con la dinámica y

los sistemas de seguridad del vehículo

durante un breve lapso, por lo general

de 30 segundos o menos.

La grabadora de datos de eventos de

este vehículo está diseñada para

grabar información como:

• Cómo estaban funcionando los

diversos sistemas del vehículo;

• Si el conductor y el pasajero

llevaban abrochados o no los

cinturones de seguridad;

• Qué tan fuerte estaba pisando el

conductor (si lo estaba pisando) el

pedal del acelerador y/o el freno;

• A qué velocidad se desplazaba el

vehículo; y

• En qué posición llevaba el

conductor el volante de la dirección.

Estos datos permiten conocer mejor

las circunstancias en que ocurren

choques y lesiones.

Introducción

Nota: La información de la grabadora de

datos de evento es registrada por el

vehículo únicamente si ocurre una

situación de choque importante; la

grabadora no registra datos en

condiciones de manejo normales, y

tampoco registra datos o información

personal (por ejemplo, nombre, sexo,

edad y ubicación del choque) (consulte

más adelante las limitaciones de

privacidad relacionadas con el servicio

de asistencia y tráfico 911, indicaciones

e información). Sin embargo, algunas

instancias, como las autoridades

policiales, pueden combinar los datos de

la grabadora con los datos de

identificación personal recopilados

durante la investigación de un choque.

Para leer los datos registrados por una

grabadora de datos de evento, se

necesita equipo especial y acceso al

vehículo o a la grabadora. Además del

fabricante del vehículo, otras

instancias que tienen este equipo

especial, como las autoridades

policiales, pueden leer la información

si tienen acceso al vehículo o a la

grabadora de datos de evento. Ford

Motor Company y Ford of Canada no

tienen acceso a la información de la

grabadora de datos de eventos sin

tener su consentimiento, a menos que

se cumpla con una orden judicial o si lo

requiere la ley, las autoridades

gubernamentales u otras terceras

partes que actúen como autoridad

legal. Otras terceras partes pueden

solicitar acceso a la información en

forma independiente de Ford Motor

Company y Ford of Canada.

Nota: En la medida que cualquier ley

relacionada con las grabadoras de datos

de eventos sea aplicable al sistema SYNC

o sus funciones, tenga en cuenta lo

siguiente: una vez que se habilita (se

pone en ON) la Asistencia 911 (si está

equipada), ésta puede, a través de

cualquier teléfono celular vinculado y

conectado, informar a los servicios de

emergencia que el vehículo estuvo

involucrado en un choque que provocó el

despliegue de una bolsa de aire o, en

ciertos vehículos, la activación del corte

de la bomba de combustible. Algunas

versiones o actualizaciones de Asistencia

911 se pueden utilizar para proporcionar

a los operadores del servicio 911, de

manera verbal o electrónica, la ubicación

geográfica del vehículo (latitud y

longitud), u otros detalles acerca del

vehículo o el choque, e incluso datos

personales de los ocupantes, para ayudar

a los operadores del servicio 911 a

proporcionar los servicios de emergencia

más apropiados. Si no desea que se

divulgue esta información, no active el

sistema de Asistencia 911. Ver SYNC®

(página 307).

Introducción

Además, cuando usted se conecta a

Tráfico, Indicaciones e Información (si

está equipado, y sólo en EE.UU.), el

servicio utiliza tecnología de GPS y los

avanzados sensores del vehículo para

recopilar información sobre la

ubicación actual del vehículo, su

dirección y velocidad de viaje

(“información de viaje del vehículo”)

únicamente para poder proporcionarle

las indicaciones, informes de tránsito

o búsquedas de negocios que usted

solicite. Si no desea que Ford ni sus

proveedores reciban esta información,

no active el servicio. Ford Motor

Company y los proveedores solo

utilizan este servicio para

proporcionarle esta información y no

almacenan los datos de viaje de su

vehículo. Para obtener más detalles,

consulte los términos y condiciones

del servicio de tráfico, indicaciones e

información. Ver SYNC® (página 307).

PROPOSICIÓN 65 DE

CALIFORNIA

ALERTA

Algunos componentes del escape

del motor, ciertos componentes del

vehículo, algunos líquidos que

contienen los vehículos y determinados

productos para el uso de los componentes

contienen o emiten sustancias químicas

conocidas en el Estado de California como

causantes de cáncer y defectos de

nacimiento u otro daño reproductivo.

PERCLORATO

Ciertos componentes de su vehículo, como

los módulos de bolsas de aire, pretensores

de cinturones de seguridad y baterías de

control remoto, pueden contener material

perclorado. Se deben manipular con

cuidado al realizar el servicio o al desechar

el vehículo cuando termine su vida útil.

Consulte

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

para obtener más información.

FORD CREDIT

(EE.UU. solamente)

Ford Credit ofrece una amplia gama de

planes de financiamiento y arrendamiento

para que pueda adquirir su vehículo. Si ha

financiado o arrendado su vehículo a

través de Ford Credit, le agradecemos su

preferencia.

Para su comodidad, ofrecemos diversas

maneras de ponerse en contacto con

nosotros, además de ayuda para

administrar su cuenta.

Teléfono: 1-800-727-7000

Para obtener más información acerca de

Ford Credit y comunicarse con el

Administrador de cuentas, visite

www.fordcredit.com.

Introducción

RECOMENDACIÓN DE PARTES

DE REPUESTO

Su vehículo ha sido construido con los más

altos estándares y usando piezas de alta

calidad. Recomendamos que exija el uso

de refacciones y piezas Ford y Motorcraft

originales cada vez que su vehículo

requiera mantenimiento programado o una

reparación. Puede reconocer claramente

las refacciones Ford y Motorcraft originales

si observa la marca Ford, FoMoCo o

Motorcraft en las refacciones o en sus

paquetes.

Mantenimiento programado y

reparaciones mecánicas

Una de las mejores maneras de asegurarse

de que su vehículo funcione durante años

es realizar los mantenimientos

recomendados y usar refacciones que

cumplan con las especificaciones

detalladas en este Manual del propietario.

Las refacciones Ford y Motorcraft

originales cumplen o exceden estas

especificaciones.

Reparaciones de choques

Esperamos que jamás sufra un choque,

pero los accidentes suceden. Las

refacciones Ford originales para casos de

choques cumplen con nuestros estrictos

requisitos de ajuste, acabado, integridad

estructural, protección contra corrosión y

resistencia a abolladuras. Durante el

desarrollo del vehículo, validamos que

estas piezas proporcionen el nivel

necesario de protección como un sistema

completo. Una excelente manera de

asegurarse de obtener este nivel de

protección es utilizar refacciones Ford

originales para casos de choque.

Garantía de las refacciones

Las refacciones Ford y Motorcraft

originales son las únicas refacciones que

cuentan con la garantía de Ford. El daño

causado en su vehículo a causa de una

falla relacionada con piezas que no son

Ford no están cubiertos por la Garantía de

Ford. Para obtener más información,

consulte los términos y condiciones de la

Garantía de Ford.

NOTAS ESPECIALES

Garantía limitada para vehículos

nuevos

Para obtener una descripción detallada de

los aspectos que contempla y que no

contempla la Garantía limitada para

vehículos nuevos de su vehículo, consulte

el Manual de garantía que se entrega junto

con el Manual del propietario.

Instrucciones especiales

Para su seguridad, su vehículo cuenta con

controles electrónicos sofisticados.

AVISOS

Si no se siguen las advertencias e

instrucciones específicas se podrían

producir lesiones personales. Ver

Sistema de Seguridad Complementaria

(página 38).

Los asientos de niños o de bebés

orientados hacia atrás y montados

en el asiento delantero no se deben

colocar NUNCA frente a una bolsa de aire

del pasajero activa.

Introducción

Aviso para los propietarios de

camiones y camionetas pickup y

vehículos utilitarios

ALERTA

Los vehículos utilitarios se vuelcan

con frecuencia significativamente

mayor que otros tipos de vehículos.

Antes de manejar el vehículo, lea

atentamente este Manual del propietario.

Su vehículo no es un automóvil de

pasajeros. Al igual que con otros vehículos

de este tipo, si no se hace funcionar

correctamente, se puede producir la

pérdida del control del vehículo, la

volcadura de éste, lesiones personales o

la muerte.

Uso del vehículo con un barredor

de nieve

No utilice este vehículo para quitar la

nieve.

Su vehículo no está equipado con un

paquete para quitar nieve.

Uso del vehículo como ambulancia

No utilice este vehículo como

ambulancia.

Su vehículo no está equipado con el

Paquete de preparación de ambulancia

Ford.

EQUIPO MÓVIL DE

COMUNICACIONES

El uso de equipos móviles de comunicación

es cada vez más importante en la atención

de negocios y asuntos personales. Sin

embargo, no debe arriesgar su seguridad

ni la de otros al usar dichos equipos. La

comunicación móvil puede mejorar la

seguridad personal cuando se emplea en

forma correcta, especialmente en

situaciones de emergencia. Para evitar

anular los beneficios de estos equipos de

comunicación móvil, la seguridad debe ser

lo principal al momento de utilizarlos. Los

equipos de comunicación móvil incluyen,

entre otros, teléfonos celulares,

localizadores, dispositivos de correo

electrónico portátiles, dispositivos de

mensajería de texto y radios portátiles de

transmisión y recepción.

ALERTA

Manejar mientras está distraído

puede tener como consecuencia la

pérdida de control del vehículo, un

accidente y lesiones. Le recomendamos

enfáticamente que tenga extrema

precaución cuando utilice cualquier

dispositivo que pudiera distraerlo mientras

conduce. Su responsabilidad principal es

la operación segura de su vehículo. No

recomendamos el uso de dispositivos

portátiles mientras maneja; debe cumplir

con todas las leyes aplicables.

Introducción

OPCIÓNES ÚNICAS DE

EXPORTACIÓN

Para su región en particular, este vehículo

puede contar con funciones y opciones

que sean diferentes a las que se describen

en el Manual del propietario. Es posible

que se le entregue un suplemento

exclusivo para su mercado, que

complementa este folleto. Al consultar el

suplemento exclusivo para su mercado,

en caso de que se le proporcione, puede

identificar correctamente las

características, recomendaciones y

especificaciones exclusivas para su

vehículo. Este Manual del propietario fue

creado básicamente para los mercados

de Estados Unidos y Canadá. Las funciones

o equipamiento mencionado como

estándar pueden ser diferentes en las

unidades fabricadas para exportación.

Consulte este Manual del propietario

para ver toda la información y

advertencias requeridas.

Introducción

INFORMACIÓN GENERAL

Vea las siguientes secciones para obtener

instrucciones sobre cómo utilizar los

sistemas de seguridad para niños en forma

correcta.

AVISOS

Siempre asegúrese de que el niño

esté correctamente asegurado en un

dispositivo apropiado para su

estatura, edad y peso. Los sistemas de

seguridad para niños se deben comprar en

forma independiente del vehículo. Si no se

siguen estas instrucciones y pautas,

aumenta el riesgo de que el niño sufra

lesiones graves o incluso la muerte.

Todos los niños tienen talla

diferente. Las recomendaciones para

los sistemas de seguridad se basan

en límites de altura, edad y peso probables

del niño establecidos por la Administración

Nacional de Seguridad del Tráfico en las

Carreteras (NHTSA) y otras organizaciones

de seguridad o corresponden a los

requisitos mínimos de la ley. Ford

AVISOS

recomienda que consulte a un técnico en

seguridad de pasajeros infantiles

certificado (CPST) de la NHTSA y a su

pediatra para asegurarse de que su asiento

para niños sea adecuado para su hijo y que

sea compatible y pueda instalarse

correctamente en el vehículo. Para ubicar

a una estación de ajuste de asiento para

niños y un CPST comuníquese con el

número de llamada sin cargo de la NHTSA

1-888-327-4236 o a través de Internet en

http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. En Canadá,

consulte a su oficina local de St. John

Ambulance para que le recomiende a un

CPST. Si desea obtener más información,

póngase en contacto con la dependencia

de transporte provincial, con su oficina

local de St. John Ambulance en

http://www.sfa.ca o con Transport

Canada en el 1-800-333-0371

(http://www.tc.gc.ca). Si no sienta a los

niños en asientos de seguridad fabricados

especialmente para su estatura, edad y

peso, puede aumentar el riesgo de que

sufran lesiones graves o incluso la muerte.

Seguridad de los Niños

Recomendaciones para sistemas de seguridad para niños

Tipo de sistema de segu-

ridad recomendado

Tamaño, estatura, peso o edad del niñoNiño

Use un asiento de segu-

ridad para niños (a veces

llamado carro para bebé,

asiento convertible o

asiento infantil).

Niños que pesan 18 kg (40 lb) o menos

(por lo general de cuatro años o menos).

Bebés o niños

muy pequeños

Use un asiento auxiliar.Niños que crecieron o que ya no caben

adecuadamente en el asiento de segu-

ridad (por lo general, niños de menos de

1,45 m (4 pies 9 pulg) de estatura, entre

cuatro y doce años de edad, y entre 18 y

36 kg (40 y 80 lb) de peso, y hasta 45 kg

(100 lb) si lo recomienda el fabricante

del sistema de sujeción para niños).

Niños pequeños

Use un cinturón de segu-

ridad del vehículo con la

correa pélvica bien ajustada

y baja a través de la parte

inferior de las caderas, la

correa del hombro centrada

entre el hombro y el pecho,

y el respaldo en posición

vertical.

Niños que crecieron o que ya no caben en

un asiento auxiliar para posicionamiento

del cinturón de seguridad (por lo general,

niños de 1.45 metros (4 pies 9 pulg) de

estatura o de más de 36 kg (80 lb) de

peso, o hasta 45 kg (100 lb) si lo reco-

mienda el fabricante del sistema de

sujeción para niños).

Niños más

grandes

Seguridad de los Niños

• La ley en Estados Unidos y Canadá

exige el uso de asientos de seguridad

para niños e infantes.

• Muchos estados, provincias y

municipios exigen que los niños

pequeños usen asientos auxiliares

aprobados hasta la edad de ocho años,

una estatura de 1,45 m (4 pies 9 pulg),

o 36 kg (80 lb). Consulte los

reglamentos de tránsito locales y

estatales para ver si hay requisitos

específicos con relación a la seguridad

de los niños en su vehículo.

• Siempre que sea posible, siente a los

niños menores de doce años en

sistemas de seguridad y ubíquelos en

el asiento trasero del vehículo. Las

estadísticas de accidentes demuestran

que los niños están más seguros

cuando viajan en el asiento trasero, con

los sistemas de seguridad ajustados

correctamente, que cuando viajan en

el asiento delantero.

ASIENTOS PARA NIÑOS

E142594

Use un asiento de seguridad para niños (a

veces llamado carro para bebé, asiento

convertible o asiento infantil) para los

bebés o niños que pesen 18 kg (40 libras)

o menos (generalmente de 4 años o

menos).

COLOCACIÓN DE LOS

ASIENTOS PARA NIÑOS

AVISOS

Las bolsas de aire pueden causar la

muerte o lesionar a un niño que se

encuentre en un asiento para niños.

NUNCA coloque un asiento para niños

orientado hacia atrás frente a una bolsa

de aire activa. Si debe usar un asiento para

niños orientado hacia delante en el asiento

delantero, mueva el asiento

completamente hacia atrás. Siempre que

sea posible, los niños de 12 años y menos

deben ir correctamente asegurados en el

asiento trasero. Si no le es posible sentar

y asegurar correctamente a todos los niños

en el asiento trasero, asegure

correctamente al niño más grande en el

asiento delantero.

Siempre siga atentamente las

instrucciones y advertencias

proporcionadas por el fabricante de

cualquier sistema de seguridad para niños

con el fin de determinar si el dispositivo de

sujeción es adecuado para el tamaño, la

estatura, el peso o la edad del niño. Siga

las instrucciones y advertencias del

fabricante del sistema de seguridad para

niños proporcionadas para la instalación

y uso en conjunto con las instrucciones y

advertencias entregadas por el fabricante

del vehículo. Un asiento de seguridad mal

instalado o mal utilizado, que no sea

apropiado para la estatura, la edad o el

peso del niño o que no se ajuste

correctamente al niño podría implicar un

mayor riesgo de sufrir lesiones graves o

incluso la muerte.

Nunca deje que un pasajero lleve a

un niño en su regazo mientras el

vehículo esté en movimiento. Éste

no podrá proteger al niño en caso de un

choque, lo que puede significar lesiones

graves o incluso la muerte del menor.

Seguridad de los Niños

AVISOS

Nunca use almohadas, libros ni

toallas para sentar al niño a mayor

altura sobre el asiento. Esos objetos

pueden deslizarse y aumentar la

probabilidad de que el niño sufra lesiones

e incluso la muerte en caso de un choque.

Asegure siempre los asientos para

niños o los asientos auxiliares

cuando no estén ocupados. Estos

objetos podrían transformarse en

proyectiles en un choque o frenada

repentina, lo cual podría aumentar el riesgo

de sufrir lesiones graves.

AVISOS

Nunca coloque la correa del hombro

debajo del brazo ni detrás de la

espalda del niño, ni permita que el

niño lo haga, porque eso reduce la

protección de la parte superior del cuerpo

y puede aumentar el riesgo de sufrir

lesiones o incluso la muerte en un choque.

No deje sin vigilancia en su vehículo

a niños, a adultos que no pueden

valerse por sí mismos ni a mascotas.

Use cualquier método de sujeción según lo indica la X a conti-

nuación

Peso del

niño

Tipo de

sistema de

protección

Solo

cinturón de

seguridad

Cinturón

de segu-

ridad y

LATCH

(anclajes

inferiores y

anclaje

superior

para

correas de

sujeción)

Cinturón

de segu-

ridad y

anclaje

superior

para

correas de

sujeción

LATCH

(solo

anclajes

inferiores)

LATCH

(anclajes

inferiores y

anclaje

superior

para

correas de

sujeción)

XXHasta 21 kg

(48 lb)

Asiento

para niños

orientado

hacia atrás

XXXHasta 21 kg

(48 lb)

Asiento

para niños

orientado

hacia

delante

XXMás de

21 kg

(48 lb)

Asiento

para niños

orientado

hacia

delante

Seguridad de los Niños

Nota: El asiento de seguridad para niños

debe estar firmemente ajustado en el

asiento del vehículo. Puede ser necesario

levantar o quitar el apoyacabezas. Consulte

el capítulo Asientos para obtener más

información sobre los apoyacabezas.

ASIENTOS ELEVADOS

ALERTA

Nunca coloque la correa del hombro

debajo del brazo ni detrás de la

espalda del niño, ni permita que el

niño lo haga, porque eso reduce la

protección de la parte superior del cuerpo

y puede aumentar el riesgo de sufrir

lesiones o incluso la muerte en un choque.

Utilice un asiento auxiliar para colocación

del cinturón en el caso de niños que han

crecido o que ya no caben adecuadamente

en el asiento de seguridad (por lo general,

niños de menos de 1,45 m (4 pies 9 pulg)

de estatura, entre cuatro (4) y doce (12)

años de edad, y entre 18 y 36 kg (40 y

80 lb) de peso, y hasta 45 kg (100 lb), si

lo recomienda el fabricante del sistema de

sujeción para niños). Muchas leyes

estatales, provinciales y municipales

exigen que los niños usen asientos

auxiliares aprobados hasta la edad de

ocho años, una estatura de 1,45 m (4 pies

9 pulg), o 36 kg (80 lb).

Los asientos auxiliares se deben usar hasta

que usted pueda responder que SÍ a

TODAS estas preguntas al sentar al niño

sin el asiento auxiliar:

E142595

• ¿El niño se puede sentar con la espalda

totalmente apoyada en el respaldo del

asiento del vehículo y con las rodillas

cómodamente flexionadas en el borde

del asiento?

• ¿El niño se puede sentar sin

encorvarse?

• ¿La correa pélvica del cinturón

descansa en un punto bajo, apoyada

en las caderas?

• ¿La correa del hombro está bien

centrada en el hombro y en el pecho?

• ¿El niño puede permanecer sentado

de esa manera durante todo el viaje?

Siempre use los asientos auxiliares junto

con el cinturón pélvico y de hombros del

vehículo.

Seguridad de los Niños

Tipos de asientos auxiliares

E68924

• Asientos auxiliares sin respaldo

Si el asiento auxiliar sin respaldo tiene una

cubierta removible, retírela. Si una posición

de asiento del vehículo tiene un respaldo

bajo y no tiene cabecera, un asiento auxiliar

sin respaldo puede ubicar la cabeza del

niño (medido en la parte superior de las

orejas) sobre la parte superior del asiento.

En este caso, mueva el asiento auxiliar sin

respaldo a otra posición de asiento con un

respaldo más alto o equipado con

cabecera y cinturón pélvico y de hombros

combinado, o utilice un asiento auxiliar con

respaldo alto.

E70710

• Asientos auxiliares con respaldo alto

Si no encuentra un asiento que pueda

apoyar de manera adecuada la cabeza del

niño cuando utilice un asiento auxiliar sin

respaldo, su mejor alternativa será un

asiento auxiliar con respaldo alto.

La forma y el tamaño de los niños y de los

asientos auxiliares varía

considerablemente. Seleccione un asiento

auxiliar que mantenga la correa pélvica en

un punto bajo, bien ajustada sobre las

caderas, y nunca sobre el vientre del niño,

y que le permita ajustar la correa del

hombro de tal modo que cruce sobre el

pecho del niño y descanse holgadamente

cerca del centro del hombro. En los

siguientes dibujos se compara el ajuste

ideal (centro) con una correa del hombro

incómodamente cercana al cuello y una

correa del hombro que pudiera deslizarse

fuera del hombro. Además, se muestra

cómo ajustar correctamente la correa

pélvica del cinturón, en un punto bajo y

bien ajustada sobre las caderas del niño.

Seguridad de los Niños

E142596

E142597

Si el asiento auxiliar se desliza en el asiento

del vehículo, colocar bajo el asiento auxiliar

una malla ahulada (se vende como

plataforma o como base para tapetes)

puede resolver el problema. No introduzca

ningún elemento más grueso que éste bajo

el asiento auxiliar. Consulte las

instrucciones del fabricante del asiento

auxiliar.

INSTALACIÓN DE ASIENTOS

PARA NIÑOS

Usando CINTURONES PÉLVICOS

Y DE HOMBROS

AVISOS

Las bolsas de aire pueden causar la

muerte o lesionar a un niño que se

encuentre en un asiento para niños.

NUNCA coloque un asiento para niños

orientado hacia atrás frente a una bolsa

de aire activa. Si debe usar un asiento para

niños orientado hacia delante en el asiento

delantero, mueva el asiento

completamente hacia atrás.

Los niños de hasta 12 años de edad

deben ir correctamente sujetos en el

asiento trasero cada vez que sea

posible.

Seguridad de los Niños

AVISOS

Dependiendo de dónde asegure el

sistema de seguridad para niños y

del diseño del mismo, éste puede

obstruir el acceso a ciertos conjuntos de

hebillas de cinturón de seguridad y anclajes

inferiores LATCH, dejando esas funciones

potencialmente inservibles. Para evitar el

riesgo de lesiones, los ocupantes sólo

deberían utilizar posiciones de asiento

donde ellos puedan estar correctamente

restringidos.

Al instalar un asiento de seguridad para

niños con cinturones pélvicos y de

hombros combinados:

• Utilice la hebilla del cinturón de

seguridad correcta para esa posición

de asiento.

• Inserte la lengüeta del cinturón en la

hebilla correspondiente hasta que

escuche un chasquido y sienta que se

engancha. Asegúrese de ajustar

firmemente la lengüeta en la hebilla.

• Mantenga el botón de apertura de la

hebilla apuntando hacia arriba y

opuesto al asiento de seguridad, con

la lengüeta entre el asiento para niños

y el botón de apertura, para evitar que

se desabroche accidentalmente.

• Coloque el respaldo del asiento del

vehículo en posición vertical.

• Ponga el cinturón de seguridad en el

modo de bloqueo automático.

Consulte el paso 5. Este vehículo no

requiere el uso de un broche de fijación.

Realice los siguientes pasos cuando instale

el asiento para niños con cinturones

pélvicos y de hombros combinados:

Nota: A pesar de que el asiento para niños

que aparece en la imagen es un asiento

orientado hacia delante, son los mismos

pasos para la instalación de un asiento

orientado hacia atrás.

E142528

1. Coloque el asiento de seguridad para

niños en un asiento con un cinturón

pélvico y de hombros combinado.

E142529

2. Jale hacia abajo la correa del hombro

y luego sujete la correa pélvica.

E142530

Seguridad de los Niños

3. Mientras sostiene juntas las dos

correas, pase la lengüeta a través del

asiento para niños de acuerdo con las

instrucciones del fabricante. Asegúrese

de que las correas del cinturón no

estén torcidas.

E142531

4. Inserte la lengüeta del cinturón en la

hebilla adecuada (la hebilla más

cercana a la dirección desde la cual

proviene la lengüeta) para esa posición

del asiento hasta que escuche un

chasquido y sienta que se ha

enganchado. Jale la lengüeta para

asegurarse de que esté firmemente

enganchada.

E142875

5. Para poner el retractor en el modo de

bloqueo automático, tome la parte del

hombro del cinturón y jale hacia abajo

hasta extraer todo el cinturón.

Nota: El modo de bloqueo automático está

disponible en los asientos del pasajero

delantero y traseros. Este vehículo no

requiere el uso de un broche de fijación.

6. Deje que el cinturón se retraiga para

eliminar el aflojamiento. El cinturón

emite un chasquido a medida que se

retrae para indicar que está en el modo

de bloqueo automático.

7. Trate de sacar el cinturón del retractor

para asegurarse que el retractor esté

en el modo de bloqueo automático

(será imposible sacar más el cinturón).

Si el retractor no está bloqueado,

desabroche el cinturón y repita los

pasos 5 y 6.

E142533

8. Elimine la holgura restante del

cinturón. Fuerce el asiento hacia abajo

con peso adicional, por ejemplo,

presionando o empujando hacia abajo

con las rodillas el sistema de sujeción

para niños mientras tira de la correa

del hombro hacia arriba para eliminar

la holgura del cinturón. Esto es

necesario para eliminar la holgura que

existirá una vez que se agregue el peso

del niño al sistema de seguridad para

niños. También ayuda a lograr un

ajuste adecuado del asiento del niño

al vehículo. En ocasiones, una leve

inclinación hacia la hebilla ayudará

también a eliminar la holgura restante

del cinturón.

Seguridad de los Niños

9. Enganche la correa de sujeción (si el

asiento para niños está instalado).

E142534

10. Antes de poner al niño en el asiento,

incline con fuerza el asiento hacia

delante y atrás para cerciorarse que

esté firmemente ajustado. Para

verificar esto, tome el asiento en el

trayecto del cinturón e intente

moverlo de lado a lado y de adelante

hacia atrás. Si está bien instalado, no

debe moverse más de 2.5 cm (1 pulg).

Ford recomienda verificar con un técnico

en seguridad de niños pasajeros certificado

de la NHTSA para cerciorarse de que el

sistema de seguridad para niños esté

correctamente instalado. En Canadá,

consulte a su oficina local de St. John

Ambulance para que le recomiende a un

técnico en seguridad de pasajeros

infantiles certificado.

Uso de anclajes inferiores Y

correas para niños (LATCH)

AVISOS

Nunca fije dos asientos de seguridad

para niños al mismo anclaje. En caso

de accidente, es posible que un

anclaje no sea lo suficientemente fuerte

como para sostener dos conexiones de

asientos para niños y puede romperse,

provocando lesiones graves o incluso la

muerte.

AVISOS

Dependiendo de dónde asegure el

sistema de seguridad para niños y

del diseño del mismo, éste puede

obstruir el acceso a ciertos conjuntos de

hebillas de cinturón de seguridad o

anclajes inferiores LATCH, dejando esas

funciones potencialmente inservibles. Para

evitar el riesgo de lesiones, los ocupantes

sólo deberían utilizar posiciones de asiento

donde ellos puedan estar correctamente

restringidos.

El sistema LATCH consta de tres puntos

de anclaje en el vehículo: dos (2) anclajes

inferiores ubicados donde se juntan el

respaldo del asiento y el cojín del asiento

(llamado recodo del asiento) y un (1)

anclaje superior para correas de sujeción

ubicado detrás del mismo asiento.

Los asientos de seguridad para niños

compatibles con LATCH tienen dos

conexiones rígidas o instaladas en la correa

que se conectan a los dos anclajes

inferiores en las posiciones de asiento

equipadas con LATCH en el vehículo. Este

tipo de método de conexión elimina la

necesidad de utilizar cinturones de

seguridad para fijar el asiento para niños;

sin embargo, se puede seguir usando el

cinturón de seguridad para enganchar el

asiento para niños. En el caso de los

asientos para niños orientados hacia

delante, la correa de sujeción superior

también debe engancharse en el anclaje

superior para correas si el asiento para

niños cuenta con correa de sujeción

superior.

Seguridad de los Niños

E142535

Su vehículo tiene anclajes inferiores LATCH

para la instalación de asientos para niños

en las posiciones de asiento marcadas con

el símbolo de asiento para niños.

E144054

Los anclajes LATCH se localizan en la

sección posterior del asiento trasero, entre

el cojín y el respaldo, debajo de los

símbolos que se muestran. Siga las

instrucciones del fabricante del asiento

para niños para instalar correctamente los

asientos para niños con conexiones

LATCH. Siga las instrucciones para

enganchar los asientos de seguridad para

niños con correas de sujeción.

Una las conexiones inferiores LATCH del

asiento para niños sólo a los anclajes que

se muestran.

Uso de anclajes inferiores interiores de

los asientos exteriores (uso del asiento

central)

ALERTA

El espacio estándar para los anclajes

inferiores LATCH es de 11 mm

(28 pulg) de centro a centro. No use

anclajes inferiores LATCH para la posición

de asiento central a menos que las

instrucciones del fabricante del asiento

para niños lo permitan y especifiquen el

uso de anclajes separados al menos con

la separación de los incluidos en este

vehículo.

Los anclajes inferiores del centro de la

segunda fila de asientos traseros tienen

una separación de 46 centímetros (18

pulgadas). No se puede instalar un asiento

para niños con conexiones LATCH rígidas

en el asiento central. Los asientos para

niños compatibles con LATCH (con

conexiones en el tejido del cinturón) sólo

se pueden utilizar en esta posición de

asiento, siempre y cuando las instrucciones

del fabricante del asiento para niños

permitan el uso con el espacio de anclajes

indicado. No fije un asiento para niños en

cualquier anclaje inferior usado para la

instalación del asiento para niños si hay

un asiento para niños cerca fijado a ese

anclaje.

Cada vez que use el asiento de seguridad,

revise que el asiento esté correctamente

sujeto a los anclajes inferiores y al anclaje

para correas de sujeción. Jale el asiento

hacia delante y atrás y de lado a lado para

cerciorarse de que esté asegurado en el

vehículo. Si está bien instalado, el asiento

no debería moverse más de 2.5 cm (1 pulg).

Si el asiento de seguridad no está

correctamente anclado, el riesgo de que

un niño resulte lesionado en un choque

aumenta considerablemente.

Seguridad de los Niños

Combinación de cinturones de

seguridad y anclajes inferiores LATCH

para la sujeción de asientos de

seguridad para niños

Cuando se usan juntos, cualquiera de los

dos puede conectarse primero, siempre y

cuando se logre una instalación correcta.

Enganche la correa de sujeción después,

si se incluye con el asiento para niños.

Uso de correas de sujeción

Muchos asientos de seguridad

para niños orientados hacia

delante incluyen una correa de

sujeción que se extiende desde la parte

posterior del asiento de seguridad y se

engancha en un punto de anclaje

denominado anclaje superior para correas

de sujeción. Las correas de sujeción están

disponibles como accesorio para muchos

modelos antiguos de asientos de

seguridad.

Comuníquese con el fabricante del asiento

de seguridad para niños a fin de ordenar

una correa de sujeción u obtener una más

larga si la de su asiento de seguridad no

logra alcanzar el anclaje superior para

correas que le corresponde en el vehículo.

Cuando se ha instalado el asiento de

seguridad para niños, ya sea que use el

cinturón de seguridad, los anclajes

inferiores del sistema LATCH, o ambos,

puede conectar la correa de sujeción

superior.

Los anclajes para correas de sujeción de

su vehículo están en las siguientes

posiciones (vistas desde arriba):

E142537

Realice los siguientes pasos para instalar

un asiento de seguridad para niños con los

anclajes de correas de sujeción:

Nota: Si instala un asiento para niños con

conexiones rígidas LATCH, no apriete la

correa de sujeción tanto que el asiento para

niños se levante del cojín del asiento del

vehículo cuando el niño esté sentado en él.

Mantenga la correa de sujeción bien

ajustada, pero sin que se levante la parte

delantera del asiento para niños. Mantener

el asiento para niños tocando levemente el

asiento del vehículo, proporciona la mejor

protección en caso de un accidente grave.

1. Pase la correa de sujeción del asiento

de seguridad para niños por encima del

respaldo del asiento. En el caso de los

asientos exteriores, pase la correa de

sujeción por debajo de la cabecera y

entre los postes de la misma. Para el

asiento central, pase la correa de

sujeción sobre la parte superior de la

cabecera. De ser necesario, también

puede desmontar las cabeceras.

Seguridad de los Niños

E142538

2. Localice el anclaje correcto en el panel

posterior del asiento posteior para

conocer posición de asiento trasero

seleccionada. Los anclajes están

etiquetados con el símbolo de correa

de sujeción y están parcialmente

cubiertos por el panel de separación.

Tire el panel hacia atrás para exponer

completamente los anclajes.

E142539

3. Enganche la correa de sujeción al

anclaje tal como se ilustra.

4. Ajuste la correa de sujeción del asiento

de seguridad para niños según las

instrucciones del fabricante. Si el

sistema de seguridad para niños está

equipado con una correa de sujeción y

el fabricante del sistema de seguridad

para niños recomienda su uso, Ford

también recomienda su uso.

SEGUROS A PRUEBA DE

NIÑOS

Al colocar estos seguros, las puertas

traseras no se pueden abrir desde el

interior.

E112197

Los seguros a prueba de niños están

ubicados en el borde trasero de cada

puerta trasera y deben colocarse por

separado para cada puerta.

• Lado del conductor: gire hacia la

izquierda para bloquear y hacia la

derecha para desbloquear.

• Lado del pasajero: gire hacia la derecha

para bloquear y hacia la izquierda para

desbloquear.

Seguridad de los Niños

FUNCIONAMIENTO

AVISOS

Maneje y viaje siempre con el

respaldo en posición vertical y con

la correa pélvica del cinturón bien

ajustada, lo más baja posible y apoyada

sobre los huesos de las caderas.

Para reducir el riesgo de lesiones,

asegúrese de sentar a los niños

donde estén apropiadamente

asegurados.

Nunca deje que un pasajero lleve a

un niño en su regazo mientras el

vehículo esté en movimiento. El

pasajero no puede proteger al niño de una

lesión en caso de una colisión.

Todos los ocupantes del vehículo,

incluido el conductor, deben usar

siempre los cinturones de seguridad

en forma apropiada, incluso si se cuenta

con un sistema de sujeción suplementario

de bolsas de aire.

Es extremadamente peligroso viajar

en el área de carga de un vehículo,

ya sea dentro o fuera de él. En una

colisión, la gente que viaja en estas áreas

es la más propensa a quedar herida o

morir. No permita que la gente viaje en

ningún área de su vehículo que no esté

equipada con cinturones de seguridad.

Asegúrese de que todos los pasajeros de

su vehículo estén en un asiento y usen

apropiadamente un cinturón de seguridad.

En un choque con volcadura, la

probabilidad de muerte es mucho

mayor para una persona que no lleva

cinturón de seguridad, que para una que

sí lo lleva.

AVISOS

Cada asiento de su vehículo tiene un

cinturón de seguridad específico, que

consta de una hebilla y una lengüeta

diseñadas para trabajar juntas. 1) Utilice

la correa del hombro sólo en el hombro del

lado externo. Nunca pase la correa del

hombro por debajo de su brazo. 2) Nunca

pase el cinturón de seguridad alrededor de

su cuello, por encima del hombro del lado

interno. 3) Nunca utilice un cinturón de

seguridad para más de una persona.

Cuando sea posible, todos los niños

de hasta 12 años deben ir

correctamente sujetos en el asiento

trasero.

Los cinturones de seguridad y los

asientos pueden calentarse en un

vehículo que ha permanecido

cerrado durante la época veraniega y

podrían causarle quemaduras a un niño

pequeño. Revise las cubiertas de los

asientos y las hebillas antes de poner a un

niño en algún lugar cercano a ellas.

Los pasajeros del asiento delantero

y trasero, incluidas las mujeres

embarazadas, deben usar los

cinturones de seguridad para tener una

protección óptima en caso de accidente.

Todos los asientos de este vehículo

cuentan con cinturones pélvicos y de

hombros. Todos los ocupantes del

vehículo deben usar siempre los cinturones

de seguridad en forma apropiada, incluso

si se cuenta con un sistema de sujeción

suplementario de bolsas de aire.

El sistema de cinturón de seguridad consta

de:

• Cinturones de seguridad pélvicos y de

hombros.

• Cinturón de seguridad de hombros con

modo de bloqueo automático (a

excepción del cinturón de seguridad

del conductor).

Cinturones de Seguridad

• Ajustador de altura en los asientos

delanteros.

• Retractor y pretensor de ancla en los

asientos delanteros.

• Sensor de tensión del cinturón en el

asiento del pasajero delantero.

• Luz de advertencia y campanilla

indicadora del cinturón de seguridad.

• Sensores de choque y sistema de

monitoreo con indicador de estado.

Los pretensores del cinturón de seguridad

están diseñados para activarse en choques

frontales, semifrontales y laterales y en

volcaduras. Los pretensores del cinturón

de seguridad del retractor y el ancla en las

posiciones de asiento delantero están

diseñados para ajustar firmemente los

cinturones de seguridad contra el cuerpo

del ocupante cuando se activan. Esto

ayuda a aumentar la eficacia de los

cinturones de seguridad. En choques

frontales, los pretensores del cinturón de

seguridad se pueden activar solos o, si el

choque es suficientemente grave, se

pueden activar junto con las bolsas de aire

delanteras.

SUJECION DE LOS

CINTURONES DE SEGURIDAD

Los sistemas de seguridad de los asientos

delanteros exteriores y traseros del

vehículo son una combinación de

cinturones pélvicos y de hombros.

E142587

1. Inserte la lengüeta del cinturón en la

hebilla correcta (la hebilla más cercana

a la dirección de la cual proviene la

lengüeta) hasta que escuche un

chasquido y sienta que se ha

enganchado. Asegúrese de ajustar

firmemente la lengüeta en la hebilla.

E142588

2. Para desabrocharlo, oprima el botón

de apertura y quite la lengüeta de la

hebilla.

E142589

Cinturones de Seguridad

Durante el uso, los cinturones de seguridad

traseros deben colocarse en las guías del

cinturón en los asientos traseros.

Protección de mujeres

embarazadas

ALERTA

Siempre conduzca con el respaldo

de su asiento vertical y el cinturón de

seguridad correctamente abrochado.

La parte pélvica del cinturón de seguridad

se debe ajustar cómodamente y posicionar

lo más abajo posible, sobre los huesos de

las caderas. La parte del hombro del

cinturón de seguridad se debe posicionar

a lo largo del pecho. Las mujeres

embarazadas también lo deben utilizar de

esta forma. Consulte la ilustración

siguiente.

E142590

Las mujeres embarazadas siempre deben

utilizar su cinturón de seguridad. La correa

pélvica del cinturón combinado debe

quedar lo más baja posible, apoyada sobre

los huesos de las caderas y cruzando por

debajo del vientre, ajustada del modo más

firme pero cómodo posible. La correa del

hombro se debe posicionar de tal modo

que pase sobre la parte media del hombro

y el centro del pecho.

Modos de bloqueo de los

cinturones de seguridad

AVISOS

Después de cualquier choque del

vehículo, el sistema de cinturones de

seguridad de todos los asientos de

pasajeros debe ser revisado por un

distribuidor autorizado para verificar que

la función del retractor de bloqueo

automático de los asientos para niños siga

operando correctamente. Además, todos

los cinturones de seguridad deben

revisarse para comprobar que funcionen

correctamente.

EL MECANISMO DE CINTURÓN Y

RETRACTOR DEBE REEMPLAZARSE

si el dispositivo retractor de bloqueo

automático del mecanismo de cinturones

de seguridad o algún otro dispositivo de

éste no funciona correctamente al ser

revisado por un distribuidor autorizado. Si

no se reemplaza el conjunto de cinturón y

retractor, puede aumentar el riesgo de

lesiones en caso de un choque.

Todos los sistemas de seguridad del

vehículo son cinturones pélvicos y de

hombros combinados. El cinturón de

seguridad del conductor solo tiene el

primer tipo de modo de bloqueo, mientras

que los cinturones del asiento del pasajero

delantero y de los asientos traseros tienen

los dos modos de bloqueo que se

describen a continuación:

Cinturones de Seguridad

Modo sensible del vehículo

Éste es el modo normal del retractor que

permite el libre ajuste de la longitud de la

correa del hombro según los movimientos

del pasajero y el bloqueo según el

movimiento del vehículo. Por ejemplo, si

el conductor frena repentinamente, hace

un viraje muy cerrado o el vehículo recibe

un impacto de aproximadamente 8 km/h

(5 mph) o más, los cinturones de seguridad

combinados se bloquean para ayudar a

reducir el movimiento hacia delante del

conductor y de los pasajeros.

Además, el retractor está diseñado para

bloquearse cuando se jala rápidamente la

correa. Si esto ocurre, permita que el

cinturón se retraiga ligeramente y jale otra

vez la correa hacia fuera, de manera lenta

y controlada.

Modo de bloqueo automático

En este modo, la correa del hombro se

bloquea previamente en forma

automática. El cinturón aún se podrá

retraer para eliminar la holgura en la correa

del hombro. El cinturón de seguridad del

conductor no tiene modo de bloqueo

automático.

Cuándo usar el modo de bloqueo

automático

Este modo se debe usar cada vez que se

instale un asiento de seguridad para niños,

salvo un asiento auxiliar, en el asiento del

pasajero delantero o en el asiento trasero.

Los niños de hasta 12 años deben ir

correctamente sujetos en el asiento

trasero siempre que sea posible. Ver

Seguridad de los Niños (página 15).

Uso del modo de bloqueo automático

E142591

1. Abroche el cinturón pélvico y de

hombros combinado.

2. Sujete la correa del hombro y jálela

hacia abajo hasta extraer todo el

cinturón.

Deje que el cinturón se retraiga. Al retraerse

el cinturón, se escuchará un chasquido.

Esto indica que el cinturón de seguridad

está ahora en el modo de bloqueo

automático.

Cómo desactivar el modo de bloqueo

automático

Desabroche el cinturón pélvico y de

hombros combinado y deje que se retraiga

por completo para desactivar el modo de

bloqueo automático y activar el modo de

bloqueo sensible (emergencia) del

vehículo.

Cómo quitar los cinturones de

seguridad de los asientos traseros

laterales

Los cinturones de seguridad de los

asientos traseros laterales se pueden

bloquear si el asiento abatido se regresa

firmemente a su posición vertical. Para

desbloquearlos, puede usar los siguientes

procedimientos.

En los vehículos con asientos traseros

reclinables:

Cinturones de Seguridad

1. Recline el asiento a su posición

completamente abatida. Ver

Cinturones de Seguridad (página

28).

2. El cinturón de seguridad se

desbloqueará.

3. Regrese el asiento a la posición vertical

deseada.

En el caso de vehículos con asientos que

no se reclinan o que tienen el asiento

bloqueado en su posición de reclinada

trasera completa:

1. Tome la correa del cinturón de

seguridad en la parte superior del

respaldo del asiento.

2. Jale la correa hacia adelante

firmemente.

3. Después de jalar el cinturón hacia

delante, permita que se vuelva a

introducir en el retractor lo más posible.

Si es necesario, presione el asiento

hacia atrás para que la correa se

retraiga todavía más.

4. El cinturón de seguridad se

desbloqueará.

5. Si el cinturón de seguridad no se

desbloquea, repita los pasos 1 a 3.

Conjunto de extensión para

cinturón de seguridad

ALERTA

Ubique los ajustadores de altura de

la correa del hombro de tal modo

que ésta se apoye en la parte media

de su hombro. Si el cinturón de seguridad

no se ajusta adecuadamente, se puede

reducir su eficacia y aumentar el riesgo de

lesiones en un choque.

Si el cinturón de seguridad es demasiado

corto cuando se extiende completamente,

puede obtener un conjunto de extensión

en un distribuidor autorizado.

Use solo extensiones fabricadas por el

mismo proveedor del cinturón de

seguridad. La identificación del fabricante

se encuentra al final de la correa en la

etiqueta. Además, use la extensión solo si

el cinturón de seguridad es demasiado

corto para usted al extenderlo

completamente.

AJUSTE DE ALTURA DE LOS

CINTURONES DE SEGURIDAD

ALERTA

Ubique los ajustadores de altura de

la correa del hombro de tal modo

que ésta se apoye en la parte media

de su hombro. Si el cinturón de seguridad

no se ajusta adecuadamente, se puede

reducir su eficacia y aumentar el riesgo de

lesiones en un choque.

E87511

Ajuste la altura de la correa del hombro de

tal manera que ésta se apoye en la parte

media de su hombro.

Para ajustar la altura de la correa del

hombro, presione el botón y deslice el

ajustador de altura hacia arriba o hacia

abajo. Suelte el botón y jale el ajustador

de altura hacia abajo para asegurarse de

que quede bloqueado en su lugar.

Cinturones de Seguridad

LUZ DE ADVERTENCIA DEL

CINTURÓN DE SEGURIDAD Y

REPIQUE INDICADOR

Esta luz se ilumina y se

escuchará una advertencia

audible si el cinturón de

seguridad del conductor no ha sido

abrochado cuando se enciende la ignición.

Condiciones de funcionamiento

Entonces...Si...

La luz de advertencia del cinturón de segu-

ridad se ilumina entre 1 y 2 minutos y la

campanilla de advertencia suena entre 4 y

8 segundos.

El cinturón de seguridad del conductor no

se abrocha antes de poner el interruptor de

encendido en la posición ON...

La luz de advertencia del cinturón de segu-

ridad y la campanilla de advertencia se

apagan.

El cinturón de seguridad del conductor se

abrocha mientras la luz indicadora está

encendida y la campanilla de advertencia

está sonando...

La luz de advertencia del cinturón de segu-

ridad y la campanilla indicadora perma-

necen apagadas.

El cinturón de seguridad del conductor se

abrocha antes de que el interruptor de

encendido se coloque en la posición ON...

RECORDATORIO DE

CINTURONES DE SEGURIDAD

Belt-Minder®

Esta característica complementa la

función de advertencia del cinturón de

seguridad al proporcionar recordatorios

adicionales haciendo sonar en forma

intermitente una campanilla e iluminando

la luz de advertencia del cinturón de

seguridad cuando el asiento del conductor

y del pasajero delantero estén ocupados

y los cinturones de seguridad continúen

desbrochados.

Esta función utiliza información del

sistema de sensores del pasajero delantero

para determinar si hay un pasajero en el

asiento delantero y por lo tanto, si necesita

una advertencia. Para evitar que se active

la característica Belt-Minder cuando

coloca objetos en el asiento del pasajero

delantero, solo se emitirán advertencias

para los ocupantes grandes, según lo

determinado por el sistema de sensores

del pasajero delantero.

Si las advertencias de Belt-Minder han

finalizado (duran aproximadamente 5

minutos) para un ocupante (conductor o

pasajero delantero), el otro ocupante aún

puede activar la característica Belt-Minder.

Cinturones de Seguridad

Entonces...Si...

La característica Belt-Minder no se activará.Los cinturones de seguridad del conductor

y del pasajero delantero se abrochan antes

de que el interruptor de encendido se gire

a la posición ON o antes de que hayan

transcurrido 1 a 2 minutos de haber colo-

cado el interruptor de encendido en ON...

Cuando la característica Belt-Minder está

activa, se enciende la luz de advertencia de

cinturón de seguridad y suena la campanilla

de advertencia durante seis segundos cada

25 segundos, y se repite durante aproxima-

damente cinco minutos o hasta que se

abrochen los cinturones de seguridad.

El cinturón de seguridad del conductor o

del pasajero delantero no se abrocha antes

de que el vehículo haya alcanzado al menos

9,7 km/h (6 mph) y hayan transcurrido de

1 a 2 minutos desde que el interruptor de

encendido se giró a la posición ON...

Cuando la característica Belt-Minder está

activa, se enciende la luz de advertencia de

cinturón de seguridad y suena la campanilla

de advertencia durante seis segundos cada

25 segundos, y se repite durante aproxima-

damente cinco minutos o hasta que se

abrochen los cinturones de seguridad.

El cinturón de seguridad del conductor o

del pasajero delantero permanece desabro-

chado durante aproximadamente un

minuto mientras el vehículo se desplaza a

menos de 9,7 km/h (6 mph) y si transcurren

más de 1 a 2 minutos desde que el inte-

rruptor de encendido se giró a la posición

ON...

Desactivación y activación de la

función Belt-Minder

ALERTA

Si bien el sistema le permite

desactivarla, esta función está

diseñada para mejorar sus

posibilidades de sobrevivir a un accidente

cuando esté con el cinturón abrochado.

Recomendamos que deje la función

activada para usted y otros que puedan

utilizar el vehículo. Para reducir el riesgo

de lesiones, no active ni desactive la

función mientras maneja.

Nota: La advertencia del conductor y del

pasajero delantero se desactivan y se

activan de modo independiente. Cuando

desactive o active una posición de asiento,

no abroche la otra posición, ya que esto

terminará el proceso.

Lea detalladamente los pasos 1 al 4 antes

de continuar con el procedimiento de

programación de activación o

desactivación.

La función se puede activar y desactivar

efectuando el siguiente procedimiento:

Antes de efectuar el procedimiento,

asegúrese de que:

• El freno de estacionamiento esté

puesto

• La palanca de cambios está en

posición P

Cinturones de Seguridad

• El encendido está en OFF.

• Los cinturones de seguridad del

conductor y del pasajero delantero

estén desabrochados.

1. Active el encendido. NO ARRANQUE

EL MOTOR.

2. Espere hasta que la luz de advertencia

de cinturón de seguridad se apague

(aproximadamente un minuto).

Después del paso 2, espere unos cinco

segundos más, antes de continuar con

el paso 3. Una vez iniciado el paso 3, es

necesario completar el procedimiento

en menos de 60 segundos.

3. Abroche y desabroche el cinturón de

seguridad del asiento que desee

desactivar nueve veces, a velocidad

moderada, finalizando con el cinturón

desabrochado. Después del paso 3, la

luz de advertencia del cinturón de

seguridad se encenderá.

4. Mientras la luz de advertencia del

cinturón de seguridad está encendida,

abroche y luego desabroche el cinturón

de seguridad. Después del Paso 4, la

luz de advertencia del cinturón de

seguridad destellará tres veces como

confirmación.

• Esto desactivará la función para ese

asiento si se encuentra actualmente

activada.

• Esto activará la función para ese

asiento si se encuentra actualmente

desactivada.

MANTENIMIENTO DEL

SISTEMA DE SUJECIÓN PARA

NIÑOS Y DE LOS CINTURONES

DE SEGURIDAD

Revise los cinturones de seguridad del

vehículo y los sistemas de asientos de

seguridad para niños en forma periódica

para asegurarse de que funcionen

correctamente y que no estén dañados.

Revise los cinturones de seguridad del

vehículo y de los asientos para niños para

asegurarse de que no haya roturas,

rasgaduras o cortes. Reemplácelas si es

necesario. Después de un choque se deben

inspeccionar todos los conjuntos de

cinturón de seguridad, lo que incluye

retractores, hebillas, mecanismos de la

hebilla del cinturón de seguridad del

asiento delantero, mecanismos de soporte

de la hebilla (barra de deslizamiento, si

está equipada), ajustadores de altura del

cinturón del hombro (si está equipado),

guía de la correa del hombro en el respaldo

(si está equipado), anclajes para correas

de sujeción y sistema LATCH de los

asientos de seguridad para niños, y

accesorios de fijación. Lea las instrucciones

del fabricante del sistema de sujeción para

niños para conocer sus recomendaciones

específicas de inspección y

mantenimiento. Ford Motor Company

recomienda reemplazar todos los

conjuntos de cinturones de seguridad que

hayan estado en uso en los vehículos

involucrados en un choque. Sin embargo,

si el choque fue leve y un distribuidor

autorizado considera que los cinturones

no presentan daños y siguen funcionando

correctamente, no es necesario

reemplazarlos. Los conjuntos de cinturón

de seguridad que no hayan estado en uso

al producirse un accidente, también

deberán ser revisados y reemplazados si

se detectan daños o fallas en su

funcionamiento.

Cinturones de Seguridad

Cuide adecuadamente los cinturones de

seguridad. Ver Cuidado del vehículo

(página 260).

Cinturones de Seguridad

Personal Safety System (Sistema de

seguridad personal) proporciona un mejor

nivel total de protección de choques

frontales a los ocupantes de los asientos

delanteros y está diseñado para ayudar a

reducir aún más el riesgo de lesiones

relacionadas con la bolsa de aire. El

sistema tiene la capacidad de analizar las

diferentes condiciones de los ocupantes y

la gravedad del choque antes de activar

los dispositivos de seguridad correctos

para proteger mejor a una variedad de

ocupantes, en diversas situaciones,

durante un choque frontal.

El sistema de seguridad personal del

vehículo consta de:

• Dispositivos de sujeción

suplementarios de bolsas de aire de

etapa dual para el conductor y el

pasajero.

• Cinturones de seguridad de los

asientos exteriores delanteros con

pretensores, retractores de

administración de energía (sólo

primera fila) y sensores de uso del

cinturón de seguridad.

• Sensor de posición del asiento del

conductor.

• Sistema de sensores del pasajero

delantero.

• Luz indicadora de bolsa de aire del

pasajero activa e inactiva.

• Sensores de gravedad de choque

frontal.

• Módulo de control de sistemas de

seguridad con sensores de impacto y

seguridad.

• Luz de advertencia y campanilla de

respaldo del sistema de sujeción.

• El cableado eléctrico de las bolsas de

aire, sensores de choque, pretensores

del cinturón de seguridad, sensores de

uso del cinturón de seguridad

delantero, sensor de posición del

asiento del conductor, sistema de

sensores del pasajero delantero y luces

indicadoras.

¿Cómo funciona el sistema de

seguridad personal?

El Sistema de seguridad personal puede

adaptar la estrategia de despliegue de los

dispositivos de seguridad de su vehículo

según la gravedad del choque y las

condiciones de los ocupantes. Todos los

sensores de choque y de los ocupantes

proporcionan información acerca del

Módulo de control de los sistemas de

seguridad. En un choque, el módulo de

control de seguridad puede accionar los

pretensores del cinturón de seguridad y

puede activar uno o ambos estados del

sistema de sujeción suplementario de

bolsas de aire de doble etapa según la

gravedad del choque y la condición de los

ocupantes.

Personal Safety System™

FUNCIONAMIENTO

AVISOS

Las bolsas de aire NO se inflan lenta

y suavemente, y el riesgo de sufrir

lesiones provocadas por el

despliegue de una bolsa de aire es mayor

cerca de la vestidura que cubre el módulo

de la bolsa de aire.

Todos los ocupantes del vehículo,

incluido el conductor, deben usar

siempre los cinturones de seguridad

en forma apropiada, incluso si se cuenta

con un sistema de sujeción suplementario

de bolsas de aire.

Todos los niños de hasta 12 años

deberán viajar siempre en el asiento

trasero y utilizar en todo momento

sistemas de seguridad apropiados para

niños.

Nunca coloque el brazo sobre el

módulo de la bolsa de aire, ya que

ésta puede provocar graves fracturas

a los brazos u otras lesiones al inflarse.

Las bolsas de aire pueden causar la

muerte o lesionar a un niño que se

encuentre en un asiento para niños.

NUNCA coloque un asiento para niños

orientado hacia atrás frente a una bolsa

de aire activa. Si debe usar un asiento para

niños orientado hacia delante en el asiento

delantero, mueva el asiento

completamente hacia atrás.

No intente revisar, reparar ni

modificar los sistemas de sujeción

suplementarios de bolsas de aire ni

sus fusibles. Comuníquese de inmediato

con su distribuidor autorizado.

Después del inflado, se calientan

varios componentes del sistema de

bolsa de aire. No los toque después

del inflado.

AVISOS

Si la bolsa de aire se ha inflado, ya

no volverá a funcionar y se debe

reemplazar de inmediato. Si no

reemplaza la bolsa de aire, el área sin

reparar aumentará el riesgo de lesiones en

caso de un choque.

Todos los ocupantes del vehículo,

incluido el conductor, deben usar

siempre los cinturones de seguridad

en forma apropiada, incluso si se cuenta

con un sistema de sujeción suplementario

de bolsas de aire.

Las bolsas de aire son un sistema de

sujeción suplementario y están diseñadas

para funcionar junto con los cinturones de

seguridad, para proteger al conductor y al

pasajero delantero de algunas lesiones en

la parte superior del cuerpo. Las bolsas de

aire NO se inflan lentamente; existe el

riesgo de que al inflarse, provoquen

lesiones.

Nota: Si se abre una bolsa de aire,

escuchará un fuerte sonido y verá una nube

de residuos de polvo inofensivo. Esto es

normal.

Sistema de Seguridad Complementaria

Las bolsas de aire se inflan y desinflan

rápidamente al activarse. Después de que

la bolsa de aire se infla, es normal observar

residuos de polvo, similares al humo, u oler

el propelente quemado. Esto puede

consistir en fécula de maíz, polvos de talco

(para lubricar la bolsa) o compuestos de

sodio (por ejemplo, bicarbonato de sodio),

producidos por el proceso de combustión

que infla la bolsa de aire. Es posible que

haya pequeñas cantidades de hidróxido

de sodio que pueden irritar la piel y los ojos,

pero ninguno de los residuos es tóxico. Si

bien el sistema está diseñado para ayudar

a reducir lesiones graves, el contacto con

una bolsa de aire que se infla también

podría causar abrasiones o hinchazones.

La pérdida temporal de la audición es

también una posibilidad como resultado

del ruido asociado al inflado de una bolsa

de aire. Debido a que las bolsas de aire se

deben inflar rápidamente y con una fuerza

considerable, existe el riesgo de muerte o

de lesiones graves tales como fracturas,

lesiones faciales y oculares o lesiones

internas, particularmente para los

ocupantes que no cumplen con las

medidas de seguridad o están mal

sentados en el momento en que la bolsa

de aire se infla. Por lo tanto, es

extremadamente importante que los

ocupantes estén correctamente sujetos y

lo más lejos posible del módulo de la bolsa

de aire, sin dejar de mantener el control

del vehículo.

Las bolsas de aire no requieren

mantenimiento de rutina.

Sistema de alerta posterior a un

choque SOS POST-CRASH ALERT

SYSTEM

El sistema hace destellar las luces

direccionales y hace sonar el claxon

(intermitentemente) en caso de un

impacto grave que despliegue una bolsa

de aire (delantera, lateral, lateral tipo

cortina o Safety Canopy) o los pretensores

de los cinturones de seguridad.

El claxon y las luces se apagan cuando:

• se oprime el botón de control de

emergencia

• se presionar el botón de emergencia

en el transmisor de entrada a control

remoto, o

• el vehículo se queda sin energía.

BOLSAS DE AIRE DEL

CONDUCTOR Y DEL PASAJERO

AVISOS

Nunca coloque el brazo ni ningún

objeto sobre un módulo de bolsa de

aire. El apoyo de un brazo sobre una

bolsa de aire que se despliega puede

provocar graves fracturas a los brazos u

otras lesiones. Colocar objetos sobre o al

lado del área de inflado de la bolsa de aire

puede hacer que estos objetos sean

proyectados por la bolsa de aire hacia su

rostro y torso, causándole lesiones graves.

Las bolsas de aire pueden causar la

muerte o lesionar a un niño que se

encuentre en un asiento para niños.

Nunca coloque un asiento para niños

orientado hacia atrás frente a una bolsa

de aire activa. Si debe usar un asiento para

niños orientado hacia delante en el asiento

delantero, mueva el asiento

completamente hacia atrás.

Sistema de Seguridad Complementaria

E74302

Las bolsas de aire del conductor y el

pasajero delantero se desplegarán durante

colisiones frontales o casi frontales

importantes.

El sistema de bolsas de aire para el

conductor y el pasajero delantero consta

de:

• Módulos de bolsas de aire del

conductor y el pasajero

• Sistema de sensores del pasajero

delantero.

• Sensores de choque y sistema de

monitoreo con indicador de estado.

Ver Sensores de choque e indicador

de bolsas de aire (página 46).

Ajuste adecuado de asiento de

conductor y pasajero delantero

ALERTA

La National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) recomienda

una distancia mínima de al menos

25 cm (10 pulg) entre el pecho de un

ocupante y el módulo de la bolsa de aire

del conductor.

Para colocarse a una distancia correcta de

la bolsa de aire:

• Mueva su asiento hacia atrás lo más

posible, sin dejar de alcanzar

cómodamente los pedales.

• Recline levemente el asiento (uno o

dos grados) desde la posición vertical.

Después de que todos los pasajeros hayan

ajustado sus asientos y puesto los

cinturones de seguridad, es muy

importante que mantengan su posición

vertical.’ Un ocupante correctamente

sentado se sienta siempre derecho contra

el respaldo y en el centro del cojín, con sus

pies cómodamente extendidos. Sentarse

de manera incorrecta puede aumentar la

probabilidad de lesiones en el caso de un

choque. Por ejemplo, si un pasajero viaja

en una posición irregular, se recuesta,

voltea hacia los lados, se sienta hacia

delante, se inclina hacia delante o hacia

los lados o levanta uno o ambos pies,

aumenta en gran medida la probabilidad

de sufrir lesiones en un choque.

Los niños y las bolsas de aire

ALERTA

Las bolsas de aire pueden causar la

muerte o lesionar a un niño que se

encuentre en un asiento para niños.

NUNCA coloque un asiento para niños

orientado hacia atrás frente a una bolsa

de aire activa. Si debe usar un asiento para

niños orientado hacia delante en el asiento

delantero, mueva el asiento

completamente hacia atrás.

Sistema de Seguridad Complementaria

E142846

Los niños siempre deben estar asegurados

correctamente. Las estadísticas de

accidentes demuestran que los niños están

más seguros cuando viajan en el asiento

trasero, con los sistemas de seguridad

ajustados correctamente, que cuando

viajan en el asiento delantero. Si no se

siguen estas instrucciones puede aumentar

el riesgo de lesiones en una colisión.

BOLSA DE AIRE PARA

RODILLAS

La bolsa de aire para rodillas del lado del

conductor está ubicada debajo del tablero

de instrumentos. El sistema funciona junto

con la bolsa de aire delantera del

conductor para ayudar a reducir lesiones

en las piernas. Cuando la bolsa de aire del

conductor se activa en un choque, la bolsa

de aire para rodillas se despliega desde la

parte de abajo del tablero de instrumentos.

Al igual que con las bolsas de aire

delanteras y laterales, es importante estar

correctamente sentado y asegurado para

reducir el riesgo de muerte o de heridas

graves.

Asegúrese de que la bolsa de

aire para rodillas funcione

correctamente. Ver Sensores

de choque e indicador de bolsas de aire

(página 46).

SISTEMA DE DETECCIÓN DEL

PASAJERO DELANTERO

AVISOS

Incluso con Sistemas de seguridad

avanzados, los niños hasta 12 años

deben ser asegurados

adecuadamente en el asiento trasero.

Sentarse de manera incorrecta fuera

de posición con el respaldo muy

reclinado hacia atrás puede levantar

el peso del cojín del asiento y afectar la

decisión del sistema de sensores del

pasajero, lo que puede ocasionar lesiones

graves o la muerte en un choque.

Siéntese siempre derecho contra el

respaldo, con los pies en el piso.

Cualquier cambio o modificación en

el asiento del pasajero delantero

puede afectar el funcionamiento del

sistema de detección del pasajero

delantero.

El sistema funciona con sensores que son

parte del asiento y cinturón de seguridad

del pasajero delantero para detectar la

presencia de un ocupante correctamente

sentado y para determinar si la bolsa de

aire frontal del pasajero delantero debe

activarse (puede inflarse) o no.

E145987

Sistema de Seguridad Complementaria

El sistema sensor del pasajero delantero

usa un indicador que se ilumina y

permanece encendido para recordarle que

la bolsa de aire frontal del pasajero

delantero está desactivada. La luz

indicadora se ubica en el área central del

tablero de instrumentos.

Nota: La luz indicadora de desactivación

de la bolsa de aire del pasajero se iluminará

brevemente al activar por primera vez el

encendido para confirmar que funciona.

El sistema sensor del pasajero delantero

está diseñado para desactivar (no inflar)

la bolsa de aire frontal del pasajero

delantero cuando se detecta que dicho

asiento está desocupado o que tiene

instalado un asiento para niños orientado

hacia atrás, un sistema de sujeción para

niños orientado hacia adelante o un

asiento auxiliar.

• Cuando el sistema sensor del pasajero

delantero desactiva la bolsa de aire

frontal del pasajero delantero (para

que no se infle), el indicador de estado

de la bolsa de aire enciende

permanentemente la luz para

recordarle que la bolsa de aire frontal

del pasajero delantero está

desactivada.

• Si se instala un sistema de sujeción

para niños y la luz indicadora de estado

de la bolsa de aire del pasajero está

encendida, apague el vehículo, retire

el sistema de sujeción para niños del

vehículo y vuelva a instalarlo siguiendo

las instrucciones del fabricante.

El sistema de sensores del pasajero

delantero está diseñado para activar

(puede inflarse) la bolsa de aire delantera

del pasajero delantero cada vez que el

sistema detecte que una persona de

tamaño adulto está correctamente

sentada en esta ubicación.’

• Cuando el sistema de sensores del

pasajero delantero activa la bolsa de

aire frontal del pasajero delantero (se

puede inflar), el indicador de estado

de la bolsa de aire del pasajero no se

ilumina.

Si una persona de tamaño adulto está

sentada en el asiento del pasajero

delantero, pero la luz indicadora de estado

de la bolsa de aire permanece encendida,

es posible que la persona no esté

correctamente sentada. Si esto sucede:

• Apague el vehículo y pídale a la

persona que ponga el respaldo en

posición completamente vertical.

• Haga que la persona se siente derecha

y en el centro del cojín del asiento con

las piernas cómodamente extendidas.

• Vuelva a arrancar el vehículo y pídale

a la persona que mantenga la posición

por alrededor de dos minutos. Esto le

permitirá al sistema detectar a la

persona y activar la bolsa de aire

frontal del pasajero.’

• Si la luz indicadora de estado

permanece encendida después de este

paso, recomiende al pasajero que

ocupe un asiento trasero.

Bolsa de aire del pasajeroIndicador de estado de la

bolsa de aire del pasajero

Ocupante

DesactivadaApagadaVacío

DesactivadaEncendidaNiño

ActivadaApagadaAdulto

Sistema de Seguridad Complementaria

Nota: Cuando la luz indicadora de estado

de la bolsa de aire del pasajero está

iluminada, es posible desactivar la bolsa de

aire del lado del pasajero (instalada en el

asiento) para evitar el riesgo de lesiones en

caso de que se despliegue.

Después de que todos los pasajeros hayan

ajustado sus asientos y puesto los

cinturones de seguridad, es muy

importante que mantengan su posición

vertical.’ Un ocupante correctamente

sentado se sienta siempre derecho contra

el respaldo y en el centro del cojín, con sus

pies cómodamente extendidos. Sentarse

de manera incorrecta puede aumentar la

probabilidad de lesiones en el caso de un

choque. Por ejemplo, si un pasajero viaja

en una posición irregular, se recuesta,

voltea hacia los lados, se sienta hacia

delante, se inclina hacia delante o hacia

los lados o levanta uno o ambos pies,

aumenta en gran medida la probabilidad

de sufrir lesiones en un choque.

Si cree que el estado de la luz indicadora

de bolsa de aire del pasajero apagada no

es el correcto, compruebe lo siguiente:

• Objetos que se encuentran bajo el

asiento

• Objetos entre el cojín y la consola

central (si está equipado)

• Objetos que cuelgan del respaldo del

asiento

• Objetos guardados en el bolsillo del

mapa en el respaldo del asiento (si

está equipado)

• Objetos en el regazo del ocupante

• Interferencia de la carga con el asiento

• Otros pasajeros empujando y jalando

del asiento

• Pies y rodillas de los pasajeros de atrás

que se apoyan en el asiento

Las condiciones antes mencionadas

pueden causar que el peso de un ocupante

correctamente sentado sea interpretado

erróneamente por el sistema de sensores

del pasajero. La persona ubicada en el

asiento del pasajero delantero puede

parecer más pesada o más liviana debido

a las condiciones que se describen en la

lista antes mencionada.

Para saber si el sistema sensor

del pasajero delantero funciona

adecuadamente, Ver Sensores

de choque e indicador de bolsas de aire

(página 46).

Si la luz de disponibilidad de la bolsa

de aire está encendida, haga lo

El conductor o los pasajeros adultos deben

buscar objetos que puedan estar

almacenados debajo del asiento del

pasajero delantero o alguna carga que

interfiera con el asiento.

Si hay objetos guardados o existe carga

que interfiera con el asiento; realice los

siguientes pasos para eliminar el

obstáculo:

• Estacione el vehículo.

• Apague el vehículo.

• El conductor o los pasajeros adultos

deben buscar objetos que puedan estar

almacenados debajo del asiento del

pasajero delantero o alguna carga que

interfiera con el asiento.

• Retire los obstáculos (si los hubiera).

• Vuelva a arrancar el vehículo.

• Espere al menos dos minutos y

compruebe que la luz de disponibilidad

de la bolsa de aire ya no esté

encendida.

• Si permanece iluminada, puede

tratarse de un problema del sistema

de sensores del pasajero delantero.

Sistema de Seguridad Complementaria

NO intente reparar el sistema; lleve su

vehículo inmediatamente a un distribuidor

autorizado.

Si es necesario modificar un sistema de

bolsas de aire delantero avanzado para

acomodar a una persona discapacitada,

comuníquese con un distribuidor

autorizado.

BOLSAS DE AIRE LATERALES

AVISOS

No coloque objetos ni instale equipos

sobre o cerca de la cubierta de la

bolsa de aire, en el costado de los

respaldos (de los asientos delanteros) o

en las áreas de los asientos delanteros,

que puedan entrar en contacto con una

bolsa de aire que se infle. Si no se siguen

estas instrucciones, el riesgo de lesiones

puede aumentar en caso de una colisión.

No utilice cubiertas adicionales en

los asientos. El uso de cubiertas

adicionales en los asientos puede

impedir que las bolsas de aire laterales se

inflen y aumentar el riesgo de lesiones en

un accidente.

No apoye su cabeza contra la puerta.

La bolsa de aire lateral puede

lesionarlo ya que se infla desde el

lado del respaldo.

No intente revisar, reparar ni

modificar la bolsa de aire, sus

fusibles ni la cubierta de un asiento

que contenga una bolsa de aire.

Comuníquese de inmediato con su

distribuidor autorizado.

Si se ha inflado, la bolsa de aire

lateral no volverá a funcionar. El

sistema de bolsas de aire laterales

(incluido el asiento) debe ser

inspeccionado y reparado por un

distribuidor autorizado. Si no reemplaza la

bolsa de aire, el área sin reparar aumentará

el riesgo de lesiones en caso de un choque.

Las bolsas de aire laterales están

instaladas en el costado exterior de los

respaldos de los asientos delanteros. En

algunos choques laterales, se inflará la

bolsa de aire lateral afectada por el

accidente. La bolsa de aire se diseñó para

inflarse entre el tablero de la puerta y el

ocupante, para mejorar la protección

proporcionada a los ocupantes en los

choques de impacto lateral.

E142848

El sistema de consta de lo siguiente:

• Una etiqueta o panel lateral grabado

en relieve que indica que el vehículo

dispone de bolsas de aire laterales.

• Bolsas de aire laterales ubicadas

dentro del respaldo del conductor y de

los respaldos de los asientos de

pasajero delanteros.

• Sistema de sensores del pasajero

delantero

Sensores de choque y sistema

de monitoreo con indicador de

estado. Ver Sensores de

choque e indicador de bolsas de aire

(página 46).

Nota: Si el sistema de sensores del pasajero

desactivará la bolsa de aire instalada en el

asiento del pasajero si detecta un asiento

vacío y con el cinturón desabrochado.

Sistema de Seguridad Complementaria

El diseño y el desarrollo del sistema de

bolsas de aire laterales incluyeron

procedimientos de prueba recomendados,

los que fueron desarrollados por un grupo

de expertos en seguridad automotriz

conocidos como Side Airbag Technical

Working Group (Grupo de trabajo técnico

de bolsas de aire laterales). Estos

procedimientos de prueba recomendados

ayudan a reducir el riesgo de lesiones

relacionadas con el despliegue de las

bolsas de aire laterales.

SAFETY CANOPY®

AVISOS

No coloque objetos ni monte equipos

sobre o cerca del forro del techo, en

la barandilla lateral, que puedan

entrar en contacto con una bolsa de aire

tipo cortina que se infle. Si no se siguen

estas instrucciones, el riesgo de lesiones

puede aumentar en caso de una colisión.

No apoye su cabeza contra la puerta.

Las bolsas de tipo cortina pueden

lesionarlo al inflarse desde el forro

del techo.

No intente revisar, reparar ni

modificar las bolsas de aire de tipo

cortina, los fusibles de las mismas,

la vestidura de los pilares A, B o C, ni el

forro del techo de un vehículo equipado

con bolsas de aire de tipo cortina.

Comuníquese de inmediato con su

distribuidor autorizado.

Todos los ocupantes del vehículo,

incluido el conductor, deben usar

siempre los cinturones de seguridad

, incluso si se cuenta con un sistema de

sujeción suplementario y bolsas de aire de

tipo cortina.

Para reducir el riesgo de lesiones, no

obstruya ni coloque objetos en el

espacio donde se despliega la bolsa

de aire de tipo cortina.

AVISOS

Si las bolsas de aire de tipo cortina

se han activado, ya no volverán a

funcionar. Las bolsas de aire de tipo

cortina (incluyendo el tapizado de los

pilares A, B y C y forro del techo) deben ser

inspeccionadas y reparadas por un

distribuidor autorizado. Si no reemplaza la

bolsa de aire de tipo cortina, el área sin

reparar aumentará el riesgo de lesiones en

caso de un choque.

El sistema Safety Canopy se activará

durante choques laterales importantes o

cuando el sensor de volcadura detecte

cierta probabilidad de volcadura. El

sistema Safety Canopy está instalado en

la lámina metálica del riel lateral del techo,

detrás del forro y sobre cada fila de

asientos. En ciertos choques laterales o

eventos de volcadura, el sistema Safety

Canopy se activará, sin considerar qué

asientos estén ocupados. El sistema

Safety Canopy está diseñado para inflarse

entre el área de las ventanas laterales y

los pasajeros con el fin de aumentar la

protección proporcionada en caso de

choques laterales y eventos de volcadura.

E75004

Sistema de Seguridad Complementaria

El sistema de consta de lo siguiente:

• Bolsas de aire de tipo cortina de Safety

Canopy instaladas sobre los paneles

que se encuentran sobre las ventanas

delantera y trasera, identificados con

una etiqueta o inscripción en el forro

del techo o en el pilar del techo.

• Un forro de techo flexible que se abre

sobre las puertas laterales y permitir

que la cortina de aire se infle.

• Los sensores de choque y el sistema

de monitoreo tienen un indicador de

estado. Ver Sensores de choque e

indicador de bolsas de aire (página

46).

Los niños de hasta 12 años de edad deben

ir siempre correctamente asegurados en

los asientos de la segunda o tercera fila.

El sistema Safety Canopy no interferirá con

los niños que estén asegurados en un

asiento para niños o un asiento auxiliar

correctamente instalado, ya que está

diseñado para inflarse hacia abajo, desde

el forro del techo, sobre las puertas a lo

largo de los vanos de las ventanas

laterales.

El diseño y el desarrollo del sistema del

sistema Safety Canopy incluyeron

procedimientos de prueba recomendados,

los que fueron desarrollados por un grupo

de expertos en seguridad automotriz

conocidos como Side Airbag Technical

Working Group (Grupo de trabajo técnico

de bolsas de aire laterales). Estos

procedimientos de prueba recomendados

ayudan a reducir el riesgo de lesiones

relacionadas con el despliegue de las

bolsas de aire laterales (incluido el sistema

Safety Canopy).

SENSORES DE CHOQUE E

INDICADOR DE BOLSAS DE

AIRE

ALERTA

Modificar o agregar equipos al

extremo delantero del vehículo

(incluido el bastidor, la defensa, la

estructura de la carrocería delantera del

extremo y los ganchos para remolque)

puede afectar el rendimiento del sistema

de bolsas de aire, aumentando el riesgo

de lesiones. No modifique el extremo

delantero del vehículo.

El vehículo cuenta con un conjunto de

sensores de choque y ocupantes, los

cuales proporcionan información al

módulo de control de sujeción, el cual

despliega (activa) los pretensores de

cinturón de seguridad, bolsa de aire del

conductor, bolsas de aire laterales

montadas en los asientos y Safety Canopy.

Según el tipo de accidente (impacto

frontal, impacto lateral o vuelco) el

módulo de control de sistemas de

seguridad implementará los dispositivos

de seguridad adecuados.

El módulo de control de los sistemas de

seguridad también monitorea el estado de

los dispositivos de seguridad anteriores

además de los sensores de choque y

ocupantes. El estado del sistema de

seguridad se indica mediante una luz

indicadora de advertencia en el grupo de

instrumentos o mediante un tono de

respaldo, si la luz de advertencia no

funciona. La bolsa de aire no requiere

mantenimiento de rutina.

La presencia de una o más de las

siguientes situaciones indica que hay

problemas en el sistema:

Sistema de Seguridad Complementaria

• La luz de disponibilidad no se iluminará

inmediatamente después de activar el

encendido.

• La luz de disponibilidad destella o

permanece encendida.

• Se escucha una serie de cinco pitidos.

El patrón de tono se repite de manera

periódica hasta que se reparan el

problema y la luz.

Si sucede alguna de estas cosas, aunque

en forma intermitente, un distribuidor

autorizado debe revisar inmediatamente

el sistema de sujeción suplementario. A

menos que se haga la reparación

necesaria, es posible que el sistema no

funcione correctamente en caso de un

choque.

Los pretensores del cinturón de seguridad

y el sistema de sujeción suplementario de

bolsas de aire están diseñados para

activarse cuando el vehículo sufre una

desaceleración longitudinal o lateral

suficiente como para hacer que módulo

del control de los sistemas de seguridad

desplieguen un dispositivo de seguridad o

cuando el sensor de volcadura detecta la

posibilidad de un evento de volcadura.

El hecho de que los pretensores de

cinturón de seguridad o las bolsas de aire

no se activen para ambos ocupantes de

los asientos delanteros en un choque no

significa que el sistema funcione

incorrectamente. Más bien, significa que

el módulo de control de sistemas de

seguridad determinó que las condiciones

del accidente (gravedad del choque, uso

del cinturón de seguridad, etc.) no eran

adecuadas para activar estos dispositivos

de seguridad.

• Las bolsas de aire delanteras están

diseñadas para activarse sólo en caso

de choques frontales o casi frontales

(no volcaduras, impactos laterales o

traseros) a menos que el choque

provoque una desaceleración

longitudinal suficiente.

• Los pretensores del cinturón de

seguridad y los cinturones de seguridad

inflables traseros están diseñados para

activarse en choques frontales,

semifrontales y laterales y en

volcaduras.

• Las bolsas de aire laterales están

diseñadas para inflarse en choques de

impacto lateral, no en volcaduras,

impactos traseros, choques frontales

ni semifrontales, a menos que el

choque provoque una desaceleración

lateral suficiente.

• El sistema Safety Canopy está

diseñado para inflarse en ciertos

choques de impacto lateral o en

eventos de volcadura, no en choques

de impacto trasero, delantero o

semidelantero, a menos que el choque

produzca una desaceleración lateral

suficiente o exista la posibilidad de una

volcadura.

DISPOSICIÓN DE UNA BOLSA

DE AIRE

Comuníquese de inmediato con su

distribuidor autorizado. Las bolsas de aire

DEBEN ser eliminadas por personal

calificado.

Sistema de Seguridad Complementaria

FUNCIONAMIENTO

El control remoto le permite:

• bloquear o desbloquear de manera

remota los seguros de las puertas del

vehículo

• desbloquear las puertas sin utilizar

activamente una llave o control remoto

(solo acceso inteligente)

• abrir la compuerta levadiza eléctrica a

control remoto (si está equipado)

• arrancar o detener el motor de manera

remota (si está equipado).

• armar y desarmar el sistema antirrobo

• activar la alarma de emergencia.

INFORMACIÓN GENERAL

SOBRE LAS FRECUENCIAS DE

RADIO

El control remoto cumple con la Parte 15

de las Normas de la FCC y con la norma

RSS-210 de Industry Canada. La operación

está sujeta a estas dos condiciones: (1)

Este dispositivo no debiera causar

interferencia dañina y (2) Este dispositivo

debe aceptar cualquier interferencia que

reciba, incluso interferencias que pudieran

causar un funcionamiento no deseado.

Nota: Los cambios o modificaciones que

no estén expresamente aprobados por la

parte responsable del cumplimiento podrían

invalidar la autoridad del usuario para

operar el equipo.

El alcance normal del transmisor es de

10 m (33 pies) aproximadamente. Los

vehículos con la característica de arranque

a control remoto tendrán un mayor

alcance. Las disminuciones del alcance

funcional pueden deberse a:

• condiciones climáticas

• torres de antenas de radio en las

proximidades

• estructuras en torno al vehículo

• otros vehículos estacionados cerca del

suyo.

Acceso inteligente (AI) (If Equipped)

El sistema utiliza una señal de

radiofrecuencia para comunicarse con el

vehículo y autorizar el desbloqueo de los

seguros al recibir la orden (tocando la

parte interna de la manija exterior de la

puerta frontal, activando el botón exterior

del compartimiento de equipaje o un botón

del propio transmisor). Si hay interferencia

excesiva de radiofrecuencia en el área, o

si la batería del transmisor está baja, puede

ser necesario desbloquear la puerta

mecánicamente. La hoja de llave mecánica

de la llave de acceso inteligente también

se puede usar para abrir la puerta del

conductor en esta situación. Ver

Transmisor Remoto (página 48).

TRANSMISOR REMOTO

Transmisores integrados a la llave

(If Equipped)

E142585

Es posible que el vehículo cuente con dos

transmisores integrados a la llave. La hoja

de la llave se utiliza para arrancar el

vehículo y desbloquear o bloquear la

puerta del conductor desde afuera del

vehículo. La parte del transmisor funciona

como control remoto.

Llaves y Controles Remotos

E138615

Nota: Las llaves de su vehículo vienen con

una etiqueta de seguridad que proporciona

importante información sobre el corte de la

llave del vehículo. Mantenga la etiqueta en

un lugar seguro para referencia futura.

Llave de acceso inteligente (If

Equipped)

Nota: El control remoto de tres botones

funciona de manera similar.

E138616

El vehículo puede contar con dos llaves de

acceso inteligente que hacen funcionar los

seguros eléctricos y el sistema de arranque

a control remoto. La llave de debe estar

en el vehículo al activar el sistema de

arranque con botón.

E142431

La llave de acceso inteligente también

contiene una hoja de llave mecánica

extraíble que se puede usar para quitar el

seguro de la puerta del conductor. Deslice

el control de liberación de la parte

posterior del transmisor para liberar la hoja

de la llave y jale la hoja hacia afuera.

E138618

Nota: La copia de seguridad de las llaves

de su vehículo viene con una etiqueta de

seguridad que proporciona importante

información sobre el corte de la llave del

vehículo. Mantenga la etiqueta en un lugar

seguro para referencia futura.

Cambio de la batería

Nota: Consulte las normas locales para

eliminar adecuadamente la batería del

transmisor.

Nota: No limpie la grasa de los terminales

de la batería de la superficie trasera del

tablero de circuitos.

Llaves y Controles Remotos

Nota: El reemplazo de la batería no

provocará que el transmisor se desvincule

del vehículo. El transmisor debe funcionar

normalmente.

El control remoto usa una batería de litio

de tres voltios CR2032, tipo moneda, o

equivalente.

Transmisor integrado a la llave

E138619

1. Inserte y gire una moneda delgada en

la ranura del transmisor cerca del anillo

llavero para quitar la tapa de la batería.

2. Quite la batería vieja.

E138620

3. Inserte la batería nueva. Consulte las

instrucciones que están dentro del

transmisor para conocer la orientación

correcta de la batería. Presione la

batería hacia abajo para asegurarse de

que esté completamente asentada.

4. Ponga la tapa de la batería en el

transmisor y presiónela para cerrarla.

Transmisor de acceso inteligente

1. Quite la llave de respaldo del

transmisor.

E142432

2. Gire una moneda delgada en la ranura

oculta detrás de la ranura de la llave

de respaldo para quitar la tapa de la

batería.

E138622

3. Quite la batería vieja.

4. Inserte la batería nueva. Consulte las

instrucciones que están dentro del

transmisor para conocer la orientación

correcta de la batería. Presione la

batería hacia abajo para asegurarse de

que esté completamente asentada.

5. Coloque nuevamente la tapa de la

batería en el transmisor e instale la

llave de respaldo.

Llaves y Controles Remotos

Localizador del automóvil

E138623

Oprima el botón dos veces en

menos de tres segundos. El

claxon sonará y destellarán las

luces direccionales. Se recomienda usar

este método para ubicar el vehículo, en

lugar de utilizar el alarma de emergencia.

Nota: Si el vehículo no se cerró

correctamente o si alguna puerta o la

compuerta levadiza están abiertas, o si el

cofre no está cerrado en los vehículos

equipados con alarma de perímetro o

arranque remoto, el claxon sonará dos veces

y las luces no destellarán.

Activación de una alarma de

emergencia

Nota: La alarma de emergencia solo

funcionará cuando el encendido esté en

OFF.

E138624

Oprima el botón para activar el

alarma. Oprima el botón

nuevamente o gire el encendido

a la posición ON para desactivarla.

Arranque a control remoto (If Equipped)

ALERTA

Para evitar los gases de escape, no

use el arranque a control remoto si

el vehículo está estacionado dentro

un recinto cerrado o un lugar con poca

ventilación.

Nota: No utilice el arranque a control

remoto si su vehículo tiene poco

combustible.

E138625

El vehículo tiene arranque a

control remoto si el transmisor

incluye este botón.

La función de arranque a control remoto

le permite arrancar el motor desde fuera

del vehículo. El transmisor tiene un amplio

rango operativo.

Los vehículos con control automático de

aire acondicionado y calefacción se

pueden configurar para que esta función

se inicie al arrancar el vehículo. Ver

Control Automático de Clima (página

126).

Muchos estados y provincias tienen

restricciones para el uso del arranque a

control remoto. Verifique el reglamento de

tránsito de su localidad y estado o

provincia para ver los requisitos específicos

con respecto a los sistemas de arranque

a control remoto.

El sistema de arranque a control remoto

no funcionará si:

• el encendido está en ON

• el sistema de alarma se activa

• la función fue desactivada

• la tapa del cofre no está cerrada

• se hicieron dos intentos de arranque a

control remoto del vehículo durante la

última hora

• la transmisión del vehículo no está en

P (Estacionamiento)

• el voltaje de la batería del vehículo está

demasiado bajo

• el indicador de servicio del motor

estaba encendido la última vez que se

condujo el vehículo.

Arranque del motor a control remoto

Nota: Deberá presionar cada botón en

menos de tres segundos, uno después de

otro. Si no sigue esta secuencia, el vehículo

no arrancará a control remoto y el claxon

no emitirá un pitido breve.

Llaves y Controles Remotos

E138626

Los detalles del procedimiento de

arranque a control remoto se describen en

la etiqueta del transmisor. Para arrancar

el motor a control remoto:

1. Oprima el botón de bloqueo para

bloquear los seguros de todas las

puertas.

2. Oprima el botón de arranque a control

remoto dos veces. Las luces exteriores

destellarán dos veces.

El claxon emitirá un pitido breve si el

sistema no arranca, a menos que esté

activada la función de arranque silencioso.

El arranque silencioso hará funcionar el

ventilador a una menor velocidad para

disminuir el ruido. Se puede activar o

desactivar en la pantalla de información.

Ver Información general (página 93).

Nota: Si el vehículo se arrancó de manera

remota y está equipado con un transmisor

integrado a la llave, primero debe girar el

encendido a ON antes de conducir el

vehículo. Si está equipado con un transmisor

de acceso inteligente, debe oprimir una vez

el botón Start/Stop en el tablero de

instrumentos mientras aplica el pedal del

freno antes de conducir el vehículo.

Las ventanas eléctricas se inhibirán

durante el arranque remoto y el radio no

se encenderá automáticamente.

Las luces de estacionamiento quedarán

encendidas y el motor estará en marcha

por 5, 10 o 15 minutos, según la

programación.

Cómo ampliar el tiempo de

funcionamiento del motor

Para ampliar la duración del arranque a

control remoto, repita los pasos 1 y 2 con

el motor todavía en marcha. Si programó

la duración para 10 minutos, los segundos

10 minutos se sumarán. Por ejemplo, si el

vehículo estuvo en marcha 5 minutos en

el primer arranque a control remoto, el

motor continuará en marcha hasta

completar 20 minutos. Solo podrá ampliar

una vez el tiempo de arranque a control

remoto.

Espere al menos 5 segundos antes del

arranque a control remoto después de

haber apagado el motor. Solamente se

admiten dos arranques a control remoto.

El vehículo se debe encender sin arranque

remoto y luego girar a OFF o dejar que pase

una hora antes de utilizar el arranque

remoto nuevamente, si desea realizar más

arranques remotos.

Cómo apagar el motor después de

arrancarlo a control remoto

E138625

Presione el botón una vez. Las

luces de estacionamiento se

apagarán.

Posiblemente tenga que estar más cerca

del vehículo que al arrancarlo, debido a la

reflexión de la señal en la tierra y al ruido

agregado del motor en marcha.

Puede desactivar o activar el sistema de

arranque a control remoto mediante la

pantalla de información. Ver Información

general (página 93).

Llaves y Controles Remotos

REEMPLAZO DE UNA LLAVE

EXTRAVIADA O UN

TRANSMISOR REMOTO

Puede adquirir llaves o controles remotos

de reemplazo o adicionales en su

distribuidor autorizado. El distribuidor

puede programar los transmisores para su

vehículo o bien, puede programarlos usted

mismo. Ver Sistema Pasivo Anti-Robo

(página 69).

Llaves y Controles Remotos

FUNCIONAMIENTO

La función MyKey le permite programar

llaves con modos de conducción

restringidos para promover buenos hábitos

de manejo. Es posible programar con estos

modos restringidos todas las llaves del

vehículo, menos una. La llave que no se

programe recibe el nombre de "llave de

administración" y se puede usar para:

• crear una llave restringida

• programar ajustes opcionales de

MyKey

• borrar todas las características de

MyKey a la vez.

Una vez que programa una llave, puede

acceder a la siguiente información

mediante el control de la pantalla de

información:

• Cuántas llaves de administrador y

llaves MyKey hay programadas para el

vehículo.

• La distancia total que se ha conducido

el vehículo con una llave MyKey.

En el caso de vehículos equipados con

llave de acceso inteligente (botón de

arranque), cuando hay presente una llave

MyKey y también una llave de acceso

inteligente de administrador (control), el

vehículo reconoce el control de

administrador para arrancar el motor.

Configuraciones estándar

Estas configuraciones no pueden

modificarse.

• Belt-Minder®. Esta función no se

puede desactivar y el temporizador de

5 minutos no expira. Cuando la función

Belt-Minder® de MyKey está activada,

el sistema de audio se silencia.

• Advertencia anticipada de nivel de

combustible bajo. Las advertencias se

muestran en el control de la pantalla

de información seguidas por una

indicación sonora cuando el tanque de

combustible está a un octavo o menos.

• Las funciones de asistencia para el

conductor, de estar equipadas en su

vehículo, se activan obligatoriamente:

Asistencia de estacionamiento,

sistema de información de puntos

ciegos (BLIS®) con alerta de tráfico

cruzado y sistema de advertencia de

choque.

Configuraciones opcionales

Estas configuraciones se pueden ajustar

inmediatamente después de crear una

llave MyKey o bien, se pueden cambiar en

otro momento usando una llave de

administración.

• Límite de velocidad del vehículo de

80 km/h (130 mph). Aparecen

advertencias visuales seguidas de una

indicación sonora cuando la velocidad

del vehículo ha alcanzado los 80 km/h

(130 mph).

• Advertencia de velocidad del vehículo

de 75, 90 o 105 km/h (45, 55 o

65 mph). Aparecen advertencias

visuales seguidas de una indicación

sonora cuando se excede la velocidad

preseleccionada.

MyKey®

• Volumen máximo del sistema de audio

de 45%. Aparece un mensaje en el

sistema de audio cuando se intenta

superar el límite de volumen.

• AdvanceTrac®. El sistema no se puede

desactivar si se programó en modo

Always-on (siempre encendido).

CREACIÓN DE MYKEY

Use el control de pantalla de información

para crear una MyKey:

1. Inserte la llave que desea programar

en la ignición o, si el vehículo está

equipado con sistema de arranque con

botón, ponga la llave de acceso

inteligente en la ranura de respaldo. La

información sobre la ranura de

respaldo se encuentra en otro capítulo.

Ver Arranque y Paro del Motor

(página 149).

2. Active el encendido.

3. Acceda al menú principal en los control

de la pantalla de información y

seleccione Configuración, luego

MyKey al presionar OK o el botón >.

4. Oprima "OK" para seleccionar Crear.

5. Cuando se le indique, mantenga

oprimido el botón OK hasta que vea un

mensaje que le indica que etiquete esta

llave como MyKey. La llave se

restringirá en el próximo encendido.

La llave fue programada con éxito.

Asegúrese de etiquetarla para poder

distinguirla de las llaves de administración.

Puede programar las configuraciones

opcionales para las llaves. Consulte

Programación/Cambio de

configuración opcional.

Los vehículos equipados con encendido

remoto deben seguir un procedimiento

separado. Ver Uso de MyKey con un

Sistema de Arranque Remoto (página

56).

Programación/Cambio de

configuración opcional

Todas las llaves programadas pueden ser

borradas en el mismo ciclo de llave en el

que se programó una llave, de lo contrario

se requiere una llave de administrador para

borrar las llaves. Ver Borrado de toda la

información de MyKeys (página 55).

Puede acceder a la configuración opcional

mediante el control de pantalla de

información.

1. Active el encendido con una llave de

administración.

2. Acceda al menú principal y seleccione

Configuración, luego MyKey.

3. Utilice los botones de las flechas para

llegar a una función opcional.

4. Presione OK > para desplazarse a

través de las configuraciones.

5. Presione OK o > para hacer una

selección.

BORRADO DE TODA LA

INFORMACIÓN DE MYKEYS

Todas MyKeys programadas pueden ser

borradas en el mismo ciclo de llave en el

que se creó una MyKeys, de lo contrario se

requiere una llave de administrador para

borrar las llaves.

Para borrar todas las MyKeys (lo cual

elimina todas las restricciones y las regresa

al estado de llave de administrador), use

el control de la pantalla de información

para hacer lo siguiente:

1. Acceda al menú principal y seleccione

Configuración, luego MyKey.

2. Desplácese a Borrar todo y pulse el

botón OK.

3. Mantenga presionado el botón "OK"

hasta que aparezca TODAS LAS

MYKEYS BORRADAS.

MyKey®

COMPROBACIÓN DEL ESTADO

DEL SISTEMA MYKEY

El control de pantalla de información

muestra información sobre las llaves

programadas en el vehículo:

• MYKEY MILES (Kilometraje MyKey):

rastrea el kilometraje cuando se usa

una llave restringida. Si el kilometraje

no se acumula como se esperaba,

entonces la llave no está siendo

utilizada por el usuario al que está

destinada. La única manera de

restablecer esto a cero es restablecer

las llaves. Si el kilometraje es menor

que la última vez que lo verificó, eso

significa que el sistema de llaves fue

restablecido recientemente.

• #MYKEY(S) (No. de MyKeys):

indica la cantidad de llaves restringidas

que se programan en el vehículo.

También se puede utilizar para

detectar el borrado de una llave

restringida.

• # ADMIN KEY(S) (No. de llaves de

admin.): indica cuántas llaves de

administración están programadas

para el vehículo. También se puede

utilizar para detectar si se ha

programado una llave adicional para

el vehículo.

USO DE MYKEY CON UN

SISTEMA DE ARRANQUE

REMOTO

MyKey NO es compatible con sistemas de

arranque a control remoto de postventa

no aprobados por Ford. Si decide instalar

un sistema de arranque a control remoto,

visite a su distribuidor Ford autorizado para

que le recomiende un sistema de arranque

a control remoto aprobado por Ford.

La siguiente información PUEDE ayudar a

los clientes que deciden utilizar un sistema

de arranque a control remoto no aprobado

por Ford. Las acciones que se indican a

continuación NO hacen que el sistema

MyKey sea compatible con sistemas de

arranque a control remoto no aprobados

por Ford, pero PUEDEN ayudarle a

conservar algunas funciones de MyKey.

Vehículos equipados con llaves

físicas

Cuando se usa un sistema de arranque a

control remoto no aprobado por Ford, las

configuraciones predeterminadas pueden

reconocer el sistema de arranque a control

remoto como otra llave de administración,

con sus privilegios asociados. Esto NO lo

hace compatible con MyKey. Volver a

arrancar el motor cuando inserta una llave

en el cilindro de encendido puede ayudarle

a conservar algunas funciones de MyKey.

Además de la llave que ya se programó

como MyKey, los dueños de los vehículos

equipados con llaves tradicionales tienen

la opción de programar el sistema de

arranque a control remoto no aprobado

por Ford como MyKey si el llavero de

arranque a control remoto es utilizado por

el conductor de MyKey.

Para programar un sistema de arranque a

control remoto no aprobado por Ford

como MyKey, haga lo siguiente:

• Entre al vehículo y cierre todas las

puertas.

• Arranque el vehículo a control remoto

con su llavero transmisor no aprobado

por Ford.

• Ver Creación de MyKey (página 55).

Siga los pasos 1 a 5.

MyKey®

Vehículos equipados con llave de

acceso inteligente (arranque con

botón)

Nota: No es posible programar el sistema

de arranque a control remoto como una

MyKey en los vehículos equipados con llave

de acceso inteligente (interruptor de

arranque con botón). Por lo tanto, debe

tratar el llavero de arranque a control

remoto como cualquier otra llave de

administración. Si se arranca el vehículo a

control remoto, el sistema parará el motor

cuando usted entre al vehículo o cuando

ponga la transmisión en alguna velocidad.

Antes de que el motor se pare, el vehículo

tendrá privilegios administrativos. Cuando

se vuelva a arrancar el motor, el vehículo

identificará al usuario como un conductor

con llave de administración o MyKey,

dependiendo de la configuración de la llave

utilizada para arrancar el vehículo.

Nota: En todos los vehículos, el número de

MYKEY o LLAVES DE ADMINISTRACIÓN

PROGRAMADAS que aparece en los menús

de estado del sistema MyKey puede incluir

el sistema de arranque a control remoto no

aprobado por Ford como una llave adicional

en el conteo total. Ver Comprobación del

estado del sistema MyKey (página 56).

En todos los vehículos equipados con

sistema de arranque a control remoto no

aprobado por Ford, es posible programar

todas las llaves "reales" como MyKey, en

cuyo caso tendrá que usar su sistema de

arranque a control remoto para restablecer

todas las llaves MyKey (con lo cual se

eliminan las restricciones y las llaves

vuelven al estado de llave de

administración) haciendo lo siguiente:

• Entre al vehículo y cierre todas las

puertas.

• Arranque el vehículo a control remoto

con su llavero transmisor no aprobado

por Ford.

• Ver Borrado de toda la información

de MyKeys (página 55). Siga los

pasos 1 a 3.

DETECCIÓN DE PROBLEMAS DE MYKEY

Causas posiblesCondición

La llave puesta en el encendido no tiene privile-

gios de administración.

No puedo programar una llave

La llave en el encendido es la única llave de

administración (siempre debe haber al menos

una llave de administración).

La llave de acceso inteligente no está en la

ranura de respaldo (en vehículos con arranque

con botón).

El sistema antirrobo pasivo SecuriLock® está

deshabilitado o en modo ilimitado.

MyKey®

Causas posiblesCondición

Se arrancó el vehículo utilizando un sistema de

arranque a control remoto que no está progra-

mado con privilegios de administración. Ver

Uso de MyKey con un Sistema de Arranque

Remoto (página 56).

La llave puesta en el encendido no tiene privile-

gios de administración.

No puedo programar las configura-

ciones opcionales

No hay llaves programadas para el vehículo.

Consulte Cómo crear una MyKey.

Se arrancó el vehículo utilizando un sistema de

arranque a control remoto que no está progra-

mado con privilegios de administración. Ver

Uso de MyKey con un Sistema de Arranque

Remoto (página 56).

La llave puesta en el encendido no tiene privile-

gios de administración.

No puedo borrar las llaves restringidas

No hay llaves restringidas programadas para

el vehículo. Consulte Cómo crear una MyKey.

Se arrancó el vehículo utilizando un sistema de

arranque a control remoto que no está progra-

mado con privilegios de administración. Ver

Uso de MyKey con un Sistema de Arranque

Remoto (página 56).

Adquiera una llave nueva con su distribuidor

autorizado.

Perdí la única llave de administración

Programe una llave de repuesto. Ver Sistema

Pasivo Anti-Robo (página 69).

Perdí una llave

El vehículo tiene un sistema de arranque a

control remoto que es reconocido como una

llave de administración. Las llaves restringidas

se pueden restablecer usando el arranque a

control remoto. Ver Uso de MyKey con un

Sistema de Arranque Remoto (página 56).

Programé accidentalmente todas las

llaves como llaves restringidas

Hay una llave de administración en el arranque

del motor.

Sin funciones de llave restringida con

llave de acceso inteligente (arranque

con botón) No hay llaves restringidas programadas para

el vehículo. Consulte Cómo crear una MyKey.

Se programó una llave desconocida como llave

restringida para el vehículo.

El número total de llaves restringidas

programadas incluye una llave

adicional

MyKey®

Causas posiblesCondición

El vehículo está equipado con un sistema de

arranque a control remoto. Ver Uso de MyKey

con un Sistema de Arranque Remoto

(página 56).

Se programó una llave desconocida como llave

de administración para el vehículo.

El número total de llaves de administra-

ción programadas incluye una llave

adicional El vehículo está equipado con un sistema de

arranque a control remoto. Ver Uso de MyKey

con un Sistema de Arranque Remoto

(página 56).

La llave restringida no está siendo utilizada por

el usuario al que está destinada.

No se acumula el kilometraje (millaje)

MyKey

El sistema de llave se restableció.

MyKey®

ASEGURAR Y DESASEGURAR

Puede usar el control de los seguros

eléctricos de las puertas o el control

remoto para bloquear y desbloquear el

vehículo.

Seguros eléctricos de las puertas

E138628

DesbloqueoA

SeguroB

Control remoto

El control remoto se puede usar en

cualquier momento mientras el vehículo

no esté en marcha.

Desbloqueo de las puertas

(desbloqueo en dos pasos)

E138629

Presione el botón para

desbloquear la puerta del

conductor.

Presione el botón nuevamente antes de

que transcurran tres segundos para

desbloquear todas las puertas. Las luces

direccionales destellarán.

Mantenga presionado los botones de

bloqueo y desbloqueo del control remoto

durante cuatro segundos para desactivar

o activar el desbloqueo en dos pasos. La

desactivación del desbloqueo en dos

pasos permite desbloquear todas las

puertas con solo presionar el botón. Las

luces direccionales destellarán dos veces

para indicar que se cambió el modo de

desbloqueo. El modo de desbloqueo se

aplicará al control remoto, al teclado de

entrada sin llave y al acceso inteligente.

El acceso inteligente en la puerta del

conductor desbloqueará todas las puertas

cuando del desbloqueo en dos pasos no

esté activado.

Bloqueo de los seguros de las puertas

E138623

Oprima el botón para bloquear

los seguros de todas las puertas.

Las luces direccionales se

encenderán.

Oprima el botón y suéltelo nuevamente en

un lapso de tres segundos para confirmar

que todas las puertas estén cerradas. Las

puertas se volverán a bloquear, el claxon

sonará y las luces direccionales se

encenderán si todas las puertas y la

cajuela están cerradas.

Nota: Si el vehículo no se cerró

correctamente o si alguna puerta o la

compuerta levadiza están abiertas, o si el

cofre no está cerrado en los vehículos

equipados con alarma de perímetro o

arranque remoto, el claxon sonará dos veces

y las luces no destellarán.

Compuerta levadiza eléctrica (si está

equipada)

AVISOS

Asegúrese de que no haya nadie en

el área de la compuerta levadiza

antes de utilizar el control de la

compuerta levadiza eléctrica.

Seguros

AVISOS

Asegúrese que la compuerta

levadiza esté cerrada para evitar que

los gases de escape ingresen al

vehículo. Esto también evitará que los

pasajeros y la carga se caigan. Si debe

manejar con la compuerta levadiza abierta,

mantenga las ventilas abiertas para que

ingrese aire exterior al vehículo.

Nota: Tenga cuidado al abrir o cerrar la

compuerta levadiza en un garaje o en otra

área cerrada para evitar dañarla.

E138630

Presione dos veces dentro de un

lapso de tres segundos para

abrir la compuerta levadiza o

para revertir el movimiento. Ver

Compuerta Levadiza Eléctrica (página

64).

Activación del acceso inteligente

(If Equipped)

La llave de acceso inteligente debe estar

a 1 metro (3 pies) del vehículo.

En las puertas delanteras

Jale la manija exterior de una puerta

delantera. La puerta se desbloqueará y se

podrá abrir.

E87384

Mantenga presionado el sensor de bloqueo

de la manija de la puerta para bloquear el

vehículo. Para evitar desbloquear la puerta

accidentalmente, asegúrese de tocar

solamente el sensor de bloqueo y no otras

áreas de la manija de la puerta.

En la compuerta levadiza

Oprima el botón de apertura exterior de la

compuerta levadiza en la parte superior

de la manija de la compuerta levadiza.

Desbloqueo inteligente de seguros

para el transmisor integrado a la

llave

Esta función ayuda a evitar que bloquee

el vehículo desde afuera cuando la llave

está en el encendido.

Cuando abre una de las puertas delanteras

y bloquea el vehículo con el control de

cierre eléctrico de las puertas, todas las

puertas se bloquearán y luego se

desbloquearán si la llave aún sigue en el

encendido.

El vehículo de todos modos se puede

bloquear, con la llave en el encendido,

utilizando el teclado de entrada sin llave

con la puerta del conductor cerrada, u

oprimiendo el botón de bloqueo en el

transmisor incluso si las puertas no están

cerradas.

Si ambas puertas delanteras están

cerradas, el vehículo se puede bloquear

con cualquier método, sin importar si la

llave está o no en el encendido.

Apertura inteligente para llaves de

acceso inteligente (If Equipped)

Esta función ayuda a evitar que deje

accidentalmente la llave de acceso

inteligente dentro del vehículo en el

compartimiento de pasajeros o en la

cajuela.

Seguros

Si usted asegura su vehículo con el control

de seguros eléctricos de las puertas del

conductor o el pasajero (con la puerta

abierta, la transmisión en "P" y el

encendido en "OFF"), al cerrar la puerta,

el vehículo buscará una llave de acceso

inteligente en el compartimiento de

pasajeros. Si se encuentra una llave de

acceso inteligente dentro del vehículo,

inmediatamente se quitará el seguro de

todas las puertas y sonará el claxon,

indicando que la llave de acceso

inteligente está en el interior.

Con el fin de neutralizar la característica

de apertura inteligente y bloquear

intencionalmente el vehículo con la llave

de acceso inteligente en el interior, puede

bloquear el vehículo después de cerrar

todas las puertas utilizando el teclado de

entrada sin llave, oprimiendo el botón de

bloqueo de otra llave de acceso inteligente

o tocando el área de bloqueo de la manija

con otra llave de acceso inteligente en la

mano.

Cuando abre una de las puertas delanteras

y bloquea el vehículo con el control de

cierre eléctrico de las puertas, todas las

puertas se bloquearán y luego se

desbloquearán si:

• el encendido está en ON, o

• el encendido está en OFF y el vehículo

no está en P (Estacionamiento).

Bloqueo y desbloqueo automático

de las puertas (If Equipped)

La función de bloqueo automático

bloqueará los seguros de todas las puertas

cuando:

• todas las puertas están cerradas

• el encendido está en ON

• cambia la transmisión a cualquier

velocidad y pone el vehículo en

movimiento y

• el vehículo alcanza una velocidad

superior a 7 km/h (4 mph).

Si la función de desbloqueo automático

de seguros está activa, los seguros de

todas las puertas se desbloquearán al abrir

la puerta del conductor.

Activar o desactivar el bloqueo y el

desbloqueo automático

Nota: El distribuidor autorizado puede llevar

a cabo este procedimiento o puede hacerlo

usted mismo.

Para habilitar o deshabilitar estas

características, haga lo siguiente:

Nota: Tendrá 30 segundos para completar

el procedimiento.

1. Gire el encendido a ON.

2. Oprima el botón de los seguros

eléctricos de las puertas tres veces.

3. Gire el encendido a OFF.

4. Oprima el botón de los seguros

eléctricos de las puertas tres veces.

5. Gire el encendido a ON. El claxon

sonará para indicar que ha ingresado

al modo de programación.

Bloqueo automático de seguros: una

vez en el modo de programación, cada vez

que presione brevemente (menos de 1

segundo) el botón de bloqueo de los

seguros eléctricos de las puertas, se

activará y desactivará el bloqueo

automático de seguros.

Desbloqueo automático de seguros:

cada vez que presione por más tiempo

(más de 2 segundos) el botón de bloqueo

de los seguros eléctricos de las puertas, se

activará y desactivará el desbloqueo

automático de seguros.

Seguros

Nota: El sistema de desbloqueo

automático se puede activar o desactivar

en forma independiente de la función de

bloqueo automático.

Sistema de entrada iluminada

Las luces interiores y algunas exteriores se

iluminan cuando se utiliza el sistema de

entrada a control remoto para desbloquear

las puertas.

El sistema de entrada iluminada apagará

las luces si:

• el encendido está en ON

• se presiona el control de seguros del

transmisor remoto, o

• han estado encendidas 25 segundos.

Las luces no se apagarán si:

• se encendieron con el control del

atenuador o

• alguna puerta está abierta.

Salida iluminada

Las luces interiores y algunas exteriores se

iluminarán cuando todas las puertas del

vehículo estén cerradas, el encendido esté

en "OFF" y la llave no esté en el encendido

(solamente con transmisor integrado a la

llave).

Las luces se apagarán si todas las puertas

permanecen cerradas y:

• transcurren 25 segundos

• se inserta la llave en el encendido (solo

transmisor integrado a la llave)

• se presiona el botón START/STOP

(solo llave de acceso inteligente).

Ahorrador de batería

Si las luces de cortesía, las luces superiores

de techo o los faros delanteros se dejan

encendidos, el economizador de batería

las apagará 10 minutos después de que el

encendido se haya girado a OFF.

Economizador de batería del modo de

accesorios para llaves de acceso

inteligente (si está equipado)

Si apaga el motor y deja el encendido en

ON o en modo de accesorios, el encendido

se apagará después de 30 minutos.

COMPUERTA LEVADIZA

MANUAL

AVISOS

Es extremadamente peligroso viajar

en el área de carga de un vehículo,

ya sea dentro o fuera de él. En una

colisión, la gente que viaja en estas áreas

es la más propensa a quedar herida o

morir. No permita que la gente viaje en

ningún área de su vehículo que no esté

equipada con cinturones de seguridad.

Asegúrese de que todos los pasajeros de

su vehículo estén en un asiento y usen

apropiadamente un cinturón de seguridad.

Asegúrese que la puerta de la

compuerta levadiza esté cerrada

para evitar que los gases de escape

ingresen al vehículo. Esto también evitará

que los pasajeros y la carga se caigan. Si

tuviese que manejar con la compuerta

levadiza abierta, mantenga una buena

ventilación, de modo que el aire exterior

ingrese al vehículo.

Nota: Tenga cuidado al abrir o cerrar la

compuerta levadiza en un garaje o en otra

área cerrada para evitar dañarla.

Nota: No cuelgue nada (parillas

portabicicletas, etc.) en el

estabilizador/vidrio o la compuerta levadiza.

Podría dañar la compuerta o sus

componentes.

Nota: No deje abierta la compuerta

levadiza mientras maneja. Podría dañar la

compuerta o sus componentes.

Seguros

E138632

Para abrir la compuerta levadiza:

oprima el botón en la parte superior de la

manija de tiro de la compuerta levadiza

para liberar el pestillo, luego jale la manija

exterior.

COMPUERTA LEVADIZA

ELÉCTRICA (IF EQUIPPED)

AVISOS

Es extremadamente peligroso viajar

en el área de carga de un vehículo,

ya sea dentro o fuera de él. En una

colisión, la gente que viaja en estas áreas

es la más propensa a quedar herida o

morir. No permita que la gente viaje en

ningún área de su vehículo que no esté

equipada con cinturones de seguridad.

Asegúrese de que todos los pasajeros de

su vehículo estén en un asiento y usen

apropiadamente un cinturón de seguridad.

Asegúrese que la puerta de la

compuerta levadiza esté cerrada

para evitar que los gases de escape

ingresen al vehículo. Esto también evitará

que los pasajeros y la carga se caigan. Si

tuviese que manejar con la compuerta

levadiza abierta, mantenga una buena

ventilación, de modo que el aire exterior

ingrese al vehículo.

AVISOS

Mantenga las llaves fuera del

alcance de los niños. No permita que

los niños jueguen cerca de una

compuerta levadiza eléctrica abierta o en

movimiento.

Nota: Si se realiza un ciclo de encendido

durante el cierre eléctrico de la compuerta

levadiza y ésta se encuentra cerca del

pestillo, podría ocasionar que vuelva a la

posición completamente abierta. Asegúrese

de que la compuerta esté cerrada antes de

hacer funcionar o mover el vehículo,

especialmente en un entorno cerrado, como

un garaje o un estacionamiento estrecho.

Podría dañar la compuerta o sus

componentes.

Nota: No cuelgue nada (parillas

portabicicletas, etc.) en el

estabilizador/vidrio o la compuerta levadiza.

Podría dañar la compuerta o sus

componentes.

La compuerta levadiza solo funcionará con

el vehículo en P (Estacionamiento).

Tres timbres de advertencia sonarán una

vez que la compuerta levadiza comienza

a cerrarse. Cinco timbres cortos indican un

problema con la solicitud de apertura o

cierre, que puede tener las siguientes

causas:

• el motor está encendido y la

transmisión no está en P

(Estacionamiento)

• el voltaje de la batería del vehículo está

por debajo del voltaje operativo

mínimo

• o la velocidad del vehículo es igual o

mayor que 5 km/h (3 mph).

Seguros

Si la compuerta levadiza se cierra después

de que esta se ha detenido en la posición

de abierto, cuatro timbres cortos de

advertencia indican exceso de peso en la

puerta o una posible falla en los

amortiguadores. Consulte con su

distribuidor autorizado si el problema

persiste aun después de retirar la carga.

Apertura y cierre de la compuerta

levadiza

ALERTA

Asegúrese de que no haya nadie en

el área de la compuerta levadiza

antes de utilizar el control de la

compuerta levadiza eléctrica.

Nota: Tenga cuidado al abrir o cerrar la

compuerta levadiza en un garaje o en otra

área cerrada para evitar dañarla.

Nota: No deje abierta la compuerta

levadiza mientras maneja. Podría dañar la

compuerta o sus componentes.

E138633

Para abrir o cerrar

eléctricamente la compuerta

levadiza desde el tablero de

instrumentos: Presione el

botón del tablero de instrumentos.

E138630

Para abrirla o cerrarla con el

control remoto: Oprima el

botón del control remoto dos

veces en menos de tres segundos.

Para abrirla o cerrarla usando la

función de compuerta manos libres (si

está equipada):

1. Asegúrese de tener un transmisor de

acceso inteligente a menos de 1 metro

(3 pies) de la compuerta levadiza.

E142731

2. Levante y baje la pierna, acercando y

poniendo el pie debajo de la defensa

trasera (movimiento similar a una

patada). La compuerta levadiza se

abrirá o se cerrará.

Nota: Permita que el sistema eléctrico abra

la compuerta levadiza. Empujar o jalar

manualmente la compuerta levadiza puede

activar la característica de detección de

obstáculos del sistema y detener el

funcionamiento eléctrico.

Nota: Salpicar agua puede causar que la

compuerta manos libres se abra. Mantenga

el transmisor de acceso inteligente alejado

del área de detección de la defensa trasera

mientras lava su automóvil.

Para abrir la compuerta levadiza con

el botón del control exterior:

1. Quite el seguro de la compuerta

levadiza con el control remoto o el

control de seguros eléctricos de las

puertas. Si el transmisor de acceso

inteligente (si está equipado) está a

menos de 1 metro (3 pies) de la

compuerta levadiza, el seguro de ésta

será desbloqueado al oprimir el botón

de apertura de la compuerta levadiza.

Seguros

E138632

2. Presione el botón de control ubicado

en la parte superior de la manija para

jalar la compuerta levadiza.

Nota: Permita que el sistema eléctrico abra

la compuerta levadiza después de presionar

el control. Empujar o jalar manualmente la

compuerta levadiza puede activar la

característica de detección de obstáculos

del sistema y detener el funcionamiento

eléctrico.

E138636

Para cerrarla con el control en la

compuerta levadiza: Oprima y suelte el

botón.

ALERTA

Manténgase lejos de la compuerta

levadiza cuando active el interruptor

trasero.

Cómo establecer la altura de la

compuerta levadiza abierta

1. Abra la compuerta levadiza.

2. Mueva manualmente la compuerta

levadiza a la altura deseada.

3. Mantenga oprimido el botón de control

en la compuerta levadiza hasta que se

escuche un timbre que indica que la

altura nueva ha sido programada.

Nota: La altura no se puede programar si

la posición de la compuerta levadiza es

demasiado baja.

La altura nueva de apertura de la

compuerta levadiza se recuperará cuando

se abra la compuerta levadiza. Para

cambiar la altura programada, repita el

procedimiento descrito anteriormente. Una

vez que la compuerta levadiza eléctrica

esté abierta se podrá mover manualmente

a una altura diferente.

Cuando se opera la compuerta levadiza

después de haber programado una altura

menor a la de totalmente abierta, la

compuerta levadiza se puede abrir

totalmente empujándola manualmente

hacia arriba a la apertura máxima.

Detección de obstáculos

Durante el cierre: El sistema se detendrá

si detecta un obstáculo y se escucharán

dos campanillas breves. Cuando se haya

quitado el obstáculo, la compuerta

levadiza se puede cerrar eléctricamente.

Seguros

Nota: Ingresar al vehículo mientras se está

cerrando la compuerta levadiza puede

causar que el vehículo se mueva y se active

la detección de obstáculos. Para evitar esto,

espere hasta que la compuerta levadiza

eléctrica se cierre completamente antes de

ingresar al vehículo. Antes de emprender el

viaje, revise el grupo de instrumentos para

ver si hay algún mensaje de compuerta o

puerta abierta o algún indicador de

advertencia. Comenzar a conducir sin

comprobar estos mensajes o indicadores

de advertencia podría causar que la

compuerta levadiza quede abierta,

accidentalmente, mientras conduce.

Durante la apertura: El sistema se

detendrá si detecta un obstáculo y se

escucharán dos campanillas breves. Retire

el obstáculo para operar la compuerta

levadiza.

ENTRADA SIN LLAVE (IF EQUIPPED)

TECLADO DE ENTRADA SIN LLAVE

SECURICODE™

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

9 0

E138637

Puede usar el teclado para:

• bloquear o desbloquear los seguros de

las puertas

• recordar las posiciones de los asientos

con memoria y los espejos (si está

equipado)

• programar y borrar códigos de usuario

• activar y desactivar la alarma antirrobo.

El teclado se puede operar con el código

de entrada de 5 dígitos programado de

fábrica. El código está ubicado en la tarjeta

de billetera del propietario, en la guantera,

y está disponible en su distribuidor

autorizado. También puede crear hasta

cinco códigos de entrada personales de 5

dígitos.

Programación de un código de entrada

personal

Para crear su código de entrada personal:

1. Ingrese el código programado de

fábrica.

2. En un lapso de cinco segundos, oprima

1·2 en el teclado.

3. Ingrese su código personal de 5 dígitos.

Cada número se debe ingresar en un

lapso de cinco segundos.

4. Para la función de recordar memoria,

ingrese el sexto dígito 1·2 para

almacenar el ajuste 1 del conductor 1 o

bien, 3·4 para almacenar el ajuste del

conductor 2.

Nota: Si se presionan los números del

teclado 5·6, 7·8 o 9·0 como sexto dígito no

se recuperará un ajuste de memoria de

conductor.

Nota: El código programado de fábrica no

se puede asociar a ningún ajuste de

memoria.

5. Las puertas se bloquearán y se

desbloquearán para confirmar que se

ha programado su código de entrada

personal.

Seguros

También puede programar un código de

entrada personal en el sistema MyFord

Touch® (si está equipado). Ver

Información general (página 359).

Consejos:

• No programe un código que use cinco

números iguales.

• No use cinco números en orden

secuencial.

• El código programado de fábrica

funcionará aunque programe un código

personal propio.

Borrado del código personal

1. Ingrese el código de 5 dígitos

programado de fábrica.

2. En un lapso de cinco segundos,

presione y suelte 1·2 en el teclado.

3. Mantenga presionado 1·2 durante dos

segundos. Esto se debe hacer en un

lapso de cinco segundos después del

paso 2.

Todos los códigos personales ahora se

borrarán y sólo funcionará el código de

5–dígitos programado de fábrica.

Función de antiexploración (anti-scan)

Si se ingresa un código incorrecto siete

veces (35 presiones consecutivas de los

botones), el teclado entra en un modo

antiexploración. Este modo desactiva el

teclado durante un minuto y la luz del

teclado destella.

La función de antiexploración se apagará

después de:

• un minuto de inactividad del teclado

• presionar el botón de desbloqueo en

el control remoto

• que el encendido se gire a ON

• desbloqueo del vehículo utilizando

acceso inteligente (si está equipado)

Bloqueo y desbloqueo de las puertas

Para desbloquear la puerta del conductor

Ingrese el código de 5 dígitos programado

de fábrica o su código personal. Cada

número se debe presionar en un lapso de

cinco segundos. Se encenderán las luces

interiores.

Nota: Todas las puertas se desbloquearán

en caso de que la característica de apertura

en dos pasos esté desactivada. Ver

Asegurar y Desasegurar (página 60).

Para desbloquear todas las puertas

Ingrese el código programado de fábrica,

luego presione el control 3·4 en menos de

cinco segundos.

Para desbloquear todas las puertas

Mantenga presionados 7·8 y 9·0 al mismo

tiempo (con la puerta del conductor

cerrada). No es necesario ingresar primero

el código del teclado.

Seguros

SISTEMA PASIVO ANTI-ROBO

Nota: El sistema no es compatible con

sistemas de arranque a control remoto de

posventa que no son de Ford. El uso de

estos sistemas puede provocar problemas

en el arranque del vehículo y pérdida de la

protección de seguridad.

Nota: Los objetos metálicos, dispositivos

electrónicos o una segunda llave codificada

en el mismo llavero pueden causar

problemas en el arranque del vehículo si se

acercan demasiado a la llave cuando se

arranca el motor. Evite que estos objetos

toquen la llave codificada al arrancar el

motor. Si se produce un problema, gire el

encendido a OFF, aleje de la llave codificada

todos los objetos del llavero y vuelva a

arrancar el motor.

Nota: No deje un duplicado de la llave

codificada en el vehículo. Siempre lleve las

llaves con usted y ponga los seguros de

todas las puertas cuando salga del vehículo.

SecuriLock®

Este es un sistema de inmovilización del

motor. Está diseñado para evitar el

arranque del motor, a menos que se use

una llave codificada programada para el

vehículo. Usar la llave incorrecta puede

impedir el arranque del motor. También

puede aparecer un mensaje en la pantalla

de información.

Si no puede arrancar el motor con una llave

correctamente codificada, significa que se

ha producido una falla y es posible que

aparezca un mensaje en la pantalla de

información.

Activación automática del sistema

antirrobo

El vehículo se activa inmediatamente

después de colocar el encendido en la

posición OFF.

Desactivación automática del sistema

antirrobo

La activación del encendido con una llave

codificada desactiva el sistema de alarma

del vehículo.

Llaves de reemplazo

Nota: El vehículo incluye dos transmisores

integrados a la llave o dos llaves de acceso

inteligente.

El transmisor integrado a la llave opera

como una llave de encendido programada

que hace funcionar todos los seguros y

arranca el vehículo, y como un control

remoto.

Las funciones de la llave de acceso

inteligente como una llave programada

que hace funcionar el seguro de la puerta

del conductor y activa el acceso inteligente

con los sistemas de arranque oprimiendo

botón, y también como un control remoto.

Si programó los transmisores o llaves

codificadas SecuriLock estándar (solo

transmisores a la llave) y éstos se

perdieron o fueron robados y no tiene una

llave codificada adicional, deberá remolcar

el vehículo hasta un distribuidor

autorizado. Es necesario borrar los códigos

de llave del vehículo y programar nuevas

llaves codificadas.

Almacene una llave programada adicional

lejos del vehículo, en un lugar seguro, como

ayuda para evitar molestias. Consulte a su

distribuidor autorizado para adquirir

duplicados de llaves o llaves de reemplazo

adicionales.

Programación de duplicados de llaves

de transmisor integrado a la llave

Nota: Se puede programar un máximo de

ocho llaves codificadas para su vehículo.

Las ocho pueden ser transmisores

integrados a la llave.

Seguridad

Usted puede programar sus propios

transmisores integrados a la llave o llaves

codificadas SecuriLock estándar para su

vehículo. Este procedimiento programará

el código de llave inmovilizador del motor

y la parte del transmisor de entrada a

control remoto del control remoto de su

vehículo.

Use solamente transmisores integrados a

la llave o llaves SecuriLock estándar.

Debe tener a la mano dos llaves

codificadas previamente programadas y

la o las nuevas llaves sin programar. Si no

dispone de dos llaves codificadas

previamente programadas, consulte a su

distribuidor autorizado para que

programen los duplicados de la llave.

Antes de comenzar, asegúrese de leer y

entender el procedimiento completo.

1. Inserte la primera llave codificada

previamente programada en el

encendido.

2. Gire el encendido de OFF a ON.

Mantenga el encendido en ON por al

menos tres segundos, pero no más de

10.

3. Gire el encendido a OFF y quite la

primera llave codificada del encendido.

4. Después de tres segundos, pero antes

de diez de haber girado el encendido a

OFF, inserte la segunda llave

codificada previamente en el

encendido.

5. Gire el encendido de OFF a ON.

Mantenga el encendido en ON por al

menos tres segundos, pero no más de

10.

6. Gire el encendido a OFF y quite la

segunda llave codificada previamente

programada del encendido.

7. Luego de tres segundos, pero antes de

10 segundos después de girar el

encendido a OFF y quitar la llave

codificada previamente programada,

inserte en el encendido la nueva llave

no programada.

8. Gire el encendido de OFF a ON.

Mantenga el encendido en ON por al

menos seis segundos.

9. Quite la llave codificada recientemente

programada del encendido.

Si se programó con éxito, la llave hará

arrancar el motor del vehículo y hará

funcionar el sistema de entrada a control

remoto (si la nueva llave es un transmisor

integrado a la llave).

Si no se programó correctamente, espere

10 segundos y repita los pasos 1 a 8. Si

sigue sin poder programar la llave, lleve el

vehículo a un distribuidor autorizado.

Programación de una llave de acceso

inteligente de repuesto

Consulte a su distribuidor autorizado para

programar duplicados de llaves

adicionales para su vehículo.

ALARMA ANTI-ROBO (IF EQUIPPED)

El sistema le advertirá en caso de entrada

no autorizada al vehículo. El sistema

armado se activará si alguna puerta, el

compartimiento de equipaje o el cofre se

abre sin usar la llave o el control remoto.

Las luces de estacionamiento y

direccionales destellarán y el claxon

sonará si se intenta ingresar al vehículo sin

autorización mientras la alarma está

activada.

Lleve todos los controles remoto a un

distribuidor autorizado si existe cualquier

posible problema con la alarma de su

vehículo.

Seguridad

Activación de la alarma

La alarma está lista para activarse cuando

no hay una llave en el encendido. Bloquee

el vehículo para activar la alarma.

Desactivación de la alarma

Desactive la alarma mediante cualquiera

de las siguientes acciones:

• Desbloquee las puertas o el

compartimiento de equipaje con el

control remoto o el teclado de entrada

sin llave

• Ponga el encendido en ON o arranque

el vehículo.

• Utilice una llave en la puerta del

conductor para desbloquear el vehículo

y gire el encendido a ON antes de 12

segundos.

Seguridad

AJUSTE DEL VOLANTE DE

DIRECCIÓN

ALERTA

No ajuste el volante de la dirección

cuando el vehículo esté en

movimiento.

Nota: Cerciórese de que esté sentado en

la posición correcta. Ver Modo correcto de

sentarse (página 134).

E95178

1. Desbloquee la columna de la dirección.

2. Ajuste el volante de la dirección en la

posición deseada.

E95179

3. Asegure la columna de la dirección.

CONTROL DE AUDIO (IF EQUIPPED)

Seleccione el origen requerido en la unidad

de audio.

Puede operar las siguientes funciones con

el control:

Tipo 1

E145434

Utilice las flechas del volante de la

dirección para navegar por los menús.

Presione OK para hacer una selección.

Volante de Dirección

Tipo 2

E129462

Subir volumenA

Buscar hacia arriba o siguienteB

Bajar volumenC

Buscar hacia abajo o anteriorD

ModoE

Oprima M para seleccionar el origen de

audio.

Tipo 3

E129463

Subir volumenA

Buscar hacia arriba o siguienteB

Bajar volumenC

Buscar hacia abajo o anteriorD

Buscar, Siguiente o Anterior

Presione el botón Buscar para:

• sintonizar el radio en la estación

preestablecida anterior o siguiente

• reproducir la pista siguiente o anterior.

Mantenga oprimido el botón Buscar para:

• sintonizar el radio en la siguiente

estación hacia arriba o hacia abajo de

la banda de frecuencia

• buscar en una pista.

Volante de Dirección

CONTROL DE VOZ (IF EQUIPPED)

E129464

Tire del control para seleccionar o cancelar

la selección del control de voz. Ver

SYNC® (página 307). Ver MyFord

Touch® (página 348).

Controles de MyFord Touch® (If

Equipped)

Los controles del volante de la dirección

también pueden tener estas características

adicionales.

E142613

Presione para ir a la pantalla de

inicio.

E142608

Presione para ir a la pantalla de

información.

Ver MyFord Touch® (página 348).

CONTROL DE CRUCERO

E142437

Ver Control de Crucero (página 188).

CONTROL DE LA PANTALLA DE

INFORMACIÓN

E130248

Ver Pantallas de información (página

93).

Volante de Dirección

LIMPIA PARABRISAS

Nota: Desempañe completamente el

parabrisas antes de encender los

limpiaparabrisas.

Nota: Asegúrese de que los

limpiaparabrisas estén desactivados antes

de ingresar a un sistema de lavado

automático de automóviles.

Nota: Limpie el parabrisas y las hojas de

los limpiadores si comienzan a dejar rayas

o manchas. Si eso no resuelve el problema,

instale nuevos limpiaparabrisas.

Nota: No haga funcionar los limpiadores

con el parabrisas seco. Esto puede rayar el

vidrio, dañar las hojas del limpiador o

quemar el motor del limpiador. Siempre use

los lavadores del parabrisas antes de limpiar

el parabrisas seco.

E128444

Un solo barridoA

Barrido intermitenteB

Barrido normalC

Barrido a alta velocidadD

Barrido intermitente

E128445

Intervalo de barrido cortoA

Barrido intermitenteB

Intervalo de barrido largoC

Use el control giratorio para ajustar el

intervalo de barrido intermitente.

Limpiadores dependientes de la

velocidad

Cuando aumenta la velocidad del vehículo,

el intervalo entre los barridos disminuye.

LIMPIADORES AUTOMÁTICOS

(IF EQUIPPED)

Nota: Desempañe completamente el

parabrisas antes de encender los

limpiaparabrisas.

Nota: Asegúrese de que los

limpiaparabrisas estén desactivados antes

de ingresar a un sistema de lavado

automático de automóviles.

Nota: Limpie el parabrisas y las hojas de

los limpiadores si comienzan a dejar rayas

o manchas. Si eso no resuelve el problema,

instale nuevos limpiaparabrisas.

Limpiadores y Lavadores

Nota: Si activa el encendido automático

de luces en conjunto con los

limpiaparabrisas automáticos, las luces

bajas de los faros delanteros se encenderán

automáticamente cuando el sensor de lluvia

active los limpiaparabrisas

Nota: Las condiciones de camino húmedo

pueden producir barrido inesperado o con

manchas.

Para reducir las manchas recomendamos

lo siguiente:

• Disminuya la sensibilidad de los

limpiaparabrisas automáticos.

• Cambie a barrido de velocidad normal

o alta.

• Apague los limpiaparabrisas

automáticos.

E128445

Alta sensibilidadA

EncendidoB

Baja sensibilidadC

Los limpiaparabrisas funcionarán cuando

se detecte humedad en el

limpiaparabrisas. El sensor de lluvia seguirá

monitoreando la cantidad de humedad en

el parabrisas y ajustará la velocidad de los

limpiadores automáticamente.

Use el control giratorio para ajustar la

sensibilidad del sensor de lluvia. En

sensibilidad baja, los limpiadores

funcionarán cuando el sensor detecta una

gran cantidad de humedad en el

parabrisas. En sensibilidad alta, los

limpiadores funcionarán cuando el sensor

detecta una pequeña cantidad de

humedad en el parabrisas.

Mantenga el exterior del parabrisas limpio.

El rendimiento del sensor se verá afectado

si el área alrededor del espejo interior está

sucia. El sensor de lluvia es muy sensible

y los limpiadores se pueden activar cuando

cae suciedad o niebla o insectos golpean

el parabrisas.

LAVA PARABRISAS

Nota: No haga funcionar los lavadores

cuando el depósito esté vacío. Esto puede

ocasionar que la bomba del lavador se

sobrecaliente.

E129188

Los lavadores rociarán mientras mantenga

la palanca jalada hacia usted. Cuando

suelte la palanca, los limpiadores

funcionarán por un breve período.

Se llevará a cabo un barrido unos pocos

segundos después de lavar para eliminar

cualquier exceso de líquido lavaparabrisas.

Limpiadores y Lavadores

LIMPIADOR Y LAVADOR DE

MEDALLÓN

Limpiador de la ventana trasera

E129193

Barrido intermitenteA

Barrido a baja velocidadB

Oprima el botón que se encuentra en el

extremo de la palanca para cambiar entre

apagado, intermitente y velocidad baja.

Cuando cambie a R (Reversa), el limpiador

trasero cambiará a intermitente si se

activan los limpiadores frontales.

Lavador de la ventana trasera

E129194

El lavador rociará mientras mantenga la

palanca presionada lejos de usted. Cuando

suelte la palanca, el limpiador funcionarán

por un breve período.

Limpiadores y Lavadores

CONTROL DE ILUMINACIÓN

E142449

Desactiv. (OFF)A

Las luces de estacionamiento,

del tablero de instrumentos, de

placa y luces traseras

FarosC

Luces altas

E130140

Empuje la palanca hacia adelante para

encender las luces altas.

Empuje otra vez la palanca hacia adelante

o jálela hacia usted para apagar las luces

altas.

Destellador de los faros

E142450

Jale la palanca levemente hacia usted y

suéltela para hacer destellar los faros.

ENCENDIDO AUTOMÁTICO DE

FAROS PRINCIPALES (IF EQUIPPED)

Nota: Tal vez sea necesario encender los

faros manualmente en condiciones

climáticas severas.

E142451

Los faros se encienden y se apagan

automáticamente en situaciones de

escasa iluminación o cuando hace mal

tiempo.

Los faros permanecerán encendidos por

un período de tiempo después de girar el

encendido a OFF. Puede ajustar la demora

usando los controles de la pantalla de

información. Ver Pantallas de

información (página 93).

Iluminación

Nota: Si activa el encendido automático

de luces en conjunto con los

limpiaparabrisas automáticos, las luces

bajas de los faros delanteros se encenderán

automáticamente cuando el sensor de lluvia

active los limpiaparabrisas

ATENUADOR DE ILUMINACIÓN

DE TABLEROL DE

INSTRUMENTOS

Nota: Si desconecta la batería o si ésta se

descarga, los componentes iluminados

cambiarán al ajuste máximo.

Vehículos con faros para niebla

delanteros

E132712

Presione varias veces o mantenga

presionado hasta llegar al nivel de

deseado.

Vehículos sin faros para niebla

delanteros

A B

E142452

Presione varias veces o

mantenga presionado para

atenuar.

Presione varias veces o

mantenga presionado para

aumentar el brillo.

RETARDO DE APAGADO DE

FAROS PRINCIPALES

Después de mover el encendido a la

posición OFF, puede encender los faros

tirando la palanca del indicador de

dirección hacia usted. Escuchará un sonido

corto. Los faros se apagarán

automáticamente después de tres minutos

si hay alguna puerta abierta, o 30

segundos después de cerrar la última

puerta. Puede cancelar esta característica

tirando la palanca del indicador de

dirección hacia usted nuevamente o

girando el encendido a la posición ON.

Iluminación

FAROS DE OPERACIÓN

DIURNA (IF EQUIPPED)

ALERTA

Recuerde siempre encender sus

faros en situaciones de escasa

iluminación o cuando haga mal

tiempo. El sistema no activa con las luces

traseras y puede que no proporcione una

iluminación adecuada durante estas

condiciones. Si no se activan los faros en

estas condiciones, se podría producir un

choque.

Si cuenta con faros halógenos, el sistema

enciende los faros de luces bajas a una

menor intensidad en condiciones de luz de

día.

Si cuenta con faros de descarga de alta

intensidad (HID), el sistema enciende lo

faros de niebla en condiciones de luz de

día.

Para activar el sistema, arranque el

vehículo y cambie el control de luces a la

posición Off, encendido automático de

luces o luz de estacionamiento.

FAROS DE NIEBLA

DELANTEROS

E142453

Presione el control para encender o apagar

los faros de niebla.

Puede encender los faros de niebla cuando

el control de luces se encuentra en

cualquier posición, excepto OFF y las luces

altas están apagadas.

INDICADORES DE LUCES

DIRECCIONALES

E130141

Empuje la palanca hacia arriba o hacia

abajo para usar los indicadores de

dirección.

Nota: Empuje la palanca ligeramente hacia

arriba o hacia abajo para que los indicadores

de dirección destellen tres veces para

indicar un cambio de pista.

ILUMINACIÓN INTERIOR

Las luces se encenderán cuando se haya

cumplido una de las siguientes

condiciones:

• Usted abre alguna puerta.

• Oprime un botón del control remoto.

• Oprime el interruptor B de la luz interior

delantera.

Iluminación

Luz interior delantera

Nota: Oprima A para apagarlas al abrir una

puerta. La luz indicadora se encenderá de

color amarillo. Oprima A nuevamente para

volver a encenderlas. La luz indicadora se

encenderá de color azul.

E142454

Interruptor de función de la

puerta.

Interruptor de encendido y

apagado de todas las luces.

Interruptor de encendido y

apagado de luces individuales.

Luz interior trasera (If Equipped)

E142455

Puede encender luces de mapa

individuales de manera independiente al

oprimir A.

LUZ AMBIENTAL (IF EQUIPPED)

El sistema de iluminación ambiental

ilumina el interior con una selección de

varios colores. El control de la iluminación

ambiental se encuentra en la consola de

toldo.

A B C

E142456

Paleta de colorA

Perilla de controlB

Modo de búsquedaC

Gire B más allá del primer tope para

encender y ajustar al brillo deseado.

Oprima A para recorrer las opciones de

color.

Oprima C para encender todas las luces

interiores y la iluminación ambiental.

Oprima C nuevamente para apagar las

luces interiores y volver al color

seleccionado anteriormente para la

iluminación ambiental.

La iluminación ambiental se encenderá

cuando se hayan cumplido las siguientes

condiciones:

• activa el encendido

• enciende los faros delanteros

• el nivel de la luz ambiental externa es

bajo.

Iluminación

La iluminación ambiental se mantendrá

encendida hasta que desactive el

encendido y se hayan cumplido las

siguientes condiciones:

• bloquea el vehículo

• expira el plazo del temporizador de

demora de accesorios.

Iluminación

VENTANAS ELÉCTRICAS

AVISOS

No deje a los niños solos en el

vehículo ni les permita jugar con las

ventanas eléctricas. Podrían sufrir

lesiones graves.

Al cerrar las ventanas eléctricas,

debe verificar que estén libres de

obstrucciones y asegurarse de que

los niños o mascotas no estén cerca de las

aberturas de la ventana.

E70848

Nota: Es posible que escuche un ruido

sordo cuando solo una de las ventanas está

abierta. Baje la ventana contraria para

reducirlo levemente.

Oprima el interruptor para abrir la ventana.

Levante el interruptor para cerrar la

ventana.

Apertura de un solo toque (If Equipped)

Oprima el interruptor por completo y

suéltelo. Oprímalo o levántelo nuevamente

para detener la ventana.

Cierre de un solo toque (If Equipped)

Levante el interruptor por completo y

suéltelo. Oprímalo o levántelo nuevamente

para detener la ventana.

Bloqueo de ventanas

E70850

Oprima el control para bloquear o

desbloquear los controles de las ventanas

traseras. Se iluminará cuando los controles

de las ventanas traseras queden

bloqueados.

Rebote (If Equipped)

La ventana se detendrá automáticamente

al cerrarse. Se bajará un poco si se

encuentra con un obstáculo.

Cancelación de la característica de

rebote

Proceda de la siguiente manera para

cancelar esta característica de protección

cuando existe resistencia, por ejemplo, en

el invierno:

1. Cierre la ventana dos veces hasta que

llegue al punto de resistencia y permita

que baje.

Ventanas y espejos retrovisores

2. Cierre la ventana una tercera vez hasta

el punto de resistencia. La

característica de rebote ahora está

desactivada y podrá cerrar la ventana

en forma manual. La ventana pasará

el punto de resistencia y la podrá cerrar

completamente.

Póngase en contacto con su distribuidor

autorizado lo antes posible, si la ventana

no se cierra después del tercer intento.

Restablecimiento de la característica

de rebote

ALERTA

La función de rebote permanece

desactivada hasta que se lleva a

cabo el restablecimiento de la

memoria.

Si ha desconectado la batería, debe

restablecer la memoria de rebote en cada

una de las ventanas de manera

independiente.

1. Mantenga levantado el interruptor

hasta que la ventana esté totalmente

cerrada.

2. Suelte el interruptor.

3. Nuevamente levante el interruptor

durante un segundo más.

4. Mantenga oprimido el interruptor hasta

que la ventana esté totalmente abierta.

5. Suelte el interruptor.

6. Mantenga levantado el interruptor

hasta que la ventana esté totalmente

cerrada.

7. Abra la ventana e intente cerrarla

automáticamente.

8. Restablezca y repita el procedimiento

si la ventana no cierra

automáticamente.

Demora de accesorios (If Equipped)

Puede usar los interruptores de las

ventanas por varios minutos después de

desconectar el encendido o hasta que se

abra cualquier puerta delantera.

ESPEJOS RETROVISORES

EXTERIORES

Espejos eléctricos exteriores

ALERTA

No ajuste los espejos cuando el

vehículo esté en movimiento.

A C

E70846

Espejo izquierdoA

Desactiv. (OFF)B

Espejo derechoC

E70847

Oprima las flechas para ajustar el espejo.

Ventanas y espejos retrovisores

Espejos plegables exteriores

Empuje el espejo hacia el cristal de la

ventanilla de la puerta. Asegúrese de fijar

por completo el espejo en su soporte al

volverlo a colocar en la posición original.

Espejos térmicos exteriores (If

Equipped)

Ver Ventanas y espejos retrovisores

calentados (página 131).

Espejos con memoria (If Equipped)

Puede guardar y recordar las posiciones

de los espejos a través de la función de

memoria. Ver Función de memoria

(página 138).

Espejos para puntos ciegos

integrados (If Equipped)

ALERTA

Los objetos en el espejo para puntos

ciegos se ven más cerca de lo que

están en realidad.

Los espejos para puntos ciegos tienen

integrado un espejo convexo en la esquina

superior externa de los espejos exteriores.

Están diseñados para incrementar su

visibilidad a los lados del vehículo.

Revise primero el espejo principal antes de

cambiar de carril y luego el espejo para

puntos ciegos. Si no se ve ningún vehículo

en el espejo para puntos ciegos y el

tránsito en el carril adyacente está a una

distancia segura, ponga su direccional para

indicar que intenta cambiar de carril. Mire

brevemente por encima del hombro para

verificar que no haya tráfico, y cambie de

carril con cuidado.

E138665

La imagen del vehículo que se aproxima

se ve pequeña y cerca del borde interno

del espejo principal cuando está a cierta

distancia. La imagen se hace más grande

y comienza a moverse hacia fuera del

espejo principal conforme el vehículo se

acerca (A). La imagen saldrá del espejo

principal y comenzará a aparecer en el

espejo para puntos ciegos, conforme el

vehículo se acerca (B). El vehículo pasará

a su zona de visión periférica conforme

salga del espejo para puntos ciegos (C).

Espejo para puntos ciegos (If Equipped)

Ver Monitor de Punto Ciego (página 190).

Ventanas y espejos retrovisores

ESPEJO RETROVISOR

INTERIOR

ALERTA

No ajuste el espejo cuando el

vehículo esté en movimiento.

Nota: No limpie el alojamiento ni los vidrios

de ningún espejo con abrasivos,

combustibles u otros productos de limpieza

fuertes a base de petróleo o amoníaco.

Puede ajustar el espejo interior según su

preferencia. Algunos espejos también

tienen un segundo punto de pivote. Esto

le permite mover el espejo hacia arriba o

abajo y de lado a lado.

Tire la lengüeta debajo del espejo hacia

usted para reducir el reflejo por la noche.

Espejo de atenuación automática

(If Equipped)

Nota: No bloquee los sensores en la parte

delantera y trasera del espejo. El

desempeño del espejo podría verse

afectado. Asimismo, la presencia de un

pasajero o una cabeza elevada en el asiento

trasero central puede impedir que la luz

llegue al sensor.

El espejo se atenuará de manera

automática para reducir el reflejo cuando

se detecten luces brillantes desde detrás

del vehículo. Volverá automáticamente al

reflejo normal cuando seleccione reversa

para asegurarse de que tiene una visión

clara al retroceder.

VISERAS

E138666

Gire la visera hacia la ventana lateral y

extiéndala hacia atrás para obtener más

sombra.

Espejo de la visera iluminado (If

Equipped)

E138667

Levante la cubierta para encender la luz.

TECHO SOLAR (IF EQUIPPED)

AVISOS

No deje que los niños jueguen con el

toldo corredizo ni deje niños solos en

el vehículo. Podrían lesionarse de

gravedad.

Al cerrar el toldo corredizo, debe

verificar que esté libre de

obstrucciones y asegurarse de que

no haya niños ni mascotas cerca de la

abertura.

Ventanas y espejos retrovisores

Los controles del toldo corredizo la

pantalla solar están ubicados en la consola

de toldo.

El toldo corredizo y la pantalla solar

cuentan con una función de apertura y

cierre de un solo toque. Para detenerlos

durante la operación de un solo toque,

oprima el control por segunda vez.

Apertura y cierre de la pantalla

solar

E138668

Oprima y suelte la parte trasera del control

para abrir la pantalla solar.

Oprima y suelte la parte delantera del

control para cerrar la pantalla solar. Si está

abierto, el toldo corredizo se cerrará

automáticamente antes de que la pantalla

solar lo haga.

Apertura y cierre del toldo

corredizo

E138669

Oprima y suelte la parte trasera del control

para abrir el toldo corredizo Si está

cerrado, la pantalla solar se abrirá

automáticamente antes de que el toldo

corredizo lo haga. El toldo corredizo se

detendrá poco antes de la posición de

apertura total.

Nota: Esta posición ayuda a reducir el ruido

del viento o ruido sordo que se puede

producir con el toldo totalmente abierto.

Mantenga presionado el control

nuevamente para abrir el toldo corredizo

por completo.

Oprima y suelte la parte delantera del

control para cerrar el toldo corredizo.

Rebote

El toldo corredizo se detendrá

automáticamente al cerrarse. Se devolverá

un poco si se encuentra con un obstáculo.

Mantenga oprimida la parte delantera del

control durante dos segundos de un evento

de rebote para neutralizar esta función.

Mientras el rebote está activo, la fuerza de

cerrado aumenta para cada una de las tres

veces siguientes que cierra el toldo

corredizo.

Ventilación del toldo corredizo

Oprima y suelte la parte delantera del

control para ventilar el toldo corredizo.

Oprima y suelte la parte trasera del control

para cerrar el toldo corredizo.

Ventanas y espejos retrovisores

INDICADORES

E145825

Pantalla de informaciónA

VelocímetroB

Indicador de temperatura del refrigerante del motorC

Indicador de combustibleD

TacómetroE

Pantalla de información

Brújula (si está equipado)

Muestra la dirección hacia donde se dirige

el vehículo.

Para calibrar y fijar la zona de la brújula,

use el menú de visualización de

información. Ver Pantallas de

información (página 93).

Use el diagrama para determinar su zona

magnética.

Tablero de instrumentos

123

6 7 8 91011

E142800

Odómetro

Ubicado en la parte inferior de la pantalla

de información, registra la distancia

acumulada que el vehículo ha recorrido.

Temperatura del aire exterior

Muestra la temperatura ambiente del

exterior.

Computadora de viaje

Ver Computadora de viaje (página 96).

Configuración y personalización del

vehículo

Ver Información general (página 93).

Indicador de temperatura del

líquido refrigerante del motor

ALERTA

Nunca quite el tapón del depósito

del líquido refrigerante mientras el

motor esté caliente o en

funcionamiento.

A temperatura normal de funcionamiento,

la aguja permanecerá en la parte central.

Nota: No vuelva a arrancar el motor hasta

que se haya resuelto la causa del

sobrecalentamiento.

Si la aguja llega a la sección roja, esto

significa que el motor se está

sobrecalentando. Detenga el vehículo,

apáguelo y determine la causa una vez que

el motor se haya enfriado. Ver

Comprobación del refrigerante de

motor (página 244).

Indicador de combustible

Gire el encendido a ON. El indicador de

combustible indicará aproximadamente

cuánto combustible queda en el tanque.

El indicador de combustible puede variar

levemente cuando el vehículo está en

movimiento o en una pendiente. La flecha

adyacente al símbolo de la bomba de

combustible indica en qué lado del

vehículo está ubicada la puerta de llenado

de combustible.

INDICADORES Y LUCES DE

ADVERTENCIA

Las siguientes luces de advertencia e

indicadores lo alertarán de una condición

del vehículo que puede volverse grave. Al

arrancar el motor se encenderán algunas

luces para probar su funcionamiento. Si

alguna de las luces permanece encendida

después de arrancar el vehículo, consulte

la luz de advertencia del sistema

correspondiente para obtener información

adicional.

Nota: Algunos indicadores de advertencia

aparecen en la pantalla de información y

funcionan igual que una luz de advertencia,

pero no aparecen al encender el vehículo.

Bolsa de aire delantera

Si no se enciende cuando da

partida al vehículo, continúa

destellando o si permanece

encendida, indica una falla. Haga que su

distribuidor autorizado revise el sistema.

Tablero de instrumentos

Sistema de frenos antibloqueo

Si se enciende mientras usted

conduce, indica una falla.

Seguirá con el sistema de frenos

normal (sin ABS), a menos que la luz de

advertencia del mismo se encienda. Haga

que su distribuidor autorizado revise el

sistema.

Batería

Si se enciende mientras

conduce, indica una falla.

Apague todo equipo eléctrico

innecesario y haga que su distribuidor

autorizado verifique el sistema de

inmediato.

Espejo para puntos ciegos (If Equipped)

E124823

Se encenderá cuando apague

esta característica o en conjunto

con un mensaje. Ver Monitor

de Punto Ciego (página 190). Ver

Mensajes de información (página 96).

Sistema de frenos

E138644

Se encenderá cuando active el

freno de estacionamiento con el

encendido activado.

Si se enciende cuando está conduciendo,

verifique que el freno de estacionamiento

no esté activado. Si el freno de

estacionamiento no está activado, indica

nivel de líquido de frenos bajo o una falla

en el sistema de frenos. Solicite a su

distribuidor autorizado que revise de

inmediato el vehículo.

ALERTA

Es peligroso conducir el vehículo con

la luz de advertencia encendida. Se

puede producir una disminución

importante en el rendimiento de los frenos.

Le tomará más tiempo detener el vehículo.

Solicite de inmediato que el distribuidor

autorizado revise el vehículo. Manejar

grandes distancias con el freno de

estacionamiento accionado puede hacer

que los frenos fallen, con el riesgo de sufrir

lesiones personales.

Control de crucero (C/C) (If Equipped)

E71340

Se enciende cuando activa esta

característica. Ver Uso del

control de crucero (página 188).

Intermitente

Se ilumina cuando la

intermitente izquierda o derecha,

o las luces intermitentes de

advertencia están encendidas. Si los

indicadores permanecen encendidos o

destellan más rápido, verifique si hay un

foco fundido. Ver Cambio de focos

(página 254).

Aceite de motor

Si se enciende con el motor

encendido o mientras usted

conduce, indica una falla. Pare

el vehículo tan pronto como encuentre la

forma segura de hacerlo y apague el

motor. Compruebe el nivel de aceite del

motor. Ver Comprobación del aceite de

motor (página 243).

Nota: No reanude su viaje si se enciende a

pesar de que el nivel del aceite es correcto.

Solicite a su distribuidor autorizado que

revise de inmediato el vehículo.

Tablero de instrumentos

Abrochar cinturón de seguridad

Se iluminará y también sonará

una campanilla como

recordatorio para que se

abroche el cinturón. Ver Recordatorio de

Cinturones de Seguridad (página 33).

Faros de niebla delanteros (If Equipped)

Éste se enciende cuando

enciende los faros para niebla

delanteros.

Luces altas

Se enciende cuando enciende

las luces altas de los faros.

Destellará cuando utilice el

destellador de los faros.

Información (If Equipped)

Éste se enciende cuando se

almacena un nuevo mensaje en

la pantalla de información. Será

de color rojo o ámbar, dependiendo de la

gravedad del mensaje, y se quedará

encendido hasta que se haya rectificado

la causa del mensaje. Ver Mensajes de

información (página 96).

Nivel de combustible bajo

Se encenderá cuando el nivel de

combustible esté bajo o el

tanque de combustible esté casi

vacío. Reabastezca el combustible tan

pronto como sea posible.

Advertencia de llanta con baja

presión

Se encenderá cuando la presión

de las llantas es baja. Si la luz

permanece encendida con el

motor funcionando o mientras

conduce, revise la presión de las llantas a

la brevedad posible.

También se encenderá

momentáneamente cuando dé partida al

vehículo para confirmar que la luz

funciona. Si no se enciende al activar el

encendido o comienza a destellar en

cualquier momento, acuda al distribuidor

autorizado para que revise el sistema de

inmediato.

Luces de estacionamiento

Éste se enciende cuando

enciende las luces de

estacionamiento.

Servicio del motor a la brevedad

Si la luz indicadora de servicio

del motor a la brevedad

permanece encendida luego de

encender el motor, indica que el sistema

de Diagnóstico a bordo (OBD) ha

detectado una falla del sistema de control

de emisiones del vehículo. Consulte la

sección Diagnóstico a bordo (OBD) en el

capítulo Combustible y reabastecimiento

para obtener más información sobre el

servicio a su vehículo. Ver Sistema de

control de emisiones (página 158).

Si la luz destella, se está produciendo una

falla de encendido del motor que podría

dañar su convertidor catalítico. Conduzca

de manera moderada (evite aceleraciones

y desaceleraciones bruscas) y haga revisar

su vehículo inmediatamente.

Tablero de instrumentos

Nota: En condiciones de falla de encendido

del motor, las temperaturas excesivas de

escape podrían dañar el convertidor

catalítico u otros componentes del vehículo.

La luz indicadora de servicio del motor a

la brevedad se enciende cuando el

encendido se activa antes de arrancar el

motor para revisar el foco y para indicar si

el vehículo está listo para prueba de

inspección y mantenimiento (I/M).

Normalmente, la luz Servicio del motor a

la brevedad permanecerá iluminada hasta

que el motor se arranque y luego se

apagará si no se presentan desperfectos.

Sin embargo, si después de 15 segundos,

la luz Servicio del motor a la brevedad

parpadea ocho veces, significa que el

vehículo no está listo para la prueba de

inspección y mantenimiento (I/M). Ver

Sistema de control de emisiones

(página 158).

Control de estabilidad

Destellará cuando el sistema

está activo. Si permanece

encendida o no se ilumina

cuando activa el encendido, indica una

falla. Durante una falla, el sistema se

apagará. Solicite a su distribuidor

autorizado que revise de inmediato el

vehículo.

Control de estabilidad apagado

Se enciende cuando desactiva

el sistema. Se apagará cuando

usted vuelva a encender el

sistema o cuando apague el encendido.

ADVERTENCIAS E

INDICADORES AUDIBLES

Campanilla de advertencia de llave

en el encendido

Suena cuando abre la puerta del conductor

y ha dejado la llave en el encendido en la

posición de apagado o accesorio.

Campanilla de advertencia de

faros encendidos

Suena cuando quita la llave del encendido

y abre la puerta del conductor y ha dejado

encendidos los faros o las luces de

estacionamiento.

Campanilla de advertencia de

freno de estacionamiento activado

Suena cuando ha dejado activado el freno

de estacionamiento y conduce el vehículo.

Si la campanilla de advertencia permanece

activada después de soltar el freno de

estacionamiento, solicite a su distribuidor

autorizado que revise de inmediato el

vehículo.

Tablero de instrumentos

INFORMACIÓN GENERAL

ALERTA

Manejar mientras está distraído

puede tener como consecuencia la

pérdida de control del vehículo, un

accidente y lesiones. Ford le recomienda

enfáticamente que extreme las

precauciones cuando utilice cualquier

dispositivo o función que pudiera distraerlo

mientras conduce. Su responsabilidad

principal es manejar en forma segura el

vehículo. No recomendamos el uso de

dispositivos portátiles mientras maneja;

debe cumplir con todas las leyes

aplicables.

Varios sistemas del vehículo se pueden

controlar usando los controles de la

pantalla de información que se encuentran

en el volante de la dirección. La

información correspondiente aparece en

la pantalla de información.

Controles de la pantalla de

información

E138659

• Oprima los botones con las flechas

hacia arriba y hacia abajo para recorrer

y resaltar las opciones de un menú.

• Oprima el botón con la flecha hacia la

derecha para ingresar a un submenú.

• Oprima el botón con la flecha hacia la

izquierda para salir de un menú.

• Cuando desee volver a la pantalla del

menú principal, mantenga oprimido el

botón con la flecha hacia la izquierda

(botón de escape).

• Oprima el botón "OK" (Aceptar) para

seleccionar y confirmar ajustes o

mensajes.

Estructura de menús: Pantalla de

información

Todos los vehículos

Puede acceder al menú usando el control

de la pantalla de información.

Nota: Es posible que algunas opciones

luzcan diferentes o que no aparezcan si se

trata de elementos opcionales.

Pantallas de información

Viaje 1 y 2

Distancia antes de quedar vacío

Viaje 1 o 2

Temporizador de viaje

AnticipaciónFord EcoModeConsumo promedio

de combustible

Velocidad

Ford EcoMode

Ver Computadora de viaje (página 96).

Ver Modo de Economico (página 194).

Información

4WD inteligente

Distancia MyKey

Información de MyKey

Configuración

Activar o desactivarCtrl tracciónAsistencia para el

conductor

Activar o desactivarPunto ciego del

espejo

Activar o desactivarAlerta de tráfico

cruzado

Activar o desactivarAsistencia de

arranque en

pendientes

Activar o desactivarAsistencia de esta-

cionamiento en

reversa

Activar o desactivarLuz de lluviaIluminación

Automática o ManualAtenuación

Pantallas de información

Configuración

Desactivar o XXX segundosRetardo del encen-

dido automático

de luces

Siempre apagado, Durante la guía o Siempre

encendido

Información de

navegación

Pantalla

Seleccione el ajuste que correspondaIdioma

Seleccione el ajuste que correspondaDistancia

Seleccione el ajuste que correspondaTemperatura

Advertencia de información de espacio para estacionarCampanillas

Activar o desactivarPantallaBrújula (solo en

sistemas sin nave-

gación)

Conveniencia

Zona (1–15)Ajustar zona

Mantenga oprimido "OK"

para calibrar

Calibración

Calefactor – A/A / Auto-

mático o Último ajuste

Control de tempe-

ratura

Arranque a control

remoto

Desempañador delantero

/ Automático o Desacti-

vado

Desempañador trasero /

Automático o Desacti-

vado

(5, 10 o 15 minutos)Duración

Activar/DesactivarArranque silen-

cioso

Restaurar valores predeterminados

Activar o desactivarSistema

Mantenga oprimido "OK" para crear MyKeyCrear MyKeyMyKey

Siempre encendido o Selección del usuarioCtrl tracción

130 km/h (80 MPH) o ApagadoVelocidad máxima

75 km/h (45 mph), 90 km/h (55 mph), 105

km/h (65 mph) o Apagado

Advertencia de

velocidad

Pantallas de información

Configuración

Activar o desactivarLimitador de

volumen

Mantenga oprimido "OK" para borrar todas las

llaves MyKey

Borrar MyKey

Mantenga oprimido "OK" para restablecer el sistema a los valores

predeterminados de fábrica

Restablecimiento

del sistema

Comprobación del sistema

Aparecerán primero todas las advertencias

activas, si corresponde. El menú de revisión

del sistema puede tener otro aspecto,

dependiendo de las opciones de

equipamiento y el estado actual del

vehículo. Utilice los botones de flecha

hacia arriba o hacia abajo para desplazarse

en la lista.

COMPUTADORA DE VIAJE

Restablecimiento de la

computadora de viaje

Mantenga presionado "OK" en la pantalla

actual para restablecer la información

respectiva de viaje, distancia, tiempo y

rendimiento promedio del combustible.

Odómetro de viaje

Registra la distancia recorrida en cada viaje

individual.

Temporizador de viaje

Registra el tiempo de cada viaje individual.

Distancia antes de quedar el

tanque vacío (DTE)

Indica la distancia aproximada que el

vehículo puede recorrer con el combustible

que resta en el tanque. Los cambios en el

modo de manejar el vehículo pueden hacer

que el valor varíe.

Consumo promedio de

combustible

Indica el consumo promedio de

combustible a partir del último

restablecimiento de la función.

MENSAJES DE INFORMACIÓN

Nota: Dependiendo de las opciones con

que cuente el vehículo, no todos los

mensajes aparecerán o estarán disponibles.

Es posible que algunos mensajes aparezcan

abreviados o acortados según el tipo de

grupo de instrumentos que tenga su

vehículo.

E130248

Pantallas de información

Oprima el botón "OK" para confirmar que

desea eliminar algunos mensajes de la

pantalla de información. Los demás

mensajes se borrarán automáticamente

después de un momento.

Es necesario confirmar ciertos mensajes

para poder ingresar a los menús.

Indicador de mensajes (If Equipped)

El indicador de mensajes se

ilumina para acompañar algunos

mensajes. Será de color rojo o

ámbar, dependiendo de la gravedad del

mensaje, y se quedará encendido hasta

que se haya rectificado la causa del

mensaje.

Algunos mensajes se complementarán

con un símbolo específico del sistema con

un indicador de mensaje.

Bolsa de aire

Acción a tomarIndicador del

mensaje

Mensaje

Aparece cuando el sistema requiere servicio

debido a una falla. Póngase en contacto con

su distribuidor autorizado.

ÁmbarBolsa de aire averiada

Servicio inmediato

Alarma

Acción a tomarIndicador del

mensaje

Mensaje

Aparece cuando la alarma se activa debido a

un acceso no autorizado. Ver Alarma Anti-

Robo (página 70).

ÁmbarAlarma activada Revisar

el vehículo

Aparece cuando el sistema requiere servicio

debido a una falla. Póngase en contacto con

su distribuidor autorizado.

-Sistema de alarma

averiado Requiere

servicio

Pantallas de información

Batería y sistema de carga

Acción a tomarIndicador del

mensaje

Mensaje

Detenga el vehículo tan pronto como pueda

hacerlo con seguridad y apague el encendido.

Póngase en contacto con su distribuidor auto-

rizado.

RojoSistema eléctrico sobre-

voltaje Pare con cuidado

Aparece para advertir que la carga de la batería

del vehículo está baja. Apague todos los acce-

sorios eléctricos innecesarios. Póngase en

contacto con su distribuidor autorizado.

ÁmbarBatería baja Ver manual

Sistema de información de puntos ciegos y alerta de tráfico cruzado

Acción a tomarIndicador del

mensaje

Mensaje

Aparece cuando los sensores del sistema de

información de puntos ciegos y alerta de tráfico

cruzado están bloqueados. Ver Monitor de

Punto Ciego (página 190).

ÁmbarBLIS Baja visibilidad Ver

manual

Aparece cuando ocurre una falla en el sistema.

Comuníquese de inmediato con su distribuidor

autorizado.

ÁmbarBLIS: X sensor izquierdo

Requiere servicio

Aparece cuando el sistema no está disponible

porque se está usando un remolque. Ver

Monitor de Punto Ciego (página 190).

ÁmbarBLIS no disponible Modo

remolque

Aparece cuando el sistema detecta un vehículo.

Ver Monitor de Punto Ciego (página 190).

ÁmbarTráfico cruzado Vehículo

por la X

Aparece cuando los sensores del sistema de

información de puntos ciegos y alerta de tráfico

cruzado están bloqueados. Ver Monitor de

Punto Ciego (página 190).

ÁmbarTráfico cruzado Sensor

bloqueado Ver manual

Aparece cuando el sistema requiere servicio

debido a una falla. Póngase en contacto con

su distribuidor autorizado.

ÁmbarTráfico cruzad averiado

Requiere servicio

Aparece cuando el sistema no está disponible

porque se está usando un remolque. Ver

Monitor de Punto Ciego (página 190).

-Tráfico cruzado desacti-

vado Modo remolque

Pantallas de información

Puertas

Acción a tomarIndicador del

mensaje

Mensaje

Aparece cuando las puertas indicadas no están

cerradas completamente y el vehículo está en

movimiento.

RojoPuerta del X abierta

Aparece cuando las puertas indicadas no están

cerradas completamente.

Aparece cuando la tapa del compartimiento

de equipaje no está cerrada completamente y

el vehículo está en movimiento.

RojoCajuela abierta

Aparece cuando la tapa del compartimiento

de equipaje no está cerrada completamente.

Aparece cuando la tapa del cofre no está

cerrada completamente y el vehículo está en

movimiento.

RojoCofre abierto

Aparece cuando la tapa del cofre no está

cerrada completamente.

Motor

Acción a tomarIndicador del

mensaje

Mensaje

El motor requiere servicio. Póngase en contacto

con su distribuidor autorizado.

ÁmbarMotor averiado Servicio

inmediato

Aparece cuando la temperatura del motor es

demasiado alta. Detenga el vehículo en un lugar

seguro y permita que el motor se enfríe. Si el

problema persiste, póngase en contacto con

su distribuidor autorizado. Ver Comprobación

del refrigerante de motor (página 244).

RojoTemperatura de motor

alta Pare con cuidado

Pantallas de información

Asistencia de arranque en pendientes

Acción a tomarIndicador del

mensaje

Mensaje

Aparece cuando no se dispone de asistencia

de arranque en pendientes. Póngase en

contacto con su distribuidor autorizado. Ver

Asistencia de arranque en pendientes

(página 165).

ÁmbarAsistencia freno de

pendiente no disponible

Acceso sin llave del vehículo

Acción a tomarIndicador del

mensaje

Mensaje

Aparece para recordarle que la llave está en el

compartimiento de equipaje. Ver Arranque

sin llave (página 150).

ÁmbarFord KeyFree Llave

dentro del auto

Aparece si el sistema no detecta la llave. Ver

Arranque sin llave (página 150).

-Ford KeyFree No detectó

llave

Aparece como recordatorio para que apague

el vehículo. Ver Arranque sin llave (página

150).

RojoApagar motor Presione

ENGINE Start/Stop

Aparece como recordatorio de pisar el freno

mientras arranca el vehículo.

-Pise el freno para

arrancar

Aparece cuando no se detecta una llave válida

dentro del vehículo. Ver Arranque sin llave

(página 150).

RojoFord KeyFree Llave no en

el auto

Aparece cuando la batería de la llave está baja.

Cambie la batería tan pronto como pueda. Ver

Transmisor Remoto (página 48).

-Batería de llave baja

Reemplace pronto

100

Pantallas de información

Iluminación

Acción a tomarIndicador del

mensaje

Mensaje

Aparece cuando se funde el foco de la luz de

freno. Póngase en contacto con su distribuidor

autorizado.

-Luces de freno Falla en

Aparece cuando se funde el foco de luces bajas

de los faros. Póngase en contacto con su

distribuidor autorizado.

-Luces de cruce Falla en

Aparece cuando ocurre un problema eléctrico

en el sistema de faros. Póngase en contacto

con su distribuidor autorizado.

ÁmbarFaro delantero averiado

Requiere servicio

Mantenimiento

Acción a tomarIndicador del

mensaje

Mensaje

Aparece cuando se agota la vida útil del aceite

del motor y es necesario cambiarlo. Ver

Comprobación del aceite de motor (página

243).

-Aceite de motor Cambio

requerido

Indica que el nivel del líquido de frenos está

bajo y que es necesario inspeccionar el sistema

de frenos de inmediato. Ver Verificación del

Fluído de Frenos (página 248).

RojoNivel líquido frenos bajo

Servicio inmediato

Aparece cuando el nivel de líquido limpia

parabrisas está bajo y es necesario reponerlo.

Ver Comprobación del fluido del lavador

(página 248).

-Nivel de líquido limpia

parabrisas bajo

Aparece cuando la entrada de llenado de

combustible no está bien cerrada. Ver Llenado

(página 156).

-Revisar la entrada

llenado combustible

101

Pantallas de información

MyKey

Acción a tomarIndicador del

mensaje

Mensaje

Aparece cuando MyKey está activo.-MyKey activa Conducir

con cuidado

Aparece al arrancar el motor cuando se usa

una MyKey y el límite de velocidad MyKey está

activo.

-MyKey Velocidad limi-

tada a XX MPH/km/h

Aparece cuando se usa una MyKey, el límite de

velocidad de MyKey está activo y la velocidad

del vehículo se acerca a 130 km/h (80 mph).

ÁmbarMyKey Cerca de velo-

cidad máxima de

vehículo

Aparece cuando se usa una MyKey y se alcanza

el límite de velocidad MyKey.

ÁmbarMyKey Vehículo a velo-

cidad máx.

Aparece cuando MyKey está activo.-MyKey Verificar velo-

cidad Conducir c/

cuidado

Aparece cuando se usa una MyKey y el sistema

Belt-Minder está activo.

-MyKey Abrochar cinturón

p/recuperar audio

Aparece cuando se usa una MyKey y el sistema

de asistencia de estacionamiento está activo.

-MyKey Asist. estac. no

puede desactivarse

Aparece al tratar de crear una MyKey con una

llave previamente designada como MyKey.

-La llave ya es MyKey

Aparece al programar una MyKey.-Sostenga la llave junto

al símbolo en la col. de

dirección

Aparece al programar una MyKey.-MyKey ESC no puede

desactivarse

Asistencia para estacionamiento

Acción a tomarIndicador del

mensaje

Mensaje

Aparece cuando el sistema detecta una condi-

ción que requiere servicio. Póngase en contacto

con su distribuidor autorizado. Ver Asistencia

de estacionamiento (página 178).

ÁmbarFalla asist. estac.

Requiere servicio

102

Pantallas de información

Freno de estacionamiento

Acción a tomarIndicador del

mensaje

Mensaje

Aparece cuando el freno de estacionamiento

está aplicado, el motor está en marcha y se

conduce el vehículo a más de 5 km/h (3 mph).

Si la advertencia permanece encendida

después de soltar el freno de estacionamiento,

póngase en contacto con su distribuidor autori-

zado.

RojoFreno de mano activado

Dirección hidráulica

Acción a tomarIndicador del

mensaje

Mensaje

El sistema de dirección asistida no funciona.

Detenga el vehículo en un lugar seguro.

Póngase en contacto con su distribuidor auto-

rizado.

RojoDirección averiada Pare

con cuidado

El sistema de dirección asistida no funciona.

Detenga el vehículo en un lugar seguro.

Póngase en contacto con su distribuidor auto-

rizado.

ÁmbarDirección asistida

averiada Revisar

El sistema de dirección asistida detectó una

condición que requiere servicio en el sistema

de dirección asistida o el sistema de acceso y

arranque pasivo. Póngase en contacto con su

distribuidor autorizado.

ÁmbarDirección averiada

Servicio inmediato

Sistema de arranque

Acción a tomarIndicador del

mensaje

Mensaje

Aparece al arrancar el motor como recordatorio

de aplicación de los frenos.

-Pise el freno para

arrancar

Aparece cuando el vehículo no arranca.-Tiempo de arranque

excedido

103

Pantallas de información

Transmisión y tracción en las cuatro ruedas

Acción a tomarIndicador del

mensaje

Mensaje

Consulte con su distribuidor autorizado.-Transmisión averiada

Servicio inmediato

La transmisión se está sobrecalentando y es

necesario enfriarla. Detenga el vehículo en un

lugar seguro tan pronto como sea posible.

ÁmbarTransmisión sobrecalen-

tada Pare con cuidado

Consulte con su distribuidor autorizado.ÁmbarTransmisión Requiere

servicio

La transmisión se está calentando. Deténgase

para dejarla enfriar o acelere.

-Transmisión caliente

Pare o acelere

La transmisión está caliente. Espere el tiempo

necesario hasta que se enfríe.

-Transmisión caliente

Espere . . .

El sistema no está funcionando correctamente

y pasó automáticamente a tracción en las

ruedas delanteras. Consulte con su distribuidor

autorizado. Ver Uso de la tracción en las

cuatro ruedas (página 167).

Ámbar4WD averiado Requiere

servicio

Aparece cuando el sistema se desactiva en

forma automática e ingresa al modo de solo

tracción delantera para proteger los compo-

nentes de la transmisión. Ver Uso de la trac-

ción en las cuatro ruedas (página 167).

Ámbar4WD apagado

El sistema se sobrecalentó y pasó automática-

mente a tracción en las ruedas delanteras. Ver

Uso de la tracción en las cuatro ruedas

(página 167).

Ámbar4WD desactivado

temporalmente

Aparece cuando se restaura el funcionamiento

del sistema. Ver Uso de la tracción en las

cuatro ruedas (página 167).

-4WD reactivado

Aparece como recordatorio de cambiar la

transmisión a Park.

-Transmisión no está en

Park Seleccione P

Aparece para solicitar al conductor que aplique

los frenos tal como lo necesita la transmisión.

-Pise el freno para

desbloquear la pal. de

cambios

Aparece cuando la palanca de cambios está

desbloqueada y lista para seleccionar marchas.

-Pal. de cambios desblo-

queada

104

Pantallas de información

Sistema de control de presión de las llantas

Acción a tomarIndicador del

mensaje

Mensaje

Aparece cuando una o más de las llantas del

vehículo tienen baja presión. Ver Sistema de

monitoreo de presión de las llantas (página

285).

ÁmbarBaja presión neumáticos

Aparece cuando el sistema de monitoreo de

presión de las llantas está fallando. Si la

advertencia permanece encendida o continúa

encendiéndose, póngase en contacto con su

distribuidor autorizado. Ver Sistema de

monitoreo de presión de las llantas (página

285).

ÁmbarFalla en monitor presión

neumáticos

Aparece cuando un sensor de presión de llantas

no funciona correctamente o cuando está en

uso la llanta de refacción. Para obtener más

información sobre el funcionamiento del

sistema en estas condiciones, consulte Ver

Sistema de monitoreo de presión de las

llantas (página 285). Si la advertencia perma-

nece activa o aparece nuevamente, comuní-

quese con el distribuidor autorizado lo antes

posible.

ÁmbarFalla en sensor presión

neumáticos

Control de tracción

Acción a tomarIndicador del

mensaje

Mensaje

Aparece cuando el sistema de control de trac-

ción se ha apagado. Ver Uso del control de

tracción (página 175).

-Control de tracción

apagado

105

Pantallas de información

INFORMACIÓN GENERAL

Frecuencias de radio y factores de

recepción

La Comisión Federal de Comunicaciones

de Estados Unidos (Federal

Communications Commission [FCC]) y la

Comisión de Radio y Telecomunicaciones

de Canadá (Canadian Radio and

Telecommunications Commission

[CRTC]) establecen las frecuencias AM y

FM. Estas frecuencias son:

• AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz

• FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz

Factores de la recepción de radio

Mientras más se aleja de una estación FM, más débil es

la señal y la recepción.

Distancia/Potencia

Los cerros, montañas, edificios altos, puentes, túneles,

pasos elevados en autopistas, estacionamientos de varios

pisos, follajes de árboles densos y las tormentas eléctricas

pueden interferir con la recepción.

Terreno

Cuando pasa por una torre de radiodifusión basada en

tierra, una señal más potente puede superar a una más

débil y generar un silencio del sistema de audio.

Sobrecarga de estaciones

Información de CD y el reproductor

de CD

Nota: Las unidades de CD están diseñadas

para tocar solamente discos compactos de

audio de 12 cm (4.75 pulg) originales.

Debido a incompatibilidad técnica, ciertos

discos compactos grabables y regrabables

podrían no funcionar correctamente cuando

se usan en reproductores de CD Ford.

Nota: Los CD con etiquetas caseras de

papel (adhesivas) no se deben insertar en

el reproductor, ya que éstas podrían

desprenderse y hacer que el disco se

atasque. Se recomienda identificar los CD

caseros con un marcador permanente en

vez de utilizar etiquetas adhesivas. Los

bolígrafos pueden dañar los CD. Para

obtener más información, comuníquese con

el distribuidor autorizado.

Nota: No use ningún disco con forma

irregular o con una película protectora

antirrayaduras adherida.

Siempre tome los discos únicamente por

los bordes. Limpie el disco con un

limpiador de CD aprobado solamente,

limpiando desde el centro del disco hacia

el borde. No limpie con movimientos

circulares.

No exponga los discos directamente a la

luz del sol ni a fuentes de calor por

períodos prolongados.

106

Sistema de audio

Estructura de canciones y carpetas

MP3

Los sistemas de audio capaces de

reconocer y reproducir canciones

individuales MP3 y la estructura de

carpetas funciona de la siguiente forma:

• Existen dos modos diferentes para

reproducir discos MP3: modo de

canción MP3 (sistema

predeterminado) y modo de archivo

MP3.

• El modo de canción MP3 ignora

cualquier estructura de carpetas en el

disco MP3. El reproductor enumera

cada canción MP3 en el disco

(señaladas con la extensión de archivo

.mp3) desde T001 hasta un máximo

de T255. Es posible que el número

máximo de archivos MP3 reproducibles

sea menor según la estructura del CD

y el modelo exacto del radio.

• El modo de archivo MP3 representa

una estructura de carpeta que consta

de un nivel de archivos. El reproductor

de CD enumera todas las canciones

MP3 en el disco (señaladas con la

extensión de archivo .mp3) y todas las

carpetas que contienen archivos MP3,

desde F001 (carpeta) T001 (canción)

hasta F253 T255.

• La creación de discos con un sólo nivel

de carpetas ayuda a la navegación a

través de ellos.

Si está grabando sus propios discos MP3,

es importante comprender la manera en

que el sistema lee las estructuras que crea.

Si bien pudieran haber varios archivos

presentes, (archivos con extensiones

distintas a mp3), se reproducirán sólo los

archivos con extensión .mp3; el sistema

ignora otros archivos. Esto le permite usar

el mismo disco MP3 para diversas tareas

en la computadora de su trabajo, de su

casa y del sistema de su vehículo.

En el modo de canción, el sistema muestra

y reproduce la estructura como si tuviese

sólo un nivel (se reproducen todos los

archivos .mp3, sin importar si se

encuentran en una carpeta específica). En

el modo de carpeta, el sistema solo

reproduce los archivos .mp3 en la carpeta

actual.

UNIDAD DE AUDIO -

VEHÍCULOS CON: AM/FM/CD

ALERTA

Manejar mientras está distraído

puede tener como consecuencia la

pérdida de control del vehículo, un

accidente y lesiones. Ford le recomienda

enfáticamente que tenga extrema

precaución cuando utilice cualquier

dispositivo que pudiera distraerlo cuando

conduce. Su responsabilidad principal es

manejar en forma segura el vehículo. No

se recomienda el uso de ningún dispositivo

portátil al conducir; se sugiere el uso de

sistemas operados por voz cuando sea

posible y que se informe de las leyes

estatales y locales aplicables al uso de

dispositivos electrónicos al conducir.

107

Sistema de audio

E142600

Eject (Expulsar): presione para expulsar un CD.A

Flechas de cursor: presione para desplazarse por las opciones en pantalla.B

Ranura de CD: inserte un CD.C

OK: presione para confirmar las selecciones en pantalla.D

Reloj: presione para ajustar la hora. Use los botones H y M fuera de la pantalla

de audio para ajustar las horas y minutos. Presione OK para terminar. (El reloj

también se puede configurar al presionar MENU, luego desplazar el menú de

configuración de reloj).

INFO: presione para acceder a información del radio o el reproductor de CD.F

Bloqueo de números: presione un botón para almacenar estaciones de radio

favoritas. Cuando se sintoniza una estación, mantenga presionado el botón

hasta que el sonido retorne.

Seek (Buscar): presione para subir a la siguiente estación de la banda de

frecuencia o siguiente pista de un CD.

ON/OFF: active o desactive el sistema de audio al presionar el botón. Gire para

ajustar el volumen.

108

Sistema de audio

Seek (Buscar): presione para subir a la siguiente estación de la banda de

frecuencia o pista anterior de un CD.

MENU: presione para acceder a distintas funciones del sistema de audio.

Consulte Estructura de menús más adelante en este capítulo.

SONIDO: oprima para ajustar la configuración de sonido para graves, agudos,

balance y distribución.

AUX: presione para acceder a las funciones de medios del sistema SYNC® al

presionar MENU, luego AUX. Ver SYNC® (página 307).

RADIO: presione para acceder a distintas funciones de radio al presionar RADIO,

luego MENU. Consulte Estructura de menús más adelante en este capítulo.

CD: presione para acceder a distintas funciones de CD al presionar CD, luego

MENU. Consulte Estructura de menús más adelante en este capítulo.

UNIDAD DE AUDIO -

VEHÍCULOS CON:

AM/FM/CD/SYNC

ALERTA

Manejar mientras está distraído

puede tener como consecuencia la

pérdida de control del vehículo, un

accidente y lesiones. Ford le recomienda

enfáticamente que tenga extrema

precaución cuando utilice cualquier

dispositivo que pudiera distraerlo cuando

conduce. Su responsabilidad principal es

manejar en forma segura el vehículo. No

se recomienda el uso de ningún dispositivo

portátil al conducir; se sugiere el uso de

sistemas operados por voz cuando sea

posible y que se informe de las leyes

estatales y locales aplicables al uso de

dispositivos electrónicos al conducir.

109

Sistema de audio

E142601

Expulsar: presione para expulsar un CD.A

Flechas de cursor: presione para desplazarse por las opciones en pantalla.B

Ranura de CD: inserte un CD.C

OK: presione para confirmar las selecciones en pantalla.D

Reloj: presione para ajustar la hora. Use los botones H y M fuera de la pantalla

de audio para ajustar las horas y minutos. Oprima "OK" para terminar. (El reloj

también se puede configurar al presionar MENU, luego desplazar el menú de

configuración de reloj).

INFO: presione para acceder a información del radio o el reproductor de CD.F

SONIDO: oprima para ajustar la configuración de sonido para graves, agudos,

balance y distribución.

Bloqueo de números: presione un botón para almacenar estaciones de radio

favoritas cuando se encuentre en modo de radio. Cuando sintonice una estación,

mantenga presionado el botón hasta que el sonido retorne. En el modo CD,

presione un botón para seleccionar una canción. En el modo de teléfono, use

los botones para marcar un número de teléfono.

110

Sistema de audio

Botón de función 4: oprímalo para seleccionar distintas funciones del sistema

de audio, dependiendo del modo en que se encuentre (por ejemplo, radio o

CD).

Botón de función 3: oprímalo para seleccionar distintas funciones del sistema

de audio, dependiendo del modo en que se encuentre (por ejemplo, radio o

CD).

Buscar: presione para subir a la siguiente estación de la banda de frecuencia

o siguiente pista de un CD.

ON/OFF: active o desactive el sistema de audio al presionar el botón. Gire el

selector para ajustar el volumen.

Buscar: presione para subir a la siguiente estación de la banda de frecuencia

o pista anterior de un CD.

Botón de función 2: oprímalo para seleccionar distintas funciones del sistema

de audio, dependiendo del modo en que se encuentre (por ejemplo, radio o

CD).

Botón de función 1: oprímalo para seleccionar distintas funciones del sistema

de audio, dependiendo del modo en que se encuentre (por ejemplo, radio o

CD).

MENU: presione para acceder a distintas funciones del sistema de audio.

Consulte Estructura de menús más adelante en este capítulo.

TELÉFONO: presione para acceder a las funciones telefónicas del sistema

SYNC® al presionar MENU y luego TELÉFONO. Ver SYNC® (página 307).

AUX: presione para acceder a las funciones de medios del sistema SYNC® al

presionar MENU, luego AUX. Ver SYNC® (página 307).

RADIO: presione para acceder a distintas funciones de radio al presionar RADIO,

luego MENU. Consulte Estructura de menús más adelante en este capítulo.

CD: presione para acceder a distintas funciones de CD al presionar CD, luego

MENU. Consulte Estructura de menús más adelante en este capítulo.

111

Sistema de audio

UNIDAD DE AUDIO -

VEHÍCULOS CON:

AM/FM/CD/RADIO

SATELITAL/SYNC

ALERTA

Manejar mientras está distraído

puede tener como consecuencia la

pérdida de control del vehículo, un

accidente y lesiones. Ford le recomienda

enfáticamente que tenga extrema

precaución cuando utilice cualquier

dispositivo que pudiera distraerlo cuando

conduce. Su responsabilidad principal es

manejar en forma segura el vehículo. No

se recomienda el uso de ningún dispositivo

portátil al conducir; se sugiere el uso de

sistemas operados por voz cuando sea

posible y que se informe de las leyes

estatales y locales aplicables al uso de

dispositivos electrónicos al conducir.

Nota: Su sistema de audio puede funcionar

hasta una hora después de haber apagado

el encendido. Presione el control ON/OFF

(encendido/apagado) para hacer funcionar

el sistema con el encendido apagado. El

sistema se apaga automáticamente

después de una hora.

Nota: Es posible que algunas

características, como la radio satelital

SIRIUS, no estén disponibles en su región.

Consulte primero a su distribuidor

autorizado.

E142602

112

Sistema de audio

Expulsar: presione para expulsar un CD.A

Flechas de cursor: presione para desplazarse por las opciones en pantalla.B

Ranura de CD: inserte un CD.C

OK: presione para confirmar las selecciones en pantalla.D

INFO: presione para acceder a información del radio o el reproductor de CD.E

MENU: presione para acceder a distintas funciones del sistema de audio.

Consulte Estructura de menús más adelante en este capítulo.

SOUND: oprima para ajustar la configuración de sonido para graves, agudos,

balance y distribución.

Bloqueo de números: presione un botón para almacenar estaciones de radio

favoritas cuando se encuentre en modo de radio. Cuando se sintoniza una

estación, mantenga presionado el botón hasta que el sonido retorne. En el

modo CD, presione un botón para seleccionar una canción. En el modo de

teléfono, use los botones para marcar un número de teléfono. En el modo de

reloj, use los botones H y M fuera de la pantalla de audio para ajustar las horas

y minutos. Oprima "OK" para terminar. (El reloj también se puede configurar al

presionar MENU, luego desplazar el menú de configuración de reloj).

Botón de función 4: oprímalo para seleccionar distintas funciones del sistema

de audio, dependiendo del modo en que se encuentre (por ejemplo, radio o

CD).

Botón de función 3: oprímalo para seleccionar distintas funciones del sistema

de audio, dependiendo del modo en que se encuentre (por ejemplo, radio o

CD).

Buscar: presione para subir a la siguiente estación de la banda de frecuencia

o siguiente pista de un CD.

ON/OFF: active o desactive el sistema de audio al presionar el botón. Gire para

ajustar el volumen.

Buscar: presione para subir a la siguiente estación de la banda de frecuencia

o pista anterior de un CD.

Botón de función 2: oprímalo para seleccionar distintas funciones del sistema

de audio, dependiendo del modo en que se encuentre (por ejemplo, radio o

CD).

Botón de función 1: oprímalo para seleccionar distintas funciones del sistema

de audio, dependiendo del modo en que se encuentre (por ejemplo, radio o

CD).

PHONE: presione para acceder a las funciones telefónicas del sistema SYNC®

al presionar MENU y luego PHONE. Ver SYNC® (página 307).

AUX: presione para acceder a las funciones de medios del sistema SYNC® al

presionar MENU, luego AUX. Ver SYNC® (página 307).

113

Sistema de audio

SIRIUS: presione para acceder a distintas funciones de radio satelital al

presionar SIRIUS, luego MENÚ. Consulte Estructura de menús más adelante

en este capítulo.

RADIO: presione para acceder a distintas funciones de radio al presionar RADIO,

luego MENU. Consulte Estructura de menús más adelante en este capítulo.

CD: presione para acceder a distintas funciones de CD al presionar CD, luego

MENU. Consulte Estructura de menús más adelante en este capítulo.

UNIDAD DE AUDIO -

VEHÍCULOS CON: AM/FM/CD

PREMIUM

ALERTA

Manejar mientras está distraído

puede tener como consecuencia la

pérdida de control del vehículo, un

accidente y lesiones. Ford le recomienda

enfáticamente que tenga extrema

precaución cuando utilice cualquier

dispositivo que pudiera distraerlo cuando

conduce. Su responsabilidad principal es

manejar en forma segura el vehículo. No

se recomienda el uso de ningún dispositivo

portátil al conducir; se sugiere el uso de

sistemas operados por voz cuando sea

posible y que se informe de las leyes

estatales y locales aplicables al uso de

dispositivos electrónicos al conducir.

Nota: La ranura para CD se encuentra

directamente arriba de la pantalla táctil.

Nota: La mayoría de las funciones de audio

se controlan mediante el sistema MyFord

Touch®. Ver MyFord Touch® (página 348).

114

Sistema de audio

E143843

- TUNE +: oprima para buscar la banda de frecuencias en incrementos

individuales.

ON/OFF y VOL.: oprima para encender o apagar el sistema de audio. Gire el

selector para ajustar el volumen.

Expulsar: expulsar un CD.C

SEEK: oprímalo para ir a la estación siguiente o anterior en la banda de

frecuencia de radio o a la canción siguiente o anterior de un CD.

SOUND: oprima para ajustar la configuración de sonido para graves, agudos,

balance y distribución.

SOURCE: oprima para acceder a diferentes modos de audio, como AM, FM y

entrada de A/V.

115

Sistema de audio

UNIDAD DE AUDIO -

VEHÍCULOS CON: SONY

AM/FM/CD

ALERTA

Manejar mientras está distraído

puede tener como consecuencia la

pérdida de control del vehículo, un

accidente y lesiones. Ford le recomienda

enfáticamente que tenga extrema

precaución cuando utilice cualquier

dispositivo que pudiera distraerlo cuando

conduce. Su responsabilidad principal es

manejar en forma segura el vehículo. No

se recomienda el uso de ningún dispositivo

portátil al conducir; se sugiere el uso de

sistemas operados por voz cuando sea

posible y que se informe de las leyes

estatales y locales aplicables al uso de

dispositivos electrónicos al conducir.

Nota: La ranura para CD se encuentra

directamente arriba de la pantalla táctil.

Nota: La mayoría de las funciones de audio

se controlan mediante el sistema MyFord

Touch®. Ver MyFord Touch® (página 348).

E143844

Encendido: oprima para encender o apagar el sistema de audio.A

SOURCE: oprima para acceder a diferentes modos de audio, como AM, FM y

entrada de A/V.

Buscar: oprímalo para ir a la estación siguiente o anterior en la banda de

frecuencia de radio o a la canción siguiente o anterior de un CD.

116

Sistema de audio

- TUNE +: oprima para buscar la banda de frecuencias en incrementos

individuales.

Volumen: gire el selector para ajustar el volumen.E

SOUND: oprima para ajustar la configuración de sonido para graves, agudos,

balance y distribución.

Expulsar: presione para expulsar un CD.G

Estructura de menú

Nota: Dependiendo del sistema, puede que

algunas opciones luzcan diferentes, que no

aparezcan o que aparezcan en la pantalla

y pueda seleccionarlas usando los botones

de función.

Presione MENU.

Oprima los botones con las flechas hacia

arriba y hacia abajo para recorrer las

opciones (si están activas).

Oprima la flecha hacia la derecha para

ingresar a un menú. Oprima la flecha hacia

la izquierda para salir de un menú.

Radio

Use las flechas hacia la izquierda y la derecha para ir hacia

arriba o hacia abajo en la banda de frecuencia.

Sintonización manual

Seleccione para obtener una breve muestra de todos los

canales disponibles.

Explorar

Seleccione para almacenar las seis estaciones locales

con mejor recepción en las bandas de AM y FM.

Autoguardar

Seleccione esta opción para que el sistema busque ciertas

categorías de música (rock, pop, country, etc.).

PTY/Elegir categoría

Seleccione esta opción para ver información de transmi-

sión adicional, si está disponible. La configuración prede-

terminada de esta función es Inactiva. RBDS/RDS debe

estar activado para que pueda definir una categoría.

RBDS/RDS

117

Sistema de audio

SIRIUS

Seleccione para obtener una breve muestra de todos los

canales disponibles.

Explorar

Seleccione esta opción para ver su número de serie elec-

trónico de radio satelital (ESN). Necesitará este número

para comunicarse con SIRIUS® para activar, modificar o

rastrear su cuenta.

Mostrar ESN

Seleccione esta opción para los canales de radio satelital

disponibles. Oprima "OK" para seleccionar ingresar

Sintonizar canal, Saltar canal o Bloquear canal. Una vez

que se salta o se bloquea un canal, puede acceder a él

solamente presionando Direct e ingresando el número de

canal. Para bloquear o desbloquear un canal se requiere

que ingrese su PIN.

Guía de canales

Seleccione esta opción para ver las categorías de canales

(pop, rock, noticias, etc.). Si selecciona una categoría, las

funciones buscar y explorar solo se detendrán en los

canales que pertenezcan a la categoría seleccionada.

Elegir categoría

Seleccione esta opción para activar o desactivar una alerta

para una canción, artista o equipo específico. El sistema

le avisará cuando se esté reproduciendo la selección en

otro canal. Puede guardar hasta 20 alertas.

Alertas

Utilice su PIN para desbloquear las estaciones bloqueadas

anteriormente.

Desbloquear todas las esta-

ciones

Utilice esta opción para restaurar canales que haya

omitido anteriormente.

No saltar estaciones

Seleccione esta opción para crear un PIN que le permita

bloquear o desbloquear canales. Su PIN inicial es 1234.

Bloqueo infantil (PIN)

118

Sistema de audio

Configuración del audio

Ajusta automáticamente el volumen para compensar el

ruido de la velocidad y el viento. Se puede ajustar el

sistema entre desactivado y + 7.

Nivel de SCV

Le permite ajustar la configuración de sonido, como

agudos, graves, medios, distribución y balance.

Sonido

Optimiza la calidad del sonido para las posiciones de

asientos seleccionadas.

Modo de ocupación

Seleccione esta opción para ver las categorías de canales

(pop, rock, noticias, etc.). Si selecciona una categoría, las

funciones buscar y explorar solo se detendrán en los

canales que pertenezcan a la categoría seleccionada.

Elegir categoría

Seleccione esta opción para ver información de transmi-

sión adicional, si está disponible. La configuración prede-

terminada de esta función es Inactiva. RBDS/RDS debe

estar activado para que pueda definir una categoría.

RBDS/RDS

Seleccione esta opción para explorar todas las selecciones

de discos.

Explorar todo

Seleccione esta opción para explorar toda la música

almacenada en la carpeta de MP3 actual.

Explorar carpeta

Seleccione esta opción para reunir los pasajes suaves y

fuertes para un nivel de audición más uniforme.

Compresión de CD

Configuración de la pantalla

Seleccione esta opción para cambiar el brillo de la

pantalla.

Atenuación

Seleccione para ver el idioma en inglés, francés o español.Idioma

Seleccione esta opción para ver la temperatura externa

en grados Fahrenheit o centígrados.

Ajuste de temperatura

119

Sistema de audio

Ajuste del reloj

Seleccione esta opción para ajustar la hora.Configurar hora

Seleccione esta opción para la fecha.Configurar la fecha

Seleccione para ver el reloj en modo de 12 horas o de 24

horas.

12/24 horas

TOMA DE ENTRADA AUXILIAR

AVISOS

Manejar mientras está distraído

puede tener como consecuencia la

pérdida de control del vehículo, un

accidente y lesiones. Ford le recomienda

enfáticamente que tenga extrema

precaución cuando utilice cualquier

dispositivo que pudiera distraerlo cuando

conduce. Su responsabilidad principal es

manejar en forma segura el vehículo. No

se recomienda el uso de ningún dispositivo

portátil al conducir; se sugiere el uso de

sistemas operados por voz cuando sea

posible y que se informe de las leyes

estatales y locales aplicables al uso de

dispositivos electrónicos al conducir.

Por razones de seguridad, no conecte

ni ajuste las configuraciones de su

reproductor de música portátil

mientras el vehículo esté en movimiento.

Cuando el vehículo esté en

movimiento, guarde el reproductor

de música portátil en un lugar

seguro; por ejemplo, en la consola central

o en la guantera. Los objetos sólidos

pueden convertirse en proyectiles cuando

ocurre un choque o frenado repentino, lo

que aumenta el riesgo de sufrir lesiones

graves. El cable de extensión del sistema

de audio debe ser lo suficientemente largo

para permitir que el reproductor de música

se guarde en forma segura mientras el

vehículo está en movimiento.

E142603

El enchufe de entrada auxiliar (AIJ) le

permite conectar y reproducir la música

de su reproductor portátil en los altavoces

del vehículo. Puede usar cualquier

reproductor de música portátil diseñado

para ser utilizado con auriculares. El cable

de extensión de audio debe tener

conectores machos de tres y medio

milímetros (un octavo de pulgada) en cada

extremo.

1. Asegúrese de que el vehículo, radio y

reproductor de música portátil están

apagados y la transmisión está en

posición P.

2. Jale el cable de extensión del

reproductor de música portátil en el

AIJ.

3. Active la radio. Seleccione una estación

FM sintonizada o un CD.

4. Ajuste el volumen según lo desee.

5. Encienda su reproductor de música

portátil y ajuste su volumen a la mitad

de su nivel máximo.

120

Sistema de audio

6. Presione AUX hasta que LINE o LINE

IN aparezca en la pantalla. Deberá

escuchar música desde el dispositivo

incluso si está bajo.

7. Ajuste el volumen de su reproductor

de música portátil hasta que alcance

el nivel de volumen de la estación FM

o el CD. Hágalo cambiando de vuelta

hacia adelante y en reversa entre los

controles AUX y FM o CD.

PUERTO USB (IF EQUIPPED)

E142604

El puerto USB le permite conectar

dispositivos de reproducción de medios,

memory sticks y cargar dispositivos (si se

admite). Ver SYNC® (página 307).

CONCENTRADOR DE MEDIOS

(IF EQUIPPED)

El concentrador de medios se ubica en la

consola central y tiene las siguientes

funciones:

E142605

Entradas A/VA

Ranura para tarjeta SDB

Puertos USBC

Ver MyFord Touch® (página 348).

RADIO SATELITAL (IF EQUIPPED)

SIRIUS® transmite una variedad de

canales de radio satelital de música,

noticias, deportes, clima, tráfico y

entretenimiento. Para obtener más

información y una lista completa de los

canales de radio satelital SIRIUS, visite

www.siriusxm.com en los Estado Unidos,

www.siriuscanada.ca en Canadá, o llame

a SIRIUS al 1–888–539–7474.

121

Sistema de audio

Factores de recepción de radio satelital

Posibles problemas de recepción de radio satelital

Para lograr un óptimo rendimiento de la recepción,

mantenga la antena sin acumulaciones de nieve y hielo y

mantenga el equipaje y otro material en el techo del

vehículo lo más alejado posible de la antena.

Obstrucciones de la antena

Los cerros, montañas, edificios altos, puentes, túneles,

pasos elevados en autopistas, estacionamientos de varios

pisos, follajes de árboles densos y las tormentas eléctricas

pueden interferir con la recepción.

Terreno

Cuando pasa por una torre de radiodifusión basada en

tierra, una señal más potente puede superar a una más

débil y generar un silencio del sistema de audio.

Sobrecarga de estaciones

La pantalla mostrará ADQUIRIENDO... para indicar la

interferencia y es posible que se silencie el sistema.

Interferencia de la señal de

radio satelital

Servicio de radio satelital SIRIUS®

Nota: SIRIUS se reserva el derecho sin

restricción de cambiar, redisponer, agregar

o borrar programación, incluida cancelación,

movimiento o adición de canales específicos

y precios en cualquier momento, con o sin

previo aviso. Ford Motor Company no será

responsable de ninguno de estos cambios

en la programación.

E142593

La radio satelital SIRIUS es un servicio de

radio satelital de suscripción que transmite

una diversidad de programación de

música, deportes, noticias, tiempo, tráfico

y entretenimiento. Su sistema de radio

satelital SIRIUS instalado en fábrica

incluye el dispositivo y una suscripción

limitada que comienza en la fecha de

venta o arrendamiento del vehículo.

Consulte la disponibilidad con su

distribuidor autorizado.

Para obtener más información acerca de

los términos de suscripción extendida (se

requiere una tarifa de servicio), el

reproductor multimedia en línea y una lista

completa de canales de radio satelital

SIRIUS, así como otras funciones, visite

www.siriusxm.com en Estados Unidos,

www.sirius.ca en Canadá o llame a SIRIUS

al 1–888–539–7474.

122

Sistema de audio

Número de serie electrónico de

radio satelital (ESN)

Necesitará su ESN para activar, modificar

o rastrear su cuenta de radio satelital.

Cuando esté en el modo de radio satelital,

podrá ver este número si presiona SIRIUS

y el preestablecimiento de memoria 1 en

forma simultánea.

Localización y solución de problemas

Acción posibleCondiciónPantalla de la radio

No se necesita tomar

ninguna acción. Este

mensaje debe desaparecer

dentro de unos segundos.

La radio requiere más de dos

segundos para generar el

audio para el canal seleccio-

nado.

Acquiring (Adquiriendo)

Si este mensaje no se borra

en breve, o con un ciclo de

la llave de encendido, el

receptor puede tener una

falla. Visite a un distribuidor

autorizado para solicitar

servicio.

Falla de sistema o módulo

interno presente.

Falla satelital/de sistema

SIRIUS

Sintonice otro canal o

seleccione otra memoria

preestablecida.

El canal ya no está dispo-

nible.

Canal inválido

Comuníquese con SIRIUS al

1-888-539-7474 para

suscribirse al canal o bien,

sintonice otro canal.

Suscripción no disponible

para este canal.

Canal sin suscripción

La señal está actualmente

bloqueada. Cuando se

mueva a un área abierta, la

señal volverá.

Se perdió la señal del saté-

lite de SIRIUS o torre de

SIRIUS hacia la antena del

vehículo.

No Signal (Sin señal)

No se necesita tomar

ninguna acción. El proceso

puede tomar hasta tres

minutos.

Actualización de programa-

ción de canales en curso.

Updating (Actualizando)

123

Sistema de audio

Acción posibleCondiciónPantalla de la radio

Póngase en contacto con

SIRIUS llamando al 1-888-

539-7474 para volver a

activar o resolver problemas

de suscripción.

La radio satelital SIRIUS

desactivó el servicio sate-

lital.

Comuníquese con SIRIUS al

1-888-539-7474

Utilizando la guía de

canales, desbloquee o quite

el salto de los canales.

Todos los canales en la

categoría seleccionada

están programados para

saltarse o están

bloqueados.

No Channels Available (No

hay canales disponibles)

No se necesita tomar

ninguna acción.

SIRIUS ha actualizado los

canales disponibles para su

vehículo.

Subscription Updated

(Suscripción actualizada)

124

Sistema de audio

CONTROL DE CLIMA MANUAL

E141421

Control de velocidad del ventilador: Controla el volumen de aire que circula

en el vehículo. Ajuste para seleccionar la velocidad deseada del ventilador o

apague. Si apaga el ventilador, es posible que el parabrisas se empañe.

Aire recirculado: Oprima el botón para cambiar entre aire externo y aire

recirculado. Cuando selecciona aire recirculado, el botón se ilumina y el aire

actualmente en el compartimiento de pasajeros vuelve a circular. Esto puede

reducir el tiempo necesario para enfriar el interior y evitar que ingresen al vehículo

olores indeseados.

Control de temperatura: Controla la temperatura del aire que circula en el

vehículo. Ajuste para seleccionar la temperatura deseada. Si selecciona MAX

A/C, el sistema distribuye el aire que vuelve a circular a través de las

ventilaciones del panel de instrumentos. Este modo es más económico y

eficiente que el aire acondicionado normal. Cuando el control de temperatura

está en la posición MAX A/C, ni el aire acondicionado ni el aire recirculado se

pueden apagar.

Aire acondicionado: Oprima el botón para activar o desactivar el aire

acondicionado. El aire acondicionado enfría el vehículo usando el aire externo.

Para mejorar el acondicionamiento de aire al arrancar el vehículo, conduzca

con las ventanas ligeramente abiertas durante dos a tres minutos.

Control de distribución del aire: Ajustar para seleccionar la distribución de

aire deseada.

Seleccione para distribuir el aire

a través de las ventilaciones del

tablero de instrumentos.

Seleccione para distribuir el aire

a través de las ventilaciones del

tablero de instrumentos y el piso.

125

Control de clima

Seleccione para distribuir el aire

a través de las ventilaciones del

piso.

Seleccione para distribuir el aire

a través de las ventilaciones del

parabrisas y el piso.

Seleccione para distribuir el aire

a través de las ventilaciones del

parabrisas. También puede usar

esta configuración para desempeñar y

limpiar el parabrisas de una capa delgada

de hielo. También puede aumentar la

temperatura y la velocidad del ventilador

para mejorar la limpieza.

CONTROL AUTOMÁTICO DE CLIMA

E141422

A C

D E

J I H G F

AUTO: Oprima el botón para seleccionar la operación automática. El sistema

controla automáticamente la temperatura, la cantidad y la distribución del

flujo de aire para alcanzar y mantener la temperatura seleccionada

anteriormente.

Velocidad del ventilador: Controla el volumen de aire que circula en el

vehículo. Oprima los botones para seleccionar la velocidad del ventilador que

desea. Puede ver la configuración en pantalla.

Botón de encendido y apagado: Oprima el botón para encender o apagar el

sistema.

Desempañador MAX: Oprima el botón para distribuir el aire a través de las

ventilas del parabrisas. El aire acondicionado se selecciona de manera

automática. El ventilador se fija en la velocidad más alta y la temperatura en

HI (alto). Cuando la distribución del aire se fija en esta posición, no podrá

seleccionar aire recirculado ni ajustar manualmente la velocidad del ventilador

y el control de temperatura. Oprima el botón AUTO para volver al modo

automático.

126

Control de clima

MAX A/C: Oprima el botón para distribuir el máximo de aire acondicionado a

través de las ventilas del tablero de instrumentos. Este modo es más económico

y eficiente que el aire acondicionado normal.

Aire recirculado: Oprima el botón para cambiar entre aire externo y aire

recirculado. El aire actualmente del compartimento de pasajeros vuelve a

circular. Esto puede reducir el tiempo necesario para enfriar el interior y evitar

que ingresen al vehículo olores indeseados.

Desempañador: Oprima el botón para distribuir el aire a través de las ventilas

del parabrisas. También puede usar esta configuración para desempeñar y

limpiar el parabrisas de una capa delgada de hielo.

Tablero de instrumentos: Oprima el botón para distribuir el aire a través de

las ventilas del tablero de instrumentos.

Piso: Oprima el botón para distribuir el aire a través de las ventilas respectivas.I

Aire acondicionado: Oprima el botón para activar o desactivar el aire

acondicionado. El aire acondicionado enfría el vehículo usando el aire externo.

Para mejorar el acondicionamiento de aire al arrancar el vehículo, conduzca

con las ventanas ligeramente abiertas durante dos a tres minutos.

Control de temperatura

E133115

Puede fijar la temperatura entre 60°F

(15.5°C) y 85°F (29.5°C) en pasos de 1°F

(0.5°C). En posición LO (bajo), 59°F

(15°C), el sistema cambia a enfriamiento

permanente. En posición HI (alto), 86°F

(30°C), el sistema cambia a calefacción

permanente.

Nota: Si selecciona cualquiera de las

posiciones LO o HI, el sistema no regula una

temperatura estable.

Mono modo

En este modo, las configuraciones de

temperatura para el lado del conductor y

el lado del copiloto están vinculadas. Si

ajusta la configuración mediante el control

giratorio del lado del conductor, el sistema

ajusta la temperatura a la misma

configuración del lado del copiloto.

Desactivación de mono modo

Seleccione una temperatura para el lado

del pasajero mediante el control giratorio

en el lado del copiloto. El mono modo de

desactiva automáticamente. La

temperatura del lado del conductor no

varía. Ahora puede ajustar las

temperaturas del lado del conductor y el

copiloto de manera independiente. Las

configuraciones de temperatura para cada

lado aparecen en la pantalla.

127

Control de clima

Reactivación de mono modo

Mantenga oprimido el botón AUTO. La

temperatura del lado del copiloto se ajusta

de acuerdo con la configuración de

temperatura del lado del conductor.

CONSEJOS PARA EL CONTROL

DEL CLIMA INTERIOR

Consejos generales

Nota: El uso prolongado del aire recirculado

puede causar que las ventanas se empañen.

Nota: Se puede sentir una cantidad

pequeña de aire de la ventilación del piso

sin importar el ajuste de distribución de aire.

Nota: Para reducir la humedad acumulada

dentro del vehículo, no maneje con el

sistema desactivado o con el aire

recirculado activado siempre.

Nota: No coloque objetos bajo los asientos

delanteros, ya que pueden interferir con el

flujo de aire hacia los asientos traseros.

Nota: Retire toda la nieve, hielo u hojas del

área de admisión de aire en la parte inferior

del parabrisas.

Control manual del aire acondicionado

y la calefacción

Nota: Para reducir el empañamiento del

parabrisas en un clima húmedo, ajuste el

control de distribución de aire en la posición

de respiraderos de parabrisas. Aumente la

temperatura y la velocidad del ventilador

para mejora la limpieza, si es necesario.

Control de aire acondicionado y

calefacción automático

Nota: No ajuste la configuración cuando el

interior del vehículo está extremadamente

caliente o frío. El sistema se ajusta

automáticamente a la configuración

almacenada anteriormente. Para que el

sistema funcione eficientemente, el tablero

de instrumentos y los respiraderos laterales

deben estar completamente abiertos.

Nota: A baja temperatura ambiental con

configuración automática, el flujo de aire se

dirige hacia el parabrisas y las ventanas

laterales mientras el motor permanezca frío.

Nota: Cuando el sistema está desactivado,

el aire exterior no puede ingresar al vehículo.

Nota: Cuando el sistema está configurado

en modo automático y las temperaturas

interior y exterior son altas, el sistema

selecciona automáticamente el aire

recirculado para maximizar el enfriamiento

del interior. Cuando se alcanza la

temperatura de aire seleccionada, el

sistema automáticamente selecciona aire

exterior.

Nota: Cuando selecciona

desempañamiento y quitar escarcha, el

tablero de instrumentos y las funciones de

nivel de ventilación del piso

automáticamente se desactivan y se activa

el aire acondicionado. Fluye aire exterior

hacia el vehículo.

128

Control de clima

Calefacción del interior rápidamente

Vehículo con control automático del aire

acondicionado y la calefacción

Vehículo con control manual del aire

acondicionado y la calefacción

Presione el control del botón de alta

velocidad del ventilador.

Ajuste la velocidad del ventilador al

máximo.

Ajuste el control de temperatura al

máximo.

Ajuste el control de temperatura al

máximo.

Presione el botón del piso para distribuir

aire hacia los respiraderos del piso.

Ajuste el control de distribución de aire

hacia la posición de respiraderos del

piso.

La configuración recomendada calefacción

Vehículo con control automático del aire

acondicionado y la calefacción

Vehículo con control manual del aire

acondicionado y la calefacción

Presione el botón de baja velocidad del

ventilador.

Ajuste la velocidad del ventilador al

segundo máximo ajuste.

Ajuste el control de temperatura al punto

medio de la configuración caliente.

Ajuste el control de temperatura al punto

medio de la configuración caliente.

Presione los botones de distribución de

aire hacia el piso y el parabrisas.

Ajuste el control de distribución de aire

hacia la posición de respiraderos del piso

y parabrisas.

Cierre los respiraderos del tablero de

instrumentos. Abra los respiraderos de

aire laterales y diríjalos hacia las

ventanas laterales.

129

Control de clima

Enfriamiento del interior rápidamente

Vehículo con control automático del aire

acondicionado y la calefacción

Vehículo con control manual del aire

acondicionado y la calefacción

Presione el botón automático.Ajuste la velocidad del ventilador al

máximo.

Ajuste el control de temperatura a la

configuración deseada.

Ajuste el control de temperatura a la

posición A/A MÁX.

Ajuste el control de distribución de aire

hacia la posición de respiraderos del

tablero de instrumentos.

La configuración recomendada enfriamiento

Vehículo con control automático del aire

acondicionado y la calefacción

Vehículo con control manual del aire

acondicionado y la calefacción

Presione el botón de baja velocidad del

ventilador.

Ajuste la velocidad del ventilador al

segundo máximo ajuste.

Ajuste el control de temperatura al punto

medio de la configuración fría.

Ajuste el control de temperatura al punto

medio de la configuración fría.

Presione el botón de ventilación del

tablero de instrumentos para distribuir

aire hacia los respiraderos del tablero de

instrumentos.

Ajuste el control de distribución de aire

hacia la posición de respiraderos del

tablero de instrumentos.

Vehículo detenido durante períodos extendidos durante temperaturas

ambiente extremadamente altas

Vehículo con control automático del aire

acondicionado y la calefacción

Vehículo con control manual del aire

acondicionado y la calefacción

Aplique el freno de estacionamiento.Aplique el freno de estacionamiento.1

Mueva la palanca selectora de transmi-

sión a la posición P.

Mueva la palanca selectora de transmi-

sión a la posición P.

Presione el botón automático MAX A/C.Ajuste el control de temperatura a la

posición A/A MÁX.

Ajuste la velocidad del ventilador al

ajuste mínimo.

130

Control de clima

Desempañar la ventana lateral en clima frío

Vehículo con control automático del aire

acondicionado y la calefacción

Vehículo con control manual del aire

acondicionado y la calefacción

Presione el botón de desempañamiento

y quitar escarcha del parabrisas.

Ajuste el control de distribución de aire

hacia las posiciones del tablero de

instrumentos y los respiraderos del piso.

Ajuste el control de temperatura a la

configuración deseada.

Presione el botón A/C.2

Ajuste el control de temperatura a la

configuración deseada.

Ajuste la velocidad del ventilador al

máximo.

Dirija las ventilas de aire laterales del

tablero de instrumentos hacia las

ventanas laterales.

Cierre los respiraderos del tablero de

instrumentos.

Rendimiento de enfriamiento

máximo en tablero de

instrumentos o tablero de

instrumentos y piso

1. Ajuste el control de temperatura al

mínimo.

2. Presione los botones de aire A/A y aire

recirculado.

3. Ajuste la velocidad del ventilador al

máximo inicialmente y ajústelo para

adaptarse al nivel de comodidad

deseado.

VENTANAS Y ESPEJOS

RETROVISORES CALENTADOS

Ventana trasera calentada

Nota: El encendido debe estar activado

para usar esta característica.

Oprima el botón para eliminar el hielo y

desempañar la ventana trasera. Oprímalo

nuevamente dentro de 10 minutos para

apagarlo. Se desactiva automáticamente

después de 10 minutos o al girar el

encendido a la posición OFF.

No utilice hojas de afeitar ni otros

objetos afilados para limpiar el interior

de la ventana trasera o para quitar

calcomanías. Esto podría dañar las

líneas de la rejilla de calefacción, lo que

no está cubierto por la garantía.

Espejos térmicos exteriores (If

Equipped)

Nota: No quite el hielo de los espejos con

un raspador ni intente ajustar el vidrio del

espejo mientras está congelado. Esto puede

dañar el vidrio y los espejos.

131

Control de clima

Nota: No limpie el alojamiento ni los vidrios

de ningún espejo con abrasivos,

combustibles u otros productos de limpieza

fuertes a base de petróleo.

Ambos espejos se calientan

automáticamente para eliminar el hielo,

la escarcha y la condensación, cuando se

activa la ventana trasera térmica.

FILTRO DE AIRE PARA LA

CABINA

Su vehículo está equipado con un filtro de

aire de la cabina. Se encuentra justo en

frente del lavaparabrisas, bajo la rejilla del

panel de la cubierta de motor en el lado

del pasajero del vehículo.

El sistema de filtración de partículas está

diseñado para reducir la concentración de

partículas, como polvo, esporas y polen,

suspendidas en el aire que entra al

vehículo.

Nota: Debe instalarse un filtro de aire de la

cabina en todo momento para evitar que

entren objetos extraños al sistema. Si se

hace funcionar el sistema sin un filtro se

podría deteriorar o dañar el sistema.

El sistema de filtración de partículas

proporciona los siguientes beneficios a

usted y sus pasajeros:

• Mejora la comodidad de manejo del

usuario, ya que reduce la concentración

de partículas.

• Ayuda a mantener la limpieza del

compartimiento interior.

• Protege a los componentes del control

de aire acondicionado y calefacción

del depósito de partículas.

El filtro debe reemplazarse a intervalos

regulares. Consulte el capítulo

Mantenimiento programado.

Para obtener información adicional sobre

el filtro de aire de la cabina, o para

reemplazar el filtro, consulte a un

distribuidor autorizado.

ARRANQUE A CONTROL

REMOTO (IF EQUIPPED)

El sistema de control de temperatura

ajusta la temperatura de la cabina durante

el arranque a control remoto.

No puede ajustar el sistema durante la

operación de arranque a control remoto.

Ponga el encendido en "ON" para que el

sistema vuelva a la configuración anterior.

Ahora puede hacer ajustes. Tendrá que

volver a activar algunas características que

dependen del vehículo, como por ejemplo:

• asientos térmicos

• asientos enfriados

• volante de dirección térmico

• espejos calentados

• ventana trasera calentada.

Puede seleccionar los ajustes usando los

controles de la pantalla de información.

Ver Pantallas de información (página

93).

Ajustes automáticos

Puede ajustar el control de temperatura

para que funcione en modo automático

mediante la pantalla de información:

Arranque a control remoto > Control de

temperatura > Calefactor-A/A >

Automático. El sistema de control de

temperatura ajusta automáticamente la

temperatura interior en 22°C (72°F).

En clima caluroso, el sistema se ajusta en

22° C (72° F). Los asientos enfriados se

ajustan el alto (si está disponible y si la

función está seleccionada en AUTO en la

pantalla de información).

132

Control de clima

En clima moderado, el sistema

proporciona calefacción o enfriamiento

(según configuraciones anteriores). El

desempañador trasero, los espejos

calentados y los asientos calentados o

enfriados no se activan automáticamente.

En clima frío, el sistema se ajusta en 22° C

(72° F). Los asientos calentados y el

volante de dirección térmico se ajustan el

alto (si está disponible y si la función está

seleccionada en AUTO en la pantalla de

información). El desempañador trasero y

los espejos calentados se activan

automáticamente.

Último ajuste

Puede ajustar el control de temperatura

para que funcione con el último ajuste

utilizado mediante la pantalla de

información: Arranque a control remoto >

Control de temperatura > Calefactor–A/A

> Último ajuste. El sistema de control de

temperatura utiliza automáticamente el

último ajuste seleccionado antes de

apagar el vehículo.

Asientos y dispositivos enfriados

El sistema de control de temperatura

controla otros dispositivos calentados y

enfriados dentro del vehículo. Estos

dispositivos (si están disponibles, y si la

función está seleccionada en AUTO en la

pantalla de información) también se

pueden activar durante el arranque a

control remoto. Los dispositivos

calentados generalmente se activan en

climas fríos y los dispositivos enfriados, en

climas calurosos.

133

Control de clima

MODO CORRECTO DE

SENTARSE

AVISOS

Sentarse de manera incorrecta, fuera

de posición con el respaldo muy

reclinado hacia atrás puede levantar

el peso del cojín del asiento y afectar la

decisión del sistema de sensores del

copiloto, lo que puede ocasionar lesiones

graves o la muerte en caso de un choque.

Siéntese siempre derecho contra el

respaldo, con los pies en el piso.

No recline el respaldo, ya que esto

podría causar que el ocupante se

deslice por debajo del cinturón de

seguridad, lo que le provocaría graves

lesiones en caso de un choque.

No coloque objetos más altos que el

respaldo para reducir el riesgo de

lesiones graves en caso de choque

o durante una frenada brusca.

E68595

Cuando se los usa correctamente, al

apoyacabeza del asiento, el cinturón de

seguridad y las bolsas de aire proporcionan

óptima protección en el caso de un

choque.

Recomendamos que siga estas pautas:

• Siéntese derecho con la base de la

columna lo más atrás posible.

• No recline el respaldo más de 30

grados.

• Ajuste la cabecera para que la parte

superior se nivele con la parte superior

de su cabeza y lo más adelante como

sea posible. Asegúrese de permanecer

cómodo.

• Mantenga suficiente distancia entre sí

y el volante. Recomendamos un

mínimo de 10 pulgadas (25

centímetros) entre el esternón y la

cubierta de la bolsa de aire.

• Sostenga el volante con los brazos

levemente doblados.

• Doble las piernas ligeramente para que

pueda presionar los pedales por

completo.

• Coloque la correo de hombro del

cinturón de seguridad sobre el centro

de su hombro y la correa de pelvis

apretada alrededor de sus caderas.

Asegúrese de que la posición de

conducción le sea cómoda y que puede

mantener total control del vehículo.

CABECERAS

AVISOS

Ajuste por completo la cabecera

antes de sentarse u operar el

vehículo. Esto ayudará a minimizar

el riesgo de lesiones en el cuello en el caso

de un choque. No ajuste la cabecera

cuando el vehículo esté en movimiento.

La cabecera es un dispositivo de

seguridad. Cuando sea posible, debe

instalarse y ajustarse correctamente

cuando el asiento está ocupado.

134

Asientos

AVISOS

Instale la cabecera correctamente

para ayudar a minimizar el riesgo de

lesiones en el cuello en el caso de un

choque.

Cabecera del asiento delantero

E138642

Cabeceras de los asiento traseros

externos

E138643

Cabecera del asiento trasero central

E138645

Las cabeceras constan de:

Una cabecera absorbe-energíaA

Dos vástagos de aceroB

Botón de ajuste y desbloqueo de

la manga de guía

Botón de desbloqueo y

extracción de guía

Botón de plegadoE

Nota: Ajuste el respaldo en posición de

conducción vertical antes de ajustar la

cabecera. Ajuste la cabecera para que la

parte superior se nivele con la parte superior

de su cabeza y lo más adelante como sea

posible. Asegúrese de permanecer cómodo.

Si es extremadamente alto, ajuste la

cabecera en su posición más alta.

Ajuste de las cabeceras

Elevación de las cabeceras

Tire la cabecera hacia arriba.

Bajada de las cabeceras

1. Mantenga oprimido el botón C.

2. Presione la cabecera hacia abajo.

135

Asientos

Extracción de las cabeceras

1. Hale la cabecera hacia arriba hasta que

alcance su posición más alta.

2. Mantenga oprimidos los botones C y

3. Tire la cabecera hacia arriba.

Instalación de las cabeceras

Alinee los vástagos de acero en las

mangas guía y empuje la cabecera hacia

abajo hasta que se trabe.

Plegado de las cabeceras

1. Mantenga oprimido el botón E.

2. Vuelva a halarla para restablecerla a

su lugar.

Cabeceras reclinables (si está

equipado)

Las cabeceras de los asientos delanteros

pueden ser inclinadas para darle mayor

confort. Para inclinar la cabecera:

E144727

1. Ajuste el respaldo en posición de

manejo o vertical.

2. Gire la cabecera hacia delante (hacia

su cabeza) hasta la posición deseada.

Una vez que la cabecera llegue a su límite

de inclinación hacia delante, girarla otra

vez hacia delante la liberará hasta la

posición no inclinada posterior.

ASIENTOS MANUALES

ALERTA

No ajuste el asiento ni el respaldo del

conductor cuando el vehículo esté

en movimiento.

Movimiento del asiento hacia atrás

y hacia delante

E130249

ALERTA

Trate de mover el asiento hacia atrás

y hacia adelante después de soltar

la palanca, para asegurarse de que

esté perfectamente trabado.

136

Asientos

Ajuste de la altura del asiento del

conductor

E70730

Ajuste de reclinación

E138646

ALERTA

No coloque carga ni ningún objeto

detrás del respaldo antes de

devolverlo a la posición original. Hale

el respaldo para asegurarse de que quedó

completamente asegurado después de

regresarlo a su posición original. Un asiento

sin seguro puede ser peligroso en caso de

un frenado repentino o choque.

ASIENTOS ELÉCTRICOS (IF

EQUIPPED)

AVISOS

No ajuste el asiento ni el respaldo del

conductor cuando el vehículo esté

en movimiento.

No coloque carga ni ningún objeto

detrás del respaldo antes de

devolverlo a la posición original.

137

Asientos

E138647

Soporte lumbar eléctrico (If Equipped)

E138648

FUNCIÓN DE MEMORIA (IF

EQUIPPED)

AVISOS

Antes de activar la memoria del

asiento, asegúrese de que el área

inmediatamente alrededor del

mismo esté despejada y que todos los

ocupantes están a resguardo de piezas

móviles.

No use la función de memoria

cuando el vehículo esté en

movimiento.

Este función recordará automáticamente

la posición del asiento del conductor y de

los espejos eléctricos. El control de

memoria está situado en la puerta del

conductor.

138

Asientos

E142554

Guardado de una posición

preprogramada

1. Gire el encendido a ON.

2. Ajuste el asiento y los espejos

exteriores a la posición deseada.

3. Mantenga oprimido el botón

prerprogramado deseado hasta

escuchar una campanilla.

Recuerdo de una posición

preprogramada

Oprima el botón preprogramado asociado

con la posición de conducción deseada.

Los asientos y los espejos se moverán a la

posición almacenada para esa

programación previa.

Guardado de una posición pasiva

El vehículo almacena las posiciones de los

asientos y espejos para hasta tres

controles remotos o llaves pasivas. La

próxima vez que el vehículo esté

desbloqueado, la posición del asiento y los

espejos se ajustarán a la última posición

usada.

Cada vez que apaga el encendido, las

configuraciones actuales de asientos y

espejos se almacenan en el control remoto

o la llave pasiva usada.

Recuerdo de una posición de

asiento almacenada

Nota: Oprima cualquier control de ajuste

del asiento del conductor, cualquier botón

de memoria o cualquier interruptor de

control de espejos, para detener el

movimiento del asiento durante un

recordatorio. El movimiento del asiento

también se detendrá si mueve el vehículo.

Recordatorio pasivo

Nota: Si hay más de una llave pasiva en

rango, la función de memoria se moverá de

acuerdo con las configuraciones de la

primera llave almacenada.

Cuando desbloquea el vehículo con el

control remoto o hala la manija de la

puerta del conductor con una llave pasiva

en rango, el asiento y los espejos se

mueven a la posición almacenada en ese

control remoto o llave pasiva.

ASIENTOS TRASEROS

E138650

Ajuste de reclinación (If Equipped)

Con el asiento ocupado, jale la palanca

hacia arriba para reclinar el respaldo.

139

Asientos

Para plegar el respaldo del asiento

Con el asiento vacío, jale la palanca hacia

arriba para plegar el respaldo hacia

delante. Es posible que deba plegar las

cabeceras externas y bajar la cabecera

central primero.

Para desplegar el respaldo del

asiento

Jale la palanca hacia arriba y jale el

respaldo hacia arriba.

ASIENTOS CALENTADOS (IF

EQUIPPED)

ALERTA

Las personas que no tienen mucha

sensibilidad en la piel debido a edad

avanzada, enfermedad crónica,

diabetes, lesión en la columna,

medicamentos, consumo de alcohol,

cansancio u otra condición física, deben

tener cuidado al utilizar el asiento térmico.

Este puede provocar quemaduras incluso

a bajas temperaturas, especialmente si se

utiliza por períodos prolongados de tiempo.

No coloque nada en el asiento que aísle el

calor, como una frazada o cojín. Esto

puede ocasionar que el asiento térmico se

sobrecaliente. No pinche el asiento con

alfileres, agujas u otros objetos

puntiagudos. Esto podría causar daños al

elemento de calefacción, generando un

sobrecalentamiento del calefactor del

asiento. Un asiento sobrecalentado podría

provocar serias lesiones personales.

No haga lo siguiente:

• Colocar objetos pesados en el asiento.

• Hacer funcionar el asiento térmico si

se ha derramado agua u otro líquido

en el asiento. Deje que el asiento se

seque completamente.

• Operar los asientos térmicos cuando

el motor no esté en marcha. Hacerlo

podría agotar la batería del vehículo.

E138653

Ajuste el control en la configuración de

calor deseada.

DESCANSABRAZOS DEL

ASIENTO TRASERO (IF EQUIPPED)

E138656

Pliegue el descansabrazos hacia abajo

para usar el descansabrazos y portavasos.

140

Asientos

Sistema de control inalámbrico

HomeLink® (If Equipped)

AVISOS

Asegúrese de que la puerta del

garaje y el dispositivo de seguridad

estén libres de obstáculos cuando

esté programando. No programe el

sistema con el vehículo estacionado en el

garaje.

No use el sistema con ningún

sistema para abrir puertas de garajes

que no cuente con la característica

de seguridad de paro y reversa que exigen

las Normas Federales de Seguridad de

Estados Unidos (esto incluye cualquier

modelo de sistema para abrir puertas de

garajes fabricado antes del 1 de abril de

1982).

Nota: Asegúrese de conservar el transmisor

de control remoto original para usarlo en

otros vehículos y también para futuros

procedimientos de programación del

sistema.

Nota: Recomendamos que al vender o

devolver el vehículo en arrendamiento

directo, borre los botones de función

programados por motivos de seguridad.

Consulte los códigos de borrado de los

botones de funciones más adelante en esta

sección.

Nota: Puede programar un máximo de tres

dispositivos. Para cambiar o reemplazar

cualquiera de los tres dispositivos después

de realizar la programación, primero debe

borrar la configuración actual. Consulte los

códigos de borrado de los botones de

funciones más adelante en esta sección.

E142657

El sistema universal para abrir la puerta

del garaje reemplaza al sistema manual

de apertura de garajes con un transmisor

de tres botones integrado en la visera del

vehículo.

El sistema incluye dos características

principales: un aparato para abrir la puerta

del garaje y una plataforma para

activación remota de dispositivos dentro

del hogar. Así como se programa para las

puertas del garaje, el trasmisor del sistema

puede programarse para operar

operadores de portones de entrada,

sistemas de seguridad, seguros de la

puerta de entrada y luces de hogares o de

oficinas.

Puede encontrar información adicional

acerca de este sistema en línea en

www.homelink.com o llamando a la línea

gratuita de ayuda, al 1-800-355-3515.

Programación

Nota: Coloque una batería nueva en el

transmisor manual. Esto asegurará una

preparación más rápida y una transmisión

precisa de la señal de radiofrecuencia.

Nota: Durante la programación, es posible

que el transmisor manual deje de transmitir.

Si esto ocurre, oprima y suelte el botón de

función del visor mientras oprime y suelta

el transmisor manual cada dos segundos.

La luz indicadora destellará lenta y luego

rápidamente una vez que se acepte la señal

de radiofrecuencia.

141

Abridor Universal de Cochera

E142658

1. Gire el encendido a ON.

2. Mantenga el transmisor manual de la

puerta del garaje 1–3 pulgadas (2–8

cm) alejado del botón que desea

programar.

3. Mantenga oprimido al mismo tiempo

el botón del visor que desea programar

y el botón del transmisor manual hasta

que la luz indicadora del visor cambie

de una luz de parpadeo lenta a una de

parpadeo rápido. Después, suelte los

botones.

4. Mantenga oprimido el botón de función

que programó durante 5 segundos y

suelte. Es posible que deba hacer esto

dos veces para activar la puerta. Si la

puerta del garaje no funciona, observe

la luz indicadora.

Si la luz indicadora permanece encendida,

la programación está completa. Oprima y

suelte el botón programado para activar

la puerta.

Si la luz indicadora del visor parpadea

rápidamente durante dos segundos y luego

pasa a una luz constante, siga los pasos a

continuación.

Nota: Es posible que necesite una escalera

para llegar hasta donde está la unidad y

tenga que retirar la cubierta o las lentes de

la luz.

E142659

1. Oprima el botón de aprendizaje del

motor del sistema de apertura de la

puerta del garaje.

Nota: Tendrá 30 segundos para completar

el paso siguiente.

2. Vuelva a su vehículo.

E142658

3. Mantenga oprimido el botón de función

que desea programar en el visor

durante 2 segundos y suelte. Repita

este paso Dependiendo de la marca

del sistema para abrir puertas de

garajes, es posible que deba repetir

esta secuencia una tercera vez.

Para programar más botones, repita los

los pasos del uno al cuatro.

Si tiene alguna consulta o comentario,

contáctese con HomeLink en el sitio

www.homelink.com o bien llame al

1-800-355-3515.

Borrado de los códigos de los botones

de funciones

Nota: No puede borrar botones

individuales.

142

Abridor Universal de Cochera

E142660

1. Mantenga oprimidos los dos botones

de función externos al mismo tiempo

durante aproximadamente 20

segundos, hasta que las luces

indicadoras sobre los botones

parpadeen rápidamente.

2. Suelte los botones cuando la luz

indicadora parpadee. Se borrarán los

códigos de todos los botones.

Reprogramación de un botón único

Para programar un dispositivo de acuerdo

con un botón preparado anteriormente,

siga estos pasos:

1. Mantenga oprimido el botón deseado.

NO suelte el botón.

2. La luz indicadora comenzará a

destellar después de 20 segundos. Sin

soltar el botón, siga el paso 1 de la

sección de Programación.

Si tiene alguna consulta o comentario,

contáctese con HomeLink en el sitio

www.homelink.com o bien llame al

1-800-355-3515.

Programación a un sistema de apertura

de puertas de garaje Genie Intellicode®

Nota: El transmisor Genie Intellicode 2 ya

debe estar programado para operar con el

sistema de apertura de puertas de garaje.

Nota: Para programar HomeLink al

transmisor, primero debe colocar este en

modo de programación.

E142661

Luz indicadora rojaA.

Luz indicadora verdeB.

1. Mantenga oprimido uno de los botones

del transmisor manual durante 10

segundos. La luz indicadora cambiará

de verde a verde y roja y verde.

2. Oprima el mismo botón dos veces para

confirmar el cambio en el modo de

programación. Si se hizo

correctamente, la luz indicadora se

encenderá de color rojo.

3. Mantenga el transmisor a no más de

1–3 pulgadas (2–8 cm) del botón del

visor que desea programar.

4. Mantenga oprimido el botón Genie

programado en el transmisor manual

y el botón que desea programar. La luz

indicadora del visor parpadeará

rápidamente cuando la programación

esté correcta.

Nota: El transmisor Genie transmitirá hasta

por 30 segundos. Si HomeLink no se

programa dentro de 30 segundos, el

transmisor Genie tendrá que oprimirse

nuevamente. Si la luz indicadora del

transmisor Genie se enciende en verde y

rojo, suelte el botón hasta que la se apague

antes de volver a presionar el botón.

143

Abridor Universal de Cochera

Una vez que HomeLink se ha programado

correctamente, el transmisor Genie debe

cambiarse fuera del modo de programa.

Para hacerlo:

1. Mantenga oprimido el botón Genie

programado anteriormente en el

transmisor manual durante 10

segundos. La luz indicadora cambiará

de verde a roja y verde.

2. Oprima el mismo botón dos veces para

confirmar el cambio. Si se hizo

correctamente, la luz indicadora se

encenderá de color verde.

Programación de HomeLink al motor

del sistema de apertura de puertas de

garaje Genie Intellicode

Nota: Es posible que necesite una escalera

el motor del sistema de apertura de la

puerta del garaje.

E142662

1. Mantenga oprimido el botón de

programa en el motor del sistema de

apertura de la puerta del garaje hasta

que ambas luces indicadoras azules se

enciendan.

2. Suelte el botón de programa. Solo la

luz indicadora redonda más pequeña

debe estar encendida.

3. Oprima y suelte el botón de programa.

La luz indicadora púrpura más grande

destellará.

Nota: Los dos pasos siguientes se deben

completar en 30 segundos.

4. Oprima y suelte el botón programado

anteriormente del transmisor manual

Genie Intellicode 2. Ambas luces

indicadoras de la unidad del motor del

sistema de apertura de la puerta del

garaje ahora deben parpadear en

púrpura.

5. Mantenga oprimido el botón del visor

programado anteriormente durante 2

segundos. Repita este paso hasta 3

veces hasta que la puerta del garaje se

mueva.

La programación ahora está completa.

Limpieza de un dispositivo HomeLink

Para borrar la programación de los tres

botones HomeLink, mantenga presionados

los dos botones exteriores de HomeLink

hasta que la luz indicadora comience a

parpadear. La luz indicadora comenzará a

parpadear en 10 a 20 segundos, momento

en que ambos botones deben soltarse. La

programación ahora ha sido borrada y la

luz indicadora debe parpadear lentamente

para indicar que el dispositivo está en

modo de práctica cuando se oprime

alguno de los tres botones HomeLink.

Homologado con la FCC y con la norma

RSS-210 de Industry Canada

Este dispositivo cumple con la Parte 15 de

las Normas de la FCC (Federal

Communications Commission) y con la

norma RSS-210 de Industry Canada. La

operación está sujeta a estas dos

condiciones: (1) este dispositivo no debiera

causar interferencia dañina y (2) este

dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier

interferencia que reciba, incluso

interferencias que pudieran causar un

funcionamiento no deseado.

144

Abridor Universal de Cochera

Los cambios o modificaciones al

dispositivo que no estén expresamente

aprobados por la parte responsable del

cumplimiento pueden invalidar la

autoridad del usuario para operar el

equipo.

145

Abridor Universal de Cochera

TOMAS AUXILIARES DE

CORRIENTE

ALERTA

No conecte accesorios eléctricos

opcionales en el enchufe del

encendedor (si está equipado). El

uso incorrecto del encendedor puede

causar daños no cubiertos por la garantía,

y provocar un incendio o graves heridas.

Nota: No inserte objetos que no sean un

enchufe de accesorio en el tomacorriente.

Esto daña la toma y quema el fusible.

Nota: No cuelgue del enchufe ningún tipo

de accesorio ni abrazadera de accesorio.

Nota: No use el tomacorriente con más

capacidad que la del vehículo de 12 voltios

CC o 180 vatios o podría quemarse un

fusible.

Nota: No utilice el tomacorriente para hacer

funcionar el encendedor.

Nota: El uso incorrecto del tomacorriente

puede provocar daños que la garantía no

cubre.

Nota: Mantenga siempre cerradas las tapas

de los tomacorrientes cuando no estén en

uso.

Haga funcionar el motor para usar toda la

capacidad del tomacorriente. Para evitar

que la batería del vehículo se descargue:

• No utilice el tomacorriente más de lo

necesario cuando el motor no está

encendido.

• No deje dispositivos conectados en la

noche o cuando el vehículo esté

estacionado durante períodos largos.

Ubicaciones

Se pueden encontrar tomacorrientes:

• en la consola central

• dentro del área de almacenamiento de

la consola central

• en la parte posterior de la consola

central.

Tomacorriente de 110 voltios de

CA. (If Equipped)

ALERTA

No deje dispositivos eléctricos

conectados en el tomacorriente si

no los está utilizando. No utilice

ninguna extensión en el tomacorriente de

110 voltios de CA, ya que inhabilitará el

diseño de protección de seguridad

proporcionado por la tapa y la lengüeta

giratoria. Si lo hace, el tomacorriente

podría sobrecargarse si la alimentación

eléctrica de múltiples dispositivos supera

el límite de carga de 150 vatios, lo que

podría provocar un incendio o heridas

graves.

Nota: El tomacorriente se apagará después

de 13 minutos si el encendido está activado

sin que el motor esté funcionando.

Mantenga el motor funcionando o cicle el

encendido para mantener el tomacorriente

activado.

E143941

146

Tomas de energía auxiliares

El tomacorriente e utiliza para energizar

dispositivos eléctricos que requieren hasta

150 vatios. Se ubica en la parte posterior

de la consola central.

Cuando la luz indicadora de color verde

ubicada en el tomacorriente, está:

• encendida: el tomacorriente está listo

para suministrar energía .

• apagada: el suministro eléctrico del

tomacorriente está apagado; el

encendido no está activado.

• parpadeando: el tomacorriente está

en el modo de falla.

El tomacorriente temporalmente

desconecta la energía si se sobrepasa el

límite de 150 vatios. También puede entrar

a un modo de falla cuando está

sobrecargado, sobrecalentado, o en corto.

Desconecte el dispositivo y gire la llave de

encendido a la posición OFF y luego a la

posición ON, en caso de una condición de

sobrecarga y cortocircuito. Permita que el

sistema se enfríe, posteriormente gire la

llave de encendido a la posición OFF y

luego a la posición ON, en caso de una

condición de sobrecalentamiento.

El tomacorriente no está diseñado para

dispositivos eléctricos como:

• Televisiones tipo tubo de rayos

catódicos

• Cargas motrices, como aspiradoras,

sierras eléctricas y otras herramientas

eléctricas, refrigeradores impulsados

por compresor, etc.

• Dispositivos de medición, que procesan

datos precisos, como equipo médico,

equipo de medición, etc.

• Otros aparatos que requieren un

suministro eléctrico extremadamente

estable: mantas eléctricas controladas

por microcomputadora, luces de

sensado al tacto, etc.

147

Tomas de energía auxiliares

CONSOLA CENTRAL

ALERTA

Utilice solo vasos blandos en el

portavasos. Los objetos duros

pueden lesionar a alguien en caso de

un choque.

Es posible que la consola de su vehículo

venga equipada con una variedad de

funciones.

E142433

PortavasosA

Compartimiento de

almacenamiento con

tomacorriente auxiliar, enchufe

de entrada auxiliar, puerto USB

y centro de medios

Tomacorriente auxiliarC

CONSOLA DEL TOLDO

E75193

Presione cerca del borde trasero de la

puerta para abrirlo.

148

Compartimientos para Almacenaje

INFORMACIÓN GENERAL

Si desconecta la batería, el vehículo puede

exhibir características de manejo fuera de

lo común por unas 5 millas (8 kilómetros)

después de volver a conectarlo. Esto se

debe a que el sistema de administración

del motor se debe realinear con el motor.

Puede descartar cualquier característica

de manejo poco común durante este

período.

AVISOS

El ralentí prolongado a altas

velocidades del motor puede

producir temperaturas muy altas en

el motor y en el sistema de escape, lo que

significa riesgo de incendio y otros daños.

No estacione, ni deje en ralentí ni

conduzca el vehículo sobre pasto

seco u otras superficies secas. El

sistema de emisión de gases calienta el

compartimiento del motor y el sistema de

escape, lo cual crea riesgo de incendio.

No arranque el motor en un garaje

cerrado ni en otras áreas encerradas.

Los gases de escape pueden ser

tóxicos. Siempre abra la puerta del garaje

antes de arrancar el motor.

Si huele gases de escape dentro de

su vehículo, hágalo inspeccionar de

inmediato por un distribuidor

autorizado. No conduzca el vehículo si

percibe olor de gases de escape.

Este sistema cumple con todos los

requisitos de las normas canadienses para

equipos que provocan interferencias, que

regulan la potencia del impulso del campo

eléctrico de la interferencia de radio.

Al arrancar el motor, evite pisar el

acelerador antes y durante la operación.

Use el acelerador solo cuando tenga

dificultad para arrancar el motor.

INTERRUPTOR DE ENCENDIDO

E72128

0 (desconectado): El encendido está en

OFF.

Nota: Cuando gire el encendido a OFF y

salga del vehículo, no deje la llave puesta

en encendido. Podría descargar la batería

del vehículo.

Nota: Para apagar el motor cuando el

vehículo está en movimiento, mueva la

palanca del selector de transmisión a la

posición N. Use los frenos para que el

vehículo se detenga de manera segura.

Después de detener el vehículo, apague el

motor y mueva la palanca del selector de

transmisión a la posición P. Gire la llave a

la posición 0 o I.

I (accesorios): se pueden operar accesorios

eléctricos como el radio mientras el motor

está apagado.

Nota: No deje la llave de encendido en esta

posición demasiado tiempo para evitar

descargar la batería.

II (encendido): todos los circuitos

eléctricos funcionan. Las luces e

indicadores de advertencia se encienden.

III (arranque): da marcha al motor. Suelte

la llave tan pronto como arranque el

motor.

149

Arranque y Paro del Motor

ARRANQUE SIN LLAVE (IF

EQUIPPED)

AVISOS

Es posible que el sistema de partida

sin llave no funcione si la llave está

cerca de objetos metálicos o de

dispositivos electrónicos como celulares.

Revise siempre que el bloqueo del

volante se encuentre desactivado

antes de intentar mover el vehículo.

Nota: Se debe ubicar una llave válida

dentro del vehículo para activar el

encendido y arrancar el motor.

Activación del encendido (Modo de

accesorios)

E142555

Oprima el botón START una vez sin pisar

el pedal del freno. Este botón se ubica en

el tablero de instrumentos cerca del

volante. Todos los circuitos y accesorios

eléctricos funcionan y las luces e

indicadores de advertencia se encienden.

Oprima el botón START nuevamente sin

pisar el pedal del freno para apagar el

vehículo por completo.

Arranque del vehículo

Siga estos pasos para arrancar el vehículo

1. Mueva la palanca selectora de

transmisión a la posición P.

2. Pise el pedal del freno a fondo.

3. Oprima el botón START (arranque).

El sistema no funciona si:

• Las frecuencias de la lleva estén

atascadas.

• La batería de la llave no tiene carga.

Si no puede para arrancar el vehículo, haga

lo siguiente.

Control remoto de 5 botones

E142874

Control remoto de 3 botones

E145988

1. Sostenga la llave junto al símbolo en

la columna de dirección.

2. Con la llave en esta posición, puede

utilizar el botón de arranque para

activar el encendido y arrancar su

vehículo.

Detención del moto cuando el

vehículo está detenido

1. Mueva la palanca selectora de

transmisión a la posición P.

2. Oprima el botón START (arranque).

150

Arranque y Paro del Motor

Nota: El encendido, todos los circuitos

eléctricos, luces de advertencia e

indicadores se apagarán.

Detención del moto cuando el

vehículo está en movimiento

1. Mantenga oprimido el botón START

(arranque) durante un momento u

oprímalo tres veces dentro de dos

segundos.

2. Mueva la palanca del selector de

transmisión a la posición N y use los

frenos para detener el vehículo por

completo.

3. Cuando el vehículo se ha detenido,

mueva la palanca del selector de

transmisión a la posición P y apague el

encendido.

ALERTA

Apagar el motor cuando el vehículo

todavía está en movimiento causará

pérdida de asistencia para los frenos

y la dirección. La dirección no se trabará,

pero se necesitará más esfuerzo para

moverla. Al apagar el encendido, algunos

circuitos eléctricos, luces de advertencia

e indicadores también pueden apagarse.

Rearranque rápido

La característica de rearranque rápido le

permite volver a arrancar el vehículo dentro

de 20 segundos luego de haberlo apagado,

incluso si no hay una llave válida presente.

Dentro de 20 segundos de haber apagado

el vehículo, pise el freno y oprima el botón

de arranque. Una vez transcurridos los 20

segundos, ya no podrá arrancar el vehículo

sin una llave dentro del vehículo.

Una vez arrancado el vehículo,

permanecerá en funcionamiento hasta

que oprima el botón de arranque, incluso

si no se ha detectado una llave válida. Si

abre y cierra una puerta mientras el

vehículo está en funcionamiento, el

sistema busca una llave válida. No podrá

arrancar el vehículo si no se detecta una

llave válida dentro de 20 segundos.

ARRANQUE DE UN MOTOR DE

GASOLINA

Cuando arranca el motor, la velocidad en

ralentí aumentará para calentar el motor.

Si la velocidad en ralentí del motor no

disminuye automáticamente, haga que

revisen el vehículo en un distribuidor

autorizado.

Antes de arrancar el motor, revise lo

• Asegúrese de que todos los ocupantes

tengan sus cinturones de seguridad

abrochados.

• Asegúrese que los faros y los

accesorios eléctricos estén apagados.

• Asegúrese que esté puesto el freno de

estacionamiento.

• Mueva la palanca selectora de

transmisión a la posición P.

• Gire la llave de encendido a la posición

II.

Nota: No toque el pedal del acelerador.

1. Mueva la palanca selectora de

transmisión a la posición P o N.

2. Pise el pedal del freno a fondo.

3. Ponga en marcha el motor. El motor

puede continuar girando durante unos

15 segundos o hasta que el vehículo

arranque.

Nota: Si no puede arrancar en el primer

intento, espere un momento y vuelva a

intentarlo.

151

Arranque y Paro del Motor

Si tiene problemas para arrancar el motor

cuando la temperatura está por debajo de

los -13°F (-25°C), pise el acelerador

levemente y vuelva a intentarlo.

Si no puede arrancar el motor después de

tres intentos, espere 10 segundos y siga

este procedimiento.

1. Mueva la palanca selectora de

transmisión a la posición P.

2. Pise el pedal del acelerador a fondo y

manténgalo así.

3. Pise el pedal del freno a fondo.

4. Ponga en marcha el motor.

Protección contra los gases de

escape

ALERTA

Si huele gases de escape dentro de

su vehículo, hágalo inspeccionar de

inmediato por un distribuidor

autorizado. No conduzca el vehículo si

percibe olor de gases de escape. Los gases

de escape contienen monóxido de

carbono. Tome precauciones para evitar

sus efectos tóxicos.

Información importante sobre la

ventilación

Si detiene el vehículo y luego deja el motor

en ralentí durante largos períodos de

tiempo, recomendamos que aplique una

de las siguientes opciones:

• Abra las ventanas al menos 1 pulgada

(2.5 centímetros)

• Fije el control de aire acondicionado en

aire externo.

CALENTADOR DEL BLOQUE

DEL MOTOR (IF EQUIPPED)

AVISOS

No seguir las instrucciones del

calefactor de bloque del motor

puede provocar daños a la propiedad

o lesiones personales graves.

No use su calefactor con sistemas

eléctricos sin conexión a tierra o

adaptadores de dos puntas. Existe

riesgo de descarga eléctrica.

Nota: El calefactor es más eficaz si las

temperaturas exteriores no supera los 0°F

(-18°C).

El calefactor actúa como ayuda de

arranque al calentar el refrigerante del

motor. Esto permite que el sistema de

control de clima responda rápidamente.

El equipo incluye un elemento calefactor

(instalado en el bloque del motor) y un

mazo de cables. No puede conectar el

sistema a una fuente eléctrica de 120

voltios CA.

Recomendamos que haga lo siguiente para

una operación segura y correcta:

• Use un cable de extensión para

exteriores calibre 16 certificado por

Underwriter's Laboratory (UL ) o

Canadian Standards Association

(CSA). Este cable de extensión debe

poder usarse en exteriores, bajas

temperaturas y esté claramente

marcado "Apropiado para usarse en

aparatos exteriores". No use un cable

de extensión para interiores en el

exterior. Esto podría generar una

descarga eléctrica o peligro de

incendio.

• Procure que sea lo más corto posible.

• No utilice varios cables de extensión.

152

Arranque y Paro del Motor

• Cuando esté en funcionamiento,

asegúrese de que las conexiones del

enchufe del cable de

extensión/enchufe del cable del

calefactor estén libres de agua. Esto

podría ocasionar una descarga

eléctrica o peligro de incendio.

• Asegúrese de que el vehículo esté

estacionado en un área limpia, libre de

combustibles.

• Asegúrese de que estén bien

conectados el calefactor, el cable del

calefactor y el cable de extensión.

• Compruebe si hay calor en la conexión

eléctrica cuando el sistema haya

funcionado durante aproximadamente

30 minutos.

• Asegúrese de que el sistema esté

desconectado y adecuadamente

guardado antes de conducir el vehículo.

Asegúrese de que la tapa protectora

selle las puntas del enchufe del cable

del calefactor de bloque cuando no

esté en uso.

• Asegúrese de que se compruebe que

el sistema del calefactor funciona

correctamente antes del invierno.

Uso del calefactor de bloque del

motor

Asegúrese de que los terminales del

tomacorriente estén limpios y secos antes

de utilizarlos. Límpielos con un paño seco

si fuera necesario.

El calefactor usa 0.4 a 1.0 kilovatios-hora

de energía por hora de uso. El sistema no

tiene termostato. Alcanzará temperatura

máxima después de aproximadamente

tres horas de operación. Si usa el

calefactor por más de tres horas, no

mejorará el rendimiento del sistema y

utilizará electricidad de manera

innecesaria.

153

Arranque y Paro del Motor

PRECAUCIONES DE

SEGURIDAD

AVISOS

No llene en exceso el tanque de

combustible. La presión en un

tanque excesivamente lleno puede

causar fugas y aumentar las

probabilidades de derrame de combustible

e incendio.

El sistema de combustible puede

estar bajo presión. Si siente un siseo

cerca de la puerta de llenado de

combustible (sistema de combustible "sin

tapón" Easy Fuel), no cargue combustible

hasta que el sonido se detenga. De lo

contrario, se podría derramar combustible,

pudiendo ocasionar serias lesiones

personales.

Los combustibles para automóviles

pueden causar serias heridas o la

muerte si se usan o se manejan de

modo indebido.

El flujo de combustible a través de

una boquilla de la bomba de

combustible puede producir

electricidad estática, lo que podría

provocar un incendio si el combustible se

bombea hacia un recipiente de

combustible no conectado a tierra.

El etanol y la gasolina pueden

contener benceno, que es un agente

cancerígeno.

Al abastecerse de combustible,

apague siempre el motor y nunca

permita la presencia de chispas ni

llamas cerca del cuello de llenado. Nunca

fume mientras carga combustible. El vapor

del combustible es extremadamente

peligroso en ciertas condiciones. Se debe

tener cuidado para evitar la inhalación en

exceso de los gases.

Observe las siguientes recomendaciones

al manipular combustible para

automóviles:

• Apague cualquier artículo de

tabaquería y/o llama al descubierto

antes de abastecer de combustible el

vehículo.

• Siempre apague el vehículo antes de

abastecerlo de combustible.

• Los combustibles para automóviles

son tóxicos y pueden ser mortales si

son ingeridos. La gasolina es muy

tóxica y si se ingiere, puede causar la

muerte o lesiones permanentes. Si

ingiere combustible, llame a un médico

cuanto antes, incluso si no se

presentan síntomas inmediatos. Los

efectos tóxicos del combustible

pueden tardar horas en hacerse

notorios.

• Evite inhalar los vapores del

combustible. Inhalar demasiado vapor

de combustible de cualquier tipo,

puede provocar irritación a los ojos y a

las vías respiratorias. En casos graves,

la respiración excesiva o prolongada

de vapor de combustible puede causar

enfermedades graves y lesiones

permanentes.

• Evite el contacto del combustible con

los ojos. Si se salpica de combustible

los ojos, quítese los lentes de contacto

(si los usa), lávese con agua

abundante durante 15 minutos y

busque atención médica. Si no busca

atención médica adecuada puede

sufrir lesiones permanentes.

154

Combustible y llenado

• Los combustibles también pueden ser

dañinos si se absorben a través de la

piel. Si se salpica de combustible la piel

o la ropa, o bien ambos, quítese de

inmediato la ropa contaminada y

lávese minuciosamente la piel con

agua y jabón. El contacto reiterado o

prolongado de la piel con combustibles

o sus vapores produce irritación de la

piel.

• Tenga especial cuidado si está

tomando “Antabuse” u otras formas

de disulfiram para el tratamiento del

alcoholismo. Inhalar vapores de

gasolina o salpicarse la piel con ella

puede provocarle una reacción

adversa. En personas sensibles, puede

producir lesiones o enfermedades

graves. Si se salpica de combustible la

piel, lave la parte afectada en forma

inmediata y minuciosa con agua y

jabón. Consulte de inmediato a un

médico si sufre una reacción adversa.

CALIDAD DEL COMBUSTIBLE

Nota: Le recomendamos que utilice

únicamente combustible de alta calidad,

sin aditivos ni otros tratamientos para el

motor.

No utilice gasolina con plomo o gasolina

con aditivos que contengan otros

compuestos metálicos, por ejemplo,

aditivos a base de manganeso. Podrían

dañar el sistema de emisión.

Cómo escoger el combustible

correcto

Nota: El uso de cualquier otro combustible

que no sea aquellos recomendados puede

causar daño al tren motriz, pérdida de

rendimiento del vehículo y es posible que

las reparaciones no estén cubiertas por la

garantía.

Si su vehículo no utiliza combustible

flexible, entonces solo use combustible sin

plomo o combustible sin plomo mezclado

con un máximo de 15% de etanol. No

utilice combustible de etanol (E85),

combustible diesel, metanol, combustible

con plomo ni ningún otro combustible o

podría dañar o impedir el funcionamiento

del sistema de control de emisiones.

El uso de combustible con plomo está

prohibido por ley.

Su vehículo no está diseñado para usar

combustible ni aditivos para combustible

con compuestos metálicos, lo que incluye

los aditivos con base de manganeso.

Recomendaciones de octanaje

Se recomienda gasolina sin plomo regular

con un octanaje de 87 (R+M)/2. Algunas

estaciones de servicio ofrecen

combustibles anunciados como regulares

con una clasificación de octanaje menor

de 87, especialmente en lugares de altitud

elevada. No se recomienda el uso de

combustibles con niveles de octanaje

menores de 87.

Nota: El combustible Premium le

proporcionará un mejor rendimiento para

vehículos con motores EcoBoost® y es

recomendado para el uso de servicio

pesado, como el arrastre de remolques.

No se preocupe si a veces su motor tiene

leves detonaciones. Sin embargo, si

presenta un cascabeleo fuerte mientras

usa combustible del octanaje

recomendado, consulte con su distribuidor

autorizado para evitar daños en el motor.

FUNCIONAMIENTO SIN

COMBUSTIBLE

Evite quedarse sin combustible, ya que

esta situación puede afectar

negativamente los componentes del tren

motriz.

155

Combustible y llenado

Si se queda sin combustible:

• Es posible que deba realizar un ciclo

de encendido desde OFF (Apagado) a

ON (Encendido) varias veces después

de agregar combustible, para permitir

que el sistema bombee el combustible

desde el tanque hasta el motor. Al

volver a arrancar, el tiempo de giro del

motor tomará unos segundos más que

lo normal. Con encendido sin llave, solo

arranque el motor. El tiempo de giro

será más largo que lo usual.

• Normalmente, agregar 3.8 L (1 gal) de

combustible es suficiente para que

vuelva a arrancar el motor. Si el

vehículo se queda sin combustible en

una pendiente, podrían requerirse más

de 3.8 L (1 gal).

• Es posible que se encienda el indicador

de servicio del motor a la brevedad.

Para obtener más información sobre

el indicador de servicio del motor a la

brevedad, Ver Indicadores y luces de

advertencia (página 89).

Carga de combustible con un

recipiente portátil

AVISOS

No inserte ni la boquilla del recipiente

portátil de combustible ni embudos

de posventa en el sistema sin tapón.

Esto podría dañar el sistema de

combustible y su sello y podría hacer que

el combustible caiga al suelo en lugar de

llenar el taque, lo cual podría provocar

serias lesiones personales.

No intente abrir por la fuerza el

sistema de combustible sin tapón

con objetos extraños. Esto podría

dañar el sistema de combustible y su sello

y provocar lesiones a usted o a otros.

Nota: No use embudos de posventa; no

funcionarán con el sistema de combustible

sin tapón y pueden dañarlo. El embudo

incluido tiene un diseño especial que

funciona en forma segura con su vehículo.

Cuando llene el tanque de combustible del

vehículo desde un recipiente de

combustible portátil, utilice el embudo que

se incluye con el vehículo.

E142668

1. Ubique el embudo de plástico blanco

en el compartimiento de la llanta de

refacción.

2. Inserte lentamente el embudo en el

sistema de combustible sin tapón.

3. Llene el vehículo con el combustible

del recipiente portátil.

4. Cuando termine, limpie el embudo o

elimínelo correctamente. Puede

adquirir embudos adicionales en un

distribuidor autorizado si decide

eliminar el embudo.

LLENADO

AVISOS

El vapor del combustible arde en

forma violenta y la inflamación del

combustible puede causar graves

quemaduras.

Lea y acate las instrucciones del

lugar donde se abastecerá de

combustible.

156

Combustible y llenado

AVISOS

Apague el motor antes de

abastecerse de combustible.

No fume si se encuentra cerca de

combustible o si está abasteciendo

su vehículo de combustible.

Mantenga cualquier chispa, llama y

artículo de tabaquería lejos del

combustible.

Permanezca fuera del vehículo y no

deje la bomba de combustible sin

supervisión cuando abastezca el

vehículo de combustible. En algunos

lugares, esto es ilegal.

Mantenga a los niños lejos de la

bomba de combustible; nunca

permita que los niños bombeen

combustible.

No utilice dispositivos electrónicos

personales mientras carga

combustible.

Use las siguientes pautas para evitar la

acumulación de carga electroestática al

llenar un recipiente de combustible no

conectado a tierra:

• Coloque en el suelo el recipiente

aprobado de combustible.

• No llene un recipiente de combustible

mientras éste se encuentre en el

vehículo (incluida el área de carga).

• Mantenga la boquilla de la bomba de

combustible en contacto con el

recipiente mientras lo llena.

• No use el dispositivo para mantener la

manija de la bomba de combustible en

la posición de llenado.

Sistema de combustible sin tapón

de Easy Fuel®

ALERTA

El sistema de combustible puede

estar bajo presión. Si oye un silbido

cerca de la puerta de llenado de

combustible, no cargue combustible hasta

que el sonido se detenga. De lo contrario,

se podría derramar combustible, pudiendo

ocasionar serias lesiones personales.

Cuando llene el tanque de combustible de

su vehículo:

1. Apague el motor.

2. Abra la puerta de llenado de

combustible.

3. Inserte lenta y completamente la

boquilla de llenado de combustible en

el sistema de combustible y déjela así

hasta que termine de cargar

combustible.

4. Luego de que termine de bombear el

combustible, saque lentamente la

boquilla del surtidor de combustible.

Permita unos diez segundos luego de

que termine de bombear el

combustible, antes de retirar la

boquilla. Esto permite que el

combustible residual regrese al tanque

de combustible y que no se derrame

sobre el automóvil.

Nota: Si llena en demasía el tanque de

combustible, puede producirse un derrame

de combustible. No llene el tanque a tal

punto que el combustible sobrepase la

boquilla del surtidor. El combustible

sobrante puede dejarse correr por el

desagüe ubicado debajo y frente a la puerta

del surtidor de combustible.

157

Combustible y llenado

Si la entrada de llenado de combustible

no se cerró correctamente, es posible que

aparezca un mensaje para recordarle que

compruebe dicha entrada de llenado en el

grupo de instrumentos. Ver Indicadores

y luces de advertencia (página 89).

En la próxima oportunidad, haga lo

1. Salga del camino con cuidado

2. Apague el motor.

3. Abra la puerta de llenado de

combustible y quite cualquier suciedad

visible de la apertura de llenado de

combustible.

4. Inserte la boquilla de llenado de

combustible o el embudo que viene

con el vehículo varias veces para

desalojar la suciedad que impide un

cierre correcto.

Si esta acción corrige el problema, el

mensaje podría no eliminarse de

inmediato. Es posible que tarde varios

ciclos de manejo para que dicho mensaje

se borre. Un ciclo de manejo consta de un

arranque del motor (luego de cuatro o más

horas con el motor apagado) seguido de

un manejo por la ciudad o carretera.

Continuar manejando con el mensaje

podría hacer que se encienda también la

luz de servicio del motor a la brevedad.

SISTEMA DE CONTROL DE

EMISIONES

AVISOS

No estacione, ni deje en ralentí ni

maneje su vehículo sobre pasto seco

u otras superficies secas. El sistema

de emisión de gases calienta el

compartimiento del motor y el sistema de

escape, lo que puede iniciar un incendio.

AVISOS

Las fugas del escape pueden

provocar el ingreso de gases dañinos

y potencialmente letales al

compartimiento de pasajeros. Si huele a

gases de escape dentro de su vehículo,

haga que su distribuidor lo inspeccione de

inmediato. No conduzca si percibe olor de

gases de escape.

Su vehículo está equipado con diversos

componentes de control de emisión de

gases y un convertidor catalítico que le

permitirán cumplir con las normas de

emisión de gases correspondientes. Para

asegurarse que el convertidor catalítico y

los demás componentes de control de

emisión de gases sigan funcionando

correctamente:

Para asegurarse que el convertidor

catalítico y los demás componentes de

control de emisión de gases sigan

funcionando correctamente:

• Use sólo el combustible especificado.

• Evite quedarse sin combustible.

• No apague el encendido mientras su

vehículo está en movimiento,

especialmente a altas velocidades.

• Lleve a cabo los puntos mencionados

en la información de mantenimiento

programado de acuerdo con el

programa especificado.

Las indicaciones de mantenimiento

programado mencionados en la

información de mantenimiento

programado son esenciales para la vida

útil y el rendimiento de su vehículo y de su

sistema de emisión de gases.

158

Combustible y llenado

Si se usan refacciones que no sean Ford,

Motorcraft o autorizadas por Ford para los

reemplazos de mantenimiento o para el

servicio de componentes que afecten el

control de emisión de gases, dichas

refacciones que no son Ford deben ser

equivalentes a las refacciones Ford Motor

Company originales en cuanto a

rendimiento y durabilidad.

El encendido del indicador Servicio del

motor a la brevedad, la luz de advertencia

del sistema de carga o la luz de

advertencia de temperatura, las fugas de

líquido, los olores extraños, el humo o la

pérdida de potencia del motor, podrían

indicar que el sistema de control de

emisión de gases no está funcionando

correctamente.

Un sistema de escape dañado o con fallas

puede permitir que los gases de escape

ingresen al vehículo. Lleve a inspeccionar

y reparar de inmediato el sistema de

escape dañado o con fallas.

No efectúe cambios no autorizados en el

vehículo o el motor. Por ley, los propietarios

de vehículos y las personas que fabriquen,

reparen, revisen, vendan, renten,

comercialicen o supervisen una flotilla de

vehículos, no están autorizados para quitar

intencionalmente un dispositivo de control

de emisión de gases ni para impedir su

funcionamiento. En la Calcomanía de

información sobre el control de emisión de

gases del vehículo, que se encuentra en o

cerca del motor, está la información acerca

del sistema de emisión de gases de su

vehículo. Esta calcomanía también incluye

la cilindrada del motor

Consulte su Manual de garantías para

obtener una completa información sobre

la garantía del sistema de emisión de

gases

Diagnóstico a bordo (OBD-II)

Su vehículo tiene una computadora que

monitorea el sistema de control de emisión

de gases del motor. Este sistema se

conoce comúnmente como Sistema de

diagnóstico a bordo (OBD-II). El sistema

OBD II protege el medio ambiente,

asegurando que su vehículo siga

cumpliendo con las normas

gubernamentales sobre emisión de gases.

El sistema OBD-II además ayuda a su

distribuidor autorizado a prestar la

asistencia adecuada a su vehículo.

Cuando el indicador Servicio del

motor a la brevedad se enciende,

el sistema OBD-II ha detectado

una falla. Las fallas temporales pueden

causar que el indicador Servicio del motor

a la brevedad se ilumine. Por ejemplo:

1. El vehículo se quedó sin combustible;

—el motor puede fallar o funcionar en

forma deficiente

2. El combustible es de mala calidad o

contiene agua; —el motor puede fallar

o funcionar en forma deficiente.

3. Es posible que el orificio de llenado de

combustible no se haya cerrado

correctamente. Ver Llenado (página

156).

4. Manejar en agua profunda—el sistema

eléctrico podría estar húmedo.

159

Combustible y llenado

Estos desperfectos temporales se pueden

corregir llenando el tanque de combustible

con combustible de alta calidad, cerrando

firmemente el orificio de llenado de

combustible o permitiendo que el sistema

eléctrico se seque. Después de tres ciclos

de manejo sin que se presenten éstos u

otros desperfectos temporales, el

indicador Servicio del motor a la brevedad

debe permanecer apagado la próxima vez

que arranque el motor. Un ciclo de manejo

consta de un arranque del motor en frío

seguido de un manejo combinado en

carretera y ciudad. No se requiere un

servicio adicional del vehículo.

Si el indicador Servicio del motor a la

brevedad permanece encendido, haga

revisar su vehículo a la brevedad posible.

A pesar de que algunos desperfectos

detectados por el OBD-II pueden no tener

síntomas claros, si continúa manejando

con el indicador Servicio del motor a la

brevedad encendido puede generar

aumentos de emisiones, reducir el

rendimiento del combustible, disminuir la

suavidad de funcionamiento del motor y

de la transmisión y ocasionar reparaciones

más costosas.

Disponibilidad para prueba de

inspección y mantenimiento (I/M)

Algunos gobiernos estatales, provinciales

y locales tienen programas de verificación

vehicular (VV) para revisar el equipo de

control de emisiones del vehículo. No

aprobar esta inspección puede impedir que

obtenga un registro del vehículo.

Si el indicador Servicio del motor

a la brevedad está encendido o

si el foco no funciona, es posible

que el vehículo necesite revisión. Consulte

Diagnóstico a bordo

Es posible que el vehículo no pase la

prueba de verificación vehicular si el

indicador Servicio del motor a la brevedad

está encendido o no funciona

correctamente (el foco está quemado) o

si el sistema OBD-II determina que algunos

de los sistemas de control de emisiones

no se han supervisado adecuadamente.

En este caso, el vehículo se considera no

listo para la prueba de VV.

Si el motor o la transmisión del vehículo

acaban de ser revisado o si la batería se ha

descargado o se ha reemplazado

recientemente, es posible que el sistema

OBD-II indique que el vehículo no esté listo

para la prueba de I/M’. Para determinar si

el vehículo está listo para la prueba de VV,

gire la llave de encendido a la posición ON

durante 15 segundos sin arrancar el motor.

Si el indicador Servicio del motor a la

brevedad destella ocho veces, significa

que el vehículo no está listo para la prueba

de verificación vehicular (VV); si el

indicador Servicio del motor a la brevedad

permanece encendido, significa que el

vehículo está listo para la prueba de VV.

El sistema OBD-II está diseñado para

revisar el sistema de control de emisiones

durante la conducción normal. Una revisión

completa puede tardar varios días. Si el

vehículo no está listo para la prueba VV,

debe realizarse el siguiente ciclo de manejo

compuesto por un manejo combinado en

carretera y ciudad:

15 minutos de conducción sin paradas en

una autopista o carretera, seguidos de 20

minutos de conducción con frenadas y

arranques por al menos cuatro períodos

en ralentí de 30 segundos.

160

Combustible y llenado

Deje detenido el vehículo por al menos

ocho horas sin arrancar el motor. Luego,

arranque el motor y complete el ciclo de

manejo anterior. El motor debe alcanzar

su temperatura normal de funcionamiento.

Una vez que haya arrancado, no apague

el motor hasta completar el ciclo de

manejo indicado. Si el vehículo aún no está

listo para la prueba de VV, deberá repetirse

el ciclo de conducción anterior.

CONSUMO DE COMBUSTIBLE

Nota: La cantidad de combustible en la

reserva de vacío varía y no se puede confiar

en ella para aumentar la capacidad de

manejo. Al llenar el tanque de combustible

de su vehículo después que el indicador de

combustible ha señalado vacío, es posible

que no pueda llenar la cantidad completa

de capacidad anunciada del tanque de

combustible debido a la reserva de vacío

aún presente en el tanque.

La capacidad anunciada es la capacidad

indicada y la reserva de vacío combinadas.

La capacidad nominal es la diferencia

entre la cantidad de combustible en un

tanque lleno y un tanque cuyo indicador

de combustible señala vacío. La reserva

de vacío es la cantidad de combustible en

el tanque después que el indicador de

combustible señala vacío.

Llenado del tanque

Para obtener resultados concretos al llenar

el tanque de combustible:

• Apague el encendido antes de llenar

con combustible; se obtendrá una

lectura inadecuada si el motor queda

funcionando.

• Use la misma velocidad de llenado

(baja - media - alta) cada vez que llene

el tanque.

• No permita más de dos chasquidos

automáticos cuando llene con

combustible.

Los resultados son más precisos cuando

el método de llenado es constante.

Cálculo del rendimiento del

combustible

No mida el rendimiento del combustible

durante las primeras 1000 millas (1600

km) de conducción (es el período de ajuste

del motor); se obtiene una medida más

precisa después de las 2000 a 3000 millas

(3200 km - 4800 km). Además, el gasto

en combustible, la frecuencia de llenado

o las lecturas del indicador de combustible

no son buenas maneras para medir el

rendimiento del combustible.

1. Llene el tanque por completo y anote

la lectura inicial del odómetro.

2. Cada vez que llene el tanque, anote la

cantidad de gasolina agregada.

3. Después de llenar al menos tres a cinco

veces el tanque, llene el tanque de

combustible y registre la lectura actual

del odómetro.

4. Reste la lectura inicial del odómetro

de la lectura actual.

5. Calcule el rendimiento del combustible

dividiendo las millas recorridas por los

galones usados (en el caso del sistema

métrico: Multiplique los litros usados

por 100 y luego divida por los

kilómetros recorridos).

161

Combustible y llenado

Mantenga un registro durante al menos un

mes y anote el tipo de conducción (ciudad

o carretera). Esto proporciona una

estimación precisa del rendimiento del

combustible del vehículo en las

condiciones actuales de conducción.

Además, mantener registros durante el

verano y el invierno muestra la forma en

que la temperatura afecta el rendimiento

del combustible. En general, temperaturas

más bajas significan menor rendimiento

del combustible.

162

Combustible y llenado

TRANSMISIÓN AUTOMÁTICA

AVISOS

Aplique siempre el freno de

estacionamiento a fondo y

compruebe que la palanca de

cambio de velocidades esté asegurada en

P (Estacionamiento). Gire el encendido a

la posición OFF (Apagado) y saque la llave

cada vez que baje de su vehículo.

No aplique el pedal del freno y el

pedal del acelerador

simultáneamente. Si aplica ambos

pedales simultáneamente durante más de

tres segundos se limitarán las rpm del

motor, lo que podría dificultar el

mantenimiento de la velocidad en el tráfico

y provocar heridas graves.

Comprensión de las posiciones de

la transmisión automática

Cómo poner el vehículo en una

velocidad:

1. Pise el pedal del freno a fondo.

2. Mantenga presionado el botón del

frente de la palanca de cambio de

velocidades.

3. Mueva la palanca de cambio de

velocidades al cambio deseado.

4. Suelte el botón y la transmisión se

mantendrá en la velocidad

seleccionada.

E133124

P (Estacionamiento)

Esta posición bloquea la transmisión e

impide que giren las ruedas delanteras.

Detenga completamente el vehículo antes

de ponerlo y sacarlo de P

(Estacionamiento)

R (Reversa)

Con la palanca de cambio de velocidades

en R (Reversa), el vehículo se mueve hacia

atrás. Siempre detenga completamente

el vehículo antes de cambiar hacia y desde

R (Reversa).

N (Neutral)

Con la palanca de cambio de velocidades

en N (Neutral), el vehículo puede arrancar

y desplazarse libremente. Mantenga

presionado el pedal del freno mientras

está en esta posición.

D (Directa)

La posición normal de conducción para

lograr el máximo rendimiento del

combustible. La transmisión funciona en

las velocidades primera a sexta.

163

Transmisión

S (Deportivo)

Cómo mover la palanca de cambio de

velocidades a S (Deportivo):

• Proporciona mayor frenado (con

motor) en pendientes y prolonga el

funcionamiento en relaciones de

transmisión inferiores para mejorar el

rendimiento al subir cuestas en

terrenos con colinas y áreas

montañosas. Esto aumentará las RPM

del motor durante el frenado.

• Proporciona mayor funcionamiento en

relaciones de transmisión inferiores a

través de la estrategia de cambios de

la transmisión automática.

• Las marchas se seleccionan más

rápidamente y a velocidades de motor

más altas.

Transmisión automática

SelectShift Automatic® (If Equipped)

La transmisión automática SelectShift le

ofrece la capacidad de pasar los cambios

manualmente si lo desea. Para usar

SelectShift, mueva la palanca de cambios

a S (Deportivo). Ahora puede usar los

botones +/- del lado de la palanca de

cambio para seleccionar las marchas.

Cuando use la alternancia para cambios

manuales:

• Oprima el botón (+) para pasar un

cambio de velocidad ascendente.

• Oprima el botón (-) para pasar un

cambio de velocidad descendente.

Nota: Después de asumir el control manual

con SelectShift, el vehículo permanecerá

en este modo hasta que devuelva la

palanca de cambios de (S) Deportivo a (D)

Directa.

Realice los cambios ascendentes a las

velocidades que se recomiendan en la

tabla siguiente:

Cambios ascendentes al acelerar (se

recomienda para lograr el máximo ahorro

de combustible)

Cambio de:

24 km/h (15 mph)1 - 2

40 km/h (25 mph)2 - 3

64 km/h (40 mph)3 - 4

72 km/h (45 mph)4 - 5

80 km/h (50 mph)5 - 6

El grupo de instrumentos mostrará la

velocidad seleccionada en la que se

encuentra actualmente.

SelectShift pasará automáticamente

algunos cambios por usted en caso de que

la velocidad en RPM del motor sea

demasiado elevada o baja.

Nota: El motor se puede dañar si mantiene

el revolucionamiento excesivo sin efectuar

un cambio en la transmisión.

palanca de interbloqueo de cambio

de velocidades del freno

AVISOS

No conduzca el vehículo hasta que

verifique que las luces de freno están

funcionando.

Cuando lleve a cabo este

procedimiento, estará colocando la

transmisión fuera de P

(Estacionamiento), lo que significa que el

vehículo puede rodar libremente. Para

evitar un desplazamiento no deseado del

vehículo, siempre aplique el freno de

estacionamiento completamente antes

de llevar a cabo este procedimiento. Use

bloques para ruedas si resulta adecuado

164

Transmisión

AVISOS

Si suelta completamente el freno de

estacionamiento, pero la luz de

advertencia de frenos permanece

iluminada, es posible que los frenos no

estén funcionando correctamente.

Consulte con su distribuidor autorizado.

Use la palanca de interbloqueo de cambio

de velocidades del freno para mover la

palanca de cambios desde la posición de

estacionamiento en caso de una falla

eléctrica o si el vehículo se ha quedado sin

batería.

Aplique el freno de estacionamiento y gire

el encendido a la posición OFF antes de

realizar este procedimiento.

1. Inserte un destornillador (o una

herramienta similar) entre el marco de

la palanca de cambios y el tablero de

terminación superior.

2. Use la herramienta para soltar el marco

de la palanca de cambios del panel de

terminación.

E142627

3. Localice la palanca blanca situada en

el costado izquierdo de la palanca de

cambios.

4. Con la herramienta, mueva la palanca

blanca hacia la parte trasera de la

palanca de cambios.

5. Mientras sostiene la palanca blanca en

la posición trasera, mueva la palanca

de cambios desde la posición de

estacionamiento.

6. Presione el marco de la palanca de

cambios de vuelta contra el panel de

terminación superior hasta que se

ajuste otra vez en su posición.

7. Aplique el pedal del freno, arranque el

vehículo y libere el freno de

estacionamiento.

Nota: Cuando se utiliza este procedimiento,

se debe visitar a su distribuidor autorizado

lo antes posible.

Si el vehículo se atasca en lodo o

nieve

Nota: No balancee el vehículo si el motor

no está a la temperatura de funcionamiento

normal, de lo contrario, es posible que se

dañe la transmisión.

Nota: No balancee el vehículo por más de

un minuto, de lo contrario, es posible que

se dañen la transmisión y las llantas o bien,

se sobrecaliente el motor.

Si su vehículo queda atascado en lodo o

nieve, es posible balancearlo para sacarlo

cambiando entre velocidades de avance

y reversa y haciendo una pausa entre

cambios con un patrón constante. Oprima

levemente el acelerador en cada

velocidad.

ASISTENCIA DE ARRANQUE

EN PENDIENTES

AVISOS

La función de arranque asistido en

pendientes no reemplaza al freno de

estacionamiento. Cuando abandone

el vehículo, siempre aplique el freno de

estacionamiento y seleccione la posición

P (estacionamiento).

165

Transmisión

AVISOS

Debe permanecer en el vehículo una

vez que active la función de arranque

asistido en pendientes.

En todo momento, usted es

responsable de controlar el vehículo,

de supervisar el sistema de

asistencia de arranque en pendientes y de

intervenir si fuera necesario.

Si el motor se revoluciona

excesivamente, o si se detecta una

falla cuando está activa la función

de arranque asistido en pendientes, la

función de arranque asistido en pendientes

se desactivará.

Esta característica de asistencia en

pendientes permite mover el vehículo con

mayor facilidad cuando se encuentra en

una pendiente pronunciada sin necesidad

de utilizar el freno de estacionamiento.

Cuando esta característica está activa, el

vehículo permanecerá inmóvil en la

pendiente durante dos a tres segundos

después de soltar el pedal del freno. Esto

permite que tenga tiempo de mover el pie

del freno al pedal del acelerador. Los

frenos se liberan automáticamente una

vez que el motor desarrolle potencia

suficiente para prevenir que el vehículo se

vaya hacia abajo en la pendiente. Esto es

una ventaja cuando se tiene que poner el

vehículo en movimiento en una pendiente,

(por ejemplo, en una rampa de

estacionamiento, en un semáforo de

subida o al entrar de reversa en un lugar

de estacionamiento empinado).

Esta característica se activa

automáticamente en cualquier pendiente

que pueda derivar en que el vehículo se

devuelva hacia abajo. Esta característica

no operará si se activa el freno de

estacionamiento.

Uso del sistema de arranque

asistido en pendientes (HSA)

1. Pise el pedal del freno para detener el

vehículo por completo. Mantenga

oprimido el pedal del freno.

2. Si los sensores detectan que el

vehículo está en una pendiente, la

función de arranque asistido en

pendientes se activará

automáticamente.

3. Cuando usted retire el pie del pedal del

freno, el vehículo se mantendrá en la

pendiente, sin irse hacia abajo, durante

dos o tres segundos. El tiempo de

asistencia se prolongará de modo

automático si usted está en el proceso

de poner el vehículo en movimiento.

4. Ponga el vehículo en movimiento de la

manera normal. Los frenos se quitarán

automáticamente.

166

Transmisión

USO DE LA TRACCIÓN EN LAS

CUATRO RUEDAS

Nota: Se mostrará el mensaje "4WD

disabled temporarily" (4WD temporalmente

desactivado) si el sistema 4WD se ha

sobrecalentado y pasado automáticamente

a tracción en las ruedas delanteras. Esta

condición puede ocurrir si el vehículo se ha

operado en condiciones de carga alta

extrema o con derrapes excesivos de las

ruedas, como cuando se conduce sobre

arena profunda. Para restablecer el

funcionamiento normal de 4WD lo más

pronto posible, detenga el vehículo en un

lugar seguro y apague el motor. Se mostrará

el mensaje "4WD restored" (4WD

restaurado) durante aproximadamente

cinco segundos después de que el sistema

se enfría y regresa a la función 4WD normal.

Nota: El sistema 4WD inteligente le

proporciona a su vehículo algunas

capacidades a campo traviesa limitadas.

La operación del vehículo en condiciones

distintas a caminos de arena, nieve o lodo

moderado o terrenos irregulares podría

someter al vehículo a un esfuerzo excesivo,

lo que podría causarle daños, que no los

cubre la garantía. Estos daños no están

cubiertos por su garantía.

Nota: Cuando se presenta una falla en el

sistema 4WD, se mostrará la advertencia

"4WD malfunction Service required" (se

requiere servicio por desperfecto 4WD) en

la pantalla de información. El sistema 4WD

no está funcionando correctamente y pasó

automáticamente a tracción en las ruedas

delanteras. Cuando aparece esta

advertencia, lleve el vehículo a un

distribuidor autorizado para que lo revisen.

E142669

Podrá ver la distribución de potencia entre

las ruedas delanteras y traseras

representada por un icono en la pantalla

de información. Si se suministra más

potencia a las ruedas delanteras o

traseras, lo mostrará llenando un área

mayor.

Su vehículo puede tener un sistema de

tracción en las cuatro ruedas (4WD)

constante. El sistema 4WD es en un

sistema proactivo, lo que significa que no

sólo responde al deslizamiento de la rueda

entre las ruedas delanteras y traseras, sino

también tiene la capacidad de anticipar el

deslizamiento de la rueda y de transferir

el par motor a las ruedas traseras antes

de que se produzca el deslizamiento.

Incluso no hay derrape de ruedas, el

sistema 4WD inteligente continuamente

realiza ajustes a la distribución de par

motor, en un intento por mejorar el

comportamiento en línea recta y’ curvas

del vehículo, tanto en carretera como en

campo traviesa. El sistema está activo

todo el tiempo y no requiere intervención

del usuario.

Todos los componentes del sistema 4WD

inteligente están sellados de por vida y no

requieren mantenimiento.

167

Doble Tracción (If Equipped)

Si su vehículo tiene 4WD inteligente, nunca

se debe usar una llanta de refacción de un

tamaño distinto al de las llantas

habituales. Si está instalada la rueda de

refacción, el sistema 4WD podría

desactivarse en forma automática e

ingresar sólo al modo de tracción delantera

para proteger los componentes de la

transmisión. Esta condición se puede

indicar con un mensaje "4WD Off" (4WD

desactivado) en el capítulo de pantallas

de información. Consulte pantallas de

información en el capítulo Grupo de

instrumentos para obtener más

información. Si en la pantalla de

información aparece "4WD Off" (4WD

desactivado) por el uso de la llanta de

refacción, este indicador se debe apagar

al volver a instalar la llanta reparada o al

instalar una llanta normal de reemplazo y

manejar una breve distancia. Se

recomienda volver a instalar la llanta

reparada o una llanta para camino de

reemplazo lo antes posible. El uso de

llantas de tamaño diferente entre los ejes

delantero y trasero podría hacer que el

sistema 4WD deje de funcionar y se ajuste

en forma predeterminada en la tracción

delantera o bien podría dañar el sistema

4WD.

Conducción en condiciones

especiales con tracción en las

cuatro ruedas

Los vehículos con 4WD están

especialmente equipados para manejar

en arena, nieve, lodo y terreno irregular y

tienen características de funcionamiento

distintas de las de los vehículos

convencionales, tanto dentro como fuera

de la carretera.

Al manejar en una velocidad reducida a

campo traviesa con temperaturas

exteriores altas, utilice una velocidad baja

siempre que sea posible. El

funcionamiento en velocidad baja

aumentará al máximo la capacidad del

motor y la capacidad de enfriamiento de

la transmisión.

Bajo condiciones extremas de

funcionamiento, el A/A puede realizar un

ciclo de encendido y apagado para evitar

que el motor se sobrecaliente.

Principios de funcionamiento básicos

• Maneje más lento si hay vientos fuertes

de costado, ya que estos pueden

afectar el manejo normal del vehículo.

• Tenga mucho cuidado cuando maneje

sobre pavimento resbaloso a causa de

arena suelta, agua, grava, nieve o hielo.

168

Doble Tracción (If Equipped)

Si su vehículo se sale del camino

• Si su vehículo se sale del camino,

disminuya la velocidad, evitando frenar

bruscamente. Vuelva al pavimento

sólo cuando haya disminuido la

velocidad. No gire el volante de la

dirección con demasiada brusquedad

cuando vuelva al pavimento.

• Puede ser más seguro permanecer en

la cuneta o el acotamiento y disminuir

en forma gradual la velocidad antes de

volver al pavimento. Puede perder el

control si no disminuye la velocidad o

si gira demasiado el volante de la

dirección o lo hace en forma abrupta.

• A menudo, puede ser menos riesgoso

golpear pequeños objetos, como

reflectores de carreteras, que

ocasionarían daños menores a su

vehículo, que intentar volver

repentinamente al pavimento, ya que

esto puede hacer que el vehículo

resbale de lado y pierda el control o se

vuelque. Recuerde, su seguridad y la

de otros debe ser su principal

preocupación.

Maniobras de emergencia

• En una situación de emergencia

inevitable en que se tiene que hacer un

viraje brusco, recuerde evitar “las

maniobras excesivas” con su vehículo

(por ejemplo, gire el volante de la

dirección sólo con la rapidez y la

cantidad necesarias para evitar la

emergencia). Hacer movimientos

excesivos con la dirección resultará en

un menor control del vehículo, no en

más. Además, se deben utilizar

variaciones leves de la presión del

pedal del acelerador o del freno si se

requieren cambios en la velocidad del

vehículo. Evite maniobras,

aceleraciones o frenadas bruscas que

puedan aumentar el riesgo de pérdida

de control del vehículo, volcaduras y

lesiones personales. Use todas las

superficies de la carretera disponibles

para devolver el vehículo a una

dirección segura de viaje.

• En caso de una frenada de emergencia,

evite derrapar las llantas y no haga

ningún movimiento brusco con el

volante de la dirección.

• Si el vehículo pasa de una superficie a

otra (es decir, de concreto a grava),

habrá un cambio en la forma en que el

vehículo responde a una maniobra

(viraje, aceleración o frenado).

Nuevamente, evite maniobras bruscas.

Lijar

Al manejar sobre arena, intente mantener

las cuatro ruedas en el área más sólida del

trayecto. Evite reducir las presiones de las

llantas; pero cambie a una velocidad

inferior y maneje uniformemente por el

terreno. Oprima lentamente el acelerador

y evite hacer patinar las ruedas.

169

Doble Tracción (If Equipped)

No conduzca el vehículo con 4WD en

arenas profundas por un período de tiempo

prolongado. Esto hará que el sistema 4WD

se sobrecaliente. El grupo de instrumentos

mostrará el mensaje "4WD temporarily

disabled" (4WD temporalmente

desactivado). Para reanudar el

funcionamiento normal de 4WD, apague

el vehículo y deje que el sistema 4WD se

enfríe durante al menos 15 minutos.

Después de que el sistema se ha enfriado,

la función 4WD normal volverá y el

conjunto de instrumentos mostrará

brevemente "4WD restored" (4WD

restaurado). Al manejar en una velocidad

reducida en arena profunda con

temperaturas exteriores altas, utilice una

marcha lenta siempre que sea posible. El

funcionamiento en velocidad baja

aumentará al máximo la capacidad del

motor y la capacidad de enfriamiento de

la transmisión.

Evite el exceso de velocidad, porque el

impulso que lleva el vehículo puede jugarle

en contra y hacer que el vehículo se

atasque, al punto que requiera de la ayuda

de otro vehículo. Recuerde, usted puede

ser capaz de salir en reversa por donde

entró si procede con cuidado.

Lodo y agua

Si debe manejar en superficies cubiertas

de agua, hágalo lentamente. La tracción

o la capacidad de frenado se pueden ver

limitadas.

Cuando se desplaza por el agua, determine

la profundidad; evite pasar por agua cuyo

nivel esté por sobre la parte inferior de los

rines de las llantas (para los automóviles)

o la parte inferior de la tracción delantera

(para las camionetas) (si es posible) y

maneje lentamente. Si el sistema de

encendido se moja, es posible que el

vehículo se pare.

E142667

Tras pasar por el agua, pruebe siempre los

frenos. Los frenos mojados no detienen el

vehículo con la eficacia de los frenos secos.

El secado se puede acelerar si avanza

lentamente con el vehículo mientras pisa

levemente el pedal del freno.

Tenga precaución con los cambios bruscos

en la velocidad o dirección del vehículo

cuando maneje sobre lodo. Incluso los

vehículos con tracción en las cuatro ruedas

pueden perder tracción en lodo

resbaladizo. Si el vehículo se desliza, vire

en la dirección del deslizamiento hasta que

recobre el control del vehículo.

Después de manejar a través de lodo,

limpie los residuos adheridos a los ejes de

transmisión giratorios y a las llantas. El

exceso de lodo adherido a las llantas y a

los ejes de transmisión giratorios produce

un desequilibrio que puede dañar los

componentes de la transmisión.

Nota: La conducción por agua profunda

puede dañar la transmisión. Si el eje

delantero o trasero se sumerge en agua, el

lubricante del eje y el lubricante de la unidad

de transferencia de potencia se deben

revisar y cambiar si es necesario.

E143950

170

Doble Tracción (If Equipped)

“Tread Lightly” (Transitar con cuidado) es

un programa educacional diseñado para

mejorar el conocimiento público de las

leyes y responsabilidades del uso de tierras

en las áreas salvajes de nuestra nación.

Ford Motor Company se une a Servicio

Forestal de EE.UU (U.S. Forest Service) y

a la Oficina de Administración de Tierras

(Bureau of Land Management) instándolo

a ayudar a preservar el bosque y otros

terrenos públicos y privados, mediante el

programa “transitar con cuidado”.

Manejo en terrenos montañosos o

empinados

Aunque puede que los obstáculos

naturales hagan necesario viajar

diagonalmente en subidas y bajadas o

pendientes pronunciadas, siempre debe

intentar manejar en forma recta.

Nota: Nota: nunca maneje

transversalmente ni realice virajes en

cuestas o pendientes pronunciadas. Un

peligro radica en perder tracción, resbalar

de lado y posiblemente volcarse. Cuando

maneje en terreno montañoso, determine

de antemano la ruta que va a usar. No

maneje sobre la cima de una colina sin ver

cuáles son las condiciones del otro lado. No

maneje en reversa por una colina sin la

ayuda de alguien que lo guíe.

Al subir una montaña o cuesta empinada,

comience en una velocidad baja en lugar

de efectuar un cambio descendente desde

una velocidad más alta luego de iniciado

el ascenso. Esto reduce la tensión del

motor y la posibilidad de que el motor se

apague.

Si se para, no intente virar ya que podría

volcarse. Es mejor intentar retroceder

hasta un lugar seguro.

Aplique tan sólo la suficiente potencia a

las ruedas para subir la cuesta. Usar

demasiada potencia puede hacer que las

llantas resbalen, giren velozmente o

pierdan tracción, resultando en la pérdida

del control del vehículo.

E143949

Descienda la cuesta en la misma velocidad

que usaría para subirla, a fin de evitar el

uso excesivo de los frenos y el

sobrecalentamiento de éstos. No

descienda en neutral; desactive la

sobremarcha o cambie manualmente a

una velocidad inferior. Cuando descienda

una cuesta empinada, evite el frenado

brusco ya que puede perder el control. Las

ruedas delanteras tienen que girar para

poder maniobrar el vehículo.

Su vehículo tiene frenos antibloqueo; por

lo tanto, aplíquelos uniformemente. No

“bombee” los frenos.

171

Doble Tracción (If Equipped)

Manejo sobre nieve y hielo

ALERTA

Si conduce en condiciones

resbaladizas que requieran el uso de

cables o cadenas para llantas,

entonces es vital que conduzca con

cuidado. Mantenga velocidades bajas, deje

una mayor distancia para detenerse y evite

mover el volante con agresividad para

reducir las posibilidades de perder el

control del vehículo, lo que podría dar lugar

a lesiones serias o la muerte. Si el extremo

posterior del vehículo patina al tomar una

curva, gire el volante en la dirección del

deslizamiento hasta que retome el control

del vehículo.

Nota: El deslizamiento excesivo de las

llantas puede dañar la transmisión.

Un vehículo con tracción en las cuatro

ruedas (4WD) tiene ventajas sobre los

vehículos 2WD en nieve y en hielo, pero

puede derraparse como cualquier otro

vehículo. Si comienza a resbalarse al

manejar en caminos con nieve o hielo, gire

el volante en la dirección del deslizamiento

hasta que retome el control.

Evite las aplicaciones de potencia

repentinas y los cambios rápidos de

dirección en nieve y en hielo. Pise el

acelerador en forma lenta y uniforme

cuando ponga el vehículo en movimiento

después de haberse detenido por

completo.

Evite también el frenado brusco. A pesar

de que los vehículos 4WD pueden acelerar

mejor que los de tracción en dos ruedas

sobre nieve y hielo, éstos no frenan más

rápido, ya que al igual que en otros

vehículos, el frenado se produce en las

cuatro ruedas. No se confíe de las

condiciones del camino.

Asegúrese de conservar entre usted y los

demás vehículos una distancia suficiente

para detenerse. Maneje más lento de lo

normal y considere el uso de una de las

velocidades inferiores. En situaciones de

paradas de emergencia, presione el freno

en forma constante. Como el vehículo

tiene un sistema de frenos antibloqueo

(ABS) en las cuatro ruedas, no “bombee”

los frenos. Consulte la sección Frenos de

este capítulo para obtener información

adicional acerca del funcionamiento del

sistema de frenos antibloqueo.

Mantenimiento y modificaciones

Los sistemas de suspensión y dirección de

su vehículo se han diseñado y probado

para proporcionar un rendimiento

predecible, ya sea con carga o en vacío, así

como también una capacidad duradera

de transporte de carga. Por este motivo,

Ford Motor Company recomienda no

efectuar modificaciones tales como

agregar o eliminar piezas (como equipos

elevadores o barras estabilizadoras) ni

usar refacciones no equivalentes a los

equipos originales de fábrica.

Toda modificación al vehículo que eleve

el centro de gravedad puede hacer que el

vehículo tenga más probabilidades de

volcarse como resultado de una pérdida

de control. Ford Motor Company

recomienda tener precaución con cualquier

vehículo equipado con cargas o

dispositivos altos (como escaleras o

portaequipajes).

Si no mantiene su vehículo

adecuadamente, podría anular la garantía,

aumentar el costo de reparación, disminuir

el rendimiento y las capacidades

operativas del vehículo, y afectar en forma

adversa la seguridad del conductor y los

pasajeros. Se recomienda efectuar

inspecciones frecuentes a los

componentes del chasis si el vehículo está

sujeto a uso a campo traviesa.

172

Doble Tracción (If Equipped)

INFORMACIÓN GENERAL

Nota: Los ruidos ocasionales del freno son

normales. Si durante el frenado se produce

un sonido de “metal contra metal”, de

chirrido o rechinado continuo, es posible que

las balatas estén desgastadas y sea

necesario que las inspeccione un distribuidor

autorizado. Si el vehículo presenta una

vibración o temblor continuo en el volante

de la dirección durante el frenado, debe ser

revisado por un distribuidor autorizado.

Nota: Se puede acumular polvo de los

frenos en las ruedas, incluso en condiciones

normales de operación. La acumulación de

polvo en los frenos es inevitable a medida

que estos se desgastan y no contribuye a

que tengan ruido. Ver Limpieza de las

ruedas de aleación (página 264).

E138644

Ver Indicadores y luces de

advertencia (página 89).

Los frenos húmedos provocan una

eficiencia de freno reducida. Presione

suavemente el pedal de frenos unas veces

al conducir desde un lavado de autos o

agua inmóvil a fin de secar los frenos.

Frenado sobre aceleración

En el caso de que el pedal del acelerador

se quedara pegado o atrapado, aplique

una presión constante y firme al pedal de

freno para bajar la velocidad del vehículo

y la potencia del motor se reducirá. Si

experimenta esta condición, aplique los

frenos y detenga el vehículo por completo.

Apague el motor, cambie la palanca a P y

aplique el freno de estacionamiento, y

luego inspeccione el pedal del acelerador

para eliminar cualquier interferencia. Si no

encuentra ninguna y la condición persiste,

haga que se remolque su vehículo al

distribuidor autorizado más cercano.

Asistencia de freno de emergencia

La asistencia de freno de emergencia

detecta cuando frena bruscamente para

medir la velocidad en que presiona el pedal

de freno. Proporciona máxima eficiencia

de frenado mientras presiona el pedal. La

asistencia de freno de emergencia puede

reducir las distancias de detención en

situaciones críticas.

sistema de frenos antibloqueo

Este sistema ayuda a mantener el control

de la dirección durante detenciones de

emergencia al impedir el bloqueo de los

frenos.

Esta luz se enciende

momentáneamente cuando se

activa la ignición. Si la luz no

enciende durante el arranque, si

permanece encendida o destella, es

posible que el sistema de frenos

antibloqueo esté desactivado y necesite

revisión.

E138644

Si el sistema está desactivado,

el frenado normal sigue siendo

eficaz. Si se enciende la luz de

advertencia de freno con el freno de

estacionamiento desenganchado, haga

revisar inmediatamente su sistema de

frenos.

CONSEJOS PARA CONDUCIR

CON FRENOS ANTIBLOQUEO

Nota: Cuando el sistema está operativo, el

pedal del freno se pulsará y puede avanzar

más allá. Mantenga presión en el pedal de

freno. También es posible que escuche un

ruido proveniente del sistema. Esto es

normal.

173

Frenos

El ABS no eliminará riesgos cuando:

• conduzca demasiado cerca del

vehículo delante de usted

• el vehículo está en hidroplaneo

• toma las esquinas demasiado rápido

• la superficie del camino no está en

buenas condiciones.

FRENO DE

ESTACIONAMIENTO

ALERTA

Siempre ajuste a fondo el freno de

estacionamiento y deje del vehículo

con la palanca del selector de

transmisión en posición P.

Nota: No oprima el botón para

desenganchar el vehículo mientras jala la

palanca hacia arriba.

Para aplicar el freno de estacionamiento:

1. Presione el pedal de freno de pie

firmemente.

2. Jale hacia arriba la palanca de freno de

estacionamiento hasta accionarla por

completo.

Nota: Si estaciona el vehículo en una

pendiente y se enfrenta con una subida,

mueva la palanca del selector de

transmisión a la posición P y gire el volante

hacia el lado contrario de la banqueta.

Nota: Si estaciona el vehículo en una

pendiente y se enfrenta con una bajada,

mueva la palanca del selector de

transmisión a P y gire el volante hacia la

banqueta.

Para desenganchar el freno de

estacionamiento:

1. Pise el pedal de freno firmemente.

2. Jale levemente la palanca hacia arriba.

3. Oprima el botón de desenganche y

presione la palanca hacia abajo.

174

Frenos

FUNCIONAMIENTO

El sistema de control de tracción ayuda a

evitar que las ruedas de tracción patinen

y pierdan tracción.

Si el vehículo comienza a deslizarse, el

sistema aplica los frenos a ruedas

individuales y, cuando se necesita, reduce

la potencia del motor al mismo tiempo. Si

las ruedas giran al acelerar en superficies

resbalosas o sueltas, el sistema reduce la

potencia del motor para aumentar la

tracción.

USO DEL CONTROL DE

TRACCIÓN

En ciertas situaciones (por ejemplo,

atrapado en la nieve o el lodo), desactivar

el control de tracción puede ser útil, ya que

permite que las ruedas giren con toda la

potencia del motor. Apague el sistema de

control de tracción mediante el control de

la pantalla de información. Ver

Información general (página 93).

Mensajes y luces indicadoras del

sistema

ALERTA

Si se detecta una falla en el sistema

AdvanceTrac, la luz del control de

estabilidad se encenderá

continuamente. Verifique que el sistema

AdvanceTrac no haya sido desactivado en

forma manual mediante el control de la

pantalla de información. Si la luz del

control de estabilidad se enciende

continuamente, lleve inmediatamente el

vehículo a un distribuidor autorizado para

que revisen el sistema. Conducir con

AdvanceTrac desactivado podría implicar

un mayor riesgo de pérdida de control del

vehículo, volcaduras, lesiones personales

e incluso la muerte.

E138639

La luz de control de estabilidad

se ilumina temporalmente al

arrancar el motor y parpadea

cuando la condición de conducción activa

el sistema de estabilidad.

La luz de apagado de control de

estabilidad se ilumina

temporalmente al arrancar el

motor y permanece encendida cuando el

sistema de control de tracción está

apagado.

Cuando el sistema de control de tracción

está apagado o activo, aparece un

mensaje en la pantalla de información que

muestra el estado del sistema.

175

Control de tracción

FUNCIONAMIENTO

AVISOS

Las modificaciones al vehículo que

incluyen sistema de frenos, parrillas

portaequipaje de postventa,

suspensión, sistema de dirección,

fabricación de llantas y tamaño de la

rueda/llanta puede cambiar las

características de manejo del vehículo y

podrían afectar adversamente el

rendimiento del sistema AdvanceTrac.

Además, la instalación de altavoces

estéreo puede interferir con el sistema

AdvanceTrac y afectarlo adversamente.

Dentro de lo posible, instale cualquier

bocina estéreo de posventa desde la

consola central delantera, el túnel y los

asientos delanteros con el fin de reducir el

riesgo de interferencia con los sensores

AdvanceTrac. Reducir la eficacia del

sistema AdvanceTrac puede derivar en un

mayor riesgo de perder el control del

vehículo, una volcadura, lesiones

personales o la muerte.

Recuerde que ni siquiera la

tecnología avanzada puede desafiar

las leyes de la física. Siempre existe

la posibilidad de perder el control de un

vehículo debido al análisis incorrecto que

hace el conductor respecto de las

condiciones. Un manejo agresivo en

cualquier condición del camino puede

hacerlo perder el control de su vehículo,

aumentando el riesgo de sufrir lesiones

personales o daños materiales. La

activación del sistema AdvanceTrac es

una indicación de que al menos una de las

llantas excedió su capacidad de agarre;

esto podría reducir la capacidad del

usuario de controlar el vehículo,

ocasionando posiblemente una pérdida

de control del vehículo, volcadura, lesiones

personales e incluso la muerte. Si el

sistema AdvanceTrac se activa, REDUZCA

LA VELOCIDAD.

El sistema AdvanceTrac con Roll Stability

Control lo ayuda a mantener el control de

su vehículo cuando se encuentra sobre una

superficie resbaladizo. La porción de

control de estabilidad electrónica del

sistema ayuda a evitar derrapes o

deslizamientos laterales y el control de

estabilidad de balanceo ayuda a evitar que

el vehículo se vuelque. El sistema de

control de tracción ayuda a evitar que las

ruedas de tracción patinen y pierdan

tracción. Ver Uso del control de tracción

(página 175).

E72903

Vehículo sin AdvanceTrac con

RSC derrapando respecto de la

ruta que pretende seguir.

Vehículo con AdvanceTrac con

RSC manteniendo el control en

una superficie resbalosa.

176

Control de estabilidad

USO DEL CONTROL DE

ESTABILIDAD

AdvanceTrac® con Roll Stability

Control™ (RSC®)

El sistema se activa automáticamente al

arrancar el motor. El sistema AdvanceTrac

con RSC no puede desactivarse por

completo, pero las porciones ESC y RSC

del sistema se deshabilitan cuando la

transmisión está en R (Reversa). La

porción del control de tracción del sistema

se puede desactivar de manera

independiente. Ver Uso del control de

tracción (página 175).

177

Control de estabilidad

ASISTENCIA DE

ESTACIONAMIENTO (IF EQUIPPED)

AVISOS

Para evitar lesiones, lea y comprenda

las limitaciones del sistema incluidas

en esta sección. El sistema de

detección solo ayuda en el caso de ciertos

objetos (generalmente grandes y fijos) al

desplazarse en reversa en una superficie

plana a velocidades de estacionamiento.

Los sistemas de control de tráfico, el clima

inclemente, los frenos de aire y los motores

y ventiladores externos también pueden

afectar la función del sistema de sensores;

esto puede incluir un rendimiento reducido

o una activación falsa.

Para prevenir lesiones, tenga siempre

precaución al estar en R (Reversa) y

al usar el sistema de detección.

Este sistema no está diseñado para

evitar el contacto con objetos

pequeños o en movimiento. El

sistema está diseñado para proporcionar

una advertencia que ayude al conductor a

detectar objetos grandes y fijos y evitar

dañar el vehículo. Es posible que el sistema

no detecte objetos más pequeños,

especialmente aquellos que estén cerca

del suelo.

Ciertos dispositivos adicionales,

como enganches de remolque

grandes, parrillas para bicicletas o

tablas de surfeo y todo dispositivo que

pueda bloquear la zona de detección

normal del sistema, pueden generar pitidos

falsos.

Nota: Mantenga los sensores, ubicados en

la defensa o placa protectora, libres de

nieve, hielo y grandes cantidades de tierra.

Si los sensores están cubiertos, la precisión

del sistema se puede ver afectada. No

limpie los sensores con objetos afilados.

Nota: Si el vehículo sufre daños en la

defensa o placa protectora (fascia), de

modo que se desalineen o curven, la zona

de detección se puede alterar provocando

mediciones inexactas de los obstáculos o

falsas alarmas.

Nota: Si su vehículo está equipado con

MyKey®, es posible evitar desactivar el

sistema de sensores. Ver MyKey® (página

54).

El sistema de sensores advierte al

conductor de obstáculos dentro de cierto

rango del área de defensa. El sistema se

activa automáticamente cada vez que se

el encendido está activado.

Al recibir una advertencia de detección, el

volumen del radio disminuye a un nivel

predeterminado. Después de la

advertencia, el volumen del radio vuelve

al nivel normal.

Sistema trasero de sensores

Los sensores traseros solo se activan

cuando la transmisión está en R (Reversa).

A medida que el vehículo se acerca al

obstáculo, la frecuencia de la advertencia

audible aumenta. Cuando el obstáculo

está a menos de 10 pulgadas (25

centímetros) de distancia, la advertencia

suena en forma continua. Si se detecta un

objeto que está estático o se aleja a más

de 10 pulgadas (25 centímetros) del

costado del vehículo, el tono suena solo

durante tres segundos. Una vez que el

sistema detecta un objeto que se

aproxima, la advertencia vuelve a sonar.

178

Ayudas de Estacionamiento

E130178

Área de cobertura de hasta 6

pies (2 metros) desde la defensa

trasera. Existe un área de

cobertura menor en las esquinas

externas de la defensa.

El sistema detecta ciertos objetos mientras

la transmisión está en R (Reversa):

• y se mueve hacia un objeto

estacionario a una velocidad de 3 mph

(5 km/h) o menos

• pero no en movimiento y un objeto en

movimiento se acerca a la parte trasera

del vehículo a una velocidad de 3 mph

(5 km/h) o menos

• y se mueve a una velocidad de menos

de 3 mph (5 km/h) y un objeto en

movimiento se acerca por atrás del

vehículo a una velocidad de menos de

3 mph (5 km/h).

El sistema se puede desactivar mediante

el control de la pantalla de información.

Ver Información general (página 93). Si

el sistema presenta una falla, aparece un

mensaje de advertencia en la pantalla de

información y no permite que el conductor

active el sistema con falla.

Sistema delantero de sensores

Los sensores delanteros se activan cuando

la palanca de cambios está en cualquier

posición distinta de P (Estacionamiento)

o N (Neutro) y la velocidad del vehículo

esté por abajo de 6 mph (10 km/h).

E130382

Área de cobertura de hasta 27

pulgadas (70 centímetros)

desde la parte delantera del

vehículo y aproximadamente 6

a 14 pulgadas (15 a 35

centímetros) al costado del

extremo delantero del vehículo.

Consulte la sección de sensores

en reversa para obtener detalles

sobre el área de cobertura.

El sistema emite una advertencia audible

cuando hay obstáculos cercanos a alguna

defensa, de la siguiente manera:

• Los objetos detectados por los

sensores delanteros se indican

mediante un tono agudo en las bocinas

delanteras del radio.

• Los objetos detectados por los

sensores traseros se indican mediante

un tono más grave en las bocinas

traseras del radio.

179

Ayudas de Estacionamiento

• El sistema de detección informa los

obstáculos que están más cerca del

frente o de atrás del vehículo. Por

ejemplo, si un obstáculo se encuentra

a 24 pulgadas (60 centímetros) de la

parte delantera del vehículo, y al

mismo tiempo hay un obstáculo a solo

16 pulgadas (40 centímetros) de la

parte trasera del vehículo, suena el

tono más grave.

• Suena una advertencia alternante

entre la parte delantera y trasera si hay

objetos en ambas defensas a menos

de 10 pulgadas (25 centímetros).

Para obtener información específica sobre

la porción de sensores en reversa del

sistema, consulte la sección

correspondiente.

E142434

Oprima el botón para desactivar el

sistema. Permanecerá apagado durante

todo el ciclo de encendido.

ASISTENCIA ACTIVA PARA

ESTACIONARSE (IF EQUIPPED)

ALERTA

Este sistema está diseñado para ser

una ayuda adicional al estacionarse.

Podría no funcionar en todas las

condiciones y no está diseñado para

sustituir la atención y buen juicio del

conductor. El conductor es responsable de

evitar riesgos y mantener una distancia y

velocidad seguras, aun cuando el sistema

esté en uso.

Nota: El conductor siempre es responsable

de controlar el vehículo, supervisar el

sistema e intervenir si fuera necesario.

El sistema detecta un espacio de

estacionamiento en paralelo disponible y

dirige automáticamente el vehículo al

espacio (manos libres) mientras usted

controla el acelerador, la trasmisión y los

frenos. El sistema le da instrucciones tanto

visuales como auditivas para estacionar

el vehículo.

Es posible que el sistema no funcione

correctamente si pasa algo entre la

defensa delantera y el espacio de

estacionamiento (es decir, un peatón o

ciclista) o si el borde del vehículo

estacionado de manera contigua es alto

respecto del suelo (es decir, un bus,

camión de remolque o camión de

plataforma plana).

Nota: Es posible que los sensores no

detecten objetos bajo lluvia torrencial u

otras condiciones que provocan reflejos de

interrupción.

Nota: Es posible que los sensores no

detecten objetos con superficies que

absorben ondas ultrasónicas

180

Ayudas de Estacionamiento

El sistema no debe usarse si:

• se ha colocado, en la parte delantera

o trasera del vehículo o en alguna otra

parte cerca de los sensores, algún

objeto extraño (por ejemplo, un

soporte para bicicletas o un remolque).

• se ha añadido un objeto aéreo (por

ejemplo, tablas de surfeo) al techo.

• los sensores laterales o los de la

defensa delantera están dañados (por

ejemplo, por un choque) u obstruidos

por un objeto extraño (como una

cubierta para la defensa delantera),

• se está usando una llanta de refacción

pequeña.

Uso de Asistencia de

estacionamiento activa

E142733

oprima el botón. En la pantalla táctil

aparece un mensaje y un gráfico

correspondiente para indicar que está

buscando un espacio para estacionar. Use

la señal de viraje para indicar hacia qué

lado del vehículo desea que el sistema

busque.

Nota: Si no se utiliza la direccional, el

sistema busca automáticamente del lado

del pasajero.

E130107

Cuando se encuentra un espacio

apropiado, la pantalla táctil muestra un

mensaje y suena una campanilla.

Disminuya la velocidad y deténgase

aproximadamente en la posición (A), luego

siga las instrucciones en la pantalla táctil.

Nota: Debe observar que el espacio

seleccionado permanezca libre de

obstáculos en todo momento mientras

maniobra.

181

Ayudas de Estacionamiento

Nota: Es posible que la asistencia de

estacionamiento activa no detecte

vehículos con cargas aéreas (como un bus

o camión), mobiliario de calle y otros

elementos. Debe asegurarse de que el

espacio seleccionado sea apropiado para

estacionar.

Nota: El vehículo debe conducirse lo más

paralelo posible a los otros vehículos

mientras pasa por un lugar de

estacionamiento.

Nota: El sistema siempre ofrece el último

espacio de estacionamiento detectado (es

decir, si el vehículo detecta varios espacios

mientras conduce, ofrece el último).

Nota: Si se conduce por sobre

aproximadamente 20 mph (35 km/h), la

pantalla táctil muestra un mensaje para

alertarlo a que reduzca la velocidad del

vehículo.

Conducción automática hacia el

espacio de estacionamiento

Nota: Si la velocidad del vehículo

sobrepasa las 6 mph (10 km/h), el sistema

se apaga y debe tomar control total del

vehículo.

Nota: Si una maniobra se interrumpe antes

de completarse, el sistema se apaga. La

posición del volante no indicará la posición

real de la dirección y debe tomar control

total del vehículo.

Con las manos fuera del volante (y sin

nada que obstruya su movimiento) y la

transmisión en R (Reversa), el vehículo se

conduce solo a medida que en la pantalla

táctil aparecen instrucciones para mover

con seguridad el vehículo hacia atrás y

delante en el espacio. Mientras retrocede,

en la pantalla táctil aparece un mensaje

con instrucciones para que revise sus

alrededores (por razones de seguridad) y

para que retroceda lentamente,

acompañadas de un gráfico

correspondiente.

E130108

Cuando considere que el vehículo tiene

suficiente espacio delante y atrás o

escuche un tono continuo proveniente de

la asistencia de estacionamiento, detenga

el vehículo por completo.

182

Ayudas de Estacionamiento

E130109

Una vez finalizada la conducción

automática, en la pantalla táctil aparece

un mensaje que indica que el proceso de

asistencia de estacionamiento activa ha

finalizado. El conductor es responsable de

verificar el estacionamiento y asegurarse

de realizar cualquier corrección necesaria

antes de poner la transmisión en P

(Estacionamiento).

Desactivación de la característica

de asistencia de estacionamiento

El sistema puede desactivarse

manualmente al:

• oprimir el botón de asistencia de

estacionamiento activa

• tomar el volante

• conducir a más de 20 mph (35 km/h)

durante 30 segundos durante una

búsqueda de estacionamiento activa

• conducir a más de 6 mph (10 km/h)

durante la conducción automático

• desactivar el sistema de control de

tracción.

Ciertas condiciones del vehículo también

pueden desactivar el sistema, tales como:

• El control de tracción se ha activado

en una superficie resbalosa o suelta.

• Se produjo una activación o falla del

sistema de frenos antibloqueo.

• Se abre cualquier puerta (excepto la

del conductor).

• Algo toca el volante.

Si se produce un problema con el sistema,

aparecerá un mensaje de advertencia,

seguido de una campanilla. Durante la

operación normal, pueden aparecer

mensajes ocasionales del sistema. Si las

fallas del sistema son recurrentes o

frecuentes, lleve el vehículo a un

distribuidor autorizado para que le den

servicio.

Solución de problemas del sistema

El sistema no busca espacio

Es posible que el sistema de control de tracción esté desactivado

Alguna de las puertas (excepto la puerta del conductor) puede no estar completamente

cerrada

183

Ayudas de Estacionamiento

El sistema no ofrece un espacio determinado

Algo puede estar tocando los sensores laterales o los de la defensa delantera

No hay suficiente espacio en ambos lados del vehículo para estacionar

No hay suficiente espacio para la maniobra de estacionamiento en el lado opuesto del

espacio de estacionamiento

El vehículo está a más de 5 pies (1.5 m) del espacio de estacionamiento

El vehículo está a menos de 16 pulgadas (40 cm) de vehículos estacionados colindantes

La transmisión está en R (Reversa); el vehículo debe moverse hacia delante para detectar

un espacio de estacionamiento

El sistema no coloca el vehículo donde yo quiero en el espacio

El vehículo se mueve en la dirección contraria a la de la trasmisión (es decir, se mueva

hacia delante cuando está seleccionada la posición R [Reversa])

La transmisión está en R (Reversa); el vehículo debe moverse hacia delante para detectar

un espacio de estacionamiento

Un borde de la banqueta a lo largo del espacio de estacionamiento evita que el sistema

alinee el vehículo correctamente

Los vehículos u objetos que bordean el espacio podrían no estar colocados correcta-

mente

El vehículo se pasó demasiado del espacio de estacionamiento. El sistema funciona al

máximo cuando conduce hacia delante una distancia equivalente al espacio de esta-

cionamiento.

Es posible que las llantas no estén instaladas ni mantenidas correctamente (es decir,

sin la presión de aire suficiente, no tienen el tamaño adecuado o son de diferentes

tamaños)

Una reparación o alteración ha variado las capacidades de detección

Un vehículo estacionado tiene un aditamento alto (como un rociador de sal, un quita-

nieves, una plataforma de camión de mudanzas, etc.)

La longitud o posición del espacio de estacionamiento de los objetos estacionados

cambió después de que el vehículo pasó

La temperatura alrededor de su vehículo cambia rápidamente (como cuando acaba

de salir de un garaje con calefacción y al aire frío o cuando sale de un lavado de autos)

184

Ayudas de Estacionamiento

CÁMARA DE VISTA TRASERA

(IF EQUIPPED)

AVISOS

El sistema de cámara de vista trasera

es un dispositivo complementario de

ayuda que el conductor debe usar en

conjunto con los espejos interiores y

exteriores para obtener una máxima

cobertura.

Es posible que no se vean en la

pantalla los objetos que están cerca

de los extremos de la defensa o bajo

la defensa, debido a la cobertura limitada

del sistema de cámara retrovisora.

Retroceda lo más lento que pueda,

ya que las velocidades altas pueden

limitar su tiempo de reacción para

detener el vehículo.

Sea cauteloso cuando use la cámara

retrovisora y la compuerta levadiza

esté entreabierta. Si la compuerta

levadiza está entreabierta, la cámara

estará fuera de posición y la imagen de

video pudiera ser inexacta. Todas las guías

(si están activas) desaparecerán si la

compuerta levadiza está entreabierta.

Extreme las precauciones al activar

o desactivar las funciones de la

cámara cuando esté en R (Reversa).

Asegúrese de que el vehículo esté inmóvil.

El sistema de cámara retrovisora

proporciona un imagen de video del área

ubicada detrás del vehículo.

Durante la operación, aparecen líneas en

la pantalla que representan la ruta del

vehículo y la proximidad respecto de

objetos detrás de este.

E142435

La cámara está ubicada en la compuerta

levadiza.

Uso del sistema de cámara

retrovisora

El sistema de cámara retrovisora muestra

lo que hay debajo del vehículo cuando

coloca la transmisión en R (Reversa).

El sistema usa tres tipos de guías para

ayudarlo a ver lo que hay detrás del

vehículo:

• Guías activas: Muestran la ruta

pretendida del vehículo en reversa.

• Guías fijas: Muestran la ruta real en que

se mueve el vehículo en reversa en

línea recta. Esto puede ser útil al meter

el vehículo en reversa en un lugar de

estacionamiento o alinearlo con otro

objeto situado detrás de usted.

• Línea central: Ayuda a alinear el centro

del vehículo con un objeto (como un

remolque).

Nota: Si la transmisión está en R (Reversa)

y el compartimiento de equipaje está

abierto, no se muestran características de

la cámara retrovisora.

Nota: Si la imagen aparece mientras la

transmisión no está en R (Reversa), haga

que el distribuidor autorizado revise el

sistema.

185

Ayudas de Estacionamiento

Nota: Cuando arrastre algo, la cámara solo

ve lo que esté remolcando. En esas

condiciones, la cobertura no es tan

adecuada como en la operación normal y

quizá no pueda ver algunos objetos. En

algunos vehículos, las guías pueden

desaparecer una vez que el se engancha el

conector del arrastre del remolque.

Nota: Es posible que la cámara no funcione

correctamente bajo las siguientes

condiciones:

• Uso en la noche o en áreas oscuras si

una o ambas luces de reversa no

funcionan.

• La vista de la cámara está obstruida

por lodo, agua o desechos. Limpie la

lente con un paño suave sin pelusas y

un limpiador no abrasivo.

• La parte trasera del vehículo es

golpeada o dañada, lo cual provoca

que la cámara se desalinee.

Para obtener acceso a alguna de las

configuraciones del sistema de la cámara

retrovisora, realice las siguientes

selecciones en la pantalla táctil cuando

las transmisiones no están en R (Reversa):

• Menú > Vehículo > Cámara retrovisora

Después de cambiar una configuración del

sistema, la pantalla táctil muestra una

vista previa de las características

seleccionadas.

Guías y línea central

Nota: Las guías activas y las guías fijas solo

están disponibles cuando la transmisión

está en R (Reversa).

Nota: La línea central solo está disponible

cuando las guías activas o fijas están

activas.

A B C D

E142436

Guías activasA

Línea centralB

Guía fija: Zona verdeC

Guía fija: Zona amarillaD

Guía fija: Zona rojaE

Defensa traseraF

Las guías solo se muestran con guías fijas.

Para utilizar las guías activas, gire el

volante para dirigir las guías activas hacia

una ruta intencionada. Si se cambia la

posición del volante de la dirección cuando

está en reversa, el vehículo se puede

desviar de la ruta intencionada original.

Las guías fijas y activas se desvanecen y

aparecen, dependiendo de la posición del

volante de la dirección. Las guías activas

no se muestran cuando el volante está en

posición recta.

186

Ayudas de Estacionamiento

Tenga siempre precaución al retroceder.

Los objetos en la zona roja están más

cerca de su vehículo y los objetos en la

zona verde están lejos. Los objetos se

acercan a su vehículo a medida que se

mueven de la zona verde a las zonas

amarilla o roja. Use los espejos laterales y

el espejo retrovisor para obtener una mejor

cobertura de los lados y la parte trasera

del vehículo.

Las configuraciones seleccionables para

esta característica son ACTIVE + FIXED,

FIXED and OFF (Activa + Fija, Fija y

Desactivada).

Alarma visual de asistencia para

estacionamiento

Nota: Solo está disponible cuando las

transmisiones están en R (Reversa).

Nota: El sistema sensor de reversa no es

eficaz a velocidades de más de 3 mph (5

km/h) y puede no detectar ciertos objetos

angulares o en movimiento.

El sistema usa sombras rojas, amarillas y

verdes que aparecen sobre la imagen de

video cuando el sistema sensor de reversa

detecta un objeto. La alerta destaca el

objeto más cercano seleccionado. La

alerta del sensor de reversa puede ser

desactivada, pero si la alerta visual de

asistencia para estacionamiento está

activa, se siguen mostrando las áreas

resaltadas.

Las configuraciones seleccionables para

esta característica son ON y OFF (Activada

y Desactivada).

Teleobjetivo (zoom) manual

ALERTA

Cuando el sistema de teleobjetivo

manual está activo, la pantalla no

muestra toda el área ubicada detrás

del vehículo. Procure estar consciente de

su entorno cuando use la función de

teleobjetivo manual.

Nota: El teleobjetivo manual solo está

disponible cuando las transmisiones están

en R (Reversa).

Nota: Cuando el teleobjetivo manual está

activo, solo aparece la línea central.

Eso le permite obtener una vista más

cercana de un objeto ubicado detrás del

vehículo. La imagen de acercamiento

mantiene la defensa a la vista para

proporcionarle una referencia. El

teleobjetivo solo está activo cuando las

transmisiones están en R (Reversa).

Cuando la transmisión se cambia de R

(Reversa), la característica se apaga

automáticamente y debe reiniciarse

cuando se usa nuevamente.

Las configuraciones seleccionables para

esta característica son OFF, Level 1, Level

2 o Level 3(Desactivada, Nivel 1, Nivel 2 o

Nivel 3). Oprima las flechas hacia arriba y

hacia abajo para cambiar la vista. El nivel

de selección aparece entre los botones

(por ejemplo, Nivel 1). El valor

predeterminado del teleobjetivo manual

es OFF (Desactivado).

Demora de la cámara retrovisora

Cuando se saca la transmisión de R

(Reversa) a cualquier otra velocidad,

excepto P (Estacionamiento), la imagen

de la cámara permanece en pantalla hasta

que la velocidad del vehículo alcance 5

mph (8 km/h). Esto ocurre cuando la

función de demora de la cámara

retrovisora está activa, o hasta que se

seleccione un botón del radio.

Las configuraciones seleccionables para

esta característica son ON y OFF (Activada

y Desactivada). El valor de demora

predeterminado de la cámara retrovisora

es OFF (Desactivado).

187

Ayudas de Estacionamiento

FUNCIONAMIENTO

El control de crucera mantiene una

velocidad programada sin mantener el pie

en el pedal del acelerador.

USO DEL CONTROL DE

CRUCERO

ALERTA

No use el control de crucero cuando

haya mucho tráfico o en caminos con

curvas, resbalosos o no

pavimentados.

Nota: La velocidad del vehículo puede

variar momentáneamente al subir o bajar

una colina empinada. Aplique el freno si la

velocidad del vehículo supera la velocidad

establecida en una pendiente.

Nota: El control de crucero se desactivará

si la velocidad del vehículo desciende a

menos de 10 mph (16 km/h) por debajo de

la velocidad establecida al manejar cuesta

arriba.

Encendido del control de crucero

E142437

Oprima y suelte ON (Encender).

Configuración de una velocidad

Oprima y suelte el botón SET+

(Configurar+).

E71340

El indicador se encenderá en el

grupo de instrumentos.

Modificación de la velocidad

programada

E142438

AcelerarA

DesacelerarB

• Mantenga oprimido SET+ or SET-.

Suelte el control cuando alcance la

velocidad deseada.

• Oprima y suelte SET+ or SET-. La

velocidad programada cambiará en

incrementos de aproximadamente 2

km/h (1 mph).

• Oprima el acelerador o el freno hasta

que alcance la velocidad deseada.

Oprima y suelte el botón SET+.

Cancelación de una velocidad

establecida

Jale el control CAN hacia usted y suelte, o

pise el pedal de freno. La velocidad

establecida no se borrará.

Reanudación de una velocidad

establecida

Jale el control RES hacia usted y libérelo.

188

Control de Crucero

Apagado del control de crucero

Nota: La velocidad establecida se borra

cuando apaga el control de crucero.

Oprima y suelte OFF (Apagado) o apague

el encendido.

189

Control de Crucero

MONITOR DE PUNTO CIEGO

Sistema de información de puntos

ciegos (BLIS) con alerta de tráfico

cruzado (If Equipped)

ALERTA

Para evitar lesiones, NUNCA utilice

el sistema BLIS como reemplazo del

uso de los espejos interiores y

exteriores, y asegúrese de voltear hacia

atrás antes de cambiar de carril. BLIS no

es un reemplazo para un manejo

cuidadoso, solo es una ayuda.

E124788

BLIS lo ayuda a detectar vehículos que

puedan haber entrado a la zona de punto

ciego (A). El área de detección está en

ambos lados del vehículo, dentro del área

que abarca desde los espejos exteriores

hasta unos 10 pies (3 metros) más allá de

la defensa. El sistema lo alerta si ciertos

vehículos ingresan a la zona de punto ciego

mientras conduce.

La alerta de tráfico cruzado le advierte de

vehículos que se aproximan desde los

costados cuando la transmisión está en R

(Reversa).

Nota: BLIS no está diseñado para evitar el

contacto con otros vehículos u objetos; ni

para detectar vehículos estacionados,

personas, animales o infraestructura (rejas,

protecciones, árboles, etc.). Está diseñado

para alertar al conductor respecto de

vehículos en las zonas ciegas.

Nota: Cuando un vehículo pasa

rápidamente por la zona ciega,

normalmente menos de dos segundos, el

sistema no se activa.

Uso de los sistemas

BLIS se activa cuando se arranca el motor

y el vehículo se conduce hacia delante por

sobre 3 mph (5 km/h); se mantiene

encendida mientras la transmisión esté en

D (Directa) y N (Neutro). Si se sale de D

(Directa) o N (Neutro), el sistema ingresa

al modo de alerta de tráfico cruzado.

Cuando vuelve a cambiar a D (Directa),

BLIS se vuelve a encender cuando el

vehículo se conduce por sobre las 3 mph

(5 km/h).

Nota: BLIS no funciona en R (Reversa) ni

P (Estacionamiento) ni proporciona

advertencia adicional alguna cuando se

activa una señal de viraje.

La alerta de tráfico cruzado detecta

vehículos que se aproximan desde hasta 45

pies (14 metros) de distancia, aunque la

cobertura disminuye cuando los sensores

están bloqueados. Retroceder lentamente

ayudar a aumentar el área de cobertura y la

eficacia.

ALERTA

Para evitar lesiones, NUNCA utilice

el sistema de alerta de tráfico

cruzado como reemplazo del uso de

los espejos interiores y exteriores, y

asegúrese de voltear hacia atrás antes de

moverse en reversa para salir de un

espacio de estacionamiento. La alerta de

tráfico cruzado no es un reemplazo de un

manejo cuidadoso, solo es una ayuda.

190

Ayudas de Conducción

E142440

En este primer ejemplo, el sensor izquierdo

solo está parcialmente obstruido; la

cobertura de la zona casi se maximiza.

E142441

La cobertura de la zona también disminuye

al estacionar en ángulos pronunciados.

Aquí, el sensor izquierdo está obstruido en

su mayoría; la cobertura de la zona en ese

lado está gravemente limitada.

191

Ayudas de Conducción

Mensajes y luces del sistema

E142442

Los sistemas de alerta de tráfico cruzado

y BLIS encienden un indicador de alerta

amarilla en el espejo externo del lado del

vehículo por donde viene el vehículo que

se aproxima.

Nota: El indicador de alerta se atenúa

cuando se detecta oscuridad de la noche.

La alerta de tráfico cruzado también emite

una serie de tonos y aparece un mensaje

en la pantalla de información que indica

que un vehículo viene de derecha o

izquierda. La alerta de tráfico cruzado

funciona con el sistema de sensores de

reversa, el cual emite su propia serie de

tonos. Ver Asistencia de

estacionamiento (página 178).

Sensores del sistema

ALERTA

Apenas antes de que el sistema

reconozca una condición de bloqueo

y alerte al conductor, aumentará el

número de objetos no detectados. Para

evitar lesiones, NUNCA utilice el sistema

BLIS como reemplazo del uso de los

espejos laterales y retrovisores, y

asegúrese de voltear hacia atrás antes de

cambiar de carril. BLIS no es un reemplazo

para un manejo cuidadoso, solo es una

ayuda.

Nota: Es posible obtener una advertencia

de bloqueo sin tener ningún bloqueo; esto

es poco común y se conoce como

advertencia de bloqueo falso. Una condición

de bloqueo falso se corrige

automáticamente o se borra después de un

ciclo de la llave.

E142443

El sistema usa sensores de radar ubicados

detrás de la defensa fascia a cada lado del

vehículo. No permita que estas áreas

resulten obstruidas por lodo, nieve o

adhesivos para la defensa, ya que esto

puedo provocar una disminución en el

desempeño del sistema.

Si el sistema detecta una disminución del

desempeño, aparecerá una advertencia

de mensaje de un sensor bloqueado o una

advertencia de mensaje de baja visibilidad

en la pantalla de información y el indicador

de alerta se enciende en los espejos

apropiados. La advertencia de la pantalla

de información se puede borrar, pero el

indicador de alerta permanece iluminado.

Cuando el bloqueo se elimina, el sistema

se puede restablecer de dos maneras:

• cuando se detectan al menos dos

objetos al conducir o

• o conecte y desconecte el encendido,

y luego vuelva a conectarlo.

Si el bloqueo todavía está presente

después del ciclo de la llave, el sistema

detecta que está bloqueado después de

manejar en medio del tráfico.

192

Ayudas de Conducción

Motivos para la aparición de mensajes

Limpie el área de la placa

protectora de la defensa

frente al radar o elimine la

obstrucción.

La super-

ficie del

radar está

sucia u

obstruida

Conduzca normalmente en

la zona de tráfico por unos

minutos para permitir que

el radar detecte los

vehículos que pasan para

que pueda borrar el estado

bloqueado.

La super-

ficie del

radar no

está sucia

u obstruida

No se necesita tomar

ninguna acción. El sistema

se restablece automática-

mente al estado desblo-

queado una vez que la lluvia

o la nevada extrema dismi-

nuyan o se detengan. No

use BLIS ni la alerta de

tráfico cruzado en estados

condiciones.

La lluvia

torrencial o

la caída de

nieve inter-

fieren con

las señales

del radar

Limitaciones del sistema

Los sistemas de alerta de tráfico cruzado

y BLIS de todas maneras tienen sus

limitaciones; situaciones tales como

condiciones meteorológicas graves o

desechos acumulados en el área del

sensor pueden limitar la detección del

vehículo.

Lo siguiente son otras situaciones que

pueden limitar el sistema BLIS:

• Ciertas maniobras de vehículos que

ingresan y salen de la zona ciega.

• Los vehículos que pasan por la zona

ciega a velocidades muy altas.

• Cuando varios vehículos en caravana

pasan por la zona ciega.

Las siguientes son otras situaciones que

pueden limitar el sistema de alerta de

tráfico cruzado:

• Vehículos u objetos estacionados de

manera adyacente que obstruyen los

sensores.

• Vehículos que se aproximan y que

pasan a velocidades mayores de 15

mph (24 km/h).

• Conducir en reversa a más de 3 mph

(5 km/h).

• Retroceder de un sitio de

estacionamiento esquinado.

Alertas falsas

Nota: Si el vehículo cuenta con una barra

de arrastre equipada de fábrica y está

arrastrando un remolque, los sensores

detectarán el remolque y desactivarán el

sistema BLIS para evitar alertas falsas. Si

tiene barras de arrastre que no fueron

equipadas de fábrica, es recomendable

desactivar el sistema BLIS manualmente.

Es posible que haya ciertas instancias en

que los sistemas de alerta de tráfico

cruzado o BLIS encienden el indicador de

alerta sin vehículo en la zona de cobertura;

esto se conoce como alerta falsa. Cierta

cantidad de alertas falsas es normal; son

temporales y se corrigen

automáticamente.

Errores del sistema

Si cualquiera de los sistemas detecta un

problema con el sensor izquierdo o

derecho, el indicador luminoso de BLIS se

enciende y permanece encendido, y

aparece lo siguiente en la pantalla de

información:

• BLIS: X sensor izquierdo Requiere

servicio o

• Falla de tráfico cruzado Requiere

servicio

193

Ayudas de Conducción

Cuando los problemas que puedan afectar

la iluminación del indicador derecho o

izquierdo, solo aparecen las fallas de la

pantalla de información.

Encendido y apagado de los sistemas

Uno o ambos sistemas se pueden apagar

temporalmente al usar el control de la

pantalla de información. Ver Información

general (página 93). Cuando BLIS se

apaga, no recibe alertas y se enciende un

indicador luminoso en la pantalla de

información. El sistema se vuelve a

encender cada vez que se el encendido se

activa.

Uno o ambos sistemas también se pueden

apagar de manera permanente en su

distribuidor autorizado. Una vez apagado,

para volver a encenderlo debe llevarlo a

que lo hagan en el distribuidor.

MODO DE ECONOMICO

Este sistema lo ayuda a conducir de

manera más eficaz al monitorear

constantemente los cambios en las

características del equipo, la anticipación

de las condiciones de tráfico y las

velocidades al conducir.

El valor de estas características está

representado por los pétalos que aparecen

en la pantalla, donde cinco pétalos es el

estado más eficiente. Mientras más

eficientemente conduzca, mejor será su

clasificación y mejor será su ahorro de

combustible en general.

Nota: Estos valores de eficiencia no arrojan

una cifra definida de consumo de

combustible. Podría variar, ya que no solo

se relaciona con estos hábitos de

conducción, sino que además se ve influido

por muchos otros factores como viajes

cortos y arranques en frío.

Nota: Los viajes cortos frecuentes, en que

el motor no se calienta por completo,

también aumentarán el consumo de

combustible

Puede acceder al sistema mediante el

control de la pantalla de información. Ver

Información general (página 93).

Tipo 1

A B

E142444

AnticipaciónA

Velocidad eficienteB

Anticipación

Ajuste la velocidad del vehículo y la

distancia respecto a otros vehículos para

evitar la necesidad de frenar o acelerar a

fin de mejorar el rendimiento del

combustible.

Velocidad eficiente

Reduzca su velocidad de crucero en

carreteras despejadas para mejoras el

rendimiento del combustible. Velocidades

más altas consumen más combustible.

Tipo 2 y 3

En la pantalla se muestra información

pertinente.

194

Ayudas de Conducción

Restablecimiento de modo

ecológico

Restablezca el consumo de combustible

promedio mediante el control de la

pantalla de información.

Nota: Es posible que haya una pequeña

demorar en calcular nuevos valores

DIRECCIÓN

Dirección hidráulica eléctrica

AVISOS

El sistema de dirección hidráulica

eléctrica cuenta con verificaciones

que constantemente monitorean el

sistema para garantizar el funcionamiento

adecuado. Cuando se detecta un error del

sistema, aparece un mensaje sobre la

dirección en la pantalla de información.

El sistema de dirección hidráulica

eléctrica cuenta con verificaciones

de diagnóstico que constantemente

monitorean el sistema para garantizar el

funcionamiento adecuado del sistema

electrónico. Cuando se detecta un error

electrónico, aparece un mensaje en la

pantalla de información. Si esto sucede,

detenga el vehículo en un lugar seguro y

apague el motor. Después de al menos 10

segundos, restablezca el sistema volviendo

a arrancar el motor y verifique si aparecer

un mensaje sobre la dirección en la

pantalla de información. Si vuelve a

aparecer el mensaje de la dirección o si

aparece mientras está conduciendo, lleve

su vehículo con su distribuidor para que lo

revise.

Acuda a servicio inmediatamente si

se detecta un error en el sistema. Es

posible que no sienta ninguna

diferencia en el desempeño de la dirección,

pero puede existir una situación grave. No

llevarlo a revisión puede resultar en

pérdida de control de la dirección.

Su vehículo cuenta con un sistema de

dirección eléctrica servoasistida. No existe

un depósito de líquido que revisar ni

rellenar.

Si el vehículo pierde la potencia eléctrica

mientras maneja (o si el encendido se gira

a OFF [Apagado]), puede maniobrar la

dirección del vehículo manualmente, pero

con mayor esfuerzo. Las maniobras

continuas y extremas pueden aumentar el

esfuerzo que se requiere para maniobrar.

Esto se produce para evitar el

sobrecalentamiento y el daño permanente

interna en el sistema de dirección. Si esto

ocurriera, no se pierde la capacidad de

maniobrar el vehículo en forma manual ni

se generan daños permanentes. Las típicas

maniobras en la dirección y manejo

permitirán que el sistema se enfríe y que

la dirección servoasistida vuelva a la

normalidad.

Consejos de dirección

Si la dirección se desvía o se pone dura,

revise si hay:

• una llanta mal inflada

• desgaste disparejo de las llantas

• componentes de la suspensión sueltos

o desgastados

• componentes de la dirección sueltos

o desgastados

• alineación del vehículo no adecuada

Una comba alta en el camino o el viento

de costado alto también pueden hacer que

la dirección parezca desviarse o tirar hacia

un lado.

195

Ayudas de Conducción

ALMACENAMIENTO DE LA

PARTE INFERIOR TRASERA

DEL PISO

Piso del compartimiento del

copiloto

E78097

El compartimiento de almacenamiento

debajo del piso se encuentra detrás del

asiento del pasajero delantero.

Sistema de manejo de carga (If

Equipped)

E142445

El sistema se ubica en el piso del área de

carga. Levante la manija para abrir.

Piso para carga ajustable (If Equipped)

E142446

Los vehículos con llanta de refacción

tamaño estándar puede ajustar el piso de

carga en dos posiciones. El frente del piso

de carga se puede colocar encima (para

una posición alta) o debajo (para una

posición baja) de los bordes detrás de los

asientos traseros. La parte trasera del piso

de carga siempre se asienta en los dos

pequeños anaqueles ubicados en la

moldura de la compuerta levadiza.

CUBIERTAS DEL

COMPARTIMIENTO DE

EQUIPAJES

AVISOS

Asegúrese de que los montantes

estén correctamente enganchados

en los dispositivos de instalación. En

un frenado repentino o accidente, la

cubierta puede causar lesiones personales

si no está instalada adecuadamente.

No coloque ningún objeto en la

cubierta del área de carga. Pueden

obstruir su visión o golpear a los

ocupantes del vehículo en caso de un

frenado repentino o choque.

Use la cubierta para cubrir los elementos

en el área de carga de su vehículo.

196

Transporte de carga

E142447

Inserte los extremos de la cubierta de

carga en los dispositivos de instalación que

se ubican detrás del asiento trasero en los

paneles de adorno traseros para instalar

la cubierta.

Para hacer funcionar la cubierta:

1. Jale el borde trasero de la cubierta de

carga hacia atrás.

2. Fije ambos extremos de la varilla de

soporte a las ranuras de retención que

se ubican en los paneles de adorno de

cuarto traseros.

PARRILLAS PARA EQUIPAJE

Y PORTADORES DE CARGA

ALERTA

Al cargar las barras transversales de

la parrilla portaequipaje, se

recomienda distribuir la carga

uniformemente, así como mantener un

centro de gravedad bajo. Los vehículos

cargados, cuyo centro de gravedad es más

alto, se comportan distinto de los vehículos

sin carga. Al manejar un vehículo

demasiado cargado se deben tomar

mayores precauciones, tales como

manejar a velocidades más bajas y

mantener una mayor distancia de frenado.

La carga máxima recomendada,

distribuida en forma uniforme en las barras

transversales es:

• 100 libras (45 kilogramos) para

vehículos sin toldo corredizo

• 45 libras (20 kilogramos) para

vehículos con toldo corredizo.

Nota: Las cargas nunca deben colocarse

directamente sobre el panel del techo. El

panel del techo no está diseñado para

transportar una carga directamente.

Para el buen funcionamiento del sistema

de parrilla portaequipaje, las cargas deben

colocarse directamente sobre las barras

transversales fijas a los rieles laterales de

la parrilla portaequipaje. Es posible que su

vehículo venga equipado con barras

transversales de fábrica. También se

recomienda que utilice las barras

transversales Ford genuinas, pues están

diseñadas específicamente para su

vehículo, si requiere colocarlas en el

sistema de parrilla portaequipaje.

Asegúrese de que la carga esté firmemente

sujeta. Verifique la tensión de la carga

antes de conducir en cada parada para

cargar combustible.

Ajuste de la barra transversal (If

Equipped)

Nota: El ruido del viento se puede minimizar

ya sea retirando o reposicionando las barras

transversales cuando no están en uso.

Coloque la barra transversal frontal en la

posición hacia atrás para minimizar el ruido

del viento. La barra transversal frontal

puede ajustarse o extraerse mediante los

pasos a continuación. Los sujetadores de la

barra transversal trasera pueden extraerse

al desatornillar el conjunto.

197

Transporte de carga

E142448

1. Extraiga los controles de

accionamiento con el pulgar de la barra

transversal en ambos lados de la barra

transversal frontal al girarlos hacia la

izquierda.

Nota: Se puede utilizar un destornillador

pequeño o herramienta similar para aflojar

el control de accionamiento con el pulgar.

Aplique el cabezal del sujetador en la parte

superior del control o inserte el eje entre las

dos palancas del control y gírelo para

soltarlo.

2. Deslice los extremos fuera de los

pernos de los rieles laterales para

extraer la barra transversal.

3. Mueva la barra transversal a la nueva

posición del lado del riel y deslice la

barra sobre el perno en esa posición.

4. Reemplace y apriete los controles de

accionamiento con el pulgar en ambos

lados de la barra transversal girándolos

a la derecha hasta que estén

apretados. Se puede utilizar un

destornillador pequeño o herramienta

similar para apretar si es necesario.

Asegúrese de revisar que los controles de

accionamiento con el pulgar estén

apretados cada vez que agregue o retire

carga de la parrilla portaequipaje y en

forma periódica durante su viaje.

Asegúrese de que la carga esté firme antes

de viajar.

LÍMITE DE CARGA

Carga del vehículo: con y sin

remolque

Esta sección lo guiará en la forma

adecuada de cargar el vehículo, el

remolque o ambos, para mantener el peso

del vehículo cargado dentro de su

capacidad de diseño, con o sin remolque.

La carga adecuada del vehículo le

permitirá aprovechar al máximo el diseño

de su vehículo. Antes de cargar su vehículo,

familiarícese con los siguientes términos

para determinar los pesos máximos del

vehículo, con o sin remolque, que se

encuentran en la Etiqueta de llantas y en

la Etiqueta de certificación del

cumplimiento de las normas de seguridad

del vehículo:

Peso base listo para rodar: es el peso

del vehículo con tanque lleno de

combustible y todo su equipamiento

estándar. No incluye pasajeros, carga, ni

equipos opcionales.

Peso del vehículo listo para rodar: es el

peso del vehículo nuevo, al momento de

recogerlo con su distribuidor autorizado,

más todo su equipamiento optativo y/o

de posventa.

198

Transporte de carga

E142513

Carga útil: es el peso combinado de carga

y pasajeros que transporta el vehículo. La

carga útil máxima del vehículo se puede

encontrar en la Etiqueta de llantas o en el

Pilar B o en el borde de la puerta del

conductor (es posible que los vehículos

exportados fuera de Estados Unidos y

Canadá no tengan una Etiqueta de

llantas). Busque “THE COMBINED

WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO

SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR

XXX lb.” (EL PESO COMBINADO DE

OCUPANTES Y CARGA NUNCA DEBE

SUPERAR LOS XXX kg O XXX lb) para

conocer la carga útil máxima. La carga útil

señalada en la Etiqueta de llantas es la

carga útil máxima para el vehículo según

lo determinado en la planta de

ensamblaje. Si se ha instalado en el

vehículo algún equipo de posventa o

instalado por el distribuidor autorizado, el

peso de dicho equipo se debe restar de la

carga útil señalada en la Etiqueta de

llantas para determinar la nueva carga útil.

ALERTA

La capacidad de carga real de su

vehículo puede estar limitada por la

capacidad de volumen (cuánto

espacio disponible hay) o por la capacidad

de carga útil (cuánto peso puede

transportar el vehículo). Una vez que ha

alcanzado la carga útil máxima de su

vehículo, no agregue más carga, incluso si

hay espacio disponible. La sobrecarga o

carga inadecuada del vehículo puede

contribuir a que usted pierda el control del

vehículo y ocurra una volcadura.

199

Transporte de carga

Solo ejemplo:

E142516

E142517

E142518

200

Transporte de carga

Peso de la carga–: es todo el peso

agregado al Peso base listo para rodar,

incluyendo la carga y el equipamiento

opcional. Al arrastrar remolques, la carga

de la lanza del remolque o el peso del

pivote de arrastre también es parte de la

carga.

GAW (Peso bruto del eje): es el peso

total que se apoya en cada eje (delantero

y trasero) – incluido el peso del vehículo

listo para rodar y toda la carga útil.

GAWR (Peso bruto vehicular del eje):

es el peso máximo admisible que puede

transportar un solo eje (delantero o

trasero). Estas cifras se indican en la

Etiqueta de certificación del

cumplimiento de las normas de

seguridad. La etiqueta debe estar fijada

en el pilar de bisagra de la puerta, poste

de seguro de la puerta o el borde de la

puerta junto al poste de poste de

seguro de la puerta, junto a la posición

del asiento del conductor). La carga

total en cada eje nunca debe exceder

su GAWR.

Nota: Para obtener información sobre

remolques, consulte la Guía de arrastre de

remolques y vehículos recreativos que le

proporciona su distribuidor autorizado.

E142521

GVW (Peso bruto vehicular): es el peso

del vehículo listo para rodar + la carga +

los pasajeros.

GVWR (Peso bruto vehicular máximo):

es el peso máximo admisible del vehículo

totalmente cargado (incluidas todas las

opciones, el equipamiento, los pasajeros

y la carga). El GVWR se indica en la

Etiqueta de certificación del

cumplimiento de las normas de

seguridad. La etiqueta debe estar fijada

en el pilar de bisagra de la puerta, el

poste de seguro de la puerta o el borde

de la puerta junto al poste de poste de

seguro de la puerta, junto a la posición

del asiento del conductor.

201

Transporte de carga

Solo ejemplo:

E142523

E142524

202

Transporte de carga

ALERTA

Si excede los límites de peso

vehicular del eje que indica la

Etiqueta de certificación de

cumplimiento de las normas de seguridad,

puede ocasionar deficiencias en el

rendimiento y la maniobrabilidad del

vehículo; daños en el motor, la transmisión

y/o la estructura del vehículo; graves daños

al vehículo; pérdida de control y lesiones

personales.

E142526

GCW (Peso bruto combinado): es el

peso del vehículo cargado (GVW) más el

peso del remolque totalmente cargado.

GCWR (Peso bruto vehicular

combinado máximo): es el peso máximo

admisible del vehículo y del remolque

cargado, incluyendo toda la carga y los

pasajeros, que el vehículo puede

transportar sin riesgo de sufrir daños.

(Importante: El sistema de frenos de los

vehículos de arrastre está calculado en

función del GVWR, no del GCWR). Deben

usarse frenos funcionales independientes

para el control seguro de los vehículos y

remolques arrastrados si el GCW del

vehículo de arrastre más el remolque

sobrepasa el GVWR del vehículo de

arrastre. El GCW nunca debe exceder el

GCWR.

Peso máximo del remolque cargado:

Es el mayor peso de un remolque

completamente cargado que el vehículo

puede arrastrar. Supone un vehículo solo

con opciones indispensables, sin carga (ni

interna ni externa), una carga de la lanza

de 10 a 15% (remolque convencional) o un

peso del pivote de arrastre de 15 a 25%

(remolque con quinta rueda) y solo el

conductor (68 kg [150 lb]). Consulte a su

distribuidor autorizado (o la Guía de

arrastre de remolques y vehículos

recreativos proporcionada por su

distribuidor autorizado) para obtener

información más detallada.

Carga de la lanza o peso del pivote de

arrastre con quinta rueda: se refiere al

peso que un remolque aplica sobre el

enganche de arrastre.

203

Transporte de carga

Ejemplos: para un remolque convencional

de 2268 kg (5000 lb), multiplique 5000

por 0.10 y 0.15 para obtener el límite de

carga de la lanza apropiado, es decir, de

227 a 340 kg (500 a 750 lb). Para un

remolque con quinta rueda de 5,216 kg

(11,500 lb), multiplique por 0.15 y 0.25 para

obtener el rango de carga adecuado del

pivote de arrastre, que es de 782 a 1,304 kg

(1,725 a 2,875 lb).

AVISOS

No exceda el GVWR o el GAWR

específicos en la Etiqueta de

certificación del cumplimiento de las

normas de seguridad.

No utilice llantas de refacción con

una capacidad de transporte de

carga inferior a las originales, porque

pueden disminuir las limitaciones del

GVWR y del GAWR del vehículo. Las

llantas de refacción con un límite mayor

que las originales no aumentan las

limitaciones del GVWR ni del GAWR.

Si excede alguna limitación de peso

vehicular máximo puede provocar

graves daños al vehículo o lesiones

personales.

Pasos para determinar el límite

correcto de carga:

1. Ubique el mensaje "The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs". (“El

peso combinado de ocupantes y carga

nunca debe exceder los XXX kilos o

XXX libras”) en la etiqueta del vehículo.

2. Determine el peso combinado del

conductor y los pasajeros que viajarán

en el vehículo.

3. Reste el peso combinado del

conductor y los pasajeros de XXX kg o

XXX lb.

4. La cifra resultante es igual a la

cantidad disponible de carga y

capacidad de carga de equipaje. Por

ejemplo, si la cantidad “XXX” es igual

a 1,400 lb y habrán cinco pasajeros de

150 lb en el vehículo, la cantidad de

carga y capacidad de carga de equipaje

disponible es 650 lb (1400–750 (5 x

150) = 650 lb). En unidades métricas

(635 – 340 (5x68) = 295 kg).

5. Determine el peso combinado del

equipaje y la carga que llevará el

vehículo. Ese peso no puede exceder,

sin correr peligro, la capacidad de carga

de equipaje y la carga disponible

calculadas en el Paso 4.

6. Si el vehículo va a arrastrar un

remolque, la carga del remolque se

trasladará al vehículo. Consulte este

manual para determinar cómo esto

reduce la capacidad de carga de

equipaje y la carga disponible del

vehículo.

204

Transporte de carga

Esto son algunos ejemplos de cómo

calcular la capacidad de transporte de

carga y equipaje disponible:

• Otro ejemplo para su vehículo con una

capacidad de carga y equipaje de

635 kg (1,400 libras). Usted decide ir

a jugar golf. ¿Hay suficiente capacidad

de carga para transportar a sus cuatro

amigos y todas las bolsas de golf?

Usted y sus amigos tienen un peso

promedio de 99 kg (220 lb) cada uno

y las bolsas de golf pesan

aproximadamente 13.5 kg (30 lb) cada

una. El cálculo sería: 1400 – (5 x 220)

– (5 x 30) = 1400 – 1100 – 150 = 150

lb. Sí, tiene suficiente capacidad en su

vehículo para transportar a cuatro

amigos más las bolsas de golf. En

unidades métricas decimales, el

cálculo sería: 635 kg – (5 x 99 kg) – (5

x 13.5 kg) = 635 – 495 – 67.5 = 72.5 kg.

• Un último ejemplo para su vehículo con

una capacidad para carga y equipaje

de 635 kg (1,400 lb). Usted y uno de

sus amigos deciden ir a comprar

cemento a una tienda local para

mejoras en el hogar a fin de terminar

ese patio que ha estado planificando

durante los dos últimos años. Al medir

el interior del vehículo con el asiento

trasero plegado, tiene espacio para 12

bolsas de cemento de 45 kg (100 lb).

¿Tiene suficiente capacidad de carga

para transportar el cemento hasta su

casa? Si usted y su amigo pesan cada

uno 220 lb (99 kg), el cálculo sería:

1,400 – (2 x 220) – (12 x 100) = 1,400

– 440 – 1,200 = –240 lb. No; no tiene

suficiente capacidad de carga para

transportar tanto peso. En unidades

métricas decimales, el cálculo sería:

635 kg – (2 x 99 kg) – (12 x 45 kg) =

635 – 198 – 540 = 103 kg. Deberá

reducir el peso de la carga en al menos

104 kg (240 lb). Si quita 3 bolsas de

cemento de 45 kg (100 lb), el cálculo

de la carga sería:1400 - (2 x 220) - (9

x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb.

Ahora, tiene la capacidad de carga

para transportar el cemento y a su

amigo también. En unidades métricas

decimales, el cálculo sería: 635 kg – (2

x 99 kg) – (9 x 45 kg) = 635 – 198 –

405 = 32 kg.

En los cálculos anteriores también se

asume que la carga se distribuye de tal

forma en el vehículo que no se recarga el

peso bruto vehicular del eje delantero ni

trasero especificado para su vehículo en

la Etiqueta de certificación del

cumplimiento de las normas de seguridad.

La etiqueta debe estar adherida al pilar de

bisagra de la puerta, al poste de seguro de

la puerta o al borde de la puerta junto al

poste de poste de seguro de la puerta,

junto a la posición del asiento del

conductor.

205

Transporte de carga

Instrucciones especiales de carga para

propietarios de camiones o camionetas

pickup y vehículos utilitarios

ALERTA

Los vehículos cargados se

comportan de modo distinto a los

vehículos sin carga. Al manejar un

vehículo demasiado cargado se deben

tomar mayores precauciones, tales como

manejar a velocidades más bajas y

mantener una mayor distancia de frenado.

Su vehículo puede transportar más carga

y personas que la mayoría de los

automóviles de pasajeros. Dependiendo

del tipo y ubicación de la carga, el

transporte de carga y de personas puede

elevar el centro de gravedad del vehículo.

206

Transporte de carga

CONDUCCIÓN CON

REMOLQUE

AVISOS

No exceda el GVWR o el GAWR

especificados en la Etiqueta de

certificación del cumplimiento de las

normas de seguridad.

Arrastrar remolques con un peso

superior al peso bruto máximo

recomendado para el remolque

excede el límite del vehículo y puede

producir daños en el motor, en la

transmisión y en la estructura, pérdida de

control del vehículo, volcaduras y lesiones

personales.

La capacidad de carga del vehículo se

designa por peso, no por volumen, de

modo que no necesariamente podrá usar

todo el espacio disponible al cargar un

vehículo.

El arrastre de un remolque significa una

carga adicional para el motor, la

transmisión, el eje, los frenos, las llantas y

la suspensión del vehículo. Inspeccione

periódicamente estos componentes

durante y después de cualquier operación

de remolque.

CONTROL DE BAMBOLEO DEL

REMOLQUE (IF EQUIPPED)

Nota: Esta función no permite que el

remolque oscile, pero reduce la oscilación

cuando comienza.

Nota: Esta función no puede detener la

oscilación de todos los remolques.

Nota: En algunos casos, si la velocidad del

vehículo es demasiado alta, el sistema

activarse varias veces, reduciendo la

velocidad del vehículo gradualmente.

Esta función se aplica a frenos de vehículos

en ruedas individuales y, si es necesario,

reduce la potencia del motor. Si el

remolque comienza a oscilar, la luz del

control de estabilidad destella. Lo primero

que debe hacer es reducir la velocidad del

vehículo, luego aparte el vehículo a un lado

de la carretera de forma segura y verifique

la carga adecuada de la lanza y la

distribución de carga del remolque. Ver

Transporte de carga (página 196).

PESOS DE REMOLQUE

RECOMENDADOS

Nota: Para el funcionamiento de gran

altitud, reduzca el peso combinado en en

2% a una elevación de 1,000 pies (300

metros).

Nota: Ciertos Estados requieren frenos

eléctricos de remolque para remolques

sobre el peso específico. Consulte el

reglamento de tránsito del estado para

conocer dicho peso especificado. Los pesos

máximos del remolque podrían limitarse al

peso especificado, ya que el sistema

eléctrico del vehículo no incluye el conector

de cableado necesario para activar los

frenos eléctricos del remolque.

207

Remolque

Área delantera

máxima del

remolque: m

(pies

)

Peso máximo del

remolque: lb (kg)

Máximo GCWR: lb

(kg)

Tren motriz

20 (1,86)2000 (907)5866 (2661)2WD 1.6L

20 (1,86)2000 (907)6035 (2737)4WD 1.6L

20 (1,86)2000 (907)5977 (2711)

2WD 2.0L

30 (2,78)3500 (1588)7477 (3391)

2WD 2.0L

20 (1,86)2000 (907)6126 (2779)

4WD 2.0L

30 (2,78)3500 (1588)7626 (3459)

4WD 2.0L

20 (1,86)2000 (907)5417 (2457)2WD 2.5L

sin paquete de arrastre de remolques.

Con paquete de arrastre de remolques.

208

Remolque

COMPROBACIONES

ESENCIALES DE REMOLQUE

Siga estas pautas para asegurar un

arrastre de remolque seguro:

• No arrastre un remolque hasta que el

vehículo haya recorrido por lo menos

1.600 km (1.000 millas).

• Consulte el reglamento local de

vehículos motorizados para el arrastre

de un remolque.

• Consulte las instrucciones incluidas

con los accesorios de arrastre para

obtener las especificaciones

adecuadas de instalación y ajuste.

• Haga revisar el vehículo con mayor

frecuencia si arrastra un remolque.

Consulte su información de

mantenimiento programado.

Los términos de especificación de carga

se encuentran en la etiqueta de llantas y

la etiqueta de certificación del

cumplimiento de las normas de seguridad.

Las instrucciones para calcular la carga de

su vehículo se puede encontrar

anteriormente en este manual. Ver Límite

de Carga (página 198). Recuerde

considerar la el peso de la lanza del

remolque como parte de la carga del

vehículo al calcular el peso total del

vehículo.

Enganches de arrastre

No utilice ningún enganche de arrastre que

vaya fijo a la defensa o al eje. Distribuya la

carga del remolque de manera que sólo

un 10 a un 15% del peso total del remolque

esté sobre la lanza.

Cadenas de seguridad

Nota: Nunca fije las cadenas de seguridad

en la defensa.

Siempre conecte las cadenas de seguridad

a los retenes de gancho del vehículo. Para

colocar las cadenas de seguridad, crúcelas

por debajo de la lanza del remolque y

déjelas holgadas para poder hacer virajes.

Si usa un remolque arrendado, siga las

instrucciones de la agencia de

arrendamiento.

Frenos del remolque

ALERTA

No conecte el sistema de frenos

hidráulicos del remolque

directamente al sistema de frenos

del vehículo. Es posible que su vehículo no

tenga suficiente potencia de frenado, por

lo que aumenta la posibilidad de sufrir un

choque.

Los frenos eléctricos y los frenos de

remolque manuales, automáticos o por

impulso son seguros si están instalados

adecuadamente y si se ajustan a las

especificaciones del fabricante. Los frenos

del remolque deben cumplir con la

normativa local y federal.

El sistema de frenos del vehículo de

arrastre tiene capacidad para soportar el

GVWR, pero no el GCWR.

Luces del remolque

La mayoría de los vehículos remolcados

requieren luces de remolque. Asegúrese

que todas las luces de posición, luces de

freno, direccionales y luces de emergencia

estén funcionando. Consulte a su

distribuidor autorizado o la agencia de

arrendamiento de remolques para obtener

las instrucciones y los equipos adecuados

para conectar las luces.

209

Remolque

Antes de arrastrar un remolque

Practique los virajes, el frenado y el

retroceso para acostumbrarse a la

combinación del vehículo y el remolque

antes de comenzar un viaje. Al dar vuelta,

haga giros más amplios, de manera que

las ruedas del remolque no toquen los

bordes de las banquetas ni otros

obstáculos.

Al arrastrar un remolque

• No conduzca a más de 113 km/h

(70 mph) durante los primeros 800 km

(500 millas) y no arranque con el

acelerador a fondo.

• Revise el enganche, las conexiones

eléctricas y las tuercas de seguridad

de ruedas del remolque

completamente después de haber

viajado 80 km (50 millas).

• Coloque la palanca de cambio de

velocidades en P para que se enfríe el

motor y la transmisión, y el A/A

funcione en forma óptima en climas

calurosos mientras se está detenido

en el tráfico.

• Apague el control de velocidad. El

control de velocidad se puede

desactivar automáticamente al

arrastrar remolques en pendientes

largas y empinadas.

• Cambie a una velocidad menor si está

manejando en bajada en una

pendiente pronunciada. No aplique los

frenos muy seguido, ya que se pueden

sobrecalentar y ser menos eficaces.

• Si la transmisión está equipada con la

función de asistencia en pendientes,

use esta función al remolcar. Esta

función proporciona frenado con motor

y ayuda a eliminar cambios de

transmisión excesivos para optimizar

el rendimiento del combustible y el

enfriamiento de la transmisión.

• Si tiene enganchado un remolque, deje

más distancia para detenerse, anticipe

las paradas y frene gradualmente.

• Evite estacionar en desnivel. Sin

embargo, si se ve obligado a hacerlo,

coloque cuñas debajo de las ruedas

del remolque.

PUNTOS DE REMOLQUE (IF

EQUIPPED)

Ubicación del anillo de remolque

El anillo de remolque de rosca se ubica en

el pozo de la llanta de refacción.

El anillo de remolque siempre debe

llevarse en el vehículo.

Instalación del anillo de remolque

El anillo de remolque de rosca tiene un hilo

izquierdo. Gírelo hacia la izquierda para

instalarlo. Asegúrese de que el anillo de

remolque esté bien apretado.

E146284

Inserte un objeto adecuado para abrir por

la fuerza la cubierta (1). Use la porción

remetida o con muescas de la cubierta.

Atornille el anillo de remolque (2).

210

Remolque

Remolque del vehíclo en cuatro

ruedas

Gire el interruptor de encendido a la

posición ON. El no hacerlo bloquerá la

dirección y el indicador y las luces de freno

no funcionarán.

Los esfuerzos de frenado y dirección son

altos si el motor no está funcionando.

Mantenga mayores distancia de detención.

TRANSPORTE DEL VEHÍCULO

E143886

Si necesita remolcar su vehículo, póngase

en contacto con un servicio profesional de

arrastre o, si es socio de un programa de

asistencia en el camino, con su proveedor

de asistencia en el camino.

Se recomienda hacer el arrastre de su

vehículo con un elevador y plataformas

rodantes o equipos de plataforma plana.

No arrastre su vehículo con una eslinga.

Ford Motor Company no ha aprobado el

procedimiento de arrastre con eslingas.

Ford Motor Company elabora un manual

de arrastre para todos los operadores

autorizados de camiones de remolque.

Haga que el operador de la grúa de arrastre

consulte este manual para que vea los

procedimientos adecuados de enganche

y arrastre de su vehículo.

Los vehículos con tracción delantera

(FWD) se pueden remolcar desde el frente

si se utiliza equipo de elevación para

levantar las ruedas del suelo. Las ruedas

traseras se pueden dejar en el suelo

cuando se hace el arrastre de esta manera.

Los vehículos con tracción delantera

también se pueden remolcar desde la

parte trasera usando un equipo elevador;

sin embargo, es necesario que las ruedas

delanteras estén sobre una plataforma

rodante para evitar dañar la transmisión

automática.

Los vehículos con tracción en las cuatro

ruedas (4WD) se deben remolcar con un

elevador y plataformas rodantes o con

equipos de plataforma plana con todas

las ruedas separadas del suelo para evitar

que se dañe la transmisión, el sistema

4WD o el vehículo. Su vehículo puede

dañarse si es arrastrado en forma

incorrecta o usando otros medios.

211

Remolque

REMOLQUE DEL VEHÍCULO

SOBRE LAS CUATRO RUEDAS

Remolque de emergencia

En caso de que el vehículo quede

deshabilitado (sin acceso a plataformas

rodantes, grúas de arrastre de automóviles

o vehículos con plataforma de arrastre),

puede ser remolcado (con todas sus

ruedas en el suelo, independientemente

de la configuración del tren

motriz/transmisión) en las siguientes

condiciones:

• El vehículo esté orientado hacia el

frente, de modo que se le arrastre hacia

delante.

• La palanca de cambios de la

transmisión se coloca la posición N. Si

no se puede mover la palanca de

cambios de la transmisión no se puede

colocar en la posición N, es posible que

sea necesario anularla. Ver

Transmisión (página 163).

• La velocidad máxima es 56 km/h (35

mph).

• La distancia máxima es 80 km

(50 millas).

Arrastre vacacional

Siga estas instrucciones si necesita hacer

un arrastre recreativo. Un ejemplo de esto

sería arrastrar su vehículo con una casa

rodante. Estas pautas están diseñadas

para asegurar que la transmisión no resulte

dañada.

Los vehículos con tracción delantera

(FWD) se pueden remolcar con las ruedas

delanteras fuera del suelo usando una

plataforma de arrastre. Si utiliza una

plataforma de arrastre, siga las

instrucciones especificadas por el

proveedor del equipo.

Los vehículos con tracción en las cuatro

ruedas (4WD) no se pueden remolcar con

ninguna rueda en el suelo, ya que se

podrían producir daños en el vehículo o la

transmisión. Se recomienda remolcar el

vehículo con las cuatro (4) ruedas

separadas del suelo como cuando se usa

un remolque de transporte de automóviles.

De lo contrario, no se permite llevar a cabo

el arrastre vacacional.

212

Remolque

RODAJE

Es posible que deba asentar las llantas

nuevas por aproximadamente 480 km

(300 millas). Durante este período, el

vehículo puede exhibir algunas

características de manejo excepcionales.

Evitar conducir muy rápido durante los

primeros 1,600 km (1,000 millas). Varíe la

velocidad frecuentemente y realice

cambios ascendentes de forma temprana.

No fuerce el motor.

No remolque durante los primeros 1,600

km (1,000 millas).

CONDUCCIÓN ECONÓMICA

La economía de combustible se ve

afectada por diversos aspectos como la

forma en que conduce, las condiciones en

la que conduce y la forma en que mantiene

el vehículo.

Algunas cosas que debe considerar y que

pueden mejorar la economía de

combustible:

• Acelere y disminuya la velocidad de

forma suave y moderada.

• Conduzca a velocidades constantes

sin detenerse.

• Anticipar las detenciones; disminuir la

velocidad puede eliminar la necesidad

de detenerse.

• Combine sus actividades y diligencias

y minimice el manejo con frenadas y

arranques.

• Cierre las ventanas para manejar a alta

velocidad.

• Al manejar a velocidades razonables

(viajar a 88 km/h [55 mph]), se usa un

15% menos de combustible que

cuando se viaja a 105 km/h (65 mph).

• Mantenga las llantas correctamente

infladas y use sólo el tamaño

recomendado.

• Solo use el aceite de motor

recomendado.

• Realice todo el mantenimiento

programado en forma regular.

También es posible que haya algunas

cosas que no desea realizar debido a que

pueden reducir la economía de

combustible:

• Las aceleraciones repentinas o

aceleraciones bruscas.

• Revolucionar el motor antes de

apagarlo.

• Ralentí durante períodos mayores a un

minuto.

• Calentar el vehículo en mañanas frías.

• Use el aire acondicionado o el

desempañador delantero.

• Use el control de velocidad en terrenos

montañosos.

• Apoyar el pie sobre el pedal del freno

al manejar.

• Conducir un vehículo con una carga

sumamente pesado o arrastrar un

remolque.

• Transporte de peso innecesario (se

pierden unos 0.4 km/L [1 mpg] por

cada 180 kg [400 lb] de peso

transportado).

• Adición de accesorios en particular al

vehículo (por ejemplo, deflectores de

insectos, barras de volcadura y de

luces, estribos, portaesquíes o parrillas

portaequipaje).

• Conducir con las ruedas mal alineadas.

CONDUCCIÓN POR EL AGUA

Nota: Manejar en agua profunda sobre los

niveles recomendados puede causar daños

en el vehículo.

213

Indicaciones de conducción

Nota: Una vez que pasó por el agua,

siempre seque los frenos moviendo el

vehículo lentamente ejerciendo una leve

presión sobre el pedal del freno. Los frenos

mojados no detienen el vehículo tan rápido

como los frenos secos.

E142667

Si no puede evitar pasar por agua profunda

o estancada, hágalo muy lentamente.

Nunca conduzca por agua cuyo nivel esté

por encima de la parte inferior de las

ruedas (rines) de las llantas (si se trata de

automóviles) o de la parte inferior de los

cubos de las ruedas (en el caso de

camiones y camionetas).

Cuando se desplaza por el agua, es posible

que disminuya la capacidad de la tracción

o de los frenos. Además, el agua puede

entrar en la admisión de aire del motor y

dañar gravemente el motor o hacer que el

vehículo se detenga.

TAPETES DEL PISO

E142666

AVISOS

Siempre utilice tapetes diseñados

para ajustarse al espacio para pies

de su vehículo. Únicamente utilice

tapetes que no obstruyan el área del pedal.

Únicamente utilice tapetes que se

aseguren firmemente a los postes de

retención de manera que no se

desacomoden e interfieran con los pedales

ni obstaculicen de otra forma la operación

segura de su vehículo.

Los pedales que no se pueden mover

libremente pueden causar la pérdida

de control del vehículo y aumentar

el riesgo de sufrir graves lesiones

personales.

Siempre asegúrese de que los

tapetes estén bien asegurados a los

postes de retención en la alfombra

que viene con el vehículo. Los tapetes se

deben asegurar apropiadamente a ambos

postes de retención para garantizar que

no se desacomoden.

Nunca coloque tapetes ni cualquier

otra cubierta en el espacio para pies

del vehículo que no se pueda

asegurar apropiadamente para evitar que

se mueva e interfiera con los pedales o con

la capacidad de controlar el vehículo.

214

Indicaciones de conducción

AVISOS

Nunca coloque tapetes ni cualquier

otra cubierta encima de los tapetes

que ya están instalados. Los tapetes

siempre deben apoyarse en la superficie

de la alfombra del vehículo y no en otro

tapete ni cubierta. Los tapetes o cualquier

otra cubierta adicional reducirán el espacio

del pedal y posiblemente interferirán con

su operación.

Verifique regularmente la sujeción

de los tapetes. Siempre reinstale y

asegure de manera correcta los

tapetes que se hayan desmontado para

limpieza o reemplazo.

Siempre asegúrese de que no caigan

objetos en el espacio para pies del

conductor mientras el vehículo está

en movimiento. Estos objetos pueden

quedar atrapados debajo de los pedales

causando la pérdida de control del

vehículo.

Si no se siguen correctamente las

instrucciones de instalación o

sujeción de los tapetes es posible

que interfieran con la operación del pedal

causando la pérdida de control del

vehículo.

Para instalar los tapetes, colóquelos

de manera que el ojal quede sobre

el poste de retención y oprima para

asegurarlos.

Para quitar el tapete, siga el

procedimiento de instalación en

orden inverso.

215

Indicaciones de conducción

ASISTENCIA EN CARRETERA

Vehículos vendidos en EE.UU.:

cómo conseguir asistencia en el

camino

Para brindarle una ayuda total en caso de

que tenga un problema con el vehículo,

Ford Motor Company ofrece un programa

gratuito de asistencia en el camino. Este

programa es independiente de la Garantía

limitada de vehículos nuevos. El servicio

está disponible:

• las 24 horas, los siete días de la

semana.

• para el período de cobertura

mencionado en la Tarjeta de asistencia

en el camino, que se incluye en la

carpeta del Manual del propietario.

La asistencia en el camino cubrirá:

• cambio de una llanta desinflada por

una de refacción en buen estado (salvo

los vehículos a los que se les ha

suministrado un equipo de inflado de

llantas).

• arranque con cables pasacorriente de

la batería.

• asistencia al quedarse afuera (el costo

del repuesto de llave es

responsabilidad del cliente).

• suministro de combustible:

Contratistas de servicio independiente,

si no lo prohíben las leyes estatales,

locales o municipales se deberá

suministrar 7.5 litros (2.0 galones) de

gasolina o 18.9 litros (5 galones) de

combustible diesel a un vehículo

descompuesto. El servicio de

suministro de combustible se limita a

dos ocasiones sin cargo dentro de un

período de 12 meses.

• rescate con grúa: disponible a menos

de 30.5 metros (100 pies) de un

camino pavimentado o rural, sin pago

alguno.

• arrastre: vehículos Ford y Lincoln

elegibles que sean arrastrados hasta

un distribuidor autorizado a menos de

56 km (35 millas) del lugar en que

ocurrió el desperfecto o al distribuidor

autorizado más cercano. Si un

miembro solicita servicio de arrastre a

un distribuidor autorizado a más de 56

km (35 millas) del lugar en que ocurrió

el desperfecto, el miembro asumirá los

costos por sobrepasar el kilometraje

de 56 km (35 millas).

Los remolques tendrán una cobertura

hasta $200 si el vehículo elegible con el

desperfecto requiere servicio, en el

distribuidor autorizado más cercano. Si el

remolque está descompuesto, pero el

vehículo de arrastre funciona, el remolque

no califica para ningún servicio de

asistencia en el camino.

Vehículos vendidos en Estados

Unidos : Uso de la asistencia en el

camino

Complete la tarjeta de identificación de

asistencia en el camino y colóquela en su

billetera para tener una referencia rápida.

Esta tarjeta se encuentra en la carpeta de

información del propietario, dentro de la

guantera.

EE.UU. Los propietarios de vehículos Ford

que necesiten asistencia en el camino

deberán llamar al 1-800-241-3673.

216

Emergencias en el Camino

Si necesita coordinar asistencia en el

camino para usted, Ford Motor Company

le reembolsará un monto razonable para

el arrastre hasta el distribuidor más

cercano, dentro de 56 km (35 millas). Para

obtener información acerca del reembolso,

los clientes de vehículos Ford en EE.UU.

deben llamar al 1-800-241-3673. Se

solicitará a los usuarios que presenten el

comprobante de pago original.

Vehículos vendidos en Canadá:

Cómo conseguir asistencia en el

camino

Los clientes canadienses que necesiten

asistencia en el camino, llamen al

1-800-665-2006.

Vehículos vendidos en Canadá:

Uso de la asistencia en el camino

Complete la tarjeta de identificación de

asistencia en el camino y colóquela en su

billetera para tener una referencia rápida.

En Canadá, la tarjeta se encuentra en el

Manual de garantías, en la guantera.

La cobertura y los beneficios de asistencia

en el camino de Canadá pueden diferir de

los de EE.UU. Consulte el Manual de

garantías o visite nuestro sitio web en

www.ford.ca para obtener información

sobre los servicios y beneficios

canadienses.

Los clientes canadienses que deseen

obtener información sobre asistencia en

el camino deben llamar al

1-800-665-2006 o visitar nuestro sitio

web www.ford.ca.

LUCES DE EMERGENCIA

Nota: Con el uso prolongado, las luces

intermitentes pueden descargar la batería.

El control de las luces de

emergencia está ubicado en el

tablero de instrumentos cerca

del radio. Úselas cuando su vehículo esté

descompuesto y represente un riesgo para

la seguridad de los demás conductores.

• Si presiona el control de las luces

intermitentes, todas las luces

direccionales delanteras y traseras

destellarán.

• Oprima nuevamente el control de las

luces intermitentes para apagarlas.

INTERRUPTOR DE CORTE DE

COMBUSTIBLE

ALERTA

Si no inspecciona y, si es necesario,

repara las fugas de combustible

después de un choque, se podría

aumentar el riesgo de incendio o de sufrir

lesiones graves. Ford Motor Company

recomienda que el sistema de combustible

sea revisado por un distribuidor autorizado

después de cualquier choque.

En caso de choque moderado a grave, este

vehículo cuenta con una característica de

desactivación de la bomba de combustible

que detiene el flujo de combustible hacia

el motor. No todo impacto producirá la

desactivación.

En caso de que el vehículo se apague

después de un choque, usted podría volver

a arrancarlo, realizando lo siguiente:

1. Apague el encendido.

2. Active el encendido.

3. Repita los pasos 1 y 2 para reactivar la

bomba de combustible.

Nota: Si el vehículo tiene el sistema de

encendido con botón de presión, oprima el

botón START/STOP dos veces para volver

a activar el sistema de combustible.

217

Emergencias en el Camino

ARRANQUE EN FRÍO DEL

VEHÍCULO

AVISOS

Los gases que se encuentran

alrededor de la batería del vehículo

pueden explotar si se exponen a

llamas, chispas o cigarrillos encendidos.

Una explosión podría ocasionar lesiones

personales o daños al vehículo.

La batería del vehículo contiene

ácido sulfúrico, el cual puede quemar

la piel, los ojos y la ropa en caso de

contacto.

No trate de empujar su vehículo de

transmisión automática para arrancarlo.

Las transmisiones automáticas no

permiten arrancar el motor empujando el

vehículo. Intentar empujar un vehículo con

transmisión automática para arrancarlo

podría provocar daños en la transmisión.

Preparación del vehículo

Nota: Use sólo un suministro de 12 voltios

para arrancar su vehículo.

Nota: No desconecte la batería del vehículo

descompuesto, ya que esto podría dañar el

sistema eléctrico del vehículo.

1. Estacione el vehículo auxiliar cerca del

cofre del vehículo descompuesto,

asegurándose de que los vehículos no

entren en contacto. Ponga el freno de

estacionamiento en ambos vehículos

y aléjese del ventilador de enfriamiento

del motor y otras piezas móviles.

2. Revise todas las terminales de la

batería y elimine el exceso de corrosión

antes de conectar los cables de la

batería. Asegúrese de que todos los

tapones de ventilación estén apretados

y nivelados.

3. Encienda el ventilador del calefactor

en ambos vehículos para evitar daños

causados por descargas de voltaje.

Apague todos los demás accesorios.

Conexión de los cables

pasacorriente

Nota: En la ilustración, el vehículo de la

parte inferior se utiliza para indicar la batería

auxiliar (refuerzo).

E142664

1. Conecte el cable pasacorriente positivo

(+) a la terminal positiva (+) de la

batería descargada.

2. Conecte el otro extremo del cable

positivo (+) a la terminal positiva (+)

de la batería auxiliar.

3. Conecte el cable negativo (–) a la

terminal negativa (–) de la batería

auxiliar.

218

Emergencias en el Camino

4. Haga la conexión final del cable

negativo (–) a una parte metálica

expuesta del motor del vehículo

descompuesto, lejos de la batería, del

carburador o del sistema de inyección

de combustible.

Nota: No fije el cable negativo (-) en las

líneas de combustible, las tapas de

balancines del motor, el múltiple de

admisión, ni ningún componente eléctrico

para usarlo como punto de conexión a tierra.

ALERTA

No conecte el extremo del segundo

cable a la terminal negativa (–) de

la batería descargada. Una chispa

podría provocar una explosión de los gases

alrededor de la batería.

Asegúrese que los cables estén alejados

de las aspas de ventiladores, bandas,

piezas móviles de ambos motores o de

cualquier pieza del sistema de suministro

de combustible.

Arranque con cables pasacorriente

1. Encienda el motor del vehículo auxiliar

y haga funcionar el motor aumentando

la velocidad en forma moderada.

2. Arranque el motor del vehículo

descompuesto.

3. Una vez que el vehículo descompuesto

arranque, deje funcionar ambos

motores durante tres minutos antes

de desconectar los cables

pasacorriente.

Retiro de los cables pasacorriente

Retire los cables pasacorriente en orden

inverso al de conexión.

Nota: En la ilustración, el vehículo de la

parte inferior se utiliza para indicar la batería

auxiliar (refuerzo).

E142665

1. Retire el cable pasacorriente de la

superficie metálica de conexión a tierra.

2. Retire el cable pasacorriente de la

terminal negativa (–) de la batería del

vehículo auxiliar.

3. Retire el cable pasacorriente de la

terminal positiva (+) de la batería del

vehículo auxiliar.

4. Retire el cable pasacorriente de la

terminal positiva (+) de la batería del

vehículo descompuesto.

Después de encender el vehículo

descompuesto y de retirar los cables

pasacorriente, déjelo funcionar en ralentí

durante varios minutos, de modo que la

computadora del motor pueda reaprender

sus condiciones de ralentí.

219

Emergencias en el Camino

CÓMO OBTENER LOS

SERVICIOS NECESARIOS

Las reparaciones a su vehículo cubiertas

por la garantía deben ser realizadas por un

distribuidor autorizado. Si bien cualquier

distribuidor autorizado que trabaje con la

línea de su vehículo le proveerá servicio

cubierto por la garantía, le recomendamos

regresar al distribuidor autorizado que le

vendió el vehículo, el que le asegurará una

satisfacción continua.

Tenga en cuenta que algunas reparaciones

cubiertas por la garantía requieren de

entrenamiento o equipo especial, por lo

que no todos los distribuidores autorizados

cuentan con permiso para realizar todas

las reparaciones cubiertas por la garantía.

Esto significa que, dependiendo de la

reparación con cobertura de garantía que

se necesite, tal vez deba llevar el vehículo

a otro distribuidor autorizado.

Cuando lleve el vehículo al distribuidor

autorizado, debe considerar un tiempo

razonable para realizar las reparaciones.

Las reparaciones se realizarán utilizando

refacciones Ford o Motorcraft® o bien

refacciones remanufacturadas o similares,

que estén autorizadas por Ford.

Fuera de la ciudad

Si estuviera lejos de su casa cuando

necesite hacer una reparación,

comuníquese con el Centro de relaciones

con el cliente de Ford o utilice los recursos

en línea indicados a continuación para

encontrar el distribuidor más cercano a

usted.

En los Estados Unidos:

Dirección postal

Ford Motor Company

Customer Relationship Center

P.O. Box 6248

Dearborn, MI 48121

Teléfono

1-800-392-3673 (FORD)

(TDD para personas con discapacidad

auditiva: 1-800-232-5952)

En línea

En el sitio www.fordowner.com encontrará

información y recursos adicionales

Estos son algunos de los elementos que

se pueden encontrar en línea:

• Localizador de distribuidores en los

EE.UU. por nombre, ciudad/estado o

Código postal de distribuidor

• Manuales del propietario

• Programas de mantenimiento

• Productos retirados del mercado

• Planes de servicio extendido de Ford

• Accesorios genuinos de Ford

• Especiales y promociones de servicio.

En Canadá:

Dirección postal

Customer Relationship Centre

Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited

P.O. Box 2000

Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4

Teléfono

1-800-565-3673 (FORD)

En línea

www.ford.ca

Asistencia adicional

Si tiene preguntas o inquietudes o no está

satisfecho con el servicio que recibe, siga

estos pasos:

1. Comuníquese con su Representante

de ventas o Asesor de servicio de su

distribuidor autorizado de ventas y

servicio.

220

Asistencia al cliente

2. Si sus preguntas o preocupaciones

quedan sin resolver, póngase en

contacto con el Gerente de ventas o el

Gerente de relaciones comerciales.

3. Si requiere asistencia o aclaración con

respecto a las políticas o

procedimientos de Ford Motor

Company, comuníquese con Ford

Customer Relationship Center.

Para poder brindarle un mejor servicio,

tenga a mano la siguiente información

cuando se comunique con un Centro de

relaciones con el cliente:

• Número de identificación del vehículo.

• Su número de teléfono (particular y

laboral).

• El número del distribuidor autorizado

y la ciudad donde se encuentra.

• La lectura actual del odómetro del

vehículo.

En algunos estados, debe notificar

directamente a Ford (por escrito) antes de

proceder con soluciones, de acuerdo con

las leyes de garantía de su estado. En

algunos estados también se le permitirá a

Ford intentar una reparación final.

En Estados Unidos, una disputa de garantía

se debe enviar a BBB AUTO LINE antes de

tomar acciones bajo la ley

Magnuson–Moss Warranty Act, o en la

medida que lo permitan las leyes del

estado, antes de solicitar soluciones de

reemplazo o renovación que proporcionan

ciertas leyes estatales. Este procedimiento

del manejo de la disputa no se requiere

antes de ejercer los derechos creados por

el estado u otros derechos que son

independientes de las leyes del

Magnuson–Moss Warranty Act o de las

leyes de reemplazo o devolución del

estado.

EN CALIFORNIA

(ÚNICAMENTE EN EE. UU.)

El Código civil de California, sección

1793.2(d) exige que, si un fabricante o su

representante no es capaz de reparar un

vehículo motorizado para cumplir con la

garantía expresa aplicable del vehículo,

luego de un número razonable de intentos,

se le exigirá al fabricante reemplazar el

vehículo por uno prácticamente idéntico

o adquirir el vehículo y reembolsar al

comprador una cantidad igual al precio

actual pagado o pagadero por el cliente

(menos un descuento razonable por el uso

que ejerció el consumidor). El consumidor

tiene el derecho de escoger si recibe un

reembolso o el reemplazo del vehículo.

El Código civil de California, sección

1793.22(b) asume que el fabricante ha

realizado un número razonable de intentos

por cumplir con las garantías expresas

aplicables al vehículo si, dentro de los

primeros 18 meses de la propiedad de un

vehículo nuevo o durante los primeros

29,000 km. (18,000 millas), lo que se

produzca primero:

1. Se han hecho dos o más intentos de

reparación para el mismo problema

que podría provocar la muerte o

lesiones corporales graves O

2. Se han realizado cuatro o más intentos

de reparación para el mismo problema

(un defecto o condición que afecta

considerablemente el uso, el valor o la

seguridad del vehículo) O

3. El vehículo está fuera de servicio en

reparaciones por un total de más de

30 días calendario (no necesariamente

todo de una vez).

En el caso del número 1 ó 2 anterior, el

consumidor también debe notificar al

fabricante de la necesidad de

reparaciones, a la siguiente dirección:

221

Asistencia al cliente

Ford Motor Company

16800 Executive Plaza Drive

Mail Drop 3NE-B

Dearborn, MI 48126

Deberá presentar su disputa de garantía a

la BBB AUTO LINE antes de hacer valer en

los tribunales cualquier derecho o

soluciones contempladas en el Artículo

1793.22(b) del Código Civil de California.

También deberá recurrir a BBB AUTO LINE

antes de ejercer sus derechos o de buscar

soluciones bajo el Acta de garantías

Federal de Magnuson-Moss, 15 U.S.C. sec.

2301 y posteriores. Si elige buscar

compensación siguiendo derechos y

soluciones no creadas por el Artículo

1793.22(b) del Código Civil de California o

el Acta de Garantías de Magnuson-Moss,

dichos estatutos no requieren acudir a BBB

AUTO LINE.

PROGRAMA AUTO LINE DE

BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU

(BBB) (ÚNICAMENTE EN EE.

UU.)

Su satisfacción es importante para Ford

Motor Company y su distribuidor. Si no se

ha resuelto un problema con la garantía

mediante el procedimiento de tres pasos

sugerido en este capítulo de la sección

Cómo conseguir los servicios que necesita,

usted podría ser elegible para participar

en el programa BBB AUTO LINE.

El programa BBB AUTO LINE consta de

dos partes – mediación y arbitraje. Al cabo

de la mediación, un representante de BBB

se comunicará con usted y con Ford Motor

Company para explorar las opciones para

resolver el reclamo. Si no se llega a un

acuerdo durante la mediación o no desea

participar en la mediación, si su reclamo

es elegible, podrá participar en el proceso

de arbitraje. Se programará una audiencia

de arbitraje de modo que pueda presentar

su caso de manera informal ante una

persona imparcial. El árbitro considerará

el testimonio proporcionado y tomará una

decisión después de la audiencia.

Los conflictos enviados al programa BBB

AUTO LINE normalmente se deciden

dentro de cuarenta días a contar de la

fecha en que presenta su solicitud a BBB.

La decisión no lo compromete y la puede

rechazar y llevar el caso a los tribunales,

en donde todas las conclusiones de la

disputa de BBB Auto Line, así como las

decisiones, son admisibles para el proceso.

En caso de que decida aceptar la decisión

de BBB AUTO LINE, Ford está entonces

comprometida por la decisión y la debe

acatar dentro de los siguientes 30 días

después de la recepción de su carta de

aceptación.

Solicitud de BBB AUTO LINE: Con la

información proporcionada a continuación,

llame o escriba para pedir una solicitud de

programa. Se le pedirá su nombre y

dirección, información general sobre su

nuevo vehículo, información sobre los

problemas con la garantía y todos los

pasos que ya hubiera seguido para tratar

de resolver la situación. Se le enviará un

Formulario de reclamo del cliente que

deberá completar, firmar y regresar a BBB,

junto con la prueba de propiedad. Una vez

recibido, BBB revisará el reclamo para

verificar que califique según las Pautas

resumidas del programa.

222

Asistencia al cliente

Puede obtener más información

llamando a BBB AUTO LINE al

1-800-955-5100, o escribir a:

BBB AUTO LINE

4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800

Arlington, Virginia 22203-1833

También se pueden pedir las solicitudes

de BBB AUTO LINE llamando a Ford Motor

Company Customer Relationship Center,

al 1-800-392-3673.

Nota: Ford Motor Company se reserva el

derecho de modificar las restricciones para

la participación en el Consejo, modificar los

procedimientos o interrumpir este proceso

en cualquier momento, sin mediar

obligación ni notificación alguna.

UTILIZACIÓN DEL PROGRAMA

DE MEDIACIÓN/ARBITRAJE

(ÚNICAMENTE EN CANADÁ)

Para vehículos entregados a distribuidores

autorizados canadienses. En aquellos

casos en que considere que los esfuerzos

realizados por Ford of Canada y por el

distribuidor autorizado para resolver un

problema del servicio del vehículo

relacionado con la fabricación han sido

insatisfactorios, Ford of Canada participa

en un programa de mediación y arbitraje

imparcial de terceros dirigido por el Plan

de arbitraje para vehículos motorizados de

Canadá (CAMVAP).

El programa CAMVAP es una alternativa

directa y relativamente rápida para

resolver conflictos, cuando todos los otros

esfuerzos para llegar a un acuerdo han

fracasado. Este procedimiento no tiene

costo para usted y está diseñado para

eliminar la necesidad de procedimientos

legales caros y prolongados.

En el Programa de arbitraje para vehículos

motorizados de Canadá (CAMVAP),

árbitros imparciales que actúan como la

tercera parte dirigen audiencias en tiempos

y lugares convenientes para ambos y en

un ambiente informal. Dichos árbitros

imparciales revisaron las posiciones de las

partes, tomaron decisiones y, cuando lo

estimaron conveniente, emitieron juicios

para resolver las disputas. Las decisiones

del CAMVAP son rápidas, justas e

inapelables, pues el fallo del juez es de

carácter obligatorio, tanto para usted

como para Ford de Canadá.

Los servicios del Plan de arbitraje para

vehículos motorizados de Canadá

(CAMVAP) se encuentran disponibles en

todos los territorios y provincias

canadienses. Para obtener mayor

información, sin cargos u obligaciones,

llame directamente a su Administrador

provincial de CAMVAP al

1-800–207–0685 o visite

www.camvap.ca..

CÓMO OBTENER ASISTENCIA

FUERA DE EE. UU. Y CANADÁ

Antes de exportar su vehículo a otro país,

contacte a la embajada o consulado

extranjero que corresponda. Dichos

funcionarios pueden informarle sobre las

normas locales para registrar el vehículo

y dónde encontrar combustible sin plomo.

Si no puede encontrar combustible sin

plomo o sólo puede obtener combustible

con un índice anticascabeleo más bajo de

lo recomendado para su vehículo, contacte

una oficina de relación con el cliente de la

región.

223

Asistencia al cliente

El uso de combustible con plomo en su

vehículo sin la conversión correcta puede

dañar la efectividad del sistema de control

de emisión de gases y puede causar

detonaciones del motor o graves daños al

motor. Ford Motor Company y Ford de

Canadá no se responsabilizan de cualquier

daño causado por el uso del combustible

inadecuado. El uso de combustible con

plomo también puede tener como

consecuencia que sea más difícil importar

nuevamente el vehículo a Estados Unidos.

Si su vehículo debe recibir servicio mientras

usted está viajando o viviendo en la Región

de Asia-Pacífico, África del SubSahara, las

Islas Vírgenes de Estados Unidos, América

Central, el Caribe e Israel, comuníquese

con el distribuidor autorizado más cercano.

Si el distribuidor autorizado no puede

ayudarlo, comuníquese con:

FORD MOTOR COMPANY

FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS & GLOBAL

INITIATIVES

1555 Fairlane Drive

Fairlane Business Park #3

Allen Park, Michigan 48101

EE.UU.

Teléfono: (313) 594-4857

Para clientes en Guam, la Comunidad de

las Islas Marianas del Norte (CNMI),

Samoa Americana y las Islas Vírgenes de

Estados Unidos, llame a nuestro número

de larga distancia sin costo: (800)

841-FORD (3673).

FAX: (313) 390-0804

Correo: expcac@ford.com

Si su vehículo debe recibir servicio mientras

usted está viajando o viviendo en Puerto

Rico, comuníquese con el distribuidor

autorizado más cercano. Si el distribuidor

autorizado no puede ayudarlo,

comuníquese con:

Ford International Business Development

Inc.

Customer Relationship Center

P.O. Box 11957

Caparra Heights Station

San Juan, Puerto Rico 00922-1957

Teléfono: (800) 841-FORD (3673)

FAX: (313) 390-0804

Correo electrónico: prcac@ford.com

www.ford.com.pr

Si su vehículo debe recibir servicio mientras

usted está viajando o viviendo en Oriente

Medio, comuníquese con el distribuidor

autorizado más cercano. Si el distribuidor

autorizado no puede ayudarlo,

comuníquese con:

Ford Middle East

Customer Relationship Center

P.O. Box 21470

Dubai, Emiratos Árabes Unidos

Teléfono: +971 4 3326084

Larga distancia sin costo para Reino de

Arabia Saudita: 800 8971409

Número de teléfono local para Kuwait:

24810575

FAX: +971 4 3327299

Correo electrónico: menacac@ford.com

www.me.ford.com

Si compra su vehículo en Norteamérica y

luego se muda a cualquiera de las

ubicaciones mencionadas anteriormente,

registre el número de identificación del

vehículo (VIN) y su nueva dirección con

Ford Motor Company Export Operations

& Global Growth Initiatives en un correo

electrónico a expcac@ford.com..

Si se encuentra en otro país, comuníquese

con el distribuidor autorizado más cercano.

Si los empleados del distribuidor

autorizado no pueden ayudarlo, ellos

pueden llevarlo a la oficina afiliada de Ford

más cercana.

Los clientes en los EE.UU. pueden

llamar al 1-800-392-3673.

224

Asistencia al cliente

CÓMO ORDENAR OTRO

MANUAL DEL PROPIETARIO

Para solicitar las publicaciones de esta

carpeta, contacte a Helm, Incorporated

en:

HELM, INCORPORATED

47911 Halyard Drive

Plymouth, Michigan 48170

Atención: Servicio al cliente

O bien, para solicitar un catálogo de

publicaciones gratuito, llame sin costo al

1-800-782-4356

Lunes a viernes de 8:00 a.m. a 6:00 p.m.

Hora del este (EST)

También puede contactar a Helm,

Incorporated a través de su sitio Web:

www.helminc.com

(Los elementos de este catálogo se

pueden adquirir con tarjeta de crédito,

cheque o giro postal.)

Cómo obtener un manual del

propietario en francés

Puede obtener el Manual del propietario

en francés con su distribuidor autorizado

o ponerse en contacto con Helm,

Incorporated usando la información de

contacto mencionada anteriormente en

esta sección.

DENUNCIA DE DEFECTOS DE

SEGURIDAD (ÚNICAMENTE EN

EE. UU.)

E142557

Si usted considera que su vehículo tiene

un desperfecto que podría causar un

choque, o podría producir lesiones o la

muerte, debería informar inmediatamente

a la Administración nacional de seguridad

de tránsito en carreteras (NHTSA) además

de notificar a Ford Motor Company.

Si la NHTSA recibe quejas similares, puede

abrir una investigación y si encuentra que

existe un defecto de seguridad en un grupo

de vehículos, puede solicitar una campaña

de devolución y reparación. Sin embargo,

la Administración nacional de seguridad

de tránsito en carreteras no se puede

involucrar en problemas individuales entre

usted, su distribuidor o Ford Motor

Company.

Para comunicarse con la Administración

nacional de seguridad de tránsito en

carreteras, puede llamar sin cargo a la línea

directa de seguridad de vehículos al

1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);

visitar la página de Internet

http://www.safercar.gov; o bien escribir a:

Administrador

1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast

Washington, D.C. 20590

También puede obtener más información

acerca de la seguridad del vehículo

motorizado en la página de Internet

http://www.safercar.gov.

DENUNCIA DE DEFECTOS DE

SEGURIDAD (ÚNICAMENTE EN

CANADÁ)

Si piensa que su vehículo presenta un

defecto que podría causar un accidente o

provocar lesiones o incluso la muerte, debe

informarlo de inmediato a Transport

Canada al número de larga distancia sin

costo: 1–800–2333–0510 o en línea en:

https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/ 7/PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.

225

Asistencia al cliente

CAMBIO DE FUSIBLES

Fusible(s)

E142430

Si los componentes eléctricos del vehículo

no funcionan, es posible que se haya

fundido un fusible. Los fusibles fundidos

se reconocen por tener un alambre roto en

su interior. Revise los fusibles

correspondientes antes de reemplazar

algún componente eléctrico.

Nota: Siempre reemplace un fusible por

otro que tenga el amperaje especificado. El

uso de un fusible con un amperaje mayor

puede causar graves daños al cableado y

podría provocar un incendio.

Amperaje y color de los fusibles estándar

Color

Cartucho con

eslabón

fusible

Maxifusibles

de cartucho

MaxifusiblesFusibles

estándar

MinifusiblesAmperaje del

fusible

---GrisGris2A

---VioletaVioleta3A

---RosaRosa4A

---CanelaCanela5A

---CaféCafé7,5A

---RojoRojo10A

---AzulAzul15A

AzulAzulAmarilloAmarilloAmarillo20A

NaturalNatural-NaturalNatural25A

RosaRosaVerdeVerdeVerde30A

VerdeVerdeNaranja--40A

RojoRojoRojo--50A

AmarilloAmarilloAzul--60A

Café-Canela--70A

NegroNegroNatural--80A

226

Fusibles

TABLA DE ESPECIFICACIONES

DE FUSIBLES

Caja de prefusibles

Su vehículo tiene instalada una caja de

prefusibles ubicada en el compartimiento

del motor forjado al borne positivo de

batería. Esta caja contiene varios fusibles

de alta potencia. Si se requiere el

reemplazado de estos fusibles de alta

potencia, consulte a su distribuidor

autorizado.

Caja de distribución eléctrica

AVISOS

Siempre desconecte la batería del

vehículo antes de trabajar con

fusibles de alta potencia.

AVISOS

Para reducir el riesgo de una

descarga eléctrica, siempre vuelva a

colocar la cubierta en la caja de

distribución de la corriente antes de

conectar nuevamente la batería del

vehículo o de rellenar los depósitos de

líquidos.

La caja de distribución eléctrica se ubica

en el compartimiento del motor. Contiene

fusibles de alta potencia que protegen a

los sistemas eléctricos centrales del

vehículo contra sobrecargas.

Si la batería se ha desconectado y vuelto

a conectar, se debe reiniciar algunas

funciones. Ver Cambio de la batería del

vehículo (página 249).

E129925

Levante la palanca de liberación en la

parte posterior de la tapa para retirarla.

Los fusibles de alta potencia están

codificados de la siguiente manera:

227

Fusibles

Componentes protegidosAmperaje de los fusi-

bles

Número de fusible/

relevador

Sin uso-F1

Sin uso-F2

Sin uso-F3

Sin uso-F4

Sin uso-F5

Sin uso-F6

Sistema de frenos antibloqueo / bomba

de programa de estabilidad electrónica

40A**F7

Válvula de programa de estabilidad elec-

trónica

30A**F8

Sin uso-F9

Motor del soplador del calefactor40A**F10

Sin uso-F11

Fusible del relevador del módulo de control

del tren motriz

30A**F12

Relevador del motor arranque30A**F13

Ventana eléctrica trasera (sin unidad de

control de la puerta)

25A**F14

Encendedor/Tomacorriente delantero20A**F15

Ventana eléctrica delantera (sin unidad de

control de la puerta)

25A**F16

Tomacorriente trasero20A**F17

Tomacorriente central20A**F18

Sistema de frenos antibloqueo / alimenta-

ción 15 de programa de estabilidad electró-

nica

5A*F19

Claxon15A*F20

Interruptor de la luz de freno5A*F21

228

Fusibles

Componentes protegidosAmperaje de los fusi-

bles

Número de fusible/

relevador

Sistema de monitoreo de la batería del

vehículo

15A*F22

Bobinas del relevador5A*F23

Módulo de interruptor de luz5A*F24

Espejo eléctrico exterior (sin unidad de

control de la puerta)

10A*F25

Mantenimiento de energía5A*F26

Embrague del A/A15A*F27

Alimentación del vehículo - inyector de

combustible

10A*F28

Desempañador de la ventana trasera25A*F29

Sin uso-F30

Ventilador de enfriamiento de aceite de la

unidad de transferencia de potencia

(especificación de Medio Oriente)

5A*F31

Alimentación de vehículo15A*F32

Alimentación del vehículo 210A*F33

Alimentación del vehículo 310A*F34

Alimentación del vehículo 415A*F35

Obturadores activos de la parrilla5A*F36

Sensor de clasificación del ocupante /

alimentación de indicador de desactivación

de la bolsa de aire del pasajero

10A*F37

Módulo de control de motor / Alimentación

de ignición de módulo de control de trans-

misión

5A*F38

Luces diurnas automáticas / Alimentación

de ignición de módulo de control de faro

delantero

5A*F39

Alimentación 15 de dirección electrónica

servoasistida

5A*F40

229

Fusibles

Componentes protegidosAmperaje de los fusi-

bles

Número de fusible/

relevador

Alimentación 15 de módulo de control de

la carrocería

20A*F41

Limpiador trasero15A*F42

Alimentación de módulo de control de los

faros delanteros

15A*F43

Luces diurnas automáticas de niebla

delanteras

15A*F44

Sin uso-F45

Módulos de motor del limpiador inteligente50A**F46

Sin uso-F47

Teclado5A*F48

Sin uso-R1

ClaxonRelevador microR2

Ventilador de enfriamiento de aceite de la

unidad de transferencia de potencia

(especificación de Medio Oriente)

-R3

Luces diurnas automáticas de niebla

delanteras

-R4

Sin uso-R5

Sin uso-R6

Sin uso-R7

Relevador de demora de accesoriosRelevador miniR8

Sin uso-R9

Relevador del motor arranqueRelevador miniR10

Embrague del A/ARelevador microR11

Ventilador de enfriamiento.Relevador de

alimentación

R12

Soplador del calefactorRelevador miniR13

Relevador de control del motorRelevador miniR14

230

Fusibles

Componentes protegidosAmperaje de los fusi-

bles

Número de fusible/

relevador

Ventana trasera calentada.Relevador de

alimentación

R15

Encendido 15Relevador de

alimentación

R16

*Mini fusibles **Fusibles de cartucho

Tablero de fusibles del

compartimiento de pasajeros

El tablero de fusibles se encuentra en el

lado derecho, debajo de la guantera.

231

Fusibles

E129926

Los fusibles están codificados de la

siguiente manera:

232

Fusibles

Componentes protegidosAmperaje de los fusi-

bles

Número de fusible/

relevador

Alimentación de la bomba de combustible,

medidor de masa de aire

20A56

Sin uso-57

Sin uso-58

Transceptor del sistema pasivo antirrobo5A59

Luz interior, Paquete de interruptores de la

puerta del conductor, Iluminación de la

guantera, Banco de interruptores de la

consola de toldo

10A60

Encendedor, Tomacorriente20A61

Módulo sensor de lluvia, espejo de

atenuación automática

5A62

Sin uso-63

Sin uso-64

Apertura de la puerta levadiza10A65

Alimentación de desbloqueo de puerta del

conductor, seguro doble

20A66

SYNC®, pantalla multifunción, módulo del

sistema de posicionamiento global

7,5A67

Sin uso-68

Cluster5A69

Alimentación central de bloqueo y

desbloqueo de seguros

20A70

Unidad de control de la calefacción (A/A

manual), Doble control electrónico auto-

mático de temperatura

10A71

Módulo del volante de dirección7,5A72

Enlace de comunicaciones del conector5A73

SUministro de faro de luces altas15A74

Alimentación de los faros de niebla15A75

233

Fusibles

Componentes protegidosAmperaje de los fusi-

bles

Número de fusible/

relevador

Alimentación de la luz de reversa10A76

Alimentación del lavaparabrisas20A77

Interruptor de encendido, Botón de

arranque

5A78

Radio, Sistema de navegación, Repro-

ductor de DVD, Pantalla táctil, Interruptor

de luces de emergencia, Interruptores de

seguros de las puertas

15A79

Alimentación del toldo corredizo20A80

Receptor de frecuencia de radio5A81

Relevador del lavaparabrisas20A82

Bloqueo central20A83

Alimentación de desbloqueo de puerta del

conductor, seguro doble

20A84

Alimentación 15 electrónica7,5A85

Módulo de la bolsa de aire, sistema de

clasificación del pasajero, indicador de

desactivación de bolsa de aire del pasajero

10A86

Sin uso-87

Sin uso-88

Sin uso-89

Tablero de fusibles del

compartimiento de equipaje

El tablero de fusibles se encuentra en el

compartimiento de equipaje, detrás del

alojamiento de la rueda del lado del

pasajero. Desmonte la cubierta del tablero

de fusibles para acceder a los fusibles.

234

Fusibles

E129927

Los fusibles están codificados de la

siguiente manera:

Componentes protegidosAmperaje de los fusi-

bles

Número de fusible/

relevador

Módulo de entrada de compuerta levadiza

manos libre

5AF1

Módulo del sistema de apertura y arranque

sin llave

10AF2

Manijas de las puertas de un vehículo sin

llaves

5AF3

Unidad de control de la puerta delantera

izquierda

25AF4

Unidad de control de la puerta delantera

derecha

25AF5

Unidad de control de la puerta trasera

izquierda

25AF6

Unidad de control de la puerta trasera

derecha

25AF7

Sin uso-F8

Motor del asiento del conductor25AF9

Alimentación lógica de módulo de

memoria del asiento del conductor

5AF10

Alimentación de la bobina de encendido

trasera

5AF11

235

Fusibles

Componentes protegidosAmperaje de los fusi-

bles

Número de fusible/

relevador

Sin uso-F12

Sin uso-F13

Sin uso-F14

Sin uso-F15

Sin uso-F16

Sin uso-F17

Sin uso-F18

Sin uso-F19

Sin uso-F20

Sin uso-F21

Sin uso-F22

Amplificador de audio25AF23

Convertidor de alimentación CC/CA30AF24

Compuerta levadiza eléctrica25AF25

Accesorios / Alimentación 1 módulo 30 de

arrastre de remolque

40AF26

Sin uso-F27

Sin uso-F28

Sistema de detección puntos ciegos,

cámara retrovisora con asistencia de

estacionamiento

5AF29

Módulo de ayuda de estacionamiento5AF30

Sin uso-F31

Convertidor de alimentación CC/CA5AF32

Sin uso-F33

Calefactor del asiento del conductor20AF34

Calefactor del asiento del pasajero20AF35

236

Fusibles

Componentes protegidosAmperaje de los fusi-

bles

Número de fusible/

relevador

Sin uso-F36

Toldo corredizo5AF37

Sin uso-F38

Sin uso-F39

Sin uso-F40

Sin uso-F41

Sin uso-F42

Sin uso-F43

Sin uso-F44

Sin uso-F45

Sin uso-F46

Relevador trasero 15Relevador de

alimentación

Sin uso-R2

Sin uso-R3

Sin uso-R4

Sin uso-R5

Sin uso-R6

237

Fusibles

INFORMACIÓN GENERAL

Lleve su vehículo a servicio en forma

regular para ayudar a mantener su valía

de carretera y su valor de reventa. Existe

una gran red de distribuidores Ford

autorizados disponibles para ayudarle con

su experiencia en servicios profesionales.

Creemos que sus técnicos capacitados

especialmente son los mejores calificados

para dar servicio a su vehículo en forma

adecuada y experta. Ellos cuentan con el

respaldo de un amplio rango de

herramientas altamente especializadas,

desarrolladas específicamente para dar

servicio a su vehículo.

Para ayudarlo con el mantenimiento de su

vehículo, le entregamos la información de

mantenimiento programado, la cual

facilita el seguimiento del servicio de

rutina. Ver Reparación del vehículo

(página 437).

Si su vehículo requiere servicio profesional,

un distribuidor autorizado puede

proporcionar las refacciones y el servicio

necesarios. Consulte el Manual de

garantías para saber qué refacciones y

servicios se cubren.

Use solo los combustibles, lubricantes,

líquidos y refacciones recomendados que

cumplan con las especificaciones. Las

refacciones Motorcraft® están diseñadas

y fabricadas para proporcionar el mejor

rendimiento en su vehículo.

Precauciones

• No trabaje con el motor caliente.

• Asegúrese que no quede nada

atrapado en las partes en movimiento.

• No trabaje en un vehículo con el motor

en funcionamiento dentro de un

espacio cerrado, a menos que esté

seguro que tiene suficiente ventilación.

• Mantenga todas las llamas al

descubierto y cualquier otro material

incandescente (por ejemplo,

cigarrillos) lejos de la batería del

vehículo y de todas las piezas

relacionadas con el sistema de

combustible.

Trabajo con el motor apagado

1. Coloque el freno de estacionamiento

y cambie a P (Estacionamiento).

2. Apague el motor y quite la llave (si está

equipada).

3. Bloquee las ruedas.

Trabajo con el motor encendido

ALERTA

Para reducir el riesgo de daño al

vehículo y/o quemaduras

personales, no arranque el motor con

el filtro de aire extraído y no lo saque

mientras el motor está funcionando.

1. Coloque el freno de estacionamiento

y cambie a P (Estacionamiento).

2. Bloquee las ruedas.

238

Mantenimiento

APERTURA Y CIERRE DEL

COFRE

E142457

1. Desde el interior del vehículo, jale la

manija de apertura del cofre que se

encuentra debajo del tablero de

instrumentos.

E142458

2. Vaya a la parte delantera del vehículo

y localice el pestillo auxiliar, situado

debajo del frente de la tapa del cofre

(a la izquierda del centro), y libérelo

empujándolo hacia la derecha.

3. Abra el cofre y asegure la tapa con la

varilla de soporte.

Para cerrar el cofre, baje el cofre y déjelo

caer sobre su propio peso de una altura de

al menos 20-30 cm (8-11 pulg).

Nota: Asegúrese de que la tapa del cofre

esté perfectamente cerrada.

239

Mantenimiento

REVISIÓN EL COMPARTIMIENTO DEL MOTOR - 1.6L ECOBOOST®

A B C D E

FGH

E142459

Depósito de líquido refrigerante del motorA

Tapón de llenado del aceite del motorB

Depósito de fluido de frenosC

BateríaD

Caja de distribución eléctricaE

Conjunto del filtro de aireF

Varilla indicadora de aceite del motorG

Depósito del líquido lavaparabrisasH

240

Mantenimiento

REVISIÓN EL COMPARTIMIENTO DEL MOTOR - 2.0L ECOBOOST®

C D E

FGH

E146022

Depósito de líquido refrigerante del motorA

Varilla indicadora de aceite del motorB

Depósito de fluido de frenosC

BateríaD

Caja de distribución eléctricaE

Conjunto del filtro de aireF

Tapón de llenado del aceite del motorG

Depósito del líquido lavaparabrisasH

241

Mantenimiento

REVISIÓN EL COMPARTIMIENTO DEL MOTOR - 2.5L

A CB D E GF

E146023

Depósito del líquido lavaparabrisasA

Depósito de líquido refrigerante del motorB

Tapón de llenado del aceite del motorC

Varilla indicadora de aceite del motorD

Depósito de fluido de frenosE

BateríaF

Caja de distribución eléctricaG

Conjunto del filtro de aireH

242

Mantenimiento

VARILLA INDICADORA DE

NIVEL DE ACEITE DEL MOTOR

- 1.6L ECOBOOST®

E146020

MÍNA

MÁXB

VARILLA INDICADORA DE

NIVEL DE ACEITE DEL MOTOR

- 2.5L/2.0L ECOBOOST®

E142462

MÍNA

MÁXB

COMPROBACIÓN DEL ACEITE

DE MOTOR

Nota: Compruebe el nivel antes de arrancar

el motor.

Nota: Asegúrese de que el nivel está entre

las marcas de MIN y MAX.

1. Asegúrese de que el vehículo esté en

una superficie nivelada.

2. Apague el motor y espere unos 10

minutos a que el aceite se drene hacia

el colector de aceite.

3. Quite la varilla indicadora de nivel y

límpiela con un trapo limpio que no

deje pelusas. Vuelva a colocar la varilla

indicadora de nivel y quítela

nuevamente para comprobar el nivel

del aceite.

Si el nivel está en la marca MIN, agregue

aceite inmediatamente.

Cómo agregar aceite de motor

Nota: No quite el tapón de llenado cuando

el motor esté funcionando.

Nota: No agregue aceite sobre la marca

MAX. Los niveles de aceite por encima de

la marca MAX pueden causar daños en el

motor.

E142732

243

Mantenimiento

Utilice exclusivamente aceites para

motores de gasolina certificados por

American Petroleum Institute (API). Un

aceite con este símbolo de marca

registrada cumple con las normas actuales

de protección del sistema de emisión de

gases y motor y los requerimientos de

ahorro de combustible del International

Lubricants Specification Advisory Council

(ILSAC), integrado por fabricantes de

automóviles de los Estados Unidos y

Japón.

1. Quite el tapón de llenado.

2. Agregue aceite de motor que cumpla

con las especificaciones de Ford. Ver

Capacidades y Especificaciones

(página 296).

3. Vuelva a colocar el tapón de llenado.

Gírelo hasta que sienta una fuerte

resistencia.

Restablecimiento del sistema de

monitoreo de la vida útil del aceite

Nota: Restablezca el monitoreo de la vida

útil del aceites solo luego de un cambio de

aceite.

1. Gire la llave de encendido a la posición

de encendido. No arranque el motor.

En vehículos con botón de arranque de

presión, mantenga presionado el botón

de arranque por 2 segundos sin oprimir

el pedal de freno. No intente arrancar

el motor.

2. Presione al mismo tiempo el

acelerador y el pedal del freno.

3. Mantenga ambos pedales presionados

a fondo.

4. Después de tres segundos, aparecerá

el mensaje Service: Oil reset in prog.

5. Después de 25 segundos, aparecerá el

mensaje Service: Oil reset complete.

6. Libere el acelerador y el pedal del

freno.

7. El mensaje Service: Oil reset complete

desaparecerá.

8. Gire la llave a la posición OFF

(Apagado). En vehículos con botón de

arranque de presión, oprima el botón

de arranque para apagar el vehículo

por completo.

COMPROBACIÓN DEL

REFRIGERANTE DE MOTOR

Revisión del líquido refrigerante

del motor

Cuando el motor esté frío, revise la

concentración y nivel del líquido

refrigerante del motor en los intervalos

indicados en el registro de mantenimiento

programado. Ver Reparación del

vehículo (página 437).

Nota: Asegúrese de que el nivel está entre

las marcas de MIN y MAX en el depósito del

líquido refrigerante.

Nota: El líquido refrigerante se expande

cuando está caliente. Es posible que el nivel

sobrepasa la marca MAX.

Nota: Si el nivel está en la marca MIN, por

debajo del la marca MIN o vacío, agregue

líquido refrigerante inmediatamente.

Consulte Llenado de líquido refrigerante

del motor en este capítulo.

La concentración de refrigerante se debe

mantener en 50%.

Nota: Para mejores resultados, la

concentración del refrigerante se debe

probar con un refractómetro, como la

herramienta ROB75240 de Rotunda,

disponible con su distribuidor. Ford no

recomiende el uso de hidrómetros ni tiras

de prueba de refrigerante para medir las

concentraciones del refrigerante.

244

Mantenimiento

Nota: Los líquidos del automóvil no son

intercambiables. No utilice líquido

refrigerante del motor o anticongelante o

líquido de lavaparabrisas para una función

diferente a la especificada, ni en otra parte

del vehículo.

Llenado del líquido refrigerante del

motor

AVISOS

No agregue líquido refrigerante del

motor cuando el motor esté caliente.

Al salir, el vapor y los líquidos

hirvientes de un sistema de enfriamiento

caliente pueden producirle graves

quemaduras. También puede sufrir

quemaduras si derrama líquido refrigerante

en las piezas calientes del motor.

No ponga líquido refrigerante del

motor en el depósito del líquido

lavaparabrisas. Si se rocía en el

parabrisas, el líquido refrigerante del motor

puede dificultar la visión a través del

parabrisas.

Para disminuir el riesgo de sufrir

lesiones personales, asegúrese que

el motor esté frío antes de quitar el

tapón de descarga de presión del líquido

refrigerante. El sistema de enfriamiento

está bajo presión, por lo que pueden salir

con fuerza vapor y líquido caliente cuando

se suelta ligeramente la tapa.

No agregue líquido refrigerante por

sobre la marca MAX.

Nota: No use selladores de fugas,

selladores para sistemas de enfriamiento

ni aditivos, ya que pueden dañar los

sistemas de enfriamiento o calefacción del

motor. Este tipo de daño no está cubierto

por la garantía del vehículo.

Nota: Durante el funcionamiento normal

del vehículo, el líquido refrigerante del motor

puede cambiar de color de anaranjado a

rosado o rojo pálido. Siempre y cuando el

líquido refrigerante del motor sea claro y no

esté contaminado, este cambio de color no

indica que se haya echado a perder ni que

deba drenarse, reemplazarse ni que el

sistema deba lavarse.

• No mezcle diferentes colores o tipos

de líquido refrigerante en su vehículo.

Asegúrese de usar el líquido

refrigerante correcto. La mezcla de

líquidos refrigerantes del motor puede

dañar el sistema de enfriamiento del

motor. El uso de un líquido refrigerante

inadecuado puede dañar los

componentes del motor y del sistema

de enfriamiento e invalidar la garantía.

Use líquido refrigerante de motor

prediluido que cumpla con la

especificación de Ford. Ver

Capacidades y Especificaciones

(página 296).

• En caso de emergencia, se puede

agregar una gran cantidad de agua sin

líquido refrigerante del motor para

poder llegar a un taller de servicio para

su vehículo. En este caso, el sistema

de enfriamiento se debe drenar, limpiar

químicamente con Premium Cooling

System Flush de Motorcraft y rellenar

con líquido refrigerante de motor

prediluido tan pronto como sea

posible. Agregar solamente agua (sin

líquido refrigerante del motor) puede

provocar daños en el motor por

corrosión, sobrecalentamiento o

congelamiento.

245

Mantenimiento

• No use alcohol, metanol, agua salobre

ni ningún líquido refrigerante del motor

mezclado con anticongelante (líquido

refrigerante) que contenga alcohol o

metanol. El alcohol y otros líquidos

pueden provocar daños en el motor

por sobrecalentamiento o

congelamiento.

• No agregue inhibidores o aditivos

adicionales al líquido refrigerante.

Éstos pueden ser dañinos y pueden

comprometer la protección contra la

corrosión del líquido refrigerante del

motor.

Desatornille la tapa lentamente. Cualquier

presión escapará cuando desatornille la

tapa.

Agregue líquido refrigerante de motor

prediluido que cumpla con la

especificación de Ford. Ver Capacidades

y Especificaciones (página 296).

Cada vez que se agregue líquido

refrigerante, el nivel de éste en el depósito

del líquido refrigerante se debe revisar las

próximas veces que conduzca el vehículo.

De ser necesario, agregue suficiente líquido

refrigerante de motor prediluido para llevar

el nivel del líquido al punto apropiado.

Líquido refrigerante del motor

reciclado

Ford Motor Company no recomienda el

uso de un líquido refrigerante reciclado,

dado que aún no se encuentra disponible

un proceso de reciclaje aprobado por Ford.

Elimine siempre de manera responsable

los líquidos usados en automóviles. Siga

las normas y reglamentos de su

comunidad para reciclar y eliminar los

líquidos de automóviles.

Climas extremos

Si conduce en climas extremadamente

fríos:

• Puede ser necesario solicitar que un

distribuidor autorizado de Ford

aumente la concentración del líquido

refrigerante por encima del 50%.

• Una concentración del refrigerante de

60% proporcionará una protección

mejorada en el punto de congelación.

Las concentraciones de líquido

refrigerante del motor por encima del

60% disminuyen las características de

protección contra el

sobrecalentamiento que posee el

líquido refrigerante del motor y pueden

causar daños en el motor

Si conduce en climas extremadamente

cálidos:

• Puede ser necesario solicitar que un

distribuidor autorizado de Ford

disminuya la concentración del líquido

refrigerante a un 40%.

• Una concentración del refrigerante de

40% proporcionará una protección

mejorada contra el

sobrecalentamiento. Las

concentraciones de líquido refrigerante

del motor por debajo de 40%

disminuyen las propiedades de

protección contra

corrosión/congelamiento del líquido

refrigerante del motor y pueden causar

daños en el motor.

Los vehículos que se manejan durante

todo el año en climas que no son extremos

deben usar líquido refrigerante prediluido

para un sistema de enfriamiento óptimo y

para la protección del motor.

246

Mantenimiento

Lo que debe saber sobre el

enfriamiento de seguridad a

prueba de fallas

Si se agota el suministro de líquido

refrigerante del motor, esta función

permite manejar temporalmente el

vehículo antes que aumenten los daños

en los componentes debido al aumento

de la temperatura. El margen “seguridad

ante fallas” depende de las temperaturas

ambientales, de la carga del vehículo y del

terreno.

Cómo funciona el sistema de

enfriamiento a prueba de fallas

Si el motor comienza a sobrecalentarse,

el indicador de temperatura del líquido

refrigerante del motor llegará al área H

(Caliente) y:

Se encenderá la luz de

advertencia de temperatura del

líquido refrigerante .

Se encenderá el indicador de

servicio del motor a la brevedad

Si alcanza una condición de temperatura

excesiva preestablecida, el motor cambia

automáticamente al funcionamiento

alterno de cilindros. Cada cilindro

desactivado actúa como una bomba de

aire y enfría el motor.

Cuando esto sucede, el vehículo sigue

funcionando. Sin embargo:

• La potencia del motor será limitada.

• El sistema de aire acondicionado se

desactivará.

El funcionamiento continuo incrementará

la temperatura del motor y éste se

detendrá por completo, provocando un

aumento en el esfuerzo de la dirección y

del frenado.

Una vez que el motor se enfríe, podrá

volver a arrancarlo. Lleve el vehículo a un

distribuidor autorizado lo antes posible

para minimizar el daño del motor.

Cuándo se activa el modo a prueba de

fallas

AVISOS

El modo de seguridad ante fallas

sólo se debe usar en emergencias.

Haga funcionar el vehículo en modo

de seguridad ante fallas sólo el tiempo

necesario para conducir el vehículo a un

lugar seguro y buscar ayuda para

reparación inmediatamente. Cuando el

vehículo está en modo de seguridad ante

fallas, puede tener potencia limitada, no

podrá mantener el funcionamiento a alta

velocidad y podría apagarse

completamente, sin advertencia previa,

provocando pérdida de la potencia en el

motor, la asistencia de dirección hidráulica

y la asistencia de frenos de potencia, lo

que puede incrementar la posibilidad de

accidentes con heridas graves.

Nunca quite el tapón del depósito

del líquido refrigerante mientras el

motor esté caliente o en

funcionamiento.

La potencia del motor es limitada en el

modo a prueba de fallas; por lo tanto,

maneje con cuidado. El vehículo no podrá

mantener el funcionamiento en alta

velocidad y el motor funcionará en forma

irregular. Recuerde que el motor es capaz

de detenerse por completo en forma

automática para evitar daños en el motor,

por lo tanto:

1. Sálgase del camino lo antes posible y

apague el motor.

2. Haga que su vehículo sea trasladado

a un distribuidor autorizado.

3. Si esto no es posible, espere un período

corto para que el motor se enfríe.

247

Mantenimiento

4. Revise el nivel de líquido refrigerante y

llénelo si está bajo.

5. Vuelva a arrancar el motor y lleve el

vehículo a un distribuidor autorizado.

Nota: Si maneja el vehículo sin reparar el

problema del motor, las probabilidades de

daño en el motor aumentan. Lleve su

vehículo a un distribuidor autorizado lo

antes posible.

VERIFICACIÓN DEL FLUÍDO DE

LA TRANSMISIÓN

AUTOMÁTICA

Nota: El aceite de la transmisión debe ser

revisado por un distribuidor autorizado. Si

es necesario, el distribuidor autorizado debe

agregar aceite.

La transmisión automática no tiene una

varilla indicadora del nivel de aceite de la

transmisión.

Solicite a un distribuidor autorizado que

revise y cambie el aceite de la transmisión

y el filtro en el intervalo de servicio

correspondiente. Ver Reparación del

vehículo (página 437). La transmisión de

su vehículo no consume aceite. Sin

embargo, el nivel de aceite se debe revisar

si la transmisión no funciona

correctamente; es decir, si se resbala o

cambia lentamente o si observa alguna

señal de fuga de aceite.

No utilice aditivos suplementarios para

aceite de transmisión, otros tratamientos

ni agentes limpiadores. El uso de estos

materiales puede afectar el

funcionamiento de la transmisión y

provocar daños a los componentes

internos de ésta.

VERIFICACIÓN DEL FLUÍDO DE

FRENOS

Los niveles del líquido entre las líneas MIN

y MAX están dentro de los límites normales

de funcionamiento; no es necesario

agregar líquido. Si los niveles de los

líquidos están fuera de los límites normales

de funcionamiento, el rendimiento del

sistema puede verse comprometido;

busque servicio de inmediato en su

distribuidor autorizado.

COMPROBACIÓN DEL FLUIDO

DE LA DIRECCIÓN HIDRÁULICA

Su vehículo está equipado con un sistema

de dirección hidráulica eléctrica (EPS). No

existe un depósito de líquido que revisar ni

rellenar.

FILTRO DE COMBUSTIBLE

Su vehículo está equipado con un filtro de

combustible de por vida que está integrado

al tanque de combustible. No es necesario

realizar mantenimiento periódico ni

reemplazarlo.

COMPROBACIÓN DEL FLUIDO

DEL LAVADOR

ALERTA

Si hace funcionar el vehículo a

temperaturas inferiores a 5 °C

(40 °F), use líquido lavaparabrisas

con protección anticongelante. No usar

líquido lavaparabrisas con protección

anticongelante en climas fríos puede

producir una visión difusa a través del

parabrisas y aumentar el riesgo de lesiones

o de accidentes.

248

Mantenimiento

Nota: Los sistemas de lavadores delantero

y trasero se abastecen desde el mismo

depósito.

Agregue líquido en el depósito si el nivel

está bajo. Use sólo un líquido

lavaparabrisas que cumpla con las

especificaciones de Ford. Ver

Capacidades y Especificaciones (página

296).

Es probable que las normas estatales o

locales de compuestos orgánicos volátiles

restrinjan el uso de metanol, un aditivo

anticongelante común para

lavaparabrisas. Los líquidos lavaparabrisas

que contienen agentes anticongelantes

sin metanol sólo se deben usar si brindan

una protección ante clima frío sin dañar el

acabado de la pintura del vehículo, las

hojas de los limpiadores ni el sistema del

lavador.

CAMBIO DE LA BATERÍA DEL

VEHÍCULO

AVISOS

Normalmente, las baterías producen

gases explosivos los cuales pueden

producir lesiones personales. Por

esto, no permita que llamas, chispas o

sustancias encendidas se acerquen a la

batería. Al trabajar cerca de la batería,

protéjase siempre la cara y los ojos.

Suministre siempre una ventilación

adecuada.

Al levantar una batería con caja de

plástico, la presión excesiva en las

paredes del extremo puede hacer

que el ácido fluya a través de los tapones

de ventilación y provoque lesiones

personales o daños al vehículo o a la

batería. Levante la batería con un

portabaterías o con las manos apoyadas

en esquinas opuestas.

AVISOS

Mantenga las baterías fuera del

alcance de los niños. Las baterías

contienen ácido sulfúrico. Evite el

contacto con la piel, los ojos o la ropa.

Protéjase los ojos al trabajar cerca de la

batería para resguardarse contra posibles

salpicaduras de solución ácida. En caso de

que el ácido le caiga en la piel o en los ojos,

lávelos inmediatamente con agua durante

15 minutos mínimo y solicite ayuda médica

urgentemente. Lo mismo si ingiere el ácido.

Los bornes, las terminales y los

accesorios relacionados con la

batería contienen plomo y

compuestos de plomo. Lávese las manos

después de manipular.

Su vehículo tiene una batería Motorcraft

libre de mantenimiento y que

normalmente no requiere agua adicional

durante su vida útil.

Nota: Si la batería tiene una cubierta o un

protector, asegúrese que se vuelva a instalar

después de limpiar o reemplazar la batería.

Para un funcionamiento más prolongado

y sin problemas, mantenga la parte

superior de la batería limpia y seca.

Además, asegúrese que los cables de la

batería siempre estén firmemente

conectados a las terminales de ésta.

Si observa indicios de corrosión en la

batería o en las terminales, quite los cables

de las terminales y límpielos con un cepillo

de alambre. Puede neutralizar el ácido con

una solución de bicarbonato de sodio y

agua.

Se recomienda que desconecte la terminal

negativa del cable de la batería si su

intención es guardar su vehículo por un

período de tiempo prolongado.

249

Mantenimiento

Para asegurar el buen funcionamiento del

sistema de administración de la batería

(BMS), ningún dispositivo eléctrico

añadido al vehículo deberá tener su

conexión a tierra directamente al borne

negativo de la batería. La conexión directa

al borne negativo de la batería puede

causar mediciones inexactas del estado

de la batería y posibles fallas en el sistema.

Nota: Los accesorios o componentes

eléctricos o electrónicos añadidos al

vehículo por el distribuidor o el propietario

pueden afectar adversamente el

rendimiento y la durabilidad de la batería,

así como el desempeño de otros sistemas

eléctricos del vehículo.

Cuando sea necesario reemplazar la

batería, ésta deberá ser reemplazada

exclusivamente con la batería de refacción

que Ford recomiende, de modo que

coincida con los requisitos eléctricos del

vehículo.

Cuando la batería se desconecta o se

instala una nueva, la transmisión

automática debe volver a aprender su

estrategia adaptativa. Como resultado, la

transmisión puede cambiar firmemente la

primera vez que se conduzca. Esta

operación se considera normal y el

funcionamiento de la transmisión se

actualizará completamente a su

percepción de cambio óptima.

Si la batería se ha desconectado o si se ha

instalado una batería nueva, el reloj y las

estaciones de radio preestablecidas se

deben restablecer al volver a conectar la

batería.

Nota: Siempre elimine de manera

responsable las baterías de automóviles.

Respete las normas locales autorizadas

para eliminarlas. Llame a su centro de

reciclaje local autorizado para averiguar más

acerca del reciclaje de baterías de

automóviles.

COMPROBACIÓN DE LAS

HOJAS DEL LIMPIADOR

E142463

Pase la punta de los dedos sobre el borde

de la hoja para comprobar la aspereza.

Frote las hojas del limpiador con líquido

lavaparabrisas o agua aplicada con una

esponja o paño suave.

CAMBIO DE LAS HOJAS DEL

LIMPIADOR

Los brazos del limpiador se pueden mover

manualmente cuando el motor está

apagado. Esto facilita el reemplazo de las

hojas y la limpieza debajo de las hojas.

E129990

1. Aparte la hoja y el brazo del limpiador

del vidrio.

2. Oprima los botones de bloqueo juntos.

3. Gire y retire la hoja del limpiador.

4. Instale siguiendo el procedimiento de

desmontaje en orden inverso.

250

Mantenimiento

Nota: Asegúrese que la hoja del limpiador

se asegure en su lugar. Baje el brazo del

limpiador y la hoja de vuelta al parabrisas.

Los brazos del limpiador regresan

automáticamente a su posición normal

cuando se activa el encendido.

Para modificar las hojas traseras, haga lo

E130060

1. Levante el brazo del limpiador.

2. Levemente gire la hoja del limpiador

desde el brazo del limpiador.

3. Desactive la hoja del limpiador desde

el brazo del limpiador.

4. Desmonte la hoja del limpiador.

5. Instale siguiendo el procedimiento de

desmontaje en orden inverso.

Nota: Asegúrese que la hoja del limpiador

se asegure en su lugar.

Cambie las hojas de los limpiadores al

menos una vez al año para obtener un

rendimiento óptimo.

La calidad de los limpiadores puede

mejorar si se limpian las hojas de los

limpiadores y el parabrisas.

CAMBIO DEL FILTRO DE AIRE

DEL MOTOR

ALERTA

Para reducir el riesgo de daño al

vehículo y/o quemaduras

personales, no arranque el motor con

el filtro de aire extraído y no lo saque

mientras el motor está funcionando.

Al cambiar el elemento del filtro de aire,

use solo el elemento del filtro de aire

indicado. Ver Capacidades y

Especificaciones (página 296).

En los vehículos equipados con

EcoBoost®: al dar servicio al filtro de aire

es importante que ninguna materia extraña

entre al sistema de inducción de aire. El

motor y el turbocargador pueden sufrir

daños, incluso con partículas muy

pequeñas.

Cambie el elemento del filtro de aire a los

intervalos correspondientes. Ver

Reparación del vehículo (página 437).

Nota: No usar el filtro de aire correcto

puede causar daños graves al motor. La

garantía del usuario se puede anular por

cualquier daño al motor, si no usa el

elemento del filtro de aire correcto.

Motores 1.6L y 2.0L EcoBoost®

E142710

251

Mantenimiento

Motor 2.5L

E142711

1. Afloje los tornillos de la abrazadera de

la tubería de aire que la sujeta a la

bandeja del conjunto del filtro de aire.

2. Separe la tubería de aire limpia del

purificador de aire.

3. Quite el purificador de aire del vehículo.

4. Afloje los tornillos que aseguran la

cubierta del alojamiento del filtro de

aire.

5. Separe cuidadosamente las dos

mitades del alojamiento del filtro de

aire.

6. Saque el elemento del filtro de aire del

alojamiento.

7. Limpie el alojamiento y la cubierta del

filtro de aire para eliminar cualquier

suciedad o residuo y garantizar un buen

sellado.

8. Primero deslice al interior el extremo

abierto del filtro de aire, debajo de la

lengüeta. Luego, empuje el extremo

cerrado hacia el fondo de la bandeja.

El extremo cerrado debe ajustarse

dentro de la ranura de la bandeja. La

lengüeta del extremo cerrado debe

estar orientada hacia abajo y ajustarse

entre los dientes de la bandeja.

9. Vuelva a instalar la cubierta del

alojamiento del filtro de aire y apriete

los tornillos.

10. Vuelva a instalar el conjunto del

purificador de aire en el vehículo.

11. Vuelva a instalar el conjunto de la

tubería de aire limpio en el conjunto del

purificador de aire.

12. Apriete los tornillos de sujeción de la

tubería de aire.

AJUSTE DE LOS FAROS

PRINCIPALES

Ajuste de la alineación vertical

Los faros del vehículo se han alineado

correctamente en la planta de ensamblaje.

Si su vehículo ha tenido algún accidente,

un distribuidor autorizado debe revisar la

alineación de los faros.

E142592

2,4 m (8 pies)A

Altura del centro del faro al

suelo

7,6 m (25 pies)C

Línea horizontal de referenciaD

Vehículos con faros de halógeno

1. Estacione el vehículo directamente

frente a una pared o pantalla sobre una

superficie nivelada, a unos 7,6 metros

(25 pies) de distancia.

252

Mantenimiento

2. Mida la altura del piso al centro del faro

y ponga, a esa altura, una línea de

referencia horizontal de 2,4 m (8 pies)

de largo en la pared o la pantalla

vertical (un trozo de cinta adhesiva

sirve).

Nota: Para ver un patrón de luz más claro

para el ajuste, es posible que quiera

bloquear la luz de un faro delantero

mientras ajusta el otro.

3. Encienda la luz baja de los faros para

iluminar la pared o pantalla y abra el

cofre.

E142465

4. En la pared o pantalla observará una

zona plana de luz de alta intensidad

ubicada en la parte superior del lado

derecho del haz de luz. Si el borde

superior de la zona de luz de alta

intensidad no está en la línea de

referencia horizontal, será necesario

ajustar el faro.

E142467

5. Localice el ajustador vertical de cada

faro. Con un desarmador Phillips #2,

gire el ajustador a la derecha o a la

izquierda para dirigir el faro. El borde

horizontal de la luz más brillante debe

tocar la línea de referencia horizontal.

6. Cierre el cofre y apague las luces.

Vehículos con faros de descarga de alta

intensidad

1. Estacione el vehículo directamente

frente a una pared o pantalla sobre una

superficie nivelada, a unos 7,6 metros

(25 pies) de distancia.

2. Mida la altura del piso al centro del faro

y ponga, a esa altura, una línea de

referencia horizontal de 2,4 m (8 pies)

de largo en la pared o la pantalla

vertical (un trozo de cinta adhesiva

sirve).

Nota: Para ver un patrón de luz más claro

para el ajuste, es posible que quiera

bloquear la luz de un faro delantero

mientras ajusta el otro.

3. Encienda la luz baja de los faros para

iluminar la pared o pantalla y abra el

cofre.

E142466

4. Hay un límite muy definido (cambio de

luz a oscuridad) en la porción izquierda

del haz de luz. El borde superior de este

límite se debe posicionar 5 cm (2 pulg)

debajo de la línea horizontal de

referencia.

253

Mantenimiento

E142467

5. Localice el ajustador vertical de cada

faro. Con un desarmador Phillips #2,

gire el ajustador a la derecha o a la

izquierda para dirigir el faro.

6. Cierre el cofre y apague las luces.

Ajuste de la alineación horizontal

Este vehículo no requiere alineación

horizontal y no es ajustable.

DESMONTAJE DE FAROS

E142468

1. Asegúrese de que el control de los

faros esté en la posición OFF

(Apagado) y abra el cofre.

2. Quite los dos tornillos del conjunto del

faro.

3. Empuje cuidadosamente el conjunto

del faro hacia la parte delantera del

vehículo para desconectarlo del punto

de fijación inferior.

4. Levante cuidadosamente el lado

exterior del faro y retírelo.

5. Desconecte el conector eléctrico.

CAMBIO DE FOCOS

Condensación en los conjuntos de

luces

Las luces exteriores tienen respiraderos

para compensar los cambios normales de

la presión. La condensación puede ser

producto natural de este diseño. Cuando

penetra aire húmedo en los conjuntos de

luces a través de los respiraderos, existe

la posibilidad de que se produzca

condensación si la temperatura es fría.

Cuando hay condensación normal, se

puede formar una delgada película de

vaho en el interior de la mica. A la larga, el

vaho se despeja y sale a través de los

respiraderos durante el funcionamiento

normal. El tiempo de despeje puede tomar

unas 48 horas en condiciones de clima

seco.

Ejemplos de condensación aceptable:

• Presencia de vaho (sin rayas, marcas

de goteo o gotitas).

• El vaho cubre menos del 50% de la

mica.

Ejemplos de humedad no aceptable

(normalmente causada por una fuga de

agua de la luz):

• Acumulación de agua dentro de la luz.

• Gotas de agua grandes, marcas de

goteo o rayas presentes en el interior

de la mica.

254

Mantenimiento

Lleve el vehículo al distribuidor para que

lo reparen si existe cualquiera de las

condiciones anteriores de humedad no

aceptable.

Reemplazo de los focos de los

faros

ALERTA

Manipule los focos de halógeno con

cuidado y manténgalos fuera del

alcance de los niños. Tome el foco

únicamente de la base plástica y no toque

el cristal. El aceite de las manos puede

hacer que el foco se quiebre la próxima vez

que se usen los faros.

Nota: Si el foco se toca accidentalmente,

éste debe limpiarse con alcohol de fricción

antes de su uso.

Faro delantero:

A B C

E142469

Indicadora lateralA

Faro de luces bajasB

Faro de luces altasC

Faro de luces altas:

2 4

E142470

1. Quite los faros delanteros.

2. Desmonte la tapa de servicio.

3. Desconecte el conector eléctrico.

4. Retire el foco del conjunto del faro

girándolo hacia la izquierda y

extrayéndolo en línea recta.

Faro de luces bajas:

2 4

E142471

1. Quite los faros delanteros.

2. Desmonte la tapa de servicio.

3. Desconecte el conector eléctrico.

4. Retire el foco del conjunto del faro

girándolo hacia la izquierda y

extrayéndolo en línea recta.

Instale los nuevos focos en el orden inverso

al mencionado. Asegúrese de que la

abrazadera de resorte no se dañe ni separe

del conjunto del faro durante el

procedimiento de reemplazo.

255

Mantenimiento

Reemplazo de los focos de los

faros HID (If Equipped)

Los focos delanteros de luz baja de su

vehículo utilizan una fuente de descarga

de gran intensidad. Estas luces funcionan

a alto voltaje. Cuando el foco se quema,

es necesario que el distribuidor autorizado

reemplace el conjunto de la cápsula del

electrodo de encendido y el foco.

Reemplazo de los focos de las

luces indicadoras laterales

E142472

1. Retire el portafocos del conjunto del

faro girándolo hacia la izquierda.

2. Saque el foco jalándolo suavemente

hacia fuera del portafocos.

Instale el nuevo foco en orden inverso.

Reemplazo de focos de niebla,

estacionamiento y direccionales

A B C

E142797

Faro de nieblaA

Luz de estacionamientoB

Luz direccionalC

E142798

1. Retire los tornillos de la protección

contra salpicaduras del

compartimiento de la rueda para

acceder al conjunto de luces.

256

Mantenimiento

E142799

2. Retire el portafocos del soporte

girándolo hacia la izquierda.

3. Desconecte el conector eléctrico.

4. Retire el foco del portafocos jalándolo

en línea recta hacia afuera.

Instale los nuevos focos en el orden inverso

al mencionado.

Reemplazo de focos de las luces

traseras, de freno y direccionales

E142473

1. Asegúrese de que el control de los

faros esté en la posición OFF

(Apagado) y abra la compuerta

levadiza.

2. Quite las dos cubiertas de perno con

un destornillador de punta plana

estándar.

3. Quite los dos tornillos del conjunto de

la luz.

4. Separe cuidadosamente el conjunto

de la luz del vehículo.

E142475

5. Desconecte el conector eléctrico.

6. Desmonte el foco de la luz direccional

o el foco de la luz trasera y de freno

girando el portafocos hacia la

izquierda. Extraiga cuidadosamente el

foco del portafocos.

Instale el nuevo foco en orden inverso.

Reemplazo del conjunto de luces

traseras

Para reemplazar el foco, acuda a su

distribuidor autorizado.

257

Mantenimiento

Reemplazo del foco de la luz de

placa

E72789

1. Libere con cuidado la abrazadera de

muelle.

2. Retire la luz.

3. Retire el foco.

Invierta los pasos para reinstalar el foco.

Reemplazo del foco de la luz

superior de freno

El vehículo está equipado con una luz LED

de alto superior central ubicada en el

estabilizador. Está diseñada para que dure

el tiempo que dura el vehículo. Si es

necesario efectuar un reemplazo, consulte

a su distribuidor autorizado.

TABLA DE ESPECIFICACIONES

DE LOS FOCOS

Los focos de reemplazo se especifican en

la tabla que aparece a continuación. Los

focos de los faros deben tener una marca

“D.O.T.” autorizada para América del Norte

para asegurar el funcionamiento de la luz,

la luminosidad, el patrón de luz y la

visibilidad segura. Los focos correctos no

dañan el conjunto de luces ni anulan la

garantía del conjunto de luces y

proporcionan calidad en el tiempo de

consumo del foco.

Número comercialFunción

9005LLLuces altas de los faros (halógeno)

H1* Faros delanteros (HID)

H11LLLuces bajas de los faros (halógeno)

D3S* Luces bajas de los faros (HID)

168Luz de posición - delantera

WY5WLuz de estacionamiento - delantera (serie

Alta)

194Luz de estacionamiento - delantera (serie

Baja)

WY21WLuces direccionales - delantera (serie Alta)

W21WLuces direccionales - delantera (serie Baja)

H10 (9145)Luces para niebla

258

Mantenimiento

Número comercialFunción

3157KLuces traseras/freno

T20Luces direccionales - trasera

921Luz de reversa

W5WLuces de placa de circulación

LED* Luz superior de freno

LED* Luces interiores

* Para reemplazar estas luces, consulte a su distribuidor autorizado.

Para reemplazar todas las luces del tablero de instrumentos, consulte con su distribuidor

autorizado.

259

Mantenimiento

INFORMACIÓN GENERAL

Su distribuidor autorizado Ford o Lincoln

dispone de muchos productos de calidad

para limpiar su vehículo y proteger sus

acabados.

PRODUCTOS DE LIMPIEZA

Para obtener mejores resultados, use los

siguientes productos o alguno de calidad

equivalente:

Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover

(ZC-42)

Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner

(ZC-15)

Motorcraft® Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)

Motorcraft® Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)

Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and

Degreaser (sólo en EE.UU.) (ZC-20)

Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo (sólo en

Canadá) (CXC-66-A)

Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner (sólo

en Canadá) (CXC-101)

Motorcraft® Carlite Glass Cleaner (sólo

en Canadá) (CXC-100)

Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield

Washer Fluid (sólo en Canadá)

[CXC-37-(A, B, D o F)]

Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Washer

Concentrate (sólo EE.UU.) (ZC-32-A)

Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet

& Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)

Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover (sólo

en EE.UU.) (ZC-14)

Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass

Cleaner (ZC-23)

Motorcraft® Vinyl Cleaner (sólo en

Canadá) (CXC-93)

Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner

(ZC-37-A)

LIMPIEZA DEL EXTERIOR

Lave el vehículo regularmente con agua

fría o tibia y un champú con pH neutro,

como por ejemplo Motorcraft® Detail

Wash.

• Nunca utilice detergentes o jabones

caseros fuertes, como los detergentes

líquidos para lavavajillas o para la ropa.

Estos productos pueden decolorar y

manchar las superficies pintadas.

• No lave nunca un vehículo que esté

“caliente al tacto” ni durante la

exposición a la luz solar intensa y

directa.

• Seque el vehículo con una gamuza o

con una toalla de tela suave con el fin

de eliminar las manchas de agua.

• Quite de inmediato cualquier residuo

de gasolina, combustible diesel,

excrementos de aves y de insectos, ya

que pueden dañar la pintura y el

acabado del vehículo con el tiempo.

Use Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover.

• Retire todos los accesorios exteriores,

como antenas, antes de ingresar a un

lavado de autos.

Nota: Los bronceadores y los repelentes

contra insectos pueden dañar cualquier

superficie pintada; por eso si estas

sustancias entran en contacto con el

vehículo, lávelas lo antes posible.

Piezas cromadas exteriores

Nota: Nunca use materiales abrasivos,

como esponjas metálicas o plásticas, ya

que éstas podrían rayar la superficie

cromada.

Nota: No use limpiador para cromo,

limpiador para metal o pulidor en las ruedas

o tapones de las ruedas

260

Cuidado del vehículo

• Lave el vehículo primero, con agua fría

o tibia y un champú con ph neutro,

como por ejemplo Motorcraft® Detail

Wash.

• Use Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal

Cleaner. Aplique el producto tal como

lo haría con una cera para limpiar las

defensas y otras partes cromadas; deje

que el limpiador se seque durante unos

minutos, luego limpie con un paño

limpio y seco.

• No aplique producto de limpieza a

superficies calientes y no deje producto

de limpieza en superficies de cromo

durante un período que supera lo

recomendado.

• El uso de otros limpiadores no

recomendados puede derivar en daños

cosméticos graves y permanentes.

Parte inferior de la carrocería

Lave frecuentemente toda la parte inferior

del vehículo. Mantenga los orificios de

drenaje de la carrocería y de las puertas

libres de suciedad.

Limpieza de piezas exteriores de

plástico

Use sólo productos aprobados para limpiar

las piezas plásticas

• Para la limpieza de rutina, utilice

Motorcraft® Detail Wash.

• Si hay manchas de grasa o alquitrán,

use Motorcraft® Bug y Tar Remover.

REPARACIÓN DE DAÑOS

MENORES EN LA PINTURA

Su distribuidor autorizado cuenta con

pintura para retocar que coincide con el

color de su vehículo. Lleve a su distribuidor

autorizado el código de color (impreso en

la etiqueta autoadhesiva ubicada en la

puerta del conductor) para asegurarse de

obtener el color correcto.

• Elimine las partículas tales como

excrementos de pájaros, savia de árbol,

restos de insectos, manchas de

alquitrán, sal del camino y polvo

residual de las industrias antes de

reparar los descascarados de la

pintura.

• Lea siempre las instrucciones antes de

utilizar los productos.

ENCERADO

• Primero lave el vehículo.

• Utilice una cera de alta calidad sin

abrasivos.

• No permita que el sellador de pintura

entre en contacto con ningún tapizado

de color que no sea parte de la

carrocería (piezas negras opacas),

como manijas granuladas de las

puertas, parrillas portaequipajes,

defensas, molduras laterales,

alojamientos de espejos o el área del

cubretablero del parabrisas. El sellador

de pintura “pone gris” o mancha las

piezas con el tiempo.

LIMPIEZA DEL MOTOR

Los motores son más eficaces cuando

están limpios, ya que la acumulación de

grasa y suciedad mantiene el motor más

caliente de lo normal.

261

Cuidado del vehículo

Cuando lo lave:

• Tenga cuidado al usar un lavador de

alta presión para limpiar el motor. El

líquido a alta presión podría penetrar

en las piezas selladas y provocar

daños.

• No rocíe un motor caliente con agua

fría para evitar el agrietamiento del

bloque del motor o de otros

componentes del motor.

• Rocíe Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo

and Degreaser (ZC-20) en todas las

zonas que necesiten limpieza y

enjuague a presión. En Canadá use

Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo.

• Nunca lave ni enjuague el motor

mientras está funcionando, ya que se

podría dañar internamente.

• Nunca lave ni enjuague las bobinas de

encendido, los cables de las bujías ni

los pozos de las bujías, ni las áreas

alrededor de esos puntos.

• Cubra la batería, caja de distribución

de corriente y conjunto de filtro de aire

para evitar daños causados por el agua

al limpiar el motor.

LIMPIEZA DE LAS VENTANAS

Y LAS HOJAS DE LOS

LIMPIADORES

La ventana y las hojas de los limpiadores

se deben limpiar en forma regular. Si los

limpiadores no limpian adecuadamente,

las sustancias en el vidrio del vehículo o

las hojas del limpiador pueden causar

chirrido o castañeteo de las hojas, y rayas

y manchas en el parabrisas.

Para limpiar estos elementos, siga estos

consejos:

• La ventana se puede limpiar con un

limpiador no abrasivo como por

ejemplo Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray

Glass Cleaner.

• Las hojas de los limpiadores pueden

limpiarse con alcohol isopropilo (de

fricción) o Motorcraft® Premium

Windshield Washer Concentrate en

EE.UU. o Premium Quality Windshield

Washer Fluid en Canadá. Asegúrese de

reemplazar las hojas del limpiador

cuando tengan un aspecto desgastado

o no funcionen correctamente.

• No utilice abrasivos, ya que pueden

causar ralladuras

• No utilice combustible, queroseno o

diluyente de pintura para limpiar

ninguna pieza.

Si no puede eliminar esas marcas después

de limpiar con el limpiavidrios o si los

limpiadores se mueven de manera

entrecortada, limpie la superficie exterior

del parabrisas y las hojas de los

limpiadores con una esponja o un paño

suave con detergente neutro o una

solución de limpieza levemente abrasiva.

Después de limpiar, enjuague el parabrisas

y las hojas de los limpiadores con agua

limpia. El parabrisas está limpio si no se

forman puntos cuando lo enjuaga con

agua.

Nota: No use objetos afilados, como una

hoja de afeitar, para limpiar el interior de la

ventana trasera o para remover

calcomanías, ya que puede dañar las líneas

térmicas de la rejilla eléctrica del

desempañador de la ventana trasera.

262

Cuidado del vehículo

LIMPIEZA DEL INTERIOR

AVISOS

No use solventes para limpieza,

blanqueadores ni tintura en los

cinturones de seguridad del vehículo,

ya que pueden aflojar el tejido del cinturón.

En vehículos equipados con bolsas

de aire instaladas en el asiento, no

use solventes químicos ni

detergentes fuertes. Dichos productos

pueden contaminar el sistema de bolsas

de aire laterales y afectar su rendimiento

en un choque.

Para telas, alfombras, asientos de tela,

cinturones de seguridad y asientos

equipados con bolsas de aire laterales.

• Quite el polvo y la suciedad suelta con

una aspiradora.

• Elimine las manchas leves y la

suciedad con Motorcraft® Professional

Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.

• Si hay grasa o alquitrán en el material,

limpie las manchas del área primero

con Motorcraft® Spot and Stain

Remover. En Canadá, use Motorcraft

Multi-Purpose Cleaner.

• Si se forma un anillo sobre la tela luego

de limpiar una mancha, limpie el área

completa de inmediato (pero sin

saturar en exceso) o el anillo se fijará.

• No use productos de limpieza caseros

ni limpiadores de vidrios, ya que

pueden decolorar y manchar la tela y

afectar la capacidad de retardo de

llama de los materiales del asiento.

LIMPIEZA DEL PANEL DE

INSTRUMENTOS Y CRISTAL

DEL TABLERO

ALERTA

No use solventes químicos ni

detergentes fuertes al limpiar el

volante de la dirección o el tablero

para evitar que se contamine el sistema

de la bolsa de aire.

Limpie el grupo de instrumentos y las

micas del grupo de instrumentos con un

paño de algodón blanco, limpio y húmedo,

y luego con un paño de algodón blanco,

limpio y seco.

• Evite el uso de limpiadores o pulidores

que aumenten el lustre de la parte

superior del tablero. El acabado mate

en esta área ayuda a proteger al

conductor de reflejos molestos del

parabrisas.

• Asegúrese de lavar o secar sus manos

si ha estado en contacto con ciertos

productos, tales como, repelente

contra insectos o loción bronceadora,

a fin de evitar posibles daños a las

superficies pintadas del interior.

• No use limpiadores caseros o

limpiavidrios, puesto que éstos podrían

dañar el acabado del tablero de

instrumentos, las vestiduras interiores

y la mica del grupo de instrumentos.

• No permita derrames de desodorantes

ambientales y desinfectantes para

manos en las superficies interiores. Si

hay un derrame, límpielo

inmediatamente. Los daños de este

tipo pueden no estar cubiertos por su

garantía.

Si se derrama un líquido que manche,

como café o jugo, en las superficies del

tablero de instrumentos o tapizado interior,

límpielo de la siguiente forma:

263

Cuidado del vehículo

1. Recoja el líquido derramado con un

paño de algodón blanco y limpio.

2. Limpie la superficie con un paño de

algodón limpio y húmedo. Para una

limpieza más profunda, utilice una

solución de jabón neutro y agua. Si no

puede limpiar el área por completo

siguiendo este método, le conviene

limpiarla con un producto de limpieza

diseñado para el interior de los

automóviles.

3. De ser necesario, aplique un poco más

de solución de agua y jabón neutro o

un producto de limpieza sobre un paño

de algodón blanco y limpio, oprima el

paño sobre el área sucia y déjelo así

por 30 minutos a temperatura

ambiente.

4. Retire el paño impregnado y, si no se

encuentra demasiado sucio, úselo para

limpiar el área con un movimiento de

fricción durante 60 segundos.

5. A continuación, seque el área con un

paño de algodón blanco y limpio.

LIMPIEZA DE ASIENTOS DE

PIEL (IF EQUIPPED)

• Quite el polvo y la suciedad suelta con

una aspiradora.

• Limpie derrames y manchas lo más

rápido posible.

• Para la limpieza rutinaria, limpie la

superficie con un paño húmedo y

suave. Para una limpieza más

profunda, limpie la superficie con una

solución de agua y jabón leve. En

Canadá, use Motorcraft® Vinyl Cleaner.

Seque el área con un paño suave.

• Si la piel no puede limpiarse por

completo con una solución de agua y

jabón neutro, podría limpiarla con un

producto de limpieza para piel

disponible comercialmente, diseñado

para interiores automotrices.

• Para verificar la compatibilidad, pruebe

primero cualquier limpiador o

quitamanchas en una parte que no sea

visible de la piel.

• No utilice productos de limpieza de uso

casero, soluciones de alcohol,

solventes ni limpiadores para hule,

vinilo y plástico, ni acondicionadores

para piel a base de aceites o petróleo.

Estos productos pueden causar

desgaste prematuro o daños a la piel.

LIMPIEZA DE LAS RUEDAS DE

ALEACIÓN (IF EQUIPPED)

Nota: No use limpiador para cromo,

limpiador para metal o pulidor en las ruedas

o tapones de las ruedas.

Las ruedas (o rines) de aluminio y los

tapones de las ruedas se revisten con un

acabado de pintura transparente. A fin de

mantener el brillo:

• Limpie semanalmente con

Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner.

Si hay una gran acumulación de

suciedad y polvo en los frenos puede

que requiera una esponja para

removerla. Enjuague a fondo con un

chorro fuerte de agua.

• Nunca aplique ningún producto

químico de limpieza a los rines o

tapones de las ruedas cuando estén

calientes o tibios.

264

Cuidado del vehículo

• Algunos lavados automáticos de autos

pueden producir daño al acabado de

las ruedas o los tapones de las ruedas.

Los limpiadores para uso industrial

(servicio pesado) o los productos

químicos de limpieza, junto con la

agitación del cepillo para quitar el

polvo de los frenos y la suciedad, con

el tiempo pueden desgastar el

acabado de pintura transparente.

• No use limpiadores para ruedas a base

de ácido fluorhídrico ni de sustancias

cáusticas, ni tampoco fibras metálicas,

combustibles o detergentes fuertes de

uso casero.

• Para eliminar la grasa y el alquitrán,

use Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover.

ALMACENAMIENTO DEL

VEHÍCULO

Si planea almacenar su vehículo durante

un periodo prolongado (30 días o más),

lea las siguientes recomendaciones de

mantenimiento para garantizar que su

vehículo permanezca en buenas

condiciones de operación.

Todos los automóviles motorizados y sus

componentes fueron diseñados y

probados para un manejo confiable y

regular. El almacenamiento a largo plazo

bajo diversas condiciones podría provocar

que los componentes se degraden o fallen

a menos que se tomen en cuenta

precauciones específicas para preservar

los componentes.

Información general

• Almacene todos los vehículos en un

lugar seco y ventilado.

• Protéjalos de la luz del sol, si es posible.

• Si los vehículos se almacenan en el

exterior, se requiere mantenimiento

regular para protegerlos contra óxido

y daños.

Carrocería

• Lave el vehículo perfectamente para

eliminar suciedad, grasa, aceite,

alquitrán o lodo de las superficies

exteriores, del alojamiento de las

ruedas traseras y de la parte inferior de

las salpicaderas delanteras.

• Lave periódicamente los vehículos

almacenados en ubicaciones

expuestas.

• Retoque el metal al natural o

imprimado para prevenir el óxido

• Cubra las partes cromadas y de acero

inoxidable con una capa gruesa de cera

para automóvil para prevenir la

decoloración. Vuelva a poner cera

según sea necesario cuando lave el

vehículo.

• Lubrique las bisagras del cofre, de las

puertas y de la tapa de la cajuela, y los

pestillos con aceite de grado ligero.

• Cubra la vestidura interior para evitar

que se decolore.

• Mantenga todas las partes de hule

libres de aceite y solventes.

Motor

• El aceite del motor y el filtro se deben

cambiar antes del almacenamiento,

ya que el aceite del motor usado

contiene contaminantes que podrían

dañar el motor.

• Arranque el motor cada 15 días. Hágalo

funcionar en ralentí acelerado hasta

que alcance su temperatura normal de

funcionamiento.

• Con el pie en el pedal del freno, cambie

a todas las velocidades mientras el

motor está funcionando.

265

Cuidado del vehículo

Sistema de combustible.

• Llene el tanque de combustible con

combustible de alta calidad hasta el

primer corte automático de la boquilla

de la bomba de combustible.

Nota: Durante períodos prolongados de

almacenamiento del vehículo (30 días o

más), el combustible podría deteriorarse

debido a la oxidación. Agregue al sistema

de combustible del vehículo un buen

producto estabilizador de gasolina si los

períodos de almacenamiento reales o

esperados exceden de 30 días. Siga las

instrucciones de la etiqueta del aditivo. El

vehículo se debe operar a velocidad de

ralentí para que circule aditivo por todo el

sistema de combustible.

Sistema de refrigeración

• Proteja contra temperaturas de

congelación.

• Cuando saque el vehículo de

almacenamiento, verifique el nivel de

líquido refrigerante. Confirme que no

haya fugas en el sistema de

enfriamiento y que el líquido esté en el

nivel recomendado.

Batería

• Compruebe y recargue según sea

necesario. Mantenga limpias las

conexiones.

• Si el vehículo estuvo almacenado más

de 30 días sin recargar la batería,

podría ser conveniente desconectar los

cables de la batería para garantizar que

se mantenga la carga de la batería

para un arranque rápido.

Nota: Si se desconectan los cables de la

batería, será necesario restablecer las

funciones de la memoria.

Frenos

• Asegúrese de que los frenos y el freno

de estacionamiento estén totalmente

liberados.

Neumáticos

• Mantenga la presión de aire

recomendada.

Otros puntos misceláneos

• Asegúrese de que todos los varillajes,

cables, palancas y clavijas debajo del

vehículo están cubiertos con grasa

para prevenir el óxido.

• Mueva los vehículos al menos 8 m (25

pies) cada 15 días para lubricar las

piezas de operación y prevenir la

corrosión.

Retiro del vehículo del

almacenamiento

Si el vehículo ya no va a estar almacenado,

haga lo siguiente:

• Lave el vehículo para eliminar cualquier

suciedad o capa de grasa acumulada

en las superficies de las ventanas.

• Verifique si los limpiaparabrisas están

deteriorados.

• Verifique debajo del cofre para ver si

hay materias extrañas que pudieran

haberse acumulado durante el

almacenamiento (nidos de

ratones/ardillas).

• Verifique el escape en busca de

cualquier materia extraña que pudiera

haberse acumulado durante el

almacenamiento.

• Verifique la presión de las llantas y

ajuste de acuerdo a la Etiqueta de las

llantas.

266

Cuidado del vehículo

• Verifique el funcionamiento del pedal

del freno. Maneje el vehículo 4.5

metros (15 pies) hacia adelante y hacia

atrás para eliminar el óxido acumulado.

• Verifique los niveles de líquidos

(incluyendo el líquido refrigerante, el

aceite y la gasolina) para asegurarse

de que no haya fugas, y de que los

líquidos estén en los niveles

recomendados.

• Si se desmontó la batería, limpie los

extremos de los cables de la batería e

inspeccione.

Contacte a su distribuidor autorizado si

tiene alguna duda o problema.

267

Cuidado del vehículo

INFORMACIÓN GENERAL

Aviso a los propietarios de

vehículos utilitarios, camiones y

camionetas

AVISOS

Los vehículos utilitarios se vuelcan

con frecuencia significativamente

mayor que otros tipos de vehículos.

Para reducir el riesgo de sufrir lesiones

graves o la muerte a causa de un

volcamiento u otro tipo de choque, evite

hacer virajes cerrados y maniobras bruscas,

maneje a velocidades seguras para las

condiciones, mantenga las llantas infladas

correctamente, evite sobrecargar o cargar

incorrectamente su vehículo y asegúrese

de que cada pasajero esté usando los

cinturones de seguridad correctamente.

En un choque con volcadura, la

probabilidad de muerte es mucho

mayor para una persona que no lleva

cinturón de seguridad, que para una que

sí lo lleva. Todos los ocupantes deben usar

siempre los cinturones de seguridad y los

niños deben usar sistemas de seguridad

adecuados para minimizar el riesgo de

lesiones o expulsión.

No confíe demasiado en la

capacidad de los vehículos con

tracción en las cuatro ruedas. A

pesar de que los vehículos con tracción en

las cuatro ruedas pueden acelerar mejor

que los de tracción en dos ruedas en

situaciones que requieran baja tracción,

éstos no frenan más rápido. Siempre

maneje a una velocidad segura.

E145298

Los vehículos utilitarios, camiones y

camionetas se maniobran en forma

diferente a los vehículos de pasajeros en

las diversas condiciones de manejo que

pueden encontrarse en calles, carreteras

y a campo traviesa. Los vehículos

utilitarios, camiones y camionetas no están

diseñados para tomar curvas a velocidades

tan altas como los automóviles de

pasajeros, así como tampoco los vehículos

deportivos bajos están diseñados para

desempeñarse satisfactoriamente en

condiciones a campo traviesa.

Lea el manual del propietario y sus

suplementos para informarse

específicamente de las características de

cada equipo, así como las instrucciones

de manejo seguro y todas las precauciones

adicionales, para reducir el riesgo de sufrir

accidentes o lesiones graves.

Sistema de tracción en las cuatro

ruedas (si está equipado)

ALERTA

No confíe demasiado en la

capacidad de los vehículos con

tracción en las cuatro ruedas. A

pesar de que los vehículos con tracción en

las cuatro ruedas pueden acelerar mejor

que los de tracción en dos ruedas en

situaciones que requieran baja tracción,

éstos no frenan más rápido. Siempre

maneje a una velocidad segura.

268

Ruedas y llantas

Un vehículo equipado con tracción en las

cuatro ruedas (cuando lo seleccione), tiene

la capacidad de usar las cuatro ruedas

para obtener energía. Esto aumenta la

tracción y puede permitirle manejar con

seguridad sobre terrenos y caminos en

condiciones que los vehículos

convencionales con tracción en dos ruedas

no pueden recorrer.

Para vehículos con tracción en las cuatro

ruedas, nunca se debe usar una llanta de

refacción de tamaño distinto al de las

llantas habituales. Una llanta de refacción

de diferente tamaño (distinto al de las

llantas originales) o un tamaño diferente

de las llantas de los ejes delantero y

trasero podría hacer que el sistema de

tracción en las cuatro ruedas deje de

funcionar y por omisión quede solo con

tracción en las ruedas delanteras.

En qué se diferencia su vehículo de

los demás

Los vehículos utilitarios deportivos y los

camionetas pueden presentar algunas

diferencias perceptibles en comparación

a otros vehículos. Su vehículo puede ser:

E145299

• Más alto: para permitir una capacidad

de transporte de carga superior y para

permitir que viaje sobre terrenos

irregulares sin quedar atrapado o dañar

los componentes de la parte baja.

• Más corto: para otorgar la capacidad

de aproximarse a las pendientes y

sobrepasar la cima de una colina sin

quedar atrapado o dañar los

componentes de la parte baja. Aunque

hay igualdad en todos los demás

aspectos, una distancia entre ejes más

corta puede hacer que su vehículo

responda más rápido a la dirección que

un vehículo con una distancia entre

ejes más larga.

• Más angosto: para proporcionar mayor

maniobrabilidad en espacios estrechos,

especialmente en uso a campo

traviesa.

269

Ruedas y llantas

E145300

Como resultado de las diferencias en

dimensiones indicadas arriba, los vehículos

utilitarios deportivos y las camionetas

generalmente tienen un centro de

gravedad superior y una mayor diferencia

en el centro de gravedad entre las

condiciones con y sin carga. Estas

diferencias que hacen que su vehículo sea

tan versátil también provocan que se

maniobre en forma diferente a otros

vehículos comunes de pasajeros.

CUIDADO DE LAS LLANTAS

Información acerca del grado de

uniformidad de la calidad de las

llantas

E142542

Los grados de calidad de las llantas se

aplican a llantas neumáticas nuevas para

automóviles de pasajeros. Los grados de

calidad se pueden encontrar, donde sea

aplicable, en el costado de la llanta entre

el reborde de la banda de rodadura y el

ancho máximo de sección. Por ejemplo:

Treadwear 200, Traction AA,

Temperature A

Estos grados de calidad de las llantas se

determinan según normas que ha

establecido el Departamento de

Transportes de los Estados Unidos.

Los grados de calidad de las llantas se

aplican a llantas neumáticas nuevas para

automóviles de pasajeros. No se aplican a

llantas para nieve con rodaduras

profundas, llantas de refacción

economizadoras de espacio o para uso

provisional, llantas para camioneta o tipo

LT, llantas con diámetros de rueda (rin)

nominales de 25 a 30 cm (10 a 12 pulg) o

llantas de producción limitada según se

define en el Título 49 del Código de

normas federales, Parte 575.104 (c)(2).

270

Ruedas y llantas

Grados de calidad de llantas del

Departamento de Transportes de

Estados Unidos: EE.UU. El Departamento

de Transporte exige que Ford Motor

Company le proporcione a usted la

siguiente información acerca de los grados

de las llantas, exactamente como el

gobierno la ha redactado.

Índice de desgaste (Treadwear)

El índice de desgaste es una clasificación

comparativa basada en la tasa de

desgaste de la llanta cuando se prueba en

condiciones controladas en una pista de

prueba gubernamental específica. Por

ejemplo, una llanta de grado 150 se

desgastaría una y media (11⁄2) veces más

en la pista de prueba gubernamental que

una llanta de grado 100. El rendimiento

relativo de las llantas depende, sin

embargo, de sus condiciones reales de uso

y puede apartarse significativamente de

la norma debido a variaciones en hábitos

de conducción, prácticas de servicio y

diferencias en las características del

camino y el clima.

Tracción (Traction) AA, A, B y C

ALERTA

El grado de tracción asignado a esta

llanta se basa en pruebas de tracción

de frenado en línea recta y no incluye

características de aceleración, curveo,

hidroplaneo o tracción máxima.

Los grados de tracción de mayor a menor

son AA, A, B, y C. Los grados representan

la capacidad de la llanta para parar en

pavimento mojado, medida bajo

condiciones controladas en superficies de

asfalto y concreto de prueba especificadas

por el gobierno. Una llanta tipo C puede

tener un desempeño de tracción deficiente.

Temperatura A B C

ALERTA

El grado de temperatura para esta

llanta se establece con la llanta

debidamente inflada y no

sobrecargada. La velocidad excesiva, la

falta de aire o la carga excesiva, ya sea por

separado o en combinación, pueden

causar el calentamiento progresivo y una

posible falla de las llantas.

Las clases de temperatura son A (la más

alta), B y C, las cuales representan la

resistencia de la llanta a la generación de

calor y su capacidad de disiparlo cuando

se prueban en condiciones controladas en

una rueda de prueba de laboratorio

especificada. Una temperatura alta

prolongada puede hacer que el material

de la llanta se degrade, reduciendo su vida

útil. Una temperatura excesiva puede

provocar fallas repentinas de la llanta. La

clase C corresponde a un nivel de

rendimiento que deben cumplir todas las

llantas de vehículos de pasajeros de

acuerdo con la Norma federal de seguridad

para vehículos motorizados No. 139. Las

clases B y A representan niveles más altos

de rendimiento de la rueda en pruebas de

laboratorio que el mínimo exigido por la

ley.

271

Ruedas y llantas

Glosario de terminología sobre

llantas

• Etiqueta de llantas: una etiqueta que

muestra los tamaños de llantas del OE

(Equipamiento original), la presión de

inflado recomendada y el peso máximo

que puede transportar el vehículo.

• Número de identificación de llanta

(TIN): un número en el costado de

cada llanta que entrega información

acerca de la marca de la llanta y de la

planta del fabricante, el tamaño de la

llanta y la fecha de fabricación.

Conocido también como código DOT.

• Presión de inflado: una medida de la

cantidad de aire en la llanta.

• Carga estándar: un tipo de llantas

P-metric o Metric diseñadas para

transportar una carga máxima a 35 psi

(37 psi [2.5 bares] para llantas Metric).

Si aumenta la presión de inflado más

allá de esta medida, no aumentará la

capacidad de transporte de carga de

las llantas.

• Carga extra: un tipo de llantas

P-metric o Metric diseñadas para

transportar una carga máxima más

pesada a 41 psi (43 psi [2.9 bares] para

llantas Metric). Si aumenta la presión

de inflado más allá de esta medida, no

aumentará la capacidad de transporte

de carga de las llantas.

• kPa: kilopascales, unidad métrica de

presión de aire.

• PSI: libras por pulgada cuadrada, una

unidad estándar de presión de aire.

• Presión de inflado en frío: presión de

la llanta cuando el vehículo ha estado

quieto y no expuesto directamente al

sol durante una hora o más y antes de

que el vehículo se manejara por 1.6 km

(1 milla).

• Presión de inflado recomendado:

presión de inflado en frío que se

encuentra en la Etiqueta de

certificación del cumplimiento de las

normas de seguridad (fijada en el pilar

de bisagra de la puerta, poste de

seguro de la puerta o el borde de la

puerta junto al poste de poste de

seguro de la puerta, junto a la posición

del asiento del conductor), o en el

borde de la puerta del ’conductor.

• Pilar B: la barra estructural al costado

del vehículo detrás de la puerta

delantera

• Ceja de la llanta: área de la llanta que

hace contacto con la rueda (rin).

• Costado de la llanta: área entre la

ceja y el área de rodamiento de la

llanta.

• Área de rodamiento de la llanta:

área perimetral de la llanta que hace

contacto con el camino una vez

montada en el vehículo.

• Rueda (rin): soporte metálico de la

llanta, o de un conjunto de llanta y

cámara, sobre el cual se apoya la ceja

de la llanta.

Información contenida en el

costado de la llanta

Las normas federales de Estados Unidos

y Canadá requieren que los fabricantes de

llantas pongan información estandarizada

en un costado de las llantas. Esta

información identifica y describe las

características fundamentales de la llanta

y también proporciona un Número de

identificación de la llanta DOT de Estados

Unidos para la certificación estándar de

seguridad y en caso de un retiro.

272

Ruedas y llantas

Información en llantas tipo P

E142543

P215/65R15 95H es un ejemplo de un

tamaño de llanta, índice de carga y

régimen de velocidad. A continuación, se

enumeran las definiciones de estos

elementos. (Tome en cuenta que el

tamaño de llanta, índice de carga y

régimen de velocidad de su vehículo

pueden diferir de los de este ejemplo.)

A. P: indica una llanta, diseñada por la Tire

and Rim Association (T&RA), que se puede

usar para servicio en automóviles,

vehículos todo terreno, minivanes y

camionetas. Nota: si el tamaño de la llanta

no comienza con una letra, esto puede

significar que fue diseñada por la ETRTO

(European Tire and Rim Technical

Organization) o la JATMA (Japan Tire

Manufacturing Association).

B. 215: indica el ancho nominal de la llanta,

en milímetros, de borde a borde del

costado. En general, cuanto mayor es el

número, más ancha es la llanta.

C. 65: indica la proporción dimensional,

que representa la relación de altura y

ancho de la llanta.

D. R: indica una llanta tipo radial.

E. 15: Indica el diámetro de la rueda o rin

en pulgadas. Si cambia el tamaño de la

rueda, tendrá que adquirir llantas nuevas

que coincidan con el diámetro de la rueda

nueva.

F. 95: indica el índice de carga de la llanta.

Es un índice que se relaciona con el peso

que puede transportar una llanta. Puede

encontrar esta información en el Manual

del propietario. Si no es así, comuníquese

con un distribuidor local de llantas.

Nota: Es posible que no encuentre esta

información en todas las llantas ya que la

ley federal no la exige.

G. H: indica la calificación de velocidad de

la llanta. El régimen de velocidad indica la

velocidad a la que se puede someter una

llanta por períodos prolongados, bajo

condiciones estándar de carga y presión

de inflado. Es posible que las llantas de su

vehículo funcionen en condiciones

diferentes para carga y presión de inflado.

Puede que deba ajustar estos regímenes

de velocidad a la diferencia en las

condiciones. Las calificaciones van de

130 km/h (81 mph) a 299 km/h (186 mph).

Estos regímenes se enumeran en el

siguiente cuadro.

Nota: Es posible que no encuentre esta

información en todas las llantas ya que la

ley federal no la exige.

Calificación de velocidad:

km/h (mph)

Rotulación

del régimen

130 km/h (81 mph)M

140 km/h (87 mph)N

159 km/h (99 mph)Q

171 km/h (106 mph)R

180 km/h (112 mph)S

190 km/h (118 mph)T

273

Ruedas y llantas

Calificación de velocidad:

km/h (mph)

Rotulación

del régimen

200 km/h (124 mph)U

210 km/h (130 mph)H

240 km/h (149 mph)V

270 km/h (168 mph)W

299 km/h (186 mph)Y

Nota: Para las llantas con una capacidad

de velocidad máxima superior a 240 km/h

(149 mph), los fabricantes de llantas, a

veces, usan las letras ZR. Para aquellos que

tienen una capacidad de velocidad máxima

superior a 299 km/h (186 mph), los

fabricantes de llantas siempre usan las

letras ZR.

H. Número de identificación de llanta

(TIN) DOT de EE.UU. : éste comienza con

las letras DOT e indica que la llanta

cumple con todas las normas federales.

Los próximos dos números o letras son el

código de la planta donde se fabricó, los

dos siguientes son el código del tamaño

de la llanta y los últimos cuatro números

representan la semana y año en que se

fabricó la llanta. Por ejemplo, los números

317 significan la semana 31 de 1997. A partir

de 2000, los números llevan cuatro dígitos.

Por ejemplo, 2501 significa la semana 25

del 2001. Los números del medio son

códigos de identificación que se usan para

seguimiento. Esta información se usa para

contactar a los clientes si un defecto en

las llantas exige su retiro del mercado.

I. M+S o M/S: lodo y nieve, o

AT: todo terreno, o

AS: toda estación.

J. Composición de las bandas de las

llantas y material usado: indica el

número de bandas o el número de capas

de la tela revestida de hule en la banda de

rodadura y costados de las llantas. Los

fabricantes de llantas también deben

indicar los materiales de las bandas y del

costado, que incluyen acero, nylon,

poliéster y otros.

K. Carga máxima: indica la capacidad de

carga máxima, en kilogramos y libras, que

la llanta puede transportar. Consulte la

Etiqueta de certificación del cumplimiento

de las normas de seguridad (fijada en el

pilar de bisagra de la puerta, poste de

seguro de la puerta o el borde de la puerta

junto al poste de poste de seguro de la

puerta, junto a la posición del asiento del

conductor), para conocer la presión de

llantas correcta para su vehículo.

L. Grados de calidad por Índice de

desgaste, Tracción y Temperatura:

274

Ruedas y llantas

• Índice de desgaste (Treadwear) el

índice de desgaste es una clasificación

comparativa basada en la tasa de

desgaste de la llanta cuando se prueba

en condiciones controladas en una

pista de prueba gubernamental

específica. Por ejemplo, una llanta de

grado 150 se desgastaría una y media

veces más en la pista de prueba

gubernamental que una llanta de

grado 100.

• Tracción: los grados de tracción, de la

más alta a la más baja, son AA, A, B y

C. Los grados representan la capacidad

de la llanta para parar en pavimento

mojado, medida bajo condiciones

controladas en superficies de asfalto

y concreto de prueba especificadas por

el gobierno. Una llanta tipo C puede

tener un desempeño de tracción

deficiente.

• Temperatura (Temperature): las

clases de temperatura son A (la más

alta), B y C, las cuales representan la

resistencia de la llanta a la generación

de calor y su capacidad de disiparlo

cuando se prueban en condiciones

controladas en una rueda de prueba

de laboratorio especificada.

M. Presión de inflado máxima

permitida: indica la presión máxima

permitida por los fabricantes de llantas o

la presión con la cual la llanta puede

transportar la carga máxima. Esta presión

normalmente es mayor que la presión de

inflado en frío recomendada por el

fabricante, que se puede encontrar en la

Etiqueta de certificación del cumplimiento

de las normas de seguridad (fijada en el

pilar de bisagra de la puerta, poste de

seguro de la puerta o el borde de la puerta

junto al poste de poste de seguro de la

puerta, junto a la posición del asiento del

conductor), o la Etiqueta de llanta que se

ubica en el Pilar B o el borde de la puerta

del conductor.’ La presión de inflado en

frío nunca debe ser inferior a la presión

recomendada en la etiqueta del vehículo.

Los proveedores de llantas pueden aplicar

indicaciones, notas o advertencias

adicionales, tales como carga estándar,

radial sin cámara, etc.

Información adicional contenida en el

costado de la llanta para llantas tipo

Nota: Los grados de calidad de las llantas

no se aplican a este tipo de llantas.

275

Ruedas y llantas

E142544

Las llantas tipo LT tienen información

adicional en comparación a las llantas tipo

P. Estas diferencias se describen a

continuación.

A. LT: indica una llanta, diseñada por la

Tire and Rim Association (T&RA) para

servicio en camionetas.

B. Límites de carga e inflado para carga:

indica las capacidades de transporte de

carga de las llantas y sus límites de inflado.

C. Carga máxima dual en kg (lb) a kPa

(psi) en frío: indica la capacidad de carga

máxima y la presión de las llantas cuando

la llanta se usa en pares; un par es cuando

se instalan cuatro llantas en el eje trasero

(un total de seis o más llantas en el

vehículo).

D. Carga máxima sencilla en kg (lb) a

kPa (psi) en frío: indica la capacidad de

carga máxima y la presión de las llantas

cuando la llanta se usa sola; una sola

llanta se define así cuando se ponen dos

llantas (total) en el eje trasero.

Información en llantas tipo T

T145/80D16 es un ejemplo de un tamaño

de llanta.

Nota: El tamaño de llanta provisional para

su vehículo puede ser diferente al de este

ejemplo. Los grados de calidad de las

llantas no se aplican a este tipo de llantas.

E142545

Las llantas tipo T tienen información

adicional en comparación a las llantas tipo

P. Estas diferencias se describen a

continuación:

A. T: indica un tipo de llanta, diseñada por

la Tire and Rim Association (T&RA), para

servicio provisional en automóviles,

vehículos todo terreno, minivanes y

camionetas.

B. 145: indica el ancho nominal de la llanta,

en milímetros, de borde a borde del

costado. En general, cuanto mayor es el

número, más ancha es la llanta.

276

Ruedas y llantas

C. 80: indica la proporción dimensional,

que representa la relación de altura y

ancho de la llanta. Números de 70 o menos

indican un costado corto.

D. D: indica una llanta de tipo diagonal.

R: indica una llanta tipo radial.

E. 16: Indica el diámetro de la rueda o rin

en pulgadas. Si cambia el tamaño de la

rueda, tendrá que adquirir llantas nuevas

que coincidan con el diámetro de la rueda

nueva.

Ubicación de la Etiqueta de llantas

Encontrará una Etiqueta de llanta que

contiene la presión de inflado de la llanta

según el tamaño de ésta y otra información

importante ubicada en el Pilar B o en la

puerta del conductor.

Inflado de llantas

Para una operación segura del vehículo,

es necesario que las llantas estén infladas

correctamente. Recuerde que una llanta

puede perder hasta la mitad de su presión

de aire sin verse desinflada.

Revise sus llantas todos los días, antes de

empezar a manejar. Si una parece estar

más baja que las otras, use un manómetro

para llantas para revisarlas y ajustarlas

según sea necesario.

Al menos una vez al mes y antes de

emprender viajes largos, inspeccione cada

llanta y revise la presión de aire con un

manómetro para llantas (incluyendo la

llanta de refacción, si está equipado). Infle

todas las llantas según la presión de

inflado recomendada por Ford Motor

Company.

Es muy importante que adquiera un

manómetro de llantas confiable, ya que

los manómetros automáticos de las

estaciones de servicio pueden ser

inexactos. Ford recomienda el uso de

manómetros de llantas digitales o

analógicos en lugar de los manómetros de

varilla.

Use la presión de inflado en frío

recomendada para conseguir un

rendimiento y desgaste óptimo de las

llantas. El inflado insuficiente o excesivo

puede causar patrones de desgaste

disparejo.

ALERTA

El inflado insuficiente es la causa

más común de fallas en las llantas

y puede tener como consecuencia

un agrietamiento severo de la llanta, la

separación de la banda de rodadura o un

"reventón", con la pérdida inesperada del

control del vehículo y un mayor riesgo de

lesiones. El inflado insuficiente aumenta

la deformación del costado y la resistencia

de rodamiento, teniendo como

consecuencia la acumulación de calor y el

daño interno a la llanta. También puede

ocasionar tensión innecesaria en la llanta,

desgaste irregular, pérdida de control del

vehículo y accidentes. ¡Una llanta puede

perder hasta la mitad de su presión de aire

sin verse desinflada!

277

Ruedas y llantas

Siempre infle sus llantas según la presión

de inflado recomendada por Ford, incluso

si ésta es menor a la información de

presión de inflado máxima que aparece en

la llanta. La presión de inflado de llantas

recomendada por Ford se encuentra en la

Etiqueta de certificación del cumplimiento

de las normas de seguridad (fijada en el

pilar de bisagra de la puerta, poste de

seguro de la puerta o el borde de la puerta

junto al poste de poste de seguro de la

puerta, junto a la posición del asiento del

conductor), o en el borde de la puerta del

conductor.’ Si no se siguen las

recomendaciones de presión de las llantas,

podría crear patrones de desgaste

disparejo y afectar la forma de manejo de

su vehículo

Máxima presión de inflado permitida

es la presión máxima permitida por los

fabricantes de la llanta y la presión con la

cual la llanta puede transportar la carga

máxima. Esta presión normalmente es

mayor que la presión de inflado en frío

recomendada por el fabricante, que se

puede encontrar en la Etiqueta de

certificación del cumplimiento de las

normas de seguridad (fijada en el pilar de

bisagra de la puerta, poste de seguro de la

puerta o el borde de la puerta junto al

poste de poste de seguro de la puerta,

junto a la posición del asiento del

conductor), o la Etiqueta de llanta que se

ubica en el Pilar B o el borde de la puerta

del conductor.’ La presión de inflado en

frío nunca debe ser más baja que la presión

recomendada en la Etiqueta de

certificación del cumplimiento de las

normas de seguridad o en la Etiqueta de

llantas.

Cuando se producen cambios de

temperatura en el ambiente, las presiones

de inflado de las llantas también cambian.

Una caída de temperatura de 6 °C (10 °F)

puede causar una disminución

correspondiente de 7 kPa (1 psi) en la

presión de inflado. Revise la presión de las

llantas con frecuencia y ajústela hasta

obtener la presión correcta, la cual se

puede encontrar en la Etiqueta de

certificación del cumplimiento de las

normas de seguridad o en la Etiqueta de

llantas.

Para revisar la presión de las llantas:

1. Asegúrese que las llantas estén frías;

es decir, que no hayan rodado ni

siquiera 1.6 km (1 milla).

Nota: Si está revisando la presión cuando

la llanta está caliente (es decir, cuando ha

conducido más de 1.6 km [1 milla]), no

reduzca la presión del aire. Las llantas están

calientes debido al uso y es normal que la

presión aumente sobre el nivel

recomendado en frío. Una llanta caliente

cuya presión de inflado sea igual o menor

que la presión recomendada en frío, puede

estar considerablemente desinflada.

Nota: Si debe conducir a cierta distancia

para conseguir aire para las llantas, verifique

y registre la presión primero y agregue la

presión de aire correcta cuando llegue a la

bomba. Es normal que las llantas se

calienten y que la presión del aire aumente

mientras conduce.

2. Retire el tapón de la válvula de una

llanta; luego oprima firmemente el

manómetro de llantas contra la válvula

para medir la presión.

3. Agregue suficiente aire hasta alcanzar

la presión de aire recomendada.

Nota: Si infla la llanta en exceso, libere aire

presionando el vástago metálico en el

centro de la válvula. Luego, vuelva a revisar

la presión con el manómetro.

4. Vuelva a colocar la tapa de la válvula.

278

Ruedas y llantas

5. Repita este procedimiento para cada

llanta, incluida la de refacción.

Nota: Algunas llantas de refacción operan

a mayor presión de inflado que las demás

llantas. En el caso de las llantas de

refacción pequeñas Tipo T (consulte la

información de la llanta y rueda de repuesto

para obtener una descripción): almacene y

mantenga a 60 psi (4.15 bares). Para las

llantas de refacción desiguales y de tamaño

completo (consulte la información de

ruedas y llantas de refacción desiguales

para obtener una descripción): almacene y

mantenga en lo más alto la presión de

inflado delantera y trasera, tal como se

muestra en la Etiqueta de la llanta.

6. Inspeccione visualmente las llantas

para asegurarse que no haya clavos u

otros objetos incrustados que pudieran

perforar la llanta y provocar una fuga

de aire.

7. Verifique los costados para asegurarse

que no tengan grietas, cortes ni

protuberancias.

Inspección de las llantas y los vástagos

de las válvulas de las ruedas

Inspeccione periódicamente si las bandas

de rodamiento de las llantas están

disparejas o excesivamente gastadas y

quite objetos como piedras, clavos o vidrio

que se puedan haber incrustado en las

ranuras de la banda de rodamiento.

Verifique si hay agujeros, grietas o cortes

en las llantas y los vástagos de las válvulas

por donde pudiera fugarse el aire, y repare

o reemplace la llanta y reemplace el

vástago de la válvula. Inspeccione el

costado de la llanta por si presenta fisuras,

cortes, magulladuras u otras señales de

daño o desgaste excesivo. Si sospecha que

hay daño interno en la llanta, desmóntela

e inspecciónela por si fuera necesario

repararla o reemplazarla. Por su seguridad,

no use llantas que estén dañadas o que

muestren signos de desgaste excesivo,

porque es más probable que estallen o

fallen.

El mantenimiento incorrecto o inadecuado

del vehículo puede provocar que las llantas

se desgasten en forma anormal.

Inspeccione frecuentemente todas las

llantas, incluida la de refacción, y

reemplácelas si encuentra una o más de

las siguientes condiciones:

Desgaste

E142546

279

Ruedas y llantas

Cuando la banda de rodamiento se

desgaste hasta que sólo queden 2 mm (un

dieciseisavo de pulg.) de espesor, se deben

reemplazar las llantas para evitar que su

vehículo derrape y se deslice sobre el agua

(hidroplaneo). Los indicadores de desgaste

o barras de desgaste incorporados, que se

ven como bandas angostas de hule suave

a lo largo de la banda de rodadura,

aparecerán en la llanta cuando la banda

de rodadura tenga 2 mm de desgaste (un

dieciseisavo de pulg.).

Cuando la banda de rodadura de la llanta

se desgasta a la misma altura que estas

barras de desgaste, la llanta está gastada

por lo que se debe reemplazar.

Daño

Inspeccione periódicamente las bandas

de rodadura y los costados de las llantas

para detectar daños (como protuberancias

en las bandas de rodadura o costados,

grietas en las ranuras de las bandas de

rodadura y separación en las bandas de

rodadura o costados). Si observa daños o

sospecha que los hay, solicite a un

profesional que inspeccione las llantas de

su vehículo. Las llantas se pueden dañar

durante el uso a campo traviesa, por eso

se recomienda la inspección posterior a

este uso.

Edad

ALERTA

Las llantas se degradan con el paso

del tiempo, dependiendo de muchos

factores, como el clima, las

condiciones de guardado y condiciones de

uso (carga, velocidad, presión de inflado,

etc.), que éstas experimentan a lo largo de

su vida útil.

En general, las llantas se deben reemplazar

cada seis años, independiente del

desgaste de la banda de rodadura. Sin

embargo, el calor presente en los climas

calurosos o las condiciones de carga

frecuente pueden acelerar el proceso de

envejecimiento y podría ser necesario

reemplazar las llantas con mayor

frecuencia.

Debe reemplazar la llanta de refacción

cuando cambie las llantas para el camino

o después de seis años debido al

envejecimiento, incluso si no se ha

utilizado.

EE.UU. Número de identificación de

llanta (TIN) DOT

Las normas federales de Estados Unidos

y Canadá requieren que los fabricantes de

llantas pongan información estandarizada

en un costado de las llantas. Esta

información identifica y describe las

características fundamentales de la llanta

y también proporciona un Número de

identificación de la llanta DOT de Estados

Unidos para la certificación estándar de

seguridad y en caso de un retiro.

280

Ruedas y llantas

Éste comienza con las letras DOT e indica

que la llanta cumple todos los estándares

federales. Los próximos dos números o

letras son el código de la planta donde se

fabricó, los dos siguientes son el código

del tamaño de la llanta y los últimos cuatro

números representan la semana y año en

que se fabricó la llanta. Por ejemplo, los

números 317 significan la semana 31 de

1997. A partir de 2000, los números llevan

cuatro dígitos. Por ejemplo, 2501 significa

la semana 25 del 2001. Los números del

medio son códigos de identificación que

se usan para seguimiento. Esta

información se usa para contactar a los

clientes si un defecto en las llantas exige

su retiro del mercado.

Requisitos para el reemplazo de llantas

Su vehículo está equipado con llantas

diseñadas para proporcionarle conducción

segura y buen control del vehículo.

AVISOS

Sólo use llantas y ruedas de

reemplazo que sean del mismo

tamaño, índice de carga, régimen de

velocidad y tipo (como P-metric en vez de

LT-metric, o toda estación [All-Season]

en vez de todo terreno [All-Terrain]) de

las proporcionadas originalmente por Ford.

El tamaño de rueda y llanta recomendado

se encuentra en la Etiqueta de certificación

del cumplimiento de las normas de

seguridad (fijada en el pilar de bisagra de

la puerta, poste de seguro de la puerta o

el borde de la puerta junto al poste de

poste de seguro de la puerta, junto a la

posición del asiento del conductor), o en

el borde de la puerta del conductor.’ Si esta

información no se encuentra en estas

etiquetas, deberá ponerse en contacto con

su distribuidor autorizado lo antes posible.

El uso de cualquier llanta o rueda no

recomendada por Ford puede afectar la

seguridad y el rendimiento de su vehículo,

lo que podría significar mayor riesgo de

pérdida de control del vehículo, volcadura,

AVISOS

lesiones e incluso la muerte. De manera

adicional, el uso de llantas y ruedas no

recomendadas podría causar que la

dirección, la suspensión, el eje, la caja de

transferencia o el tren de fuerza fallen. Si

tiene dudas acerca del reemplazo de

llantas, póngase en contacto con su

distribuidor lo antes posible.

Cuando monte la llanta en la rueda

de refacción, no supere la presión

máxima que se indica en el costado

de la llanta para asentar la ceja en la rueda

metálica sin necesidad de observar las

precauciones adicionales que se detallan

a continuación. Si la ceja no asienta a la

presión máxima indicada, lubríquela una

vez más y vuelva a intentarlo.

Al inflar la llanta para presiones de

montaje hasta 20 psi (1.38 bares)

superiores a la presión máxima en el

costado de la llanta, se deben tomar las

siguientes precauciones para proteger a la

persona que realiza la instalación:

1. Cerciórese de que la llanta y la rueda

sean del tamaño correcto.

2. Vuelva a lubricar la ceja y el área de

asentamiento de la ceja en la rueda.

3. Colóquese al menos a 3.66 m (12 pies)

de distancia del conjunto de la llanta y

rueda.

4. Utilice protección para los ojos y los

oídos.

Si desea instalar una llanta cuya presión

esté 20 psi (1.38 bares) por arriba de la

presión máxima indicada, la instalación

debe realizarla un distribuidor Ford u otro

servicio de llantas profesional.

281

Ruedas y llantas

AVISOS

Siempre infle las llantas con armazón de

acero con un inflador remoto, y la persona

que las infle debe estar al menos a 3.66 m

(12 pies) de distancia del conjunto de la

llanta y rueda.

Importante: Recuerde reemplazar los

vástagos de las válvulas de aire de las

llantas cuando reemplace las llantas del

vehículo

En general, se recomienda reemplazar por

pares las llantas delanteras o traseras.

Los sensores de presión de las llantas

montados en las ruedas (que vienen

originalmente en su vehículo) no están

diseñados para uso en ruedas de posventa.

El uso de ruedas o llantas no

recomendadas por Ford Motor Company

puede afectar el funcionamiento del

sistema de monitoreo de presión de las

llantas (TPMS).

Si el indicador de TPMS destella, el TPMS

no está funcionando correctamente. La

llanta de reemplazo puede ser

incompatible con el TPMS o alguno de los

componentes del TPMS puede estar

dañado.

Prácticas de seguridad

AVISOS

Si su vehículo está atascado en

nieve, lodo, arena, etc., no haga girar

las llantas rápidamente; esto puede

provocar la ruptura de una de ellas y

causar una explosión. Una llanta puede

explotar en apenas tres a cinco segundos.

No gire las ruedas a más de 56 km/h

(35 mph). Si lo hace, las llantas

pueden estallar y lesionar a alguien.

Los hábitos de conducción tienen mucho

que ver con el kilometraje y la seguridad

de las llantas.

• Respete los límites de velocidad de los

caminos.

• Evite hacer arranques, paradas y virajes

rápidos.

• Evite los baches y objetos en el camino.

• No pase sobre los bordes de las

banquetas ni golpee las llantas contra

éstos al estacionarse.

Riesgos en las carreteras

No importa lo cuidadoso que sea al

conducir, siempre existe la posibilidad que

se desinfle una llanta en la carretera.

Conduzca lentamente hasta el área más

segura posible, lejos del tráfico vehicular.

Esto puede dañar aun más la llanta

desinflada, pero su seguridad es lo más

importante.

Si siente una vibración o alteración

repentina de la maniobrabilidad mientras

conduce, o sospecha que una llanta o el

vehículo se han dañado, reduzca

inmediatamente la velocidad. Conduzca

con precaución hasta que pueda salirse en

forma segura del camino. Pare y revise si

hay daño en las llantas. Si una llanta está

desinflada o dañada, desínflela, desmonte

la rueda y reemplácela con la llanta y

rueda de refacción. Si no puede encontrar

una causa, haga remolcar el vehículo hasta

el taller de reparaciones o distribuidor de

llantas más cercano para que revisen el

vehículo.

282

Ruedas y llantas

Alineación de ruedas y llantas

Una mala sacudida por golpear el borde

de las banquetas o un bache, puede

provocar que la parte delantera de su

vehículo pierda la alineación o se dañen

las llantas. Si su vehículo parece tirar hacia

un lado mientras conduce, es posible que

las ruedas hayan perdido la alineación.

Haga que un distribuidor autorizado revise

periódicamente la alineación de las ruedas.

La desalineación de las ruedas delanteras

o traseras puede provocar un desgaste

disparejo y rápido de las llantas y la debe

corregir un distribuidor autorizado. Los

vehículos con tracción en las ruedas

delanteras y aquellos con suspensión

trasera independiente (si está equipado)

pueden requerir alineación de las cuatro

ruedas.

Las llantas se deben balancear

periódicamente. Un conjunto de llanta y

rueda desbalanceado puede tener como

resultado el desgaste irregular de la llanta.

Rotación de las llantas

Nota: Si las llantas muestran un desgaste

disparejo, solicite a un distribuidor

autorizado que revise y corrija la

desalineación de las ruedas, el desequilibrio

de las llantas o cualquier problema

mecánico relacionado antes de rotar las

llantas.

Nota: Es posible que su vehículo esté

equipado con un conjunto de rueda y llanta

de refacción distinto. Un conjunto de rueda

y llanta de refacción distinta se define como

un conjunto de rueda y llanta de refacción

de otra marca, tamaño o apariencia que las

llantas y ruedas normales. Si tiene un

conjunto de rueda y llanta de refacción

distinto, debe usarlo sólo temporalmente y

no incluirlo en la rotación de llantas.

Nota: Después de rotar sus ruedas, revise

y ajuste la presión de inflado según los

requisitos del vehículo.

Girar las llantas según el intervalo

recomendado (como se indica en el

capítulo de Mantenimiento programado)

permitirá que las llantas se desgasten de

forma más equilibrada, entregando un

mejor rendimiento de las llantas y una vida

útil más prolongada de estas.

Vehículos con tracción en las ruedas

delanteras (llantas delanteras en la parte

izquierda de la ilustración)

E142547

Vehículos con tracción en las cuatro

ruedas (llantas delanteras en la parte

izquierda de la ilustración)

E142548

En ocasiones, el desgaste irregular de las

llantas se puede corregir rotándolas.

283

Ruedas y llantas

USO DE CADENAS PARA

NIEVE

ALERTA

Las llantas para nieve deben ser del

mismo tamaño, índice de carga,

régimen de velocidad que aquellas

proporcionadas originalmente por Ford. El

uso de cualquier llanta o rueda no

recomendada por Ford puede afectar la

seguridad y el rendimiento de su vehículo,

lo que podría significar mayor riesgo de

pérdida de control del vehículo, volcadura,

lesiones e incluso la muerte. De manera

adicional, el uso de llantas y ruedas no

recomendadas podría causar que la

dirección, la suspensión, el eje, la caja de

transferencia o el tren de fuerza fallen.

Las llantas de su vehículo tienen bandas

de rodadura para todas las condiciones

climáticas con el fin de proporcionar

tracción con lluvia y con nieve. Sin

embargo, en algunos climas, puede ser

necesario utilizar llantas para la nieve y

cables. Si necesita usar cables, se

recomienda el uso de ruedas de acero (del

mismo tamaño y especificaciones), ya que

los cables pueden rayar las ruedas de

aluminio.

Siga estas pautas al usar llantas y

dispositivos de tracción para la nieve

• Si es posible, evite cargar el vehículo al

máximo

• Compre cadenas o cables de un

fabricante que claramente etiqueta la

carrocería según las restricciones de

dimensión.

• Use cables de 10 mm o las cadenas

SOLO en e eje delantero con

235/55R17.

• No todas las cadenas o cables para

nieve clase S cumplen estas

restricciones. Las cadenas de esta

restricción de tamaño incluirán un

dispositivo de tensionamiento.

• Las cadenas o cables para nieve se

deben montar en pares en el eje

delantero.

• No use los cadenas o cables en llantas

235/50R18 ni 235/45R19.

• Instale los cables de manera segura,

verificando que no toquen ningún

cableado, líneas de frenos o de

combustible.

• Al conducir con cables de llantas no

supere 48 km/h (30 mph) o la

velocidad máxima recomendada por

el fabricante de cadenas, lo que sea

menor.

• Maneje con precaución. Si siente que

los cables rozan o golpean contra el

vehículo, deténgase y vuelva a

apretarlos. Si esto no funciona, quite

los cables para evitar daños en el

vehículo.

• Quite los cables cuando ya no los

necesite. No los use en caminos secos.

Si tiene dudas acerca de cadenas o cables

para nieve, póngase en contacto con su

distribuidor autorizado.

284

Ruedas y llantas

SISTEMA DE MONITOREO DE

PRESIÓN DE LAS LLANTAS

ALERTA

El sistema de monitoreo de presión

de las llantas NO sustituye la revisión

manual de la presión de las llantas.

La presión de las llantas se debe revisar

periódicamente (al menos una vez al mes)

usando un manómetro de presión para

llantas, consulte Inflado de las llantas en

este capítulo. Si no se mantiene

correctamente la presión de las llantas,

puede aumentar el riesgo de una falla de

las llantas, de pérdida de control, de

volcadura del vehículo y de lesiones

personales.

Cada llanta, incluida la de

refacción (si la tiene), se debe

revisar mensualmente cuando

hace frío y debe tener la presión

de inflado recomendada por el fabricante,

la que se encuentra en la etiqueta del

vehículo o en la etiqueta de presión de

inflado de llantas. (Si su vehículo tiene

llantas de distinto tamaño al que se indica

en la etiqueta del vehículo o en la etiqueta

de presión de inflado de llantas, debe

determinar la presión de inflado de las

llantas adecuada.)

Como una función de seguridad adicional,

su vehículo cuenta con sistema de

monitoreo de presión de las llantas

(TPMS), el cual enciende un indicador de

llanta con baja presión cuando una o más

llantas están considerablemente

desinfladas. Por consiguiente, cuando el

indicador de llanta con baja presión se

enciende, debe detenerse y revisar la llanta

lo antes posible para inflarla hasta obtener

la presión correcta. Si maneja con llantas

desinfladas, hará que éstas se

sobrecalienten, lo que puede provocar una

falla de las llantas. Las llantas desinfladas

también reducen la eficiencia del

combustible y la vida de las bandas de

rodamiento de las llantas y puede afectar

la capacidad de manejo y detención del

vehículo.

Observe que el TPMS no es un sustituto

del mantenimiento de llantas adecuado,

y que es responsabilidad del conductor

mantener la presión de inflado correcta,

incluso si el inflado insuficiente no ha

alcanzado el nivel necesario para activar

el indicador de llanta con baja presión del

TPMS.

El vehículo también cuenta con un

indicador de falla del TPMS para señalar

cuando el sistema no está funcionando en

forma adecuada. El indicador de falla se

combina con el indicador de presión de

llanta baja. Cuando el sistema detecta una

falla, el indicador destella durante

aproximadamente un minuto y luego

permanece encendido en forma continua.

Esta secuencia continuará en los siguientes

arranques del vehículo, mientras exista la

falla.

285

Ruedas y llantas

Cuando el indicador de falla esté

encendido, el sistema no podrá detectar

o señalar una presión de llanta baja, como

es su objetivo. Las fallas del TPMS pueden

obedecer a diversas razones, como la

instalación de llantas o ruedas de

reemplazo o alternativas en el vehículo,

que impiden que el TPMS funcione como

corresponde. Siempre revise el indicador

de falla del TPMS después de cambiar una

o más llantas o ruedas en el vehículo, para

asegurarse de que éstas permitan el

correcto funcionamiento del TPMS.

El sistema de monitoreo de presión de las

llantas cumple con la Parte 15 del

reglamento de la Federal Communications

Commission (FCC) y con la norma

RSS-210 de Industry Canada. La operación

está sujeta a estas dos condiciones: (1)

Este dispositivo no debiera causar

interferencia dañina y (2) Este dispositivo

debe aceptar cualquier interferencia que

reciba, incluso interferencias que pudieran

causar un funcionamiento no deseado.

Cambio de llantas con un Sistema

de monitoreo de presión de las

llantas

E142549

Nota: Cada llanta para el camino incluye

un detector de presión de la llanta ubicado

en el interior de la cavidad de la llanta

conjunto de llanta. El sensor de presión está

unido al vástago de la válvula. El sensor de

presión está cubierto por la llanta por lo que

no se puede ver, a menos que quite la llanta.

Debe tener cuidado cuando cambie las

llantas para evitar dañar el sensor

Se recomienda que siempre repare sus

llantas en un distribuidor autorizado.

La presión de las llantas se debe revisar

periódicamente (al menos una vez al mes)

usando un manómetro de precisión,

consulte Inflado de las llantas en este

capítulo.

Comprensión del Sistema de

monitoreo de presión de las llantas

El sistema de monitoreo de presión de las

llantas mide la presión de las cuatro

llantas de carretera y envía las lecturas de

la presión de las llantas al vehículo. La luz

de advertencia de llanta con baja presión

se iluminará si la presión de la llanta es

significativamente baja. Una vez que se

enciende la luz, las llantas no están

suficientemente infladas y es necesario

inflarlas según la presión recomendada

por el fabricante. Incluso si la luz se

enciende y luego se apaga, sigue siendo

necesaria la revisión de la presión de las

llantas. Visite www.checkmytires.org para

obtener información adicional.

Cuando se instala la llanta de refacción

provisional

Cuando se ha reemplazado una de las

llantas de carretera por la de refacción

provisional, el sistema de monitoreo de

presión de las llantas continúa

identificando un problema, para recordarle

que la rueda y el conjunto de llanta de

carretera dañada se debe reparar y volver

a colocar en el vehículo.

286

Ruedas y llantas

Para restaurar toda la funcionalidad del

Sistema de monitoreo de presión de las

llantas, repare y vuelva a montar la rueda

y conjunto de llanta de carretera dañada

en el vehículo.

Cuando piense que el sistema no está

funcionando correctamente

La función principal del sistema de

monitoreo de presión de las llantas es

avisarle cuando éstas necesitan aire.

También podría avisarle en caso de que el

sistema ya no pudiera funcionar como se

espera. Para obtener más información

relacionada con el sistema de monitoreo

de presión de las llantas, consulte la

siguiente tabla:

287

Ruedas y llantas

Pasos a seguir por el usuarioCausa posibleLuz de advertencia

de baja presión de

las llantas

1. Asegúrese de que las llantas estén a

la presión adecuada. Consulte Inflado

de las llantas en este capítulo. 2.

Después de inflar las llantas a la presión

de inflado recomendada por el fabri-

cante que se muestra en la Etiqueta de

llantas (ubicada en el borde de la puerta

del conductor o en el pilar B), el vehículo

se debe manejar cuando menos dos

minutos a más de 32 km/h (20 mph)

para que se apague la luz.

Llantas desinfladasLuz de advertencia

encendida

Repare la rueda y conjunto de llanta para

carretera dañada y vuelva a instalarla en

el vehículo para restablecer la funciona-

lidad del sistema. Para obtener una

descripción de cómo funciona el sistema,

consulte Cuando se instala la llanta de

refacción provisional en esta sección.

Llanta de refacción en

uso

Si las llantas del vehículo están debida-

mente infladas y su refacción no está en

uso, pero la luz permanece iluminada,

visite a su distribuidor autorizado lo antes

posible.

Falla del TPMS

Repare la rueda y conjunto de llanta para

carretera dañada y vuelva a instalarla en

el vehículo para restablecer la funciona-

lidad del sistema. Para obtener una

descripción de cómo funciona el sistema,

consulte Cuando se instala la llanta de

refacción provisional en esta sección.

Llanta de refacción en

uso

Luz de advertencia

destellando

Si las llantas del vehículo están debida-

mente infladas y su refacción no está en

uso, pero la luz permanece iluminada,

visite a su distribuidor autorizado lo antes

posible.

Falla del TPMS

288

Ruedas y llantas

Al inflar las llantas

Al poner aire a las llantas (como por

ejemplo, en una estación de gasolina o en

el garaje), es posible que el sistema de

monitoreo de presión de las llantas no

responda inmediatamente.

Una vez que las llantas se inflan a la

presión recomendada, deberá manejar

aproximadamente dos minutos a más de

32 km/h (20 mph) para que la luz se

apague

Cómo la temperatura afecta la presión

de las llantas

El sistema de monitoreo de presión de las

llantas controla la presión en cada llanta

de neumático. Mientras maneja en forma

normal, la presión habitual de inflado de

una llanta para transporte de pasajeros

puede aumentar de unas 14 a 28 kPa (2 a

4 psi) desde una situación de arranque en

frío. Si el vehículo permanece estacionado

durante la noche con una temperatura

exterior considerablemente menor a la del

día, la presión de la llanta puede disminuir

unos 21 kPa (3 psi) por cada descenso de

17 °C (30 °F) en la temperatura ambiente.

Este valor de presión más bajo podría ser

detectado por el TPMS si fuera

significativamente menor que la presión

de inflado recomendada y se activaría la

advertencia de TPMS de llanta con baja

presión. Si se enciende la luz de

advertencia de baja presión de las llantas,

compruebe visualmente todas las llantas

para verificar que no estén desinfladas. (Si

una o más llantas están desinfladas,

repárelas según sea necesario.) Revise la

presión de aire de las llantas para

carretera. Si hubiera alguna llanta

desinflada, maneje con cuidado al lugar

más cercano donde pueda poner aire a las

llantas. Infle todas las llantas a la presión

recomendada.

CAMBIO DE UNA RUEDA

AVISOS

El uso de selladores de llantas puede

dañar el sistema de monitoreo de

presión de llantas, por lo que no debe

usarlos. Sin embargo, si tiene que utilizar

un sellador, el sistema de monitoreo de

presión de las llantas y el vástago de la

válvula de la rueda se deben reemplazar

en un distribuidor Ford autorizado.

Ver Sistema de monitoreo de

presión de las llantas (página 285).

para obtener información

importante. Si se daña, el sensor del

monitor de presión de las llantas no

volverá a funcionar.

Nota: El indicador del sistema de monitoreo

de presión de las llantas se encenderá

cuando la llanta de refacción esté en uso.

Para restablecer la funcionalidad completa

del sistema de monitoreo, se deben instalar

en el vehículo todas las ruedas para el

camino equipadas con sensores de

monitoreo de presión de llantas.

Si se desinfla una llanta mientras conduce,

no frene en forma brusca. Disminuya la

velocidad en forma gradual. Sujete con

firmeza el volante de la dirección y

trasládese lentamente hasta una zona

segura a un costado del camino.

Solicite al distribuidor autorizado que

revise la llanta desinflada para evitar que

se produzca daño en los sensores del

sistema de monitoreo de presión de las

llantas. Ver Sistema de monitoreo de

presión de las llantas (página 285).

Reemplace la llanta de refacción por una

llanta de carretera lo antes posible.

Durante la reparación o reemplazo de la

llanta desinflada, solicite que un

distribuidor autorizado inspeccione si el

sensor del sistema de monitoreo de

presión de las llantas presenta daños.

289

Ruedas y llantas

Información del conjunto de rueda

o llanta de refacción distinta

ALERTA

De no seguir estas instrucciones,

podrían aumentar los riesgos de

pérdida de control del vehículo,

lesiones o la muerte.

Si tiene una llanta o rueda de refacción

distinta, entonces, debe usarla sólo

temporalmente. Esto significa que si debe

usarla, tiene que reemplazarla lo antes

posible por un conjunto de rueda y llanta

de carretera que sea del mismo tamaño y

tipo que las ruedas y llantas para el camino

que suministró Ford originalmente. Si la

llanta o rueda de refacción distinta está

dañada, en lugar de repararla, debe

reemplazarla.

Un conjunto de llanta y rueda de refacción

distinto se define como un conjunto de

rueda y llanta de refacción que tiene

diferente marca, tamaño o apariencia con

respecto a las llantas y ruedas para el

camino, y pueden ser de tres tipos:

1. Mini llanta de refacción tipo T: esta

llanta de refacción comienza con la letra

T para el tamaño de llanta y puede tener

impreso "Temporary Use Only" (sólo para

uso temporal) en el costado.

2. Llanta de refacción distinta, de

tamaño normal, con etiqueta en la

rueda: esta llanta de refacción tiene una

etiqueta en la rueda que dice: “THIS AND

TIRE WHEEL FOR TEMPORARY USE

ONLY” (Este conjunto de rueda y llanta

son solo para uso temporal).

Al manejar con una de las llantas de

refacción distintas que se indican arriba,

no:

• Sobrepase 80 kilómetros por hora (50

millas por hora)

• Cargue el vehículo más allá de la

capacidad máxima indicada en la

Etiqueta de cumplimiento de las

normas de seguridad.

• Arrastre un remolque.

• Use cadenas para la nieve en el lado

del vehículo que tiene la llanta de

refacción distinta.

• Use cadenas para la nieve en el lado

del vehículo que tiene la llanta de

refacción distinta.

• Use equipos de lavado de automóviles

comerciales.

• Intente reparar la llanta de refacción

distinta.

El uso de una de las llantas de refacción

distinta que se indican arriba en cualquier

posición de la rueda puede provocar un

deterioro de lo siguiente:

• Manejo, estabilidad y rendimiento de

los frenos.

• Comodidad y ruido.

• Distancia entre el suelo y el vehículo, y

lugar de estacionamiento junto a las

banquetas.

• Capacidad de manejo en invierno.

• Capacidad de manejo en climas

húmedos.

• Capacidad de manejo de todas las

ruedas (si se aplica).

3. Llanta de refacción distinta de

tamaño completo sin etiqueta en la

rueda

Al conducir con el conjunto de rueda o

llanta de refacción distinta de tamaño

completo, no:

• Sobrepase 113 kilómetros por hora (70

millas por hora).

• Use más de un conjunto de rueda y

llanta refacción distinta a la vez.

290

Ruedas y llantas

• Use equipos de lavado de automóviles

comerciales.

• use cadenas para la nieve en el lado

del vehículo que tiene el conjunto de

rueda o llanta de refacción distinta.

El uso de un conjunto de rueda y llanta de

refacción distinta de tamaño completo

puede ocasionar un empeoramiento en:

• Manejo, estabilidad y rendimiento de

los frenos.

• Comodidad y ruido.

• Distancia entre el suelo y el vehículo, y

lugar de estacionamiento junto a las

banquetas.

• Capacidad de manejo en invierno.

• Capacidad de manejo en climas

húmedos.

• Capacidad de manejo de todas las

ruedas (si se aplica).

• ajuste de nivelación de carga (si se

aplica).

Al conducir con el conjunto de rueda y

llanta de refacción diferente de tamaño

completo, debe poner cuidado cuando:

• Arrastre de un remolque.

• maneje vehículos equipados con una

carrocería para transportar equipo

necesario para acampar.

• maneje vehículos con carga en una

parrilla para carga.

Maneje con cuidado cuando use un

conjunto de rueda y llanta de refacción

distinta de tamaño completo y busque

servicio lo antes posible.

Procedimiento de cambio de

llantas

AVISOS

Cuando alguna de las llantas

delanteras no está en el suelo, la

transmisión no evitará por sí misma

que el vehículo se mueva o se deslice del

gato, incluso si el vehículo está en posición

Para impedir que el vehículo se

mueva mientras cambia una llanta,

asegúrese que esté puesto el freno

de mano, luego bloquee (en ambas

direcciones) la rueda que está

diagonalmente opuesta (otro lado y

extremo del vehículo) para poder cambiar

la llanta.

Si el vehículo se resbala del gato,

usted o alguien podría sufrir lesiones

graves.

No intente cambiar una llanta en el

costado del vehículo cercano al

tráfico en movimiento. Saque el

vehículo del camino para evitar el peligro

de ser golpeado al manejar el gato o al

cambiar la rueda.

Para reducir el riesgo de lesiones

personales, no coloque ninguna

parte de su cuerpo bajo el vehículo

mientras realiza un cambio de llanta. No

encienda el motor cuando su vehículo esté

sobre el gato. El gato sólo debe utilizarse

para cambiar llantas.

Nota: Los pasajeros no deben permanecer

en el vehículo al levantarlo con el gato.

1. Estaciónese en una superficie nivelada,

accione el freno de estacionamiento y

active las luces intermitentes de

emergencia.

2. Coloque la palanca de cambios en

posición P apague el motor.

291

Ruedas y llantas

3. Desmonte la cubierta tapizada de la

rueda.

E142550

4. Desmonte la llave de birlos de rueda y

el gato del soporte de hule espuma.

Luego, retire la correa de sujeción de

llanta desinflada de la base del gato.

E142551

5. Bloquee la rueda diagonalmente

opuesta.

6. Afloje todas las tuercas de seguridad

de la rueda girándolas media vuelta

hacia la izquierda, pero no las quite

hasta que la rueda se haya levantado

del suelo.

7. Aquí se muestran los puntos de apoyo

para el gato en el vehículo, así como

en la etiqueta de advertencia amarilla

adherida al gato. Apoye el gato en los

puntos indicados para evitar daños

al vehículo.

E142552

292

Ruedas y llantas

8. Pequeñas marcas de flecha en los

estribos muestran la ubicación de los

puntos de apoyo para el gato.

E142553

9. Quite las tuercas de seguridad con la

llave de rueda.

Nota: Si está equipado con tapones de

rueda completos con tuercas expuestas, las

tuercas de rueda se deben retirar antes de

quitar el tapón de rueda o es posible que se

dañe el tapón de rueda.

10. Reemplace la llanta desinflada con

la llanta de refacción, asegurándose

de que el vástago de la válvula quede

hacia fuera. Vuelva a instalar las

tuercas de seguridad hasta que la

rueda quede ajustada contra el cubo.

No apriete completamente las

tuercas de seguridad sino hasta

después de haber bajado la rueda.

11. Baje la rueda girando la manivela del

gato hacia la izquierda.

E75442

12. Quite el gato y apriete

completamente las tuercas de

seguridad en el orden que se indica.

Ver Especificaciones técnicas

(página 295).

Almacenamiento de la llanta

desinflada

1. Guarde el gato y la llave de rueda.

Asegúrese de que el gato quede

asegurado de modo que no vibre al

manejar.

2. Desbloquee las ruedas.

3. Deje la llanta desinflada en el piso en

el área de carga. Fije con la correa de

sujeción de llanta siguiendo los

siguientes pasos:

E142906

293

Ruedas y llantas

4. Ubique el punto de anclaje de carga

cerca del respaldo del asiento. Empuje

el bucle de la correa de sujeción a

través del punto de anclaje. Enrosque

el extremo sin bucle a través del bucle.

E142985

5. Pase la correa de sujeción a través de

las aberturas de la rueda.

6. Ubique el punto de anclaje de carga

delantero en la esquina opuesta del

área de carga al punto de anclaje

usado en el paso 4. Enrosque la correa

de sujeción a través del punto de

anclaje y tire firmemente.

7. Fije al amarrar un nudo de lazo de 2

mitades.

E143746

294

Ruedas y llantas

ESPECIFICACIONES TÉCNICAS

Especificaciones de apriete de las tuercas de seguridad de las ruedas

ALERTA

Cuando instale una rueda, elimine siempre la corrosión, la tierra o los materiales

extraños de las superficies de montaje de la rueda o de la superficie del cubo de la

rueda, el tambor o el disco de los frenos donde hacen contacto con la rueda.

Verifique que todos los sujetadores que fijan el rotor al cubo estén asegurados, de manera

que no interfieran con las superficies de montaje de la rueda. La instalación de las ruedas

sin el contacto metal con metal correcto en las superficies de montaje de las ruedas

puede hacer que las tuercas de las ruedas se suelten y la rueda se salga mientras el

vehículo está en movimiento, lo que haría perder el control.

Ib-ft (Nm)

Medida del birlo

100 (135)M12 x 1.5

Las especificaciones de apriete son para roscas de pernos y tuercas sin suciedad ni

óxido. Sólo utilice los sujetadores de repuesto que recomienda Ford.

Vuelva a apretar las tuercas de seguridad al par de apriete especificado a los 160 km

(100 millas) luego de cualquier problema con las ruedas (rotación de las llantas, cambio

de una llanta desinflada, extracción de la rueda, etc.).

E145950

Orificio de guía de la ruedaA

Inspeccione orificio de guía de la rueda y

la superficie de montaje antes de la

instalación. Elimine cualquier corrosión

visible o partículas sueltas.

295

Ruedas y llantas

ESPECIFICACIONES DEL MOTOR

Motor 2.5LMotor 2.0L EcoBoostMotor 1.6L EcoBoostMotor

15212298Pulgadas cúbicas

87 octanos mínimo87 octanos mínimo87 octanos mínimoCombustible

requerido

9,7:19,3:110,0:1Relación de

compresión

0,049-0,053 in.

(1,25-1,35 mm)

0,027-0,031 in.

(0,70-0,80 mm)

0,027-0,031 in. (0,70-

0,80 mm)

Separación de

bujías

Enrutado de correa (drivebelt)

Motor 1.6L

E142479

Motores 2.0L y 2.5L

E142480

La banda impulsora larga se

encuentra en el primer surco de

la polea, en la ubicación más

cercana al motor

La banda impulsora corta se

encuentra en el segundo surco

de la polea, en la ubicación más

lejana al motor

296

Capacidades y Especificaciones

REPUESTOS DE MOTORCRAFT

Motor 2.5LMotor 2.0L EcoBoost®Motor 1.6L EcoBoost®Componente

FA-1908Elemento del

filtro de aire

FL-910-SFiltro de

aceite

BXT-96R-500Batería

BXT-96R-590

AYFS-32-YR

Bujías

FP70Filtro de aire

de la cabina

WW-2750 (lado del conductor)Pluma del

limpiapara-

brisas

WW-2705-WA (lado del pasajero)

No usar el filtro de aire correcto puede causar daños graves al motor. La garantía del

usuario se puede anular por cualquier daño al motor, si no usa el elemento del filtro de

aire correcto.

Sólo utilice el filtro de aire de refacción especificado. La utilización de un filtro de aceite

no especificado puede dañar el motor.

Para reemplazar las bujías, consulte a un distribuidor autorizado. Reemplace las bujías

a intervalos adecuados. Ver Reparación del vehículo (página 437).

Nota: reemplace las bujías por otras que cumplan con los materiales y especificaciones

de diseño de Ford para su vehículo, como las refacciones Motorcraft® o equivalentes.

La garantía al usuario se puede anular por cualquier daño al motor si no se usan tales

bujías.

297

Capacidades y Especificaciones

NÚMERO DE IDENTIFICACIÓN

DEL VEHÍCULO

El número de identificación del vehículo se

ubica en el tablero de instrumentos en el

lado del conductor.

E142476

Tenga en cuenta que, en la ilustración,

XXXX representa el número de

identificación del vehículo.

El número de identificación del vehículo

contiene la siguiente información:

E142477

Código de planta de fabricaciónA

Sistema de frenos, peso bruto

vehicular máximo, dispositivos

de sujeción y sus ubicaciones

Modelo, línea de vehículo, serie,

tipo de carrocería

Tipo de motorD

Dígito de verificaciónE

Año modeloF

Planta de ensambleG

Número de secuencia de

producción

ETIQUETA DE CERTIFICACIÓN

DEL VEHÍCULO

E142478

Los reglamentos de la Administración

nacional de seguridad de tránsito en

carreteras (NHTSA) exigen que se adhiera

una Etiqueta de certificación del

cumplimiento de las normas de seguridad

y establecen el lugar en que esta etiqueta

debe estar ubicada. La Etiqueta de

certificación del cumplimiento de las

normas de seguridad debe estar adherida

al pilar de bisagra de la puerta, al poste de

seguro de la puerta o al borde de la puerta

junto al poste de poste de seguro de la

puerta, junto a la posición del asiento del

conductor.

298

Capacidades y Especificaciones

CÓDIGO DE LA TRANSMISIÓN

E142806

Puede encontrar el código de transmisión

en la Etiqueta de certificación del

cumplimiento de las normas de seguridad.

El siguiente cuadro le indica qué

transmisión representa cada código.

CódigoDesignación

6Transmisión automática

de seis velocidades

(6F35)

ESPECIFICACIONES TÉCNICAS

Número de refacción

Ford / Especificación

Ford

Nombre de la refac-

ción Ford o equiva-

lente

CapacidadElemento

PM-1-C / WSS-

M6C65-A2

Motorcraft® High

Performance DOT 4

Motor Vehicle Brake

Fluid

Entre Mín y Máx

en el depósito

Líquido de frenos

XG-4 o XL-5 o equiva-

lente / ESB-M1C93-

Grasa de usos múlti-

ples (grasa de litio)

No correspondePestillo de la puerta,

pestillo del cofre,

pestillo auxiliar del

cofre, pestillo de la

cajuela, rieles de los

asientos.

XL-1 / NingunoMotorcraft® Penetra-

ting and Lock Lubri-

cant

No correspondeCilindro de los seguros

XT-10-QLV

MERCON® LV

Motorcraft®

MERCON® LV ATF

8.5L (9 qt)Aceite de la transmisión

automática

2, 3

299

Capacidades y Especificaciones

Número de refacción

Ford / Especificación

Ford

Nombre de la refac-

ción Ford o equiva-

lente

CapacidadElemento

XY-80W90-QL /

WSP-M2C197-A

Motorcraft® SAE

80W-90 Premium

Rear Axle Lubricant

1.15 L (2.4 pt)Aceite del diferencial

trasero (AWD)

XY-75W140-QL /

WSL-M2C192-A

Motorcraft® SAE

75W-140 Synthetic

Rear Axle Lubricant

0.35L (12 oz)Líquido de la Unidad de

transferencia de

potencia (PTU) (AWD)

- XO-5W30-QSP

(EE.UU.)

- Motorcraft® SAE

5W-30 Premium

Synthetic Blend

Motor Oil (EE.UU.)

5.4L (5.7 qt)Aceite de motor 2.0L

EcoBoost®

5, 6

- XO-5W30-QFS

(EE.UU.)

- Motorcraft® SAE

5W-30 Full Synt-

hetic Motor Oil

(EE.UU.)

- CXO-5W30-LSP12

(Canadá)

- CXO-5W30-LFS12

(Canadá)

- Motorcraft® SAE

5W-30 Super

Premium Motor Oil

(Canadá)

/ WSS-M2C946-A

con Marca de certifi-

cación API

- Motorcraft® SAE

5W-30 Synthetic

Motor Oil (Canadá)

- XO-5W20-QSP

(EE.UU.)

- Motorcraft® SAE

5W-20 Premium

Synthetic Blend

Motor Oil (EE.UU.)

4.1L (4.3 qt)Aceite de motor 1.6L

EcoBoost

5, 6

- XO-5W20-QFS

(EE.UU.)

5.4L (5.7 qt)

Aceite de motor 2.5L

5, 6

- CXO-5W20-LSP12

(Canadá)

- Motorcraft® SAE

5W-20 Full Synt-

hetic Motor Oil

(EE.UU.)

- CXO-5W20-LFS12

(Canadá)

- Motorcraft® SAE

5W-20 Super

Premium Motor Oil

(Canadá)

/ WSS-M2C945-A y

marca de certifica-

ción API

- Motorcraft® SAE

5W-20 Synthetic

Motor Oil (Canadá)

- VC-3DIL-B (EE.

UU.)

Motorcraft® Orange

Antifreeze / Coolant

Prediluted

9.2L (9.7 qt)Refrigerante de motor

2.0L EcoBoost

300

Capacidades y Especificaciones

Número de refacción

Ford / Especificación

Ford

Nombre de la refac-

ción Ford o equiva-

lente

CapacidadElemento

- CVC-3DIL-B

(Canadá)

8L (8.5 qt)Refrigerante de motor

1.6L EcoBoost

/ WSS-M97B44-D2

8.7L (9.2 qt)Refrigerante de motor

2.5L

- ZC-32-A (EE. UU.)- Motorcraft®

Premium Windshield

Washer Concentrate

(EE. UU.)

Llene según sea

necesario

Líquido limpia para-

brisas - CXC-37-(A, B, D y

F) (Canadá)

/ WSB-M8B16-A2/--

Premium Quality

Windshield Washer

Fluid (Canadá)

No correspondeNo corresponde57L (15.1 gal)Tanque de combustible

Utilice solo líquido de frenos Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Brake Fluid o uno

equivalente que cumpla con las normas WSS-M6C65-A2 e ISO 4925 Clase 6. El uso de

cualquier aceite distinto del recomendado puede causar daño en el sistema de frenos.

Capacidad aproximada de llenado en seco. La cantidad real puede variar durante los

cambios de líquido.

Las transmisiones automáticas que requieren aceite de transmisión Motorcraft®

MERCON® LV solo deben usar aceite de transmisión Motorcraft® MERCON® LV.

El uso de cualquier aceite distinto del recomendado puede causar daño en la transmisión.

Cambie el aceite de la transmisión automática y el filtro en el intervalo de servicio

correspondiente. Ver Reparación del vehículo (página 437).

Consulte a su distribuidor autorizado para la revisión del nivel de combustible o llenado.

No es obligatorio el uso de aceite de motor sintético o de mezcla sintética. El aceite de

motor solo debe cumplir con los requisitos de la especificación WSS-M2C946-A, SAE

5W-30 (motor 2.0L) o WSS-M2C945-A, SAE 5W-20 (motores 1.6L y 2.5L) de Ford y

tener la Marca de certificación API.

Su motor ha sido diseñado para usarse con aceite de motor Ford, que proporciona

ventajas de economía de combustible y a la vez mantiene la durabilidad del motor.

El uso de aceites que no sean los especificados puede ocasionar que se requiera un

período más largo de giro del motor, que se reduzca el rendimiento del motor, que

disminuya el ahorro de combustible y que aumenten los niveles de emisiones.

Agregue el tipo de líquido refrigerante que venía originalmente en su vehículo.

301

Capacidades y Especificaciones

Para obtener una lista completa de los

accesorios que están disponibles para su

vehículo, comuníquese con su distribuidor

o visite nuestra tienda en línea en la

dirección Accessories.Ford.com (solo en

Estados Unidos).

Existen accesorios personalizados Ford

disponibles para su vehículo a través de su

distribuidor local Ford o Ford de Canadá.

Ford Motor Company reparará o

reemplazará cualquier accesorio

personalizado Ford instalado

adecuadamente por un distribuidor, que

se encuentre defectuoso de fábrica en sus

materiales o en su ensamblaje durante el

período de vigencia de la garantía, como

también cualquier componente que se

haya dañado debido a los accesorios

defectuosos. Los accesorios serán

garantizados según lo que le proporcione

el mayor beneficio:

• 12 meses o 20,000 km (12,000 millas)

(lo que ocurra primero) o

• lo que resta de la garantía limitada

para vehículo nuevo.

Contacte a su distribuidor para obtener

más detalles y una copia de la garantía.

Estilo exterior

• Deflectores para el cofre

• Deflectores de viento laterales

• Salpicaderas

• Gráficas a la medida*

Estilo interior

• Tapetes

Estilo de vida

• Cenicero / conjuntos para fumadores

• Organizadores de carga flexibles

• Red de carga*

• Parrillas y portadores*

Tranquilidad

• Teclado de entrada sin llave

• Arranque a control remoto

• Sistemas de seguridad del vehículo

• Bloqueos de las ruedas

• Sistema de asistencia de

estacionamiento instalados en la

defensa*

*Los Accesorios con licencia de Ford (Ford

Licensed Accessories, [FLA]) tienen la

garantía del fabricante de los accesorios.

Los Accesorios con licencia de Ford han

sido totalmente diseñados y desarrollados

por el fabricante de accesorios y no han

sido diseñados ni probados con los

requerimientos de ingeniería de Ford Motor

Company. Solicite los detalles a su

distribuidor Ford con respecto a la garantía

limitada del fabricante y una copia de la

garantía limitada del producto FLA

ofrecida por el fabricante de los accesorios.

Para obtener el máximo rendimiento del

vehículo tenga en mente la siguiente

información al momento de agregar

accesorios o equipos a su vehículo:

• Al agregar accesorios, equipos,

pasajeros y equipaje a su vehículo, no

exceda la capacidad total de peso del

vehículo o del eje delantero o trasero

(GVWR, peso bruto vehicular máximo

o GAWR, peso bruto vehicular del eje

302

Accesorios

trasero como se indica en la Etiqueta

de certificación del cumplimiento de

las normas de seguridad). Consulte

con su distribuidor autorizado para

obtener información específica del

peso.

• La Comisión federal de

comunicaciones de Estados Unidos

(FCC, Federal Communications

Commission) y la Comisión canadiense

de radio y telecomunicaciones (CRTC,

Canadian Radio Telecommunications

Commission) regula el uso de sistemas

móviles de comunicación, como por

ejemplo, radios de dos vías, teléfonos

y alarmas antirrobos, los cuales están

equipados con transmisores de radio.

Todos los equipos instalados en su

vehículo deben cumplir con las normas

de la FCC o la CRTC y ser instalados

por un técnico de servicio calificado.

• Los sistemas móviles de comunicación

pueden dañar el funcionamiento de su

vehículo, especialmente si no están

correctamente diseñados para uso en

automóviles.

• Para evitar interferencia con otras

funciones del vehículo, tales como

sistemas de freno antibloqueo, los

usuarios de la radio para aficionados,

que instalan radios y antenas en su

vehículo, no deben ubicar las antenas

de la radio para aficionados en el área

del cofre del lado del conductor.

• La incorporación de accesorios o

componentes eléctricos o electrónicos

que no sean Ford al vehículo, ya sea

por parte del distribuidor autorizado o

del propietario, puede afectar el

rendimiento y la durabilidad de la

batería y puede también afectar el

rendimiento de otros sistemas

eléctricos del vehículo.

303

Accesorios

PLANES DE SERVICIO (Estados

Unidos solamente)

Más de 32 millones de propietarios de Ford

y Lincoln han descubierto la poderosa

protección de la Extensión de servicio Ford.

Ésta es la única extensión de servicio

respaldada por Ford Motor Company que

proporciona protección para mayor

tranquilidad, más allá de la cobertura de

la garantía limitada para vehículos nuevos.

Cobertura para más de 500

componentes del vehículo

Existen cuatro extensiones de servicio para

vehículos nuevos con diferentes niveles de

cobertura. Pregunte los detalles a su

distribuidor.

1. PremiumCare: Nuestra cobertura más

completa. ¡Con más de 500

componentes cubiertos, este plan es

tan completo que generalmente solo

informamos lo que no está cubierto!

2. ExtraCare: Cubre 113 componentes e

incluye muchas piezas de alta

tecnología.

3. BaseCare: Cubre 84 componentes.

4. PowertrainCare: Cubre 29

componentes críticos.

La Extensión de servicio Ford se encuentra

disponible en todos los distribuidores de

Ford y Lincoln de Estados Unidos y

Canadá. Es la única extensión de servicio

autorizada y respaldada por Ford Motor

Company. Eso significa que usted

obtendrá:

• Servicio confiable y de alta calidad en

cualquier parte.

• Técnicos entrenados en la fábrica.

• Uso de piezas autorizadas por Ford en

cada reparación cubierta.

Reembolso de automóvil de alquiler

Si para realizar las reparaciones cubiertas

tiene que dejar su vehículo hasta el día

siguiente, tiene derecho a cobertura de

vehículo alquilado, incluyendo

reparaciones cubiertas por la garantía de

defensa a defensa, o llamados a revisión

del fabricante.

Cobertura transferible

Si vende su vehículo antes de que venza

la cobertura de su Extensión de servicio

Ford, puede transferir cualquier cobertura

restante al nuevo propietario. Cuando

desee vender su vehículo, los posibles

compradores tendrán más confianza

respecto al hecho de adquirir su vehículo

usado. La Extensión de servicio Ford puede

aumentar el valor de reventa.

Además, brinda exclusiva asistencia en el

camino 24/7, que incluye:

• Remolque, cambio de llantas

desinfladas y arranque con cables

pasacorriente de la batería.

• Asistencia en caso de que se quede sin

combustible u olvide las llaves dentro

del vehículo.

• Reembolso de gastos de viaje como

alojamiento, comidas y alquiler de

vehículo.

• Asistencia de destino como servicio de

taxi, transbordador, cobertura de

vehículo alquilado y transporte de

emergencia.

La Extensión de servicio Ford puede

pagarse rápidamente por sí sola

Una factura de servicio que incluya el costo

de piezas y mano de obra puede exceder

fácilmente el costo del contrato de la

Extensión de servicio Ford. Con la

Extensión de servicio Ford, minimiza el

riesgo de facturas de reparación

inesperadas y costos de reparación cada

vez mayores.

304

Ford Protect

¡Evite los costos cada vez mayores que

se requieren para mantener en buen

estado su vehículo!

La Extensión de servicio Ford también

ofrece un Plan de mantenimiento Premium

que cubre piezas que se desgastan por el

uso cotidiano.

La cobertura se paga por adelantado, así

que nunca tendrá que preocuparse por

pagar el mantenimiento de su vehículo.

Este plan cubre chequeos regulares,

inspecciones rutinarias, cuidado preventivo

y reemplazo de partes que requieren

atención periódica debido al desgaste

normal:

• Hojas de limpiadores

• Bujías (excepto California)

• El disco del embrague

• Patines y balatas de los frenos

• Amortiguadores

• Bandas y mangueras

Contacte a su distribuidor Ford o Lincoln

para que le personalicen una Extensión de

Servicio Ford que se ajuste a su estilo de

vida y presupuesto.

Opciones de financiamiento sin

intereses

Aproveche nuestro plan de pago a plazos:

con sólo un 10% de enganche tendrá la

oportunidad de realizar sus pagos sin

comisiones ni intereses.

Para obtener más información

PROTÉJASE DEL ALTO COSTO DE LAS

REPARACIONES DEL VEHÍCULO CON UNA

EXTENSIÓN DE SERVICIO FORD.

Para obtener más información, llame a

nuestros especialistas de Ford ESP al

800-367-3377, y no olvide preguntar por

nuestro programa de pagos sin interés, que

le ofrece toda la seguridad y los beneficios

de Ford ESP mientras paga en cuotas.

¡Obtendrá una aprobación previa sin

verificación de crédito ni molestias!

O si lo prefiere, complete la información a

continuación y envíela por correo a:

Ford ESP

P.O. Box 8072

Royal Oak, MI 48068-0039

Nombre (SÍRVASE ESCRIBIR EN LETRAS DE IMPRENTA)

N° de apartamentoDIRECCIÓN

CÓD. POSTALESTADOCIUDAD

CORREO ELECTRÓNICO

305

Ford Protect

PLANES DE SERVICIO (CANADÁ

SOLAMENTE)

Puede obtener mayor protección para su

vehículo al adquirir una Extensión de

servicio Ford. La Extensión de servicio Ford

es el único contrato de servicio respaldado

por Ford Motor Company of Canada,

Limited. Dependiendo del plan que

compre, la Extensión de servicio Ford

proporciona beneficios como:

• Reembolso de renta

• Cobertura de ciertos elementos de

mantenimiento y desgaste

• Protección contra costos de reparación

después del vencimiento de su

Cobertura de garantía limitada para

vehículos nuevos

• Beneficios de Asistencia en el camino

Existen varios planes de Extensión de

servicio Ford para diferentes tiempos,

distancias y combinaciones de deducibles.

Cada plan ha sido diseñado para

adaptarse a sus propias necesidades de

manejo, incluido el reembolso por servicios

de remolque y alquiler.

Cuando adquiere una Extensión de servicio

Ford, recibe una mayor protección en todos

los Estados Unidos y Canadá

proporcionada por una red de

distribuidores de Ford Motor Company

participantes. El Plan de protección de

mantenimiento de Lincoln se aplica en

todos los distribuidores Lincoln

autorizados.

Nota: Las reparaciones realizadas fuera de

Canadá y de los Estados Unidos no son

elegibles para la cobertura de la Extensión

de servicio Ford.

Esta información está sujeta a

modificaciones.

Para más información, visite a su

distribuidor Ford local de Canadá o

www.ford.ca para saber cuál es el plan de

Extensión de servicio Ford adecuado para

usted.

306

Ford Protect

INFORMACIÓN GENERAL

E142598

SYNC es un sistema de comunicaciones

para vehículos que funciona en conjunto

con el teléfono celular con tecnología

Bluetooth y el reproductor de medios

portátil. Le permite:

• hacer y recibir llamadas

• acceder a música y tocarla en su

reproductor de música portátil

• usar 911 Assist™, Informe del

mantenimiento del vehículo y Servicios

SYNC (Tráfico, indicaciones e

información) (si está equipado)

• acceder a contactos de agenda y

música mediante comandos de voz

• reproducir audio desde el teléfono

conectado

• enviar mensajes de texto

• usar el sistema avanzado de

reconocimiento de voz

• cargar el dispositivo USB (si su

dispositivo es compatible).

Asegúrese de revisar la guía del usuario del

dispositivo antes de usarlo con SYNC.

Soporte

El equipo de soporte de SYNC está

disponible para ayudarle a responder las

preguntas que no pueda contestar por su

cuenta.

De lunes a sábado, de 8:30 a.m. a 8 p.m.,

hora del este (EST).

En los Estados Unidos, llame al:

1-888-270-1055.

En Canadá, llame al: 1-800-565-3673.

307

SYNC®

Los horarios están sujetos a cambios

debido a los días festivos.

Restricciones de manejo

Para su seguridad, ciertas características

en la mensajería de texto dependen de la

velocidad y no se pueden realizar cuando

el vehículo viaja a más de 5 km/h (3 mph).

Información de seguridad

ALERTA

Manejar mientras está distraído

puede tener como consecuencia la

pérdida de control del vehículo, un

accidente y lesiones. Ford recomienda

encarecidamente que los conductores

presten especial cuidado cuando utilicen

dispositivos que pudieran quitar su

atención del camino. Su responsabilidad

principal es manejar en forma segura el

vehículo. No se recomienda el uso de

ningún dispositivo portátil al conducir; se

sugiere el uso de sistemas operados por

voz cuando sea posible y que se informe

de las leyes estatales y locales aplicables

al uso de dispositivos electrónicos al

conducir.

Al usar SYNC:

• No haga funcionar dispositivos de

juegos si los cables de corriente están

rotos, separados o dañados. Coloque

con cuidado los cables de corriente

donde no los puedan pisar y no

interfieran con el funcionamiento de

pedales, asientos, compartimentos o

capacidades de manejo seguro.

• No deje los dispositivos de juego en el

vehículo en condiciones extremas, ya

que podría dañarlos. Para obtener más

información, consulte la guía del

usuario del dispositivo.

• No intente revisar o reparar el sistema.

Consulte con su distribuidor autorizado.

Información de privacidad

Cuando un teléfono móvil se conecta a

SYNC®, el sistema crea un perfil dentro de

su vehículo que está asociado a ese

teléfono móvil. Este perfil se crea para

ofrecerle más funciones móviles y para

una operación más eficiente. Entre otras

cosas, este perfil puede contener datos

acerca de la agenda del teléfono móvil,

mensajes de texto (leídos y sin leer) y el

historial de llamadas, incluyendo el

historial de llamadas de cuando el teléfono

móvil no estaba conectado al sistema.

Además, si conecta un dispositivo de

medios, el sistema crea y retiene un índice

del contenido de medios compatible. El

sistema también lleva un breve registro de

aproximadamente 10 minutos de toda su

actividad reciente. El perfil del registro y

otros datos del sistema pueden utilizarse

para mejorar el sistema y para ayudar en

el diagnóstico de cualquier problema que

pueda ocurrir.

El perfil del teléfono móvil, el índice del

dispositivo de medios y el registro

quedarán almacenados en el vehículo a

menos que usted los borre, y por lo general

solo se tiene acceso a ellos en el vehículo

cuando el teléfono móvil o el reproductor

multimedia están conectados. Si ya no va

a utilizar el sistema o el vehículo, le

recomendamos que realice el proceso de

Reconfiguración total para borrar toda la

información almacenada.

308

SYNC®

No se puede tener acceso a los datos del

sistema sin equipo especial y sin acceso

al módulo SYNC del vehículo. Ford Motor

Company y Ford Motor Company of

Canada no revisarán los datos del sistema

para otros fines que no sean los ya

descritos sin el consentimiento

correspondiente o sin un mandato judicial,

petición de las autoridades de policía,

petición de las autoridades

gubernamentales o petición de terceros

que actúen con la debida autoridad legal.

Otras terceras partes pueden solicitar

acceso a la información en forma

independiente de Ford Motor Company y

Ford of Canada. Para obtener información

adicional sobre privacidad, consulte las

secciones sobre 911 Assist (si está

equipado), Informe de mantenimiento del

vehículo (si está equipado) y Tráfico,

indicaciones e información (si está

equipado).

USO DEL RECONOCIMIENTO

DE VOZ

Este sistema le ayuda a controlar

numerosas funciones mediante comandos

de voz. Esto le permite tener las manos en

el volante y concentrarse en lo que está

delante suyo.

Sugerencias útiles

Asegúrese de que el interior del vehículo

esté lo más silencioso posible. Es posible

que las vibraciones del camino y el ruido

del viento que entra por las ventanas

abiertas impidan que el sistema reconozca

en forma correcta los comandos que diga.

Después de oprimir el icono de voz, espere

hasta que escuche el tono y que aparezca

"Escuchando" antes de decir un comando.

Cualquier comando que se diga antes de

esto no se registra en el sistema.

Hable con naturalidad, sin hacer pausas

largas entre palabras.

En cualquier momento, puede interrumpir

el sistema mientras éste habla al presionar

el icono de voz.

Iniciando sesión de voz

E142599

Empuje el icono de voz; se

escuchan sonidos de tono y

aparece "Escuchando" en la

pantalla. Diga cualquiera de las siguientes

opciones:

Si deseaDiga

Reproducir audio desde el teléfono."Audio Bluetooth"

Cancelar la acción solicitada."Cancelar"

Acceder al dispositivo conectado en la entrada auxiliar."Entrada Auxiliar"

Acceder a aplicaciones móviles.

"Mobile apps"

Realizar llamadas."Teléfono"

Acceder al portal de servicios SYNC.

"Servicios"

Regresar el menú principal."SYNC"

309

SYNC®

Si deseaDiga

Acceder al dispositivo conectado en su puerto USB."USB"

Ejecutar un informe de mantenimiento del vehículo."Reporte de Condición

Vehicular"

Ajustar el nivel de interacción y retroalimentación de voz."Configuración de voz"

Escuche una lista de comandos de voz disponibles en el

modo actual.

"Ayuda"

Si está equipado, solo EE.UU.

Interacción y retroalimentación

del sistema

El sistema proporciona retroalimentación

mediante tonos audibles, indicadores,

preguntas y confirmaciones habladas que

dependen de la situación y del nivel de

interacción elegido (configuración de voz).

Puede personalizar el sistema de

reconocimiento de voz para que le

proporcione más o menos instrucciones y

retroalimentación.

La configuración de fábrica está en un nivel

más alto de interacción para que le enseñe

a usar el sistema. Puede cambiar esta

configuración en cualquier momento.

Configuración del nivel de interacción

E142599

Presione el icono de voz. Diga

"Configuración de voz" cuando

se le indique, luego diga

cualquiera de las siguientes opciones:

El sistemaCuando diga

Proporciona menos interacción audible y

más indicadores de tono.

"Modo de Interacción Avanzado"

Proporciona interacción más detallada y

orientación.

"Modo de Interacción Estándar"

La configuración de fábrica del sistema es el modo de interacción estándar.

Los mensajes de confirmación son

preguntas cortas que el sistema hace

cuando no está seguro de su petición o

cuando la petición tiene varias respuestas

posibles. Por ejemplo, el sistema puede

decir, “Teléfono, ¿es correcto?”.

310

SYNC®

El sistemaCuando diga

Hace la mejor suposición del comando; es

posible que aun se le pida confirmar

ocasionalmente la configuración.

"Mensajes de Confirmación Desactivados"

Clarifica el comando de voz con una

pregunta breve.

"Mensajes de Confirmación Activados"

El sistema crea listas de candidatos

cuando tiene el mismo nivel de confianza

en varias opciones basadas en su

comando de voz. Cuando está activado,

es posible que se le indiquen cuatro

posibilidades para aclaración.

Por ejemplo, diga "Diga 1 después del tono

para llamar a Juan Pérez a la casa. Diga 2

después del tono para llamar a Juanito

Pérez al teléfono móvil. Diga 3 después del

tono para llamar a Juana Pérez en la casa".

O bien puede decir "Diga 1 después del

tono para reproducir a Juan Pérez; Diga 2

después del tono para reproducir a Juanito

Pérez".

El sistemaCuando diga

Hace la mejor suposición de la lista de

opciones de medios; es posible que aun se

le hagan preguntas.

"Lista de Candidatos de Medios Desacti-

vados"

Clarifica el comando de voz para candi-

datos de medios.

"Lista de Candidatos de Medios Activada"

Hace la mejor suposición de la lista de

opciones de teléfonos; es posible que aun

se le hagan preguntas.

"Lista de Candidatos de Teléfono Desacti-

vada"

Clarifica el comando de voz para candi-

datos de teléfonos.

"Lista de Candidatos de Teléfono Activada"

311

SYNC®

USO DE SYNC® CON EL

TELÉFONO

La llamada de manos libres es una de las

características principales de SYNC.

Aunque el sistema tiene una amplia

variedad de características, muchas de

ellas dependen de la funcionalidad de su

teléfono. La mayoría de los teléfonos

móviles con tecnología inalámbrica

Bluetooth admiten, al menos, las

siguientes funciones:

• Responder una llamada entrante

• Finalizar una llamada

• Usar el modo de privacidad

• Marcar un número

• Volver a marcar

• Aviso de llamada en espera

• Identificación de quien llama.

Otras características, como mensajes de

texto mediante Bluetooth y descarga

automática de agenda, dependen del

teléfono. Para verificar la compatibilidad

del teléfono, consulte la guía del usuario

del teléfono y visite

www.SYNCMyRide.com o

www.syncmaroute.ca.

Asociación de un teléfono por

primera vez

Nota: SYNC puede admitir la descarga de

hasta aproximadamente 2000 entradas

por teléfono móvil con tecnología Bluetooth.

Nota: Asegúrese de que el encendido del

vehículo y el radio estén activados y que la

transmisión esté en posición P.

Nota: Para recorrer los menús, oprima las

flechas hacia arriba y hacia abajo en su

sistema de audio.

Asociar de manera inalámbrica su teléfono

con SYNC le permite hacer y recibir

llamadas con manos libres.

1. Oprima el botón del teléfono; cuando

la pantalla indique que no hay ningún

teléfono asociado, oprima "OK".

2. Cuando aparezca Agregar

dispositivos Bt, oprima "OK".

3. Cuando aparezca Buscar SYNC en la

pantalla, oprima "OK".

4. Ponga su teléfono en el modo de

detección de Bluetooth . Si fuera

necesario, consulte la guía del usuario

del teléfono.

5. Cuando la pantalla del teléfono se lo

indique, ingrese en la pantalla del radio

el número de identificación personal

(PIN) de seis cifras que SYNC le

proporcionó. La pantalla indicará si la

asociación tuvo éxito.

Dependiendo de la capacidad del teléfono

y del mercado, el sistema podría

preguntarle si configura el teléfono actual

como teléfono principal (el primer teléfono

con que SYNC tratará de conectarse

automáticamente al arrancar el vehículo),

descarga su agenda de teléfonos, etc.

Asociación de teléfonos

subsiguientes

Nota: Asegúrese de que el encendido del

vehículo y el radio estén activados y que la

transmisión esté en posición P.

Nota: Para recorrer los menús, oprima las

flechas hacia arriba y hacia abajo en su

sistema de audio.

1. Presione el botón del teléfono y recorra

el menú hasta que seleccione

Configuración del sistema.

2. Oprima "OK" y recorra el menú hasta

seleccionar Dispositivos Bluetooth,

y oprima nuevamente "OK".

3. Desplácese hasta seleccionar Agregar

disp Bt y oprima "OK".

4. Cuando aparezca Buscar SYNC en la

pantalla, oprima "OK".

312

SYNC®

5. Ponga su teléfono en el modo de

detección de Bluetooth . Si fuera

necesario, consulte la guía del usuario

del teléfono.

6. Cuando la pantalla del teléfono se lo

indique, ingrese en la pantalla del radio

el número de identificación personal

(PIN) de seis cifras que SYNC le

proporcionó. La pantalla indicará si la

asociación tuvo éxito.

Luego, el sistema le hará preguntas como

si le gustaría configurar el teléfono actual

como teléfono principal (el primer teléfono

con que SYNC tratará de conectarse

automáticamente al arrancar el vehículo),

descargar su agenda, etc.

Comandos de voz del teléfono

"TELÉFONO"

"Ir a Privacidad"

"Llamar a <nombre>"

"En espera"

"Llamar a <nombre> a la casa"

"Conectar"

"Llamar a <nombre> al trabajo"

"Menú"

2,4

"Llamar a <nombre> a la oficina"

"Mostrar en agenda número de <nombre>

"Llamar a <nombre> al móvil O celular"

"Mostrar en agenda número de casa de

<nombre>"

"Llamar a <nombre> a otro"

"Mostrar en agenda número de oficina de

<nombre>"

"Historial de llamadas entrantes"

"Mostrar en agenda número de trabajo de

<nombre>"

"Historial de llamadas perdidas"

"Mostrar en agenda número de teléfono

móvil O celular de <nombre>"

"Historial de llamadas salientes"

313

SYNC®

"TELÉFONO"

"Mostrar en agenda otro número de

<nombre>"

"Conexiones"

"Marcar"

1,3

Para estos comandos, no es necesario decir "Teléfono" primero.

Estos comandos no están disponibles sino hasta que se completa la descarga de la

información del teléfono mediante Bluetooth.

Consulte la tabla Marcar a continuación.

Consulte la tabla Menú a continuación.

Comandos de agenda: cuando le solicita

a SYNC acceder a un nombre, número, etc.

de la agenda, la información solicitada

aparece en la visualización. Oprima el

botón de teléfono o diga "Llamar" para

llamar al contacto.

"MARCAR"

"411 (cuatro uno uno)", "911" (nueve uno uno), etc.

"700" (setecientos)

"800" (ochocientos)

"900" (novecientos)

"Tecla de número", "Barra" (#,/)

"Número <0-9>"

"Asterisco" (*)

"Borrar" (borra todos los dígitos ingresados)

"Quitar" (quita un dígito)

"Más"

"Estrella"

Nota: Para salir del modo de marcar,

mantenga presionado el botón de teléfono

u oprima Menú para ir al menú Teléfono.

314

SYNC®

"MENÚ"

"Conexiones (de teléfono)"

"Aviso de (mensaje de) configuración (telefónica) desactivado"

"Aviso de (mensaje de) configuración (telefónica) activado"

"Configuración (telefónica) (definir) timbre"

"Configuración (telefónica) (definir) timbre 1"

"Configuración (telefónica) (definir) timbre 2"

"Configuración (telefónica) (definir) timbre 3"

"Configuración (telefónica) (definir) timbre desactivado"

"Batería"

"Nombre del teléfono"

"Señal"

"Bandeja de entrada de mensajes de texto"

Las palabras entre ( ) son opcionales y no es necesario que se digan para que el sistema

entienda el comando.

Hacer llamadas

Presione el icono de voz y cuando se le

indique, diga:

1. Diga, "Llamar a <nombre> o diga

"Marcar" y el número deseado.

2. Cuando el sistema confirme el número,

diga otra vez "Marcar" para iniciar la

llamada.

Para borrar el último dígito que pronunció,

diga "Quitar" u oprima el botón de flecha

hacia la izquierda. Para borrar todos los

dígitos dichos, diga “Borrar” o mantenga

presionado el botón de flecha hacia la

izquierda.

Para finalizar la llamada, mantenga

presionado el botón de teléfono.

Recepción de llamadas

Al recibir una llamada, puede:

• Contestar la llamada oprimiendo el

botón de teléfono.

• Rechazar la llamada manteniendo

oprimido el botón de teléfono.

• Ignorar la llamada no realizando

ninguna acción.

Opciones de teléfono durante una

llamada activa

Durante una llamada activa dispone de

características adicionales del menú, como

poner una llamada en espera, añadir

llamadas, etc. Utilice los botones de flecha

para desplazarse por las opciones del

menú.

315

SYNC®

Para acceder a:

• Oprima Menú durante una llamada

activa.

• Después de seleccionar Menú de

llamadas activas, oprima OK.

• Recorra el menú para ver las opciones

siguientes:

PuedeCuando selecciona

Silencia la llamada.Silenciar llamada

Cambiar una llamada del entorno de manos libres al

teléfono móvil para tener una conversación más privada.

Privacidad

Oprima "OK" cuando aparezca Activar/Desactivar

privacidad. (La pantalla indica En Privacidad y el sistema

transfiere su llamada).

Poner una llamada activa en espera.Llamada en espera

Oprima "OK" cuando aparezca Activar/Desactivar

llamada en espera. Para contestar otra llamada en este

momento, oprima el botón de teléfono.

Ingresar "tonos" como por ejemplo, números de contra-

señas.

Ingresar tonos

Recorra la pantalla hasta que aparezca el número deseado

y oprima "OK"; se escucha un tono de confirmación. Repita

cuantas veces sea necesario.

Conectar dos llamadas distintas. (SYNC admite un

máximo de tres llamadas en una llamada multipartita/de

conferencia).

Añadir llamadas

1. Presione el botón de teléfono.

2. Acceda al contacto deseado mediante SYNC o use

comandos de voz para hacer la segunda llamada. Una vez

activa la segunda llamada, oprima Menú.

3. Recorra el menú hasta que aparezca Añadir llamadas

y oprima "OK". Oprima "OK" nuevamente cuando

aparezca ¿Añadir llamadas?

Acceder a los contactos de la agenda del teléfono.Agenda

1. Oprima "OK" para seleccionar y desplácese por los

contactos de su agenda telefónica.

2. Oprima "OK" nuevamente cuando la selección deseada

aparezca en la pantalla.

3. Presione el botón de teléfono.

Acceder al registro del historial de llamadas.Historial de llamadas

1. Oprima "OK" para seleccionar y desplazarse por las

opciones de su historial de llamadas (llamadas entrantes,

salientes o perdidas).

316

SYNC®

PuedeCuando selecciona

2. Oprima "OK" cuando la selección deseada aparezca en

la pantalla.

3. Oprima el botón del teléfono para llamar a la selección.

Cerrar el menú actual.Volver

Acceso a las características del

menú Teléfono

El menú Teléfono le permite volver a

marcar un número, acceder a su historial

de llamadas y su agenda, mandar

mensajes de texto y acceder a la

configuración del teléfono y el sistema.

Puede también acceder a funciones

avanzadas como 911 Assist™, Informe del

mantenimiento del vehículo y Servicios

SYNC.

1. Oprima el botón de teléfono para

ingresar al menú Teléfono.

2. Desplácese entre:

PuedeCuando selecciona

Volver a marcar el último número al que llamó (si está

disponible). Oprima "OK" para seleccionar y oprima "OK"

otra vez para confirmar.

Volver a marcar

Le permite acceder a cualquier llamada marcada, recibida

o perdida mientras su teléfono ha estado conectado al

sistema.

Historial de llamadas

1. Oprima "OK" para seleccionar.

2. Desplácese para seleccionar entre Historial de

llamadas entrantes, Historial de llamadas salientes

o Historial de llamadas perdidas. Oprima "OK" para

seleccionar una opción.

3. Oprima "OK" o el botón de teléfono para llamar a la

selección deseada.

El sistema intenta volver a descargar automáticamente

su agenda e historial de llamadas cada vez que el teléfono

se conecta a SYNC (si la característica de descarga auto-

mática está activa y su teléfono móvil con tecnología

Bluetooth admite esta característica).

Le permite acceder a su agenda telefónica descargada.

Agenda

1,2

317

SYNC®

PuedeCuando selecciona

1. Oprima "OK" para confirmar e ingresar. Si su agenda

tiene menos de 255 entradas, éstas aparecerán en orden

alfabético en un formato de archivo plano. Si hay más, se

organizarán por categorías en orden alfabético.

2. Recorra el menú hasta que aparezca el contacto

deseado y oprima OK.

3. Oprima "OK" o el botón de teléfono.

Le permite enviar, descargar y quitar mensajes de texto.

Mensaje de texto

Le permite ver el estado del teléfono, configurar tonos de

timbre, seleccionar su aviso de mensaje, cambiar las

entradas de la agenda y descargar automáticamente su

teléfono móvil, entre otras funciones.

Configuración del teléfono

Acceder al portal de Servicios SYNC donde puede solicitar

varios tipos de información, informes de tránsito e indica-

ciones.

Servicios SYNC

Hacer una llamada a los operadores del servicio 911

después de un accidente (si la función se utiliza adecua-

damente).

911 Assist

Crear y recibir una tarjeta de informe de diagnóstico sobre

su vehículo.

Informe de mantenimiento

del vehículo

Interactuar con aplicaciones móviles compatibles con

SYNC en su teléfono inteligente.

Aplicaciones móviles

Acceder a las listas del menú Dispositivos Bluetooth

(agregar, conectar, configurar como principal, activar/

desactivar, quitar), así como a las listas del menú

Opciones avanzadas (indicadores, idiomas, configura-

ciones de fábrica, reconfiguración total, instalación de

aplicaciones e información del sistema).

Configuración del sistema

Salga del menú del teléfono oprimiendo "OK".Salir del menú de teléfono

Ésta es una característica dependiente del teléfono.

Ésta es una característica dependiente de la velocidad.

Si está equipado, solo EE.UU.

Si está equipado, solo EE.UU. y Canadá.

318

SYNC®

Mensajes de texto

Nota: Ésta es una característica

dependiente del teléfono.

SYNC le permite recibir, mandar, descargar

y quitar mensajes de texto. El sistema

puede leerle incluso los mensajes de texto

entrantes, de modo que no tenga que

quitar los ojos del camino.

Recibir un mensaje de texto

Nota: Ésta es una característica

dependiente del teléfono. Su teléfono debe

soportar la descarga de mensajes de texto

vía Bluetooth para recibir mensajes de texto

entrantes.

Nota: Reenviar un mensaje de texto es una

característica dependiente de la velocidad

y solo se puede realizar cuando el vehículo

viaja a 5 km/h (3 mph) o menos.

Nota: Solo se permite un destinatario por

mensaje de texto.

Cuando llegue un mensaje nuevo, sonará

un tono y la pantalla indicará que tiene un

nuevo mensaje. Tiene estas opciones:

• Presione el botón de voz, espere el

indicador y diga: "Leer mensaje" para

que SYNC le lea el mensaje.

• Oprima "OK" para recibir y abrir el

mensaje de texto o no realice ninguna

acción y el mensaje quedará en la

bandeja de entrada de mensajes de

texto. Oprima "OK" nuevamente y

SYNC leerá su mensaje en voz alta,

dado que no podrá verlo. También

puede elegir si quiere responder o

reenviar el mensaje.

• Oprima "OK" y recorra el menú para

escoger entre:

• Responder a msj de texto: oprima

"OK" para acceder y recorra la lista

de mensajes predefinidos que

puede mandar.

• Reenviar msj de texto: oprima

"OK" para reenviar el mensaje a

cualquier contacto en su Agenda

o Historial de llamadas. También

puede optar por Ingresar número.

Enviar, descargar y quitar mensajes de

texto

La mensajería de texto es una

característica dependiente del teléfono.

Si su teléfono es compatible, el sistema

SYNC le permite recibir, mandar, descargar

y quitar mensajes de texto.

1. Presione el botón de teléfono.

2. Recorra el menú hasta que aparezca

Mensaje de texto y oprima "OK".

319

SYNC®

Recorra el menú para seleccionar entre las

opciones siguientes:

• ¿Enviar mensaje de texto? le

permite mandar un nuevo mensaje de

texto basado en uno de los 15

mensajes predefinidos.

• Descargar mensajes no leídos le

permite descargar a SYNC sus

mensajes sin leer (exclusivamente).

Para descargar los mensajes, oprima

"OK" para seleccionar. La pantalla

indicará que sus mensajes están siendo

descargados. Al terminar, SYNC abrirá

su bandeja de entrada.

• ¿Quitar todos los mensajes? le

permite quitar de SYNC (pero no del

teléfono) los mensajes de texto

actuales. Para borrar los mensajes,

oprima "OK" para seleccionar. La

pantalla le indicará cuando todos sus

mensajes de texto que se hayan

quitado y SYNC volverá al menú de

mensajes del texto.

• Volver sale del menú actual si oprime

"OK".

Si selecciona ¿Enviar mensaje de texto?

(y su teléfono es compatible con esta

característica), tiene las siguientes

opciones de mensajes predefinidos:

• Nos vemos en 10 minutos

• Nos vemos en 20 minutos

• Llámame

• Te llamo más tarde

• No puedo hablar ahora

• No puedo esperar a verte

• Te quiero

• Necesito más indicaciones

• Estoy en un atasco

• No

• Gracias

• Qué gracioso

• ¿Dónde estás?

• ¿Por qué?

• Sí

Para enviar el mensaje:

1. Oprima "OK" cuando la selección que

desee esté en la pantalla. Ahora, el

sistema necesita saber a quién desea

mandarle el mensaje.

2. Recorra el menú para ver las entradas

de la Agenda o el Historial de

llamadas. También puede seleccionar

Ingresar número para dictar con su

voz el número deseado.

3. Oprima "OK" para entrar al menú

deseado y recórralo para seleccionar

el contacto específico.

4. Oprima "OK" cuando el contacto

aparezca, y oprima de nuevo "OK"

como confirmación cuando el sistema

le pregunte si desea enviar el mensaje.

Cada mensaje de texto será enviado

con la siguiente firma: "Este mensaje

fue enviado desde mi <Ford o

Lincoln>".

Acceso a la configuración del

teléfono

Éstas características son dependientes del

teléfono. La configuración del teléfono le

permite acceder a, y configurar

características como tono del timbre, aviso

de mensajes de texto, modificar la agenda

y configurar la descarga automática.

1. Presione el botón de teléfono.

2. Recorra el menú hasta que aparezca

Configuración de teléfono y oprima

"OK".

3. Recorra el menú para seleccionar entre

las opciones siguientes:

320

SYNC®

PuedeCuando selecciona

Ver el proveedor, nombre, potencia de señal, nivel de carga

de la batería y estado de "roaming" del teléfono conec-

tado.

Estado del teléfono

Oprima "OK" para seleccionar y recorra el menú para ver

la información. Cuando termine, oprima otra vez "OK" para

volver al menú de estado del teléfono.

Seleccionar el tono de timbre que suena cuando recibe

una llamada entrante (del sistema o del teléfono).

Configurar timbre

1. Oprima "OK" para seleccionar y recorra el menú para oír

Timbre 1, Timbre 2, Timbre 3 y Timbre del teléfono.

2. Oprima "OK" para seleccionar.

Si su teléfono cuenta con timbre dentro de banda, el

timbre del teléfono sonará si selecciona Timbre del

teléfono.

Le da la opción de escuchar un tono que le avise cada vez

que llegue un nuevo mensaje de texto.

Aviso de mensaje

1. Oprima "OK" para seleccionar y desplácese para selec-

cionar entre Activar aviso de msj o Desactivar aviso

de msj.

2. Oprima "OK" para seleccionar.

Modificar los contenidos de su agenda descargada (es

decir, agregar, quitar, descargar. Oprima "OK" para selec-

cionar y desplazarse entre:

Modificar agenda

Agregar contactos: oprima "OK" para agregar más

contactos de su agenda. Utilizar "Push" para enviar los

contactos deseados de su teléfono. Consulte la guía del

usuario del teléfono para ver cómo se usa "Push" con los

contactos.

Quitar agenda: oprima "OK" para eliminar la agenda y el

historial de llamadas actuales. Cuando aparezca Quitar

agenda, oprima "OK" para confirmar. SYNC le llevará de

vuelta al menú Configuración de teléfono.

Descargar agenda: oprima "OK" para seleccionar y

oprima "OK" otra vez cuando aparezca ¿Confirmar

descarga?

Descargar automáticamente su agenda cada vez que su

teléfono se conecte a SYNC. (Los tiempos de descarga

dependen del teléfono y la cantidad de entradas).

Descarga automática

321

SYNC®

PuedeCuando selecciona

Oprima "OK" para seleccionar. Cuando aparezca ¿Activar

desc autom?, oprima "OK" para descargar su agenda

automáticamente en cada ocasión. (Cuando la descarga

automática esté activada, se borrarán los cambios,

adiciones o eliminaciones guardados a partir de la última

descarga).

Seleccione Desactivar si NO desea descargar su agenda

cada vez que su teléfono se conecte a SYNC. Solo puede

acceder a su agenda, historial de llamadas y mensajes de

texto cuando el teléfono específico está conectado a

SYNC.

Cerrar el menú actual.Volver

Configuración del sistema

Este menú le da acceso a las

características de los menús Dispositivo

Bluetooth y Opciones avanzadas. Utilice

los botones de flecha para desplazarse

por las opciones del menú.

El menú Dispositivo Bluetooth le permite

agregar, conectar y quitar dispositivos,

configurar un teléfono como "principal", y

activar y desactivar la característica

Bluetooth.

El menú Opciones avanzadas le permite

acceder a, y configurar indicadores,

idiomas, configuraciones de fábrica,

realizar una reconfiguración total, instalar

una aplicación y ver Información del

sistema.

Opciones del menú Dispositivo

Bluetooth

1. Oprima el botón de teléfono para

ingresar al menú Teléfono.

2. Recorra el menú hasta que aparezca

Configuración del sistema y oprima

"OK".

3. Recorra el menú hasta que aparezca

Dispositivos Bluetooth y seleccione

"OK".

4. Recorra el menú para seleccionar entre

las opciones siguientes:

PuedeSi selecciona

Asociar teléfonos adicionales al sistema.Agregar dispositivo Blue-

tooth

1. Oprima "OK" para seleccionar, y oprima otra vez "OK"

cuando aparezca Buscar SYNC en la pantalla.

2. Siga las instrucciones de la guía del usuario de su telé-

fono para poner el teléfono en modo de detección. En la

pantalla aparece un número de identificación personal

(PIN) de seis dígitos.

3. Cuando se lo indique la pantalla del teléfono, ingrese

el PIN de seis dígitos que SYNC le proporcionó.

322

SYNC®

PuedeSi selecciona

4. Cuando aparezca ¿Configurar como principal?,

oprima "OK". Recorra el menú para cambiar entre Sí y No,

y oprima "OK".

5. Dependiendo de la funcionalidad de su teléfono, es

posible que le haga preguntas adicionales, como si le

gustaría descargar su agenda). Recorra el menú y utilice

"OK" para seleccionar las respuestas deseadas.

Conectar un teléfono con tecnología Bluetooth previa-

mente asociado. (Solo se puede conectar un dispositivo

a la vez. Si conecta otro teléfono, el anterior se desconec-

tará).

Conectar dispositivo Blue-

tooth

1. Oprima "OK" para seleccionar y ver una lista de teléfonos

previamente asociados.

2. Recorra el menú hasta seleccionar el dispositivo

deseado y oprima "OK" para conectar el teléfono.

Configurar un teléfono previamente asociado como su

teléfono principal.

¿Configurar como principal?

Oprima "OK" para seleccionar y recorra el menú hasta

seleccionar el teléfono deseado. Oprima "OK" para

confirmar.

SYNC intentará conectarse con el teléfono principal en

cada ciclo de encendido del vehículo. El teléfono seleccio-

nado como principal será el primero de la lista y estará

marcado con

Activar/desactivar la característica Bluetooth.Activar/Desactivar Blue-

tooth Oprima "OK" y recorra el menú para cambiar entre Activar

y Desactivar. Una vez que seleccione la opción deseada,

oprima "OK". (Si desactiva el sistema Bluetooth, se

desconectarán todos los dispositivos Bluetooth y se

desactivarán todas las funciones Bluetooth). )

Eliminar un teléfono asociado.Quitar dispositivos

Oprima "OK" y recorra el menú para seleccionar el dispo-

sitivo. Oprima "OK" para confirmar.

Quitar todos los teléfonos asociados anteriormente (y

toda la información originalmente guardada con esos

teléfonos).

Quitar todos

Oprima "OK" para seleccionar.

Cerrar el menú actual.Volver

Ésta es una característica dependiente de la velocidad.

323

SYNC®

Opciones avanzadas del menú

1. Oprima el botón de teléfono para

ingresar al menú Teléfono.

2. Recorra el menú hasta que aparezca

Configuración del sistema y oprima

"OK".

3. Recorra el menú hasta que aparezca

Opciones avanzadas y seleccione

"OK".

4. Recorra el menú para seleccionar entre

las opciones siguientes:

PuedeSi selecciona

Obtener ayuda de SYNC haciendo preguntas y recibiendo

consejos útiles o bien, solicitándole una acción específica.

Para activar o desactivar los indicadores:

Indicadores

1. Oprima "OK" para seleccionar y recorra el menú para

seleccionar activar o desactivar.

2. Oprima "OK" cuando la selección deseada aparezca en

la pantalla. SYNC lo llevará de vuelta al menú de Confi-

guración avanzada.

Seleccione entre English, Français o Español. Una vez

seleccionado el idioma, todos los mensajes e indicaciones

de la visualización del radio aparecerán en ese idioma.

Idiomas

1. Oprima "OK" para seleccionar y recorra la lista de

idiomas.

2. Oprima "OK" cuando la selección deseada aparezca en

la pantalla. Si cambia la configuración de idioma, la

pantalla indicará que el sistema se está actualizando.

Cuando complete la actualización, SYNC lo llevará de

vuelta al menú Opciones avanzadas.

Volver a los valores predeterminados de fábrica. Esta

selección no borrará su información indexada (agenda,

historial de llamadas, mensajes de texto y dispositivos

asociados).

Valores de fábrica

1. Oprima "OK" para seleccionar, y oprima otra vez "OK"

cuando aparezca Restaurar valores fáb.? en la pantalla.

2. Oprima "OK" para confirmar.

Borrar completamente toda la información almacenada

en SYNC (agenda, historial de llamadas, mensajes de

texto y todos los dispositivos asociados) y regresar a la

configuración de fábrica.

Reconfiguración total

Oprima "OK" para seleccionar. La pantalla indica cuando

termina la operación y SYNC lo lleva de regreso al menú

Opciones avanzadas.

Instalar aplicaciones que haya descargado.Inst aplic? (¿Instalar aplica-

ción?) Oprima "OK" y recorra el menú para seleccionar la opción.

Oprima "OK" para confirmar.

324

SYNC®

PuedeSi selecciona

Quitar todos los teléfonos asociados anteriormente (y

toda la información originalmente guardada con esos

teléfonos).

Quitar todos

Oprima "OK" para seleccionar.

Acceder al número de Versión Automática y el número

FDN.

Info del sistema

Oprima "OK" para seleccionar.

Es un componente de Bluetooth que puede ayudar aún

más a su teléfono con el intercambio de mensajes de

texto.

Perfil MAP

Cerrar el menú actual.Volver

APLICACIONES Y SERVICIOS

SYNC®

Para activar las siguientes funciones, su

teléfono móvil debe ser compatible con

SYNC. Para verificar la compatibilidad del

teléfono, visite www.SYNCMyRide.com o

www.syncmaroute.ca.

• Servicios SYNC (si está equipado, solo

los EE.UU.): proporcionan acceso a

tráfico, indicaciones e información

como viajes, horóscopo, valor de las

acciones y más.

• 911 Assist™: puede avisar al 911 en caso

de una emergencia.

• Informe de mantenimiento del vehículo

(si está equipado, únicamente en

EE.UU.): proporciona una tarjeta de

informe de diagnóstico y

mantenimiento del vehículo.

911 Assist

AVISOS

A menos que la configuración de 911

Assist se ajuste antes de un

accidente, el sistema no llamará

para solicitar ayuda, lo cual podría retrasar

el tiempo de respuesta, aumentando

potencialmente el riesgo de sufrir heridas

graves o la muerte después de un

accidente.

No espere a que 911 Assist realice

una llamada de emergencia si puede

hacerla usted mismo. Llame a los

servicios de emergencia inmediatamente

para evitar retrasos en el tiempo de

respuesta, lo cual podría aumentar el

riesgo de sufrir heridas graves o la muerte

después de un accidente. Si no escucha la

función 911 Assist después de cinco

segundos del accidente, es posible que el

sistema esté dañado o no esté

funcionando.

325

SYNC®

AVISOS

Siempre coloque su teléfono en un

lugar seguro en el vehículo de

manera que no se convierta en un

proyectil o se dañe en un choque. Si no lo

hace, puede causarle heridas graves a

alguien o dañar el teléfono, lo cual podría

impedir el funcionamiento adecuado de

911 Assist.

Nota: La función SYNC 911 Assist debe

ajustarse antes del incidente.

Nota: Antes de activar esta función,

asegúrese de leer el aviso de privacidad de

911 Assist más adelante en esta sección

para obtener información importante.

Nota: Si un usuario activa o desactiva 911

Assist, esa configuración se aplica a todos

los teléfonos asociados. Si 911 Assist está

desactivado, se reproducirá un mensaje de

voz o aparecerá un mensaje o icono (o

ambos) al arrancar el vehículo después de

haber conectado un teléfono previamente

asociado.

Nota: Cada teléfono funciona de manera

diferente. Aunque SYNC 911 Assist funciona

con la mayoría de los teléfonos móviles,

algunos pueden presentar problemas para

usar esta función.

Si un accidente despliega una bolsa de aire

o activa el corte de la bomba de

combustible, es posible que el vehículo

equipado con SYNC se comunique con los

servicios de emergencia marcando el 911

a través de un teléfono asociado y

conectado con tecnología Bluetooth. Para

obtener más información sobre 911 Assist,

visite www.SYNCMyRide.com o

www.syncmaroute.ca.

Ver Sistema de Seguridad

Complementaria (página 38). Este

capítulo contiene información importante

con respecto al despliegue de las bolsas

de aire.

Ver Emergencias en el Camino (página

216). Este capítulo contiene información

importante con respecto al corte de la

bomba de combustible.

Activación de 911 Assist

1. Oprima el botón de teléfono para

ingresar al menú Teléfono.

2. Recorra el menú hasta seleccionar 911

Assist.

3. Presione OK para confirmar e ingresar

al menú 911 Assist.

4. Desplácese para elegir entre las

opciones Activar y Desactivar.

5. Presione OK cuando la opción que

desee aparezca en la pantalla del

radio. Activado o Desactivado

aparecerá en la pantalla del radio

como confirmación.

Las opciones de desactivación incluyen:

Desactivación con recordatorio y

Desactivación sin recordatorio. La

Desactivación con recordatorio

proporciona un recordatorio de voz y un

mensaje en pantalla cuando conecta el

teléfono al momento del arranque del

vehículo. La Desactivación sin recordatorio

muestra solo un recordatorio en la

pantalla, sin recordatorio de voz al

conectar el teléfono.

Para asegurarse que 911 Assist funcione

adecuadamente:

• SYNC debe contar con energía y

funcionar adecuadamente al momento

del incidente y durante la activación y

uso de la función.

• La función 911 Assist debe ajustarse

antes del incidente.

• Un teléfono compatible y con

tecnología Bluetooth debe estar

asociado y conectado a SYNC.

326

SYNC®

• Un teléfono compatible con tecnología

Bluetooth conectado debe poder

realizar y mantener una llamada al

momento del incidente.

• Un teléfono con tecnología Bluetooth

conectado debe tener cobertura de red

adecuada, energía de la batería e

intensidad de la señal.

• El vehículo debe tener energía de la

batería y estar ubicado en los Estados

Unidos, Canadá o en un territorio donde

el 911 sea el número de emergencia.

En caso de un accidente

No todos los accidentes despliegan una

bolsa de aire o activan el corte de la

bomba de combustible (lo que activaría

la función 911 Assist); sin embargo, si se

activa 911 Assist, SYNC intentará

comunicarse con los servicios de

emergencia. Si un teléfono conectado está

dañado o pierde la conexión con SYNC,

SYNC buscará e intentará conectarse a

cualquier teléfono disponible previamente

asociado y tratará de realizar la llamada

al 911.

Antes de hacer la llamada:

• SYNC proporciona un breve período de

tiempo (aproximadamente 10

segundos) para cancelar la llamada.

Si no se cancela, SYNC tratará de

marcar el 911.

• SYNC proporciona el siguiente mensaje

o uno similar: "SYNC tratará de llamar

al 911, para cancelar la llamada

presione Cancelar en su pantalla o

mantenga presionado el botón de

teléfono en el volante de la dirección".

Si la llamada no se cancela y se realiza de

manera satisfactoria, se reproducirá un

mensaje pregrabado para el operador del

911, luego el o los ocupantes del vehículo

podrán hablar con el operador. Esté

preparado para indicar su nombre, número

de teléfono y ubicación inmediatamente,

ya que no todos los sistemas del 911 son

capaces de recibir esta información de

manera electrónica.

Es posible que 911 Assist no funcione

• El hardware del teléfono móvil o de 911

Assist se dañó en el accidente.

• La batería del vehículo o el sistema

SYNC no tienen energía.

• El o los teléfonos asociados y

conectados al sistema salieron

expulsados del vehículo.

Aviso de privacidad de 911 Assist

Una vez que se activa 911 Assist, es posible

que éste se comunique con los servicios

de emergencia indicando el choque del

vehículo y el despliegue de una bolsa de

aire o la activación del corte de la bomba

de combustible. Es posible que ciertas

versiones de 911 Assist también puedan

comunicar de manera verbal o electrónica

a los operadores del 911 la ubicación del

vehículo u otros detalles sobre el mismo o

sobre el choque, para ayudarlos a

proporcionar los servicios de emergencia

más adecuados. Si no desea transmitir

esta información, no active la función.

327

SYNC®

Informe de mantenimiento del

vehículo

ALERTA

Siempre siga las instrucciones de

mantenimiento programadas,

inspeccione su vehículo de manera

regular y solicite la reparación de cualquier

daño o problema que sospeche. El Informe

de mantenimiento del vehículo

complementa, pero no reemplaza el

mantenimiento normal ni la inspección del

vehículo. El Informe de mantenimiento del

vehículo solo monitorea ciertos sistemas

que el vehículo supervisa electrónicamente

y no controlará ni informará el estado de

ningún otro sistema (por ejemplo, el

desgaste de las balatas). Si no realiza el

mantenimiento programado y no

inspecciona regularmente su vehículo,

podría provocar daños en el vehículo o

sufrir lesiones graves.

Nota: Para usar la función de Informe de

mantenimiento del vehículo, primero debe

activarla. Visite www.SYNCMyRide.com

para registrarse. No hay cobros ni

suscripciones asociados con el Informe de

mantenimiento del vehículo, pero debe

registrarse para utilizar esta función.

Nota: Es posible que esta función no opere

adecuadamente si ha activado el bloqueo

de la identificación de quien llama en su

teléfono móvil. Antes de ejecutar un

informe, lea el aviso de privacidad sobre el

Informe de mantenimiento del vehículo.

Nota: Para permitir un período de ajuste

para el vehículo, es posible que no pueda

crear un Informe de mantenimiento del

vehículo hasta que el odómetro del vehículo

haya alcanzado 200 millas.

Regístrese para ver el Informe de

mantenimiento del vehículo y para ajustar

las preferencias del informe en

www.SYNCMyRide.com. Después de

registrarse, podrá solicitar un Informe de

mantenimiento del vehículo (dentro de su

vehículo). Vuelva a su cuenta en

www.SYNCMyRide.com para ver el

informe. También tiene la opción de que

SYNC le recuerde de manera automática

ejecutar informes en intervalos de

kilometraje específicos. Puede que se

apliquen cargos por uso del tiempo de

llamada del teléfono móvil al ejecutar

informes.

El sistema le permite comprobar el

mantenimiento general del vehículo a

través de una tarjeta de informe de

diagnóstico. El informe de mantenimiento

del vehículo contiene información valiosa,

como por ejemplo:

• Información de diagnóstico del

vehículo

• Mantenimiento programado

• Llamados a revisión abiertos y acciones

de servicio en terreno

• Elementos que no han sido revisados

en inspecciones del vehículo del

distribuidor autorizado

Para ejecutar un informe (después de que

el vehículo haya estado en funcionamiento

por un mínimo de 60 segundos):

1. Oprima el botón de teléfono para

ingresar al menú Teléfono.

2. Desplácese hasta seleccionar

Mantenimiento del vehículo y

oprima OK.

3. Desplácese para seleccionar entre las

opciones Preferencias de usuario o

Ejecutar informe.

328

SYNC®

Opciones del informe de mantenimiento del vehículo

Informes automáticos: oprima OK y seleccione activado

o desactivado. Seleccione "Activado" para que SYNC le

avise de manera automática que ejecute un informe de

mantenimiento cada cierto intervalo de kilometrajes. Para

seleccionar los intervalos de kilometraje en los cuales

desea recibir avisos, primero debe activar esta función.

Preferencias de usuario:

oprima OK para seleccionar

e ingresar al menú. Desplá-

cese para seleccionar entre:

Intervalos de kilometraje: oprima OK. Desplácese para

seleccionar entre intervalos de 5000, 7500 o 10000 millas

y oprima OK para confirmar la selección.

Volver: oprima OK para salir del menú.

Oprima OK para que SYNC ejecute un informe de mante-

nimiento de los sistemas de diagnóstico del vehículo y

envíe los resultados a Ford, donde se combinarán con la

información de su distribuidor autorizado, como manteni-

miento programado, llamados a revisión abiertos y otras

acciones de servicio en terreno y de elementos de inspec-

ción no revisados del vehículo.

Ejecutar informe

Aviso de privacidad sobre el Informe

de mantenimiento del vehículo

Cuando ejecute un Informe de

mantenimiento del vehículo, es posible

que Ford Motor Company recopile su

número de teléfono móvil (para procesar

la solicitud del informe) e información de

diagnóstico de su vehículo. Algunas

versiones o actualizaciones del Informe de

mantenimiento del vehículo pueden

también recopilar información adicional

sobre el vehículo. Ford puede utilizar la

información que recopile del vehículo para

cualquier propósito. Si no desea dar a

conocer su número de teléfono móvil o la

información de su vehículo, no ejecute la

función y no configure el perfil del Informe

de mantenimiento del vehículo en

www.SYNCMyRide.com. Para obtener más

información, consulte los términos y

condiciones del Informe de mantenimiento

del vehículo y la declaración de privacidad

en www.SYNCMyRide.com.

Servicios SYNC: Tráfico,

indicaciones e información (TDI)

Nota: Los servicios SYNC deben activarse

antes de utilizarlos. Visite

www.SYNCMyRide.com para registrarse y

comprobar que está calificado para obtener

servicios complementarios. Pueden

aplicarse tarifas estándar de teléfono y

mensajes. Puede que deba suscribirse.

También debe tener el teléfono móvil con

tecnología Bluetooth y Servicios SYNC

activado, asociado y vinculado al sistema

para que pueda comunicarse y utilizar los

Servicios SYNC. Ver Uso de SYNC® con el

teléfono (página 312).

Nota: Esta función no opera

adecuadamente si ha activado el bloqueo

de la identificación de quien llama en su

teléfono móvil. Asegúrese de que el teléfono

móvil no esté bloqueando la identificación

de quien llama antes de utilizar los Servicios

SYNC.

329

SYNC®

Nota: El conductor es el responsable final

de utilizar en forma segura el vehículo y, por

lo tanto, debe evaluar si es seguro seguir las

indicaciones sugeridas. Cualquier función

de navegación se entrega sólo como ayuda.

Tome sus decisiones de manejo según sus

observaciones de las condiciones locales y

reglamentos de tráfico existentes. No siga

las sugerencias de la ruta si hacerlo pudiera

generar una maniobra no segura o ilegal, si

implicara quedar en una situación poco

segura o si fuera dirigido a un área que

considere no segura. Los mapas que este

sistema utiliza pueden ser imprecisos

debido a errores, cambios en los caminos,

condiciones de tráfico o condiciones de

manejo.

Nota: Cuando se conecta, el servicio utiliza

tecnología GPS y sensores avanzados del

vehículo para recopilar información sobre

la ubicación actual del vehículo, la dirección

del viaje y la velocidad para proporcionarle

las indicaciones, informes de tráfico o

ubicaciones de negocios que usted solicite.

Además, para brindarle los servicios

solicitados y para mejorar continuamente,

es posible que el servicio recopile y registre

detalles de llamadas y comunicaciones de

voz. Para obtener más información, consulte

los términos y condiciones del Servicio

SYNC en www.SYNCMyRide.com. Si no

desea que Ford o sus proveedores de

servicios recopilen la información de viaje

del vehículo u otra información indicada en

los Términos y condiciones, no active ni

utilice el servicio.

Los Servicios SYNC utilizan sensores

avanzados del vehículo, tecnología GPS

integrada y datos completos de mapas y

tránsito para proporcionarle informes de

tráfico, indicaciones precisas para llegar a

su destino, ubicaciones de negocios,

noticias, deportes, clima y más. Para

obtener una lista completa de los servicios

o para recibir más información, visite

www.SyncMyRide.com.

Conexión a Servicios SYNC mediante

comandos de voz

1. Presione el botón de voz.

2. Cuando se le indique, diga "Servicios".

Esto inicia una llamada a los Servicios

SYNC mediante el teléfono móvil con

tecnología Bluetooth asociado y

conectado.

3. Luego de conectarse al servicio, siga

los indicadores de voz para solicitar el

servicio deseado, como tráfico o

indicaciones. También puede decir

"¿Cuáles son mis opciones?" para

recibir una lista completa de los

servicios disponibles que puede elegir.

4. Diga "Servicios" para volver al menú

principal de los servicios; para solicitar

ayuda, diga "Ayuda".

Conexión a Servicios SYNC mediante

el menú del teléfono.

1. Oprima el botón de teléfono para

ingresar al menú Teléfono.

2. Desplácese hasta que aparezca

Servicios en la pantalla.

3. Oprima OK para confirmar e ingresar

al menú Servicios. La pantalla indicará

que el sistema se está conectando.

4. Presione OK. SYNC inicia la llamada al

portal de servicios.

5. Luego de conectarse al servicio, siga

los indicadores de voz para solicitar el

servicio deseado, como tráfico o

indicaciones. También puede decir

"¿Cuáles son mis opciones?" para

recibir una lista completa de los

servicios disponibles que puede elegir.

6. Diga "Servicios" para volver al menú

principal de los servicios; para solicitar

ayuda, diga "Ayuda".

330

SYNC®

Recepción de indicaciones de viaje

1. Al conectarse a los Servicios SYNC,

diga "Indicaciones" o "Ubicación de

negocios". Para encontrar el negocio o

tipo de negocio más cercano a su

ubicación actual, diga "Ubicación de

negocios" y después "Buscar cerca de

mí". Si necesita más ayuda para

encontrar un lugar, puede decir

"Operador" en cualquier momento

mientras se encuentra en Indicaciones

o Ubicación de negocios para hablar

con un operador en directo. También

es posible que se le solicite que hable

con un operador. El operador en directo

puede ayudarle a buscar negocios por

nombre o categoría, direcciones

residenciales por calle o por nombre o

por intersecciones de calles

específicas. Operator Assist es una

función de su suscripción a los

Servicios SYNC. Para obtener más

información sobre Operator Assist,

visite www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.

2. Siga las indicaciones de voz para

seleccionar su destino. Después de que

selecciona su destino, se carga la

ubicación actual del vehículo y se

calcula una ruta basada en las

condiciones de tráfico actuales, la que

luego se envía al vehículo. Después de

terminar la descarga de la ruta, la

llamada telefónica finaliza

automáticamente. De esta manera,

recibe instrucciones de manejo

audibles y visuales a medida que viaja

hacia su destino.

3. Mientras se encuentra en una ruta

activa, puede seleccionar o decir

"Resumen de ruta" u "Hora estimada

de llegada" para ver la lista resumida

de instrucciones de ruta o el tiempo

estimado de llegada. También puede

activar o desactivar una guía de voz,

cancelar la ruta o actualizar la ruta.

Si se pasa del lugar donde debía virar,

SYNC le pregunta automáticamente si

desea actualizar la ruta. Solo diga "Sí"

cuando se le indique y se le entregará una

nueva ruta a su vehículo.

Desconexión de los Servicios SYNC

1. Mantenga oprimido el botón del

teléfono en el volante de la dirección.

2. Diga "Adiós" desde el menú principal

de Servicios SYNC.

331

SYNC®

Consejos rápidos para el uso de los Servicios SYNC

Puede personalizar la función de servicios para obtener

un acceso más rápido a su información favorita o la que

usa con más frecuencia. Puede guardar direcciones como

el trabajo o la casa. También puede guardar su información

favorita, como equipos deportivos o una categoría de

noticias. Para obtener más información, inicie sesión en

www.SyncMyRide.com.

Personalización

Oprima el botón de voz en cualquier momento (mientras

está conectado a los Servicios SYNC TDI) para interrumpir

una indicación de voz o un clip de audio (como un informe

deportivo), espere que suene el tono y diga el comando

de voz.

Presione para interrumpir

La suscripción está asociada con su número de teléfono

móvil con tecnología Bluetooth, no con su VIN (Número

de identificación del vehículo). Puede asociar y conectar

su teléfono a cualquier vehículo que cuente con Tráfico,

indicaciones e información y seguir disfrutando de sus

servicios personalizados.

Portátil

Incluso puede acceder a su cuenta fuera del vehículo.

Simplemente utilice el número que aparece en el historial

de llamadas del teléfono. Las funciones de tráfico e indi-

caciones no funcionan correctamente, pero los servicios

de información y las funciones de conexión 411 y mensa-

jería de texto están disponibles.

USO DE SYNC® CON EL

REPRODUCTOR MULTIMEDIA

Puede acceder a música y reproducirla

desde su reproductor de música digital,

mediante el sistema de bocinas del

vehículo utilizando el menú de medios o

los comandos de voz del sistema. Además,

puede ordenar y reproducir su música por

categorías específicas, como artistas,

álbumes, etc.

SYNC tiene la capacidad de alojar

prácticamente todos los reproductores de

medios digitales, incluyendo iPod®,

Zune™, reproductores “Toca desde

dispositivo” y la mayoría de los

controladores USB. SYNC® también es

compatible con formatos de audio como

MP3, WMA, WAV y ACC.

Conexión de un reproductor de

medios digitales al puerto USB

Nota: Si su reproductor de medios digitales

tiene un interruptor de encendido/apagado,

asegúrese de que el dispositivo esté

encendido.

332

SYNC®

Para conectarlo mediante comandos

de voz

1. Conecte el dispositivo al puerto USB

del vehículo.

2. Presione el icono de voz y cuando se le

indique, diga "USB".

3. Ahora puede escuchar música diciendo

cualquiera de los comandos

apropiados. Consulte los comandos de

voz para el control de medios

Para conectarlo mediante el menú del

sistema

1. Conecte el dispositivo al puerto USB

del vehículo.

2. Presione AUX y después MENU para

ingresar al menú Medios.

3. Desplácese hasta que aparezca

Seleccionar fuente y oprima "OK".

4. Desplácese para seleccionar USB y

oprima "OK".

5. Dependiendo de la cantidad de

archivos de medios digitales que se

encuentren en el dispositivo

conectado, es posible que aparezca

Indexando en la pantalla del radio. Al

finalizar la indexación, la pantalla

regresa al menú Reproducir.

Oprima "OK" y recorra las selecciones de:

• Tocar todo

• Álbumes

• Géneros

• Playlists

• Canciones

• Explorar USB

• Música similar

• Volver

¿Qué es esto?

En cualquier momento, mientras se

escucha una canción, puede presionar el

icono de voz y preguntarle al sistema

"¿Qué es esto?". El sistema lee las

etiquetas de metadatos de la canción (si

están completas).

Comandos de voz de medios

E142599

Presione el icono de voz y

cuando se le indique, diga "USB"

y después, cualquiera de las

siguientes opciones:

"USB"

"Redefinir álbum <nombre>"

1,2

"Autoplay desactivado"

"Redefinir artista <nombre>"

1,2

"Autoplay activado"

"Refinar canción <nombre>"

"Conexiones"

"Redefinir canción <nombre>"

1,2

"Pausa"

"Desactivar repetición""Reproducir"

"Activar Repetición"

"Reproducir Disco <nombre>"

1,2

"Buscar Disco <nombre>"

1,2

"Reproducir todo"

333

SYNC®

"USB"

"Buscar artista <nombre>"

1,2

"Reproducir Artista <nombre>"

1,2

"Buscar género <nombre>"

"Reproducir género <nombre>"

1,2

"Buscar canción <nombre>"

"Reproducir siguiente carpeta"

"Buscar canción <nombre>"

1,2

"Siguiente canción"

"Desactivar reproducción aleatoria"

"Reproducir lista <nombre>"

1,2

"Activar reproducción aleatoria"

"Reproducir carpeta anterior"

"Reproducir Música Similar""Canción anterior"

"¿Qué es esto?"

"Reproducir canción <nombre>"

"Reproducir la canción <nombre>"

1,2

<nombre> es una lista dinámica, lo que significa que puede ser el nombre de cualquier

banda, artista, canción, etc.

Comandos de voz que no están disponibles hasta que la indexación esté completa.

Comandos de voz que solo están disponibles en el modo de carpeta.

Guía de comandos de voz

· Active esta función para escuchar la música indexada en

forma aleatoria durante el proceso de indexación.

"Autoplay"

334

SYNC®

Guía de comandos de voz

· Desactive esta función para que el sistema no empiece

a reproducir su música sino hasta que todos los medios

hayan sido incluidos en la lista. El tiempo de indexación

puede variar de un dispositivo a otro y también a causa

de la cantidad de canciones que se están indexando.

El sistema busca todos los datos de su música indexada

y, si está disponible, comenzará a tocar el tipo de música

seleccionada. Puede tocar géneros de música que estén

presentes en las etiquetas de metadatos de género que

tenga en su reproductor de medios digitales.

"Buscar género" o "Repro-

ducir género"

El sistema compila una lista y reproduce música similar a

la que está escuchando actualmente desde el puerto USB

usando la información de los metadatos indexados.

"Reproducir Música Similar"

El sistema busca un artista, canción o álbum específico

entre la música indexada a través del puerto USB.

"Buscar", "Reproducir",

"Artista", "Canción",

"Álbum"

Le permite ser más específico con respecto a los

comandos anteriores. Por ejemplo, si pidió al sistema que

buscara y tocara toda la música de un cierto artista, luego

puede decir “Redefinir álbum” y seleccionar un álbum

específico en la lista. Si después selecciona Reproducir,

el sistema reproduce solamente la música de ese álbum

específico.

"Redefinir"

Presione el icono de voz y cuando se le

indique, diga "Audio Bluetooth" y después,

cualquiera de las siguientes opciones:

"AUDIO BLUETOOTH"

"Conexiones"

"Pausa"

"Reproducir"

"Siguiente canción"

"Canción anterior"

335

SYNC®

Características del menú Medios

El menú Medios le permite seleccionar la

fuente de los medios, cómo le gustaría

reproducir su música (por artista, género,

al azar, repetir, etc.), y también si necesita

agregar, conectar o quitar dispositivos.

1. Presione AUX y después MENU para

ingresar al menú Medios.

2. Desplácese entre:

PuedeCuando selecciona

Reproduce su música por artista, álbum, género, listas de

reproducción (playlists), canciones, música similar, o

simplemente reproducir todo. También puede escoger

Explorar USB para ver qué archivos de música digital

soporta su dispositivo reproductor.

Menú Tocar

· Seleccione y reproduzca música desde el puerto USB, la

toma de entrada auxiliar (entrada de audio) o reproduzca

música desde teléfono con tecnología Bluetooth.

Seleccionar fuente

· Oprima "OK" para seleccionar y luego desplácese para

seleccionar entre USB, Audio Bluetooth y Entrada de

audio.

· Si selecciona USB y Autoplay está activado, puede

acceder a archivos de media de manera aleatoria a medida

que se indexan. Si está desactivado, los medios indexados

no estarán disponibles sino hasta que termine el proceso

de indexado. SYNC puede indexar miles de medios de

tamaño mediano y le avisa cuando se alcanza el tamaño

máximo de indexado de archivos.

· Los usuarios que tienen teléfonos Bluetooth capaces de

transmitir audio pueden oprimir SEEK para reproducir la

pista anterior o siguiente.

· Si tiene conectado un dispositivo en el puerto USB, no

podrá acceder a la característica de entrada de audio.

Algunos reproductores de medios digitales requieren

puertos USB y de entrada de audio para recibir flujos de

datos y música en forma separada.

· Seleccione esta opción para reproducir en forma aleatoria

o repetir su música y seleccionar los ajustes de Autoplay.

Una vez activas estas selecciones, permanecerán de ese

modo hasta que las cancele.

Configuración de medios

· Algunos reproductores de medios digitales requieren

puertos USB y de entrada de audio para recibir flujos de

datos y música en forma separada. Oprima "OK" para

seleccionar y luego desplácese para seleccionar entre

Mezclar, Repetir o Autoplay.

336

SYNC®

PuedeCuando selecciona

Interactuar con aplicaciones móviles compatibles con

SYNC en su teléfono inteligente.

Aplicaciones móviles

Acceder a las listas del menú Dispositivo Bluetooth

(agregar, conectar, configurar como principal, activar/

desactivar, quitar), así como a las listas del menú

Opciones avanzadas (indicadores, idiomas, configura-

ciones de fábrica, reconfiguración total, instalación de

aplicaciones e información del sistema).

Configuración del sistema

Oprima "OK" para salir del menú Medios.Salir Menú medios

Acceso al menú Tocar

Este menú le permite seleccionar y

reproducir sus medios por artista, álbum,

género, lista de reproducción (playlist),

canción o música semejante, e incluso

explorar lo que hay en su dispositivo USB.

1. Asegúrese de que su dispositivo esté

conectado al puerto USB y encendido.

2. Presione AUX y después MENU para

ingresar al menú Medios.

3. Desplácese para seleccionar el menú

Tocar y oprima "OK".

Si no hay archivos de medios a los cuales

acceder, la pantalla indica que no hay

medios. Si hay archivos de medios, tiene

las siguientes opciones para recorrer y

seleccionar:

PuedeCuando selecciona

· Reproducir todos los medios (canciones) indexados de

su dispositivo en modo de archivo plano, uno a la vez en

orden numérico.

Tocar todo

· Oprima "OK" para seleccionar. En la pantalla aparece el

título de la primera canción.

Ordenar todos los medios indexados por artista. Una vez

seleccionado, el sistema hace una lista y luego toca todos

los artistas y canciones en orden alfabético. Si hay menos

de 255 artistas indexados, se ordenan en orden alfabético

en el modo de archivo plano. Si hay más, se organizarán

por categorías en orden alfabético.

Artistas

1. Oprima "OK" para seleccionar. Puede reproducir Todos

los artistas o cualquier artista indexado.

2. Recorra el menú hasta seleccionar el artista deseado y

oprima "OK".

Ordenar todos los medios indexados por álbum. Si hay

menos de 255 álbumes indexados, se ordenan en orden

alfabético en el modo de archivo plano. Si hay más, se

organizarán por categorías en orden alfabético.

Álbumes

337

SYNC®

PuedeCuando selecciona

1. Oprima "OK" para ingresar al menú Álbumes y seleccione

entre tocar todos los álbumes o tocar uno de los álbumes

indexados.

2. Recorra el menú hasta seleccionar el álbum deseado y

oprima "OK".

· Ordenar la música indexada por tipo de género (cate-

goría). SYNC lista los géneros en orden alfabético en el

modo de archivo plano. Si hay más de 255, SYNC los

organiza automáticamente por categorías en orden alfa-

bético.

Géneros

· Oprima "OK" para seleccionar. Recorra el menú para

seleccionar el género deseado y oprima "OK".

· Acceder a sus listas de reproducción (en formatos como

. ASX, .M3U, . WPL o . MTP). El sistema organiza las listas

de reproducción en orden alfabético en el modo de archivo

plano. Si hay más de 255, se organizan por categorías en

orden alfabético.

Playlists

· Oprima "OK" para seleccionar. Recorra el menú para

seleccionar la lista de reproducción deseada y oprima

"OK".

· Buscar y tocar una canción específica que haya sido

indexada. SYNC ordena las canciones en orden alfabético

en el modo de archivo plano. Si hay más de 255, SYNC los

organiza automáticamente por categorías en orden alfa-

bético.

Canciones

· Oprima "OK" para seleccionar. Recorra el menú para

seleccionar la pista deseada y oprima "OK".

· Explorar todos los medios digitales soportados ubicados

en el dispositivo de medios conectado al puerto USB. Solo

puede ver el contenido de los medios compatibles con

SYNC; otros archivos almacenados no serán visibles.

Explorar USB

· Oprima "OK" para seleccionar. Recorra el menú para

explorar los medios indexados en su dispositivo de

memoria Flash.

· Tocar música similar a la que se está reproduciendo

desde el puerto USB. El sistema usará la información de

metadatos de cada canción para crear una lista de repro-

ducción.

Música similar

· Oprima "OK" para seleccionar. El sistema crea una nueva

lista de canciones similares y comienza a tocar. Las

etiquetas de metadatos deben estar completas para que

esta característica incluya todas las canciones.

338

SYNC®

PuedeCuando selecciona

· Con ciertos dispositivos de reproducción, si las etiquetas

de metadatos no están completas, las canciones no

estarán disponibles en el modo de reconocimiento de voz

ni en los menús tocar o música similar. No obstante, si

pone estas canciones en su dispositivo de reproducción

en el modo de Dispositivo de almacenamiento masivo,

estarán disponibles en el modo de reconocimiento de voz

y en los menús Tocar y Música similar. Se colocará

DESCONOCIDO en las etiquetas de metadatos incom-

pletas.

Cerrar el menú actual.Volver

Configuración del sistema

Configuración del sistema le da acceso a

las características de los menús

Dispositivo Bluetooth y Opciones

avanzadas.

El menú Dispositivo Bluetooth le permite

agregar, conectar y quitar un dispositivo,

así como activar o desactivar la

característica Bluetooth.

El menú Opciones avanzadas le permite

acceder y configurar indicadores, idiomas

y configuraciones de fábrica, y realizar una

reconfiguración total.

Opciones del menú Dispositivo

Bluetooth

1. Presione AUX y después MENU para

ingresar al menú Medios.

2. Desplácese hasta que aparezca

Configuración del sistema,

seleccione "OK" y oprima "OK".

3. Recorra el menú hasta que aparezca

Dispositivo Bluetooth.

4. Oprima "OK" y recorra la pantalla para

escoger entre:

PuedeCuando selecciona

Le permite vincular dispositivos adicionales con el sistema.Agregar dispositivo Blue-

tooth

1. Oprima "OK" para seleccionar, y oprima otra vez "OK"

cuando aparezca Buscar SYNC en la pantalla.

2. Siga las instrucciones de la guía del usuario de su telé-

fono para poner el teléfono en modo de detección. En la

pantalla aparece un número de identificación personal

(PIN) de seis dígitos.

3. Cuando se lo indiquen en la pantalla de seis cifras del

teléfono, ingrese el PIN.

Conectar un teléfono con tecnología Bluetooth previa-

mente asociado.

Conectar dispositivo Blue-

tooth

1. Oprima "OK" para seleccionar y ver una lista de disposi-

tivos.

339

SYNC®

PuedeCuando selecciona

2. Recorra el menú hasta seleccionar el dispositivo

deseado, y oprima "OK" para conectarlo.

· Activar/desactivar la característica Bluetooth.Activar/Desactivar Blue-

tooth · Oprima "OK" y recorra el menú para cambiar entre

Activar y Desactivar. Una vez que seleccione la opción

deseada, oprima "OK". Si desactiva el sistema Bluetooth,

se desconectarán todos los dispositivos Bluetooth y se

desactivarán todas las funciones Bluetooth.

· Eliminar un dispositivo de medios asociado.Quitar dispositivos

· Oprima "OK" y recorra el menú para seleccionar el

dispositivo. Oprima "OK" para confirmar.

· Quitar todos los dispositivos previamente asociados.Quitar todos

· Oprima "OK" para seleccionar.

Cerrar el menú actual.Volver

Ésta es una característica dependiente de la velocidad.

Opciones avanzadas del menú

1. Presione AUX y después MENU para

ingresar al menú Medios.

2. Desplácese hasta que aparezca

Configuración del sistema,

seleccione "OK" y oprima "OK".

3. Recorra el menú hasta que aparezca

Opciones avanzadas.

4. Oprima "OK" y recorra la pantalla para

escoger entre:

PuedeCuando selecciona

Usar SYNC como guía haciendo preguntas y recibiendo

consejos útiles o bien, solicitándole una acción específica.

Indicadores

1. Oprima "OK" para seleccionar y recorra el menú para

seleccionar activar o desactivar.

2. Oprima "OK" cuando la selección deseada aparezca en

la pantalla. SYNC lo llevará de vuelta al menú de Confi-

guración avanzada.

Seleccione entre English, Français o Español. Los

mensajes e indicaciones de la visualización aparecerán

en ese idioma.

Idiomas

1. Oprima "OK" para seleccionar y recorra la lista de

idiomas.

2. Oprima "OK" cuando la selección deseada aparezca en

la pantalla.

340

SYNC®

PuedeCuando selecciona

3. Si cambia la configuración de idioma, la pantalla indicará

que el sistema se está actualizando. Cuando complete la

actualización, SYNC lo llevará de vuelta al menú Opciones

avanzadas.

Volver a los valores predeterminados de fábrica. Esta

selección no borrará su información indexada (agenda,

historial de llamadas, mensajes de texto y dispositivos

asociados).

Valores de fábrica

1. Oprima "OK" para seleccionar, y oprima otra vez "OK"

cuando aparezca Restaurar valores fáb.? en la pantalla.

2. Oprima "OK" para confirmar.

Borrar completamente toda la información almacenada

en SYNC (agenda, historial de llamadas, mensajes de

texto y todos los dispositivos asociados) y regresar a la

configuración de fábrica.

Reconfiguración total

Descargar nuevas aplicaciones de software (si están

disponibles) y luego cargar las aplicaciones que desee en

SYNC a través del puerto USB. Consulte el sitio web para

más información.

Aplicación

Cerrar el menú actual.Volver

DIAGNÓSTICO DE FALLAS

SYNC®

Su sistema SYNC es fácil de usar. Sin

embargo, en caso de duda, consulte las

tablas a continuación.

Visite el sitio web en cualquier momento

para verificar la compatibilidad de su

teléfono, registrar su cuenta y configurar

sus preferencias, y para comunicarse en

línea con un representante de atención al

cliente (en ciertos horarios). Si desea más

información, visite www.SYNCMyRide.com

o www.syncmaroute.ca.

341

SYNC®

Problemas del teléfono

Solución(es) posible(s)Causa(s) posible(s)Problema

Consulte la guía del usuario

de su teléfono para ver la

configuración de audio.

La configuración del control

de audio de su teléfono

puede estar afectando el

desempeño de SYNC.

Mucho ruido de fondo

durante una llamada telefó-

nica.

Apague el dispositivo, resta-

blézcalo o quítele la batería,

e inténtelo de nuevo.

Posible falla del teléfono.Durante una llamada, puedo

oír a la otra persona, pero

ésta no puede oírme.

· Visite el sitio web para veri-

ficar la compatibilidad de su

teléfono.

Ésta es una característica

dependiente del teléfono.

· Posible falla del teléfono.

SYNC no puede descargar

mi agenda.

· Apague el dispositivo,

restablézcalo o quítele la

batería, e inténtelo de

nuevo.

· Intente "empujar" los

contactos de su agenda a

SYNC® mediante la función

Agregar contactos.

· Use la característica

"SYNCmyphone" disponible

en el sitio web.

· Intente "empujar" los

contactos de su agenda a

SYNC® mediante la función

Agregar contactos.

Limitaciones en la capa-

cidad de su teléfono.

El sistema dice "Agenda

descargada" pero mi

agenda en SYNC aparece

vacía o le faltan contactos.

· Si los contactos que faltan

están almacenados en su

tarjeta SIM, trate de

moverlos a la memoria del

dispositivo.

· Elimine las imágenes o

tonos de timbre especiales

asociados con el contacto

faltante.

· Visite el sitio web para veri-

ficar la compatibilidad de su

teléfono.

· Ésta es una característica

dependiente del teléfono.

· Posible falla del teléfono.

Tengo problemas para

conectar mi teléfono a

SYNC.

342

SYNC®

Problemas del teléfono

Solución(es) posible(s)Causa(s) posible(s)Problema

· Apague el dispositivo,

restablézcalo o quítele la

batería, e inténtelo de

nuevo.

· Quite su dispositivo de

SYNC y quite SYNC de su

dispositivo, e intente nueva-

mente.

· Verifique la configuración

de seguridad y de "aceptar

automáticamente/indicar

siempre" de la conexión

Bluetooth SYNC de su telé-

fono.

· Actualice la aplicación

oficial del fabricante de su

dispositivo.

· Desactive la configuración

de descarga automática de

la agenda.

· Visite el sitio web para veri-

ficar la compatibilidad de su

teléfono.

· Ésta es una característica

dependiente del teléfono.

· Posible falla del teléfono.

Los mensajes de texto no

funcionan en SYNC.

· Apague el dispositivo,

restablézcalo o quítele la

batería, e inténtelo de

nuevo.

Problemas de USB y medios

Solución(es) posible(s)Causa(s) posible(s)Problema

· Apague el dispositivo,

restablézcalo o quítele la

batería, e inténtelo de

nuevo.

Posible falla del dispositivo.Tengo problemas para

conectar mi dispositivo.

· Asegúrese de utilizar el

cable del fabricante.

· Asegúrese de que el cable

USB esté bien conectado en

el dispositivo y en el puerto

USB del vehículo.

343

SYNC®

Problemas de USB y medios

Solución(es) posible(s)Causa(s) posible(s)Problema

· Asegúrese de que el dispo-

sitivo no tenga un programa

de instalación automática

ni una configuración de

seguridad activa.

Asegúrese de no dejar el

dispositivo dentro del

vehículo en condiciones muy

calurosas o muy frías.

Ésta es una limitación del

dispositivo.

SYNC no reconoce mi

dispositivo cuando arranco

el vehículo.

Asegúrese de que el disposi-

tivo esté conectado a

SYNC® y de haber presio-

nado Reproducir en su

dispositivo.

Ésta es una característica

dependiente del teléfono.

El dispositivo no está

conectado.

No hay flujo de audio Blue-

tooth.

· Asegúrese de que haya

datos en todas las etiquetas

de información de la

canción.

· Es probable que sus

archivos de música no

contengan información

correcta de artista, título de

canción, álbum o género.

SYNC no reconoce la

música que está en mi

dispositivo.

· En algunos dispositivos es

necesario cambiar la confi-

guración de USB de almace-

namiento masivo a clase

MTP.

· El archivo puede estar

corrupto.

· La canción puede tener

mecanismos de protección

de derechos de autor que no

permiten reproducirla.

Problemas de informe/servicio de mantenimiento del vehículo (tráfico, indicaciones e

información)

Solución(es) posible(s)Causa(s) posible(s)Problema

· Ésta es una función

gratuita, pero primero debe

registrarse en línea para

usarla.

· Su cuenta no se puede

activar en el sitio web.

· Es posible que se indique el

VIN (número de identifica-

ción del vehículo) erróneo.

Recibí un texto que indica

que el informe de manteni-

miento del vehículo no está

activado.

344

SYNC®

Problemas de informe/servicio de mantenimiento del vehículo (tráfico, indicaciones e

información)

Solución(es) posible(s)Causa(s) posible(s)Problema

· Asegúrese de que el VIN se

indica correctamente en la

cuenta.

Cuando registra la cuenta,

debe indicar un distribuidor

preferido. Si ya se indica

uno, intente seleccionar otro

distribuidor y cerrar sesión.

Vuelva a iniciar sesión y

vuelva a su distribuidor

preferido y recupere el

informe.

La información de distri-

buidor preferido no se cargó

correctamente.

No puedo recuperar el

informe en el sitio Web o

recibí un error de sistema.

· Actualice su número móvil

en su cuenta en el sitio web.

· Esto se puede deber a la

compatibilidad de su telé-

fono.

No puedo enviar un informe.

· Asegúrese de tener inten-

sidad de señal completa y

que se aumentó el nivel de

volumen Bluetooth.

· Mala intensidad de señal.

· El teléfono no se puede

activar en el sitio web.

· Intente eliminar el teléfono

y realizar una asociación

limpia.

· Ésta es una función

gratuita, pero primero debe

registrarse en línea para

usarla.

· El teléfono en uso no está

activado.

· El teléfono tiene un

bloqueador de ID activo.

Escuché un comercial

cuando intenté usar Tráfico,

indicaciones e información.

· Desactive el bloqueador de

ID del teléfono ya que el

sistema lo reconoce por el

número de teléfono.

· Asegúrese de que el telé-

fono conectado actual-

mente es el mismo que el

registrado en su cuenta

SyncMyRide.

345

SYNC®

Problemas de comandos de voz

Solución(es) posible(s)Causa(s) posible(s)Problema

Revise los comandos de voz

del teléfono y los comandos

de voz de medios al principio

de sus respectivas

secciones.

Posiblemente esté usando

comandos de voz inco-

rrectos.

Probablemente habla

demasiado pronto o en el

momento inoportuno.

SYNC no entiende lo que

digo.

Recuerde que el micrófono

SYNC® está en el espejo

retrovisor o el acabado del

techo, justo encima del

parabrisas.

Revise los comandos de voz

de medios al principio de la

sección correspondiente.

Posiblemente esté usando

comandos de voz inco-

rrectos.

SYNC no entiende el

nombre de una canción o un

artista.

Diga o pronuncie el nombre

de la canción o el artista tal

como aparece en la lista. Si

usted dice: "Reproducir

artista Prince", el sistema no

reproduce la música que

diga "Prince and the Revolu-

tion" ni "Prince and the New

Power Generation".

Quizá no dice o pronuncia el

nombre exactamente como

lo guardó.

Es posible que el sistema no

"lea" el nombre de la misma

manera que usted lo dice o

pronuncia.

Asegúrese de decir o

pronunciar el título

completo, por ejemplo:

"Remix de California con

Jennifer Nettles".

Si guardó las canciones con

letras MAYÚSCULAS, debe

que deletrearlas. LOLA

requiere que diga "L-O-L-A".

No utilice caracteres espe-

ciales en el título, pues el

sistema no lo reconoce.

Revise los comandos de voz

del teléfono al principio de

la sección correspondiente.

Posiblemente esté usando

comandos de voz inco-

rrectos.

SYNC no entiende, o llama

al contacto equivocado

cuando quiero hacer una

llamada.

346

SYNC®

Problemas de comandos de voz

Solución(es) posible(s)Causa(s) posible(s)Problema

Asegúrese de decir o

pronunciar los contactos

exactamente como están

listados. Por ejemplo, si

guardó un contacto como

José Gutiérrez, diga: "Llamar

a José Gutiérrez".

Quizá no dice o pronuncia el

nombre exactamente como

lo guardó.

Es probable que los

contactos de su agenda

sean muy cortos y pare-

cidos, o que contengan

caracteres especiales. El sistema funciona mejor si

escribe los nombres y

apellidos; por ejemplo, "José

Gutiérrez" en vez de "José".

Probablemente guardó los

contactos de su agenda en

MAYÚSCULAS.

No utilice caracteres espe-

ciales como 123 o ICE pues

el sistema no lo reconoce.

Si guardó los contactos con

letras MAYÚSCULAS, tiene

que deletrearlos. Si requiere

"JAIME", tendrá que decir:

"Llamar a J-A-I-M-E”.

347

SYNC®

INFORMACIÓN GENERAL

ALERTA

Manejar mientras está distraído

puede tener como consecuencia la

pérdida de control del vehículo, un

accidente y lesiones. Ford le recomienda

enfáticamente que extreme las

precauciones cuando utilice cualquier

dispositivo o función que pudiera distraerlo

mientras conduce. Su responsabilidad

principal es manejar en forma segura el

vehículo. No se recomienda el uso de

ningún dispositivo portátil al conducir; se

sugiere el uso de sistemas operados por

voz cuando sea posible y que se informe

de las leyes estatales y locales aplicables

al uso de dispositivos electrónicos al

conducir.

Nota: Algunas funciones no están

disponibles mientras el vehículo está en

movimiento.

Nota: También puede ingresar

directamente a la pantalla de inicio y a la

pantalla de información oprimiendo el

botón de Inicio (el icono de "casa") y el

botón de Información (el icono de "i") en

los controles del volante de dirección.

Este sistema usa una estrategia de cuatro

esquinas para proporcionar acceso rápido

a las funciones y ajustes del vehículo. La

completa pantalla táctil le permite

interactuar de manera sencilla con su

teléfono móvil, archivos de medios, control

de temperatura y sistema de navegación.

En las esquinas también verá cualquier

modo activo de esos menús, como su

teléfono en proceso de conexión o la

temperatura ambiente.

E142607

MENÚ

Oprima para seleccionar cualquiera de

estas opciones:

• Reloj

• Sonido

• Configuración

• Pantalla

• Vehículo

• Ayuda

INFORMACIÓN

Oprima para seleccionar cualquiera de

estas opciones:

• Servicios SYNC®

• Notificaciones

• Aplicaciones SYNC

• SIRIUS® Travel Link™

• Calendario

TELÉFONO

Oprima para seleccionar cualquiera de

estas opciones:

• Marcación rápida

• Historial de llamadas

• Configuración

• Agenda

• Mensajes de texto

• Hacer y recibir llamadas

NAVEGACIÓN

Oprima para seleccionar cualquiera de

estas opciones:

• Mi casa

• Destinos anteriores

• Emergencia

• Intersección

• Mapa

• Favoritos

• Punto de interés

• Calle y número

• Centro de la ciudad

348

MyFord Touch®

ENTRETENIMIENTO

Oprima para seleccionar cualquiera de

estas opciones:

• AM o FM

• CD

• Estéreo BT

• Tarjeta SD

• SIRIUS

• USB

• Entrada de AV

CLIMATIZACIÓN

Oprima para seleccionar cualquiera de

estas opciones:

• Configuración del conductor

• Aire recirculado

• Automático

• Doble

• Configuración del pasajero

• A/A

• Desempañar

Uso de los controles sensibles al

tacto de su sistema

El pilar central de su vehículo cuenta con

interruptores sensibles al tacto para los

sistemas de entretenimiento y de

climatización. Para activar o desactivar

una función, únicamente debe tocar la

imagen con el dedo. Para obtener un

rendimiento óptimo de los controles

sensibles al tacto:

• Asegúrese de que sus manos estén

limpias y secas.

• Debido a que la pantalla táctil funciona

con el toque de un dedo, podría tener

problemas si usa guantes.

• Utilice su dedo descubierto para tocar

la parte central de una imagen de

control táctil. Si no toca la parte central

de la imagen, podría activar o

desactivar un control adyacente.

• No presione los controles con fuerza.

Son sensibles al tacto ligero.

• El metal y otros materiales conductivos

se deben mantener alejados de la

superficie de la pantalla táctil, ya que

de lo contrario podrían causar

interferencia electrónica (es decir, la

activación del control).

Dependiendo del vehículo y del paquete

de opciones, podría también tener los

siguientes controles en su bisel:

• Encendido: encender o apagar los

medios (o las funciones de

climatización).

• VOL: aumenta o disminuye el volumen.

• Ventilador: aumenta o disminuye la

velocidad del ventilador.

• Botones Seek (Buscar) y Tune

(Sintonizar): utilice como lo haría

normalmente en los modos de medios.

• Expulsar: expulsar un CD.

• SOURCE: toque la palabra

repetidamente para ver todos los

modos de medios disponibles. La

pantalla no cambiará, pero podrá ver

los cambios de medios en la barra de

estado inferior izquierda.

• SOUND: toque la palabra para acceder

al menú de Sonido de la pantalla

donde puede hacer los ajustes de

configuración tales como: graves,

agudos, alcances intermedios, balance

y atenuación del sonido, demostración

de Deep Note THX (si está equipado),

DSP (si está equipado), modo de

ocupación (si está equipado) y

configuración del Volumen

compensado por velocidad.

• Luces intermitentes de emergencia:

oprima el botón para activar o

desactivar las luces intermitentes de

emergencia.

349

MyFord Touch®

Limpieza de la pantalla táctil

Limpie la pantalla con un paño limpio y

suave, como los que se utilizan para limpiar

anteojos. Si todavía queda suciedad o

huellas digitales, aplique una pequeña

cantidad de alcohol al paño. No vierta ni

rocíe alcohol sobre la pantalla. No utilice

detergente ni ningún otro tipo de solvente

para limpiar la pantalla.

Soporte

El equipo de soporte de SYNC está

disponible para ayudarle a responder las

preguntas que no pueda contestar por su

cuenta.

De lunes a sábado, de 8:30 a.m. a 8 p.m.

En los Estados Unidos, llame al:

1-888-270-1055

En Canadá, llame al: 1-800-565-3673

Los horarios están sujetos a cambios

debido a los días festivos.

Información de seguridad

ALERTA

Manejar mientras está distraído

puede tener como consecuencia la

pérdida de control del vehículo, un

accidente y lesiones. Ford le recomienda

enfáticamente que extreme las

precauciones cuando utilice cualquier

dispositivo o función que pudiera distraerlo

mientras conduce. Su responsabilidad

principal es manejar en forma segura el

vehículo. No se recomienda el uso de

ningún dispositivo portátil al conducir; se

sugiere el uso de sistemas operados por

voz cuando sea posible y que se informe

de las leyes estatales y locales aplicables

al uso de dispositivos electrónicos al

conducir.

Al usar SYNC:

• No haga funcionar dispositivos de

juegos si los cables de corriente están

rotos, separados o dañados. Coloque

con cuidado los cables de corriente

donde no los puedan pisar y no

interfieran con el funcionamiento de

pedales, asientos, compartimentos o

capacidades de manejo seguro.

• No deje los dispositivos de juego en el

vehículo en condiciones extremas, ya

que podría dañarlos. Para obtener más

información, consulte la guía del

usuario del dispositivo.

• No intente revisar o reparar el sistema.

Consulte con su distribuidor autorizado.

• Para su seguridad, algunas funciones

de SYNC dependen de la velocidad y

no se pueden ejecutar cuando el

vehículo viaja a velocidades superiores

a 5 km/h (3 mph).

Asegúrese de revisar la guía del usuario del

dispositivo antes de usarlo con SYNC.

350

MyFord Touch®

Características restringidas por la

velocidad

Algunas características de este sistema

pueden ser demasiado difíciles de utilizar

mientras el vehículo está en movimiento,

por lo tanto no se permite modificarlas a

menos que el vehículo esté detenido.

Algunos ejemplos de ellas se indican a

continuación:

• Las pantallas demasiado abarrotadas

con información, como revisiones y

calificaciones de Punto de interés,

resultados deportivos, horarios de

películas, condiciones para esquiar que

aparecen en SIRIUS Travel Link, etc.

• Cualquier acción que requiera el uso

de un teclado, como entrar un destino

de navegación o información de

edición.

• Todas las listas son limitadas de modo

que el usuario pueda ver menos

entradas (por ejemplo, contactos

telefónicos, entradas de llamadas

telefónicas recientes).

A continuación aparecen las

características más específicas que solo

pueden modificarse mientras el vehículo

no se encuentre en movimiento:

Características restringidas

Asociación de un teléfono con BluetoothTeléfono móvil

Incorporación de contactos a la agenda telefónica o carga

de estos (desde USB)

Las entradas de listas son limitadas para los contactos

telefónicos y las entradas de llamadas telefónicas

recientes.

Edición del código del tecladoFuncionalidad del sistema

Activación del modo valet

Configuración de la edición mientras se encuentran activas

la cámara retrovisora o la asistencia de estacionamiento

activa

Edición de la configuración de la conexión inalámbricaWi-Fi o conexión inalám-

brica

Edición de la lista de redes inalámbricas

Reproducción de videoVideos, fotos o gráficas

Edición de un fondo de pantalla e incorporación de uno

nuevo

Composición de mensajes de textoMensajes de texto

Visualización de los mensajes de texto recibidos

Edición de los mensajes de texto preestablecidos

351

MyFord Touch®

Características restringidas

Uso del teclado para ingresar un destinoNavegación

Ruta de navegación de demostración

Incorporación o edición de entradas de la libreta de direc-

ciones o áreas por evitar

Información de privacidad

Cuando un teléfono móvil se conecta a

SYNC, este crea un perfil dentro de su

vehículo que está asociado a ese teléfono

móvil. Este perfil se crea para ofrecerle

más funciones móviles y para una

operación más eficiente. Entre otras cosas,

este perfil puede contener datos acerca

de la agenda del teléfono móvil, mensajes

de texto (leídos y sin leer) y el historial de

llamadas, incluyendo el historial de

llamadas de cuando el teléfono móvil no

estaba conectado a SYNC. Además, si

conecta un dispositivo de medios, SYNC

crea y retiene un índice del contenido de

medios compatible con SYNC. SYNC

también lleva un breve registro de

aproximadamente 10 minutos de toda la

actividad reciente de SYNC. El perfil del

registro y otros datos de SYNC pueden

utilizarse para mejorar SYNC y para ayudar

en el diagnóstico de cualquier problema

que pueda ocurrir.

El perfil del teléfono móvil, el índice del

dispositivo de medios y el registro

quedarán almacenados en el vehículo a

menos que usted los borre, y por lo general

solo se tiene acceso a ellos en el vehículo

cuando el teléfono móvil o el reproductor

multimedia están conectados. Si ya no va

a utilizar SYNC o el vehículo, le

recomendamos que realice el proceso de

Reconfiguración total para borrar toda la

información almacenada en SYNC.

No se puede tener acceso a los datos de

SYNC sin equipo especial y sin acceso al

módulo SYNC del vehículo. Ford Motor

Company y Ford Motor Company of

Canada no revisarán los datos de SYNC

para otros fines que no sean los ya

descritos sin el consentimiento

correspondiente o sin un mandato judicial,

petición de las autoridades de policía,

petición de las autoridades

gubernamentales o petición de terceros

que actúen con la debida autoridad legal.

Otras terceras partes pueden solicitar

acceso a la información en forma

independiente de Ford Motor Company y

Ford of Canada. Para obtener información

adicional sobre privacidad, consulte las

secciones sobre 911 Assist™ (si está

equipado), Informe de mantenimiento del

vehículo (si está equipado) y Tráfico,

indicaciones e información (si está

equipado).

Acceso a la pantalla de inicio

E142613

Presione el icono de casa para

ingresar a la pantalla de inicio.

352

MyFord Touch®

Uso del sistema de reconocimiento

de voz

Este sistema le ayuda a controlar

numerosas funciones mediante comandos

de voz. Esto le permite tener las manos en

el volante y concentrarse en lo que está

delante suyo. El sistema proporciona

retroalimentación mediante tonos

audibles, indicadores, preguntas y

confirmaciones habladas que dependen

de la situación y del nivel de interacción

elegido (configuración de voz).

El sistema también le hace preguntas

breves (indicaciones de confirmación) si

no está seguro de su petición o cuando la

petición tiene varias respuestas posibles.

Cuando se usan comandos de voz,

también pueden aparecer palabras e

iconos en la barra de estado inferior

izquierda para indicar el estado de la

sesión de voz (por ejemplo, escuchando,

éxito, error, en pausa o intente de nuevo).

Cómo utilizar los comandos de voz con

el sistema

E142599

Oprima el icono de voz; después

del tono, diga el comando

claramente.

¿Qué puedo decir?

Para acceder a los comandos de voz

disponibles para la sesión actual, haga lo

• Durante una sesión de voz, oprima la

barra de estado en la parte inferior

izquierda de la pantalla.

• Diga "¿Qué puedo decir?" para ver en

la pantalla una lista de los posibles

comandos de voz asociados con su

sesión de voz actual.

• Oprima el icono de voz; después del

tono, diga "Ayuda" para escuchar una

lista de los posibles comandos de voz.

Sugerencias útiles

• Asegúrese de que el interior del

vehículo esté lo más silencioso posible.

Es posible que las vibraciones del

camino y el ruido del viento que entra

por las ventanas abiertas impidan que

el sistema reconozca en forma correcta

los comandos que diga.

• Después de oprimir el icono de voz,

espere hasta que escuche el tono y que

aparezca "Escuchando" antes de decir

un comando. Cualquier comando que

se diga antes de esto no se registra en

el sistema.

• Hable con naturalidad, sin hacer

pausas largas entre palabras.

• En cualquier momento, puede

interrumpir el sistema mientras éste

habla al presionar el icono de voz.

Comandos básicos

Si deseaDiga

Realizar llamadas."Teléfono"

Acceder al dispositivo conectado en su puerto USB."USB"

Reproducir audio desde el teléfono."Audio Bluetooth"

Acceder al dispositivo conectado en la entrada auxiliar."Entrada Auxiliar"

353

MyFord Touch®

Si deseaDiga

Cancelar la acción solicitada."Cancelar"

Regresar el menú principal."SYNC"

Ajustar el nivel de interacción y retroalimentación de voz."Configuración de voz"

Ejecutar un informe de mantenimiento del vehículo.

"Informe de mantenimiento

del vehículo"

Acceder al portal de servicios SYNC.

"Servicios"

Acceder a aplicaciones móviles.

"Aplicaciones móviles"

Escuche una lista de comandos de voz disponibles en el

modo actual.

"Ayuda"

Si está equipado, solo EE.UU.

Estos comandos se pueden decir en cualquier momento durante una sesión de voz

"Menú principal"

"Lista de comandos"

"¿Qué puedo decir?"

"Siguiente página"

"Página anterior"

"Regresar"

"Cancelar"

"Salir"

"Ayuda"

Acceso a una lista de comandos

disponibles

1. En la pantalla táctil, oprima el icono de

Menú, Ayuda y Lista de comandos de

voz.

2. Oprima el icono de voz en los controles

del volante de la dirección. Después

del tono, diga el comando claramente.

354

MyFord Touch®

Comandos de voz disponibles

"Lista de comandos de radio""Lista de comandos de audio"

"Lista de comandos de tarjeta SD""Lista de comandos de audio Bluetooth"

"Lista de comandos satelitales de Sirius"

"Revisar lista de comandos"

"Lista de comandos de Travel Link"

"Lista de comandos de CD"

"Lista de comandos USB""Lista de comandos del control de tempe-

ratura"

"Lista de comandos de las instrucciones

de voz"

"Lista de comandos"

"Lista de comandos de la configuración de

voz"

"Lista de comandos de navegación"

"Ayuda""Lista de comandos del teléfono"

Si está equipado

Configuración de voz

Configuración de voz le permite

personalizar el nivel de interacción con el

sistema, ayuda y retroalimentación. La

configuración predeterminada del sistema

es interacción estándar, que utiliza listas

de candidatos e indicadores de

confirmación, pues estos proporcionan el

nivel más alto de orientación y

retroalimentación.

• Modo de interacción: el modo para

principiantes proporciona interacción

y orientación más detalladas, mientras

que el modo avanzado tiene menos

interacción audible y más indicaciones

por tonos.

• Indicaciones de confirmación: son

preguntas cortas que el sistema hace

cuando no está seguro de su petición

o cuando la petición tiene varias

respuestas posibles. Si está

desactivado, el sistema simplemente

hará su mejor suposición en cuanto a

lo que usted solicitó y puede que le

pida, de vez en cuando, que confirme

la configuración.

• Listas de teléfonos y opciones

similares: son listas de posibles

resultados de sus comandos de voz. El

sistema crea estas listas cuando tiene

el mismo nivel de confianza en varias

opciones basadas en su comando de

voz.

355

MyFord Touch®

Para acceder a esta configuración

mediante la pantalla táctil:

1. Oprima el icono de Menú,

Configuración y Control de voz.

2. Seleccione entre lo siguiente:

• Modo de interacción

• Indicadores de confirmación

• Listas de opciones similares

• Listas de opciones de telefonía

• Volumen del control de voz

Para acceder a esta configuración

mediante los comandos de voz:

1. Oprima el icono de voz; después del

tono, el sistema dice: "Diga un

comando". Sonará otro tono para

indicar que el sistema está

escuchando.

2. Diga cualquiera de los comandos

siguientes:

Configuración de voz mediante los comandos de voz

"Modo de interacción para principiantes"

"Modo de Interacción Avanzado"

"Mensajes de Confirmación Activados"

"Mensajes de Confirmación Desactivados"

"Lista de Candidatos de Teléfono Activada"

"Lista de Candidatos de Teléfono Desactivada"

"Lista de Candidatos de Medios Activada"

"Lista de Candidatos de Medios Desactivados"

"Ayuda"

Uso de comandos de voz con las opciones

de pantalla táctil

Su sistema de voz tiene una característica

de modo doble que le permite cambiar

entre utilizar comandos de voz y

seleccionar opciones en la pantalla. Esto

se encuentra disponible con más

frecuencia cuando se usa la navegación.

Los botones en la pantalla están

delineados con azul para indicar las

opciones que son parte de la función de

modo doble. Por ejemplo, si mientras está

en una sesión de voz, en lugar de decir el

comando "Ingresar nombre de la calle"

para cambiar el campo, puede oprimir

Calle y la sesión de voz no terminará. En

lugar de eso, el sistema de voz cambiará

al campo Calle y le solicitará que diga el

nombre de la calle. Los botones no

delineados en azul no se pueden utilizar

como comandos de voz; si los toca durante

una sesión de voz, se cancelará la sesión.

356

MyFord Touch®

Por ejemplo, puede escoger entre las

siguientes opciones en la pantalla de inicio

de Navegación:

• Mi casa

• Favoritos

• Destinos anteriores

• Punto de interés (POI)

• Emergencia

• Calle y número

• Intersección

• Cancelar ruta

Algunos de los comandos de voz

disponibles mientras ve esta pantalla son:

Destino

"Destino mi casa"

"Destino calle y número"

"Destino favoritos"

"Destino Destino previo"

"Destino Punto de interés"

"Destino intersección"

"Destino emergencia"

Si selecciona Calle y número en la pantalla

de navegación, puede escoger entre las

siguientes opciones:

• Número

• Ciudad

• Calle

• Estado/Provincia

Algunos de los comandos de voz

disponibles mientras ve esta pantalla son:

Calle y número

"Ingresar número de casa"

"Cambiar número de casa"

"Ingresar nombre de la calle"

"Cambiar nombre de la calle"

"Ingresar ciudad"

"Cambiar ciudad"

"Ingresar estado"

"Cambiar estado"

357

MyFord Touch®

Si selecciona Puntos de interés en la

pantalla de navegación, puede escoger

entre las siguientes opciones:

• Área de búsqueda

• Buscar por nombre

• Estación de servicio

• Cajero automático

• Todos los restaurantes

• Alojamiento

• Estacionamiento

Algunos de los comandos de voz

disponibles mientras ve esta pantalla son:

Puntos de interés o POI

"Destino <nombre de categoría del punto de interés>"

"Buscar por nombre"

"Buscar por categoría"

"Cambiar área de búsqueda"

"Cambiar estado"

Nota: Esta es solo un ejemplo de los

comandos de voz disponibles en la sección

Puntos de interés; técnicamente, las

categorías en sí mismas también son

comandos de voz.

Si selecciona Intersección en la pantalla

de navegación, puede escoger entre las

siguientes opciones:

• Primera calle

• Segunda calle

• Ciudad

• Estado/Provincia

Algunos de los comandos de voz

disponibles mientras ve esta pantalla son:

Intersección

"Ingresar nombre de la primera calle"

"Cambiar nombre de la primera calle"

"Ingresar nombre de la segunda calle"

"Cambiar nombre de la segunda calle"

"Ingresar ciudad"

"Cambiar ciudad"

"Ingresar estado"

"Cambiar estado"

358

MyFord Touch®

La función de modo doble también se

encuentra disponible cuando el sistema

de voz muestra una lista de elementos

para seleccionar durante una sesión de

voz, donde puede tocar el elemento en la

línea o decir "Línea 2". Si un comando no

se entiende o si hay varias opciones, el

sistema muestra una lista para que elija

una opción.

MENÚ

En la opción de configuración del menú,

puede ajustar el reloj, acceder y realizar

ajustes de la pantalla, configuraciones de

sonido y del vehículo así como acceder a

configuraciones de modos específicos o a

la característica de ayuda.

Ajuste del reloj

Nota: La fecha será ajustada por el GPS de

su vehículo; no podrá ajustarla

manualmente.

Nota: Si se ha desconectado la batería, el

vehículo debe adquirir la señal del GPS para

actualizar el reloj. Una vez que su vehículo

adquiere la señal, pueden transcurrir

algunos minutos para que se actualice la

hora correcta en la pantalla.

1. Oprima Menú y Reloj.

2. Oprima + y – para ajustar la hora.

También puede hacer otros ajustes desde

esta pantalla, como el modo horario de 12

o 24 horas, activar la sincronización del

GPS con la hora, y hacer que el sistema

actualice automáticamente las nuevas

zonas horarias.

Una vez que actualice su nueva

configuración, ésta se guardará

automáticamente.

Configuración de la pantalla

Para acceder y hacer ajustes en la pantalla

táctil mediante la pantalla táctil, oprima

Menú y Pantalla. Seleccione cualquiera de

las siguientes opciones:

• Brillo

• Atenuación automática

activada/desactivada

• Modo: Auto, Día o Noche

• Editar su imagen de fondo

E142599

Para acceder y hacer ajustes en

la pantalla táctil mediante

comandos de voz, oprima el

botón de voz en los controles del volante

de la dirección, y cuando reciba la

indicación, diga, "Configurar pantalla".

Carga de fotografías para su fondo de

pantalla principal

Nota: No puede cargar fotografías

directamente de su cámara. Debe acceder

a las fotografías desde su dispositivo de

almacenamiento masivo USB o desde una

tarjeta SD.

Este sistema le permite cargar y ver hasta

32 fotografías. Para cargar fotografías,

oprima Menú, Pantalla y Editar fondo de

pantalla. Siga las indicaciones del sistema

para cargar sus fotografías.

Limitaciones de la pantalla de fotos

Nota: Las fotografías con dimensiones

extremadamente grandes (es decir, 2048

x 1536) podrían no ser compatibles y

aparecer como una imagen en blanco

(negra) en la pantalla.

359

MyFord Touch®

Solo aparecerán fotografías que cumplan

las siguientes condiciones:

• Los formatos de archivos compatibles

son los siguientes: .jpg, .gif, .png, .bmp

• Cada archivo debe ser de 1,5 MB o

menos.

• Dimensiones recomendadas: 800 X

384

Sonido

Oprima Menú y Sonido para acceder a las

configuraciones de:

Configuración de sonido

Demostración de Deep Note THX

Graves

DSP

Agudos

Modo de ocupación

Intermedios

Volumen compensado por la velocidadBalance y distribución

Si está equipado.

Cámara retrovisora (If Equipped)

Este menú le permite acceder a la

configuración de su cámara retrovisora.

Oprima Menú, Vehículo y Cámara de

reversa. Seleccione una de las siguientes

configuraciones:

• Demora de la cámara retrovisora

• Guía

• Alarma visual de asistencia para

estacionamiento

Modo valet

Nota: Si el sistema no le da acceso y

necesita restablecer su PIN, puede ingresar

el número 3681 para desbloquear el

sistema.

El modo valet le permite bloquear el

sistema para que nadie pueda acceder a

la información del mismo en tanto no sea

desbloqueado con el número de

identificación personal (PIN) correcto.

1. Oprima Menú, Vehículo y Modo valet.

2. Seleccione Activar modo valet

3. Cuando reciba la indicación, ingrese un

PIN de cuatro dígitos.

Una vez que oprime Continuar, el sistema

se bloquea hasta que usted ingresa otra

vez el PIN correcto.

Cambio del código del teclado de

la puerta (If Equipped)

Para cambiar el código del teclado de su

sistema de entrada sin llave:

1. Oprima Menú, Vehículo, Editar código

del teclado de la puerta.

2. Ingrese su código de fábrica actual y,

cuando se le indique, ingrese el nuevo

código.

Asistencia de estacionamiento

activa (If Equipped)

Cuando está activa esta característica, el

sistema muestra instrucciones

relacionadas con el proceso de asistencia

de estacionamiento activa. Ver

Asistencia Activa para Estacionarse

(página 180).

360

MyFord Touch®

Configuración

Acceda y ajuste la configuración del

sistema, las características de voz y las

configuraciones del teléfono, la

navegación y la conexión inalámbrica.

Algunas de estas configuraciones también

se pueden acceder con base en sus modos

específicos (es decir, teléfono y medios).

Configuración del sistema

Oprima Menú, Configuración; Sistema.

Seleccione entre lo siguiente:

Configuración del sistema

Unidades de distanciaIdioma

Volumen de la indicación del sistemaUnidades de temperatura

Disposición del tecladoPitidos de la pantalla táctil

Reconfiguración totalInstalar aplicaciones

Configuración de voz

Personalice el nivel de interacción con el

sistema, la ayuda y la retroalimentación.

Oprima Menú, Configuración y Voz.

Configuración de voz

· El modo de interacción estándar proporciona interacción

más detallada y orientación.

Modo de interacción

· El modo avanzado proporciona menos interacción audible

y más indicadores de tono.

Preguntas breves que realiza el sistema cuando no

escucha claramente o no comprende la solicitud. (Incluso

con las indicaciones de confirmación desactivadas, es

posible que se le pida que confirme ocasionalmente las

configuraciones).

Indicadores de confirmación

Las listas de opciones similares son listas de posibles

resultados de los comandos de voz. Si están desactivadas,

el sistema hará simplemente su mejor suposición en

cuanto a su solicitud.

Listas de opciones similares

Listas de opciones de tele-

fonía

Permite ajustar el nivel de volumen de la voz.Volumen del control de voz

361

MyFord Touch®

Configuraciones del reproductor de

medios

Para acceder a la configuración del

reproductor de medios, oprima Menú,

Configuración y Reproductor de medios.

Seleccione entre lo siguiente:

• "Autoplay activado/desactivado"

• Dispositivos Bluetooth

• Índice Bluetooth activado/desactivado

• Información de base de datos

• Administración de medios

activada/desactivada

Nota: Con Autoplay e Índice Bluetooth

activados, puede escuchar la música que

ya está indexada. Con estas características

desactivadas, SYNC no reproduce nada de

música hasta que todos los medios (de la

unidad USB, unidad flash, reproductor de

música portátil, etc.) se hayan indexado.

Configuraciones del sistema de

navegación

Para acceder a la configuración del

reproductor de medios, oprima Menú,

Configuración y Navegación.

Seleccione entre lo siguiente:

• Preferencias de mapa

• Preferencias de ruta

• Preferencias de navegación

• Preferencias de tránsito

• Áreas por evitar

Configuración del teléfono

Para acceder a la configuración del

reproductor de medios, oprima Menú,

Configuración y después, Teléfono (o

Teléfono y después, Configuración).

Configuración del teléfono

Conectar, desconectar, agregar o quitar un dispositivo, así

como guardarlo como favorito.

Dispositivos Bluetooth

Activar o desactivar Bluetooth.Bluetooth activado/desac-

tivo

Hacer que todas las llamadas vayan directamente a su

buzón de voz y no suenen en la cabina del vehículo. Con

esta función activada, las notificaciones de mensaje de

texto también se silencian y no suenan dentro de la cabina.

No molestar

Activar o desactivar 911 Assist™. Ver Información (página

394).

911 Assist

Seleccionar cómo quiere ser notificado al recibir un

mensaje de texto, si su teléfono es compatible. Seleccione

entre los posibles tonos de alerta del sistema, texto de

conversación o silencio.

Aviso de mensaje de texto

362

MyFord Touch®

Configuración del teléfono

Utilice esta pantalla para configurar su conexión de datos

de Internet. Seleccione para crear su perfil de conexión

con la red de área personal (PAN) o para desactivar su

conexión. También puede ajustar su configuración o hacer

que el sistema siempre esté conectado, que nunca se

conecte en roaming, o que pregunte antes de conectarse.

Oprima ? para obtener más información.

Conexión de datos de

Internet

Acceder a funciones como descarga automática de la

agenda, volver a descargar su agenda, agregar contactos

desde su teléfono y borrar o cargar su agenda.

Administrar agenda

Muestra el historial de llamadas.Historial de llamadas

Si es compatible.

Conexión inalámbrica y de Internet

Para acceder, oprima Menú, Configuración

y después, Conexión inalámbrica y de

Internet.

Seleccione entre lo siguiente:

• Configuración de Wi-Fi

• Configuración de Bluetooth

• USB de banda ancha móvil

• Priorizar métodos de conexión

Wi-Fi

Su sistema tiene una característica Wi-Fi

que crea una red inalámbrica dentro de su

vehículo, permitiendo de esta forma que

otros dispositivos (por ejemplo

computadoras personales o teléfonos) en

su vehículo se comuniquen mutuamente,

compartir archivos, jugar juegos, etc.

Si se utiliza esta característica, todas las

personas en su vehículo pueden también

tener acceso a Internet si:

• Usted dispone de una conexión USB

de banda ancha móvil dentro del

vehículo

• Su teléfono soporta una PAN (red

personal de contactos locales)

• Usted está estacionado fuera de un

lugar con conectividad inalámbrica

activa

Para acceder, oprima Menú, Configuración,

Conexión inalámbrica y de Internet y

Configuración de Wi-Fi. Seleccione una de

las siguientes opciones:

363

MyFord Touch®

PuedeSi selecciona

Activar o desactivar la característica de Wi-Fi en el

vehículo. Asegúrese de que Activar esté seleccionado si

desea tener conectividad.

Modo de red de Wi-Fi

(cliente) activado/desacti-

vado

Usar una red inalámbrica almacenada anteriormente.

Puede ordenar sus redes por lista alfabética, prioridad e

intensidad de la señal. También puede buscar una red,

conectarse a una red, desconectarse de una red, recibir

más información, priorizar una red o borrar una red.

Escoja una red inalámbrica

Ver una lista de redes inalámbricas.Buscar redes inalámbricas

Active esta función para que SYNC se convierta en un

punto de acceso para un teléfono o una computadora.

Esto integra una red de área local dentro del vehículo, para

cosas como jugar videojuegos, transferir archivos, navegar

por Internet, etc.

Modo de punto de acceso

(activado/desactivado)

Ver quién ha utilizado su conexión Wi-Fi últimamente.Lista de dispositivos de

punto de acceso

Oprima el botón ? (si está equipado) para

ver información adicional.

E142626

logotipo

"Wi-Fi

CERTIFIED" es una marca de certificación

de Wi-Fi Alliance.

USB de banda ancha móvil

Nota: Debe activar su dispositivo de banda

ancha móvil en su computadora personal

antes de conectarlo al sistema.

Nota: Las configuraciones del USB de

banda ancha móvil podrían no mostrarse si

el dispositivo ya está activado.

En vez de utilizar Wi-Fi, su sistema también

puede usar una conexión USB de banda

ancha móvil para acceder a la Internet.

Esta pantalla le permite configurar lo que

será el área típica de conexión para su USB

de banda ancha móvil.

Puede seleccionar lo siguiente:

• País

• Proveedor

• Número de teléfono

• Nombre de usuario

• Contraseña

Priorizar métodos de conexión

Esta pantalla le permite escoger sus

métodos de conexión y cambiarlos como

lo necesite. Puede seleccionar Cambiar

orden y hacer que el sistema siempre

intente conectarse utilizando, o un USB de

banda ancha móvil, o la función Wi-Fi.

364

MyFord Touch®

Configuración de Bluetooth

Esta pantalla muestra qué dispositivo está

asociado actualmente al sistema, y le dará

las opciones típicas de Bluetooth para

conectarse, desconectarse, configurar su

predilecto, y borrar y agregar dispositivos.

Bluetooth es una marca registrada de

Bluetooth SIG.

Ayuda

Su sistema de pantalla táctil tiene una

función de ayuda, a la cual puede acceder

en cualquier momento.

Para acceder, presione Menú y después,

Ayuda. Seleccione una de las siguientes

opciones:

PuedeSi selecciona

Ver la ubicación actual del vehículo, si su vehículo está

equipado con sistema de navegación. Si su vehículo no

está equipado con navegación, no habrá información

disponible.

¿Dónde estoy?

Acceder a los ajustes de 911 Assist, instrucciones de reinicio

del vehículo y contactos de marcación rápida de emergen-

cias.

911 Assist

· Marcación rápida de emergencia (ICE): Esta función

le permite guardar hasta dos números como contactos

de emergencia para acceder a ellos rápidamente en caso

de emergencia. Seleccione Editar para acceder a la

agenda del teléfono y seleccionar los contactos deseados.

Los números aparecen como opciones en esta pantalla

para los botones ICE 1 e ICE 2. Los contactos ICE que

seleccione se le presentarán al finalizar el proceso de

llamada de 911 Assist para un rápido acceso.

Ver posibles comandos de voz.Lista de comandos de voz

Desde esta pantalla, también puede

acceder a Información del sistema,

Licencias de software y Restricciones de

manejo.

Para acceder a la Ayuda usando los

comandos de voz, oprima el botón de voz

y después del tono, diga "Ayuda". El

sistema le proporciona los comandos de

voz que puede utilizar en el modo actual.

ENTRETENIMIENTO

Su sistema ofrece muchas opciones de

medios. Puede acceder a estas opciones

a través de la pantalla táctil o mediante

comandos de voz.

365

MyFord Touch®

Exploración del contenido del

dispositivo

Mientras escucha cualquier tipo de audio,

puede revisar las opciones de otros

dispositivos sin tener que cambiar las

fuentes. Por ejemplo, si está escuchando

la radio, puede revisar todos los artistas

almacenados en su dispositivo USB.

E142599

Oprima el icono de voz en los

controles del volante de la

dirección. Cuando se le indique,

puede decir:

"REVISAR" en los dispositivos

"Revisar"

"Revisar juegos de <liga>"

"Mostrar canales de <categoría de Sirius>"

"Mostrar CD"

"Revisar tarjeta SD"

"Mostrar SIRIUS"

"Revisar USB"

"Ayuda"

Si dice solamente "Revisar", puede decir cualquiera de los comandos del cuadro

siguiente.

Si está equipado con radio satelital SIRIUS®.

"REVISAR"

"Juegos de <liga>"

"Canales de <categoría de Sirius>"

"CD"

"Tarjeta SD"

"Guía de canales SIRIUS"

"USB"

366

MyFord Touch®

"REVISAR"

"Ayuda"

Si está equipado con radio satelital SIRIUS®.

Para conocer más comandos relacionados con la tarjeta SD o el modo USB, consulte

la sección "Tarjeta SD y puerto USB" en este capítulo.

Radio AM/FM

E142611

Oprima la esquina inferior

izquierda de la pantalla táctil, y

luego seleccione la pestaña AM

o FM.

Para alternar entre las memorias AM y FM,

simplemente toque la lengüeta AM o FM.

PuedeCuando selecciona

Guardar una estación manteniendo oprimida una de las

áreas de preestablecimiento de memoria. El sonido se

silenciará brevemente mientras se guarda la estación y

volverá a activarse cuando haya finalizado la operación.

Memoria

Ingrese el número de la estación deseada cuando reciba

la indicación. Oprima Intro.

Sintonizar directo

Permite recibir transmisiones de radio digitalmente (donde

esté disponible), proporcionando un sonido claro y nítido.

Radio HD

Ir a la siguiente estación de radio AM o FM con señal

potente.

Explorar

Puede ajustar más configuraciones del sistema de audio:Opciones

· Configuración de sonido ajusta Bajos, Agudos, Medios,

Balance y Distribución, la demostración de Deep Note THX

(si está equipado), DSP (si está equipado), Modo de

ocupación (si está equipado) y la configuración del

volumen compensado por velocidad.

· Establecer PTY de Búsqueda/Exploración le permite

seleccionar una categoría de música que desee buscar y

luego optar por buscar o explorar las estaciones.

· Pantalla de texto RDS le permite ver siempre la infor-

mación de transmisión de las estaciones de FM.

· Memorias preestablecidas (AST) permite que el

sistema almacene automáticamente las seis estaciones

más potentes de su localidad actual.

367

MyFord Touch®

PuedeCuando selecciona

· ETIQUETA (si está disponible) le permite etiquetar

una canción para descargarla posteriormente. Cuando

selecciona Activar, aparece ETIQUETA en la pantalla

cuando está activa la función HD Radio. Puede oprimir

ETIQUETA para guardar la información de la canción que

se está reproduciendo. Cuando conecte su reproductor

de música portátil, la información será transferida (si es

admitido por su dispositivo). Cuando se conecte a iTunes®,

aparecerán las etiquetas para recordarle las canciones

que quería descargar.

Información de HD Radio™ (si está

disponible)

Nota: Las transmisiones de HD Radio no

están disponibles en todos los mercados.

La tecnología HD Radio es la evolución

digital de la radio AM/FM analógica. Su

sistema cuenta con un receptor especial

que le permite recibir transmisiones

digitales (si están disponibles), además

de las transmisiones analógicas que ya

recibe. Las transmisiones digitales ofrecen

una mejor calidad de sonido que las

analógicas, con un audio nítido y sin

estática ni distorsión. Para obtener más

información y una guía de las estaciones

y la programación disponible, visite

www.hdradio.com.

Si tiene esta función activada y tiene

sintonizada una estación que transmite

con tecnología HD Radio, es posible que

observe los siguientes indicadores en la

pantalla:

E142616

El logotipo de HD Radio parpadea cuando

se está adquiriendo una estación digital y

permanece encendido cuando se está

reproduciendo audio digital. Cuando este

logo aparezca, también podrá ver los

campos de Título y Artista en la pantalla.

El indicador de multidifusión aparece en

el modo FM (solamente) si la estación

actual está emitiendo varias transmisiones

digitales. Los números resaltados indican

los canales digitales disponibles que tienen

contenido nuevo o diferente. HD1 indica el

estado de la programación principal y que

se encuentra disponible en transmisiones

analógica y digital. Cualquier estación de

multidifusión adicional (desde HD2 hasta

HD7) solamente se transmite en formato

digital.

ETIQUETA le permite guardar una canción

para descargarla posteriormente. Cuando

tiene sintonizada una estación de HD

Radio, el botón ETIQUETA se encuentra

disponible (siempre que la función esté

activada). Para usar la función de etiqueta:

368

MyFord Touch®

1. Oprima AM o FM, Opciones y luego

Etiqueta activada

2. Cuando escuche una canción que le

guste, toque ETIQUETA.

3. El sistema guarda automáticamente

la información de la canción y la

transfiere a su reproductor de música

portátil (si es compatible) cuando lo

conecta al sistema. Si tiene el

reproductor de música conectado en

ese momento, el sistema transfiere

automáticamente la etiqueta a su

reproductor y un mensaje emergente

confirma la transferencia.

4. Cuando accede a iTunes® con su

reproductor de música portátil, las

etiquetas aparecen para recordarle la

canción. El sistema le permite etiquetar

aproximadamente hasta 100

canciones. Para obtener una lista de

dispositivos compatibles con las

etiquetas, consulte

www.SYNCMyRide.com o

www.syncmaroute.ca.

Cuando las transmisiones de HD Radio

están activas, puede acceder a las

siguientes funciones:

PuedeCuando selecciona

Escuchar una breve muestra de todas las estaciones

disponibles.

Explorar

Esta característica funciona cuando está activada la

recepción de HD Radio, aunque no explora los canales de

HD2 a HD7. Puede que aparezca el logotipo HD si la esta-

ción tiene una transmisión digital.

Escuchar la siguiente estación de radio con señal potente.Búsqueda

Si la estación actual tiene varias transmisiones digitales,

aparece el indicador de multidifusión. Oprima Buscar

repetidamente para avanzar a través de todas las trans-

misiones disponibles. Si está en el último canal de multi-

difusión, oprima Buscar para avanzar a la siguiente esta-

ción con señal potente.

Recorra la frecuencia hacia arriba o hacia abajo en incre-

mentos individuales.

Sintonizar

369

MyFord Touch®

PuedeCuando selecciona

Si la estación actual tiene varias transmisiones digitales,

aparece el indicador de multidifusión. Oprima Sintonizar

radio repetidamente para avanzar a través de todas las

transmisiones disponibles. Si está en el último canal de

transmisión, gire para avanzar a la siguiente frecuencia de

la banda.

Cuando el canal está activo en la pantalla, mantenga

oprimida una ranura preestablecida de memoria hasta

que vuelva el sonido. El sonido se silenciará brevemente

y volverá a activarse, lo que significa que la estación se

guardó. Al oprimir una memoria preestablecida HD2 o

HD3, se produce un silencio antes de que se reproduzca

el audio digital, ya que el sistema debe volver a adquirir la

señal digital. Al igual que con cualquier estación de radio

guardada, no podrá acceder a la estación guardada si el

vehículo se encuentra fuera del área de recepción.

Para guardar una estación

de multidifusión como

memoria

Recepción y solución de problemas de estaciones de HD Radio

Posibles problemas de recepción

Si está escuchando una estación de multidifusión y se

encuentra en el límite del área de recepción, es posible

que la estación se silencie a causa de la baja intensidad

de la señal.

Si está escuchando HD1, el sistema cambia a la transmi-

sión analógica hasta que la transmisión digital esté

disponible nuevamente. Sin embargo, si está escuchando

cualquiera de los posibles canales de multidifusión de

HD2 a HD7, la estación se silencia y permanece en silencio

hasta que sea posible conectarse a la señal digital

nuevamente.

Área de recepción

Cuando se recibe una estación por primera vez (aparte de

las estaciones de multidifusión HD2 a HD7), el sistema

primero reproduce la estación en la versión analógica y

luego, si el receptor verifica que se trata de una estación

de HD Radio, cambia a la versión digital. Dependiendo de

la calidad de la estación, es posible que escuche un leve

cambio de sonido cuando la estación pase del modo

analógico al digital. Este cambio de sonido analógico a

digital o de digital a analógico, se conoce como "combina-

ción".

Combinación de estaciones

370

MyFord Touch®

Para ofrecer la mejor experiencia posible,

se ha desarrollado un formulario de

contacto para informar cualquier problema

con las estaciones que se presente

mientras escucha la transmisión de una

estación con la tecnología HD Radio. Cada

estación tiene propietarios y operaciones

diferentes. Estas estaciones son

responsables de asegurar que todas las

transmisiones de audio y campos de datos

sean correctos.

Posibles problemas de las estaciones

Acción a tomarCausaProblemas

Ninguna. Problema de difu-

sión.

Alineación de tiempo defi-

ciente por parte del difusor

de radio.

Eco, tartamudez, saltos o

repetición del audio.

Aumento o disminución del

volumen.

Ninguna. Problema de

recepción que puede solucio-

narse al continuar condu-

ciendo.

El radio está cambiando

entre el modo de audio

analógico y el digital.

El sonido se desvanece o

aumenta y disminuye.

Ninguna. Este es un

comportamiento normal.

Espere hasta que el audio

esté disponible.

La multidifusión digital no

está disponible hasta que se

decodifica la transmisión de

HD Radio. Una vez decodifi-

cada, el audio estará dispo-

nible.

Retraso del silencio de audio

al seleccionar HD2/HD3,

memoria de multidifusión o

Sintonización directa.

Ninguna. La estación no está

disponible en su ubicación

actual.

La memoria de multidifusión

almacenada anteriormente

o la sintonización directa no

están disponibles en el área

de recepción actual.

No se puede acceder al

canal de multidifusión HD2/

HD3 cuando se intenta

acceder a una memoria o

desde una sintonización

directa.

Complete el formulario de

problemas de estación en el

sitio web indicado a conti-

nuación.

Problema del servicio de

datos por parte del difusor

de radio.

La información de texto no

coincide con el audio que se

está reproduciendo.

371

MyFord Touch®

Posibles problemas de las estaciones

Acción a tomarCausaProblemas

Complete el formulario de

problemas de estación en el

sitio web indicado a conti-

nuación.

Problema del servicio de

datos por parte del difusor

de radio.

No se muestra información

de texto para la frecuencia

seleccionada actualmente.

Ninguna. Este es un

comportamiento normal.

Al oprimir Explorar se

desactiva la búsqueda de

canales HD2 a HD7.

Las estaciones HD2 a HD7

no se encuentran cuando se

oprime Explorar.

http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences

Tecnología HD Radio fabricada con

licencia de iBiquity Digital Corp. Patentes

de Estados Unidos y extranjeras. HD Radio

y los logotipos de HD Radio y HD son

marcas registradas de iBiquity Digital Corp.

Ford Motor Company e iBiquity Digital

Corp. no son responsables del contenido

que se distribuye mediante la tecnología

HD Radio. El contenido puede estar sujeto

a cambios, adiciones o eliminación en

cualquier momento a discreción del

propietario de la estación.

Comandos de voz por radio

E142599

Si está escuchando el radio,

oprima el botón de voz en los

controles del volante de la

dirección. Cuando se le indique, diga

cualquiera de los siguientes comandos.

Si no está escuchando la radio, oprima el

botón de voz y, después del tono, diga

"Radio" y cualquiera de los comandos

siguientes.

"RADIO"

"Programación automática <número> de

FM"

"<87.9-107.9>"

"Memoria <número> de FM"

"<87.9-107.9> HD"

"FM 1""<530-1710>"

"Memoria <número> de FM 1""AM"

"FM 2""AM <530-1710>"

"Memoria <número> de FM 2""Programación automática de AM"

"HD <número>"

"Programación automática <número> de

AM"

"Memoria <número>""Memoria <número> de AM"

"Apagar radio"

"Revisar"

372

MyFord Touch®

"RADIO"

"Encender radio""FM"

"Fijar tipo de programa""FM <87.9-107.9>"

"Sintonizar radio"

"FM <87.9-107.9> HD <número>"

"Ayuda""Programación automática de FM"

Si está disponible

Si dijo "Revisar", consulte el cuadro "Revisar" más adelante en esta sección.

Si dijo "Sintonizar radio", consulte el cuadro "Sintonizar radio" a continuación.

"SINTONIZAR RADIO"

"Programación automática de FM""<530-1710>"

"Programación automática <número> de

FM"

"<87.9-107.9> HD <número>"

"Memoria <número> de FM""AM"

"FM1""AM <530-1710>"

"Memoria <número> de FM1""Memoria <número> de AM"

"FM2""Programación automática de AM"

"Memoria <número> de FM2""Programación automática <número> de

AM"

"HD <número>"

"<87.9-107.9>"

"Memoria <número>""FM"

"Ayuda""FM <87.9-107.9>"

"FM <87.9-107.9> HD <número>"

Si está disponible

Radio satelital SIRIUS® (si está

activado)

E142611

Oprima la esquina inferior

izquierda de la pantalla táctil y

seleccione la pestaña SIRIUS.

373

MyFord Touch®

PuedeCuando selecciona

Guardar una estación manteniendo oprimida una de las

áreas de preestablecimiento de memoria. El sonido se

silenciará brevemente mientras se guarda la estación y

volverá a activarse cuando haya finalizado la operación.

Un área de preestableci-

miento de memoria (en el

lado derecho de la pantalla)

Ingresar el número del canal satelital deseado usando el

teclado en pantalla.

Sintonizar directo

Oprimir repetidamente para cambiar entre los modos

SIRIUS (SIRIUS 1, 2 o 3).

SIRIUS

Guardar la canción, artista o equipo actual como favorito.

El sistema le avisará cuando se reproduzca nuevamente

en cualquier canal SIRIUS.

ALERTA

Ver una lista de las estaciones disponibles. Recorra la lista

y seleccione la estación deseada.

Revisar

También puede bloquear u omitir canales que no desee

escuchar o ver la canción/artista en otras estaciones.

Escuchar una breve muestra de los canales.Explorar

Repetir el audio en el canal actual. Puede volver a repro-

ducir aproximadamente 45 minutos de audio siempre y

cuando haya estado sintonizado a la estación actual. Si

cambia estaciones, el audio anterior se borrará.

Repetir

· Oprima y suelte los botones de búsqueda para escuchar

la canción anterior o siguiente.

· Mantenga oprimidos los botones de búsqueda para

adelantar o retroceder rápidamente en la pista actual.

· Oprima reproducir o pausar para reproducir o pausar el

audio.

· Oprima Repetir nuevamente para volver al audio en

directo si ha estado usando la función de repetición para

repetir audio.

Puede ajustar más configuraciones del sistema de audio:Opciones

· Configuración de sonido ajusta Bajos, Agudos, Medios,

Balance y Distribución, la demostración de Deep Note THX

(si está equipado), DSP (si está equipado), Modo de

ocupación (si está equipado) y la configuración del

volumen compensado por velocidad.

· Establecer categoría de búsqueda/exploración le

permite seleccionar una categoría de música que desee

buscar y luego optar por buscar o explorar las estaciones.

374

MyFord Touch®

PuedeCuando selecciona

· Bloqueo infantil le permite bloquear y desbloquear

canales, cambiar o restablecer su PIN o desbloquear todos

los canales. Para usar esta función, necesitará su PIN

inicial, que es 1234.

· Alertas de artista/título

le permite seleccionar artistas

y títulos para los cuales desea que el sistema le avise

cuando se reproduzcan en otros canales. Oprima Editar

alertas para eliminar o desactivar alertas. También puede

activar o desactivar todas las alertas. Cuando aparece

una alerta en la pantalla, puede optar por Sintonizar

radio en el canal, Cancelar la alerta o Desactivar

alertas. Si está escuchando un evento deportivo, puede

guardar sus equipos favoritos de modo que el sistema le

avise cuando estén jugando en un canal de radio satelital.

Es necesario para comunicarse con SIRIUS para interac-

tuar con su cuenta.

Número de serie electrónico

(ESN)

SIRIUS no es compatible con la función de Alerta en todos los canales. Ford Motor

Company no será responsable de ninguna variación en la función de Alerta.

Información de radio satelital SIRIUS

Nota: SIRIUS se reserva el derecho sin

restricción de cambiar, redisponer, agregar

o borrar programación, incluida cancelación,

movimiento o adición de canales específicos

y precios en cualquier momento, con o sin

previo aviso. Ford Motor Company no será

responsable de ninguno de estos cambios

en la programación.

E142593

La radio satelital SIRIUS es un servicio de

radio satelital de suscripción que transmite

una diversidad de programación de

música, deportes, noticias, tiempo, tráfico

y entretenimiento. Su sistema de radio

satelital SIRIUS instalado en fábrica

incluye el dispositivo y una suscripción

limitada que comienza en la fecha de

venta o arrendamiento del vehículo.

Consulte la disponibilidad con su

distribuidor autorizado.

375

MyFord Touch®

Para obtener más información acerca de

los términos de suscripción extendida (se

requiere una tarifa de servicio), el

reproductor multimedia en línea y una lista

completa de canales de radio satelital

SIRIUS, así como otras funciones, visite

www.siriusxm.com en Estados Unidos,

www.sirius.ca en Canadá o llame a SIRIUS

al 1–888–539–7474.

Número de serie electrónico de radio

satelital (ESN)

Necesitará su ESN para activar, modificar

o rastrear su cuenta de radio satelital. El

ESN se encuentra en la pantalla System

Information (Información del sistema) (SR

ESN:XXXXXXXXXXXX). Para acceder a su

ESN, toque la esquina inferior izquierda de

la pantalla táctil. Toque SIRIUS, Opciones

y luego, ESN.

Factores de recepción de radio satelital SIRIUS y solución de problemas

Posibles problemas de recepción

Para lograr un óptimo rendimiento de la recepción,

mantenga la antena sin acumulaciones de nieve y hielo y

mantenga el equipaje y otro material en el techo del

vehículo lo más alejado posible de la antena.

Obstrucciones de la antena

Los cerros, montañas, edificios altos, puentes, túneles,

pasos elevados en autopistas, estacionamientos de varios

pisos, follajes de árboles densos y las tormentas eléctricas

pueden interferir con la recepción.

Terreno

Cuando pasa por una torre de radiodifusión basada en

tierra, una señal más potente puede superar a una más

débil y generar un silencio del sistema de audio.

Sobrecarga de estaciones

La pantalla mostrará ADQUIRIENDO... para indicar la

interferencia y es posible que se silencie el sistema.

Interferencia de la señal de

radio satelital

376

MyFord Touch®

Localización y solución de problemas

Acción a tomarCausaPantalla de la radio

Ninguna. Este mensaje debe

desaparecer dentro de unos

segundos.

La radio requiere más de dos

segundos para generar el

audio para el canal seleccio-

nado.

ADQUIRIENDO...

Si este mensaje no se borra

en breve, o con un ciclo de

la llave de encendido, el

receptor puede tener una

falla. Visite a un distribuidor

autorizado para solicitar

servicio.

Falla de sistema o módulo

interno presente.

Falla satelital/de sistema

SIRIUS

Sintonice otro canal o

seleccione otra memoria

preestablecida.

El canal ya no está dispo-

nible.

Canal inválido

Comuníquese con SIRIUS al

1-888-539-7474 para

suscribirse al canal o bien,

sintonice otro canal.

Suscripción no disponible

para este canal.

Canal sin suscripción

La señal está actualmente

bloqueada. Cuando se

mueva a un área abierta, la

señal volverá.

Se perdió la señal del saté-

lite de SIRIUS o torre de

SIRIUS hacia la antena del

vehículo.

No Signal (Sin señal)

Ninguna. El proceso puede

tomar hasta tres minutos.

Actualización de programa-

ción de canales en curso.

Updating (Actualizando)

Póngase en contacto con

SIRIUS llamando al 1-888-

539-7474 para volver a

activar o resolver problemas

de suscripción.

La radio satelital SIRIUS

desactivó el servicio sate-

lital.

Llamar a SIRIUS

1-888-539-7474

Utilizando la guía de

canales, desbloquee o quite

el salto de los canales.

Todos los canales en la

categoría seleccionada

están programados para

saltarse o están

bloqueados.

No Channels Available (No

hay canales disponibles)

Ninguna.SIRIUS ha actualizado los

canales disponibles para su

vehículo.

Subscription Updated

(Suscripción actualizada)

377

MyFord Touch®

Comandos de voz por radio satelital

SIRIUS

E142599

Si está escuchando la radio

satelital SIRIUS, oprima el botón

de voz en los controles del

volante de la dirección. Cuando se le

indique, diga cualquiera de los siguientes

comandos.

Si no está escuchando la radio satelital

SIRIUS, oprima el botón de voz y, después

del tono, diga "SIRIUS" y cualquiera de los

comandos siguientes.

"SIRIUS"

"Memoria <número> de SAT 2""<0-223>"

"SAT 3""<Nombre del canal>"

"Memoria <número> de SAT 3""Memoria <número>"

"Apagar SIRIUS""SAT"

"Activar SIRIUS""Memoria <número> de SAT"

"Sintonizar deportes"

"SAT 1"

"Sintonizar radio"

"Memoria <número> de SAT 1"

"Ayuda""SAT 2"

Disponibilidad posterior. Si dijo "Sintonizar deportes", consulte la tabla "Sintonizar

deportes" a continuación.

Si dijo "Sintonizar radio", consulte el cuadro "Sintonizar radio" a continuación.

"SINTONIZAR DEPORTES"

"Sintonizar partido de <universidad>"

"Sintonizar partido de <ciudad>"

"Sintonizar partido de <equipo> de <ciudad>"

"Sintonizar partido de <equipo>"

"Ayuda"

378

MyFord Touch®

"SINTONIZAR RADIO"

"<0-223>"

"<Nombre del canal>"

"Memoria <número>"

"SAT"

"SAT 1"

"Memoria <número> de SAT 1"

"SAT 2"

"Memoria <número> de SAT 2"

"SAT 3"

"Memoria <número> de SAT 3"

"Ayuda"

E142611

Oprima la esquina inferior

izquierda de la pantalla táctil y

seleccione la pestaña CD.

PuedeCuando selecciona

Repetir la pista de reproducción actual.Repetir

Reproducir las pistas en orden aleatorio.Mezclar

Escuche una breve muestra de todas las canciones

disponibles.

Explorar

Ver información del disco.Más información

Ver todas los orígenes de audio disponibles.Revisar

· Sonido ajusta Bajos, Agudos, Medios, Balance y Distribu-

ción, la demostración de Deep Note THX (si está equi-

pado), DSP (si está equipado), Modo de ocupación (si

está equipado) y la configuración del volumen compen-

sado por velocidad.

Opciones

· Compresión da acceso a la configuración de compresión.

379

MyFord Touch®

También puede avanzar y regresar la

canción o carpeta actual (en su caso).

Comandos de voz de CD

E142599

Si está escuchando un CD,

oprima el botón de voz en los

controles del volante de la

dirección. Cuando se le indique, diga

cualquiera de los siguientes comandos.

Si no está escuchando un CD, oprima el

botón de voz y, después del tono, diga

"CD" y cualquiera de los comandos

siguientes.

"CD"

"Pausa"

"Reproducir"

"Siguiente canción"

"Canción anterior"

"Reproducir la canción <1–512>"

"Activar repetición"

"Repetir carpeta"

"Desactivar repetición"

"Repetir canción"

"Reproducción aleatoria"

"Reproducción aleatoria del disco"

"Reproducción aleatoria de la carpeta"

"Desactivar reproducción aleatoria"

"Ayuda"

WMA o MP3 solamente

380

MyFord Touch®

Ranura para tarjeta SD y puerto

USB

Tarjeta SD

Nota: La ranura para tarjeta SD cuenta con

un resorte. Para extraer la tarjeta SD,

presione la tarjeta hacia dentro y el sistema

la expulsa. No intente jalar la tarjeta para

extraerla, pues eso podría dañarla.

La ranura para la tarjeta también se puede

usar con el sistema de navegación (si está

equipado). Ver Navegación (página 408).

E142619

La ranura para tarjeta SD se encuentra en

la consola central, o detrás de una puerta

pequeña de acceso en el tablero de

instrumentos. Para acceder a la música de

su dispositivo y reproducirla, oprima la

esquina inferior izquierda de la pantalla

táctil.

E142620

logo SD es una marca registrada de SD-3C,

LLC.

Puerto USB

E142621

Los puertos USB se encuentran en la

consola central, o detrás de una puerta

pequeña de acceso en el tablero de

instrumentos. Para acceder a la música de

su dispositivo y reproducirla, oprima la

esquina inferior izquierda de la pantalla

táctil.

Este sistema permite conectar dispositivos

de reproducción multimedia, tarjetas de

memoria o unidades de almacenamiento,

así como cargar dispositivos compatibles

con el sistema.

Reproducción de música desde el

dispositivo

E142611

Inserte el dispositivo y seleccione

la pestaña USB o Tarjeta SD

cuando el sistema lo reconozca.

Ahora puede elegir entre las siguientes

opciones:

381

MyFord Touch®

PuedeCuando selecciona

Repetir la canción o álbum de reproducción actual.Repetir

Reproducir música del álbum o carpeta seleccionado en

orden aleatorio.

Mezclar

Explorar el contenido del dispositivo. Esta función también

le permite buscar y reproducir música por género, artista,

álbum, etc.

Revisar

Seleccionar música similar a la que se está reproduciendo

actualmente.

Música similar

Seleccionar más opciones:Opciones

· Configuración de sonido le permite ajustar Bajos,

Agudos, Medios, Balance y Distribución, la Demostración

de Deep Note THX (si está equipado), DSP (si está equi-

pado), Modo de ocupación (si está equipado) y el volumen

compensado por velocidad.

· Configuraciones del reproductor de medios le permite

seleccionar más configuraciones.

· Información del dispositivo muestra información del

software y el firmware del dispositivo de medios conec-

tado.

· Actualizar índice de medios indexa el dispositivo cada

vez que se conecta para asegurarse de que tenga los

comandos de voz más recientes disponibles para todos

los medios del dispositivo.

Las configuraciones del reproductor de medios incluyen:

· Autoplay: con esta característica activada, el sistema

cambia automáticamente a la fuente de medios durante

la conexión inicial, de modo que puede escuchar la música

que ya ha sido indexada. Con esta característica desacti-

vada, el sistema no cambia automáticamente a la fuente

de medios.

· Dispositivos Bluetooth: conectar, desconectar, agregar

o borrar un dispositivo. También puede configurar un

dispositivo como su favorito, de modo que el sistema

intente conectarse a ese dispositivo en cada ciclo de

encendido del vehículo.

· Información de la base de datos Gracenote: permite

ver la versión de su base de datos Gracenote.

382

MyFord Touch®

PuedeCuando selecciona

· Administración de medios Gracenote: cuando está

activa, esta función obtiene información de los metadatos

de la base de datos Gracenote para sus archivos de

música. Esto anula la información de su dispositivo. El

ajuste predeterminado es desactivado.

· Prioridad de imagen de portada: esta característica

recupera la portada de los archivos de música desde el

dispositivo o bien, desde la base de datos Gracenote. El

ajuste predeterminado es Dispositivo.

Muestra información del dispositivo, si está conectado y

disponible.

Información de dispositivo

de medios

Le permite escoger cómo desea que aparezca la informa-

ción en la pantalla.

Pantalla de texto

Para ver los datos de la canción, como

Título, Artista, Archivo, Carpeta, Álbum y

Género, toque la portada del álbum en la

pantalla. También puede oprimir ¿Qué es

esto? para que el sistema diga el nombre

de la banda y la canción actuales. Esto

puede ser útil cuando se usan comandos

de voz para asegurarse de que el sistema

reproduzca correctamente su petición.

Comandos de voz para USB y tarjetas

E142599

Si está escuchando un

dispositivo USB o una tarjeta SD,

oprima el botón de voz en los

controles del volante de la dirección.

Cuando se le indique, diga cualquiera de

los siguientes comandos.

Si no está escuchando un dispositivo USB

o una tarjeta SD, oprima el botón de voz y,

después del tono, diga "USB" o "Tarjeta

SD" y cualquiera de los comandos

siguientes.

"USB" o "TARJETA SD"

"Reproducir episodio <nombre> del

podcast"

"Revisar"

"Reproducir música similar""Siguiente"

"Reproducir canción <nombre>""Pausa"

"Reproducir episodio <nombre> del

programa de TV"

"Reproducir"

"Reproducir video <nombre>"

"Reproducir disco <nombre>"

383

MyFord Touch®

"USB" o "TARJETA SD"

"Reproducir episodio <nombre> del

podcast de video"

"Reproducir todo"

"Reproducir lista de video <nombre>"

"Reproducir artista <nombre>"

"Canción anterior""Reproducir audiolibro <nombre>"

"Activar repetición de todas""Reproducir autor <nombre>"

"Desactivar repetición""Reproducir compositor <nombre>"

"Activar repetición de una""Reproducir carpeta <nombre>"

"Reproducción aleatoria""Reproducir género <nombre>"

"Desactivar reproducción aleatoria"

"Reproducir Película <nombre>"

¿Qué canción es esa?"Reproducir lista <nombre>"

"Ayuda""Reproducir podcast <nombre>"

Si dijo que quería revisar su USB o tarjeta SD, el sistema le pedirá que especifique lo que

quiere revisar. Cuando eso suceda, consulte el siguiente cuadro "Revisar".

Estos comandos solo están disponibles en el modo USB y dependen del dispositivo.

"REVISAR"

"Todos los podcasts de video"

"Disco <nombre >"

"Todos los videos"

"Todos los discos"

"Artista <nombre>""Todos los artistas"

"Audiolibro <nombre>""Todos los audiolibros"

"Autor <nombre>""Todos los autores"

"Compositor <nombre>""Todos los compositores"

"Carpeta <nombre>""Todas las carpetas"

"Género <nombre>""Todos los géneros"

"Lista <nombre>"

"Todas las películas"

"Podcast <nombre>"

"Todos los videos musicales"

384

MyFord Touch®

"REVISAR"

"Programa de TV <nombre>"

"Todas las listas"

"Video <nombre>"

"Todos los podcasts"

"Lista de video <nombre>"

"Todas las canciones"

"Reproducir podcast de video <nombre>"

"Todos los programas de TV"

"Ayuda"

"Todas las listas de video"

Estos comandos solo están disponibles en el modo USB y dependen del dispositivo.

Reproductores de medios,

formatos e información de

metadatos compatibles

SYNC tiene la capacidad de alojar

prácticamente todos los reproductores de

medios digitales, incluyendo iPod®,

Zune™, reproductores “Toca desde

dispositivo” y la mayoría de los

controladores USB. Entre los formatos de

audio admitidos se incluye MP3, WMA,

WAV y AAC.

También puede organizar mediante

etiquetas de metadatos los medios

indexados desde su dispositivo de

reproducción. Las etiquetas de metadatos

son identificadores de software

descriptivos incluidos en los archivos de

medios que proporcionan información

acerca de éstos.

Si los archivos de medios indexados no

contienen información en estas etiquetas

de metadatos, SYNC clasificará las

etiquetas de metadatos vacías como

Desconocidas.

Para reproducir video desde su iPod® o

iPhone® (si es compatible), DEBE tener

un cable de video compuesto USB/RCA

de combinación especial (a la venta en

Apple®). Después de conectar el cable en

su iPod® o iPhone®, conecte el otro

extremo en los enchufes RCA y en el puerto

USB.

Audio Bluetooth

El sistema le permite reproducir, en los

altavoces del vehículo, flujos de audio

procedentes de su teléfono móvil

conectado con acceso Bluetooth.

E142611

Para acceder, oprima la esquina

inferior izquierda de la pantalla

táctil y seleccione la pestaña BT.

Comandos de voz del sistema de audio

Bluetooth

Nota: Si su dispositivo Bluetooth admite la

transmisión de metadatos, todos los

comandos siguientes están disponibles. De

lo contrario, solamente los comandos

"Canción siguiente", "Pausa", "Reproducir"

y "Canción anterior" están disponibles.

385

MyFord Touch®

E142599

Si está escuchando un

dispositivo de audio Bluetooth,

oprima el botón de voz en los

controles del volante de la dirección.

Cuando se le indique, diga cualquiera de

los comandos de la siguiente tabla.

Si no está escuchando un dispositivo de

audio Bluetooth, oprima el botón de voz y,

después del tono, diga “Audio Bluetooth”

y cualquiera de los comandos de la

siguiente tabla.

"AUDIO BLUETOOTH"

"Reproducir género

<nombre>"

"Mostrar compositor

<nombre>"

"Mostrar disco <nombre>"

"Reproducir lista

<nombre>"

"Mostrar carpeta

<nombre>"

"Mostrar todos los discos"

"Reproducir episodio

<nombre> del podcast"

"Mostrar género <nombre>""Mostrar todos los artistas"

"Reproducir música similar""Mostrar lista <nombre>""Mostrar todos los audioli-

bros"

"Reproducir canción

<nombre>"

"Mostrar podcast

<nombre>"

"Mostrar todos los autores"

"Canción anterior""Siguiente""Mostrar todos los composi-

tores"

"Activar repetición de todas""Pausa""Mostrar todas las

carpetas"

"Desactivar repetición""Reproducir""Mostrar todos los géneros"

"Activar repetición de una""Reproducir disco

<nombre>"

"Mostrar todas las listas"

"Reproducción aleatoria""Reproducir artista

<nombre>"

"Mostrar todos los

podcasts"

"Activar reproducción alea-

toria del disco"

"Reproducir audiolibro

<nombre>"

"Mostrar todas las

canciones"

"Desactivar reproducción

aleatoria"

"Reproducir autor

<nombre>"

"Mostrar artista <nombre>"

"¿Qué canción es esa?""Reproducir compositor

<nombre>"

"Mostrar audiolibro

<nombre>"

"Ayuda""Reproducir carpeta

<nombre>"

"Mostrar autor <nombre>"

386

MyFord Touch®

Entradas de A/V

Nota: Por motivos de seguridad, no se debe

intentar conectar o regular la configuración

del reproductor de música portátil mientras

el vehículo está en movimiento. Además,

cuando el vehículo esté en movimiento, el

reproductor se debe guardar en un lugar

seguro, como por ejemplo en la consola

central o en la guantera. El cable de

extensión del sistema de audio debe ser lo

suficientemente largo para permitir que el

reproductor de música se guarde en forma

segura mientras el vehículo está en

movimiento.

E142622

Sus entradas de A/V le permiten conectar

una fuente auxiliar de audio/video (por

ejemplo, sistemas de videojuego o

videocámaras personales,) mediante

cables tipo RCA (no se incluyen) en estos

enchufes de entrada. Dichos enchufes, de

colores amarillo, rojo y blanco, están en la

consola central o detrás de una pequeña

puerta de acceso en el tablero de

instrumentos.

También puede utilizar las entradas de

A/V como enchufe de entrada auxiliar

(AIJ), para escuchar la música de su

reproductor de música portátil en los

altavoces del vehículo. Conecte su

adaptador RCA de 3,5 mm (1/8 pulg) en

los dos enchufes de entrada de A/V

restantes (rojo y blanco).

Oprima la esquina inferior izquierda de la

pantalla táctil y seleccione la pestaña

Entradas de A/V.

Para utilizar el enchufe de entrada auxiliar,

asegúrese de que su reproductor de

música portátil esté diseñado para usarse

con auriculares, y que esté completamente

cargado. También necesitará un cable de

extensión de audio con conectores

estereofónicos machos de 3,5 mm

(1/8 pulg) en un extremo, y un enchufe

RCA en el otro.

1. Empiece con el vehículo estacionado

y el radio y el dispositivo portátil

apagados.

2. Conecte un extremo del cable de

extensión de audio en la salida del

auricular de su reproductor, y el otro

extremo en el adaptador de uno de los

dos enchufes de entrada de A/V

restantes (blanco o rojo) de la consola

central.

3. Oprima la esquina inferior izquierda de

la pantalla táctil. Seleccione una

estación sintonizada en la pestaña FM

o una canción en la pestaña CD (si hay

un CD cargado en el sistema). Ajuste

el volumen a un nivel de audición

cómodo.

4. Encienda el reproductor de música

portátil y ajuste el volumen en la mitad

de su nivel.

5. Oprima la esquina inferior izquierda de

la pantalla táctil. Seleccione la pestaña

Entrada de A/V. (Deberá escuchar el

audio del reproductor de música

portátil, pero el volumen puede ser

bajo).

6. Ajuste el sonido del reproductor de

música portátil hasta que alcance el

nivel de la estación FM o CD alternando

los controles.

387

MyFord Touch®

Para reproducir video desde su iPod® o

iPhone® (si es compatible), DEBE tener

un cable de video compuesto USB/RCA

de combinación especial (a la venta en

Apple®). Después de conectar el cable en

su iPod® o iPhone®, conecte el otro

extremo en los enchufes RCA y en el puerto

USB.

Nota: No conecte el enchufe de entrada de

audio a una salida de nivel de línea. El

enchufe de entrada auxiliar solo funciona

correctamente con dispositivos que poseen

salida para auriculares con control de

volumen.

Nota: No ajuste el volumen del reproductor

de música portátil en un nivel más alto que

lo necesario para coincidir con el volumen

del CD o radio FM, ya que esto provoca

distorsión y disminuye la calidad del sonido.

Nota: Si la música se oye distorsionada en

niveles más reducidos, baje el volumen del

reproductor. Si el problema persiste,

reemplace o recargue las baterías.

Nota: El reproductor de música portátil se

debe controlar en la misma forma que

cuando se usa con auriculares, ya que el

Enchufe de entrada auxiliar no proporciona

control (reproducción, pausa, etc.) sobre

éste.

TELÉFONO

La llamada de manos libres es una de las

características principales de SYNC. Una

vez que se enlaza su teléfono, puede

acceder a muchas opciones utilizando la

pantalla táctil o comandos de voz. Aunque

el sistema tiene una amplia variedad de

características, muchas de ellas dependen

de la funcionalidad de su teléfono.

La mayoría de los teléfonos móviles con

tecnología inalámbrica Bluetooth admiten,

al menos, las siguientes funciones:

• Responder una llamada entrante

• Finalizar una llamada

• Usar el modo de privacidad

• Marcar un número

• Volver a marcar

• Aviso de llamada en espera

• Identificación de quien llama.

Otras características, como mensajes de

texto mediante Bluetooth y descarga

automática de agenda, dependen del

teléfono. Para verificar la compatibilidad

del teléfono, consulte la guía del usuario

del teléfono y visite

www.SYNCMyRide.com o

www.syncmaroute.ca.

Asociación del teléfono por

primera vez

ALERTA

Manejar mientras está distraído

puede tener como consecuencia la

pérdida de control del vehículo, un

accidente y lesiones. Ford recomienda

encarecidamente que los conductores

presten especial cuidado cuando utilicen

dispositivos que pudieran quitar su

atención del camino. Su responsabilidad

principal es manejar en forma segura el

vehículo. No se recomienda el uso de

ningún dispositivo portátil al conducir; se

sugiere el uso de sistemas operados por

voz cuando sea posible y que se informe

de las leyes estatales y locales aplicables

al uso de dispositivos electrónicos al

conducir.

388

MyFord Touch®

Lo primero que debe hacer para utilizar las

funciones de teléfono del sistema SYNC,

es asociar su teléfono móvil compatible

con tecnología Bluetooth y el sistema

SYNC. Esto le permite utilizar su teléfono

en el modo de manos libres.

Nota: Asegúrese de que el encendido del

vehículo y el radio estén activados y que la

transmisión esté en posición P.

1. Toque Agregar teléfono en la esquina

superior izquierda de la pantalla táctil.

2. Cuando reciba la indicación, seleccione

Agregar.

3. Seleccione Agregar dispositivo.

4. Asegúrese de que la opción Bluetooth

esté ajustada en Activado y que su

teléfono móvil esté en el modo

apropiado. Si fuera necesario, consulte

la guía del usuario del teléfono.

5. Cuando la pantalla del teléfono se lo

indique, ingrese en la pantalla del radio

el número de identificación personal

(PIN) de seis cifras que SYNC le

proporcionó. La pantalla indica si la

asociación se realizó correctamente y

le pregunta si quiere descargar su

libreta de teléfonos.

Dependiendo de la capacidad de su

teléfono, es posible que se le indiquen

opciones adicionales. Para más

información sobre la capacidad de su

teléfono, consulte la guía del usuario del

teléfono y visite el sitio web.

Asociación de teléfonos

subsiguientes

Nota: Asegúrese de que el encendido del

vehículo y el radio estén activados y que la

transmisión esté en posición P.

1. Oprima la esquina del teléfono de la

pantalla táctil, Configuración,

Dispositivos Bluetooth y Agregar

dispositivo.

2. Asegúrese de que la opción Bluetooth

esté ajustada en Activado y que su

teléfono móvil esté en el modo

apropiado. Si fuera necesario, consulte

la guía del usuario del teléfono.

3. Cuando se lo indique la pantalla del

teléfono, ingrese el PIN de seis dígitos

que SYNC le proporcionó en la

pantalla. La pantalla indicará si la

asociación tuvo éxito. El sistema le

preguntará si quiere descargar su

libreta de teléfonos.

Dependiendo de la capacidad de su

teléfono, es posible que se le indiquen

opciones adicionales. Para más

información sobre la capacidad de su

teléfono, consulte la guía del usuario del

teléfono y visite el sitio web.

Hacer llamadas

E142599

Presione el botón de voz. Cuando

reciba la indicación, diga,

"Llamar a <nombre> o diga

"Marcar" y el número deseado.

E142632

Para finalizar la llamada o salir

del modo de teléfono, mantenga

oprimido el botón de teléfono.

Recepción de llamadas

Durante una llamada entrante, suena un

tono audible. La información de la llamada

aparece en la pantalla, si está disponible.

Acepte la llamada oprimiendo

Aceptar en la pantalla táctil u

oprimiendo este botón de

teléfono en los controles del volante de la

dirección.

E142632

Rechace la llamada oprimiendo

Rechazar en la pantalla táctil,

o manteniendo oprimido este

botón de teléfono en los controles del

volante de la dirección.

389

MyFord Touch®

Ignore la llamada no realizando ninguna

acción. SYNC registra la llamada como

llamada perdida.

Opciones del menú de teléfono

Oprima la esquina superior izquierda de la

pantalla táctil para seleccionar una de las

siguientes opciones:

PuedeCuando selecciona

Acceder al teclado numérico en pantalla, ingresar un

número y hacer una llamada.

Teléfono

· Durante una llamada activa, puede optar por silenciar la

llamada, ponerla en espera, activar la privacidad (envía

la llamada a su teléfono móvil), unir dos llamadas o

terminar la llamada.

Seleccionar y llamar a los contactos almacenados en su

agenda telefónica y en la carpeta del historial de llamadas.

Marcación rápida

Acceder y llamar a cualquier contacto de su agenda tele-

fónica previamente descargada. El sistema ordenará las

entradas en las categorías alfabéticas que se resumen en

la parte superior de la pantalla.

Libreta de teléfonos

· Para activar las configuraciones de imágenes de los

contactos (si su dispositivo cuenta con esta función),

oprima Teléfono, Configuración, Administrar agenda,

Descargar fotos de la agenda y después, Activar.

· Algunos teléfonos inteligentes pueden admitir la transfe-

rencia de direcciones si están incluidas en la información

de contacto de la agenda telefónica. Si esta característica

es admitida, puede seleccionar y utilizar estas direcciones

como destinos y también guardarlas como favoritos.

Acceder a cualquier llamada marcada, recibida o perdida

mientras su teléfono con tecnología Bluetooth ha estado

conectado a SYNC. También puede guardar cualquiera

de sus llamadas en Favoritos o Marcación rápida.

Historial de llamadas

Ésta es una característica dependiente del teléfono. Si su

teléfono no admite la descarga del historial de llamadas

a través de Bluetooth, SYNC mantendrá un registro de las

llamadas realizadas con el sistema SYNC.

Enviar mensajes de texto usando la pantalla táctil

Consulte la sección Mensajes de texto para obtener más

información.

Mensajes

Acceder a diversas configuraciones del teléfono, como

activar y desactivar Bluetooth y administrar la agenda.

Consulte la sección Configuración del teléfono para

obtener más información.

Configuración

390

MyFord Touch®

Mensajes de texto

Nota: La descarga y el envío de mensajes

de texto a través de Bluetooth son

características que dependen del teléfono.

Nota: Ciertas características en la

mensajería de texto dependen de la

velocidad y no se pueden realizar cuando el

vehículo viaja a más de 5 km/h (3 mph).

Nota: SYNC no descarga mensajes de texto

leídos desde su teléfono.

Puede enviar y recibir mensajes de texto a

través de Bluetooth, leerlos en voz alta y

traducir acrónimos de uso frecuente en

mensajería de texto, como “LOL”.

1. Toque la esquina superior izquierda de

la pantalla para acceder al menú

Teléfono.

2. Seleccione Mensajería.

3. Elija entre las selecciones siguientes:

• Escuchar

• Marcar

• Enviar texto

• Ver

• Borrar

Escribir un mensaje de texto

Nota: La descarga y el envío de mensajes

de texto a través de Bluetooth son

características que dependen del teléfono.

Nota: Ésta es una característica

dependiente de la velocidad y no puede

usarse si el vehículo viaja a más de 5 km/h

(3 mph).

1. Toque la esquina superior izquierda de

la pantalla para acceder al menú

Teléfono.

2. Seleccione Mensajes y después,

Enviar texto.

3. También puede seleccionar Editar

Texto y utilizar el teclado del sistema

para crear un mensaje de texto o

seleccionar entre las siguientes

opciones:

Opciones de mensajes de texto

Llámeme luego

¿Puede llamarme?

Acabo de salir, volveré pronto.

Le llamaré dentro de unos minutos

Le llamaré en cuanto llegue.

Voy adelantado, así que llegaré temprano.

Voy en camino.

Estoy afuera.

Voy con unos minutos de retraso.

LOL (Carcajada)

391

MyFord Touch®

Opciones de mensajes de texto

Estoy en un atasco

Gracias

Sí

Recibir un mensaje de texto

Nota: Si selecciona Ver y su vehículo viaja

a más de 5 km/h (3 mph), el sistema le

ofrecerá leer en voz alta el mensaje en lugar

de permitir que usted lo vea mientras

conduce.

Cuando llega un nuevo mensaje, se

escucha un tono y en la pantalla aparece

un mensaje emergente con el nombre e ID

de la persona que llama, si lo admite el

teléfono. Puede oprimir:

• Ver para ver el mensaje de texto.

• Escuchar para que SYNC lea los

mensajes en voz alta.

• Marcar para llamar al contacto.

• Ignorar para salir de la pantalla.

Configuración del teléfono

Oprima Teléfono, a continuación

Configuración o Menú, Configuración

y después Teléfono para seleccionar entre

las siguientes opciones:

PuedeCuando selecciona

Conectar, desconectar, agregar o quitar un dispositivo, así

como guardarlo como favorito.

Dispositivos Bluetooth

Activar o desactivar Bluetooth.Bluetooth activado/desac-

tivo

Hacer que todas las llamadas vayan directamente a su

buzón de voz y no suenen en la cabina del vehículo. Con

esta función activada, las notificaciones de mensaje de

texto también se silencian y no suenan dentro de la cabina.

No molestar

Activar o desactivar 911 Assist™. Ver Información (página

394).

911 Assist

Seleccionar lo que quiera oír al recibir una llamada.

Seleccione ya sea de los posibles tonos de timbre del

sistema, el tono de timbre de su teléfono actualmente

asociado, un pitido, texto de conversación o si desea que

la notificación sea silenciosa.

Timbre del teléfono

392

MyFord Touch®

PuedeCuando selecciona

Seleccionar cómo quiere ser notificado al recibir un

mensaje de texto, si su teléfono es compatible. Seleccione

entre los posibles tonos de alerta del sistema, texto de

conversación o silencio.

Aviso de mensaje de texto

Utilice esta pantalla para configurar su conexión de datos

de Internet. Seleccione para crear su perfil de conexión

con la red de área personal (PAN) o para desactivar su

conexión. También puede ajustar su configuración o hacer

que el sistema siempre esté conectado, que nunca se

conecte en roaming, o que pregunte antes de conectarse.

Oprima ? para obtener más información.

Conexión de datos de

Internet

Acceder a funciones como descarga automática de la

agenda, volver a descargar su agenda, agregar contactos

desde su teléfono y borrar o cargar su agenda.

Administrar agenda

Muestra el historial de llamadas.Historial de llamadas.

Si es compatible.

Comandos de voz del teléfono

E142599

Oprima el botón de voz en los

controles del volante de la

dirección. Cuando se le indique,

diga cualquiera de los siguientes

comandos:

"TELÉFONO"

"Desactivar llamada en espera"

"Desactivar Bluetooth"

"Activar llamada en espera"

"Bluetooth activado"

"Añadir llamadas"

"Llamar"

"Escuchar mensaje de texto""Llamar a <nombre>"

"Mensajes"

"Llamar a <nombre> a la casa"

"Silenciar llamada"

"Llamar a <nombre> al trabajo"

"Sincronizar teléfono""Llamar a <Nombre> al teléfono móvil"

"Activar privacidad"

"Llamar a <nombre> a otro"

393

MyFord Touch®

"TELÉFONO"

"Contestar mensaje de texto""Correo de voz"

"Desactivar timbre""Marcar"

"Activar timbre""Desactivar no molestar"

"Silenciar llamada""Activar no molestar"

"Ayuda""Reenviar mensaje de texto"

"Activar manos libres"

Estos comandos solo están disponibles durante una llamada activa.

Si dice, "Mensajes", consulte la siguiente tabla de "Mensajes" para conocer mensajes

adicionales.

"MENSAJES"

"Llamar"

"Reenviar mensaje de texto"

"Escuchar mensaje de texto <#>"

"Escuchar mensaje de texto"

"Contestar mensaje de texto"

"Ayuda"

INFORMACIÓN

En el menú Información, puede acceder a

características como Servicios SYNC®,

SIRIUS® Travel Link™ y Aplicaciones

SYNC o ver su calendario y notificaciones

del sistema.

Si su vehículo está equipado con sistema

de navegación, oprima el Información para

acceder a estas funciones. Si su vehículo

está equipado con sistema de navegación,

oprima la esquina de la pantalla táctil con

la pestaña verde.

Servicios SYNC (si está equipado,

EE.UU. solamente)

Nota: Los servicios SYNC deben activarse

antes de utilizarlos. Visite

www.SYNCMyRide.com para registrarse y

comprobar que está calificado para obtener

servicios complementarios. Pueden

aplicarse tarifas estándar de teléfono y

mensajes. Puede que deba suscribirse.

También debe tener el teléfono móvil con

tecnología Bluetooth y Servicios SYNC

activado, asociado y vinculado al sistema

para que pueda comunicarse y utilizar los

Servicios SYNC. Ver Teléfono (página 388).

394

MyFord Touch®

Nota: Esta función no opera

adecuadamente si ha activado el bloqueo

de la identificación de quien llama en su

teléfono móvil. Asegúrese de que el teléfono

móvil no esté bloqueando la identificación

de quien llama antes de utilizar los Servicios

SYNC.

Nota: El conductor es el responsable final

de utilizar en forma segura el vehículo y, por

lo tanto, debe evaluar si es seguro seguir las

indicaciones sugeridas. Cualquier función

de navegación se entrega sólo como ayuda.

Tome sus decisiones de manejo según sus

observaciones de las condiciones locales y

reglamentos de tráfico existentes. No siga

las sugerencias de la ruta si hacerlo pudiera

generar una maniobra no segura o ilegal, si

implicara quedar en una situación poco

segura o si fuera dirigido a un área que

considere no segura. Los mapas que este

sistema utiliza pueden ser imprecisos

debido a errores, cambios en los caminos,

condiciones de tráfico o condiciones de

manejo.

Nota: Cuando se conecta, el servicio utiliza

tecnología GPS y sensores avanzados del

vehículo para recopilar información sobre

la ubicación actual del vehículo, la dirección

del viaje y la velocidad para proporcionarle

las indicaciones, informes de tráfico o

ubicaciones de negocios que usted solicite.

Además, para brindarle los servicios

solicitados y para mejorar continuamente,

es posible que el servicio recopile y registre

detalles de llamadas y comunicaciones de

voz. Para obtener más información, consulte

los términos y condiciones del Servicio

SYNC en www.SYNCMyRide.com. Si no

desea que Ford o sus proveedores de

servicios recopilen la información de viaje

del vehículo u otra información indicada en

los Términos y condiciones, no active ni

utilice el servicio.

Los Servicios SYNC utilizan sensores

avanzados del vehículo, tecnología GPS

integrada y datos completos de mapas y

tránsito para proporcionarle informes de

tráfico, indicaciones precisas para llegar a

su destino, ubicaciones de negocios,

noticias, deportes, clima y más. Para

obtener una lista completa de los servicios

o para recibir más información, visite

www.SyncMyRide.com.

Conexión a Servicios SYNC mediante

comandos de voz

1. Presione el botón de voz.

2. Cuando se le indique, diga "Servicios".

Esto inicia una llamada a los Servicios

SYNC mediante el teléfono móvil con

tecnología Bluetooth asociado y

conectado.

3. Luego de conectarse al servicio, siga

los indicadores de voz para solicitar el

servicio deseado, como tráfico o

indicaciones. También puede decir

"¿Cuáles son mis opciones?" para

recibir una lista completa de los

servicios disponibles que puede elegir.

4. Diga "Servicios" para volver al menú

principal de los servicios; para solicitar

ayuda, diga "Ayuda".

Conexión a Servicios SYNC mediante

la pantalla táctil

Si su vehículo está equipado con sistema

de navegación, oprima el botón

Información.

Si su vehículo no está equipado con

sistema de navegación, oprima la pestaña

verde en la pantalla táctil.

1. Seleccione Conectarse a los

servicios para iniciar una llamada

saliente a los Servicios SYNC usando

su teléfono.

395

MyFord Touch®

2. Luego de conectarse, siga los

indicadores de voz para solicitar el

servicio deseado, como tráfico o

indicaciones. También puede decir

"¿Cuáles son mis opciones?" para

recibir una lista completa de los

servicios disponibles que puede elegir.

3. Diga "Servicios" para volver al menú

principal de los servicios; para solicitar

ayuda, diga "Ayuda".

Recepción de indicaciones de viaje

1. Al conectarse a los Servicios SYNC,

diga "Indicaciones" o "Ubicación de

negocios". Para encontrar el negocio o

tipo de negocio más cercano a su

ubicación actual, diga "Ubicación de

negocios" y después "Buscar cerca de

mí". Si necesita más ayuda para

encontrar un lugar, puede decir

"Operador" en cualquier momento

mientras se encuentra en Indicaciones

o Ubicación de negocios para hablar

con un operador en directo. También

es posible que se le solicite que hable

con un operador. El operador en directo

puede ayudarle a buscar negocios por

nombre o categoría, direcciones

residenciales por calle o por nombre o

por intersecciones de calles

específicas. Operator Assist es una

función de su suscripción a los

Servicios SYNC. Para obtener más

información sobre Operator Assist,

visite www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.

2. Siga las indicaciones de voz para

seleccionar su destino. Después de

terminar la descarga de la ruta, la

llamada telefónica finaliza

automáticamente.

Si su vehículo no está equipado con la

función de navegación:

• Las indicaciones de viaje aparecerán

en la pantalla de información y

entretenimiento, en la barra de estado

del sistema de pantalla táctil y también

en la pantalla de los Servicios SYNC.

También puede recibir instrucciones

de conducción mediante indicaciones

audibles.

• Mientras se encuentra en una ruta

activa, puede seleccionar Resumen

de ruta o Estado de la ruta usando

los controles de la pantalla táctil o los

comandos de voz para ver la Lista

resumida de instrucciones de ruta

o el Tiempo estimado de llegada del

estado de la ruta. También puede

activar o desactivar una guía de voz,

cancelar la ruta o actualizar la ruta.

Si se pasa del lugar donde debía virar,

SYNC le pregunta automáticamente si

desea actualizar la ruta. Cuando se le

pregunte, diga "sí" y se le entregará una

nueva ruta a su vehículo.

Si el vehículo está equipado con la función

de navegación, Servicios SYNC descarga

el destino solicitado al sistema de

navegación. A continuación, el sistema de

navegación calcula la ruta y le proporciona

las instrucciones de conducción. Ver

Navegación (página 408).

Desconexión de los Servicios SYNC

1. Mantenga presionado el botón de

finalizar llamada en el volante de la

dirección.

2. Diga "Adiós" desde el menú principal

de Servicios SYNC.

396

MyFord Touch®

Opciones de tráfico, indicaciones e información

Puede personalizar la función de servicios para obtener

un acceso más rápido a su información favorita o la que

usa con más frecuencia. Puede guardar direcciones como

el trabajo o la casa. También puede guardar su información

favorita como equipos deportivos, por ejemplo Detroit

Lions, o una categoría de noticias. Para obtener más

información, inicie sesión en www.SyncMyRide.com.

Personalización

Oprima el botón de voz en cualquier momento (mientras

está conectado a los Servicios SYNC TDI) para interrumpir

un indicador de voz o un clip de audio (como un informe

deportivo) y diga el comando de voz.

Presione para interrumpir

La suscripción está asociada con su número de teléfono

móvil con tecnología Bluetooth, no con su VIN (Número

de identificación del vehículo). Puede asociar y conectar

su teléfono a cualquier vehículo que cuente con Tráfico,

indicaciones e información y seguir disfrutando de sus

servicios personalizados.

Portátil

Comandos de voz de Servicios SYNC

E142599

Cuando se haya descargado una

ruta (en sistemas sin

navegación), oprima el botón de

voz en los controles del volante de la

dirección. Cuando se le indique, diga

cualquiera de los siguientes comandos:

"SERVICIOS"

"Cancelar ruta"

"Desactivar voz de navegación"

"Activar voz de navegación"

"Siguiente viraje"

"Hora estimada de llegada"

"Resumen de ruta"

397

MyFord Touch®

"SERVICIOS"

"Servicios"

"Actualizar ruta"

"Ayuda"

SIRIUS Travel Link (If Equipped)

ALERTA

Manejar mientras está distraído

puede tener como consecuencia la

pérdida de control del vehículo, un

accidente y lesiones. Ford le recomienda

enfáticamente que extreme las

precauciones cuando utilice cualquier

dispositivo o función que pudiera distraerlo

mientras conduce. Su responsabilidad

principal es manejar en forma segura el

vehículo. No se recomienda el uso de

ningún dispositivo portátil al conducir; se

sugiere el uso de sistemas operados por

voz cuando sea posible y que se informe

de las leyes estatales y locales aplicables

al uso de dispositivos electrónicos al

conducir.

Nota: Para usar SIRIUS Travel Link, su

vehículo debe estar equipado con un

sistema de navegación y su tarjeta SD de

navegación debe estar inserta en la ranura

para tarjeta SD.

Nota: Se requiere una suscripción pagada

para tener acceso a estas funciones y

usarlas. Visite www.siriusxm.com/travellink

para obtener más información.

Nota: Visite www.siriusxm.com/traffic# y

haga clic en Coverage map and details

(Mapa de cobertura y detalles) para obtener

una lista completa de todas las áreas de

tráfico que cubre SIRIUS Travel Link.

Nota: SIRIUS y Ford no son responsables

de ningún error o imprecisión en los servicios

de SIRIUS Travel Link o su uso en vehículos.

SIRIUS Travel Link (si está activado) puede

ayudarle a encontrar los mejores precios

de combustible, consultar horarios de

películas, obtener alertas de tráfico

actualizadas, acceder al mapa del clima

actual, obtener información precisa sobre

las condiciones para esquiar y resultados

de juegos deportivos.

Oprima el botón Información, seleccione

Sirius Travel Link y seleccione cualquiera

de los siguientes servicios:

PuedeCuando selecciona

Identificar incidentes de tráfico en la ruta, cerca de la

ubicación actual del vehículo o cerca de cualquiera de sus

lugares favoritos (si están programados).

Tráfico en la ruta

Tráfico cercano

Ver los precios del combustible en estaciones cercanas a

la ubicación de su vehículo o en una ruta de navegación

activa.

Precios de combustible

398

MyFord Touch®

PuedeCuando selecciona

Ver el clima de lugares cercanos, el clima actual o el

pronóstico para 5 días del área seleccionada. Seleccione

Mapa para ver el mapa de clima, que puede indicar

tormentas, información de radar, cuadros sinópticos y

vientos. Seleccione Área para seleccionar una opción en

una lista de ubicaciones climáticas.

Clima

Ver resultados y horarios de diversos deportes. También

puede guardar hasta 10 equipos favoritos para acceder

más fácilmente a la información. Los resultados se

actualizan automáticamente cuando hay un juego en

desarrollo.

Información deportiva

Ver los cines cercanos y los horarios de las funciones (si

está disponible).

Cartelera de cine

Ver las condiciones para esquiar de un área específica.Condiciones para esquiar

Comandos de voz de SIRIUS Travel

Link

E142599

Oprima el botón de voz en los

controles del volante de la

dirección. Cuando se le indique,

diga cualquiera de los siguientes

comandos:

"SIRIUS TRAVEL LINK"

"Pronóstico del clima"

"Precios de la gasolina"

"Cartelera de cine"

"Noticias deportivas"

"Calendario deportivo"

"Resultados deportivos"

"Tráfico"

"Clima"

399

MyFord Touch®

"SIRIUS TRAVEL LINK"

"Mapa del clima"

"Ayuda"

Si dice "Noticias deportivas", "Calendario deportivo" o "Resultados deportivos", puede

decir cualquiera de los comandos del cuadro siguiente.

Comandos relacionados con los deportes

"Béisbol"

"Basquetbol colegial"

"Futbol americano colegial"

"Golf"

"MLS"

"Mis equipos"

"NBA"

"NFL"

"Hockey"

"Basquetbol femenil"

"Ayuda"

Si desea escuchar las notificas, el calendario o los resultados de un deporte en

particular, o de sus equipos favoritos, diga el deporte (o equipo) y luego, "noticias",

"calendarios" o "resultados".

Comandos de voz adicionales relacionados con los deportes

"Resultados de la NBA""Noticias de la MLS""Noticias del béisbol"

"Noticias de la NFL""Calendario de la MLS""Calendario del béisbol"

"Calendario de la NFL""Resultados de la MLS""Resultados del béisbol"

"Resultados de la NFL""Noticias del automovi-

lismo"

"Calendario del basquetbol

colegial"

400

MyFord Touch®

Comandos de voz adicionales relacionados con los deportes

"Noticias de la NHL""Resultados del automovi-

lismo"

"Resultados del basquetbol

colegial"

"Calendario de la NHL""Calendario del automovi-

lismo"

"Noticias del futbol ameri-

cano colegial"

"Resultados de la NHL""Noticias de mis equipos""Calendario del futbol cole-

gial"

"Noticias de la WNBA""Calendario de mis equipos""Resultados del futbol cole-

gial"

"Calendario de la WNBA""Resultados de mis

equipos"

"Noticias del golf"

"Resultados de la WNBA""Noticias de la NBA""Posiciones del golf"

"Ayuda""Calendario de la NBA""Calendario de golf"

Notificaciones

Oprima el botón de información y

seleccione Notificaciones.

Puede seleccionar un mensaje y luego

elegir:

• Ver el mensaje completo

• Borrar el mensaje

• Borrar todos los mensajes

Esta pantalla muestra los mensajes del

sistema (por ejemplo, Error en la tarjeta

SD).

Nota: El sistema le avisará que tiene

mensajes encendiendo el icono de

información en amarillo. Una vez que lea o

borre sus mensajes, el icono volverá a

ponerse blanco.

Calendario

Oprima el botón de información y

seleccione Calendario.

911 Assist® (If Equipped)

AVISOS

A menos que la configuración de 911

Assist se ajuste antes de un

accidente, el sistema no marcará

para solicitar ayuda lo cual podría retrasar

el tiempo de respuesta, aumentando

potencialmente el riesgo de causar serias

heridas o la muerte después de un

accidente.

No espere a que 911 Assist realice

una llamada de emergencia si puede

hacerla usted mismo. Marque los

servicios de emergencia inmediatamente

para evitar retrasos en el tiempo de

respuesta lo cual podría aumentar el riesgo

de causar serias heridas o la muerte

después de un accidente. Si no oye al 911

Assist después de cinco segundos del

accidente, es posible que el sistema esté

dañado o no esté funcionando.

401

MyFord Touch®

AVISOS

Siempre coloque su teléfono en un

lugar seguro en el vehículo de

manera que no se convierta en un

proyectil o se dañe en un choque. Si no lo

hace, puede causarle serias heridas a

alguien o dañar el teléfono lo cual podría

impedir el funcionamiento adecuado de

911 Assist.

Nota: La función SYNC 911 Assist debe

ajustarse antes del incidente.

Nota: Antes de activar esta función,

asegúrese de leer el aviso de privacidad de

911 Assist al final de esta sección para

acceder a información importante.

Nota: Si un usuario activa o desactiva 911

Assist, esa configuración se aplica para

todos los teléfonos asociados. Si 911 Assist

está desactivado, se reproducirá un mensaje

de voz o aparecerá un mensaje o icono (o

ambos) si se arranca un vehículo después

de que conecte un teléfono previamente

asociado.

Nota: Cada teléfono funciona de manera

diferente. Aunque SYNC 911 Assist funciona

con la mayoría de los teléfonos móviles,

algunos pueden presentar problemas al usar

esta función.

Si un accidente despliega una bolsa de aire

o activa el corte de la bomba de

combustible, es posible que el vehículo

equipado con SYNC se conecte con los

servicios de emergencia marcando el 911

a través de un teléfono asociado y

conectado con acceso a Bluetooth. Para

obtener más información sobre 911 Assist,

visite www.SYNCMyRide.com o

www.syncmaroute.ca.

Ver Sistema de Seguridad

Complementaria (página 38). Este

capítulo contiene información importante

con respecto al despliegue de la bolsa de

aire.

Ver Emergencias en el Camino (página

216). Este capítulo contiene información

importante con respecto al corte de la

bomba de combustible.

Activación de 911 Assist

Oprima el botón de información,

Aplicaciones, 911 Assist y seleccione

Activar.

También puede acceder a 911 Assist de la

siguiente manera:

• Al oprimir el icono de Menú,

Configuración, Teléfono y 911 Assist

• Al oprimir el icono de Menú, Ayuda y

911 Assist

Para asegurarse que 911 Assist funcione

adecuadamente:

• SYNC debe contar con energía y

funcionar adecuadamente al momento

del incidente y durante la activación y

uso de la función.

• La función 911 Assist debe ajustarse

antes del incidente.

• Un teléfono compatible y con

tecnología Bluetooth debe estar

asociado y conectado a SYNC.

• Un teléfono compatible con tecnología

Bluetooth conectado debe poder

realizar y mantener una llamada al

momento del incidente.

• Un teléfono con tecnología Bluetooth

conectado debe tener cobertura de red

adecuada, energía de la batería e

intensidad de la señal.

• El vehículo debe tener energía de la

batería y estar ubicado en Estados

Unidos, Canadá o en un territorio donde

el 911 sea el número de emergencia.

402

MyFord Touch®

En caso de un accidente

No todos los accidentes despliegan una

bolsa de aire o activan el corte de la

bomba de combustible (lo que activaría

la función 911 Assist); sin embargo, si se

activa 911 Assist, SYNC intentará

comunicarse con los servicios de

emergencia. Si un teléfono conectado está

dañado o pierde la conexión con SYNC,

SYNC buscará e intentará conectarse a

cualquier teléfono disponible previamente

asociado y tratará de realizar la llamada

al 911.

Antes de hacer la llamada:

• SYNC proporciona un breve período de

tiempo (aproximadamente 10

segundos) para cancelar la llamada.

Si no se cancela, SYNC tratará de

marcar el 911.

• SYNC proporciona el siguiente mensaje

o uno similar: "SYNC tratará de llamar

al 911, para cancelar la llamada

presione Cancelar en su pantalla o

mantenga presionado el botón de

teléfono en el volante de la dirección".

Si la llamada no se cancela y se realiza de

manera satisfactoria, se reproducirá un

mensaje pregrabado para el operador del

911, luego el o los ocupantes del vehículo

podrán hablar con el operador. Esté

preparado para indicar su nombre, número

de teléfono y ubicación inmediatamente,

ya que no todos los sistemas del 911 son

capaces de recibir esta información de

manera electrónica.

Es posible que 911 Assist no funcione

• El hardware del teléfono móvil o de 911

Assist se dañó en el accidente.

• La batería del vehículo o el sistema

SYNC no tienen energía.

• El o los teléfonos asociados y

conectados al sistema salieron

expulsados del vehículo.

Aviso de privacidad de 911 Assist

Una vez que se activa 911 Assist, es posible

que éste se comunique con los servicios

de emergencia indicando el choque del

vehículo y el despliegue de una bolsa de

aire o la activación del corte de la bomba

de combustible. Es posible que ciertas

versiones de 911 Assist también puedan

comunicar de manera verbal o electrónica

a los operadores del 911 la ubicación del

vehículo u otros detalles sobre el mismo o

sobre el choque, para ayudarlos a

proporcionar los servicios de emergencia

más adecuados. Si no desea transmitir

esta información, no active la función.

Informe de mantenimiento del

vehículo (If Equipped)

ALERTA

Siempre siga las instrucciones de

mantenimiento programadas,

inspeccione su vehículo de manera

regular y solicite la reparación de cualquier

daño o problema que sospeche. El Informe

de mantenimiento del vehículo

complementa pero no puede reemplazar

el mantenimiento normal ni la inspección

del vehículo. El Informe de mantenimiento

del vehículo solo monitorea ciertos

sistemas que el vehículo supervisa

electrónicamente y no controlará ni

informará el estado de ningún otro sistema

(por ejemplo, el desgaste de las balatas).

Si no realiza el mantenimiento programado

y no inspecciona regularmente su vehículo,

podría provocar daños en el vehículo o

sufrir lesiones graves.

Nota: Esta característica está disponible

solamente en Estados Unidos.

403

MyFord Touch®

Nota: Para usar la función de Informe de

mantenimiento del vehículo, primero debe

activarla. Visite www.SYNCMyRide.com

para registrarse. No hay cobros ni

suscripciones asociados con el Informe de

mantenimiento del vehículo, pero debe

registrarse para utilizar esta función.

Nota: Es posible que esta función no opere

adecuadamente si ha activado el bloqueo

de la identificación de quien llama en su

teléfono móvil. Antes de ejecutar un

informe, lea el aviso de privacidad sobre el

Informe de mantenimiento del vehículo.

Nota: Para permitir un período de ajuste

para el vehículo, es posible que no pueda

crear un Informe de mantenimiento del

vehículo hasta que el odómetro del vehículo

haya alcanzado 200 millas.

Nota: Puede que se apliquen cargos de

teléfono móvil y SMS al ejecutar un informe.

Regístrese para ver el Informe de

mantenimiento del vehículo y para ajustar

las preferencias del informe en

www.SYNCMyRide.com. Después de

registrarse, podrá solicitar un Informe de

mantenimiento del vehículo (dentro de su

vehículo). Vuelva a su cuenta en

www.SYNCMyRide.com para ver el

informe. También tiene la opción de que

SYNC le recuerde de manera automática

ejecutar informes en intervalos de

kilometraje específicos. Puede que se

apliquen cargos por uso del tiempo de

llamada del teléfono móvil al ejecutar

informes.

El sistema le permite comprobar el

mantenimiento general del vehículo a

través de una tarjeta de informe de

diagnóstico. El Informe de mantenimiento

del vehículo contiene información valiosa,

como por ejemplo:

• Información de diagnóstico del

vehículo

• Mantenimiento programado

• Llamados a revisión abiertos y acciones

de servicio en terreno

• Elementos que no han sido revisados

en inspecciones del vehículo del

distribuidor autorizado

Obtención de un informe

Para ejecutar un informe mediante la

pantalla táctil, toque el botón Información,

Aplicaciones y luego, Informe de

mantenimiento del vehículo.

E142599

Para ejecutar un informe

mediante comandos de voz,

oprima el botón de voz en el

volante de la dirección y cuando se le

indique, diga "Reporte de condición

vehicular".

Aviso de privacidad sobre el Informe

de mantenimiento del vehículo

Cuando ejecute un Informe de

mantenimiento del vehículo, es posible

que Ford Motor Company recopile su

número de teléfono móvil (para procesar

la solicitud del informe) e información de

diagnóstico de su vehículo. Algunas

versiones o actualizaciones del Informe de

mantenimiento del vehículo pueden

también recopilar información adicional

sobre el vehículo. Ford puede utilizar la

información que recopile del vehículo para

cualquier propósito. Si no desea dar a

conocer su número de teléfono móvil o la

información de su vehículo, no ejecute la

función y no configure el perfil del Informe

de mantenimiento del vehículo en

www.SYNCMyRide.com. Para obtener más

información, consulte

www.SYNCMyRide.com (Términos y

condiciones del Informe de mantenimiento

del vehículo y declaración de privacidad).

404

MyFord Touch®

CLIMATIZACIÓN

E142612

Oprima la esquina inferior derecha de la

pantalla táctil para acceder a las

características del control de temperatura.

Dependiendo de la línea de su vehículo y

del paquete de opciones, la pantalla de

temperatura puede verse diferente a la

que se muestra aquí.

E146988

Encendido: toque para encender o apagar el sistema. Cuando el sistema está

desactivado no puede ingresar aire exterior al vehículo.

Configuraciones del pasajero: Toque + o – ajuste la temperatura.B

Velocidad del ventilador: Toque + o - ajuste la velocidad del ventilador.C

DOBLE: Toque para encender el control de temperatura del lado del pasajero.D

Aire recirculado: toque para encender o apagar el aire recirculado que tal vez

disminuya el tiempo requerido para enfriar el interior y ayudar a reducir los

olores. El aire recirculado también es automático cuando se selecciona MAX

A/C o MAX desempañamiento y puede utilizarse manualmente en cualquier

modo de flujo de aire excepto desempañamiento. También puede apagarse

en todos los modos de flujo de aire excepto en MAX A/C y MAX

desempañamiento para disminuir el potencial de niebla.

MAX A/C: toque para enfriar el vehículo con aire recirculado. Toque

nuevamente para regresar a la operación normal del A/A. MAX A/C distribuye

aire recirculado a través de los respiraderos del tablero de instrumentos y ayuda

a reducir el ingreso de malos olores al vehículo. MAX A/C es más económico y

eficiente que el modo de A/A normal.

405

MyFord Touch®

A/A: toque para activar y desactivar el aire acondicionado. Utilice el A/C con

aire recirculado para mejorar el desempeño y la eficacia de enfriamiento. El

A/C es automático en MAX A/C, desempañamiento y para los

pies/desempañamiento.

AUTO: toque para activar el funcionamiento automático, luego ajuste la

temperatura utilizando el control de temperatura. El sistema controla

automáticamente la velocidad del ventilador, la distribución del flujo de aire,

el encendido o apagado del A/C y el uso de aire fresco o recirculado.

Controles de distribución del flujo de aire manual:Para los

pies/desempañamiento: distribuye el aire mediante las ventilas de

descongelamiento del parabrisas, las ventilas del desempañador, las ventilas

del piso y las ventilas del piso del asiento trasero, y proporciona aire exterior

para disminuir el empañamiento de las ventanas. Tablero: distribuye aire a

través de las ventilas del tablero de instrumentos. Tablero/Piso: distribuye

aire por las ventilas del tablero de instrumentos, el desempañador, el piso, y el

piso de los asientos traseros. Piso: distribuye aire por las ventilas del

desempañador, el piso y el piso de los asientos traseros. Desempañador:

toque para eliminar el empañamiento y escarcha del parabrisas. Toque

nuevamente para volver a la selección de flujo de aire anterior. Cuando esté

encendido, el desempañamiento proporciona aire exterior para disminuir el

empañamiento de las ventanas y distribuye aire mediante las ventilas de

descongelamiento del parabrisas y las ventilas del desempañador. MAX

descongelamiento: distribuye el aire exterior mediante las ventilas de aire del

parabrisas. El aire acondicionado se selecciona de manera automática. El

ventilador se fija en la velocidad más alta y la temperatura en HI (alto). Cuando

la distribución del aire se fija en esta posición, no podrá seleccionar aire

recirculado ni ajustar manualmente la velocidad del ventilador y el control de

temperatura.

Ajustes del conductor: Toque + o – ajuste la temperatura.J

Comandos de voz de control de

aire acondicionado y calefacción

E142599

Oprima el botón de voz en los

controles del volante de la

dirección. Cuando se le indique,

diga cualquiera de los siguientes

comandos:

Comandos de control de aire acondicionado y calefacción

"Activar Control Automático"

"Activar Mi Temperatura Favorita"

"Apagar Control de Temperatura"

406

MyFord Touch®

Comandos de control de aire acondicionado y calefacción

"Encender Control de Temperatura"

"Control de Temperatura Fijar Temperatura a <15.5-29.5> grados"

"Control de Temperatura Fijar Temperatura a <60-85> grados"

"Ayuda"

Existen otros comandos de control del aire

acondicionado y la calefacción, pero para

acceder a ellos, primero tiene que decir

"Climatización". Cuando el sistema esté

listo para escuchar, puede decir cualquiera

de los comandos siguientes:

"CLIMATIZACIÓN"

"Activar Tablero""Apagar Aire Acondicionado"

"Activar Desempañador Trasero""Encender Aire Acondicionado"

"Desactivar desempañador trasero""Activar Control Automático"

"Desactivar Circulación de Aire""Desactivar Desempañador Delantero"

"Activar Circulación de Aire""Activar Desempañador Delantero"

"Temperatura"

"Desactivar Control en Dos Zonas"

"Temperatura <15.5-29.5> grados""Activar Piso"

"Temperatura <60-85> grados""Disminuir Velocidad del Ventilador"

"Disminuir Temperatura""Incrementar Velocidad del Ventilador"

"Activar Temperatura Máxima""Apagar Aire Acondicionado Al Máximo"

"Incrementar Temperatura""Encender Aire Acondicionado Al Máximo"

"Activar Temperatura Mínima""Activar Mi Temperatura Favorita"

"Activar Desempañador y Piso""Apagar"

"Ayuda""Encender"

"Activar Tablero y Piso"

Si dice "Temperatura", puede decir cualquiera de los comandos del cuadro siguiente.

407

MyFord Touch®

"TEMPERATURA"

"<15.5-29.5> grados"

"<60-85> grados"

"Máxima"

"Mínima"

"Ayuda"

NAVEGACIÓN

Nota: La tarjeta SD de navegación debe

estar en la ranura de tarjetas SD para que

el sistema de navegación funcione. Si

necesita una tarjeta SD de reemplazo,

consulte a su distribuidor autorizado.

Nota: La ranura para tarjeta SD cuenta con

un resorte. Para extraer la tarjeta SD,

simplemente empuje la tarjeta y suéltela.

No intente jalar la tarjeta para extraerla,

pues eso podría dañarla.

Su sistema de navegación consta de dos

funciones principales: modo de destino y

modo de mapa.

Para configurar un destino, oprima la

esquina verde derecha de la pantalla táctil

y después el botón Dest, cuando aparezca.

Consulte Configuración de un destino

posteriormente en este capítulo.

Para ver el mapa de navegación y la

localización actual del vehículo, toque la

barra verde de la esquina superior derecha

de la pantalla táctil u oprima Dest, luego

Mapa. Consulte Modo de mapa más

adelante en este capítulo.

Configuración de un destino

Oprima la esquina verde derecha de la

pantalla táctil y después el botón Dest,

cuando aparezca. Seleccione cualquiera

de las siguientes opciones:

Destino

Calle y númeroMi casa

IntersecciónFavoritos

Centro de la ciudadDestinos anteriores

MapaPunto de interés (POI)

Punto de inicio anteriorEmergencia

Latitud/longitudEntrada/Salida de autopista

408

MyFord Touch®

1. Ingrese la información necesaria en los

campos de texto resaltados (en

cualquier orden). En el caso del ingreso

de una dirección de destino, aparece

el botón Ir una vez que ingresa toda la

información necesaria. Oprimir el botón

Ir hace que la dirección aparezca en el

mapa. Si selecciona Destino anterior,

aparecen los últimos 20 destinos que

ha seleccionado.

2. Seleccione Configurar como Dest para

que éste sea su destino. También

puede optar por definirlo como etapa

(para que el sistema le dirija hacia ese

punto en su camino hacia el destino

final) o guardarlo como favorito. En el

cálculo de la ruta también se

consideran las Áreas por evitar que

haya seleccionado.

3. Seleccione entre hasta tres tipos

distintos de rutas y después seleccione

Iniciar ruta.

• Más rápida: utiliza los caminos más

rápidos posibles.

• Más corta: utiliza la distancia más corta

posible.

• Más económica (Eco-Ruta): utiliza la

ruta que consume menos combustible.

También puede cancelar la ruta o hacer

que el sistema le haga una demostración

de la misma. Seleccione Preferencias de

ruta para configurar sus preferencias de

ruta, como evitar carreteras secundarias,

autopistas de peaje, transbordadores y

trenes para transporte de automóviles, así

como para utilizar o no utilizar los carriles

de alta ocupación vehicular (AOV). (Los

carriles AOV también se conocen como

carriles diamante o de viaje compartido.

Estos carriles están reservados para

personas que viajan en autobuses,

minibuses o automóviles de viaje

compartido).

Nota: Si no oprime el botón Iniciar ruta y

conduce el vehículo por un camino

reconocido, el sistema utiliza de manera

predeterminada la opción de ruta más

rápida y comienza con a guiar el viaje.

Durante la guía de la ruta, puede oprimir

el icono de "burbuja de conversación" que

aparece en la esquina superior derecha de

la navegación (barra verde) si desea que

el sistema repita una instrucción. Las

instrucciones disminuyen cada vez que

oprime el icono.

Categorías de punto de interés

(POI)

Su sistema le ofrece una variedad de

categorías de POI (puntos de interés).

Categorías principales

AutomovilísticoAlimentos / bebidas y cena

ComprasViaje y transporte

Entretenimiento y arteFinanzas

Recreación y deportesEmergencia

GobiernoComunidad

Servicios domésticosSalud y medicina

409

MyFord Touch®

Subcategorías

Restaurante

Golf

Estacionamiento

Casa y jardín

Servicios de cuidado personal

Negocio de venta de automóviles

Gobierno

Transporte público

Educación

Para expandir estas listas, oprima el signo

"+" frente a la lista de puntos de interés.

El sistema también le permite clasificar los

puntos de interés alfabéticamente, por

distancia o por listas cityseekr (si está

disponible).

cityseekr

Nota: La información de puntos de interés

de cityseekr se limita aproximadamente a

unas 154 ciudades (132 de Estados Unidos,

13 de Canadá y 9 de México).

E142634

cityseekr, si está disponible, es un servicio

que proporciona información adicional

sobre ciertos puntos de interés, como

restaurantes, hoteles y atracciones

turísticas.

Una vez que seleccione un punto de

interés, aparecerá su localización, e

información como dirección y número de

teléfono. Si el punto de interés aparece en

la lista de cityseekr, también verá

información como una breve descripción,

horas de llegada/salida del hotel, horario

del restaurante, etc.

Oprima Más información si desea ver más

datos, una lista de servicios e instalaciones,

precio promedio de una habitación o

comida, así como el sitio web. Esta

pantalla muestra el icono del punto de

interés, como:

E143884

Hotel

E142636

Cafetería

E142637

Alimentos y bebidas

410

MyFord Touch®

E142638

Vida nocturna

E142639

Atracción turística

E142640

Este icono aparece cuando su

selección existe en varias

categorías dentro del sistema.

Cuando esté viendo información adicional

sobre hoteles, cityseekr también le dirá,

mediante iconos, si el hotel cuenta con

ciertos servicios e instalaciones.

En caso de restaurantes, cityseekr puede

proporcionar información como número

de tenedores, costo promedio, críticas,

acceso para minusválidos, horarios de

operación y dirección del sitio web.

En caso de hoteles, cityseekr puede

proporcionar información como número

de estrellas, categoría de precio, críticas,

horas de llegada/salida, iconos de servicios

del hotel y dirección del sitio web.

Configuración de sus preferencias

de navegación

Seleccione la configuración que el sistema

debe tomar en cuenta al planificar su ruta.

E142607

Oprima el icono en la parte

inferior de la pantalla de inicio y

seleccione Configuración, luego

Navegación.

PuedeCuando selecciona

· Activar y desactivar el trazo del camino recorrido.Preferencias de mapa

· Seleccionar cómo desea ver la lista de virajes (de arriba

a abajo o viceversa).

· Ajustar la notificación automática de estacionamiento

de POI. (Si la notificación de estacionamiento del punto

de interés está activa, aparecerán iconos de estaciona-

miento del punto de interés en el mapa cuando usted se

aproxime a su destino. La utilidad de esta función puede

ser menor en áreas muy densamente pobladas, y puede

obstruir el mapa si otros puntos de interés aparecen al

mismo tiempo en el mapa).

· Evitar autopistas, autopistas de peaje, transbordadores

y trenes para transporte de automóviles al planear su ruta.

Preferencias de ruta

· Usar los carriles de AOV (si están disponibles), y hacer

que el sistema seleccione siempre la distancia más corta,

la vía más rápida o la trayectoria que requiera menos

combustible.

· Escoger si sus indicaciones de navegación serán solo de

voz o de tonos.

Preferencias de navegación

411

MyFord Touch®

PuedeCuando selecciona

· Hacer que el sistema llene automáticamente los datos

de estado y/o provincia con base en la información

previamente ingresada al sistema.

Seleccione cómo desea que el sistema maneje los

problemas de tránsito a lo largo de la ruta.

Preferencias de tránsito

· Automático: el sistema cambia automáticamente el

itinerario con el fin de evitar los incidentes de tráfico que

surjan en la ruta actual y la afecten (no hay notificación).

· Manual: el sistema proporciona siempre una notificación

de los incidentes de tráfico que surgen en la ruta planifi-

cada. Usted tendrá que decidir si acepta o ignora la notifi-

cación antes que se modifique la ruta.

Selecciona áreas que desea que el sistema evite al calcular

una ruta. Presione Agregar para seleccionar una categoría

diferente.

Áreas por evitar

Una vez que seleccione una opción, el sistema tratará de

evitar las áreas, de ser posible, al calcular todas las rutas.

Para borrar una selección, escoja la lista en la pantalla, y

cuando la pantalla cambie a Editar áreas por evitar,

oprima el botón Borrar en la parte inferior derecha de la

pantalla.

Modo de mapa

Oprima la barra verde en la parte superior

derecha de la pantalla táctil para ver el

modo de mapa. El modo de mapa muestra

una visualización avanzada, que incluye

mapas bidimensionales de ciudades y

referencias visuales tridimensionales

(cuando las haya).

Los mapas bidimensionales de ciudades

muestran los contornos detallados de

edificios, elementos geográficos y de uso

del suelo visibles, y la infraestructura de

ferrocarriles detallada de las ciudades más

importantes del mundo. Estos mapas

también contienen detalles, como

manzanas, plantas de grandes edificios y

ferrocarriles.

Las referencias visuales tridimensionales

aparecen como objetos claramente

visibles, fácilmente reconocibles y con

cierto valor turístico. Las referencias

visuales tridimensionales aparecen

solamente en el modo de mapa

tridimensional.

412

MyFord Touch®

E142641

Cambie la apariencia de la pantalla de

mapa oprimiendo varias veces el botón de

flecha del lado superior izquierdo de la

pantalla. Alterna entre tres modos de

mapa: Rumbo arriba, Norte arriba y 3D.

E142642

Rumbo arriba (mapa 2D)

muestra siempre la dirección hacia

donde viaja arriba en la pantalla.

Esta vista se encuentra disponible

para mapas en escalas de hasta 4 km

(2.5 mi). Para escalas de mapas

superiores, la configuración se recuerda

pero el mapa solo aparece en Norte arriba.

Si la escala vuelve más abajo de este nivel,

entonces se restablece la configuración

Rumbo arriba.

E142643

Norte arriba (mapa 2D) muestra

siempre la dirección hacia el norte

arriba en la pantalla.

E142644

Modo de mapa tridimensional

permite ver el mapa en

perspectiva tridimensional. Es

posible configurar el ángulo de

visualización y hacer girar el mapa 180

grados arrastrando el dedo a lo largo de la

barra sombreada con flechas que aparece

en la parte inferior del mapa.

E146188

Volver a centrar el mapa es

una acción que puede realizar

oprimiendo el icono cada vez

que mueva el mapa a una posición lejos

de la ubicación actual del vehículo.

Iconos del mapa

E142646

Marca de vehículo muestra la

ubicación actual del vehículo.

Permanece en el centro de la

pantalla del mapa, excepto

cuando está en el modo de

desplazamiento.

E142647

Cursor de desplazamiento le

permite desplazarse por el mapa;

este icono está fijo en el centro de

la pantalla. La posición del mapa

más cercana al cursor es en una ventana

en la parte central superior de la pantalla.

E142648

Icono predeterminado de

entrada de la libreta de

direcciones indica la ubicación en

el mapa de una entrada en la

libreta de direcciones. Éste es el símbolo

predeterminado que aparece después de

que la entrada se ha almacenado en la

Libreta de direcciones mediante cualquier

método distinto al mapa. Se puede

seleccionar un icono diferente entre los 22

disponibles; cada icono se puede usar más

de una vez.

E142649

Inicio indica la ubicación en el

mapa actualmente almacenada

como la posición inicial. Solo se

puede guardar como Inicial una

entrada de la Libreta de direcciones. Este

icono no se puede cambiar.

E142650

Iconos de punto de interés,

pueden aparecer en el mapa y se

pueden activar o desactivar.

Existen unas 56 subcategorías de

puntos de interés que se pueden

seleccionar para que aparezcan en el

mapa, una a la vez.

E142651

Punto de partida indica el punto

de partida de una ruta de

navegación planificada.

413

MyFord Touch®

E142652

Etapas indica la ubicación de una

etapa en el mapa. El número

dentro del círculo es diferente para

cada etapa y representa la

posición de la etapa en la lista de rutas.

E142653

Símbolo de destino indica el

punto final de una ruta planificada.

E142654

Punto de siguiente maniobra

indica la ubicación del siguiente

viraje en la ruta planificada.

E142655

Símbolo Sin GPS indica que no

hay suficientes señales satelitales

GPS disponibles para un

posicionamiento preciso en el

mapa. Este icono podría aparecer en forma

intermitente bajo funcionamiento normal

en un área con mal acceso a GPS.

Botones de toque rápido

Estando en el modo de mapa, toque

cualquier parte de la pantalla del mapa

para acceder a las siguientes opciones:

PuedeCuando selecciona

Seleccione una ubicación desplazada en el mapa para

que sea su destino. (Puede desplazar el mapa presionando

el dedo índice en la pantalla). Cuando vea al lugar

deseado, simplemente retire el dedo de la pantalla y

oprima Configurar como Dest).

Configurar como Dest

Defina la ubicación actual como etapa.Configurar como etapa

Guardar la localidad actual entre sus favoritos.Guardar en Favoritos

Seleccionar los iconos de POI que quiere que aparezcan

en el mapa. Se pueden seleccionar hasta tres iconos para

mostrar en el mapa a la vez.

Activar o desactivar iconos

de POI

Cancelar la ruta activa.Cancelar ruta

Acceder a estas características cuando hay una ruta activa:Ver/editar ruta

· Ver ruta

· Editar destino/etapa

· Editar listado de instrucciones

· Desvío

· Editar preferencias de ruta

· Editar preferencias de tráfico

· Cancelar ruta

414

MyFord Touch®

E142656

Gire la vista del mapa desplazando el dedo

por la barra sombreada con flechas.

Navteq es el proveedor de mapas digitales

para la aplicación del sistema de

navegación. Si encuentra errores en los

datos de los mapas, puede reportarlos

directamente en

http://mapreporter.navteq.com. Navteq

evalúa todos los errores de mapas

reportados y responderá vía correo

electrónico el resultado de su

investigación.

Actualizaciones del mapa de

navegación

Las actualizaciones anuales del mapa de

navegación están disponibles para su

compra a través de su distribuidor,

llamando al 1-800-NAVMAPS (en México,

llame al 01-800-557-5539) o visitando

www.navigation.com/ford. Debe

especificar la marca y el modelo de su

vehículo para determinar si hay alguna

actualización disponible.

Comandos de voz de navegación

E142599

Cuando esté en el modo de

navegación, oprima el botón de

voz en los controles del volante

de la dirección. Después del tono, diga

cualquiera de los siguientes comandos:

Comandos de voz del sistema de navegación

"Navegación"

"Cancelar siguiente etapa"

"Repetir instrucción"

"Cancelar ruta"

"Mostrar 3D"

"Destino"

"Mostrar hacia arriba""Destino: <etiqueta>"

"Mostrar mapa""Destino <categoría de punto de interés>"

"Mostrar alineación norte""Destino favoritos"

"Mostrar ruta"

"Destino casa"

"Mostrar lista de giros"

"Destino intersección"

"Desactivar instrucciones por voz""Destino <categoría punto de interés> más

cercano"

"Activar instrucciones por voz""Punto de interés más cercano"

415

MyFord Touch®

Comandos de voz del sistema de navegación

"Disminuir volumen de instrucciones por

voz"

"Destino escuchar etiquetas"

"Incrementar volumen de instrucciones por

voz"

"Destino Punto de interés"

"¿Dónde estoy?""Destino categoría de punto de interés"

"Zoom para acercar""Destino Destino previo"

"Zoom para alejar""Destino calle y número"

"Ayuda""Desvío"

Estos comandos solo están disponibles cuando hay una ruta de navegación activa.

Si dice "Destino", puede decir cualquiera de los comandos del siguiente cuadro "Destino".

Si dice "Navegación", puede decir cualquiera de los comandos del siguiente cuadro

"Navegación".

"DESTINO"

"<etiqueta>"

"<Categoría de punto de interés>"

"Favoritos"

"Casa"

"Intersección"

"<Categoría punto de interés> más cercano"

"Punto de interés más cercano"

"Escuchar etiquetas"

"Categoría de punto de interés"

"Destino previo"

"Calle y número"

"Ayuda"

416

MyFord Touch®

"NAVEGACIÓN"

"Destino"

"Zoom nivel ciudad"

"Zoom nivel país"

"Zoom para acercar al mínimo"

"Zoom para alejar al máximo"

"N/A"

"Zoom nivel estado"

"Zoom nivel calle"

"Zoom a <distancia>"

"Ayuda"

Si dice "Destino", puede decir cualquiera de los comandos del cuadro "Destino".

Si su vehículo está equipado con la función

de tarjeta SD de navegación, podrá

localizar un destino de calle y número

utilizando una función llamada Destino

calle y número en un intento. Cuando

dice "Navegación, Destino calle y número"

o "Destino calle y número", el sistema le

pide que diga la dirección completa. El

sistema mostrará un ejemplo en la

pantalla. Entonces puede decir la dirección

de modo natural, como "Uno dos tres

cuatro, Calle principal, Cualquier ciudad".

417

MyFord Touch®

ACUERDO DE LICENCIA DEL

USUARIO

Acuerdo de licencia de usuario

final (EULA) de SYNC®

• Usted ha adquirido un dispositivo

(“DISPOSITIVO”) que incluye software

licenciado por FORD MOTOR

COMPANY de un afiliado de Microsoft

Corporation (“MS”). Estos productos

de software instalados de MS, así

como los medios asociados, materiales

impresos y documentación electrónica

o “en línea” (“SOFTWARE MS”) están

protegidos por leyes de propiedad

intelectual y tratados internacionales.

El SOFTWARE MS se otorga bajo

licencia, no es objeto de venta. Todos

• El SOFTWARE MS puede interactuar

con y/o comunicarse con, o puede

actualizarse posteriormente para

interactuar con y/o comunicarse con

sistemas y/o programas de software

adicionales proporcionados por FORD

MOTOR COMPANY. Los sistemas y

programas de software adicionales de

FORD MOTOR COMPANY, así como

los medios asociados, materiales

impresos y documentación electrónica

o “en línea” (“SOFTWARE FORD”)

están protegidos por leyes de

propiedad intelectual y tratados

internacionales. El SOFTWARE FORD

se otorga bajo licencia, no es objeto de

• El SOFTWARE MS y/o el SOFTWARE

FORD pueden interactuar con y/o

comunicarse con, o pueden

actualizarse posteriormente para

interactuar con y/o comunicarse con

sistemas y/o programas de software

adicionales proporcionados por otros

proveedores de software y servicios.

Los sistemas y programas de software

adicionales de terceros, así como los

medios asociados, materiales impresos

y documentación electrónica o “en

línea” (“SOFTWARE DE TERCEROS”)

están protegidos por leyes de

propiedad intelectual y tratados

internacionales. El SOFTWARE DE

TERCEROS se otorga bajo licencia, no

es objeto de venta. Todos los derechos

reservados.

• En adelante, se hará referencia

colectiva e individual al SOFTWARE

MS, al SOFTWARE FORD y al

SOFTWARE DE TERCEROS

simplemente como "SOFTWARE".

SI USTED NO ESTÁ DE ACUERDO CON

ESTE ACUERDO DE LICENCIA DEL

USUARIO FINAL (“EULA”), NO USE EL

DISPOSITIVO NI COPIE EL SOFTWARE.

CUALQUIER USO DEL SOFTWARE,

INCLUIDO EL USO DEL DISPOSITIVO,

PERO NO LIMITADO A ÉSTE,

IMPLICARÁ SU ACEPTACIÓN DE ESTE

EULA (O RATIFICACIÓN DE

CUALQUIER CONSENTIMIENTO

ANTERIOR).

DERECHOS DE LA LICENCIA DE

SOFTWARE: este EULA otorga la

siguiente licencia:

• Puede utilizar el SOFTWARE tal como

está instalado en el DISPOSITIVO y de

cualquier otra forma en que interactúe

con los sistemas y/o servicios

proporcionados por o a través de FORD

MOTOR COMPANY o sus proveedores

externos de software y servicios.

418

Apéndices

Descripción de otros derechos y

limitaciones:

• Reconocimiento de voz: si el

SOFTWARE incluye componentes de

reconocimiento de voz, usted debe

comprender que el reconocimiento de

voz es un proceso inherentemente

estadístico y que los errores de

reconocimiento son inherentes a dicho

proceso. Ni FORD MOTOR COMPANY

ni sus proveedores serán responsables

por ningún daño ocasionado por

errores en el proceso de

reconocimiento de voz.

• Limitaciones a la modificación de

ingeniería, descompilación y

desmontaje: usted no puede

modificar la ingeniería, descompilar o

desmontar ni permitir a otros modificar

la ingeniería, descompilar o desmontar

el SOFTWARE, excepto y sólo en caso

de que estas acciones estén

expresamente permitidas por leyes

aplicables no obstante esta limitación.

• Limitaciones de distribución,

copiado, modificación y creación de

obras derivadas: usted no puede

distribuir, copiar, modificar ni crear

obras derivadas que se basen en el

SOFTWARE, excepto cuando tal

actividad esté expresamente permitida

por las leyes vigentes, y sólo hasta

donde éstas lo permitan, a pesar de

esta limitación.

• Un solo EULA: la documentación para

el usuario final del DISPOSITIVO y

sistemas y servicios relacionados

puede contener varios EULA, como

varias traducciones y/o varias

versiones de medios (por ejemplo, en

la documentación del usuario y en el

software). Aunque reciba varios EULA,

sólo podrá usar una (1) copia del

SOFTWARE.

• Transferencia de SOFTWARE: usted

puede transferir en forma permanente

sus derechos otorgados por este EULA

sólo como parte de una venta o

transferencia del DISPOSITIVO,

siempre y cuando no retenga copias,

transfiera todo el SOFTWARE

(incluidos todos los componentes,

medios y materiales impresos,

cualquier actualización y, si

corresponde, los Certificados de

autenticidad), y el receptor acepte los

términos de este EULA. Si el

SOFTWARE es una actualización,

cualquier transferencia debe incluir

todas las versiones anteriores del

SOFTWARE.

• Terminación: sin perjuicio de cualquier

otro derecho, FORD MOTOR

COMPANY o MS pueden terminar este

EULA si usted no cumple con los

términos y condiciones de este EULA.

• Administración de actualizaciones

de seguridad/derechos digitales:

los propietarios del contenido utilizan

la tecnología WMDRM incluida en el

DISPOSITIVO para proteger su

propiedad intelectual, incluido el

contenido con derechos de autor. Parte

del SOFTWARE del DISPOSITIVO

utiliza un software WMDRM para

acceder al contenido protegido por

WMDRM. Si el software WMDRM no

logra proteger el contenido, los

propietarios de éste pueden solicitar a

Microsoft la revocación de la

capacidad del SOFTWARE para usar

WMDRM para reproducir o copiar el

contenido protegido. Esta acción no

afecta el contenido no protegido.

Cuando el DISPOSITIVO descarga

licencias para contenido protegido,

usted acepta que Microsoft pueda

incluir una lista de revocaciones con

las licencias. Los propietarios del

contenido pueden requerir que se

419

Apéndices

actualice el SOFTWARE en el

DISPOSITIVO para acceder a su

contenido. Si no realiza una

actualización, no podrá acceder al

contenido que requiere la

actualización.

• Consentimiento para el uso de

datos: usted acepta que MS, Microsoft

Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY,

los proveedores externos de software

y servicios, sus afiliados y/o sus

agentes designados puedan recopilar

y usar información técnica obtenida de

cualquier manera como parte de

servicios de soporte de productos

relacionados con el SOFTWARE o

servicios relacionados. MS, Microsoft

Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY,

los proveedores externos de software

y servicios, sus afiliados y/o sus

agentes designados pueden usar esta

información solamente para mejorar

sus productos o para proporcionar

tecnologías o servicios personalizados.

MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD

MOTOR COMPANY, los proveedores

externos de software y servicios, sus

afiliados y/o sus agentes designados

pueden revelar esta información a

otros, pero no en una forma que lo

identifique.

• Componentes de servicios basados

en Internet: el SOFTWARE puede

contener componentes que permitan

y faciliten el uso de ciertos servicios

basados en Internet. Usted reconoce

y acepta que MS, Microsoft

Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY,

los proveedores externos de software

y servicios, sus afiliados y/o sus

agentes designados puedan

comprobar automáticamente la

versión del SOFTWARE y/o los

componentes que usted está utilizando

y puedan proporcionar actualizaciones

o suplementos al SOFTWARE, que

pueden ser descargados

automáticamente a su DISPOSITIVO.

• Software/servicios adicionales: el

SOFTWARE puede permitir que FORD

MOTOR COMPANY, los proveedores

externos de software y servicios, MS,

Microsoft Corporation, sus afiliados y/o

sus agentes designados proporcionen

o pongan a su disposición

actualizaciones de SOFTWARE,

suplementos, componentes de

complementos o componentes de

servicios basados en Internet del

SOFTWARE después de la fecha en

que obtuvo su copia inicial del

SOFTWARE (“Componentes

suplementarios”).

Si FORD MOTOR COMPANY o los

proveedores externos de software y

servicios proporcionan o ponen a su

disposición Componentes suplementarios

y no se proporcionan otros términos de

EULA junto con los Componentes

suplementarios, entonces se aplicarán los

términos de este EULA.

420

Apéndices

Si MS, Microsoft Corporation, sus afiliados

y/o sus agentes designados ponen a su

disposición Componentes suplementarios,

y no se proporcionan otros términos de

EULA, entonces se aplicarán los términos

de este EULA, excepto que MS, Microsoft

Corporation o la entidad afiliada que

proporcione los Componentes

suplementarios sea quien otorgue la

licencia de los Componentes

suplementarios.

FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft

Corporation, sus afiliados y/o sus agentes

designados se reservan el derecho a

suspender sin responsabilidad alguna

cualquier servicio basado en Internet

proporcionado o puesto a su disposición

a través del uso del SOFTWARE.

• Vínculos a sitios de terceros: el

SOFTWARE MS puede proporcionarle

la capacidad de acceder a sitios de

terceros a través del uso del

SOFTWARE. Los sitios de terceros no

están bajo el control de MS, Microsoft

Corporation, sus afiliados y/o sus

agentes designados. Ni MS, Microsoft

Corporation, sus afiliados ni sus

agentes designados son responsables

de (i) los contenidos de cualquier sitio

de terceros, cualquier vínculo

contenido en sitios de terceros o

cualquier cambio o actualización en

sitios de terceros, o (ii) las difusiones

por Web o cualquier otra forma de

transmisión recibida de cualquier sitio

de terceros. Si el SOFTWARE

proporciona vínculos a sitios de

terceros, estos vínculos se

proporcionan sólo para su

conveniencia, y la inclusión de

cualquier vínculo no implica una

aprobación del sitio de terceros por

parte de MS, Microsoft Corporation,

sus afiliados y/o sus agentes

designados.

• Obligación de manejar

responsablemente: usted reconoce

la obligación de manejar

responsablemente y mantener la

atención en el camino. Usted leerá y se

atendrá a las instrucciones de

funcionamiento del DISPOSITIVO,

debido a que son parte de la seguridad,

y asume cualquier riesgo asociado al

uso del DISPOSITIVO.

421

Apéndices

ACTUALIZACIONES Y MEDIOS DE

RECUPERACIÓN: si el SOFTWARE lo

proporciona FORD MOTOR COMPANY

separado del DISPOSITIVO en medios

como un chip ROM, discos CD ROM o a

través de descarga vía Internet u otros

medios, y está etiquetado “Sólo para

actualización” o "Sólo para recuperación",

usted puede instalar una (1) copia del

SOFTWARE en el DISPOSITIVO como

copia de reemplazo del SOFTWARE

existente, y usarlo de acuerdo con este

EULA, incluido cualquier término de EULA

adicional que acompañe al SOFTWARE

de actualización.

DERECHOS DE PROPIEDAD

INTELECTUAL: todos los títulos y

derechos de propiedad intelectual del

SOFTWARE (lo que incluye, entre otros,

imágenes, fotografías, animaciones, video,

audio, música, texto y “applets”

incorporados al SOFTWARE), los

materiales impresos adjuntos, y cualquier

copia del SOFTWARE, son propiedad de

MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR

COMPANY o sus afiliados o proveedores.

El SOFTWARE se otorga bajo licencia y no

es objeto de venta. Usted no puede copiar

los materiales impresos incluidos con el

SOFTWARE. Todos los títulos y derechos

de propiedad intelectual del contenido al

cual se puede acceder mediante el uso del

SOFTWARE son propiedad de los

respectivos propietarios de contenidos y

pueden estar protegidos por derechos de

autor y otras leyes y tratados de propiedad

intelectual aplicables. Este EULA no otorga

derechos para usar este tipo de

contenidos. Todos los derechos no

otorgados específicamente por este EULA

están reservados por MS, Microsoft

Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY,

los proveedores externos de software y

servicios, sus afiliados y proveedores. El

uso de servicios en línea a los cuales se

puede acceder a través del SOFTWARE

puede estar sujeto a los términos de uso

respectivos relacionados con dichos

servicios. Si este SOFTWARE contiene

documentación proporcionada sólo en

forma electrónica, usted puede imprimir

una copia de dicha documentación.

422

Apéndices

RESTRICCIONES DE EXPORTACIÓN:

usted reconoce que el SOFTWARE está

sujeto a la jurisdicción de exportación de

EE.UU. y la Unión Europea. Usted acepta

cumplir con todas las leyes nacionales e

internacionales aplicables al SOFTWARE,

incluidas las regulaciones de

administración de exportaciones de

Estados Unidos, así como las restricciones

de destino, uso final y usuario final

impuestas por EE.UU. y otros estados. Para

obtener información adicional, visite

http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.

MARCAS REGISTRADAS: este EULA no

otorga derechos relacionados con marcas

registradas o marcas de servicio de FORD

MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft

Corporation, los proveedores externos de

software y servicios, sus afiliados o

proveedores.

SOPORTE DEL PRODUCTO: MS, su

corporación matriz Microsoft Corporation

o sus afiliados o subsidiarias no

proporcionan soporte del producto para

el SOFTWARE. Para obtener soporte del

producto, consulte las instrucciones de

FORD MOTOR COMPANY proporcionadas

en la documentación del DISPOSITIVO. Si

tiene dudas relacionadas con este EULA,

o si desea ponerse en contacto con FORD

MOTOR COMPANY por alguna otra razón,

consulte la dirección proporcionada en la

documentación del DISPOSITIVO.

Exención de responsabilidad por daños

determinados: EXCEPTO QUE SE

PROHÍBA POR LEY, FORD MOTOR

COMPANY Y CUALQUIER PROVEEDOR

EXTERNO DE SOFTWARE Y SERVICIOS,

MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION Y SUS

AFILIADOS NO TENDRÁN

RESPONSABILIDAD ALGUNA POR

NINGÚN DAÑO INDIRECTO, ESPECIAL,

RESULTANTE O INCIDENTAL CAUSADO

POR O RELACIONADO CON EL USO O

EJECUCIÓN DEL SOFTWARE Y/O DEL

SOFTWARE FORD. ESTA LIMITACIÓN SE

APLICARÁ INCLUSO SI CUALQUIER

SOLUCIÓN FALLA EN SU PROPÓSITO

ESENCIAL. EN NINGÚN CASO MS,

MICROSOFT CORPORATION Y/O SUS

AFILIADOS SERÁN RESPONSABLES POR

NINGÚN MONTO QUE EXCEDA LOS

DOSCIENTOS CINCUENTA DÓLARES

ESTADOUNIDENSES (U.S.$250.00).

• NO EXISTEN OTRAS GARANTÍAS

APARTE DE LAS QUE HAYAN SIDO

EXPRESAMENTE OTORGADAS PARA

SU VEHÍCULO NUEVO.

Aviso para el usuario final

Información de seguridad importante de

Microsoft® Windows® Mobile for

Automotive

Este sistema Ford SYNC™ contiene

software licenciado para FORD MOTOR

COMPANY por un afiliado de Microsoft

Corporation según un acuerdo de licencia.

Cualquier remoción, reproducción,

modificación de ingeniería u otro uso no

autorizado del software de este sistema

que contravenga el acuerdo de licencia

queda estrictamente prohibido y puede

estar sujeto a acciones legales.

423

Apéndices

Lea y siga las instrucciones: antes de

usar el sistema basado en Windows

Automotive, lea y siga todas las

instrucciones y la información de seguridad

proporcionada en este manual del usuario

final (“Guía del usuario”). No seguir las

precauciones que se encuentran en esta

Guía del usuario puede conducir a un

accidente u otras consecuencias graves.

Mantenga la Guía del usuario en el

vehículo: al mantenerla en el vehículo, la

Guía del usuario será una referencia para

usted y otros usuarios poco familiarizados

con el sistema basado en Windows

Automotive. Asegúrese de que antes de

usar el sistema por primera vez, todas las

personas tengan acceso a la Guía del

usuario y lean con atención las

instrucciones y la información de

seguridad.

ALERTA

Utilizar ciertas partes del sistema

mientras maneja puede distraer su

atención del camino y, posiblemente,

causar un accidente u otras consecuencias

graves. No cambie la configuración del

sistema ni ingrese datos en forma no

verbal (usando las manos) mientras

maneja. Detenga el vehículo de forma

segura y legal antes de realizar estas

acciones. Esto es importante debido a que

la configuración o el cambio de algunas

funciones pueden requerir que distraiga su

atención del camino y retire sus manos del

volante.

Funcionamiento general

Control de comandos de voz: las

funciones del sistema basado en Windows

Automotive pueden ejecutarse sólo

mediante comandos de voz. El uso de los

comandos de voz mientras maneja le

permite operar el sistema sin quitar las

manos de volante.

Visión prolongada de la pantalla: no

acceda a funciones que requieran una

visión prolongada de la pantalla mientras

maneja. Estacione de forma segura y legal

antes de intentar acceder a una función

del sistema que requiera una atención

prolongada. Incluso mirar rápidamente la

pantalla puede ser perjudicial si su

atención se desvía en un momento crítico

de su tarea de manejar.

Configuración de volumen: no aumente

el volumen de forma excesiva. Mantenga

el volumen en un nivel en que puede

escuchar el tráfico exterior y las señales

de emergencia mientras maneja. Manejar

sin poder escuchar estos sonidos puede

ocasionar un accidente.

Uso de las funciones de

reconocimiento de voz: el software de

reconocimiento de voz es inherentemente

un proceso estadístico que está sujeto a

errores. Es su responsabilidad controlar

cualquier función de reconocimiento de

voz incluida en el sistema y corregir los

errores.

Funciones de navegación: todas las

funciones de navegación incluidas en el

sistema tienen como objetivo proporcionar

instrucciones detalladas para llevarlo a un

destino deseado. Asegúrese de que todas

las personas que utilicen este sistema lean

detenidamente y sigan las instrucciones e

información de seguridad en su totalidad.

Peligro de distracción: toda función de

navegación puede requerir una

configuración manual (no verbal). Al

intentar realizar dicha configuración o

insertar datos mientras maneja puede

distraer seriamente su atención causar un

accidente u otras consecuencias graves.

Detenga el vehículo de forma segura y

legal antes de realizar estas acciones.

424

Apéndices

Deje que su criterio prevalezca:

Cualquier función de navegación se

entrega sólo como ayuda. Tome sus

decisiones de manejo según sus

observaciones de las condiciones locales

y reglamentos de tráfico existentes.

Cualquiera de estas funciones no sustituye

a su criterio personal. Toda sugerencia de

ruta entregada por este sistema nunca

debe reemplazar a ninguna

reglamentación de tráfico local o a su

criterio personal o conocimiento de las

prácticas seguras de manejo.

Seguridad en la ruta: no siga las

sugerencias de la ruta si hacerlo pudiera

generar una maniobra no segura o ilegal,

si implicara quedar en una situación poco

segura o si fuera dirigido a un área que

considere no segura. El conductor es el

responsable final de utilizar en forma

segura el vehículo y, por lo tanto, debe

evaluar si es seguro seguir las indicaciones

sugeridas.

Posible imprecisión de mapa: los mapas

que este sistema utiliza pueden ser

imprecisos debido a cambios en los

caminos, controles de tráfico o condiciones

de manejo. Siempre aplique un buen

criterio y sentido común al seguir las rutas

sugeridas.

Servicios de emergencia: no confié en

ninguna función de navegación incluida en

el sistema para dirigirse a los servicios de

emergencia. Pida a las autoridades locales

o a una operadora de servicios de

emergencia que le indiquen estas

ubicaciones. No todos los servicios de

emergencia como policía, bomberos,

hospitales y cínicas se incluyen en la base

de datos del mapa para dichas funciones

de navegación.

Acuerdo de licencia del usuario final

del software TeleNav

Lea con cuidado estos términos y

condiciones antes de utilizar el software

TeleNav. Su uso del software TeleNav

indica que usted acepta estos términos y

condiciones. Si no acepta estos términos

y condiciones, no rompa el sello del

paquete, no instale o no utilice de ningún

otro modo el software TeleNav.

TeleNav puede modificar el presente

Acuerdo y la política de privacidad en

cualquier momento, con o sin previo aviso.

Usted está de acuerdo en visitar de vez en

cuando el sitio http://www.telenav.com

para revisar la versión actualizada de este

Acuerdo y de la política de privacidad.

425

Apéndices

1. Uso seguro y legítimo

Usted reconoce que poner atención al

software TeleNav puede representar un

riesgo de lesiones o muerte para usted y

otras personas en situaciones que, de otro

modo, requieren su atención total, y por lo

tanto, usted está de acuerdo en cumplir

con lo siguiente al usar el software

TeleNav: (a) observar lo señalado por los

reglamentos de tránsito y conducir en

forma segura; (b) utilizar su propio criterio

al conducir. Si considera que una ruta

sugerida por el software TeleNav le pide

realizar una maniobra peligrosa o ilegal, le

pone en una situación peligrosa, o le dirige

hacia un lugar que usted considere

peligroso, no siga tales instrucciones; (c)

no configure destinos, ni manipule de

ninguna otra forma el software TeleNav,

a menos que su vehículo esté inmóvil y

estacionado; (d) no utilice el software

TeleNav para ningún fin ilegal, no

autorizado, no intencional, inseguro,

peligroso o ilícito, ni lo use de ninguna otra

manera que contradiga el presente

Acuerdo; (e) disponga el GPS y todos los

dispositivos inalámbricos y cables

necesarios para usar el software TeleNav

de manera segura en su vehículo, de tal

modo que estos no entorpezcan la

conducción del vehículo ni impidan el

funcionamiento de los dispositivos de

seguridad del mismo (como una bolsa de

aire).

Usted está de acuerdo en indemnizar y

exculpar a TeleNav de cualquier

reclamación resultante del uso peligroso,

o de algún otro modo inadecuado, del

software TeleNav en cualquier vehículo

móvil, incluso debido al incumplimiento

de las indicaciones anteriores por parte de

usted.

2. Información de cuenta

Usted está de acuerdo en: (a) registrar el

software TeleNav con el fin de

proporcionarle a TeleNav información

verídica, exacta, actualizada y completa

acerca de usted, y (b) informar a la

brevedad a TeleNav sobre cualquier

cambio en dicha información, y a

mantenerla verídica, exacta, actualizada

y completa.

3. Licencia de software

Dependiendo del cumplimiento de los

términos de el presente Acuerdo, TeleNav

otorga a usted, mediante el presente

documento, una licencia personal, no

exclusiva e intransferible (con salvedad de

lo expresamente permitido a continuación

con respecto de su transferencia

permanente de la licencia del software

TeleNav), sin derecho a sublicenciar, para

que use el software TeleNav (sólo en la

forma de código objetivo) para acceder al

software TeleNav y hacer uso del mismo.

Esta licencia quedará anulada por la

cancelación o vencimiento del presente

Acuerdo. Usted está de acuerdo en utilizar

el software TeleNav exclusivamente para

sus propósitos personales, de negocio u

ocio, y en no proporcionar a terceros

servicios comerciales de navegación.

426

Apéndices

3.1 Limitaciones del sistema

3.1 Limitaciones de la licencia Usted está

de acuerdo en no hacer ninguna de las

siguientes cosas: (a) aplicar

retroingeniería, descompilar,

desensamblar, traducir, modificar, alterar

o cambiar de algún otro modo el software

TeleNav o cualquier parte del mismo; (b)

intentar derivar el código fuente, la

audioteca o la estructura del software

TeleNav, sin el previo consentimiento

expreso y por escrito de TeleNav; (c) retirar

del software TeleNav, o alterar, cualquiera

de las marcas registradas, nombres

comerciales, logos, avisos de patente o

derechos de autoría, u otros avisos o

marcas de TeleNav o sus proveedores; (d)

distribuir, sublicenciar o transferir de otro

modo el software TeleNav a terceros, salvo

como parte de la transferencia

permanente del software TeleNav; o (e)

usar el software TeleNav de alguna

manera que (i) infrinja los derechos de

propiedad intelectual o titularidad,

derechos de publicidad o privacidad, u

otros derechos de cualquier tercero, (ii)

infrinja alguna ley, estatuto, ordenanza o

reglamento, inclusive, de modo no

limitado, las leyes y los reglamentos

relacionados con envío de correo no

deseado (spam), privacidad, protección

de consumidores y niños, obscenidad o

difamación, o (iii) resulte perjudicial,

amenazante, abusiva, acosadora, tortuosa,

difamatoria, vulgar, obscena, difamatoria

u objetable de otro modo; y (f) arrendar,

alquilar o permitir de cualquier otro modo

el acceso no autorizado de terceros, al

software TeleNav, sin el permiso previo y

por escrito de TeleNav.

4. Descargo de responsabilidades

Dentro del máximo alcance permisible de

la legislación vigente, en ningún caso

TeleNav, su licenciatarios y proveedores,

o los representantes o empleados de

cualquiera de las partes antedichas,

asumirá responsabilidad civil alguna por

cualquier decisión o acción que usted o

cualquier otra persona tomen teniendo por

base la información proporcionada por el

software TeleNav. Asimismo, TeleNav no

garantiza la exactitud del mapa ni de los

otros datos utilizados para el software

TeleNav. Tales datos no siempre reflejan

la realidad debido, entre otras cosas, a

cierres de caminos, obras de construcción,

condiciones climáticas, nuevas carreteras

y otras condiciones cambiantes. Usted es

responsable del riesgo total relacionado

con el uso que haga del software TeleNav.

Por ejemplo, y sin limitación alguna, usted

está de acuerdo en no depender del

software TeleNav para tomar decisiones

de navegación críticas, en lugares donde

el bienestar y/o la supervivencia de usted

y otras personas dependan de la precisión

de la navegación, pues ni los mapas ni la

funcionalidad del software TeleNav están

pensados para apoyar tales usos de alto

riesgo, especialmente en áreas geográficas

remotas.

427

Apéndices

TELENAV RENUNCIA A, Y SE EXIME

EXPRESAMENTE DE, TODAS LAS

GARANTÍAS RELACIONADAS CON EL

SOFTWARE TELENAV, SEAN

ESTATUTARIAS, IMPLÍCITAS O

EXPLÍCITAS, LO QUE INCLUYE

CUALQUIER GARANTÍA QUE PUDIERA

SURGIR DE NEGOCIACIONES Y/O

ACTIVIDADES DE PERSONALIZACIÓN O

COMERCIALIZACIÓN, INCLUYENDO, DE

MODO NO LIMITADO, LAS GARANTÍAS

IMPLÍCITAS DE COMERCIABILIDAD,

APTITUD PARA UN FIN ESPECÍFICO, Y

RESPETO DE LOS DERECHOS DE

TERCEROS CON RESPECTO AL

SOFTWARE TELENAV. Ciertas

jurisdicciones no permiten declinar la

responsabilidad de ciertas garantías, así

que la anterior limitación pudiera no ser

aplicable al caso de usted.

5. Limitación de responsabilidad

DENTRO DEL ALCANCE DE LA

LEGISLACIÓN VIGENTE, EN NINGUNA

CIRCUNSTANCIA TELENAV O SUS

LICENCIATARIOS Y PROVEEDORES

SERÁN RESPONSABLES, NI ANTE USTED

NI ANTE NINGÚN TERCERO, POR

CUALQUIER DAÑO INDIRECTO, CASUAL,

CONSECUENTE, ESPECIAL O EJEMPLAR

(INCLUYENDO EN CADA CASO, DE MODO

NO LIMITADO, DAÑOS RELACIONADOS

CON LA INCAPACIDAD DE UTILIZAR EL

EQUIPO O ACCEDER A DATOS, PÉRDIDA

DE DATOS, PÉRDIDA DE

OPORTUNIDADES DE NEGOCIOS,

PÉRDIDA DE GANANCIAS, INTERRUPCIÓN

DE NEGOCIOS O CUALQUIER OTRA

SITUACIÓN) COMO CONSECUENCIA DEL

USO O LA INCAPACIDAD DE USO DEL

SOFTWARE TELENAV, AUNQUE TELENAV

HAYA SIDO ADVERTIDO DE LA

POSIBILIDAD DE TALES DAÑOS.

INDEPENDIENTEMENTE DE LOS DAÑOS

QUE USTED PUDIERA SUFRIR POR

CUALQUIER MOTIVO O RAZÓN

(INCLUYENDO, DE MODO NO LIMITADO,

TODOS LOS DAÑOS AQUÍ REFERIDOS Y

CUALQUIER DAÑO DIRECTO O GENERAL,

SEA POR CONTRATO, AGRAVIO

[INCLUSO NEGLIGENCIA] O CUALQUIER

OTRA CAUSA), LA RESPONSABILIDAD

TOTAL DE TELENAV, Y DE TODOS LOS

PROVEEDORES DE TELENAV, SE

LIMITARÁ AL MONTO QUE USTED HAYA

PAGADO POR EL SOFTWARE TELENAV.

ALGUNOS ESTADOS Y/O

JURISDICCIONES NO PERMITEN LA

EXCLUSIÓN O LIMITACIÓN DE LOS

DAÑOS CASUALES O CONSECUENTES,

DE MODO QUE LAS LIMITACIONES O

EXCLUSIONES ANTERIORES PUDIERAN

NO APLICAR EN EL CASO DE USTED.

6. Arbitraje y legislación vigente

Usted está de acuerdo en que cualquier

disputa, reclamación o controversia que

pudiera surgir de, o relacionarse con el

presente Acuerdo o con el software

TeleNav, será resuelta mediante el recurso

de arbitraje independiente ejercido por un

árbitro neutral y dependiente de la

American Arbitration Association, en el

Condado de Santa Clara, California. El

árbitro aplicará las Reglas de Arbitraje

Comercial de la American Arbitration

Association, y la evaluación del veredicto

emitido por el árbitro podrá ser admitida

en cualquier tribunal competente. Nótese

que no hay ni juez ni jurado en un

procedimiento de arbitraje, y que la

decisión del árbitro es de carácter

obligatorio para ambas partes. Usted está

de acuerdo expresamente en renunciar a

su derecho a un juicio ordinario.

428

Apéndices

El presente Acuerdo, y lo que del mismo

se desprenda, serán regidos por, e

interpretados de acuerdo con, las leyes del

Estado de California, sin que surtan efecto

sus conflictos con las cláusulas de otras

leyes. En la medida que sea necesario

ampliar la acción judicial con respecto al

arbitraje de carácter obligatorio, tanto

TeleNav como usted están de acuerdo en

someterse a la jurisdicción exclusiva de los

tribunales del Condado de Santa Clara,

California. En este caso no aplicará la

Convención de Contratos de las Naciones

Unidas para la Venta Internacional de

Bienes.

7. Asignación

Usted no puede revender, asignar, ni

transferir el presente Acuerdo, o cualquiera

de sus derechos u obligaciones, a menos

que sea en su totalidad por transferencia

permanente del software TeleNav, y

expresamente condicionada a que el

nuevo usuario del software TeleNav esté

de acuerdo en sujetarse a los términos y

condiciones del presente Acuerdo.

Cualquiera venta, asignación o

transferencia de ese tipo que no esté

expresamente permitida por este párrafo,

tendrá por consecuencia la anulación

inmediata del presente Acuerdo, sin

responsabilidad alguna por parte de

TeleNav, en cuyo caso usted y todas las

otras partes suspenderán de inmediato y

por completo el uso del software TeleNav.

A pesar de lo anterior, TeleNav puede

asignar el presente Acuerdo a cualquier

otra parte, en cualquier momento y sin

aviso, siempre y cuando el asignatario esté

dispuesto a sujetarse al presente Acuerdo.

8. Otros puntos misceláneos

8,1

El presente Acuerdo constituye el único

convenio que media entre TeleNav y usted

con respecto al asunto en cuestión.

8,2

Con salvedad de las licencias limitadas

que otorga expresamente el presente

Acuerdo, TeleNav retiene todos los

derechos, la titularidad y el interés en y del

software TeleNav, incluyendo, sin

limitación alguna, todos los derechos sobre

la propiedad intelectual del caso. Ninguna

licencia o otros derechos que no hayan

sido expresamente otorgados en el

presente Acuerdo, están pensados para,

o serán otorgados o concedidos por

implicación, estatuto, incentivo, limitación

u otros recursos legales, y TeleNav y sus

proveedores y licenciatarios conservarán,

en este mismo acto, todos sus derechos

respectivos con salvedad de las licencias

otorgadas explícitamente mediante el

presente Acuerdo.

8,3

Al hacer uso del software TeleNav, usted

consiente en recibir electrónicamente

todos los comunicados de TeleNav,

incluyendo avisos, acuerdos, divulgaciones

legalmente necesarias u otra información

relacionada con el software TeleNav

(colectivamente, los "Avisos"). TeleNav

puede proporcionar tales Avisos

publicándolos en el sitio Web de TeleNav,

o descargándolos directamente en su

dispositivo inalámbrico. Si desea anular su

consentimiento para recibir Avisos

electrónicamente, deberá suspender el

uso del software TeleNav.

8,4

La omisión, sea por parte de TeleNav o de

usted, de exigir el cumplimiento de

cualquier cláusula, no afectará el derecho

de dicha parte a exigir tal cumplimiento

tiempo después, y la renuncia a cualquier

infracción u omisión de el presente

Acuerdo tampoco constituirá una renuncia

a ninguna infracción u omisión

subsiguiente, ni una renuncia a la cláusula

en sí.

429

Apéndices

8,5

Si alguna cláusula del presente Acuerdo

es declarada improcedente, dicha cláusula

será modificada para ajustarla a la

intención de las partes, pero las cláusulas

restantes del Acuerdo seguirán en plena

vigencia y efecto.

8,6

Los encabezados del presente Acuerdo

son sólo con fines de referencia, de modo

que no serán considerados como parte del

mismo, y no serán citados como parte de

la estructura o interpretación del Acuerdo.

Tal como se usan en el presente Acuerdo,

las expresiones "lo que incluye",

"incluyendo" y cualquier otra variante de

las mismas, no serán interpretadas como

términos limitantes, sino que se entenderá

siempre que van seguidas por las palabras

"sin limitación alguna".

9. Términos y condiciones de otros

proveedores

El software TeleNav utiliza un mapa y otros

datos, licenciados a TeleNav por terceros

proveedores, en beneficio de usted y otros

usuarios finales. El presente Acuerdo

incluye los términos y condiciones de

usuario final aplicables a dichas

compañías (se anexan al final de el

presente Acuerdo) y, por lo tanto, el uso

del software TeleNav por parte de usted

también está sujeto a tales términos.

Usted está de acuerdo en sujetarse a los

siguientes términos y condiciones

adicionales, ya que son aplicables a los

licenciatarios de los terceros proveedores

de TeleNav:

Acuerdo de licencia de usuario final de

NavTeq

TÉRMINOS DE USUARIO FINAL

El contenido ("Datos") se proporciona se

otorga bajo licencia, no es objeto de venta.

Al abrir este paquete, instalar, copiar o usar

de alguna forma los Datos, acepta regirse

por los términos de este acuerdo. Si no

acepta regirse por los términos de este

acuerdo, no tiene permiso para instalar,

copiar, usar, revender o transferir los Datos.

Si desea rechazar los términos de este

acuerdo y no ha instalado, copiado o usado

los datos, debe comunicarse con minorista

o NAVTEQ North America, LLC ("NT")

dentro de treinta (30) días de compra para

obtener el reembolso del precio de

compra. Para comunicarse NT, visite

www.navteq.com.

Los Datos se entregan sólo para su uso

personal, interno y no se permite su venta.

Están protegidos por las leyes de derechos

de autor y están sujetos a los siguientes

términos (este "Acuerdo de licencia de

usuario final") y condiciones que usted

acepta, por una parte, y NAVTEQ North

America, LLC ("NT") y emisores de licencia

(incluidos sus emisores de licencia y

proveedores) por otra.

Los Datos para áreas de Canadá incluyen

información tomada con permiso de las

Corporation, Geobase ®.

NT tiene una licencia no exclusiva del

servicio postal de Estados Unidos ® para

publicar y vender ZIP+4 ® información.

2009. El Servicio Postal de Estados Unidos

no establece, controla o aprueba los

precios ® Las siguientes marcas

comerciales y registros son propiedad de

USPS: Servicio Postal de Estados Unidos,

USPS y ZIP+4.

Los datos para México incluyen ciertos

datos del Instituto Nacional de Estadística

y Geografía.

430

Apéndices

TÉRMINOS Y CONDICIONES

Limitaciones de licencia en uso: acepta

la licencia para usar estos datos está

limitada y condicionada en el uso

únicamente para fines únicamente no

comerciales y no para oficina de servicios,

tiempo compartido u otros fines similares.

Excepto cuando se indique lo contrario en

el presente documento, usted acepta no

reproducir una copia, modificar, recopilar,

desarmar o revertir el diseño de cualquier

parte de estos Datos, y no transferirlos o

distribuirlos en ninguna forma, para ningún

fin, salvo hasta el punto permitido por las

leyes vigentes.

Limitaciones de licencia en

transferencia: la licencia limitada no

permite la transferencia o reventa de

datos, excepto con la condición de que

puede transferir los datos y todo el

material incluido de forma permanente si:

(a) no retiene copias de los datos; (b) el

destinatario acepta los términos de este

acuerdo de licencia de usuario final; y (c)

transfiere los datos de la forma exacta en

que los compró al transferir el medio

original (por ejemplo, CD-ROM o DVD que

compró), todo el paquete original, todos

los manuales y otra documentación.

Específicamente, los conjuntos con

múltiples discos solo se pueden transferir

o vender como conjunto completo según

lo recibió y no como un subconjunto de sí

mismo.

Limitaciones de licencia adicionales:

salvo donde haya obtenido licencia

específica para hacerlo por NT en un

acuerdo por escrito separado, y sin limitar

el párrafo anterior, la licencia se condiciona

al uso de los datos como se preestablece

en este acuerdo, y no podrá (a) usar estos

Datos con ningún producto, sistema o

aplicación instalada o de lo contrario

conectada a o en comunicación con

vehículos, con capacidad de navegación

en el vehículo, posicionamiento, despacho,

guía de ruta en tiempo real, administración

de flota o aplicaciones similares; o (b) con

o en comunicación con cualquier

dispositivo de posicionamiento o aparato

móvil o dispositivo electrónico o de

computación conectado en forma

inalámbrica, incluido, pero sin limitarse a

teléfonos celulares, computadoras

portátiles y de mano, buscapersonas y

asistentes personales digitales o PDA.

ALERTA

Estos datos pueden contener

información inexacta o incompleta

debido al paso del tiempo,

circunstancias, fuentes usadas y la

naturaleza de la recopilación de datos

geográficamente completos, cualquiera

de los cuales puede derivar en resultados

incorrectos.

431

Apéndices

Sin garantía: estos Datos se le entregan

“como están” y usted acepta utilizarlos, a

su propio riesgo. NT y sus emisores de

licencia (y sus emisores de licencia y

proveedores) no entregan ninguna

garantía, representación o garantía de

ningún tipo, expresa o implícita, que surja

por ley o de lo contrario, incluida pero sin

limitarse al contenido, calidad, precisión,

integridad, efectividad, confiabilidad,

ajuste para un fin en particular, utilidad,

uso o resultados que se obtendrán de

estos Datos o que los Datos o el servidor

se mantendrá ininterrumpido o libre de

errores.

Denegación de garantía: NT Y SUS

EMISORES DE LICENCIA (INCLUIDOS SUS

EMISORES DE LICENCIA Y

PROVEEDORES) DENIEGAN CUALQUIER

GARANTÍA, EXPRESA O IMPLÍCITA DE

CALIDAD, RENDIMIENTO,

COMERCIABILIDAD, AJUSTE PARA UN FIN

EN PARTICULAR O NO CUMPLIMIENTO.

Algunos estados, territorios y países no

permiten ciertas exclusiones de garantía,

por lo tanto hasta ese punto, la exclusión

anterior podría no aplicarse.

Descargo de responsabilidades: NT Y

SUS EMISORES DE LICENCIA (INCLUIDOS

SUS EMISORES DE LICENCIA Y

PROVEEDOR) NO SERÁN

RESPONSABLES: CON RESPECTO A

CUALQUIER QUEJA, DEMANDA O ACCIÓN,

SIN IMPORTAR LA NATURALEZA DE LA

QUEJA, DEMANDA O ACCIÓN QUE ALEGA

CUALQUIER PÉRDIDA, LESIÓN O DAÑO,

DIRECTO O INDIRECTO, PRODUCTO DEL

USO O POSESIÓN DE LA INFORMACIÓN;

O DE CUALQUIER PÉRDIDA DE

GANANCIAS, INGRESOS, CONTRATOS O

AHORROS, O CUALQUIER OTRO DAÑO

DIRECTO, INDIRECTO, INCIDENTAL

ESPECIAL O POR CONSECUENCIA QUE

SURJA DEL USO O INCAPACIDAD DE

USAR ESTA INFORMACIÓN, CUALQUIER

DEFECTO EN LA INFORMACIÓN O EL

INCUMPLIMIENTO DE ESTOS TÉRMINOS

Y CONDICIONES, YA SEA EN UNA ACCIÓN

EN CONTRATO O ACTO ILÍCITO BASADO

EN UNA GARANTÍA, INCLUSO SI EL NT O

SUS EMISORES DE LICENCIA HAN SIDO

ADVERTIDOS DE LA POSIBILIDAD DE

DICHOS DAÑOS.. Algunos estados,

territorios y países no autorizan ciertas

exclusiones de responsabilidad o

limitación de daños, de modo que hasta

ese punto lo anterior podría no aplicarse a

usted.

432

Apéndices

Control de exportación: usted acepta

no exportar desde ninguna parte de los

Datos proporcionados o ningún producto

del mismo, salvo en cumplimiento con, y

con todas las licencias y aprobaciones

requeridas, las leyes de exportación, reglas

y reglamentos aplicables, incluidos entre

otros, las leyes, reglas y regulaciones

administradas por la Oficina de Control de

Activos Extranjeros de EE.UU.

Departamento de comercio y Oficina de

Industria y Seguridad de EE.UU.

Departamento de Comercio. En la medida

que cualquier ley, regla o reglamento

prohíba que NT cumpla alguna de sus

obligaciones suscritas de entregar o

distribuir datos, dicho incumplimiento será

excusado y no constituirá una violación de

este acuerdo.

Acuerdo total: estos términos y

condiciones constituyen el acuerdo total

entre el NT (y sus emisores de licencia,

incluidos sus emisores de licencia y

proveedores) y usted que pertenece al

tema de esto, y sustituye cualquier o todo

acuerdo escrito u oral previamente

existente entre nosotros con respecto a

dicho tema.

Gravedad: usted y NT acuerdan que si

alguna parte de este acuerdo se considera

ilegal o inaplicable, dicha parte debe

omitirse y el resto del acuerdo debe

permanecer completamente vigente.

Ley vigentes: los términos y condiciones

anteriores se deben regir por las leyes del

Estado de Illinois, sin otorgar efecto a (i)

su conflicto de las disposiciones de las

leyes, o (ii) la Convención de las Naciones

Unidas para la venta internacional de

mercaderías, que está explícitamente

excluida. Usted acepta presentarse a la

jurisdicción personal del Estado de Illinois

para cualquier o todos los litigios, quejas

y acciones que surjan o se relacionen con

los Datos que se le proporcionan en el

presente.

Usuarios finales de gobierno: si los

datos son adquiridos por o en nombre del

gobierno de Estados Unidos o cualquier

entidad que busca o aplica derechos

similar a aquellos indicados especialmente

por el gobierno de Estado Unidos, estos

Datos son un "término comercial" según

se define en 48 C.F.R. ("FAR") 2.101, se

licencia de acuerdo con este acuerdo de

licencia de usuario final y cada copia de

datos entregados o proporcionados se

debe marcar e incrustar según lo que

corresponde con el siguiente "Aviso de

uso", y se debe tratar de acuerdo con dicho

aviso:

AVISO DE USO

CONTRATISTA

(FABRICANTE/PROVEEDOR)

NOMBRE:

NAVTEQ

CONTRATISTA

(FABRICANTE/PROVEEDOR)

DIRECCIÓN:

425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, IL

60606.

Estos datos son un elemento comercial

según se define en FAR 2.101

y se somete al acuerdo de licencia de

usuario final

que estos datos proporcionaron.

reservados.

Si el funcionario de contratación, agencia

de gobierno federal o cualquier funcionario

federal se niega a usar la leyenda

proporcionada en el presente documento,

el funcionario de contratación, agencia de

gobierno federal o funcionario federal debe

notificar a NAVTEQ antes de buscar

derechos adicionales o alternativos en los

Datos.

433

Apéndices

Datos de puntos con conexión Wi-Fi

Gracenote® Copyright

Datos relacionados con CD y música de

Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright

y servicio puede incluir una o más de las

siguientes patentes de EE.UU. #5,987,525,

#6,061,680, #6,154,773, #6,161,132,

#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6.240,459,

#6,330,593 y otras patentes emitidas

pendientes. Algunos servicios

suministrados bajo licencia de Open Globe,

Inc. para la Patente de EE.UU. :

#6,304,523.

Gracenote y CDDB son marcas registradas

de Gracenote. El logo y el logotipo de

Gracenote, y el logotipo "Powered by

Gracenote™" son macas registradas de

Gracenote.

Acuerdo de licencia de usuario final de

Gracenote® (EULA)

Este dispositivo incluye software de

Gracenote, Inc. de 2000 Powell Street

Emeryville, California 94608

(“Gracenote”).

El software de Gracenote (el “Software de

Gracenote”) permite que este dispositivo

realice identificación de disco y archivos

de música y obtenga información

relacionada con música, incluida

información de nombre, artista, canción y

título (“Datos de Gracenote”) de los

servidores en línea (“Servidores de

Gracenote”), y ejecute otras funciones.

Puede usar los Datos de Gracenote sólo

por medio de las funciones del Usuario

final objetivo de este dispositivo.

Este dispositivo puede incluir contenido

perteneciente a los proveedores de

Gracenote. Si es así, todas las restricciones

establecidas en el presente con respecto

a los Datos de Gracenote también se

deberán aplicar a dicho contenido y los

proveedores de dicho contenido estarán

autorizados a recibir todos los beneficios

y protecciones aquí establecidos,

disponibles para Gracenote.

Usted acepta que usará el contenido de

Gracenote (“Contenido de Gracenote”),

Datos de Gracenote, Software de

Gracenote y Servidores de Gracenote

solamente para uso personal, no

comercial. Usted acepta que no asignará,

copiará, transferirá o trasmitirá el

Contenido de Gracenote, Software de

Gracenote o Datos de Gracenote (excepto

en una Etiqueta asociada con un archivo

de música) a ningún tercero. USTED

ACEPTA QUE NO USARÁ O EXPLOTARÁ

EL CONTENIDO DE GRACENOTE, DATOS

DE GRACENOTE, SOFTWARE DE

GRACENOTE O SERVIDORES DE

GRACENOTE, EXCEPTO COMO SE

PERMITE EXPRESAMENTE EN EL

PRESENTE DOCUMENTO.

434

Apéndices

Usted acepta que sus licencias no

exclusivas para usar el Contenido de

Gracenote, Datos de Gracenote, Software

de Gracenote y Servidores de Gracenote

finalizará si viola estas restricciones. Si su

licencia finaliza, usted acepta cesar

cualquier y todo uso del Contenido de

Gracenote, Datos de Gracenote, Software

de Gracenote y Servidores de Gracenote.

Gracenote, respectivamente, reserva todos

los derechos en los Datos de Gracenote,

Software de Gracenote y Servidores de

Gracenote y Contenido de Gracenote,

incluidos todos los derechos de propiedad.

Bajo ninguna circunstancia Gracenote será

responsable de efectuarle ningún pago por

ninguna información que usted entregue,

incluido material con derechos de autor o

información de archivos de música. Usted

acepta que Gracenote pueda imponer sus

respectivos derechos, en forma colectiva

o por separado, en este acuerdo ante

usted, directamente en el nombre de cada

compañía.

Gracenote usa un identificador único para

rastrear consultas para fines estadísticos.

El objetivo de un identificador numérico

asignado al azar es permitir que Gracenote

cuente las consultas sin saber nada sobre

quién es usted. Para obtener más

información, consulte la página Web

www.gracenote.com donde aparece la

Política de privacidad de Gracenote

435

Apéndices

SE LE OTORGA LICENCIA DEL SOFTWARE

DE GRACENOTE, DE CADA ELEMENTO DE

LOS DATOS DE GRACENOTE Y DEL

CONTENIDO DE GRACENOTE “COMO

ESTÁ”. GRACENOTE TAMPOCO OTORGA

NINGUNA REPRESENTACIÓN O

GARANTÍA, EXPRESA O IMPLÍCITA, CON

RESPECTO A LA PRECISIÓN DE

CUALQUIERA DE LOS DATOS DE

GRACENOTE DE LOS SERVIDORES DE

GRACENOTE O DEL CONTENIDO DE

GRACENOTE. GRACENOTE EN FORMA

COLECTIVA Y POR SEPARADO SE

RESERVA EL DERECHO DE ELIMINAR

DATOS Y/O CONTENIDO DE LOS

SERVIDORES RESPECTIVOS DE LAS

COMPAÑÍAS O, EN CASO DE GRACENOTE,

CAMBIAR LAS CATEGORÍAS DE DATOS

POR CUALQUIER CAUSA QUE

GRACENOTE ESTIME SUFICIENTE. NO SE

OTORGA NINGUNA GARANTÍA DE QUE

EL CONTENIDO DE GRACENOTE,

SOFTWARE DE GRACENOTE O

SERVIDORES DE GRACENOTE NO

PRESENTEN ERRORES O QUE EL

FUNCIONAMIENTO DEL SOFTWARE DE

GRACENOTE O DE LOS SERVIDORES DE

GRACENOTE SERÁ ININTERRUMPIDO.

GRACENOTE NO ESTÁ OBLIGADO A

PROPORCIONARLE NINGÚN TIPO DE

DATO MEJORADO O ADICIONAL QUE

GRACENOTE PUDIERA ELEGIR

PROPORCIONAR EN EL FUTURO Y TIENE

LA LIBERTAD PARA DESCONTINUAR LOS

SERVICIOS EN LÍNEA EN CUALQUIER

MOMENTO. GRACENOTE DENIEGA TODA

GARANTÍA, EXPRESA O IMPLÍCITA,

INCLUIDA, PERO SIN LIMITARSE A,

GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS DE

COMERCIABILIDAD O IDONEIDAD PARA

UN FIN EN PARTICULAR, TÍTULO Y NO

INCUMPLIMIENTO. GRACENOTE

TAMPOCO GARANTIZA LOS

RESULTADOS QUE SE OBTENDRÁN POR

EL USO DEL SOFTWARE DE GRACENOTE

O CUALQUIER SERVIDOR DE

GRACENOTE. EN NINGÚN CASO,

GRACENOTE SERÁ RESPONSABLE DE

DAÑOS POR CONSECUENCIA O

INCIDENTALES O DE CUALQUIER

PÉRDIDA DE UTILIDADES O PÉRDIDA DE

INGRESOS POR CUALQUIER OTRO

MOTIVO.

FCC ID: KMHSYNCG2

IC: 1422A-SYNCG2

Este dispositivo cumple con la Parte 15 de

las Normas de la FCC (Federal

Communications Commission) y con la

norma RSS-210 de Industry Canada. La

operación está sujeta a estas dos

condiciones: (1) este dispositivo no debiera

causar interferencia dañina y (2) este

dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier

interferencia que reciba, incluso

interferencias que pudieran causar un

funcionamiento no deseado.

ALERTA

Los cambios o modificaciones que

no sean aprobados expresamente

por la parte responsable del

cumplimiento normativo pueden invalidar

la autoridad del usuario para operar el

equipo. El término "IC" antepuesto al

número de certificación de radio, sólo

significa que se cumplen las

especificaciones técnicas de Industry

Canada.

La antena utilizada para este transmisor

no debe colocarse ni operarse junto con

ninguna otra antena o equipo de

transmisión.

436

Apéndices

Información general acerca del

mantenimiento

¿Por qué debe realizar el

mantenimiento de su vehículo?

Si acata esta programación de

mantenimiento en forma rigurosa, podrá

protegerse contra grandes gastos en

reparaciones, los que surgen como

resultado de negligencias o mantenimiento

inadecuado y posiblemente también

pueda aumentar el valor de su vehículo al

venderlo o comercializarlo. Conserve todos

los recibos del mantenimiento realizado

en su vehículo.

Se han establecido intervalos de

mantenimiento regulares para su vehículo

basados en rigurosos análisis. Es

importante que lleve su vehículo a servicio

en los intervalos adecuados. Estos

intervalos sirven para dos propósitos; el

primero para mantener la confiabilidad de

su vehículo y el segundo para mantener

bajos los costos de ser propietario del

vehículo.

Es su responsabilidad ver que se realicen

todos los mantenimientos programados

y controlar que todos los materiales

usados cumplan con las especificaciones

indicadas en este Manual del propietario.

Ver Capacidades y Especificaciones

(página 296).

Si no realiza el mantenimiento programado

se invalidará la cobertura de la garantía

con respecto a las piezas afectadas por la

falta de mantenimiento.

¿Por qué debe realizar el

mantenimiento del vehículo en su

distribuidor?

Técnicos entrenados en la fábrica

Los técnicos de servicio participan en

amplios cursos de capacitación certificada

patrocinados por la fábrica, lo que les

ayuda a volverse expertos en el

funcionamiento de su vehículo. Pregunte

a su distribuidor acerca del entrenamiento

y la certificación que han recibido sus

técnicos.

Su vehículo es muy moderno y está

fabricado con complejos sistemas de

rendimiento. Cada fabricante crea estos

sistemas usando diferentes

especificaciones y funciones de

rendimiento. Por eso es importante que le

confíe a su distribuidor autorizado los

trabajos de diagnóstico y reparación de su

vehículo.

Piezas de refacción originales® de Ford

y Motorcraft

Los distribuidores tienen en existencia

piezas de refacción de marca Ford,

Motorcraft y refacciones

remanufacturadas autorizadas por Ford.

Estas refacciones cumplen o exceden

nuestras especificaciones. Las partes que

su distribuidor instala tienen una garantía

limitada de calidad y mano de obra,

vigente en todo el país, de 12 meses o

20,000 km (12,000 millas).

Si no utiliza refacciones autorizadas por

Ford, es posible que no cumplan con

nuestras especificaciones y según la

refacción, ésta podría afectar el

cumplimiento de las emisiones.

437

Reparación del vehículo

Conveniencia

Muchos distribuidores han ampliado su

horario hasta la noche e incluso abren los

días sábado para que usted tenga más

tiempo para llevar su automóvil a servicio

y ofrecen todos los servicios en un solo

lugar. Pueden realizar cualquier servicio

que requiera su vehículo, desde un

mantenimiento general hasta reparaciones

de choques.

Nota: No todos los distribuidores tienen

horario prolongado o talleres de carrocería.

Comuníquese con su distribuidor para

obtener información.

Protección de su inversión

El mantenimiento es una inversión que

arroja dividendos en la forma de una mejor

fiabilidad, durabilidad y valor de reventa.

Para garantizar el funcionamiento

adecuado de su vehículo y de sus sistemas

de control de emisiones, es fundamental

que el mantenimiento programado se

realice en los intervalos designados para

ello.

Su vehículo está equipado con el sistema

Intelligent Oil Life Monitor®, que muestra

un mensaje en el centro de mensajes para

indicar el intervalo de servicio adecuado

para efectuar el cambio de aceite. Este

intervalo puede ser de hasta un año o

16,000 km (10,000 millas).

Cuando ACEITE MOTOR CAMBIE PRONTO

o CAMBIO ACEITE REQUERIDO aparece

en la pantalla del centro de mensajes, es

momento de cambiar el aceite. El cambio

de aceite se debe realizar en un lapso de

dos semanas u 800 km (500 millas)

después de que aparezca el mensaje

ACEITE MOTOR CAMBIE PRONTO o

CAMBIO ACEITE REQUERIDO. La función

Intelligent Oil Life Monitor® debe

restablecerse después de cada cambio de

aceite. Ver Comprobación del aceite de

motor (página 243).

Si se restablece antes de tiempo el centro

de mensajes o éste deja de funcionar,

realice el cambio de aceite cada seis

meses, 8,000 km (5,000 millas) a partir

del último cambio de aceite. Nunca espere

más de un año o 16,000 km (10,000

millas) entre intervalos de cambio de

aceite.

Su vehículo es muy moderno y está

fabricado con complejos sistemas de

rendimiento. Cada fabricante crea estos

sistemas usando diferentes

especificaciones y funciones de

rendimiento. Por eso es importante que le

confíe a su distribuidor autorizado los

trabajos de diagnóstico y reparación de su

vehículo.

Recomendamos intervalos de

mantenimiento para diversas refacciones

y sistemas de componentes en base a

pruebas de ingeniería. Confiamos en estas

pruebas para determinar el kilometraje

más adecuado para reemplazar aceites y

líquidos con el fin de proteger su vehículo

al menor costo general y recomendamos

programas de mantenimiento que derivan

de la información de mantenimiento

programado.

Recomendamos encarecidamente usar

solo refacciones marca Ford y Motorcraft

originales o refacciones remanufacturadas

autorizadas por Ford, ya que están

diseñadas para su vehículo.

Aditivos y sustancias químicas

Los aditivos y sustancias químicas

recomendados se indican en este Manual

de propietario y en el Manual del taller.

Para el mantenimiento normal no se

recomienda agregar otras sustancias

químicas ni aditivos no aprobados por Ford

Motor Company. Consulte su Manual de

garantía para obtener información

completa sobre la garantía.

438

Reparación del vehículo

Aceites, líquidos y vaciado

En muchos casos, el cambio de color de

un líquido es una característica de

funcionamiento normal y no indica

necesariamente que haya un problema o

que sea necesario cambiarlo. Sin embargo,

los líquidos que cambian de color, y que

además muestran signos de

sobrecalentamiento o contaminación con

materias extrañas, deben ser

inspeccionados inmediatamente por un

experto calificado, como los técnicos

capacitados en fábrica de su distribuidor

autorizado.

Los aceites y líquidos de su vehículo se

deben cambiar en los intervalos

especificados o al realizar una reparación.

El lavado es una manera viable de cambiar

el líquido de muchos subsistemas del

vehículo durante el mantenimiento

programado. Es importante que los

sistemas se laven únicamente con líquido

nuevo que sea el mismo que se requiere

para llenar y operar el sistema, o utilizando

una sustancia química de lavado aprobada

por Ford.

Revisiones y servicios del propietario

Todos los meses o en intervalos de seis

meses deben realizarse algunas revisiones

e inspecciones de mantenimiento básicas.

Revisar cada mes

• Nivel de aceite del motor.

• El funcionamiento de todas las luces

interiores y exteriores.

• Grado de desgaste y presión de inflado

de las llantas, incluyendo la llanta de

refacción.

• Nivel del líquido lavaparabrisas.

Revisar cada seis meses

• Conexiones de la batería. Límpielas si

es necesario.

• Que los orificios de drenado de la

carrocería y de las puertas no tengas

obstrucciones. Límpielos si es

necesario.

• El nivel del líquido refrigerante del

motor y la concentración del líquido

refrigerante.

• Que los burletes de las puertas no

estén desgastados. Lubríquelos si es

necesario.

• El funcionamiento correcto de las

bisagras, los pestillos y las cerraduras

exteriores. Lubríquelos si es necesario.

• Que el freno de estacionamiento

funcione correctamente.

• Que los cinturones de seguridad y las

trabas de los asientos no estén

desgastados y que funcionen

correctamente.

• El buen funcionamiento de las luces

de advertencia de seguridad (frenos,

ABS, bolsas de aire y cinturones de

seguridad).

• Funcionamiento del rocío del

lavaparabrisas y los limpiaparabrisas.

Limpie o reemplace las hojas, según

sea necesario.

Inspección multipunto

Para que su vehículo funcione en forma

correcta, es importante que se revisen

regularmente los sistemas en su vehículo.

Esto puede ayudar a identificar problemas

potenciales y a evitar problemas mayores.

Recomendamos que se realice la siguiente

inspección multipunto en cada intervalo

de mantenimiento programado para

asegurarse de que su vehículo funcione

correctamente.

439

Reparación del vehículo

Inspección multipunto

Funcionamiento del sistema de luces de

emergencia

Bandas impulsoras de accesorios

Funcionamiento del claxonNivel de carga de la batería

Radiador, enfriador, calefactor y mangueras

del A/A

Filtro de aire del motor

Fugas o daños en los componentes de la

suspensión

Sistema de escape

Dirección y su varillajeFuncionamiento las luces exteriores

Grado de desgaste y presión de inflado de

las llantas (incluyendo la de refacción)

Niveles de líquidos

; rellene si fuera nece-

sario

Parabrisas en busca de fracturas, desporti-

lladuras o golpes de piedras

Fugas de aceite y otros líquidos y lubri-

cantes

Funcionamiento del rocío del lavapara-

brisas y los limpiaparabrisas

Las botas cubrepolvo de la semiflecha

Frenos, depósito de recuperación del líquido refrigerante, transmisión automática y

lavaparabrisas

Recuerde preguntarle al asesor o al técnico

de servicio de su distribuidor sobre la

inspección multipunto del vehículo. Es un

formato completo para realizar una

inspección minuciosa de su vehículo. Es

una lista de verificación que le proporciona

información inmediata acerca de la

condición general de su vehículo. Con él

sabrá lo que se revisó, lo que está bien, y

los componentes que podrían requerir

atención futura o inmediata. La inspección

multipunto del vehículo es otra manera de

mantener su vehículo en buen estado.

Mantenimiento programado

normal

Intelligent Oil Life Monitor®

Su vehículo está equipado con el sistema

Intelligent Oil Life Monitor, que determina

cuándo es necesario cambiar el aceite del

motor según el uso del vehículo. Puesto

que usa varios factores importantes para

efectuar sus cálculos, este sistema ayuda

a reducir el costo de mantenimiento del

vehículo y, al mismo tiempo, reduce los

residuos ambientales.

Esto significa que no tendrá que recordar

cambiar el aceite según un programa de

kilometraje (millaje); el vehículo le

informará cuando sea necesario cambiar

el aceite al mostrar ACEITE MOTOR

CAMBIE PRONTO o CAMBIO ACEITE

REQUERIDO en el centro de mensajes.

440

Reparación del vehículo

La siguiente tabla proporciona ejemplos

de uso del vehículo y su impacto en los

intervalos de cambio de aceite del motor.

Se proporciona únicamente como guía.

Los intervalos reales para el cambio de

aceite del motor dependen de diversos

factores y generalmente disminuyen al

aumentar la severidad del uso.

Cuándo esperar que aparezca el mensaje CAMBIO ACEITE REQUERIDO

Uso del vehículo y ejemplosKilómetros (millas)

Normal

7500-10000

(12000-16000)

Transporte normal al trabajo con manejo en carreteras

Con poco o ningún arrastre o carga

Caminos planos o con pendientes moderadas

Sin ralentí prolongado

Severo

5000-7499

(8000-11999)

Arrastre o carga de moderada a pesada

Condiciones montañosas o de campo traviesa

Ralentí prolongado

Operación prolongada en climas calientes o fríos

Extremo

3000-4999

(4000-7999)

Carga o remolque máximo

Operación en climas calientes o fríos extremos

En cada intervalo de cambio de aceite, según lo indique el centro de mensajes

Cambie el aceite del motor y el filtro.

Gire las llantas.

Realice una inspección multipunto (recomendado).

Inspeccione el nivel de aceite de la transmisión automática. Consulte a su distribuidor

para satisfacer sus requerimientos.

Inspeccione los patines, las zapatas, los rotores, los tambores, las balatas y las

mangueras de los frenos, y el freno de estacionamiento.

Inspeccione el filtro de aire de la cabina.

Inspeccione la resistencia del sistema de enfriamiento del motor y las mangueras.

441

Reparación del vehículo

En cada intervalo de cambio de aceite, según lo indique el centro de mensajes

Inspeccione el sistema de escape y las pantallas térmicas.

Inspeccione el eje trasero y las juntas cardán. Lubrique cualquier área con conexiones

de engrase (vehículos 4WD).

Inspeccione las botas de la semiflecha.

Inspeccione el varillaje de la dirección, juntas de rótula, suspensión, extremos de barras

de acoplamiento, eje de transmisión y juntas cardán. Lubrique cualquier área con

conexiones de engrase (vehículos 4WD).

Inspeccione si las llantas están desgastadas y mida la profundidad de la banda de

rodadura.

Inspeccione las ruedas (rines) y los componentes relacionados en busca de ruido

anormal, desgaste, flojedad o arrastre.

No espere más de un año o 16,000 km (10,000 millas) entre intervalos de servicio.

Restablezca la función Intelligent Oil Life Monitor® después de cada cambio de aceite

y filtro del motor. Ver Comprobación del aceite de motor (página 243).

Puntos de mantenimiento adicionales

Reemplace el filtro de aire de la cabina.Cada 32000 km (20000

millas)

Reemplace el filtro de aire del motor.Cada 48000 km (30000

millas)

Cambie el refrigerante del motor.

Cada 160000 km (100000

millas)

Reemplace las bujías.

Cada 160000 km (100000

millas)

Inspeccione la o las bandas de accesorios.

442

Reparación del vehículo

Puntos de mantenimiento adicionales

Cambie el líquido de la transmisión automática.

Cada 240000 km (150000

millas)

Inspeccione la o las bandas de accesorios.

Los puntos de mantenimiento adicionales se pueden realizar antes de 4,800 km (3,000

millas) contados a partir del último cambio de aceite y filtro del motor. No exceda la

distancia designada para el intervalo.

Reemplazo inicial a los seis años o 160,000 km (100,000 millas); a partir de entonces,

cada tres años u 80,000 km (50,000 millas).

Realice una inspección de seguimiento a los 192,000 km (120,000 millas).

Si no se han reemplazado durante los últimos 160,000 km (100,000 millas).

Registro del programa de mantenimiento

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

443

Reparación del vehículo

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

444

Reparación del vehículo

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

445

Reparación del vehículo

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

446

Reparación del vehículo

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

Condiciones de manejo severo

Si el vehículo se opera por lo general en

cualquiera de las siguientes condiciones,

debe realizarse el mantenimiento adicional

que se indica. Si opera su vehículo

ocasionalmente en cualquiera de estas

condiciones, no es necesario realizar el

mantenimiento adicional. Para conocer

las recomendaciones específicas, consulte

al asesor o técnico de servicio de su

distribuidor autorizado.

447

Reparación del vehículo

Realice los servicios indicados en las

siguientes tablas cuando se especifique o

dentro de los 4,800 km (3,000 millas)

siguientes a la aparición del mensaje de

CAMBIO ACEITE REQUERIDO en el centro

de mensajes.

• Ejemplo 1: El mensaje CAMBIO ACEITE

REQUERIDO se enciende a los 46,270

km (28,751 millas); realice el cambio

de aceite de la transmisión automática

de los 48,000 km (30,000 millas).

• Ejemplo 2: El mensaje CAMBIO

ACEITE REQUERIDO no ha aparecido

pero el odómetro indica 48,000 km

(30,000 millas); reemplace el filtro de

aire del motor (por ejemplo, si la

función Intelligent Oil Life Monitor® se

restableció a los 40,000 km [25,000

millas]). )

Arrastre de un remolque o uso de un aditamento de carga para el techo

Cambie el aceite y el filtro de aceite del motor tal como

lo indique el centro de mensajes y realice los servicios

indicados en la tabla de Mantenimiento programado

normal.

Según sea necesario

· Inspeccione y lubrique las juntas cardán.Inspeccione con frecuencia

y dé servicio, según se

requiera

· Consulte elementos de mantenimiento del eje en

Excepciones.

Cambie el líquido de la transmisión automática.Cada 48000 km (30000

millas)

Intenso funcionamiento en ralentí o manejo a baja velocidad por largas distancias, como

en el caso de uso comercial (por ejemplo, repartos, taxi o patrullas)

Cambie el aceite y el filtro de aceite del motor tal como

lo indique el centro de mensajes y realice los servicios

indicados en la tabla de Mantenimiento programado

normal.

Según sea necesario

· Reemplace el filtro de aire de la cabina, si está equipado.Inspeccione con frecuencia

y dé servicio, según se

requiera

· Reemplace el filtro de aire del motor.

Cambie el líquido de la transmisión automática.Cada 48000 km (30000

millas)

Reemplace las bujías.Cada 96000 km (60000

millas)

448

Reparación del vehículo

Uso en condiciones de polvo o arena, como en caminos sin pavimentar o polvorientos

· Reemplace el filtro de aire de la cabina, si está equipado.Inspeccione con frecuencia

y dé servicio, según se

requiera

· Reemplace el filtro de aire del motor.

· Inspeccione las ruedas (rines) y los componentes relacio-

nados en busca de ruido anormal, desgaste, flojedad o

arrastre.

Cada 8,000 km (5,000

millas)

· Rote las llantas, inspeccione si las llantas están desgas-

tadas y mida la profundidad de la banda de rodadura.

· Cambie el aceite del motor y el filtro.Cada 8,000 km (5,000

millas) o 6 meses · Realice una inspección multipunto.

Cambie el líquido de la transmisión automática.Cada 48000 km (30000

millas)

Restablezca la función Intelligent Oil Life Monitor® después de cada cambio de aceite y

filtro del motor. Ver Comprobación del aceite de motor (página 243).

Uso exclusivo de E85 (solo vehículos de combustible flexible)

Si utiliza exclusivamente E85, llene completamente el

tanque de combustible con gasolina sin plomo regular.

Cada cambio de aceite

Registro de condiciones especiales de funcionamiento

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

449

Reparación del vehículo

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

450

Reparación del vehículo

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

Excepciones

Existen varias excepciones a la

Programación normal:

451

Reparación del vehículo

Mantenimiento normal del eje del

vehículo: Los ejes traseros y las unidades

de toma de fuerza (PTO) con lubricante

sintético y las camionetas de servicio

liviano equipadas con ejes diseñados por

Ford están lubricados de por vida; No

revise ni cambie estos lubricantes, a menos

que exista sospecha de una fuga, se

requiera servicio o el eje se haya sumergido

en agua. Durante períodos prolongados de

arrastre de remolques a temperaturas

exteriores de más de 21 °C (70 °F) y

conducción con el acelerador totalmente

abierto por períodos prolongados a más

de 72 km/h (45 mph), los lubricantes no

sintéticos del eje trasero se deben

reemplazar cada 4,800 km (3,000 millas)

o tres meses, lo que ocurra primero. Este

intervalo puede obviarse si se llena el eje

con lubricante de velocidades sintético

75W140 que cumpla con la especificación

WSL-M2C192-A de Ford, número de

refacción F1TZ-19580-B o equivalente.

Agregue modificador de fricción XL-3

(EST-M2C118-A) o equivalente para

completar el relleno de los ejes traseros

Traction-Lok. Ver Especificaciones

técnicas (página 299).

Mantenimiento del eje de vehículos

policiales, taxis y de alquiler: Cambie el

aceite del eje trasero cada 160,000 km

(100,000 millas). El cambio de aceite del

eje trasero se puede omitir si el eje se llenó

con un aceite de transmisión sintético

75W140 que cumpla con la especificación

WSL-M2C192-A de Ford, número de

refacción F1TZ-19580-B o equivalente.

Agregue 118 mL (cuatro onzas) de aditivo

modificador de fricción XL-3

(EST-M2C118-A) o equivalente para

completar el relleno de los ejes traseros

Traction-Lok. Cambie el lubricante del eje

cada vez que el eje haya estado sumergido

en agua.

Reemplazo del filtro de combustible

en California: Si el vehículo está

registrado en California, el Consejo de

recursos atmosféricos de California ha

establecido que el hecho de no realizar

este punto de mantenimiento no anulará

la garantía de emisión de gases, ni limitará

la demanda de llamado a revisión antes

de que termine la vida útil del vehículo. Sin

embargo, Ford Motor Company lo exhorta

a que realice todos los servicios de

mantenimiento recomendados en los

intervalos especificados y que registre

todos los servicios realizados al vehículo.

Intervalos de cambio de aceite en

climas cálidos: En el caso de los vehículos

que operan en Oriente Medio, África del

Norte, el Sub-Sahara Africano u otros

lugares con climas semejantes y usan un

aceite definido por el American Petroleum

Institute (API) para motores de gasolina

(marca de certificación) de calidad SM o

SN, el intervalo de cambio normal del

aceite es de 8,000 km (5,000 millas). Si

los aceites API SM o SN no están

disponibles, el intervalo de servicio del

cambio de aceite es de 4,800 km (3,000

millas).

Reemplazo del filtro de aire del motor

y el filtro de aire de la cabina: La vida útil

del filtro de aire del motor y del filtro de

aire de la cabina dependen de la

exposición a condiciones de polvo y

suciedad. Los vehículos que funcionan en

tales condiciones requerirán inspección y

reemplazo más frecuentes del filtro de aire

del motor y el filtro de aire de la cabina.

Registro de cambio de refrigerante

del motor

Cambio inicial: Seis años o 160,000 km

(100,000 millas), lo que ocurra primero.

Después del cambio inicial: Cada tres

años u 80,000 km (50,000 millas).

452

Reparación del vehículo

Registro de cambio de refrigerante del motor

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

453

Reparación del vehículo

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

454

Reparación del vehículo

4WD

Véase: Doble Tracción.......................................167

A/C

Véase: Control de clima...................................125

Abridor Universal de Cochera...................141

Sistema de control inalámbrico

HomeLink®.......................................................141

ABS

Véase: Frenos........................................................173

Accesorios .....................................................302

Estilo de vida.......................................................302

Estilo exterior......................................................302

Estilo interior.......................................................302

Tranquilidad........................................................302

Accesorios

Véase: Recomendación de partes de repuesto

.................................................................................12

Acerca de este Manual....................................7

Protección del medio ambiente........................7

Acuerdo de Licencia del Usuario............418

Acuerdo de licencia de usuario final (EULA)

de SYNC®........................................................418

Advertencias e Indicadores

Audibles..........................................................92

Campanilla de advertencia de faros

encendidos........................................................92

Campanilla de advertencia de freno de

estacionamiento activado...........................92

Campanilla de advertencia de llave en el

encendido..........................................................92

Aire acondicionado

Véase: Control de clima...................................125

Ajuste de altura de los cinturones de

seguridad........................................................32

Ajuste de los Faros Principales...............252

Ajuste de la alineación horizontal...............254

Ajuste de la alineación vertical.....................252

Ajuste del Volante de Dirección................72

Alarma

Véase: Alarma Anti-Robo.................................70

Alarma Anti-Robo..........................................70

Activación de la alarma.......................................71

Desactivación de la alarma...............................71

Almacenamiento de la parte inferior

trasera del piso...........................................196

Piso del compartimiento del

copiloto.............................................................196

Piso para carga ajustable................................196

Sistema de manejo de carga.........................196

Almacenamiento del Vehículo...............265

Batería...................................................................266

Carrocería.............................................................265

Frenos....................................................................266

Información general.........................................265

Motor......................................................................265

Neumáticos.........................................................266

Otros puntos misceláneos.............................266

Retiro del vehículo del

almacenamiento..........................................266

Sistema de combustible................................266

Sistema de refrigeración................................266

Apéndices.......................................................418

Apertura y cierre del cofre........................239

Aplicaciones y servicios SYNC® ...........325

911 Assist...............................................................325

Informe de mantenimiento del

vehículo............................................................328

Servicios SYNC: Tráfico, indicaciones e

información (TDI).........................................329

Arranque a control remoto........................132

Ajustes automáticos..........................................132

Asientos y dispositivos enfriados.................133

Último ajuste........................................................133

Arranque de un motor de gasolina ........151

Información importante sobre la

ventilación........................................................152

Protección contra los gases de

escape................................................................152

Arranque en frío del vehículo...................218

Arranque con cables pasacorriente.............219

Conexión de los cables

pasacorriente..................................................218

Preparación del vehículo.................................218

Retiro de los cables pasacorriente...............219

Arranque sin llave.........................................150

Detención del moto cuando el vehículo está

detenido............................................................150

Detención del moto cuando el vehículo está

en movimiento.................................................151

Rearranque rápido...............................................151

455

Índice alfabético

Arranque y Paro del Motor........................149

Información general..........................................149

Véase: Asegurar y Desasegurar......................60

Asegurar y Desasegurar..............................60

Activación del acceso inteligente...................61

Ahorrador de batería...........................................63

Apertura inteligente para llaves de acceso

inteligente...........................................................61

Bloqueo y desbloqueo automático de las

puertas................................................................62

Control remoto.....................................................60

Desbloqueo inteligente de seguros para el

transmisor integrado a la llave....................61

Salida iluminada..................................................63

Seguros eléctricos de las puertas.................60

Sistema de entrada iluminada.......................63

Asientos...........................................................134

Asientos calentados...................................140

Asientos eléctricos.......................................137

Soporte lumbar eléctrico.................................138

Asientos Elevados..........................................19

Tipos de asientos auxiliares.............................20

Asientos manuales......................................136

Ajuste de la altura del asiento del

conductor..........................................................137

Ajuste de reclinación..........................................137

Movimiento del asiento hacia atrás y hacia

delante...............................................................136

Asientos para Niños........................................17

Asientos traseros..........................................139

Ajuste de reclinación.........................................139

Para desplegar el respaldo del

asiento...............................................................140

Para plegar el respaldo del asiento.............140

Asistencia Activa para

Estacionarse...............................................180

Conducción automática hacia el espacio

de estacionamiento......................................182

Desactivación de la característica de

asistencia de estacionamiento................183

Solución de problemas del sistema............183

Uso de Asistencia de estacionamiento

activa...................................................................181

Asistencia al cliente ...................................220

Asistencia de arranque en

pendientes...................................................165

Uso del sistema de arranque asistido en

pendientes (HSA).........................................166

Asistencia de estacionamiento ..............178

Sistema delantero de sensores.....................179

Sistema trasero de sensores..........................178

Asistencia en carretera...............................216

Vehículos vendidos en Canadá: Cómo

conseguir asistencia en el camino...........217

Vehículos vendidos en Canadá: Uso de la

asistencia en el camino................................217

Vehículos vendidos en EE.UU.: cómo

conseguir asistencia en el camino..........216

Vehículos vendidos en Estados Unidos :

Uso de la asistencia en el camino...........216

Atenuador de Iluminación de Tablerol

de Instrumentos..........................................79

Vehículos con faros para niebla

delanteros..........................................................79

Vehículos sin faros para niebla

delanteros..........................................................79

Ayudas de Conducción..............................190

Ayudas de Estacionamiento....................178

Bolsa de Aire para Rodillas..........................41

Bolsas de aire del conductor y del

pasajero .........................................................39

Ajuste adecuado de asiento de conductor

y pasajero delantero......................................40

Los niños y las bolsas de aire..........................40

Bolsas de Aire Laterales..............................44

Borrado de toda la información de

MyKeys ...........................................................55

Cabeceras........................................................134

Ajuste de las cabeceras....................................135

Cadenas para nieve

Véase: Uso de cadenas para nieve.............284

Caja de velocidades

Véase: Transmisión ...........................................163

Calefacción

Véase: Control de clima...................................125

456

Índice alfabético

Calentador del Bloque del Motor...........152

Uso del calefactor de bloque del

motor..................................................................153

Calidad del combustible...........................155

Cómo escoger el combustible

correcto.............................................................155

Recomendaciones de octanaje....................155

Véase: Cámara de vista trasera ...................185

Cámara de vista trasera ............................185

Uso del sistema de cámara

retrovisora........................................................185

Cambio de focos..........................................254

Condensación en los conjuntos de

luces...................................................................254

Reemplazo de focos de las luces traseras,

de freno y direccionales..............................257

Reemplazo de focos de niebla,

estacionamiento y direccionales............256

Reemplazo del conjunto de luces

traseras..............................................................257

Reemplazo del foco de la luz de

placa..................................................................258

Reemplazo del foco de la luz superior de

freno..................................................................258

Reemplazo de los focos de las luces

indicadoras laterales...................................256

Reemplazo de los focos de los faros..........255

Reemplazo de los focos de los faros

HID......................................................................256

Cambio de fusibles.....................................226

Fusible(s)..............................................................226

Cambio de la batería del vehículo........249

Cambio de las hojas del limpiador.......250

Cambio del filtro de aire del motor .......251

...................................................................................252

Motor 2.5L.............................................................252

Motores 1.6L y 2.0L EcoBoost®.....................251

Cambio de una rueda................................289

Información del conjunto de rueda o llanta

de refacción distinta...................................290

Procedimiento de cambio de llantas..........291

Capacidades y Especificaciones...........296

Especificaciones técnicas..............................299

Centro de mensajes

Véase: Pantallas de información...................93

Cinturones de Seguridad............................28

Funcionamiento...................................................28

Claxon

Véase: Freno de estacionamiento................174

Climatización................................................405

Comandos de voz de control de aire

acondicionado y calefacción...................406

Código de la Transmisión.........................299

Colocación de los Asientos para

Niños..................................................................17

Combustible y llenado...............................154

Cómo obtener asistencia fuera de EE.

UU. y Canadá .............................................223

Cómo obtener los servicios necesarios

.........................................................................220

Fuera de la ciudad.............................................220

Cómo ordenar otro Manual del

propietario ..................................................225

Cómo obtener un manual del propietario

en francés........................................................225

Compartimientos para

Almacenaje.................................................148

Comprobación del aceite

Véase: Comprobación del aceite de

motor.................................................................243

Comprobación del aceite de

motor.............................................................243

Cómo agregar aceite de motor.....................243

Restablecimiento del sistema de monitoreo

de la vida útil del aceite.............................244

Comprobación de las hojas del

limpiador.....................................................250

Comprobación del estado del sistema

MyKey .............................................................56

Comprobación del fluido de la dirección

hidráulica.....................................................248

Comprobación del fluido del

lavador..........................................................248

Comprobación del refrigerante

Véase: Comprobación del refrigerante de

motor.................................................................244

457

Índice alfabético

Comprobación del refrigerante de

motor.............................................................244

Climas extremos................................................246

Líquido refrigerante del motor

reciclado..........................................................246

Llenado del líquido refrigerante del

motor.................................................................245

Lo que debe saber sobre el enfriamiento

de seguridad a prueba de fallas..............247

Revisión del líquido refrigerante del

motor.................................................................244

Comprobaciones esenciales de

remolque.....................................................209

Al arrastrar un remolque..................................210

Antes de arrastrar un remolque....................210

Cadenas de seguridad....................................209

Enganches de arrastre....................................209

Frenos del remolque........................................209

Luces del remolque..........................................209

Compuerta Levadiza Eléctrica..................64

Apertura y cierre de la compuerta

levadiza...............................................................65

Cómo establecer la altura de la compuerta

levadiza abierta...............................................66

Detección de obstáculos..................................66

Compuerta levadiza manual ....................63

Computadora de viaje.................................96

Consumo promedio de combustible...........96

Distancia antes de quedar el tanque vacío

(DTE)...................................................................96

Odómetro de viaje...............................................96

Restablecimiento de la computadora de

viaje......................................................................96

Temporizador de viaje........................................96

Concentrador de medios............................121

Conducción con remolque.......................207

Conducción económica..............................213

Conducción por el agua.............................213

Consejos para Conducir con Frenos

Antibloqueo..................................................173

Consejos para el control del clima

interior ...........................................................128

Calefacción del interior rápidamente.........129

Consejos generales............................................128

Desempañar la ventana lateral en clima

frío.........................................................................131

Enfriamiento del interior

rápidamente....................................................130

La configuración recomendada

calefacción.......................................................129

La configuración recomendada

enfriamiento ...................................................130

Rendimiento de enfriamiento máximo en

tablero de instrumentos o tablero de

instrumentos y piso........................................131

Vehículo detenido durante períodos

extendidos durante temperaturas

ambiente extremadamente altas...........130

Consola central.............................................148

Consola del toldo.........................................148

Consumo de combustible..........................161

Cálculo del rendimiento del

combustible......................................................161

Llenado del tanque.............................................161

Control Automático de Clima..................126

Control de temperatura....................................127

Desactivación de mono modo.......................127

Mono modo...........................................................127

Reactivación de mono modo.........................128

Control de Audio.............................................72

Tipo 1..........................................................................72

Tipo 2.........................................................................73

Tipo 3.........................................................................73

Control de Bamboleo del

Remolque....................................................207

Control de clima............................................125

Control de clima manual...........................125

Control de Crucero.........................................74

Funcionamiento.................................................188

Control de Crucero

Véase: Control de Crucero..............................188

Véase: Uso del control de crucero...............188

Control de estabilidad................................176

Funcionamiento..................................................176

Control de Iluminación.................................78

Destellador de los faros.....................................78

Luces altas..............................................................78

458

Índice alfabético

Control de la Pantalla de

Información....................................................74

Control de tracción.......................................175

Funcionamiento..................................................175

Control de Voz.................................................74

Controles de MyFord Touch®..........................74

Creación de MyKey........................................55

Programación/Cambio de configuración

opcional..............................................................55

Cubiertas del compartimiento de

equipajes......................................................196

Cuidado de las llantas...............................270

Glosario de terminología sobre

llantas................................................................272

Índice de desgaste (Treadwear)...................271

Información acerca del grado de

uniformidad de la calidad de las

llantas................................................................270

Información contenida en el costado de la

llanta..................................................................272

Temperatura A B C..............................................271

Tracción (Traction) AA, A, B y C.....................271

Cuidado del vehículo.................................260

Información general.........................................260

Denuncia de defectos de seguridad

(únicamente en Canadá) .....................225

Denuncia de defectos de seguridad

(únicamente en EE. UU.) ......................225

Descansabrazos del asiento

trasero...........................................................140

Desmontaje de faros..................................254

Detección de Problemas de MyKey.........57

Diagnóstico de fallas SYNC® .................341

Dirección .........................................................195

Dirección hidráulica eléctrica.........................195

Disposición de una Bolsa de Aire.............47

Doble Tracción...............................................167

DRL

Véase: Faros de Operación Diurna................80

Emergencias en el Camino.......................216

En California (únicamente en EE. UU.)

...........................................................................221

Encendido Automático de Faros

Principales......................................................78

Encerado..........................................................261

Entrada sin Llave............................................67

TECLADO DE ENTRADA SIN LLAVE

SECURICODE™...............................................67

Entretenimiento...........................................365

Audio Bluetooth.................................................385

CD............................................................................379

Entradas de A/V.................................................387

Exploración del contenido del

dispositivo.......................................................366

Radio AM/FM......................................................367

Radio satelital SIRIUS® (si está

activado)..........................................................373

Ranura para tarjeta SD y puerto USB.........381

Reproductores de medios, formatos e

información de metadatos

compatibles....................................................385

Equipo Móvil de Comunicaciones.............13

Especificaciones del motor.....................296

Enrutado de correa (drivebelt)....................296

Especificaciónes Técnicas

Véase: Capacidades y

Especificaciones...........................................296

Espejo retrovisor interior.............................86

Espejo de atenuación automática................86

Espejos retrovisores exteriores.................84

Espejo para puntos ciegos...............................85

Espejos con memoria.........................................85

Espejos eléctricos exteriores...........................84

Espejos para puntos ciegos

integrados..........................................................85

Espejos plegables exteriores...........................85

Espejos térmicos exteriores.............................85

Espejos retrovisores

Véase: Ventanas y espejos retrovisores.......83

Véase: Ventanas y espejos retrovisores

calentados.........................................................131

Etiqueta de certificación del

vehículo........................................................298

Faros de Niebla Delanteros.......................80

Faros de Niebla Delanteros

Véase: Faros de Niebla Delanteros...............80

Faros de Operación Diurna........................80

459

Índice alfabético

Filtro de aire para la cabina ......................132

Filtro de combustible ................................248

Ford Credit..........................................................11

(EE.UU. solamente)...............................................11

Ford Protect..................................................304

PLANES DE SERVICIO (CANADÁ

SOLAMENTE)................................................306

PLANES DE SERVICIO (Estados Unidos

solamente).....................................................304

Freno de estacionamiento........................174

Frenos................................................................173

Información general...........................................173

Funcionamiento sin combustible...........155

Carga de combustible con un recipiente

portátil...............................................................156

Función de memoria...................................138

Guardado de una posición pasiva................139

Guardado de una posición

preprogramada..............................................139

Recuerdo de una posición de asiento

almacenada....................................................139

Fusibles...........................................................226

Glosario de Símbolos......................................7

Iluminación.......................................................78

Iluminación Interior.......................................80

Luz interior delantera...........................................81

Luz interior trasera................................................81

Indicaciones de conducción con ABS

Véase: Consejos para Conducir con Frenos

Antibloqueo......................................................173

Indicaciones de conducción.....................213

Indicadores de Luces Direccionales.......80

Indicadores.......................................................88

Indicador de combustible.................................89

Indicador de temperatura del líquido

refrigerante del motor...................................89

Pantalla de información...................................88

Indicadores y luces de advertencia.........89

Abrochar cinturón de seguridad......................91

Aceite de motor....................................................90

Advertencia de llanta con baja presión........91

Batería......................................................................90

Bolsa de aire delantera......................................89

Control de crucero (C/C)..................................90

Control de estabilidad........................................92

Control de estabilidad apagado.....................92

Espejo para puntos ciegos...............................90

Faros de niebla delanteros................................91

Información.............................................................91

Intermitente...........................................................90

Luces altas...............................................................91

Luces de estacionamiento................................91

Nivel de combustible bajo.................................91

Servicio del motor a la brevedad....................91

Sistema de frenos...............................................90

Sistema de frenos antibloqueo.....................90

Información General sobre las

Frecuencias de Radio................................48

Acceso inteligente (AI)......................................48

Información...................................................394

911 Assist®............................................................401

Calendario.............................................................401

Informe de mantenimiento del

vehículo............................................................403

Notificaciones.....................................................401

Servicios SYNC (si está equipado, EE.UU.

solamente).....................................................394

SIRIUS Travel Link.............................................398

Inmovilizador del motor

Véase: Sistema Pasivo Anti-Robo.................69

Instalación de asientos para niños ..........21

Usando CINTURONES PÉLVICOS Y DE

HOMBROS..........................................................21

Uso de anclajes inferiores Y correas para

niños (LATCH)..................................................24

Uso de correas de sujeción...............................26

Interruptor de arranque

Véase: Interruptor de encendido..................149

Interruptor de corte de

combustible.................................................217

Interruptor de encendido..........................149

Introducción........................................................7

460

Índice alfabético

Lavado de automóviles

Véase: Limpieza del exterior.........................260

Lavado

Véase: Limpieza del exterior.........................260

Lavadores

Véase: Limpiadores y Lavadores....................75

Lava Parabrisas...............................................76

Límite de Carga.............................................198

Carga del vehículo: con y sin

remolque..........................................................198

Limpiadores Automáticos...........................75

Limpiadores y Lavadores.............................75

Limpiador y Lavador de Medallón............77

Lavador de la ventana trasera.........................77

Limpiador de la ventana trasera.....................77

Limpia Parabrisas...........................................75

Barrido intermitente............................................75

Limpiadores dependientes de la

velocidad.............................................................75

Limpieza de Asientos de Piel..................264

Limpieza de las ruedas de

aleación........................................................264

Limpieza de las Ventanas y las Hojas de

los Limpiadores.........................................262

Limpieza del exterior.................................260

Limpieza de piezas exteriores de

plástico..............................................................261

Parte inferior de la carrocería.........................261

Piezas cromadas exteriores..........................260

Limpieza del interior...................................263

Limpieza del Motor......................................261

Limpieza del Panel de Instrumentos y

Cristal del Tablero....................................263

Llantas

Véase: Ruedas y llantas..................................268

Llaves y Controles Remotos......................48

Funcionamiento...................................................48

Llenado ...........................................................156

Sistema de combustible sin tapón de Easy

Fuel®...................................................................157

Luces de emergencia...................................217

Luz Ambiental..................................................81

Luz de advertencia del cinturón de

seguridad y repique indicador ...............33

Condiciones de funcionamiento....................33

Mantenimiento del sistema de sujeción

para niños y de los cinturones de

seguridad........................................................35

Mantenimiento.............................................238

Información general.........................................238

Mensajes de información...........................96

Acceso sin llave del vehículo.........................100

Alarma......................................................................97

Asistencia de arranque en

pendientes.......................................................100

Asistencia para estacionamiento................102

Batería y sistema de carga...............................98

Bolsa de aire...........................................................97

Control de tracción............................................105

Dirección hidráulica...........................................103

Freno de estacionamiento..............................103

Iluminación............................................................101

Indicador de mensajes.......................................97

Mantenimiento.....................................................101

Motor........................................................................99

MyKey......................................................................102

Puertas.....................................................................99

Sistema de arranque........................................103

Sistema de control de presión de las

llantas................................................................105

Sistema de información de puntos ciegos

y alerta de tráfico cruzado...........................98

Transmisión y tracción en las cuatro

ruedas................................................................104

Menú................................................................359

Ajuste del reloj....................................................359

Asistencia de estacionamiento

activa................................................................360

Cámara retrovisora...........................................360

Cambio del código del teclado de la

puerta...............................................................360

Configuración.......................................................361

Configuración de la pantalla.........................359

Modo valet...........................................................360

Sonido...................................................................360

Modo correcto de sentarse.......................134

Modo de Economico...................................194

Restablecimiento de modo

ecológico...........................................................195

Tipo 1.......................................................................194

Tipo 2 y 3................................................................194

461

Índice alfabético

Monitor de Punto Ciego.............................190

Sistema de información de puntos ciegos

(BLIS) con alerta de tráfico

cruzado.............................................................190

MyFord Touch®...........................................348

Información general.........................................348

MyKey®..............................................................54

Funcionamiento...................................................54

Navegación...................................................408

Actualizaciones del mapa de

navegación.......................................................415

Botones de toque rápido.................................414

Categorías de punto de interés

(POI).................................................................409

cityseekr.................................................................410

Comandos de voz de navegación................415

Configuración de sus preferencias de

navegación........................................................411

Configuración de un destino........................408

Modo de mapa....................................................412

Notas Especiales.............................................12

Aviso para los propietarios de camiones y

camionetas pickup y vehículos

utilitarios..............................................................13

Garantía limitada para vehículos

nuevos...................................................................12

Instrucciones especiales....................................12

Uso del vehículo como ambulancia...............13

Uso del vehículo con un barredor de

nieve......................................................................13

Número de identificación del

vehículo........................................................298

Opciónes Únicas de Exportación..............14

Pantallas de información............................93

Información general............................................93

Parrillas para equipaje y portadores de

carga...............................................................197

Ajuste de la barra transversal.........................197

PATS

Véase: Sistema Pasivo Anti-Robo.................69

Perclorato............................................................11

Personal Safety System™..........................37

¿Cómo funciona el sistema de seguridad

personal?............................................................37

Pesos de remolque

recomendados...........................................207

Portadores de carga

Véase: Parrillas para equipaje y portadores

de carga.............................................................197

Precauciones de seguridad......................154

Presiones de las llantas

Véase: Especificaciones técnicas................295

Productos de limpieza..............................260

Programa Auto Line de Better Business

Bureau (BBB) (únicamente en EE. UU.)

..........................................................................222

Proposición 65 de California........................11

Puerto USB.......................................................121

Puntos de remolque....................................210

Instalación del anillo de remolque..............210

Remolque del vehíclo en cuatro

ruedas..................................................................211

Ubicación del anillo de remolque................210

Radio satelital.................................................121

Factores de recepción de radio

satelital..............................................................122

Localización y solución de problemas........123

Número de serie electrónico de radio

satelital (ESN)................................................123

Servicio de radio satelital SIRIUS®..............122

Recomendación de partes de repuesto

.............................................................................12

Garantía de las refacciones...............................12

Mantenimiento programado y reparaciones

mecánicas...........................................................12

Reparaciones de choques..................................12

Recordatorio de Cinturones de

Seguridad.......................................................33

Belt-Minder®.........................................................33

Reemplazo de una Llave Extraviada o

un Transmisor Remoto..............................53

Registro de datos del caso

Véase: Retención de Datos.................................9

462

Índice alfabético

Remolque del vehículo sobre las cuatro

ruedas.............................................................212

Arrastre vacacional............................................212

Remolque de emergencia...............................212

Remolque.......................................................207

Reparación de daños menores en la

pintura............................................................261

Reparación del vehículo ...........................437

Condiciones de manejo severo....................447

Excepciones..........................................................451

Información general acerca del

mantenimiento..............................................437

Mantenimiento programado normal........440

Registro de cambio de refrigerante del

motor.................................................................452

Repuestos de Motorcraft .........................297

Retardo de Apagado de Faros

Principales......................................................79

Retención de Datos.........................................9

Grabación de datos de eventos........................9

Grabación de datos de servicio.........................9

Revisión el Compartimiento del Motor -

1.6L EcoBoost®.........................................240

Revisión el Compartimiento del Motor -

2.0L EcoBoost®.........................................241

Revisión el Compartimiento del Motor -

2.5L.................................................................242

Rodaje...............................................................213

Ruedas y llantas..........................................268

Especificaciones técnicas..............................295

Información general.........................................268

Safety Canopy®.............................................45

Seguridad de los Niños.................................15

Información general.............................................15

Seguridad.........................................................69

Seguro del cofre

Véase: Apertura y cierre del cofre................239

Seguros a Prueba de Niños.........................27

Seguros.............................................................60

Sensores de choque e indicador de

bolsas de aire ..............................................46

Sistema de audio ........................................106

Información general..........................................106

Sistema de control de emisiones .........158

Diagnóstico a bordo (OBD-II)........................159

Disponibilidad para prueba de inspección

y mantenimiento (I/M)...............................160

Sistema de detección del pasajero

delantero.........................................................41

Sistema de monitoreo de presión de las

llantas...........................................................285

Cambio de llantas con un Sistema de

monitoreo de presión de las

llantas...............................................................286

Comprensión del Sistema de monitoreo de

presión de las llantas..................................286

Sistema de Seguridad

Complementaria.........................................38

Funcionamiento...................................................38

Sistema Pasivo Anti-Robo.........................69

SecuriLock®...........................................................69

Sujecion de los Cinturones de

Seguridad.......................................................29

Cómo quitar los cinturones de seguridad

de los asientos traseros laterales...............31

Conjunto de extensión para cinturón de

seguridad............................................................32

Modos de bloqueo de los cinturones de

seguridad...........................................................30

Protección de mujeres embarazadas..........30

SYNC®.............................................................307

Información general..........................................307

Tabla de especificaciones de

fusibles..........................................................227

Caja de distribución eléctrica........................227

Caja de prefusibles............................................227

Tablero de fusibles del compartimiento de

equipaje............................................................234

Tablero de fusibles del compartimiento de

pasajeros...........................................................231

Tabla de Especificaciones de los

Focos.............................................................258

Tablero de instrumentos.............................88

Tapetes del piso............................................214

463

Índice alfabético

Techo solar.......................................................86

Apertura y cierre de la pantalla solar............87

Apertura y cierre del toldo corredizo.............87

Rebote......................................................................87

Ventilación del toldo corredizo.......................87

Teléfono..........................................................388

Asociación del teléfono por primera

vez......................................................................388

Asociación de teléfonos

subsiguientes.................................................389

Configuración del teléfono.............................392

Hacer llamadas..................................................389

Mensajes de texto..............................................391

Opciones del menú de teléfono..................390

Recepción de llamadas..................................389

Toma de entrada auxiliar..........................120

Tomas Auxiliares de Corriente................146

Tomacorriente de 110 voltios de CA............146

Ubicaciones..........................................................146

Tomas de energía auxiliares.....................146

Transmisión Automática...........................163

Comprensión de las posiciones de la

transmisión automática..............................163

palanca de interbloqueo de cambio de

velocidades del freno..................................164

Si el vehículo se atasca en lodo o

nieve...................................................................165

Transmisión automática SelectShift

Automatic®.....................................................164

Transmisión ...................................................163

Transmisor Remoto......................................48

Activación de una alarma de

emergencia.........................................................51

Arranque a control remoto................................51

Cambio de la batería..........................................49

Llave de acceso inteligente..............................49

Localizador del automóvil.................................51

Transmisores integrados a la llave................48

Transporte de carga....................................196

Transporte del vehículo...............................211

Unidad de audio - Vehículos con:

AM/FM/CD/Radio

satelital/SYNC.............................................112

Unidad de audio - Vehículos con:

AM/FM/CD/SYNC....................................109

Unidad de audio - Vehículos con:

AM/FM/CD Premium................................114

Unidad de audio - Vehículos con:

AM/FM/CD...................................................107

Unidad de audio - Vehículos con: Sony

AM/FM/CD....................................................116

Estructura de menú.............................................117

Uso de cadenas para nieve.....................284

Uso de la tracción en las cuatro ruedas

...........................................................................167

Conducción en condiciones especiales con

tracción en las cuatro ruedas...................168

Uso del control de crucero.......................188

Apagado del control de crucero...................189

Encendido del control de crucero................188

Uso del control de estabilidad.................177

AdvanceTrac® con Roll Stability Control™

(RSC®)...............................................................177

Uso del control de tracción.......................175

Mensajes y luces indicadoras del

sistema...............................................................175

Uso del reconocimiento de voz ............309

Iniciando sesión de voz...................................309

Interacción y retroalimentación del

sistema..............................................................310

Sugerencias útiles.............................................309

Uso de MyKey con un Sistema de

Arranque Remoto.......................................56

Vehículos equipados con llave de acceso

inteligente (arranque con botón)..............57

Vehículos equipados con llaves

físicas...................................................................56

Uso de SYNC® con el reproductor

multimedia .................................................332

¿Qué es esto?.....................................................333

Acceso al menú Tocar......................................337

Características del menú Medios................336

Comandos de voz de medios........................333

Conexión de un reproductor de medios

digitales al puerto USB...............................332

Configuración del sistema.............................339

464

Índice alfabético

Uso de SYNC® con el teléfono ...............312

Acceso a la configuración del

teléfono............................................................320

Acceso a las características del menú

Teléfono.............................................................317

Asociación de teléfonos

subsiguientes...................................................312

Asociación de un teléfono por primera

vez........................................................................312

Comandos de voz del teléfono......................313

Configuración del sistema..............................322

Hacer llamadas...................................................315

Mensajes de texto..............................................319

Opciones de teléfono durante una llamada

activa..................................................................315

Recepción de llamadas....................................315

Utilización del programa de

mediación/arbitraje (únicamente en

Canadá) .......................................................223

Varilla indicadora de nivel de aceite del

motor - 1.6L EcoBoost®.........................243

Varilla indicadora de nivel de aceite del

motor - 2.5L/2.0L EcoBoost®.............243

Ventanas eléctricas.......................................83

Apertura de un solo toque................................83

Bloqueo de ventanas..........................................83

Cierre de un solo toque......................................83

Demora de accesorios.......................................84

Rebote......................................................................83

Ventanas y espejos retrovisores

calentados.....................................................131

Espejos térmicos exteriores.............................131

Ventana trasera calentada..............................131

Ventanas y espejos retrovisores...............83

Ventilación

Véase: Control de clima...................................125

Verificación del Fluído de Frenos..........248

Verificación del Fluído de la Transmisión

Automática.................................................248

VIN

Véase: Número de identificación del

vehículo............................................................298

Viseras................................................................86

Espejo de la visera iluminado..........................86

Volante de Dirección.....................................72

465

Índice alfabético

466

Ford Escape 2013 El manual del propietario

Marca: Ford

Modelo: Escape 2013

Categoría: Carros

Tipo: El manual del propietario

Descargar PDF

informe

En otros idiomas

English: Ford Escape 2013 Owner's manual

Ford Escape 2013 El manual del propietario

Ford Escape 2013 El manual del propietario

En otros idiomas

Documentos relacionados

Otros documentos